Project Manual - Pavilion Construction
Project Manual - Pavilion Construction
Project Manual - Pavilion Construction
You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles
YUMPU automatically turns print PDFs into web optimized ePapers that Google loves.
G.A.H. P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Division Section Title Pages<br />
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP<br />
DIVISION 00 – CONTRACT DOCUMENTS<br />
000001 PROJECT DIRECTORY 1<br />
000010 PROJECT MANUAL TABLE OF CONTENTS 5<br />
000320 GEOTECHNICAL DATA 36<br />
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
011000 SUMMARY 3<br />
011111 BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS 5<br />
012500 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 4<br />
012600 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 3<br />
012900 PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5<br />
013100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 9<br />
013200 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 7<br />
013233 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 4<br />
013300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 11<br />
014000 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 8<br />
014200 REFERENCES 18<br />
015000 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 6<br />
016000 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 8<br />
017300 EXECUTION 11<br />
017419 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 6<br />
017700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 5<br />
017740 WARRANTIES 5<br />
017823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 8<br />
017839 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENSTS 6<br />
017900 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 5<br />
018113 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 8<br />
1
G.A.H. P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Division Section Title Pages<br />
DIVISION 02 – SITE CONSTRUCTION<br />
024119 SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 6<br />
028100 UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 13<br />
029300 LANDSCAPING 10<br />
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE<br />
033000 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 21<br />
035413 GYPSUM CEMENTITIOUS UNDERLAYMENT 5<br />
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY<br />
042000 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 11<br />
DIVISION 05 – METALS<br />
055000 METAL FABRICATIONS 15<br />
055100 METAL STAIRS 9<br />
055213 PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 10<br />
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES<br />
061000 ROUGH CARPENTRY 13<br />
061753 SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 7<br />
062000 INTERIOR FINISH CARPENTRY 5<br />
064023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 9<br />
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PREVENTION<br />
071416 COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 6<br />
072100 BUILDING INSULATION 6<br />
074213 METAL WALL PANELS 9<br />
075423 THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 14<br />
076100 SHEET METAL ROOFING 12<br />
076200 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 10<br />
078413 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 7<br />
079200 JOINT SEALANTS 10<br />
2
G.A.H. P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Division Section Title Pages<br />
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS<br />
081416 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 5<br />
083613 SECTIONAL DOORS 5<br />
084113 ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 11<br />
085113 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 9<br />
085313 VINYL WINDOWS 7<br />
086200 UNIT SKYLIGHTS 7<br />
087100 DOOR HARDWARE 8<br />
088000 GLAZING 14<br />
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES<br />
092400 PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 9<br />
092900 GYPSUM BOARD 9<br />
093000 TILING 12<br />
095113 ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 9<br />
096513 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 5<br />
096516 LINOLEUM FLOORING 7<br />
099123 INTERIOR PAINTING 1<br />
099133 EXTERIOR PAINTING 10<br />
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALITIES<br />
101100 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 9<br />
101400 SIGNAGE 9<br />
102600 WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 7<br />
102800 TOILET,BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 5<br />
104116 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 4<br />
104413 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 6<br />
3
G.A.H. P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Division Section Title Pages<br />
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT<br />
113100 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 5<br />
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS<br />
122113 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 5<br />
129300 SITE FURNISHINGS 8<br />
DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL<br />
15010 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 25<br />
15043 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 17<br />
15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 10<br />
15080 PIPING SPECIALTIES 3<br />
15100 VALVES 4<br />
15160 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION 6<br />
15180 PIPING INSULATION 10<br />
15190 DUCTWORK INSULATION 9<br />
15402 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS 2<br />
15403 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 2<br />
15404 SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS 2<br />
15450 PLUMBING FIXTURES 1<br />
15501 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 26<br />
15651 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 6<br />
15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION 10<br />
15900 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 4<br />
15902 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND INTERLOCKS 3<br />
DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL<br />
16010 GENERAL PROVISIONS 6<br />
16110 RACEWAYS 5<br />
06120 WIRES AND CABLES 5<br />
4
G.A.H. P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Division Section Title Pages<br />
06130 OUTLET BOXES 3<br />
16133 CABINETS 2<br />
16140 WIRING DEVICES 3<br />
16150 MOTORS 1<br />
16155 MOTOR STARTERS 2<br />
16160 PANELBOARDS 2<br />
16170 MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 1<br />
16181 FUSES 2<br />
16190 RELAYS AND CONTACTORS 1<br />
16450 GROUNDING 4<br />
16470 DISTRIBUTION CIRCUITS 2<br />
16485 ELEVATOR WIRING 1<br />
16501 LAMPS 1<br />
16502 BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES 2<br />
16511 FLUORESCENT LUMINARIES 2<br />
16612 GENERATOR SYSTEM 3<br />
166722 SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 16<br />
Site and Infrastructure Subgroup<br />
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS<br />
321816 PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 9<br />
END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS<br />
5
GAHP Trumbull – Plaza Feliz<br />
San Pablo Street SE<br />
Albuquerque, New Mexico<br />
<strong>Project</strong> Name: GAHP Trumbull – Plaza Feliz<br />
<strong>Project</strong> Role Company & Address Contact<br />
Person(s)<br />
Architect IDeA<br />
Thomas<br />
906 ½ Park Ave. Tomlinson<br />
SW<br />
Alb., NM 87102<br />
Civil<br />
Engineering<br />
Owners/Client<br />
Management<br />
Partner<br />
Surveyor<br />
Mechanical<br />
Engineering<br />
Applied<br />
Engineering<br />
1605 Blair Dr. NE<br />
Alb., NM 87112<br />
G.H.A.P.<br />
320 Gold Ave. SW<br />
Alb., NM 87102<br />
Monarch Property<br />
Management<br />
Surv-Tek Inc.<br />
5643 Paradise NW<br />
Alb. , NM 87112<br />
The Response<br />
Group<br />
11930 Menaul NE,<br />
Ste. 214<br />
Alb., NM 87112<br />
SECTION 00001 – PROJECT DIRECTORY<br />
Telephone Fax E-Mail<br />
505-243-3499 505-243-3583 thomas@integrateddesignarch.com<br />
Gilbert Aldaz 505- 237-1456 505-237-8164 galdaz47@yahoo.com<br />
Louis Kolker 505-244-1614 505-244-0137 abqgahp@msn.com<br />
Andrew Silva 505-260-4800 505-265-2995 asilva@monarch.com<br />
Russ Hugg 505-897-3366<br />
x102<br />
505-897-3377 hug@swcp.com<br />
Russ Ablin 505-323-7629 505-323-7679 russablin@trg-inc.net<br />
Electrical<br />
Engineering<br />
The Response<br />
Group<br />
11930 Menaul NE,<br />
Ste. 214<br />
Alb., NM 87112<br />
Richard Perea 505-323-7629 505-323-7629 richardperea@ trg-inc.net<br />
Landscape<br />
Architect<br />
LEED<br />
Provider<br />
LEED<br />
Architect<br />
Structural<br />
Engineer<br />
Sites Southwest<br />
121 Tijeras NE, Ste<br />
3100<br />
Alb., NM 87102<br />
Environmental<br />
Dynamics, Inc.<br />
142 Truman Street<br />
NE, Ste. A-1<br />
IDeA<br />
906 ½ Park Ave.<br />
SW<br />
Alb., NM 87102<br />
MacCornack<br />
Engineering<br />
2001 Carlisle NE,<br />
Ste. C<br />
Alb., NM 87110<br />
Jesse Scott 505-822-8200 505-798-0103<br />
505-350-6383<br />
Cell<br />
jscott@ sites-sw.com<br />
Stace McGee 505-242-2851 505-242-2852 stace@edi-arch.com<br />
Isaac Benton 505-243-3499 505-243-9583 isaac@integrateddesignarch.com<br />
Don<br />
MacCornack<br />
505-881-0570 505-881-4773 maccornackfam@earthlink.net
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
San Pablo Street SE<br />
Albuquerque, NM 87110<br />
SECTION 00320 – GEOTECHNICAL DATA<br />
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.1 INVESTIGATION<br />
A. A geotechnical investigation was conducted at the site the results of which are to be found in<br />
the report entitled, numbered, dated, and issued by the following:<br />
GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION<br />
G.A.H.P PLAZA FELIZ<br />
<strong>Project</strong> No.: 10-1-096<br />
July 19, 2010<br />
By<br />
Vinyard & Associates<br />
Albuquerque, New Mexico<br />
B. A copy of the report is appended hereto for information only.<br />
1.2 INTERPRETATION<br />
A. These data are for information only and not intended as representations or warranties of<br />
continuity of conditions at the site.<br />
B. The Owner and Architect dot not warrant these data and interpretations of the data for<br />
accuracy, true location, and extent.<br />
C. Bidders and the Contractor are required to interpret these data, and make additional<br />
geotechnical investigations as they determine necessary, for the proper execution of the work.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
`<br />
SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Work covered by the Contract Documents.<br />
2. Type of the Contract.<br />
3. Work phases.<br />
4. Work under other contracts.<br />
5. Products ordered in advance.<br />
6. Owner-furnished products.<br />
7. Use of premises.<br />
8. Owner's occupancy requirements.<br />
9. Work restrictions.<br />
10. Specification formats and conventions.<br />
1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS<br />
A. <strong>Project</strong> Identification: G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. <strong>Project</strong> Location: San Pablo St. SE, Albuquerque, NM<br />
B. Owner: Greater Albuquerque Housing Partnership, 320 Gold SW Suite 918, Albuquerque, NM<br />
87102<br />
1. Owner's Representative: Louis Kolker<br />
C. Architect: Integrated Design & Architecture, 906 ½ Park Ave SW, Albuquerque, NM 87102<br />
D. The Work consists of the following:<br />
1. The Work consists of a LEED for Homes Gold project consisting of a 66-dwelling unit<br />
redevelopment in Albuquerque’s International Zone/Trumbull community, including an<br />
on-site day care center and office/maintenance/community building.<br />
1.4 TYPE OF CONTRACT<br />
A. <strong>Project</strong> will be constructed under a single prime contract.<br />
SUMMARY 011000 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 011111 BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS<br />
Div. 1 General Requirements<br />
Note: This Section is supplementary to other sections or the Specifications. In the case of any<br />
discrepancy between this section and the Specifications, the Specifications shall govern.<br />
Contractor shall provide submittals for each of the following products for Architect review and<br />
approval in accordance with the General Requirements. Substitutions in accordance with the<br />
General Requirements shall be approved by the Architect prior to finalizing contract with Owner.<br />
The following are products and systems are supplemental to the Technical Specifications. All<br />
products and systems shall be installed strictly per the manufacturers’ recommendations.<br />
Div. 2 Sitework<br />
Earthwork: As indicated per Structural drawings. Follow recommendations of the Geotechnical<br />
report. Comply with LEED-H prerequisite SS-1.1. Implement erosion and sedimentation control<br />
(ESC) plan. Stockpile and protect topsoil, control runoff, protect storm sever inlets per LEED-H<br />
SS-1.1.<br />
Asphalt paving, subgrade and base course: per Geotechnical Report recommendations. Light<br />
colored aggregate asphalt mix. City standard specs for public rights-of-way.<br />
Concrete paving, walks, curb and gutter: City of Albuquerque standard specifications.<br />
Playground accessories: shredded recycled rubber chips for protective surfacing at protected<br />
“fall areas”. Galvanized steel schedule 40 pipe set in concrete, supporting Cooleroo “Shade<br />
Sail” or equal fabic shade awnings.<br />
Basketball court surface: 2” asphalt with light colored aggregate.<br />
Basketball goal: Tyrant Extreme Basketball System – www.basketball-goals.com<br />
1. Vertical Pole – Vertical post shall be constructed of 6 5/8” O.D. Schedule 40 galvanized<br />
tubing. Design shall allow for a 48” bury into the ground and a 72” setback from post to<br />
backboard.<br />
2. Backboard – Backboard shall be 36”x60” rectangular steel. Skin shall be 10 guage steel<br />
pan.<br />
3. Rim – Standard rim shall be fabricated from 3/16” backplates and sideplates fully<br />
welded. Rim shall be double 5/8” diameter, high strength steel welded together at a<br />
minimum of six places. Nets shall be attached by means of a continuous netlocking<br />
system.<br />
Basketball chain link fencing: 8’ height chain link mesh heavy-duty color-coated steel,<br />
otherwise all heavy duty galvanized steel for other components and trim.<br />
BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS SECTION 011111 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Automatic gate operators: hinged (swinging) and sliding type per Drawings.<br />
Refuse enclosure gates: painted steel with 18 gage steel “B” deck infill panels, per drawings. 6”<br />
diameter heavy-duty solid steel caster wheels to support leading rail and stile. Coordinate with<br />
Div.5 steel fabrications.<br />
Green screen landscape trellis: Green Screen system.<br />
Div. 3 Concrete<br />
Insulating Concrete Forms (ICF): Reward Wall 11” thickness per drawings.<br />
Precast concrete wall cap at residential porches: light gray cement color, configuration per<br />
drawings.<br />
Div. 5 Metals<br />
Steel prefinished combination structural deck and roof: Epic deck as indicated on drawings.<br />
Steel guardrails and miscellaneous perforated metal fabrications: McNichols Co.,<br />
www.mcnichols.com, 3/32” diameter round hole pattern with 3/16” staggered row centers, 23%<br />
open area, pre-galvanized G90 steel infill panels. Edged with U-shaped channels made from<br />
galvanized steel not less than 0.043 inch thickness. Orient pattern of perforated metal parallel to<br />
top rail. Galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners and other components. Support on a framework<br />
of 2” square galvanized steel rails and posts secured to solid wood framing per drawings.<br />
Galvanized Schedule 40 steel pipe rails above perforated assembly, as indicated on drawings.<br />
Bike rack: radius bent 2” galvanized schedule 40 pipe.<br />
Bollards: galvanized steel pipe, diameter shown with concrete fill.<br />
Div. 6 Wood and Plastics<br />
Residential cabinets: Leedo “Concord Shaker” maple. www.leedo.com/cabinets<br />
Interior running trim: painted Medex water-resistant MDF as shown. Prime paint all four<br />
surfaces of trim before installation<br />
Ceiling tounge-and-groove: 1x6 select spruce or fir<br />
Floor deck at top landing of residential stairways and at residential porches only: marine grade<br />
11/16” CDX plywood<br />
Div. 7 Thermal and Moisture Protection<br />
BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS SECTION 011111 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Metal roof panels (sheet metal roofing): galvalume finish, 5-V pattern, 26 gage factory formed<br />
lap-seam exposed-fastener type panels. American Building Components (ABC) ,Lubbock TX,<br />
800-481-3035. Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal <strong>Manual</strong>" unless more<br />
stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings. Fasteners shall be stainless steel with<br />
EPDM metal-backed washers. Underlayment below metal roofing: Rainproof 60 Plus and Ice &<br />
Water Guard as manufactured by ProtectoWrap Company, 1955 South Cherokee Street, Denver,<br />
Colorado 80223, 303-77-3001. 2-year roofer’s warranty for installation and weathertightness of<br />
the entire system. 5 year roof panel manufacturer’s finish warranty.<br />
Threshold sealer, sill plate sealer, window sealer (4 sides): Protecto wrap. Prime all substrate<br />
surfaces as required by manufacuturer.<br />
Cement fiberboard soffits and facia: 5/16” thick smooth Hardipanel<br />
Sealants:<br />
1. At metal roof and associated accessories, and at concealed locations: clear silicone, low-<br />
VOC.<br />
2. Where painting is required and adjoining stucco: Match color of paint with colored<br />
silicone or polyurethane sealant or use paintable sealant, low-VOC, typical.<br />
3. Seal all exterior joints and all other junctions as necessary to obtain complete air and<br />
watertight construction. Comply with requirements of Energy Star and City of<br />
Albuquerque thermal bypass inspection. Seal around windows and doors, seal all<br />
plumbing and electrical conduit openings, caulk around windows and under headers and<br />
sills, seal openings into attics or crawlspaces with taped polyethylene covered with<br />
insulation, and other measures.<br />
4. Seal all plumbing fixtures with white bath silicone, low-VOC.<br />
Div. 8 Openings<br />
Code and LEED Notes for all openings:<br />
Opaque Assemblies: All opaque doors shall have a U-Factor of 0.50.<br />
All opaque building assemblies shall comply with Albuquerque Energy Code Table 502.2(1) &<br />
Table 502.2(2)<br />
Fenestration (door and window glass) Assemblies:<br />
All Day Care and Building Q aluminum storefront shall have a max. U-Factor of 0.42.<br />
All Day Care and Building Q entrance doors shall have a max. U-Factor of 0.75.<br />
All other Day Care/Bldg. Q metal openings shall have a max. U-Factor of 0.42.<br />
All Day Care/Bldg. Q window and door glass types shall have a max SHGC of 0.38.<br />
Day Care skylights shall have max. U of 0.69, maximum SHGC of 0.39, min. VLT 0.59.<br />
All vinyl windows shall have max. U of 0.30.<br />
All residential window and door glass assembly types shall have a SHGC of 0.26 or less.<br />
All doors, windows and storefront shall comply with Albuquerque Energy Code Table 502.3<br />
BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS SECTION 011111 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Doors:<br />
Fiberglass pre-hung residential entry doors: Therma-tru. polyurethane foam core, with metal or<br />
paint-grade wood frame, integral weatherstripping and low rise accessible threshold. Eye<br />
viewers on all doors; (2) viewers at fully accessible unit entry doors only.<br />
Residential interior doors: Colonist or equal, primed hardboard solid (bedroom and bath) and<br />
hollow core (closet) panel doors in pre-hung paint-grade frame. Bipass and bifold door track<br />
system for closets: Hafele “Hawa Dorado” in front hardware with vertical adjustment and<br />
bottom guides.<br />
Solid wood interior panel doors for Building Q: stain grade pine or fir, panel configuration per<br />
drawings. Simpson Door Company Interior 66. Coordinate with interior aluminum frame system<br />
and hardware.<br />
French-type interior glazed wood doors for Building Q: stain grade fir with true divided lights<br />
and 3/16” tempered clear glass. Simpson Door Company French 1308. Coordinate with interior<br />
aluminum frame system and hardware.<br />
Hollow metal doors and frames: 16 gage HM frame for openings up to 4’ wide, 14 gage for<br />
wider openings. 16 gage face on insulated exterior doors. Shop prime ready for field painting.<br />
Hardware:<br />
Residential locksets and latches: Schlage S-Series 6-pin, “Jupiter 626” design, master key<br />
system.<br />
Day Care and Building Q locksets: Schlage AL-Series, “Jupiter 626” design, master key system.<br />
Submit a complete hardware schedule for architect review and approval, including approved<br />
products based on Section 087100 of the Technical Specifications and this document.<br />
Other:<br />
Power window operators: Century 2000 by Truth Hardware 1-800-866-7884<br />
Roof access hatch and ladder: Bilco hatch as indicated. Shop-fabricated steel ladders, see<br />
details, or OSHA-compliant premanufactured aluminum ladder (contractor option). Comply<br />
with Div. 5 specifications for fabricated steel.<br />
Div. 9 Finishes<br />
Rubber stair treads and risers (for 3-bedroom residences): Musson, with recessed diamond<br />
pattern tread, color selected by Architect from manufacturer’s standard color selections, riser<br />
color to contrast with tread color. At landing only: rubber resilient tile to match tread color. All<br />
low-VOC adhesives.<br />
BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS SECTION 011111 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Div. 10 Specialties<br />
Dryer vent box: recessed aluminum or sheet metal to receive flexible dryer vent hose while<br />
allowing placement of dryer tight to back wall, place as required for specified appliances.<br />
Dryerbox.com Model 425, for 2x6 wall.<br />
Mail Boxes: front-loading configuration as shown on drawings. Recessed in stucco wall;<br />
coordinate installation with wall construction. US Postal Service approved cluster box units<br />
including letter drop and package depositories; verify with Postmaster prior to submittal to<br />
Architect. Conduct preinstallation conference at project site. American Postal Mfrg. Co.,<br />
Bommer Industries or equal. 5 year warranty.<br />
Bird control strips for open beams at Building Q: Bird X clear plastic base with metal spikes.<br />
Adhere or attach to substrate per manufacturer’s recommendations.<br />
Gas burning fireplace: Spark Modern Fires, “Fire Ribbon”model 87, no vertical venting<br />
required, for natural gas fuel, with wall switch, Simpson Duravent or equal wall vent, 110volt<br />
electric fan. www.sparkfires.com.<br />
Solar control device for skylights at residential exterior stairways: “Sunbender” reflector/shade<br />
by Zomeworks Corp., Albuquerque. Size SB-2x4. www.zomework.com.<br />
Washing machine protective pan: acrylic fiberglass type with closed pan, except plumbed waste<br />
at 2 nd floor apartments. Coordinate with plumbing.<br />
Accessible sink and lavatory pipe protection: Trubro “Lavshield” one-piece shell.<br />
Div. 11 Equipment<br />
Kitchen Range hood: Broan or equal, Energy Star, white, 30 inch wide, ducted to exterior<br />
dampered opening (sidedraft or updraft adaptable). Coordinate with electrical and HVAC.<br />
END OF SECTION 011111<br />
BASIS OF DESIGN PRODUCTS AND SYSTEMS SECTION 011111 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable<br />
product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.<br />
2. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for<br />
substitutions.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from<br />
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.<br />
1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to<br />
changed <strong>Project</strong> conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or<br />
unavailability of required warranty terms.<br />
2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not<br />
required in order to meet other <strong>Project</strong> requirements but may offer advantage to<br />
Contractor or Owner.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Substitution Requests: Submit three hard copies or one electronic copy of each request for<br />
consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include<br />
Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.<br />
1. Substitution Request Form: Use Form 012501 & 012502.<br />
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,<br />
as applicable:<br />
a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be<br />
provided, if applicable.<br />
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing<br />
Contract modifications.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" for administrative procedures for handling<br />
requests for substitutions made after Contract award.<br />
1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK<br />
A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not<br />
involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710,<br />
"Architect's Supplemental Instructions."<br />
1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS<br />
A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed<br />
changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If<br />
necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.<br />
1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them<br />
instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.<br />
2. Within 5 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost<br />
adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.<br />
a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with<br />
total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data<br />
to substantiate quantities.<br />
b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade<br />
discounts.<br />
c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.<br />
d. Include an updated Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule that indicates the effect of<br />
the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and<br />
finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting<br />
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
an extension of the Contract Time. Indicate the effect the change will have on the<br />
Contract Time.<br />
B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the<br />
Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect.<br />
1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the<br />
Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the<br />
proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.<br />
2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total<br />
amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to<br />
substantiate quantities.<br />
3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade<br />
discounts.<br />
4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.<br />
5. Include an updated Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule that indicates the effect of the<br />
change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times,<br />
and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the<br />
Contract Time.<br />
6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Product Requirements" if the<br />
proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system<br />
specified.<br />
7. Number proposals sequentially.<br />
1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES<br />
A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures<br />
of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.<br />
1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE<br />
A. Work Change Directive: Architect may issue a Work Change Directive on<br />
AIA Document G714. Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in<br />
the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.<br />
1. Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also<br />
designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the<br />
Contract Time.<br />
B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the<br />
Work Change Directive.<br />
1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to<br />
substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.<br />
2. Coordinate with the on site manager the goings and comings of any trade individual who<br />
is working on a T & M basis. Manager to log individuals in and out during the work day<br />
for any T & M work.<br />
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 012600<br />
CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and<br />
process Applications for Payment.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures<br />
for handling changes to the Contract.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Progress Documentation" for administrative<br />
requirements governing preparation and submittal of Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule<br />
and Submittals Schedule.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract<br />
Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's<br />
Applications for Payment.<br />
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES<br />
A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of<br />
Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.<br />
1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms<br />
and schedules, including the following:<br />
a. Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets.<br />
b. Submittals Schedule.<br />
c. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.<br />
2. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than<br />
seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.<br />
3. Subschedules: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased<br />
payments, provide subschedules showing values correlated with each phase of payment.<br />
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Format and Content: Use the <strong>Project</strong> <strong>Manual</strong> table of contents as a guide to establish line items<br />
for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.<br />
1. Identification: Include the following <strong>Project</strong> identification on the Schedule of Values:<br />
a. <strong>Project</strong> name and location.<br />
b. Name of Architect.<br />
c. Architect's project number.<br />
d. Contractor's name and address.<br />
e. Date of submittal.<br />
2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets.<br />
3. Arrange the Schedule of Values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the<br />
following for each item listed:<br />
a. Related Specification Section or Division.<br />
b. Description of the Work.<br />
c. Name of subcontractor.<br />
d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator.<br />
e. Name of supplier.<br />
f. Change Orders.<br />
g. Dollar value.<br />
1) Percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth percent, adjusted<br />
to total 100 percent.<br />
4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued<br />
evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports, based on the <strong>Project</strong><br />
<strong>Manual</strong> table of contents. Provide separate line items for principal subcontract<br />
amounts. Include separate line items under plumbing, mechanical, electrical, and<br />
landscaping subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities,<br />
<strong>Project</strong> Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of<br />
the Contract Sum.<br />
5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.<br />
6. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next<br />
Applications for Payment when Change Orders or <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directives result<br />
in a change in the Contract Sum.<br />
1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT<br />
A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as<br />
certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.<br />
1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial<br />
Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.<br />
B. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the 25th of<br />
the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the<br />
last day of the month.<br />
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 Continuation<br />
Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.<br />
D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person<br />
authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete<br />
applications without action.<br />
1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong><br />
Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.<br />
2. Include amounts of Change Orders and <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directives issued before last<br />
day of construction period covered by application.<br />
E. Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to<br />
Architect by a method ensuring receipt. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar<br />
attachments if required.<br />
1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate<br />
information about application.<br />
F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's<br />
lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the<br />
Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.<br />
1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after<br />
deduction for retainage, on each item.<br />
2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers.<br />
3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit<br />
waivers.<br />
4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to<br />
Owner.<br />
G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or<br />
coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:<br />
1. List of subcontractors.<br />
2. Schedule of Values.<br />
3. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule (preliminary if not final).<br />
4. Products list.<br />
5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final).<br />
6. List of Contractor's staff assignments.<br />
7. List of Contractor's principal consultants.<br />
8. Copies of building permits.<br />
9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for<br />
performance of the Work.<br />
10. Initial progress report.<br />
11. Report of preconstruction conference.<br />
12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.<br />
13. Performance and payment bonds.<br />
14. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.<br />
15. Initial settlement survey and damage report if required.<br />
16. List of principal suppliers and fabricators.<br />
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial<br />
Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of<br />
the Work claimed as substantially complete. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial<br />
Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the<br />
Work.<br />
1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a<br />
statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.<br />
2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued<br />
previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.<br />
3. Administrative actions and submittals that shall precede or coincide with this application<br />
include the following:<br />
a. Occupancy permits.<br />
b. Warranties and maintenance agreements.<br />
c. Test/adjust/balance records.<br />
d. Maintenance instructions.<br />
e. Meter readings.<br />
f. Changeover information related to Owner's occupancy.<br />
g. Final cleaning.<br />
h. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety.<br />
I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting<br />
documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the<br />
following:<br />
1. Evidence of completion of <strong>Project</strong> closeout requirements.<br />
2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof<br />
that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid.<br />
3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.<br />
4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."<br />
5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."<br />
6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."<br />
7. Evidence that claims have been settled.<br />
8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of<br />
date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed<br />
responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.<br />
9. Final, liquidated damages settlement statement.<br />
10. Completion of <strong>Project</strong> closeout requirements.<br />
11. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion.<br />
13. Transmittal of <strong>Project</strong> construction records to the Owner.<br />
14. Removal of temporary facilities and services.<br />
15. Change of door locks to Owner's access.<br />
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 012900<br />
PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on<br />
<strong>Project</strong> including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Coordination Drawings.<br />
2. Administrative and supervisory personnel.<br />
3. <strong>Project</strong> meetings.<br />
4. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and<br />
field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract<br />
Documents.<br />
1.4 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the<br />
Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate<br />
construction operations, included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper<br />
installation, connection, and operation.<br />
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations with those of other entities to ensure efficient<br />
and orderly installation of each part of the Work.<br />
1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where<br />
installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before<br />
or after its own installation.<br />
2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum accessibility for<br />
required maintenance, service, and repair.<br />
3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to<br />
ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and<br />
repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.<br />
C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures<br />
required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees<br />
at meetings.<br />
1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their<br />
Work is required.<br />
D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative<br />
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts<br />
and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not<br />
limited to, the following:<br />
1. Preparation of Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.<br />
2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.<br />
3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls.<br />
4. Delivery and processing of submittals.<br />
5. Progress meetings.<br />
6. Preinstallation conferences.<br />
7. <strong>Project</strong> closeout activities.<br />
8. Startup and adjustment of systems.<br />
9. <strong>Project</strong> closeout activities.<br />
E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with<br />
consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings if limited space availability<br />
necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components or if<br />
coordination is required for installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities.<br />
1. Content: <strong>Project</strong>-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base<br />
Coordination Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed<br />
data. Include the following information, as applicable:<br />
a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural,<br />
structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.<br />
b. Indicate required installation sequences.<br />
c. Indicate dimensions shown on the Contract Drawings and make specific note of<br />
dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum<br />
clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect for resolution of<br />
such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be<br />
considered changes to the Contract.<br />
2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 inches.<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Number of Copies: Submit four opaque hard copies or one electronic copy of each<br />
submittal.<br />
4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those<br />
Sections.<br />
B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of being contracted, submit a list of key personnel<br />
assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at <strong>Project</strong> site. Identify<br />
individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including<br />
home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of<br />
individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
1. Post copies of list in <strong>Project</strong> meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each<br />
temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.<br />
1.6 ADMINISTRATIVE AND SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL<br />
A. General: In addition to <strong>Project</strong> superintendent, provide other administrative and supervisory<br />
personnel as required for proper performance of the Work.<br />
1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS<br />
A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at <strong>Project</strong> site, unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is<br />
required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled<br />
meeting dates and times.<br />
2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.<br />
3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the<br />
meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within 5 days<br />
of the meeting. Distribution may be made electronically.<br />
B. Post bid Conference: Schedule a Post Bid conference before being contracted, at a time<br />
convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 2 days after Bid Opening. Conduct the<br />
meeting to review personnel assignments and proposed materials substitutions.<br />
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;<br />
Contractor and its superintendent, and other concerned parties shall attend the<br />
conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with <strong>Project</strong> and<br />
authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.<br />
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the<br />
following:<br />
a. Designation of key personnel and their duties<br />
b. Proposed Substitutions<br />
c. Contract Discussion<br />
3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes.<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting<br />
construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after<br />
execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at <strong>Project</strong> site or another convenient location.<br />
Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities schedule, and procedures.<br />
1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants;<br />
Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned<br />
parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar<br />
with <strong>Project</strong> and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.<br />
2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the<br />
following:<br />
a. Tentative construction schedule.<br />
b. Phasing.<br />
c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.<br />
d. Designation of key personnel and their duties.<br />
e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.<br />
f. Procedures for RFIs.<br />
g. Procedures for testing and inspecting.<br />
h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.<br />
i. Distribution of the Contract Documents.<br />
j. Submittal procedures.<br />
k. LEED / Green Communities / New Mexico Energy Savers Program requirements.<br />
l. Preparation of Record Documents.<br />
m. Use of the premises and existing building.<br />
n. Work restrictions.<br />
o. Owner's occupancy requirements.<br />
p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.<br />
q. <strong>Construction</strong> waste management and recycling.<br />
r. Parking availability.<br />
s. Office, work, and storage areas.<br />
t. Equipment deliveries and priorities.<br />
u. First aid.<br />
v. Security.<br />
w. Progress cleaning.<br />
x. Working hours.<br />
3. Minutes: Architect will record and distribute meeting minutes.<br />
D. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at <strong>Project</strong> site before each<br />
construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.<br />
1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or<br />
affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and<br />
installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect<br />
of scheduled meeting dates and include in project schedule.<br />
2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the<br />
particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
a. The Contract Documents.<br />
b. Options.<br />
c. Related RFIs.<br />
d. Related Change Orders.<br />
e. Purchases.<br />
f. Deliveries.<br />
g. Submittals.<br />
h. Review of mockups and/or aesthetic issues.<br />
i. Possible conflicts.<br />
j. Compatibility with other activities and products.<br />
k. Time schedules.<br />
l. Weather limitations.<br />
m. Manufacturer's written recommendations.<br />
n. Warranty requirements.<br />
o. Compatibility of materials.<br />
p. Acceptability of substrates.<br />
q. Temporary facilities and controls.<br />
r. Space and access limitations.<br />
s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
t. Testing and inspecting requirements.<br />
u. Installation procedures.<br />
v. Coordination with other work.<br />
w. Required performance results.<br />
x. Protection of adjacent work.<br />
y. Protection of construction and personnel.<br />
3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including<br />
required corrective measures and actions.<br />
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who<br />
should have been present.<br />
5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded.<br />
Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the<br />
Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.<br />
6. Required Conferences<br />
a. Foundation<br />
b. Framing<br />
c. Drywall screw<br />
d. Drywall texture<br />
e. Stucco<br />
f. Roofing<br />
E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at regular weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of<br />
meetings with preparation of payment requests.<br />
1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each subcontractor,<br />
supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning,<br />
coordination, or performance of future activities. All participants at the conference shall<br />
be familiar with <strong>Project</strong> and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.<br />
2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review<br />
other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as<br />
appropriate to status of <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
a. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting.<br />
Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule,<br />
in relation to Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule. Determine how construction<br />
behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to<br />
do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and<br />
subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.<br />
1) Review schedule for next period.<br />
b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:<br />
1) Interface requirements.<br />
2) Sequence of operations.<br />
3) Status of submittals.<br />
4) Deliveries.<br />
5) Off-site fabrication.<br />
6) Access.<br />
7) Site utilization.<br />
8) Temporary facilities and controls.<br />
9) Work hours.<br />
10) Hazards and risks.<br />
11) Progress cleaning.<br />
12) Quality and work standards.<br />
13) Status of correction of deficient items.<br />
14) Field observations.<br />
15) RFIs.<br />
16) Status of proposal requests.<br />
17) Pending changes.<br />
18) Status of Change Orders.<br />
19) Pending claims and disputes.<br />
20) Documentation of information for payment requests.<br />
3. Minutes: Contractor will record and distribute to Architect the meeting minutes.<br />
4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who<br />
should have been present.<br />
5. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule after each progress<br />
meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized.<br />
1.8 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)<br />
A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents,<br />
and if not possible to request interpretation at <strong>Project</strong> meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the<br />
form specified.<br />
1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor<br />
will be returned with no response.<br />
2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's<br />
work or work of subcontractors.<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and<br />
the following:<br />
1. <strong>Project</strong> name.<br />
2. Date.<br />
3. Name of Contractor.<br />
4. Name of Architect.<br />
5. RFI number, numbered sequentially.<br />
6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.<br />
7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.<br />
8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.<br />
9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time<br />
or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.<br />
10. Contractor's signature.<br />
11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop<br />
Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.<br />
C. Hard-Copy RFIs: .<br />
a. Supplementary drawings prepared by Contractor shall include dimensions,<br />
thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials,<br />
assemblies, and attachments.<br />
1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.<br />
D. Software-Generated RFIs: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as<br />
indicated above.<br />
1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.<br />
E. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it.<br />
Allow seven (7) working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00<br />
p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.<br />
1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:<br />
a. Requests for approval of submittals.<br />
b. Requests for approval of substitutions.<br />
c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract<br />
Documents.<br />
d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.<br />
e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.<br />
f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.<br />
2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case<br />
Architect's time for response will start again.<br />
3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the<br />
Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to<br />
Division 01 Section "Contract Modification Procedures."<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or<br />
the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI<br />
response.<br />
F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response<br />
to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor<br />
disagrees with response.<br />
G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number.<br />
Submit log weekly. Include the following:<br />
1. <strong>Project</strong> name.<br />
2. Name and address of Contractor.<br />
3. Name and address of Architect.<br />
4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted.<br />
5. RFI description.<br />
6. Date the RFI was submitted.<br />
7. Date Architect's response was received.<br />
8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive, and<br />
Proposal Request, as appropriate.<br />
9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as<br />
appropriate.<br />
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Inspection of Conditions: Require Installers of major components to inspect substrate and<br />
conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory<br />
conditions have been corrected.<br />
B. Coordinate temporary enclosures with inspections and tests to minimize the need to uncover<br />
completed construction.<br />
C. Clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials, during handling and<br />
installation. Apply protective covering to assure protection from damage.<br />
D. Clean and maintain completed construction as necessary through the construction period.<br />
Adjust and lubricate operable components to assure operability without damaging effects.<br />
E. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction to assure that no part is subject to harmful,<br />
dangerous, or damaging exposure. Such exposures include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following:<br />
1. Excessive static or dynamic loading.<br />
2. Excessive internal or external pressures.<br />
3. Excessively high or low temperatures.<br />
4. Water or ice, particularly I excavations.<br />
5. Solvents and chemicals.<br />
6. Abrasion.<br />
7. Soiling, staining, and corrosion.<br />
8. Combustion.<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 013100<br />
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of<br />
construction during performance of the Work, including the following:<br />
1. Startup construction schedule.<br />
2. Contractor's construction schedule.<br />
3. <strong>Construction</strong> schedule updating reports.<br />
4. Daily construction reports.<br />
5. Material location reports.<br />
6. Site condition reports.<br />
7. Special reports.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting schedules and reports.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting a schedule of tests and<br />
inspections.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring,<br />
and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume<br />
time and resources.<br />
1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned<br />
early start and finish times.<br />
2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.<br />
3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.<br />
B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as<br />
scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless<br />
otherwise approved by Architect.<br />
C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction<br />
project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations<br />
determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network<br />
schedule that establishes the minimum overall <strong>Project</strong> duration and contains no float.<br />
E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.<br />
F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.<br />
1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a<br />
jointly owned, expiring <strong>Project</strong> resource available to both parties as needed to meet<br />
schedule milestones and Contract completion date.<br />
2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the<br />
early start of the successor activity.<br />
3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without<br />
adversely affecting the planned <strong>Project</strong> completion date.<br />
G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of<br />
an activity as scheduled.<br />
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:<br />
1. PDF electronic file.<br />
2. Two paper copies.<br />
B. Startup construction schedule.<br />
1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of<br />
schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.<br />
C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction<br />
period. Show logic ties for activities.<br />
D. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule<br />
for entire construction period.<br />
1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to<br />
comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated)<br />
and date on label.<br />
E. <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.<br />
F. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.<br />
G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.<br />
H. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.<br />
I. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site to comply with requirements in<br />
Division 01 Section "<strong>Project</strong> Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures<br />
related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule,<br />
including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports.<br />
2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.<br />
3. Discuss constraints, including phasing work stages and partial Owner occupancy.<br />
4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.<br />
5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.<br />
6. Review submittal requirements and procedures.<br />
7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.<br />
8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting<br />
agencies.<br />
9. Review time required for <strong>Project</strong> closeout and Owner startup procedures including<br />
LEED-H activities.<br />
10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.<br />
11. Review procedures for updating schedule.<br />
1.6 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of<br />
construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.<br />
B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values,[ list of<br />
subcontracts,] submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required<br />
schedules and reports.<br />
1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities<br />
involved.<br />
2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule<br />
them in proper sequence.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL<br />
A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of<br />
Substantial Completion.<br />
1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an<br />
early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.<br />
B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main<br />
element of the Work. Comply with the following:<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless<br />
specifically allowed by Architect.<br />
2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long<br />
lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities<br />
in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals,<br />
approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.<br />
a. HVAC of equipment.<br />
3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01<br />
Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in<br />
Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.<br />
4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.<br />
5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for<br />
Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures<br />
necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.<br />
6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of<br />
punch list items and final completion.<br />
C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and<br />
as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.<br />
1. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include<br />
delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section "Summary." Delivery dates indicated<br />
stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.<br />
2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:<br />
a. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion.<br />
b. Use of premises restrictions.<br />
c. Seasonal variations.<br />
d. Environmental control.<br />
3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the<br />
Work, including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Subcontract awards.<br />
b. Submittals.<br />
c. Purchases.<br />
d. Mockups.<br />
e. Fabrication.<br />
f. Sample testing.<br />
g. Deliveries.<br />
h. Installation.<br />
i. Tests and inspections.<br />
j. Adjusting.<br />
k. Curing.<br />
l. Building flush-out.<br />
m. Startup and placement into final use and operation.<br />
4. <strong>Construction</strong> Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of<br />
the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be<br />
sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following:<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
a. Structural completion.<br />
b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.<br />
c. Permanent space enclosure.<br />
d. Completion of mechanical installation.<br />
e. Completion of electrical installation.<br />
f. Substantial Completion.<br />
D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but<br />
not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.<br />
E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs.<br />
On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and<br />
actual dates used for preparation of payment requests.<br />
1. See Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment<br />
procedures.<br />
F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or<br />
commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:<br />
1. Unresolved issues.<br />
2. Unanswered Requests for Information.<br />
3. Rejected or unreturned submittals.<br />
4. Notations on returned submittals.<br />
5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.<br />
G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days<br />
behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by<br />
which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working<br />
hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by<br />
which recovery will be accomplished.<br />
H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has<br />
been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.<br />
2.2 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE<br />
A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within<br />
seven days of date established for commencement of the work.<br />
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of<br />
each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90<br />
days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash<br />
requirement prediction based on indicated activities.<br />
2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)<br />
A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type,<br />
Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for commencement of the<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
work. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received<br />
since the start of <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of<br />
each week with a continuous vertical line.<br />
1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an<br />
estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.<br />
2.4 REPORTS<br />
A. Daily <strong>Construction</strong> Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following<br />
information concerning events at <strong>Project</strong> site:<br />
1. List of subcontractors at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
2. List of separate contractors at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
3. Approximate count of personnel at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
4. Equipment at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
5. Material deliveries.<br />
6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or<br />
snow.<br />
7. Accidents.<br />
8. Meetings and significant decisions.<br />
9. Unusual events (see special reports).<br />
10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.<br />
11. Meter readings and similar recordings.<br />
12. Emergency procedures.<br />
13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
14. Change Orders received and implemented.<br />
15. <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directives received and implemented.<br />
16. Services connected and disconnected.<br />
17. Equipment or system tests and startups.<br />
18. Partial completions and occupancies.<br />
19. Substantial Completions authorized.<br />
B. Material Location Reports: At weekly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of<br />
materials delivered to and stored at <strong>Project</strong> site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials<br />
previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on<br />
and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from <strong>Project</strong><br />
site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials:<br />
1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.<br />
2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.<br />
3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.<br />
C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and<br />
the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for<br />
Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with<br />
recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.5 SPECIAL REPORTS<br />
A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence.<br />
Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence.<br />
B. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report.<br />
List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of<br />
results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these<br />
events are known or predictable.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE<br />
A. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect<br />
actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly<br />
scheduled progress meeting.<br />
1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have<br />
been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each<br />
such meeting.<br />
2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not<br />
limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.<br />
3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.<br />
B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, <strong>Construction</strong> Manager,<br />
Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by<br />
Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.<br />
1. Post copies in <strong>Project</strong> meeting rooms and temporary field offices.<br />
2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the<br />
same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned<br />
portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.<br />
END OF SECTION 013200<br />
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop<br />
Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and<br />
the Schedule of Values.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "<strong>Project</strong> Management and Coordination" for submitting and<br />
distributing meeting and conference minutes and for submitting Coordination Drawings.<br />
3. Division 01 Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules<br />
and reports, including Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule and the Submittals Schedule.<br />
4. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reportsand<br />
for mockup requirements.<br />
5. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.<br />
6. Division 01 Section "<strong>Project</strong> Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,<br />
Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.<br />
7. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and<br />
maintenance manuals.<br />
8. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of<br />
demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.<br />
9. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for submittals in those<br />
Sections.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.<br />
B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive<br />
action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES<br />
A. General: Electronic copies of CAD Drawings of the Contract Drawings will not be provided by<br />
Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of<br />
construction activities, fabrication, other submittals, and activities that require sequential<br />
operations.<br />
1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other<br />
submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.<br />
2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so<br />
processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for<br />
coordination.<br />
a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring<br />
coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.<br />
C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Progress<br />
Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of<br />
related construction activities.<br />
D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as<br />
follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of<br />
the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in<br />
advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.<br />
1. Initial Review: Allow 7 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time<br />
if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor<br />
when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.<br />
2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner<br />
as initial submittal.<br />
3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 4 days for review of each resubmittal.<br />
4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants,<br />
Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 10 days for initial review of each submittal.<br />
5. Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals<br />
may be transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15<br />
days for review of each submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being<br />
returned to Contractor.<br />
E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.<br />
1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block.<br />
2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record<br />
Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.<br />
3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:<br />
a. <strong>Project</strong> name.<br />
b. Date.<br />
c. Name and address of Architect.<br />
d. Name and address of Contractor.<br />
e. Name and address of subcontractor.<br />
f. Name and address of supplier.<br />
g. Name of manufacturer.<br />
h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a<br />
decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals<br />
shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g.,<br />
061000.01.A).<br />
i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.<br />
j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.<br />
k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.<br />
l. Other necessary identification.<br />
F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract<br />
Documents on submittals.<br />
G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless<br />
Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal<br />
may serve as final submittal.<br />
1. Submit one copy of submittal to concurrent reviewer in addition to specified number of<br />
copies to Architect.<br />
2. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action<br />
taken and will be returned.<br />
H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and<br />
handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return submittals,<br />
without review, received from sources other than Contractor.<br />
1. Transmittal Form: Provide locations on form for the following information:<br />
a. <strong>Project</strong> name.<br />
b. Date.<br />
c. Destination (To:).<br />
d. Source (From:).<br />
e. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.<br />
f. Category and type of submittal.<br />
g. Submittal purpose and description.<br />
h. Specification Section number and title.<br />
i. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.<br />
j. Transmittal number.<br />
k. Submittal and transmittal distribution record.<br />
l. Remarks.<br />
m. Signature of transmitter.<br />
2. On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant<br />
information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on<br />
previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents,<br />
including minor variations and limitations. Include same label information as related<br />
submittal.<br />
I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.<br />
1. Note date and content of previous submittal.<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of<br />
revision.<br />
3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "Resubmittal is not required, corrections if any<br />
are noted."<br />
4. The contractor will be given an allowance of three (3) resubmittals in total for the entire<br />
project. This includes all required submittals. Resubmittals greater than the allowance<br />
will be billed to the contractor on a Time and Materials basis. Payment for resubmittal<br />
review to the Architect for A/E additional review time must be received by the Architect<br />
prior to approval of Pay Request<br />
J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers,<br />
fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of<br />
construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.<br />
K. Use for <strong>Construction</strong>: Use only final submittals with mark indicating " Resubmittal is not<br />
required, corrections if any are noted" taken by Architect.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.<br />
1. Submit electronic submittals directly to extranet specifically established for <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and<br />
type of product or equipment.<br />
1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are<br />
not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.<br />
2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.<br />
3. Include the following information, as applicable:<br />
a. Manufacturer's written recommendations.<br />
b. Manufacturer's product specifications.<br />
c. Manufacturer's installation instructions.<br />
d. Standard color charts.<br />
e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts.<br />
f. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.<br />
g. Printed performance curves.<br />
h. Operational range diagrams.<br />
i. Mill reports.<br />
j. Standard product operation and maintenance manuals.<br />
k. Compliance with specified referenced standards.<br />
l. Testing by recognized testing agency.<br />
m. Application of testing agency labels and seals.<br />
n. Notation of coordination requirements.<br />
o. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement.<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.<br />
5. Number of Copies: Submit four copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a <strong>Project</strong><br />
Record Document.<br />
C. Shop Drawings: Prepare <strong>Project</strong>-specific information, newly prepared drawn accurately to<br />
scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard<br />
printed data.<br />
1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the<br />
following information, as applicable:<br />
a. Dimensions.<br />
b. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number.<br />
c. Fabrication and installation drawings.<br />
d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams.<br />
e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and<br />
control wiring.<br />
f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions.<br />
g. Templates and patterns.<br />
h. Schedules.<br />
i. Design calculations.<br />
j. Compliance with specified standards.<br />
k. Notation of coordination requirements.<br />
l. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.<br />
m. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated.<br />
n. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.<br />
o. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed<br />
wiring.<br />
2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop<br />
Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 40 (36 by 48)<br />
inches.<br />
3. Number of Copies: Submit four opaque copies of each submittal, unless copies are<br />
required for operation and maintenance manuals. Submit six copies where copies are<br />
required for operation and maintenance manuals. Architect will retain two copies;<br />
remainder will be returned. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a <strong>Project</strong> Record<br />
Drawing.<br />
D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these<br />
characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between<br />
submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. (Samples: Submit full-size Samples<br />
cured and finished as specified and identical with the material proposed. Mount Samples to<br />
facilitate review of qualities.)<br />
1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together<br />
in one submittal package.<br />
2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:<br />
a. Generic description of Sample.<br />
b. Product name and name of manufacturer.<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
c. Sample source.<br />
d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.<br />
e. Compliance with recognized standards.<br />
f. Availability and delivery time.<br />
3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at <strong>Project</strong> site, available for qualitycontrol<br />
comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be<br />
used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.<br />
a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual<br />
Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time<br />
of use.<br />
b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's<br />
property, are the property of Contractor.<br />
4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or<br />
sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.<br />
a. Number of Samples: Submit three full set(s) of available choices where color,<br />
pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from<br />
manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected.<br />
5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared<br />
from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and<br />
physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of<br />
color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the<br />
following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or<br />
containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing<br />
color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing<br />
and inspection.<br />
a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two<br />
Sample sets; remainder will be returned.<br />
1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication<br />
techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to<br />
be demonstrated.<br />
2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in<br />
material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of<br />
paired units that show approximate limits of variations.<br />
E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written<br />
summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.<br />
Include the following information in tabular form:<br />
1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product.<br />
2. Number and name of room or space.<br />
3. Location within room or space.<br />
4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise<br />
indicated. Architect will return two copies.<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a <strong>Project</strong> Record Document.<br />
F. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01<br />
Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Progress Documentation" for <strong>Construction</strong> Manager's action. Prepare a<br />
horizontal bar-chart-type, contractor's construction schedule. Provide a separate time bar for<br />
each activity and a vertical line to identify the first working day of each week. Use the same<br />
breakdown of Work indicated in the "Schedule of Values."<br />
1. Submit within 14 days of the date established for "Commencement of the Work."<br />
2. Coordinate with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittal Schedule,<br />
payment requests, and other schedules.<br />
3. Indicate completion in advance of Substantial Completion. Indicate Substantial<br />
Completion to allow time for the Architect's procedures necessary for certification of<br />
Substantial Completion.<br />
G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "<strong>Construction</strong><br />
Progress Documentation."<br />
H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section<br />
"Payment Procedures."<br />
I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Payment<br />
Procedures."<br />
J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each<br />
portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a<br />
special design. Include the following information in tabular form:<br />
1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying<br />
products.<br />
2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.<br />
3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.<br />
4. Number of Copies: Submit three copies of subcontractor list, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
Architect will return one copy.<br />
a. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a <strong>Project</strong> Record Document.<br />
K. Record Drawings: Maintain a redline of 1 set of reproducible drawings for viewing on site by<br />
the Architect upon request.<br />
2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.<br />
1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
Architect will not return copies.<br />
2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of<br />
entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be<br />
signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that<br />
entity.<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section<br />
"Quality Requirements."<br />
B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "<strong>Project</strong><br />
Management and Coordination."<br />
C. Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01<br />
Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Progress Documentation."<br />
D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience<br />
of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names<br />
and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.<br />
E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel<br />
comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure<br />
Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include<br />
names of firms and personnel certified.<br />
F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that<br />
Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is<br />
authorized by manufacturer for this specific <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying<br />
that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of<br />
manufacturing experience where required.<br />
H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that<br />
product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.<br />
I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that<br />
material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.<br />
J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's<br />
standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with<br />
requirements in the Contract Documents.<br />
K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by<br />
manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on<br />
evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or<br />
on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.<br />
L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization<br />
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect<br />
for <strong>Project</strong>. Include the following information:<br />
1. Name of evaluation organization.<br />
2. Date of evaluation.<br />
3. Time period when report is in effect.<br />
4. Product and manufacturers' names.<br />
5. Description of product.<br />
6. Test procedures and results.<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
7. Limitations of use.<br />
M. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section<br />
"Quality Requirements."<br />
N. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing<br />
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation<br />
of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.<br />
O. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing<br />
agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed<br />
before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate<br />
preparation needed for adhesion.<br />
P. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's<br />
standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during<br />
installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with<br />
requirements in the Contract Documents.<br />
Q. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and<br />
normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in<br />
Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."<br />
R. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,<br />
performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations.<br />
Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads.<br />
Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for<br />
calculations. Include page numbers.<br />
S. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents<br />
manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a<br />
product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of<br />
manufacturer. Include the following, as applicable:<br />
1. Preparation of substrates.<br />
2. Required substrate tolerances.<br />
3. Sequence of installation or erection.<br />
4. Required installation tolerances.<br />
5. Required adjustments.<br />
6. Recommendations for cleaning and protection.<br />
T. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized<br />
service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:<br />
1. Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative<br />
making report.<br />
2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.<br />
3. Statement that products at <strong>Project</strong> site comply with requirements.<br />
4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with<br />
requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken.<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance<br />
complies with requirements.<br />
6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.<br />
7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.<br />
U. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of<br />
insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of<br />
coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.<br />
V. <strong>Construction</strong> Photographs: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section<br />
"Photographic Documentation."<br />
W. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): When requested of required, submit information<br />
directly to Owner; do not submit to Architect.<br />
1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return the entire<br />
submittal for resubmittal.<br />
2.3 DELEGATED DESIGN<br />
A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a<br />
design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide<br />
products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.<br />
1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit<br />
a written request for additional information to Architect.<br />
B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required<br />
submittals, submit three copies of a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design<br />
professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or<br />
certified by a design professional.<br />
1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the<br />
Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing<br />
these services.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW<br />
A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for<br />
compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with<br />
approval stamp before submitting to Architect.<br />
a. Submittals that have not been reviewed for compliance and have missing<br />
requirements will be rejected outright and returned to the contractor for<br />
resubmittal.<br />
B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include <strong>Project</strong> name<br />
and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked,<br />
and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.<br />
3.2 ARCHITECT'S / ACTION<br />
A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor's approval stamp and<br />
will return them without action.<br />
B. Action Submittals: Except for submittals for the record or information, Architect will review<br />
each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it.<br />
Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to<br />
indicate action taken, as follows:<br />
C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will<br />
return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to<br />
appropriate party.<br />
D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned<br />
without review.<br />
E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.<br />
END OF SECTION 013300<br />
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and<br />
quality control.<br />
B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or<br />
indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the<br />
Contract Document requirements.<br />
1. Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities<br />
are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections<br />
may also cover production of standard products.<br />
2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other qualityassurance<br />
and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document<br />
requirements.<br />
3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required<br />
by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of<br />
this Section.<br />
C. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Progress Documentation" for developing a schedule of<br />
required tests and inspections.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "Cutting and Patching" for repair and restoration of construction<br />
disturbed by testing and inspecting activities.<br />
3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during<br />
execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed<br />
construction will comply with requirements.<br />
B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after<br />
execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and<br />
completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract<br />
enforcement activities performed by Architect.<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to<br />
verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where<br />
indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing,<br />
or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the<br />
Work will be judged.<br />
D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to<br />
verify performance characteristics.<br />
E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the <strong>Project</strong><br />
before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or<br />
compliance with specified criteria.<br />
F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing<br />
agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to<br />
establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.<br />
G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e.,<br />
plant, mill, factory, or shop.<br />
H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation<br />
of the Work and for completed Work.<br />
I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing<br />
laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.<br />
J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an<br />
employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation,<br />
including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.<br />
1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must<br />
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,<br />
such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively<br />
to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.<br />
K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a<br />
minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this <strong>Project</strong>; being familiar with<br />
special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
1.4 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish<br />
different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the<br />
most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but<br />
apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.<br />
B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be<br />
the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the<br />
minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits.<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as<br />
appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision<br />
before proceeding.<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to<br />
demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a<br />
recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.<br />
B. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:<br />
1. Specification Section number and title.<br />
2. Description of test and inspection.<br />
3. Identification of applicable standards.<br />
4. Identification of test and inspection methods.<br />
5. Number of tests and inspections required.<br />
6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.<br />
7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.<br />
8. Requirements for obtaining samples.<br />
9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.<br />
C. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:<br />
1. Date of issue.<br />
2. <strong>Project</strong> title and number.<br />
3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.<br />
4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.<br />
5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections.<br />
6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.<br />
7. Identification of product and Specification Section.<br />
8. Complete test or inspection data.<br />
9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.<br />
10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and<br />
inspecting.<br />
11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with<br />
the Contract Document requirements.<br />
12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector.<br />
13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.<br />
D. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses,<br />
certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee<br />
payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for<br />
compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels<br />
required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling<br />
work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this <strong>Project</strong>, whose work has<br />
resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.<br />
C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar<br />
to those indicated for this <strong>Project</strong> and with a record of successful in-service performance, as<br />
well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.<br />
D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated<br />
for this <strong>Project</strong> and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient<br />
production capacity to produce required units.<br />
E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to<br />
practice in jurisdiction where <strong>Project</strong> is located and who is experienced in providing<br />
engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed<br />
for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this<br />
<strong>Project</strong> in material, design, and extent.<br />
F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities<br />
shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall<br />
satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.<br />
1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and regulations governing<br />
the Work.<br />
G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the<br />
experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according<br />
to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where<br />
required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.<br />
1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.<br />
2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary<br />
Laboratory Accreditation Program.<br />
H. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of<br />
manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of<br />
manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this<br />
<strong>Project</strong>.<br />
I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing<br />
for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the<br />
following:<br />
1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:<br />
a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.<br />
b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing<br />
results to prevent delaying the Work.<br />
c. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory<br />
mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with<br />
performance requirements.<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
d. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will<br />
perform same tasks for <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
e. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and<br />
methods of construction indicated for the completed Work.<br />
f. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, mockups, and<br />
laboratory mockups; do not reuse products on <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test,<br />
inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor.<br />
Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work<br />
complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.<br />
J. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each<br />
form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using<br />
materials indicated for the completed Work:<br />
1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by<br />
Architect.<br />
2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be<br />
constructed.<br />
3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.<br />
4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.<br />
a. Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.<br />
5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for<br />
judging the completed Work.<br />
6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified<br />
in individual Sections in Divisions 02 through 49.<br />
1.7 QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility,<br />
Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.<br />
1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing<br />
agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to<br />
perform.<br />
2. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspecting allowances, as<br />
authorized by Change Orders.<br />
3. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work<br />
that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the<br />
Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.<br />
B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless<br />
otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities<br />
having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities<br />
having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing<br />
agency to perform these quality-control services.<br />
a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in<br />
writing by Owner.<br />
2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires<br />
testing or inspecting will be performed.<br />
3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a<br />
certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.<br />
4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract<br />
Documents are Contractor's responsibility.<br />
5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction,<br />
when they so direct.<br />
C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service<br />
representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including<br />
service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal<br />
Procedures."<br />
D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's<br />
responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for<br />
construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents. The<br />
Contractor is responsible for retesting where results of inspections and tests prove unsatisfactory<br />
and indicate noncompliance with requirements. The cost of retesting is the Contractor's<br />
responsibility where tests performed indicate noncompliance with requirements.<br />
E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of<br />
duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.<br />
1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the<br />
Work during performance of its services.<br />
2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests<br />
are conducted.<br />
3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and<br />
inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.<br />
4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar<br />
quality-control service through Contractor.<br />
5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve<br />
or accept any portion of the Work.<br />
6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.<br />
F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and<br />
similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify<br />
agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the<br />
following:<br />
1. Access to the Work.<br />
2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.<br />
3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and<br />
inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples.<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.<br />
5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies.<br />
6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing<br />
agency.<br />
7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at <strong>Project</strong><br />
site.<br />
G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance<br />
and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and<br />
replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.<br />
1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.<br />
H. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar qualitycontrol<br />
services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date<br />
established for commencement of the Work.<br />
1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party<br />
involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.<br />
1.8 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS<br />
A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special<br />
tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner,<br />
and as follows:<br />
B. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by<br />
authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:<br />
1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures<br />
and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.<br />
2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed<br />
in the Work during performance of its services.<br />
3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control<br />
service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion,<br />
which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.<br />
5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected<br />
work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.<br />
6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG<br />
A. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Date test or inspection was conducted.<br />
2. Description of the Work tested or inspected.<br />
3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.<br />
4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.<br />
B. Maintain log at <strong>Project</strong> site. Post changes and modifications as they occur. Provide access to<br />
test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.<br />
3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION<br />
A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair<br />
damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. Comply with Division 1 Section<br />
“Cutting and Patching.”<br />
1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other<br />
Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas<br />
with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.<br />
2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 01 Section "Cutting and<br />
Patching."<br />
B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.<br />
C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of<br />
responsibility for quality-control services.<br />
END OF SECTION 014000<br />
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.<br />
B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications,<br />
and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the<br />
Conditions of the Contract.<br />
C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested,"<br />
"authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."<br />
D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on<br />
Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown,"<br />
"noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."<br />
E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having<br />
jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control<br />
performance of the Work.<br />
F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to <strong>Project</strong> site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly,<br />
installation, and similar operations.<br />
G. "Install": Operations at <strong>Project</strong> site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking,<br />
assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing,<br />
protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.<br />
H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.<br />
I. "<strong>Project</strong> Site": Space available for performing construction activities, either exclusively or in<br />
conjunction with others performing work as part of the <strong>Project</strong>. The extent of <strong>Project</strong> site is<br />
shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which<br />
<strong>Project</strong> is to be built.<br />
J. "Installer" is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee,<br />
subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, who performs a particular construction activity<br />
including installation, erection, application, or similar operations. Installers are required to be<br />
experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. The term "experienced," when used with the term "installer," means having successfully<br />
completed a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this <strong>Project</strong>;<br />
being familiar with the special requirements indicated; and having complied with<br />
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
2. Using terms such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must<br />
be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name,<br />
such as "carpenter."<br />
K. "Testing Agencies": A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific<br />
inspections or tests, either at the <strong>Project</strong> site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to<br />
interpret results of those inspections or tests.<br />
1.3 INDUSTRY STANDARDS<br />
A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent<br />
requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if<br />
bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards<br />
are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.<br />
B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on <strong>Project</strong> should be familiar with<br />
industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not<br />
bound with the Contract Documents.<br />
1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain<br />
copies directly from publication source.<br />
1.4 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS<br />
A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other<br />
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson<br />
Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional<br />
Associations of the U.S."<br />
B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other<br />
Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.<br />
Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate<br />
and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.<br />
AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) (703) 358-2960<br />
www.aluminum.org<br />
AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers (216) 241-7333<br />
www.aaadm.com<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202) 737-0202<br />
www.aabchq.com<br />
AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847) 303-5664<br />
www.aamanet.org<br />
AASHTO<br />
American Association of State Highway and Transportation<br />
Officials<br />
www.transportation.org<br />
(202) 624-5800<br />
AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The) (919) 549-8141<br />
www.aatcc.org<br />
ABAA Air Barrier Association of America (866) 956-5888<br />
www.airbarrier.org<br />
ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202) 367-1155<br />
www.abma-dc.org<br />
ACI ACI International (248) 848-3700<br />
(American Concrete Institute)<br />
www.aci-int.org<br />
ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972) 506-7216<br />
www.concrete-pipe.org<br />
AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) (205) 257-2530<br />
www.aeic.org<br />
AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association (800) 878-8878<br />
www.afandpa.org (202) 463-2700<br />
AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000<br />
www.aga.org<br />
AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) (703) 548-3118<br />
www.agc.org<br />
AHA<br />
American Hardboard Association<br />
(Now part of CPA)<br />
AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955<br />
www.aham.org<br />
AI Asphalt Institute (859) 288-4960<br />
www.asphaltinstitute.org<br />
AIA American Institute of Architects (The) (800) 242-3837<br />
www.aia.org (202) 626-7300<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
AISC American Institute of Steel <strong>Construction</strong> (800) 644-2400<br />
www.aisc.org (312) 670-2400<br />
AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202) 452-7100<br />
www.steel.org<br />
AITC American Institute of Timber <strong>Construction</strong> (303) 792-9559<br />
www.aitc-glulam.org<br />
ALCA<br />
Associated Landscape Contractors of America<br />
(Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network)<br />
ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated (301) 972-1700<br />
www.alsc.org<br />
AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. (847) 394-0150<br />
www.amca.org<br />
ANSI American National Standards Institute (202) 293-8020<br />
www.ansi.org<br />
AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. (405) 780-7372<br />
www.aosaseed.com<br />
APA Architectural Precast Association (239) 454-6989<br />
www.archprecast.org<br />
APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association (253) 565-6600<br />
www.apawood.org<br />
APA EWS<br />
APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood<br />
Systems<br />
(See APA - The Engineered Wood Association)<br />
API American Petroleum Institute (202) 682-8000<br />
www.api.org<br />
ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute (703) 524-8800<br />
www.ari.org<br />
ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202) 207-0917<br />
www.asphaltroofing.org<br />
ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800) 548-2723<br />
www.asce.org (703) 295-6300<br />
ASCE/SEI<br />
American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering<br />
Institute<br />
(See ASCE)<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
ASHRAE<br />
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-<br />
(800) 527-4723<br />
Conditioning Engineers<br />
www.ashrae.org (404) 636-8400<br />
ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763<br />
(The American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) (973) 882-1170<br />
www.asme.org<br />
ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040<br />
www.asse-plumbing.org<br />
ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9585<br />
(American Society for Testing and Materials International)<br />
www.astm.org<br />
AWCI AWCI International (703) 534-8300<br />
(Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International)<br />
www.awci.org<br />
AWCMA<br />
American Window Covering Manufacturers Association<br />
(Now WCSC)<br />
AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571) 323-3636<br />
www.awinet.org<br />
AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association (205) 733-4077<br />
www.awpa.com<br />
AWS American Welding Society (800) 443-9353<br />
www.aws.org (305) 443-9353<br />
AWWA American Water Works Association (800) 926-7337<br />
www.awwa.org (303) 794-7711<br />
BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212) 297-2122<br />
www.buildershardware.com<br />
BIA Brick Industry Association (The) (703) 620-0010<br />
www.bia.org<br />
BICSI BICSI (800) 242-7405<br />
www.bicsi.org (813) 979-1991<br />
BIFMA BIFMA International (616) 285-3963<br />
(Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association<br />
International)<br />
www.bifma.com<br />
BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866) 342-4772<br />
www.bissc.org<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
CCC Carpet Cushion Council (610) 527-3880<br />
www.carpetcushion.org<br />
CDA Copper Development Association (800) 232-3282<br />
www.copper.org (212) 251-7200<br />
CEA Canadian Electricity Association (613) 230-9263<br />
www.canelect.ca<br />
CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. (216) 241-7333<br />
www.chemicalfabricsandfilm.com<br />
CGA Compressed Gas Association (703) 788-2700<br />
www.cganet.com<br />
CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462<br />
www.cellulose.org (937) 222-2462<br />
CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems <strong>Construction</strong> Association (630) 584-1919<br />
www.cisca.org<br />
CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (423) 892-0137<br />
www.cispi.org<br />
CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301) 596-2583<br />
www.chainlinkinfo.org<br />
CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866) 465-2523<br />
www.coolroofs.org (510) 485-7175<br />
CPA Composite Panel Association (301) 670-0604<br />
www.pbmdf.com<br />
CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (800) 510-2772<br />
www.cppa-info.org (202) 462-9607<br />
CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) (800) 882-8846<br />
www.carpet-rug.com (706) 278-3176<br />
CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (847) 517-1200<br />
www.crsi.org<br />
CSA Canadian Standards Association (800) 463-6727<br />
(416) 747-4000<br />
CSA CSA International (866) 797-4272<br />
(Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) (416) 747-4000<br />
www.csa-international.org<br />
CSI Cast Stone Institute (717) 272-3744<br />
www.caststone.org<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
CSI <strong>Construction</strong> Specifications Institute (The) (800) 689-2900<br />
www.csinet.org (703) 684-0300<br />
CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700<br />
www.cedarbureau.org<br />
CTI Cooling Technology Institute (281) 583-4087<br />
(Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute)<br />
www.cti.org<br />
DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703) 222-2010<br />
www.dhi.org<br />
EIA Electronic Industries Alliance (703) 907-7500<br />
www.eia.org<br />
EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800) 294-3462<br />
www.eima.com (770) 968-7945<br />
EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee (703) 295-5000<br />
www.ejdc.org<br />
EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (914) 332-0040<br />
www.ejma.org<br />
ESD ESD Association (315) 339-6937<br />
www.esda.org<br />
FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball 41 22 545 00 00<br />
(The International Basketball Federation)<br />
www.fiba.com<br />
FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball 41 21 345 35 35<br />
(The International Volleyball Federation)<br />
www.fivb.ch<br />
FM Approvals FM Approvals (781) 762-4300<br />
www.fmglobal.com<br />
FM Global FM Global (401) 275-3000<br />
(Formerly: FMG - FM Global)<br />
www.fmglobal.com<br />
FMRC<br />
FRSA<br />
Factory Mutual Research<br />
(Now FM Global)<br />
Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors<br />
Association, Inc.<br />
www.floridaroof.com<br />
(407) 671-3772<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610) 971-4850<br />
www.fluidsealing.com<br />
FSC Forest Stewardship Council 49 228 367 66 0<br />
www.fsc.org<br />
GA Gypsum Association (202) 289-5440<br />
www.gypsum.org<br />
GANA Glass Association of North America (785) 271-0208<br />
www.glasswebsite.com<br />
GRI<br />
(Now GSI)<br />
GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400<br />
www.greenseal.org<br />
GSI Geosynthetic Institute (610) 522-8440<br />
www.geosynthetic-institute.org<br />
HI Hydraulic Institute (888) 786-7744<br />
www.pumps.org (973) 267-9700<br />
HI Hydronics Institute (908) 464-8200<br />
www.gamanet.org<br />
HMMA<br />
Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association<br />
(Part of NAAMM)<br />
HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association (703) 435-2900<br />
www.hpva.org<br />
HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. (410) 838-6550<br />
www.hpwhite.com<br />
IAS<br />
International Approval Services<br />
(Now CSA International)<br />
IBF International Badminton Federation (6-03) 9283-7155<br />
www.internationalbadminton.org<br />
ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (770) 830-0369<br />
www.icea.net<br />
ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. (847) 827-0830<br />
www.icri.org<br />
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11<br />
www.iec.ch<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) (212) 419-7900<br />
www.ieee.org<br />
IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (212) 248-5000<br />
www.iesna.org<br />
IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847) 255-1561<br />
www.iest.org<br />
IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council (315) 646-2234<br />
www.igcc.org<br />
IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613) 233-1510<br />
www.igmaonline.org<br />
ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. (812) 275-4426<br />
www.iliai.com<br />
ISO International Organization for Standardization 41 22 749 01 11<br />
www.iso.ch<br />
Available from ANSI (202) 293-8020<br />
www.ansi.org<br />
ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (877) 464-7732<br />
www.issfa.net (702) 567-8150<br />
ITS Intertek Testing Service NA (972) 238-5591<br />
www.intertek.com<br />
ITU International Telecommunication Union 41 22 730 51 11<br />
www.itu.int/home<br />
KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703) 264-1690<br />
www.kcma.org<br />
LMA<br />
Laminating Materials Association<br />
(Now part of CPA)<br />
LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800) 488-6864<br />
www.lightning.org<br />
MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216) 241-7333<br />
www.mbma.com<br />
MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. (847) 480-9138<br />
www.maplefloor.org<br />
MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. (312) 644-6610<br />
www.metalframingmfg.org<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
MH<br />
Material Handling<br />
(Now MHIA)<br />
MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800) 345-1815<br />
www.mhia.org (704) 676-1190<br />
MIA Marble Institute of America (440) 250-9222<br />
www.marble-institute.com<br />
MPI Master Painters Institute (888) 674-8937<br />
www.paintinfo.com<br />
MSS<br />
Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings<br />
Industry Inc.<br />
www.mss-hq.com<br />
(703) 281-6613<br />
NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (312) 332-0405<br />
www.naamm.org<br />
NACE NACE International (800) 797-6623<br />
(National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281) 228-6200<br />
www.nace.org<br />
NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202) 737-2926<br />
www.nadca.com<br />
NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport (800) 213-7193,<br />
ext. 453<br />
www.aahperd.org/nagws/<br />
NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703) 684-0084<br />
www.naima.org<br />
NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. (800) 557-2848<br />
www.nbgqa.com<br />
NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) (317) 917-6222<br />
www.ncaa.org<br />
NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703) 713-1900<br />
www.ncma.org<br />
NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute (262) 248-9094<br />
www.ncpi.org<br />
NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association (202) 775-3550<br />
www.ncta.com<br />
NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301) 977-3698<br />
www.nebb.org<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301) 657-3110<br />
www.necanet.org<br />
NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association (207) 829-6901<br />
www.nelma.org<br />
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200<br />
www.nema.org<br />
NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888) 300-6382<br />
www.netaworld.org (303) 697-8441<br />
NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317) 972-6900<br />
www.nfhs.org<br />
NFPA NFPA (800) 344-3555<br />
(National Fire Protection Association) (617) 770-3000<br />
www.nfpa.org<br />
NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301) 589-1776<br />
www.nfrc.org<br />
NGA National Glass Association (866) 342-5642<br />
www.glass.org (703) 442-4890<br />
NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800) 933-0318<br />
www.natlhardwood.org (901) 377-1818<br />
NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604) 524-2393<br />
www.nlga.org<br />
NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (901) 526-5016<br />
(Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association)<br />
www.nofma.com<br />
NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800) 323-9545<br />
www.nrca.net (847) 299-9070<br />
NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622<br />
www.nrmca.org (301) 587-1400<br />
NSF NSF International (800) 673-6275<br />
(National Sanitation Foundation International) (734) 769-8010<br />
www.nsf.org<br />
NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association (800) 342-1415<br />
www.nssga.org (703) 525-8788<br />
NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) (800) 323-9736<br />
www.ntma.com (540) 751-0930<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
NTRMA<br />
NWWDA<br />
OPL<br />
National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association<br />
(Now TRI)<br />
National Wood Window and Door Association<br />
(Now WDMA)<br />
Omega Point Laboratories, Inc.<br />
(Now ITS)<br />
PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312) 786-0300<br />
www.pci.org<br />
PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America (800) 332-7322<br />
www.pdca.com (314) 514-7322<br />
PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute (800) 589-8956<br />
www.pdionline.org (978) 557-0720<br />
PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute (217) 333-3929<br />
http://pgi-tp.ce.uiuc.edu<br />
PLANET Professional Landcare Network (800) 395-2522<br />
(Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of (703) 736-9666<br />
America)<br />
www.landcarenetwork.org<br />
PTI Post-Tensioning Institute (602) 870-7540<br />
www.post-tensioning.org<br />
RCSC<br />
Research Council on Structural Connections<br />
www.boltcouncil.org<br />
RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (301) 340-8580<br />
www.rfci.com<br />
RIS Redwood Inspection Service (888) 225-7339<br />
www.calredwood.org (415) 382-0662<br />
SAE SAE International (877) 606-7323<br />
www.sae.org (724) 776-4841<br />
SDI Steel Deck Institute (847) 458-4647<br />
www.sdi.org<br />
SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010<br />
www.steeldoor.org<br />
SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (516) 294-5424<br />
www.sefalabs.com<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 12
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SEI/ASCE<br />
Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil<br />
Engineers<br />
(See ASCE)<br />
SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council (315) 646-2234<br />
www.sgcc.org<br />
SIA Security Industry Association (703) 683-2075<br />
www.siaonline.org<br />
SIGMA<br />
Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association<br />
(Now IGMA)<br />
SJI Steel Joist Institute (843) 626-1995<br />
www.steeljoist.org<br />
SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (561) 533-0991<br />
www.smacentral.org<br />
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' (703) 803-2980<br />
National Association<br />
www.smacna.org<br />
SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914) 761-1100<br />
www.smpte.org<br />
SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800) 523-6154<br />
(Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry,<br />
Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division)<br />
www.sprayfoam.org<br />
SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) (850) 434-2611<br />
www.spib.org<br />
SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781) 647-7026<br />
www.spri.org<br />
SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800) 982-0355<br />
www.ssina.com (202) 342-8630<br />
SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877) 281-7772<br />
www.sspc.org (412) 281-2331<br />
STI Steel Tank Institute (847) 438-8265<br />
www.steeltank.com<br />
SWI Steel Window Institute (216) 241-7333<br />
www.steelwindows.com<br />
SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute (816) 472-7974<br />
www.swrionline.org<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 13
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (864) 646-8453<br />
www.tileusa.com<br />
TIA/EIA<br />
Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries<br />
Alliance<br />
www.tiaonline.org<br />
(703) 907-7700<br />
TMS The Masonry Society (303) 939-9700<br />
www.masonrysociety.org<br />
TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. (703) 683-1010<br />
www.tpinst.org<br />
TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800) 405-8873<br />
www.turfgrasssod.org (847) 649-5555<br />
TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312) 670-4177<br />
www.tileroofing.org<br />
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577<br />
www.ul.com (847) 272-8800<br />
UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972) 243-3902<br />
www.uni-bell.org<br />
USAV USA Volleyball (888) 786-5539<br />
www.usavolleyball.org (719) 228-6800<br />
USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (202) 828-7422<br />
www.usgbc.org<br />
USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. (800) 938-7488<br />
www.usitt.org (315) 463-6463<br />
WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800) 424-2869<br />
www.wastec.org (202) 244-4700<br />
WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800) 283-1486<br />
www.wclib.org (503) 639-0651<br />
WCMA<br />
Window Covering Manufacturers Association<br />
(Now WCSC)<br />
WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (800) 506-4636<br />
(Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers<br />
Association)<br />
(212) 297-2109<br />
www.windowcoverings.org<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 14
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (800) 223-2301<br />
(Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door (847) 299-5200<br />
Association)<br />
www.wdma.com<br />
WI<br />
WIC<br />
Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of<br />
California)<br />
www.wicnet.org<br />
Woodwork Institute of California<br />
(Now WI)<br />
(916) 372-9943<br />
WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association (800) 550-7889<br />
www.wmmpa.com (530) 661-9591<br />
WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800) 725-0333<br />
www.wsrca.com (650) 570-5441<br />
WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503) 224-3930<br />
www.wwpa.org<br />
C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract<br />
Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,<br />
telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and upto-date<br />
as of the date of the Contract Documents.<br />
BOCA<br />
BOCA International, Inc.<br />
(See ICC)<br />
IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909) 472-4100<br />
www.iapmo.org<br />
ICBO<br />
International Conference of Building Officials<br />
(See ICC)<br />
ICBO ES ICBO Evaluation Service, Inc.<br />
(See ICC-ES)<br />
ICC International Code Council (888) 422-7233<br />
www.iccsafe.org (703) 931-4533<br />
ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. (800) 423-6587<br />
www.icc-es.org (562) 699-0543<br />
SBCCI<br />
UBC<br />
Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc.<br />
(See ICC)<br />
Uniform Building Code<br />
(See ICC)<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 15
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications<br />
or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the<br />
following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed<br />
to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.<br />
CE<br />
Army Corps of Engineers<br />
www.usace.army.mil<br />
CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800) 638-2772<br />
www.cpsc.gov (301) 504-7923<br />
DOC Department of Commerce (202) 482-2000<br />
www.commerce.gov<br />
DOD Department of Defense (215) 697-6257<br />
http://.dodssp.daps.dla.mil<br />
DOE Department of Energy (202) 586-9220<br />
www.energy.gov<br />
EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202) 272-0167<br />
www.epa.gov<br />
FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322<br />
www.faa.gov<br />
FCC Federal Communications Commission (888) 225-5322<br />
www.fcc.gov<br />
FDA Food and Drug Administration (888) 463-6332<br />
www.fda.gov<br />
GSA General Services Administration (800) 488-3111<br />
www.gsa.gov<br />
HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202) 708-1112<br />
www.hud.gov<br />
LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510) 486-4000<br />
www.lbl.gov<br />
NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program<br />
(See TRB)<br />
NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology (301) 975-6478<br />
www.nist.gov<br />
OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration (800) 321-6742<br />
www.osha.gov (202) 693-1999<br />
PBS<br />
Public Building Service<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 16
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
(See GSA)<br />
PHS Office of Public Health and Science (202) 690-7694<br />
www.osophs.dhhs.gov/ophs<br />
RUS Rural Utilities Service (202) 720-9540<br />
(See USDA)<br />
SD State Department (202) 647-4000<br />
www.state.gov<br />
TRB Transportation Research Board (202) 334-2934<br />
http://gulliver.trb.org<br />
USDA Department of Agriculture (202) 720-2791<br />
www.usda.gov<br />
USPS Postal Service (202) 268-2000<br />
www.usps.com<br />
E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or<br />
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and<br />
regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to<br />
change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.<br />
ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) (800) 872-2253<br />
Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) (202) 272-0080<br />
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities<br />
Available from Access Board<br />
www.access-board.gov<br />
CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866) 512-1800<br />
Available from Government Printing Office (202) 512-1800<br />
www.gpoaccess.gov/cfr/index.html<br />
DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards (215) 697-2664<br />
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point<br />
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil<br />
DSCC<br />
FED-STD<br />
Defense Supply Center Columbus<br />
(See FS)<br />
Federal Standard<br />
(See FS)<br />
FS Federal Specification (215) 697-2664<br />
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point<br />
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil<br />
Available from Defense Standardization Program<br />
www.dps.dla.mil<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 17
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Available from General Services Administration (202) 619-8925<br />
www.gsa.gov<br />
Available from National Institute of Building Sciences (202) 289-7800<br />
www.wbdg.org/ccb<br />
FTMS<br />
MIL<br />
MIL-STD<br />
Federal Test Method Standard<br />
(See FS)<br />
(See MILSPEC)<br />
(See MILSPEC)<br />
MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (215) 697-2664<br />
Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point<br />
http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil<br />
UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253<br />
Available from Access Board (202) 272-0080<br />
www.access-board.gov<br />
F. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or<br />
other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following<br />
list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be<br />
accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.<br />
CBHF State of California, Department of Consumer Affairs Bureau of Home (800) 952-5210<br />
Furnishings and Thermal Insulation<br />
www.dca.ca.gov/bhfti (916) 574-2041<br />
CCR California Code of Regulations (916) 323-6815<br />
www.calregs.com<br />
CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (415) 703-2782<br />
www.cpuc.ca.gov<br />
TFS Texas Forest Service (979) 458-6650<br />
Forest Resource Development<br />
http://txforestservice.tamu.edu<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 0142000<br />
REFERENCES 014200 - 18
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and<br />
protection facilities.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for limitations on utility interruptions and other work<br />
restrictions.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "Multiple Contract Summary" for division of responsibilities for<br />
temporary facilities and controls.<br />
3. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for procedures for submitting copies of<br />
implementation and termination schedule and utility reports.<br />
4. Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.<br />
5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for temporary heat, ventilation, and humidity<br />
requirements for products in those Sections.<br />
6. Division 31 Section "Asphalt Paving" for construction and maintenance of asphalt paving<br />
for temporary roads and paved areas.<br />
7. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for construction and maintenance of cement<br />
concrete pavement for temporary roads and paved areas.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is<br />
complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all<br />
openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.<br />
1.4 USE CHARGES<br />
A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum.<br />
Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not<br />
limited to, Architect, occupants of <strong>Project</strong>, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
Prepare a schedule indicating dates for implementation and termination of each temporary<br />
utility. Submit reports of tests, inspections, meter readings, and procedures performed on<br />
temporary utilities. At the earliest time, change over from use of temporary service to use of<br />
permanent service.<br />
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Electric Power Service: Pay electric power service use charges for electricity used by all<br />
entities for construction operations.<br />
C. Water Service: Provide and pay for connections and extensions of services, and use changes as<br />
required for construction operations.<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for<br />
construction personnel.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary<br />
electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.<br />
B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each<br />
temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume<br />
responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its<br />
use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned<br />
responsibilities.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Pavement: Comply with Division 32 Section "Asphalt Paving." Section "Concrete Paving."<br />
B. Portable Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 9-gage, galvanized steel, chain-link fabric<br />
fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line<br />
posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top and bottom rails.<br />
C. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."<br />
D. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch thick by 48 inches wide by maximum available lengths;<br />
regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M.<br />
E. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool;<br />
with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.<br />
F. Paint: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections.<br />
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES<br />
A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature<br />
controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.<br />
B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate<br />
materials and equipment for construction operations.<br />
1. Store combustible materials apart from building.<br />
2.3 EQUIPMENT<br />
A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by<br />
locations and classes of fire exposures.<br />
B. HVAC Equipment: Needed for heat.<br />
1. Permanent HVAC System: Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for<br />
temporary use during construction. Provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return air<br />
grille in system and remove and replace with a new filter at end of construction.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Locate facilities where they will serve <strong>Project</strong> adequately and result in minimum interference<br />
with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the<br />
Work.<br />
1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."<br />
B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities<br />
are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.<br />
3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.<br />
1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be<br />
interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.<br />
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Water Service: Provide construction water as required for all construction activities.<br />
Where installations below an outlet might be damaged by spillage or leakage, provide a drip pan<br />
of suitable size to minimize water damage. Drain accumulated water promptly from pans.<br />
C. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of<br />
construction personnel. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,<br />
operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.<br />
D. Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities<br />
for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from<br />
adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a<br />
harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.<br />
E. Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction<br />
activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction<br />
from adverse effects of high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on<br />
completed installations or elements being installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to<br />
produce ambient condition required and minimize energy consumption.<br />
F. Electric Power Service: Provide temporary electric power as required for construction<br />
activities.<br />
G. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination<br />
for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.<br />
1. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements<br />
without operating entire system.<br />
H. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.<br />
2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.<br />
I. Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.<br />
J. <strong>Project</strong> Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide <strong>Project</strong> identification and other signs.<br />
Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
Unauthorized signs are not permitted.<br />
K. Waste Disposal Facilities: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section<br />
"<strong>Construction</strong> Waste Management and Disposal."<br />
L. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle<br />
waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having<br />
jurisdiction. Comply with Division 01 Section "Execution" for progress cleaning requirements.<br />
M. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.<br />
1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and<br />
equipment" and not temporary facilities.<br />
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
N. Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Cover finished, permanent stairs with protective covering<br />
of plywood or similar material so finishes will be undamaged at time of acceptance.<br />
3.3 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION<br />
A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct<br />
construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that<br />
minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable<br />
effects.<br />
1. Comply with work restrictions specified in Division 01 Section "Summary."<br />
B. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Comply with requirements specified in<br />
Division 31 Section "Site Clearing."<br />
C. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and<br />
discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways,<br />
according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during<br />
construction until permanent vegetation has been established.<br />
D. Stormwater Control: Comply with authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in and<br />
around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from<br />
heavy rains.<br />
E. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line<br />
of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root<br />
systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.<br />
F. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and<br />
harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control<br />
procedures at regular intervals so <strong>Project</strong> will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial<br />
Completion. Obtain extended warranty for Owner. Perform control operations lawfully, using<br />
environmentally safe materials.<br />
G. Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure<br />
fence in a manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by<br />
entrance gates.<br />
1. Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire <strong>Project</strong> site or portion determined<br />
sufficient to accommodate construction operations.<br />
2. Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized<br />
personnel. Provide Owner with one set of keys.<br />
H. Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install substantial temporary enclosure around partially<br />
completed areas of construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance,<br />
vandalism, theft, and similar violations of security.<br />
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
I. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having<br />
jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.<br />
J. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types<br />
needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with<br />
NFPA 241.<br />
1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas.<br />
2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar<br />
sources of fire ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel<br />
at <strong>Project</strong> site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be<br />
followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.<br />
3.4 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL<br />
A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and<br />
abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.<br />
B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.<br />
1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control,<br />
ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated<br />
results and to avoid possibility of damage.<br />
C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and<br />
protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.<br />
D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has<br />
ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than<br />
Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may<br />
have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work,<br />
clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.<br />
1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor.<br />
Owner reserves right to take possession of <strong>Project</strong> identification signs.<br />
2. Remove temporary paving not intended for or acceptable for integration into permanent<br />
paving. Where area is intended for landscape development, remove soil and aggregate<br />
fill that do not comply with requirements for fill or subsoil. Remove materials<br />
contaminated with road oil, asphalt and other petrochemical compounds, and other<br />
substances that might impair growth of plant materials or lawns. Repair or replace street<br />
paving, curbs, and sidewalks at temporary entrances, as required by authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
3. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during<br />
construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01<br />
Section "Closeout Procedures."<br />
END OF SECTION 015000<br />
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for<br />
use in <strong>Project</strong>; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on<br />
products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "References" for applicable industry standards for products<br />
specified.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract<br />
closeout.<br />
3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products<br />
and installations specified to be warranted.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for <strong>Project</strong> or<br />
taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material,"<br />
"equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.<br />
1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or<br />
model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product<br />
literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.<br />
2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or<br />
facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless<br />
explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not<br />
considered new products.<br />
3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal<br />
process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities<br />
related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties,<br />
appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.<br />
B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from<br />
those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor proposed after award of<br />
the Contract. The following are not requests for substitutions:<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Substitutions requested during the bidding period and accepted by Addendum prior to<br />
award of the Contract.<br />
2. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner.<br />
3. Specified options included in the Contract Documents.<br />
4. Contractor's compliance with regulations issued by governing authorities.<br />
C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and<br />
accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other<br />
designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service<br />
performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of<br />
evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular from, showing specified products. Include generic names<br />
of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each<br />
product.<br />
1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule and the Submittals<br />
Schedule.<br />
2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings:<br />
a. Specification Section number and title.<br />
b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents.<br />
c. Proprietary name, model number, and similar designations.<br />
d. Manufacturer's name and address.<br />
e. Supplier's name and address.<br />
f. Installer's name and address.<br />
g. <strong>Project</strong>ed delivery date or time span of delivery period.<br />
h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery<br />
date.<br />
3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3<br />
copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for<br />
variations from Contract requirements.<br />
a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and<br />
designations that must be established early in Contract period.<br />
4. Completed List: Within 60 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3<br />
copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and<br />
for variations from Contract requirements.<br />
5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 days of<br />
receipt of completed product list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable<br />
product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response,<br />
or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement to comply with the<br />
Contract Documents.<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product<br />
or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and<br />
title and Drawing numbers and titles.<br />
1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 012501 & 012502 provided at end of Section.<br />
2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following,<br />
as applicable:<br />
a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided.<br />
b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to<br />
other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate<br />
contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.<br />
c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of<br />
the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as<br />
performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and<br />
requirements indicated.<br />
d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and<br />
installation procedures.<br />
e. Samples, where applicable or requested.<br />
f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and<br />
addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners.<br />
g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test<br />
results for compliance with requirements indicated.<br />
h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for<br />
<strong>Project</strong>, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule using proposed<br />
substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall<br />
Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided<br />
within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's<br />
letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.<br />
j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.<br />
k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in<br />
the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated.<br />
l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently<br />
become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated<br />
results.<br />
3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or<br />
documentation for evaluation within 7 days of receipt of a request for substitution.<br />
Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within<br />
15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional information or<br />
documentation, whichever is later.<br />
a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order.<br />
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed<br />
substitution within time allocated.<br />
C. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify<br />
product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section<br />
number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or<br />
documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product<br />
request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable<br />
product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or 7 days of receipt of additional<br />
information or documentation, whichever is later.<br />
a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures."<br />
b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a comparable<br />
product request within time allocated.<br />
D. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 01<br />
Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more<br />
products for use on <strong>Project</strong>, product selected shall be compatible with products previously<br />
selected, even if previously selected products were also options.<br />
1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods<br />
compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors.<br />
2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible<br />
products, Architect will determine which products shall be used.<br />
1.6 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage,<br />
deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Delivery and Handling:<br />
1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at <strong>Project</strong> site and to prevent<br />
overcrowding of construction spaces.<br />
2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that<br />
are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other<br />
losses.<br />
3. Deliver products to <strong>Project</strong> site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original<br />
sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for<br />
handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.<br />
4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to<br />
ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.<br />
C. Storage:<br />
1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.<br />
2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger <strong>Project</strong> structure.<br />
3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight<br />
enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.<br />
4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms.<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
5. Store foam plastic away from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period<br />
of installation and concealment.<br />
6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,<br />
ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage.<br />
7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.<br />
8. Provide a secure location and enclosure at <strong>Project</strong> site for storage of materials and<br />
equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.<br />
1.7 PRODUCT WARRANTIES<br />
A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other<br />
warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on<br />
product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract<br />
Documents.<br />
1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual<br />
manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to<br />
Owner.<br />
2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract<br />
Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide<br />
more rights for Owner.<br />
B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and<br />
identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.<br />
1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include <strong>Project</strong>-specific information and<br />
properly executed.<br />
2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a<br />
written document using appropriate form properly executed.<br />
3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific content requirements and<br />
particular requirements for submitting special warranties.<br />
C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES<br />
A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents,<br />
that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.<br />
1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items<br />
needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.<br />
2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are<br />
specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used<br />
successfully in similar situations on other projects.<br />
3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with<br />
requirements of the Contract Documents.<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make<br />
selection.<br />
5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is<br />
Architect's.<br />
6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications<br />
establish "salient characteristics" of products.<br />
7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or<br />
equal" or "or approved equal" or "or approved," comply with provisions in Part 2<br />
"Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.<br />
B. Product Selection Procedures:<br />
1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the<br />
named product that complies with requirements.<br />
2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source,<br />
provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.<br />
3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and<br />
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.<br />
4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a<br />
product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.<br />
5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and<br />
manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies<br />
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for<br />
consideration of an unnamed product.<br />
6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a<br />
product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies<br />
with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for<br />
consideration of an unnamed product.<br />
7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional<br />
requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the<br />
specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"<br />
Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.<br />
8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of<br />
manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other<br />
named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions,<br />
and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in<br />
Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the<br />
other named manufacturers.<br />
9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established<br />
Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample.<br />
Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.<br />
a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other<br />
specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions"<br />
Article for proposal of product.<br />
10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected<br />
from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that<br />
complies with other specified requirements.<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of<br />
colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern,<br />
density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium<br />
items.<br />
b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors,<br />
patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or<br />
texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium<br />
items.<br />
2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS<br />
A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 14 days prior to Bid<br />
Opening. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of<br />
Architect.<br />
B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following<br />
conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return<br />
requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:<br />
1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy<br />
conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner<br />
must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect<br />
for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and<br />
similar considerations.<br />
2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.<br />
3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce<br />
indicated results.<br />
4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.<br />
5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule.<br />
6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.<br />
8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.<br />
9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.<br />
10. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has<br />
been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is<br />
compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.<br />
11. The specified product cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The Architect will<br />
not consider the request if the specified product cannot be provided as a result of failure<br />
to pursue the Work promptly.<br />
12. The request is related to an "or-equal" clause.<br />
13. The substitution offers the Owner a substantial advantage, in cost, time, or other<br />
considerations, after deducting compensation to the Architect for redesign and increased<br />
cost of other construction.<br />
14. The specified product cannot receive approval by a governing authority, and the<br />
substitution can be approved.<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.3 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS<br />
A. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the<br />
following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will<br />
return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:<br />
1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract<br />
Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the<br />
indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.<br />
2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the<br />
Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size,<br />
durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.<br />
3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.<br />
4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and<br />
names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.<br />
5. Samples, if requested.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)<br />
END OF SECTION 016000<br />
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the<br />
Work including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong> layout.<br />
2. Field engineering and surveying.<br />
3. Installation of the Work.<br />
4. Cutting and patching.<br />
5. Coordination of Owner-installed products.<br />
6. Progress cleaning.<br />
7. Starting and adjusting.<br />
8. Protection of installed construction.<br />
9. Correction of the Work.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for limits on use of <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys.<br />
3. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with<br />
<strong>Project</strong> Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines<br />
and levels, and final cleaning.<br />
4. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for demolition and removal of<br />
selected portions of the building.<br />
5. Division 07 Section "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated<br />
construction.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of<br />
other work.<br />
B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after<br />
installation of other work.<br />
EXECUTION 017300 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor.<br />
B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of<br />
improvements comply with requirements.<br />
C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time<br />
cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information:<br />
1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.<br />
2. Changes to In-Place <strong>Construction</strong>: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to<br />
structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance<br />
and other significant visual elements.<br />
3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform<br />
patching work.<br />
4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.<br />
5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting<br />
and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be<br />
relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time<br />
permanent services and systems will be disrupted.<br />
a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during<br />
interruption of permanent services and systems.<br />
D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept<br />
hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.<br />
E. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.<br />
F. Final Property Survey: Submit 4 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice<br />
in jurisdiction where <strong>Project</strong> is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying<br />
services of the kind indicated.<br />
B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of<br />
construction elements.<br />
1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of<br />
locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding.<br />
Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and<br />
patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or<br />
increase deflection.<br />
2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components<br />
in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in<br />
EXECUTION 017300 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements<br />
include the following:<br />
a. Primary operational systems and equipment.<br />
b. Fire separation assemblies.<br />
c. Air or smoke barriers.<br />
d. Fire-suppression systems.<br />
e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts.<br />
f. Control systems.<br />
g. Communication systems.<br />
h. Fire-detection and -alarm systems.<br />
i. Conveying systems.<br />
j. Electrical wiring systems.<br />
3. Other <strong>Construction</strong> Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or<br />
components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in<br />
reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or<br />
decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not<br />
limited to the following:<br />
a. Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.<br />
b. Membranes and flashings.<br />
c. Exterior curtain-wall construction.<br />
d. Sprayed fire-resistive material.<br />
e. Equipment supports.<br />
f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.<br />
g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.<br />
4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual<br />
evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner<br />
that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and<br />
replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.<br />
C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at <strong>Project</strong> site with parties involved<br />
in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential<br />
interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before<br />
proceeding.<br />
D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written<br />
recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.<br />
EXECUTION 017300 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and<br />
procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements in Division 01<br />
sustainable design requirements Section.<br />
B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed<br />
surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent<br />
possible.<br />
1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed,<br />
will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of<br />
in-place materials.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and<br />
construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate<br />
and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, electrical distribution systems and<br />
other construction affecting the Work.<br />
1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of<br />
sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services,<br />
and other utilities.<br />
2. Furnish location data for work related to <strong>Project</strong> that must be performed by public<br />
utilities serving <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the<br />
Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where<br />
indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions<br />
affecting performance. Record observations.<br />
1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of<br />
connections before equipment and fixture installation.<br />
2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are<br />
to be installed.<br />
3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with<br />
existing finishes or primers.<br />
C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the<br />
Work is required by other Sections, include the following:<br />
1. Description of the Work.<br />
2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.<br />
3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances.<br />
4. Recommended corrections.<br />
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding<br />
with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.<br />
EXECUTION 017300 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust,<br />
move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility<br />
appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck<br />
measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to<br />
other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before<br />
fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the<br />
Work.<br />
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown<br />
diagrammatically on Drawings.<br />
D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for<br />
clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control<br />
of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in<br />
Division 01 Section "<strong>Project</strong> Management and Coordination."<br />
3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT<br />
A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on<br />
Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are<br />
discovered, notify Architect promptly.<br />
B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.<br />
1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of<br />
construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
2. Establish limits on use of <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain<br />
required dimensions.<br />
4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.<br />
5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.<br />
6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable<br />
tolerances.<br />
7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established<br />
by authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill<br />
and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.<br />
D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building<br />
foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and<br />
electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels.<br />
Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.<br />
EXECUTION 017300 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and<br />
levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and<br />
duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log<br />
available for reference by Architect.<br />
3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING<br />
A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.<br />
B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference<br />
points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control<br />
points during construction operations.<br />
1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written<br />
approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points<br />
promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to<br />
Architect before proceeding.<br />
2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base<br />
replacements on the original survey control points.<br />
C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on <strong>Project</strong> site,<br />
referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having<br />
jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.<br />
1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on <strong>Project</strong> Record<br />
Documents.<br />
2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide<br />
temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work.<br />
3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked<br />
construction to its original condition.<br />
D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work<br />
requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations,<br />
angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.<br />
E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing<br />
significant features (real property) for <strong>Project</strong>. Include on the survey a certification, signed by<br />
land surveyor that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of <strong>Project</strong> are accurately positioned<br />
as shown on the survey.<br />
1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing<br />
improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours,<br />
and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point.<br />
2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or<br />
with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."<br />
EXECUTION 017300 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.5 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and<br />
elevation, as indicated.<br />
1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.<br />
2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance<br />
and ease of removal for replacement.<br />
3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.<br />
4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 90 inches in occupied spaces and 80 inches in<br />
unoccupied spaces.<br />
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in<br />
applications indicated.<br />
C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results.<br />
Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.<br />
D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or<br />
loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.<br />
E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction<br />
items on site and placement in permanent locations.<br />
F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.<br />
G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be<br />
factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that<br />
adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated<br />
requirements.<br />
H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size<br />
and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with<br />
other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size<br />
and type required for load conditions.<br />
1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at<br />
heights directed by Architect.<br />
2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.<br />
3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and<br />
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and<br />
items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver<br />
such items to <strong>Project</strong> site in time for installation.<br />
I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated,<br />
arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.<br />
J. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered<br />
hazardous.<br />
EXECUTION 017300 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING<br />
A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching.<br />
Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.<br />
1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance<br />
of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their<br />
original condition.<br />
B. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.<br />
C. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.<br />
Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of <strong>Project</strong> that might be<br />
exposed during cutting and patching operations.<br />
D. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar<br />
operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or<br />
adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply<br />
with original Installer's written recommendations.<br />
1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not<br />
hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with<br />
minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.<br />
2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.<br />
3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a<br />
diamond-core drill.<br />
4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31<br />
Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.<br />
5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be<br />
removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent<br />
entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.<br />
6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.<br />
E. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations<br />
following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as<br />
practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other<br />
Sections, where applicable.<br />
1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to<br />
demonstrate physical integrity of installation.<br />
2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish<br />
restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence<br />
of patching and refinishing.<br />
a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing<br />
materials.<br />
b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.<br />
3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area<br />
into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even<br />
surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall<br />
EXECUTION 017300 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and<br />
appearance.<br />
a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and<br />
intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final<br />
paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional<br />
coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.<br />
4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane<br />
surface of uniform appearance.<br />
5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a<br />
weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.<br />
F. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint,<br />
mortar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.<br />
3.7 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS<br />
A. Site Access: Provide access to <strong>Project</strong> site for Owner's construction personnel.<br />
B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by<br />
Owner's construction personnel.<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong> Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule<br />
for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually<br />
agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences<br />
in actual construction progress.<br />
2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation<br />
conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend<br />
preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of<br />
the Work depend on Owner's construction.<br />
3.8 PROGRESS CLEANING<br />
A. General: Clean <strong>Project</strong> site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce<br />
requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.<br />
1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and<br />
debris.<br />
2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if<br />
the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C).<br />
3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste.<br />
Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.<br />
a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.<br />
4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors<br />
are working concurrently.<br />
EXECUTION 017300 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Site: Maintain <strong>Project</strong> site free of waste materials and debris.<br />
C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for<br />
proper execution of the Work.<br />
1. Remove liquid spills promptly.<br />
2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the<br />
entire work area, as appropriate.<br />
D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written<br />
instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials<br />
specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning<br />
materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.<br />
E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.<br />
F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure<br />
freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.<br />
G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials<br />
down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01<br />
Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Waste Management and Disposal."<br />
H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining<br />
materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from<br />
damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.<br />
I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through<br />
the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure<br />
operability without damaging effects.<br />
J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the<br />
construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise<br />
deleterious exposure during the construction period.<br />
3.9 STARTING AND ADJUSTING<br />
A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in<br />
Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements."<br />
B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove<br />
malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.<br />
C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation<br />
without binding.<br />
D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties.<br />
Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.<br />
E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section<br />
"Quality Requirements."<br />
EXECUTION 017300 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION<br />
A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage<br />
or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.<br />
END OF SECTION 017300<br />
EXECUTION 017300 - 11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:<br />
1. Recycling nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.<br />
2. Disposing of nonhazardous demolition and construction waste.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Division 02 Section "Selective Structure Demolition" for disposition of waste resulting<br />
from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements.<br />
2. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing<br />
and removal of above- and below-grade improvements.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. <strong>Construction</strong> Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting<br />
from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. <strong>Construction</strong> waste includes<br />
packaging.<br />
B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or<br />
selective demolition operations.<br />
C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale,<br />
recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in<br />
preparation for reuse.<br />
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General: Achieve end-of-<strong>Project</strong> rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total<br />
non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the<br />
use of materials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and<br />
demolition waste from landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of<br />
materials, including the following:<br />
1. Demolition Waste:<br />
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
a. Asphalt paving.<br />
b. Concrete.<br />
c. Concrete reinforcing steel.<br />
2. <strong>Construction</strong> Waste:<br />
a. Masonry and CMU.<br />
b. Lumber.<br />
c. Wood sheet materials.<br />
d. Wood trim.<br />
e. Metals.<br />
f. Roofing.<br />
g. Insulation.<br />
h. Carpet and pad.<br />
i. Gypsum board.<br />
j. Piping.<br />
k. Electrical conduit.<br />
l. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph<br />
above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging<br />
materials:<br />
1) Paper.<br />
2) Cardboard.<br />
3) Boxes.<br />
4) Plastic sheet and film.<br />
5) Polystyrene packaging.<br />
6) Wood crates.<br />
7) Plastic pails.<br />
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 7 days of date established for commencement of<br />
the Work.<br />
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit<br />
report. Include the following information:<br />
1. Material category.<br />
2. Generation point of waste.<br />
3. Total quantity of waste in tons (tonnes).<br />
4. Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons (tonnes).<br />
5. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons (tonnes).<br />
6. Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.<br />
B. Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculated<br />
end-of-<strong>Project</strong> rates for recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by the<br />
Work.<br />
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Records of Donations: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste donated to<br />
individuals and organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.<br />
D. Records of Sales: Indicate receipt and acceptance of salvageable waste sold to individuals and<br />
organizations. Indicate whether organization is tax exempt.<br />
E. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste<br />
by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight<br />
tickets, receipts, and invoices.<br />
F. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills<br />
and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts,<br />
and invoices.<br />
G. LEED Submittals: LEED Waste Management Plan and letter template for Credit MR 3.2,<br />
signed by Contractor, investigating local options for diversion, tabulating total waste material,<br />
recording quantities diverted and means by which it is diverted, and statement that requirements<br />
for the credit have been met for waste reduction for two points from the available options.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
B. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site to comply with<br />
requirements in Division 01 Section "<strong>Project</strong> Management and Coordination." Review methods<br />
and procedures related to waste management including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste<br />
management coordinator.<br />
2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its<br />
disposition.<br />
3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of<br />
containers and bins needed to avoid delays.<br />
4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and<br />
disposal facilities.<br />
5. Review waste management requirements for each trade.<br />
1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN<br />
A. General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in<br />
this Section. Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and<br />
cost/revenue analysis. Distinguish between demolition and construction waste. Indicate<br />
quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management<br />
plan.<br />
B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of demolition and construction<br />
waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates.<br />
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled,<br />
or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of<br />
each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation<br />
procedures.<br />
1. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and<br />
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.<br />
2. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and<br />
organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.<br />
3. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled<br />
materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.<br />
4. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include<br />
name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.<br />
5. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating<br />
recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location<br />
where materials separation will be performed.<br />
D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste<br />
management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste<br />
management plan. Include the following:<br />
1. Total quantity of waste.<br />
2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of<br />
collection containers for each type of waste.<br />
3. Total cost of disposal (with no waste management).<br />
4. Revenue from salvaged materials.<br />
5. Revenue from recycled materials.<br />
6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials.<br />
7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided.<br />
8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of<br />
waste.<br />
9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION<br />
A. General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage,<br />
signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan<br />
during the entire duration of the Contract.<br />
1. Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Division 01 Section<br />
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."<br />
B. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management<br />
procedures, as appropriate for the Work.<br />
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal<br />
return.<br />
2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review<br />
plan procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.<br />
C. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure<br />
minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and<br />
used facilities.<br />
1. Designate and label specific areas on <strong>Project</strong> site necessary for separating materials that<br />
are to be salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.<br />
2. Comply with Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling<br />
dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control.<br />
3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.<br />
B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provided for information only; available<br />
recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Insert names and telephone numbers of local recycling receivers and processors of<br />
recyclable materials.<br />
C. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for<br />
recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor be shared equally by Owner and<br />
Contractor.<br />
D. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling<br />
or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum<br />
contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process.<br />
E. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate<br />
recyclable waste by type at <strong>Project</strong> site to the maximum extent practical according to approved<br />
construction waste management plan.<br />
1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until<br />
removed from <strong>Project</strong> site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each<br />
container and bin.<br />
a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials<br />
if found.<br />
2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place,<br />
grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.<br />
3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of<br />
remaining trees.<br />
4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.<br />
5. Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or<br />
processor.<br />
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.3 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE<br />
A. Packaging:<br />
1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry<br />
location.<br />
2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.<br />
3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood<br />
pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.<br />
4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements<br />
for recycling wood.<br />
B. Wood Materials:<br />
1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.<br />
2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.<br />
a. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants." for use of clean<br />
sawdust as organic mulch.<br />
C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry<br />
location.<br />
1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper<br />
or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.<br />
a. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section "Plants." for use of clean ground<br />
gypsum board as inorganic soil amendment.<br />
3.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTE<br />
A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove<br />
waste materials from <strong>Project</strong> site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator<br />
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of<br />
accumulate on-site.<br />
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces<br />
and areas.<br />
B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.<br />
C. Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.<br />
END OF SECTION 017419<br />
CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout,<br />
including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Inspection procedures.<br />
2. Warranties.<br />
3. Final cleaning.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for<br />
Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "<strong>Project</strong> Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings,<br />
Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.<br />
3. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance<br />
manual requirements.<br />
4. Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing<br />
Owner's personnel.<br />
5. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements<br />
for the Work in those Sections.<br />
1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION<br />
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial<br />
Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.<br />
1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on<br />
the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.<br />
2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.<br />
3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final<br />
certifications, and similar documents.<br />
4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to<br />
services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar<br />
releases.<br />
5. Prepare and submit <strong>Project</strong> Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals,<br />
Final Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property<br />
surveys, and similar final record information.<br />
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by<br />
Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.<br />
7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's<br />
personnel of changeover in security provisions.<br />
8. Complete startup testing of systems.<br />
9. Submit test/adjust/balance records.<br />
10. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from <strong>Project</strong> site, along with mockups,<br />
construction tools, and similar elements.<br />
11. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.<br />
12. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and<br />
maintenance.<br />
13. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.<br />
14. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual<br />
defects.<br />
15. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial<br />
Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the Work claimed as<br />
substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completion and an<br />
accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.<br />
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of<br />
request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled<br />
requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection<br />
or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by<br />
Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.<br />
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as<br />
incomplete is completed or corrected.<br />
2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final<br />
Completion.<br />
3. Reinspection Fee: If the Architect has to reinspect the work that was noted in the Punch<br />
List as complete but was not complete, the contractor will be charged Time and<br />
Materials. Payment must be received by the Architect prior to the next Application for<br />
Payment.<br />
1.4 FINAL COMPLETION<br />
A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final<br />
Completion, complete the following:<br />
1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section "Payment<br />
Procedures."<br />
A. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed<br />
or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list<br />
shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. Submit a<br />
copy of the final inspection list stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved<br />
for acceptance.<br />
2. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance<br />
requirements.<br />
3. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty.<br />
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,<br />
equipment, and systems.<br />
B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request,<br />
Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.<br />
Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor<br />
of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.<br />
1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as<br />
incomplete is completed or corrected.<br />
1.5 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)<br />
A. Preparation: Submit one copy of list. Include name and identification of each space and area<br />
affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction<br />
including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.<br />
1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order,.<br />
2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling,<br />
individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.<br />
3. Include the following information at the top of each page:<br />
a. <strong>Project</strong> name.<br />
b. Date.<br />
c. Name of Architect.<br />
d. Name of Contractor.<br />
e. Page number.<br />
1.6 WARRANTIES<br />
A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of<br />
the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is<br />
indicated. See Section 017740- WARRANTIES.<br />
B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of<br />
designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during<br />
construction period by separate agreement with Contractor.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or<br />
fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially<br />
hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.<br />
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 FINAL CLEANING<br />
A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply<br />
with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution<br />
regulations.<br />
B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each<br />
surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and<br />
maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification<br />
of Substantial Completion for entire <strong>Project</strong> or for a portion of <strong>Project</strong>:<br />
a. Clean <strong>Project</strong> site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities,<br />
including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other<br />
foreign substances.<br />
b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other<br />
foreign deposits.<br />
c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured<br />
surface.<br />
d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.<br />
f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition,<br />
free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural<br />
weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original<br />
condition.<br />
g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs,<br />
plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.<br />
h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.<br />
i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap;<br />
shampoo if visible soil or stains remain.<br />
j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.<br />
Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials.<br />
Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish<br />
mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.<br />
k. Remove labels that are not permanent.<br />
l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.<br />
Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or<br />
that already show evidence of repair or restoration.<br />
1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and<br />
electrical nameplates.<br />
m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment.<br />
Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign<br />
substances.<br />
n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions.<br />
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains<br />
resulting from water exposure.<br />
p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed<br />
surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills.<br />
q. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during<br />
construction.<br />
r. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.<br />
Replace burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and<br />
defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply<br />
with requirements for new fixtures.<br />
s. Leave <strong>Project</strong> clean and ready for occupancy.<br />
C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid<br />
<strong>Project</strong> of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.<br />
D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or<br />
excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous<br />
materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from <strong>Project</strong> site and dispose of<br />
lawfully.<br />
END OF SECTION 017700<br />
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 017740 – WARRANTIES<br />
PART 1 – GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for warranties required by the<br />
contract Documents, including manufacturers standard warranties on products and special<br />
warranties.<br />
1. Refer to the General Conditions for terms of the Contractor’s period for correction of the<br />
Work.<br />
B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:<br />
1. Division 1 Section “Submittals” specifies procedures for submitting warranties.<br />
2. Division 1 Section “Contract Closeout” specifies contract closeout procedures.<br />
3. Divisions 2 through 33 sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and<br />
installations specified to be warranted.<br />
4. Certifications and other commitments and agreements for continuing services to Owner<br />
are specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.<br />
C. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties<br />
do not relieve the Contractor of the warranty on the Work that incorporates the products.<br />
Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve suppliers,<br />
manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with the<br />
Contractor.<br />
D. Separate Prime Contracts: Each prime contractor is responsible for warranties related to its own<br />
contract.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Standard product warranties are preprinted written warranties published by individual<br />
manufacturers for particular products and are specifically endorsed by the manufacturer to the<br />
Owner.<br />
WARRANTIES 017740 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Special warranties are written warranties required by or incorporated in the Contract<br />
Documents, either to extend time limits provided by standard warranties or to provide greater<br />
rights for the Owner.<br />
1.4 WARRANTY REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Warranty the entire job for a minimum of one year from the date of Substantial Completion.<br />
Component warranties shall be honored for the term established by the manufacturer, if greater<br />
than one year. Include in the warranty quarterly site visits to check and adjust equipment and<br />
restore systems to original performance standards.<br />
B. Activate manufacturer’s equipment warranties in Owner’s name to commence on the date of<br />
Substantial Completion or other designated date. In the case of Contractor-modified equipment,<br />
the manufacturer’s warranty is normally voided. In such cases, provide the Owner with a<br />
warranty equivalent to that of the original manufacturer.<br />
C. Owner and Contractor shall meet during the 11 th month of the Warranty period to arrange for<br />
final correction of all Warranty items.<br />
D. Submit the following written guarantee, typed on the Contractor’s letterhead for the entire work,<br />
or on the subcontractor’s letterhead depending on each’s responsibility (entire Work, in the case<br />
of the WRITTEN GUARANTEE for Contractor, or a Specific Specification Section, in the case<br />
of a subcontractor):<br />
We hereby guarantee that the materials and workmanship we have provided in<br />
project has been completed in accordance with the <strong>Project</strong> Specification Section<br />
017740.<br />
We agree to repair or replace any or all of our Work, together with any other<br />
adjacent Work which may be displaced or damaged by so doing, that may prove<br />
to be either patently defective in its workmanship or materials within the period<br />
of the time perscribed by law, or latently defective in its workmanship or<br />
materials within the period of time perscribed by law from the date of Substantial<br />
Completion of the work, ordinary wear and tear expected while unusual abuse or<br />
neglect is excluded. We also agree to repair any and all damages resulting from<br />
such defects.<br />
In the event of our failure to comply with above-mentioned requirements within<br />
a reasonable time, but in no case longer than five (5) calandar days after being<br />
notified in writing by the Owner for standard warranty items or 8 hours after<br />
being notified in writing, by fax, by the Owner for emergency warranty items, we<br />
collectively and separately, do hearby authorize the Owner to have said defective<br />
Work and damages repaired or replaced and made good at our expense, and will<br />
honor and pay the costs and charges thereof upon demand within 30 days of<br />
receiving Owner’s bill.<br />
WARRANTIES 017740 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Signed______________________________________________________<br />
(Contractor’s name, address, license number and date)<br />
OR<br />
Signed______________________________________________________<br />
(Subcontractor’s name, address, license number and date)<br />
Countersigned________________________________________________<br />
(Contractor’s name, address, license number and date)<br />
E. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction,<br />
remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be<br />
removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.<br />
F. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected<br />
by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated<br />
warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.<br />
G. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or<br />
rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract<br />
Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective<br />
Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from the use of the Work through a<br />
portion of its anticipated useful service life.<br />
H. Owner’s Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied<br />
warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available<br />
under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in<br />
which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.<br />
1. Rejection of Warranties: the Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit<br />
selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract<br />
Documents.<br />
I. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work<br />
or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the<br />
contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersigh such commitments are willing<br />
to do so.<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Submit written warranties to the Architect prior to the date certified for Substantial Completion.<br />
If the Architect’s Certificate of Substantial Completion designates a commencement date for<br />
warranties other than the date of Substantial Completion for the Work, or a designated portion<br />
of the Work, submit written warranties upon request of the Architect.<br />
WARRANTIES 017740 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. When a designated portion of the Work is completed and occupied or used by the Owner,<br />
by separate agreement with the Contractor during the construction period, submit<br />
properly executed warranties to the Architect within 15 days of completion of that<br />
designated portion of the Work.<br />
B. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor,<br />
supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains<br />
appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties. Submit a draft<br />
to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution.<br />
C. Forms for special warranties are included at the end of this Section. Prepare a written document<br />
utilizing the appropriate form, ready for execution by the contractor, or by the subcontractor,<br />
supplier, or manufacturer. Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval<br />
prior to final execution.<br />
1. Refer to Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular<br />
requirements for submitting special warranties.<br />
D. Form of Submittal: At Final Completion, compile 2 copies of each required warranty properly<br />
executed by the contractor, or by the contractor, subcontractor, supplier, or manufacturer.<br />
Organize the warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the<br />
<strong>Project</strong> <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
E. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, commercial-quality, durable 3-ring, vinyl-covered<br />
loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8½-by-<br />
11-inch paper.<br />
1. Provide heavy paper dividers with celluloid covered tabs for each separate warranty.<br />
Mark the tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the<br />
product or installation, including the name of the product, and the name, address, and<br />
telephone number of the Installer.<br />
2. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed titlte<br />
“WARRANTIES,” <strong>Project</strong> title or name, and name of the Contractor.<br />
3. When warranted construction requires operation and maintenance manuals, provide<br />
additional copies of each required warranty, as necessary, for inclusion in each required<br />
manual.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.1 LIST OF WARRANTIES<br />
A. Schedule: Provide warranties on ALL products and installations as specified.<br />
1. Overall <strong>Project</strong> (GC)<br />
2. Roofing<br />
WARRANTIES 017740 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Stucco<br />
4. Deck treatment<br />
5. Mechanical<br />
a. Combo furnace / air conditioner<br />
b. Exhaust fans<br />
6. Plumbing<br />
a. Toilet<br />
b. Kitchen sink & fixtures<br />
c. Bathroom sink & fixtures<br />
d. Bathtub & shower fixtures<br />
e. Water heater<br />
7. Windows<br />
8. Cabinetry<br />
9. Door Hardware<br />
10. Doors<br />
11. Painting<br />
12. Carpet<br />
13. Other flooring finishes<br />
14. Vinyl base<br />
END OF SECTION 017740<br />
WARRANTIES 017740 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and<br />
maintenance manuals, including the following:<br />
1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory.<br />
2. Emergency manuals.<br />
3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.<br />
4. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for<br />
operation and maintenance manuals.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting operation and maintenance<br />
manuals.<br />
3. Division 01 Section "<strong>Project</strong> Record Documents" for preparing Record Drawings for<br />
operation and maintenance manuals.<br />
4. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual<br />
requirements for the Work in those Sections.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular<br />
interaction.<br />
B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Maintenance <strong>Manual</strong> Preparation: In preparation of maintenance manuals, use personnel<br />
thoroughly trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment or system<br />
involved.<br />
1. Where maintenance manuals require written instructions, use personnel skilled in<br />
technical writing where necessary for communication of essential data.<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Where maintenance manuals require drawings or diagrams, use draftsmen capable of<br />
preparing drawings clearly in an understandable format.<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Initial Submittal: Submit 3 draft copies of each manual at least 30 days before requesting<br />
inspection for Substantial Completion. Include a complete operation and maintenance<br />
directory. Architect will return one copy of draft and mark whether general scope and content<br />
of manual are acceptable.<br />
B. Final Submittal: Submit one copy of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final<br />
inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 21 days after final inspection.<br />
1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of<br />
each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.<br />
1.6 COORDINATION<br />
A. Where operation and maintenance documentation includes information on installations by more<br />
than one factory-authorized service representative, assemble and coordinate information<br />
furnished by representatives and prepare manuals. Preparation of operation and maintenance<br />
manuals includes collecting material, collating and binding material, and submitting data.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY<br />
A. Organization: Include a section in the directory for each of the following:<br />
1. List of documents.<br />
2. List of systems.<br />
3. List of equipment.<br />
4. Table of contents.<br />
B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation<br />
and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.<br />
C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For<br />
pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.<br />
D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance<br />
manual.<br />
E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual,<br />
identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the<br />
Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to<br />
ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building<br />
Systems."<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.2 MANUALS, GENERAL<br />
A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each<br />
system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system.<br />
Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:<br />
1. Title page.<br />
2. Table of contents.<br />
3. <strong>Manual</strong> contents.<br />
B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:<br />
1. Subject matter included in manual.<br />
2. Name and address of <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
3. Name and address of Owner.<br />
4. Date of submittal.<br />
5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor.<br />
6. Name and address of Architect.<br />
7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.<br />
C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed<br />
to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in <strong>Project</strong><br />
<strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to<br />
accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each<br />
volume of the set.<br />
D. <strong>Manual</strong> Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by<br />
system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems,<br />
equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.<br />
1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to<br />
accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on<br />
spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded<br />
oversize sheets.<br />
a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize<br />
data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Crossreference<br />
other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper<br />
operation or maintenance of equipment or system.<br />
b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND<br />
MAINTENANCE MANUAL," <strong>Project</strong> title or name, and subject matter of<br />
contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.<br />
2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each<br />
tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of<br />
equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification<br />
Section number and title of <strong>Project</strong> <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic<br />
software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.<br />
5. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.<br />
a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and<br />
use as foldouts.<br />
b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled<br />
envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in<br />
manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents,<br />
and drawing locations.<br />
2.3 EMERGENCY MANUALS<br />
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:<br />
1. Type of emergency.<br />
2. Emergency instructions.<br />
3. Emergency procedures.<br />
B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include<br />
instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:<br />
1. Fire.<br />
2. Flood.<br />
3. Gas leak.<br />
4. Water leak.<br />
5. Power failure.<br />
6. Water outage.<br />
7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure.<br />
8. Chemical release or spill.<br />
C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages,<br />
and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for<br />
notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.<br />
D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:<br />
1. Instructions on stopping.<br />
2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.<br />
3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.<br />
4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.<br />
5. Special operating instructions and procedures.<br />
2.4 OPERATION MANUALS<br />
A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in<br />
individual Specification Sections and the following information:<br />
1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.<br />
2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Operating standards.<br />
4. Operating procedures.<br />
5. Operating logs.<br />
6. Wiring diagrams.<br />
7. Control diagrams.<br />
8. Piped system diagrams.<br />
9. Precautions against improper use.<br />
10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.<br />
B. Descriptions: Include the following:<br />
1. Product name and model number.<br />
2. Manufacturer's name.<br />
3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.<br />
4. Equipment function.<br />
5. Operating characteristics.<br />
6. Limiting conditions.<br />
7. Performance curves.<br />
8. Engineering data and tests.<br />
9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.<br />
C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:<br />
1. Startup procedures.<br />
2. Equipment or system break-in procedures.<br />
3. Routine and normal operating instructions.<br />
4. Regulation and control procedures.<br />
5. Instructions on stopping.<br />
6. Normal shutdown instructions.<br />
7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.<br />
8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.<br />
9. Special operating instructions and procedures.<br />
D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as<br />
installed.<br />
E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for<br />
identification.<br />
2.5 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL<br />
A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish.<br />
Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and<br />
sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.<br />
B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and<br />
arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and<br />
telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference<br />
Specification Section number and title in <strong>Project</strong> <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:<br />
1. Product name and model number.<br />
2. Manufacturer's name.<br />
3. Color, pattern, and texture.<br />
4. Material and chemical composition.<br />
5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.<br />
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:<br />
1. Inspection procedures.<br />
2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.<br />
3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.<br />
4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.<br />
5. Repair instructions.<br />
E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and<br />
related services.<br />
F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and<br />
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.<br />
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.<br />
2.6 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL<br />
A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include<br />
source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures,<br />
maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service<br />
contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.<br />
B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual,<br />
identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product,<br />
list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent,<br />
and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in <strong>Project</strong> <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation<br />
including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:<br />
1. Standard printed maintenance instructions and bulletins.<br />
2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly<br />
and component removal, replacement, and assembly.<br />
3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.<br />
4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.<br />
D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential<br />
maintenance procedures:<br />
1. Test and inspection instructions.<br />
2. Troubleshooting guide.<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Precautions against improper maintenance.<br />
4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.<br />
5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.<br />
6. Demonstration and training videotape, if available.<br />
E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of<br />
required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine<br />
maintenance and service with standard time allotment.<br />
1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly,<br />
quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies.<br />
2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording<br />
maintenance.<br />
F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with<br />
parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local<br />
sources of maintenance materials and related services.<br />
G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and<br />
telephone number of service agent.<br />
H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and<br />
conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.<br />
1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides<br />
an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.<br />
B. Emergency <strong>Manual</strong>: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures<br />
for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies<br />
indicated.<br />
C. Product Maintenance <strong>Manual</strong>: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care<br />
and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.<br />
D. Operation and Maintenance <strong>Manual</strong>s: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance<br />
data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment<br />
not part of a system.<br />
1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information<br />
for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.<br />
2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional<br />
manual for use by Owner's operating personnel.<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include<br />
only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each<br />
product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a<br />
tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents.<br />
Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.<br />
1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and<br />
where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or<br />
systems.<br />
F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the<br />
relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and<br />
flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to<br />
ensure correct illustration of completed installation.<br />
1. Do not use original <strong>Project</strong> Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance<br />
manuals.<br />
2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared Record Drawings in Division 01 Section<br />
"<strong>Project</strong> Record Documents."<br />
G. Comply with Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation<br />
and maintenance documentation.<br />
END OF SECTION 017823<br />
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for <strong>Project</strong> Record<br />
Documents, including the following:<br />
1. Record Drawings.<br />
2. Record Specifications.<br />
3. Record Product Data.<br />
4. Marked-up copies of Contract Drawings.<br />
5. Marked-up copies of Shop Drawings.<br />
6. Newly prepared drawings.<br />
7. Marked-up copies of Specifications, addenda, and Change Orders.<br />
8. Marked-up Product Data submittals.<br />
9. Record Samples.<br />
10. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.<br />
11. Record information on Work that is recorded only schematically.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance<br />
manual requirements.<br />
3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for <strong>Project</strong> Record<br />
Documents of the Work in those Sections.<br />
C. Maintenance of Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field<br />
office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Provide separate files, racks,<br />
and secure storage for <strong>Project</strong> Record Documents. Do not use <strong>Project</strong> Record Documents for<br />
construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible<br />
condition. Protect record documents from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistant<br />
location. Make documents and samples available at all times for the Architect.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:<br />
1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints.<br />
2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:<br />
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
a. Initial Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will<br />
initial and date each print and mark whether general scope of changes, additional<br />
information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return<br />
prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal.<br />
b. Final Submittal: Submit one set of marked-up Record Prints, and three copies.<br />
Print each Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were<br />
recorded.<br />
3. Submit record drawings to the Architect for the Owner’s records. Organize into sets and<br />
bind and label sets for the owners use.<br />
4. Thirty days prior to Substantial Completion, submit record drawings to the Architect for<br />
review. Organize into sets and bind and label sets for the Owner's continued use.<br />
5. Record drawings and specifications must be available for review by the Architect at each<br />
Application for Payment. The record should reflect the work that has been accomplished<br />
during the time period of the Application for Payment.<br />
B. Record Specifications: Submit one copy of <strong>Project</strong>'s Specifications, including addenda and<br />
contract modifications.<br />
C. Record Product Data: Submit one copy of each Product Data submittal.<br />
1. Where Record Product Data is required as part of operation and maintenance manuals,<br />
submit marked-up Product Data as an insert in manual instead of submittal as Record<br />
Product Data.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS<br />
A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings<br />
and Shop Drawings. Markup Procedure: During construction, maintain a set of OCE prints of<br />
Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for <strong>Project</strong> Record Document purposes.<br />
1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies<br />
from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data,<br />
whether individual or entity is installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the<br />
marked-up Record Prints.<br />
a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be<br />
difficult to identify or measure and record later.<br />
b. Accurately record information in an understandable drawing technique.<br />
c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup<br />
before enclosing concealed installations.<br />
2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Dimensional changes to Drawings.<br />
b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings.<br />
c. Depths of foundations below first floor.<br />
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
d. Locations and depths of underground utilities.<br />
e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.<br />
f. Revisions to electrical circuitry.<br />
g. Actual equipment locations.<br />
h. Duct size and routing.<br />
i. Locations of concealed internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in<br />
construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction.<br />
j. Changes made by Change Order or <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive.<br />
k. Changes made following Architect's written orders.<br />
l. Details not on the original Contract Drawings.<br />
m. Field records for variable and concealed conditions.<br />
n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.<br />
3. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing<br />
actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked,<br />
show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.<br />
4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish<br />
between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.<br />
5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted<br />
from original Drawings.<br />
6. Note <strong>Construction</strong> Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order<br />
numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.<br />
7. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal any work<br />
until required information is recorded. Date entries reflecting change.<br />
B. Record Prints: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review<br />
marked-up Record Prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected prints<br />
of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.<br />
1. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on Record Prints.<br />
Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.<br />
2. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.<br />
3. Print the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings for use as Record Prints. Architect will<br />
make the Contract Drawings available to Contractor's print shop.<br />
4. Review of Record Prints: Before copying and distributing, submit corrected<br />
transparencies and the original marked-up prints to the Architect for review. When<br />
acceptable, the Architect will initial and date each print. Acceptance by the Architect<br />
indicates acceptance of general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and of<br />
the quality of drafting.<br />
a. The Architect will return record prints and the original marked-up prints to the<br />
Contractor for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal.<br />
C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing Record<br />
Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop<br />
Drawings are suitable to show actual installation.<br />
1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting<br />
an alternate, substitution, or other modification.<br />
2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record<br />
the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly<br />
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
prepared Record Drawings into Record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for<br />
formatting, organizing, copying, binding, and submitting.<br />
D. Format: After completing the preparation of transparency record drawings, print 3 blue- or<br />
black-line prints of each drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were<br />
recorded. Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT<br />
RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.<br />
1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into<br />
manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification<br />
on cover sheets.<br />
2. Identification: As follows:<br />
a. <strong>Project</strong> name.<br />
b. Date.<br />
c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."<br />
d. Name of Architect.<br />
e. Name of Contractor.<br />
2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS<br />
A. Preparation: During the construction period, maintain 1 copy of the <strong>Project</strong> Specifications,<br />
including addenda and modifications issued, for <strong>Project</strong> Record Document purposes. Mark<br />
Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that<br />
indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. Note related project record<br />
drawing information, where applicable.<br />
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that<br />
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.<br />
2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and<br />
equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.<br />
3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to<br />
provide a record of selections made and to document coordination with record Product<br />
Data submittals and maintenance manuals.<br />
4. For each principal product, indicate whether Record Product Data has been submitted in<br />
operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as Record Product Data.<br />
5. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where<br />
applicable.<br />
2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA<br />
A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation<br />
varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. During the construction<br />
period, maintain one copy of each Product Data submittal for <strong>Project</strong> Record Document<br />
purposes.<br />
1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that<br />
cannot be readily identified and recorded later.<br />
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to <strong>Project</strong> site and changes in<br />
manufacturer's written instructions for installation.<br />
3. Note related Change Orders and Record Drawings where applicable.<br />
4. Upon completion of markup, submit a complete set of record Product Data to the<br />
Architect for the Owner's records.<br />
5. Where record Product Data is required as part of maintenance manuals, submit markedup<br />
Product Data as an insert in the manual instead of submittal as record Product Data.<br />
2.4 RECORD SAMPLE SUBMITTAL<br />
A. Immediately prior to date of Substantial Completion meet with the Architect and the Owner's<br />
personnel at the site to determine which of the Samples maintained during the construction<br />
period shall be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes. Comply with the Architect's<br />
instructions for packaging, identification marking, and delivery to the Owner's Sample storage<br />
space. Dispose of other Samples in a manner specified for disposing surplus and waste<br />
materials.<br />
2.5 MAINTENANCE MANUAL SUBMITTAL<br />
A. When each construction activity that requires submittal of (3) maintenance manuals is<br />
nominally complete, but before Substantial Completion, submit maintenance manuals specified.<br />
Refer to Section 01730 “Operation and Maintenance Data” for administrative and procedural<br />
requirements for maintenance manuals.<br />
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous<br />
record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately<br />
prior to Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order,<br />
properly identified. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued<br />
use and reference. Categories of requirements resulting in miscellaneous records include, but<br />
are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Field records on excavations and foundations.<br />
2. Field records on underground construction and similar work.<br />
3. Survey showing locations and elevations of underground lines.<br />
4. Invert elevations of drainage piping.<br />
5. Surveys establishing building lines and levels.<br />
6. Authorized measurements utilizing unit prices or allowances.<br />
7. Records of plant treatment.<br />
8. Ambient and substrate condition tests.<br />
9. Certifications received in lieu of labels on bulk products.<br />
10. Batch mixing and bulk delivery records.<br />
11. Testing and qualification of tradesmen.<br />
12. Documented qualification of installation firms.<br />
13. Load and performance testing.<br />
14. Inspections and certifications by governing authorities.<br />
15. Leakage and water-penetration tests.<br />
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
16. Fire-resistance and flame-spread test results.<br />
17. Final inspection and correction procedures.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE<br />
A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for <strong>Project</strong><br />
Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to <strong>Project</strong> Record Documents as<br />
they occur; do not wait until the end of <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the<br />
field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use <strong>Project</strong><br />
Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and<br />
in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to<br />
<strong>Project</strong> Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.<br />
END OF SECTION 017839<br />
PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's<br />
personnel, including the following:<br />
1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.<br />
2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Allowances" for administrative and procedural requirements for<br />
demonstration and training allowances.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "<strong>Project</strong> Management and Coordination" for requirements for<br />
preinstruction conferences.<br />
3. Divisions 02 through 49 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and<br />
training for products in those Sections.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Instruction Program: Submit two copies of outline of instructional program for demonstration<br />
and training, including a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and<br />
instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each<br />
training module.<br />
1. At completion of training, submit one complete training manual(s) for Owner's use.<br />
B. Qualification Data: For instructor.<br />
C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of<br />
instruction time.<br />
D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and<br />
documentation.<br />
E. For each training session, submit reproducible digital video recording of actual session for<br />
Owner’s use.<br />
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with<br />
requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and<br />
maintenance procedures and training.<br />
B. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site to comply with requirements in<br />
Division 01 Section "<strong>Project</strong> Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures<br />
related to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.<br />
2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials,<br />
instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.<br />
3. Review required content of instruction.<br />
4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions<br />
and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.<br />
1.5 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to<br />
minimize disrupting Owner's operations.<br />
B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction<br />
time, and course content.<br />
C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and<br />
maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data<br />
has been reviewed and approved by Architect.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM<br />
A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules<br />
for each system and equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification<br />
Sections, and as follows:<br />
1. Motorized doors, including automatic entrance doors.<br />
2. Equipment, including residential appliances.<br />
3. Fire-protection systems, including fire alarm and fire-extinguishing systems.<br />
4. Intrusion detection systems.<br />
5. Heat generation, including boilers, pumps] and water distribution piping.<br />
6. HVAC systems, including air-handling equipment, air distribution systems and terminal<br />
equipment and devices.<br />
7. HVAC instrumentation and controls.<br />
8. Electrical service and distribution, including transformers, switchboards, panel boards,<br />
uninterruptible power supplies and motor controls.<br />
9. Packaged engine generators, including transfer switches.<br />
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
10. Lighting equipment and controls.<br />
11. Communication systems, including surveillance, clocks and programming, voice and data<br />
and] television equipment.<br />
B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include<br />
a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each<br />
module, include instruction for the following:<br />
1. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:<br />
a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.<br />
b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.<br />
c. Operating standards.<br />
d. Regulatory requirements.<br />
e. Equipment function.<br />
f. Operating characteristics.<br />
g. Limiting conditions.<br />
h. Performance curves.<br />
2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail:<br />
a. Emergency manuals.<br />
b. Operations manuals.<br />
c. Maintenance manuals.<br />
d. <strong>Project</strong> Record Documents.<br />
e. Identification systems.<br />
f. Warranties and bonds.<br />
g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.<br />
3. Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:<br />
a. Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.<br />
b. Instructions on stopping.<br />
c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.<br />
d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.<br />
e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems.<br />
f. Special operating instructions and procedures.<br />
4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable:<br />
a. Startup procedures.<br />
b. Equipment or system break-in procedures.<br />
c. Routine and normal operating instructions.<br />
d. Regulation and control procedures.<br />
e. Control sequences.<br />
f. Safety procedures.<br />
g. Instructions on stopping.<br />
h. Normal shutdown instructions.<br />
i. Operating procedures for emergencies.<br />
j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.<br />
k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.<br />
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
l. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.<br />
m. Special operating instructions and procedures.<br />
5. Adjustments: Include the following:<br />
a. Alignments.<br />
b. Checking adjustments.<br />
c. Noise and vibration adjustments.<br />
d. Economy and efficiency adjustments.<br />
6. Troubleshooting: Include the following:<br />
a. Diagnostic instructions.<br />
b. Test and inspection procedures.<br />
7. Maintenance: Include the following:<br />
a. Inspection procedures.<br />
b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.<br />
c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.<br />
d. Procedures for routine cleaning<br />
e. Procedures for preventive maintenance.<br />
f. Procedures for routine maintenance.<br />
g. Instruction on use of special tools.<br />
8. Repairs: Include the following:<br />
a. Diagnosis instructions.<br />
b. Repair instructions.<br />
c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly<br />
instructions.<br />
d. Instructions for identifying parts and components.<br />
e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 PREPARATION<br />
A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training<br />
module. Assemble training modules into a combined training manual.<br />
B. Set up instructional equipment and digital video recording equipment at instruction location.<br />
3.2 INSTRUCTION<br />
A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules,<br />
to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of<br />
participants, instruction times, and location.<br />
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain<br />
systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.<br />
1. Architect will furnish an instructor only to describe basis of system design, operational<br />
requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements.<br />
2. Owner will furnish an instructor only to describe Owner's operational philosophy.<br />
3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.<br />
C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires<br />
seasonal operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.<br />
1. Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with at least seven days' advance<br />
notice.<br />
D. Record Session on digital video media.<br />
E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's<br />
mastery of module by use of a demonstration performance-based test.<br />
F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove<br />
instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial<br />
training use.<br />
END OF SECTION 017900<br />
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 5
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Demolition and removal of selected site elements.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Summary" for restrictions on the use of the premises, Owneroccupancy<br />
requirements, and phasing requirements.<br />
2. Division 01 Section "Execution" for cutting and patching procedures.<br />
3. Division 31 Section "Site Clearing" for site clearing and removal of above- and belowgrade<br />
improvements.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless<br />
indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.<br />
B. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall<br />
where indicated.<br />
C. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and<br />
that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and<br />
reinstalled.<br />
1.4 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP<br />
A. Unless otherwise indicated, demolition waste becomes property of Contractor.<br />
B. Historic items, relics, antiques, and similar objects including, but not limited to, cornerstones<br />
and their contents, commemorative plaques and tablets, and other items of interest or value to<br />
Owner that may be uncovered during demolition remain the property of Owner.<br />
1. Carefully salvage in a manner to prevent damage and promptly return to Owner.<br />
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 1
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.5 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS<br />
A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1. Inspect and discuss condition of construction to be selectively demolished.<br />
2. Review structural load limitations of existing structure.<br />
3. Review and finalize selective demolition schedule and verify availability of materials,<br />
demolition personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid<br />
delays.<br />
4. Review requirements of work performed by other trades that rely on substrates exposed<br />
by selective demolition operations.<br />
5. Review areas where existing construction is to remain and requires protection.<br />
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For refrigerant recovery technician.<br />
B. Proposed Protection Measures: Submit report, including drawings, that indicates the measures<br />
proposed for protecting individuals and property, for environmental protection, for dust control<br />
and, for noise control. Indicate proposed locations and construction of barriers.<br />
C. Schedule of Selective Demolition Activities: Indicate the following:<br />
1. Detailed sequence of selective demolition and removal work, with starting and ending<br />
dates for each activity.<br />
2. Interruption of utility services. Indicate how long utility services will be interrupted.<br />
3. Coordination for shutoff, capping, and continuation of utility services.<br />
D. Inventory: Submit a list of items to be removed and salvaged and deliver to Owner prior to start<br />
of demolition.<br />
E. Predemolition Photographs or Video: Submit before Work begins.<br />
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Inventory: Submit a list of items that have been removed and salvaged.<br />
B. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill facility<br />
licensed to accept hazardous wastes.<br />
1.8 FIELD CONDITIONS<br />
A. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as<br />
far as practical.<br />
B. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding<br />
with selective demolition.<br />
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 2
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the<br />
Work.<br />
1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work.<br />
2. If suspected hazardous materials are encountered, do not disturb; immediately notify<br />
Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate<br />
contract.<br />
D. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them<br />
against damage during selective demolition operations.<br />
1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before<br />
beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities<br />
having jurisdiction.<br />
B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition<br />
operations.<br />
B. Review record documents of existing construction provided by Owner. Owner does not<br />
guarantee that existing conditions are same as those indicated in record documents.<br />
C. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of<br />
selective demolition required.<br />
D. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended<br />
function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict.<br />
Promptly submit a written report to Architect.<br />
E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of preconstruction<br />
photographs and preconstruction videotapes.<br />
1. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Photographic<br />
Documentation."<br />
2. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged. Provide<br />
photographs and video of conditions that might be misconstrued as damage caused by<br />
salvage operations.<br />
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 3
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Before selective demolition or removal of existing building elements that will be<br />
reproduced or duplicated in final Work, make permanent record of measurements,<br />
materials, and construction details required to make exact reproduction.<br />
3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS<br />
A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and<br />
protect them against damage.<br />
1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in<br />
Division 01 Section "Summary."<br />
B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify,<br />
disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems<br />
serving areas to be selectively demolished.<br />
1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor.<br />
2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies.<br />
3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide<br />
temporary services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain<br />
continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.<br />
4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC<br />
systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.<br />
a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and<br />
cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.<br />
b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same<br />
or compatible piping material.<br />
c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.<br />
d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and<br />
remove, clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and<br />
make equipment operational.<br />
e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and<br />
remove equipment and deliver to Owner.<br />
3.3 PREPARATION<br />
A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal<br />
operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other<br />
adjacent occupied and used facilities.<br />
1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Division 01 Section<br />
"Temporary Facilities and Controls."<br />
B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent<br />
injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.<br />
1. Provide protection to ensure safe passage of people around selective demolition area and<br />
to and from occupied portions of building.<br />
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 4
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Provide temporary weather protection, during interval between selective demolition of<br />
existing construction on exterior surfaces and new construction, to prevent water leakage<br />
and damage to structure and interior areas.<br />
C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required<br />
to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes<br />
to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction<br />
being demolished.<br />
1. Strengthen or add new supports when required during progress of selective demolition.<br />
3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new<br />
construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of<br />
governing regulations and as follows:<br />
1. Proceed with selective demolition systematically, from higher to lower level. Complete<br />
selective demolition operations above each floor or tier before disturbing supporting<br />
members on the next lower level.<br />
2. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use<br />
cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction.<br />
Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and<br />
chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to<br />
remain.<br />
3. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring<br />
existing finished surfaces.<br />
4. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly. Comply with requirements in<br />
Division 01 Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Waste Management and Disposal."<br />
B. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling<br />
during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable,<br />
protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their<br />
original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.<br />
3.5 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIFIC MATERIALS<br />
A. Concrete: Demolish in sections. Cut concrete full depth at junctures with construction to<br />
remain and at regular intervals using power-driven saw, then remove concrete between saw<br />
cuts.<br />
B. Masonry: Demolish in small sections. Cut masonry at junctures with construction to remain,<br />
using power-driven saw, then remove masonry between saw cuts.<br />
C. Concrete Slabs-on-Grade: Saw-cut perimeter of area to be demolished, then break up and<br />
remove.<br />
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 5
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.6 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or<br />
otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from <strong>Project</strong> site<br />
and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.<br />
1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site.<br />
2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces<br />
and areas.<br />
3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that<br />
will convey debris to grade level in a controlled descent.<br />
4. Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Waste<br />
Management and Disposal."<br />
B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.<br />
C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.<br />
3.7 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective<br />
demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition<br />
operations began.<br />
END OF SECTION 024119<br />
SELECTIVE STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 024119 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 018113 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain USGBC<br />
LEED prerequisites and credits needed for <strong>Project</strong> to obtain LEED Gold certification based on<br />
LEED-H, Version 2.2.<br />
A. Other LEED prerequisites and credits needed to obtain LEED certification depend on<br />
material selections and may not be specifically identified as LEED requirements.<br />
Compliance with requirements needed to obtain LEED prerequisites and credits may be<br />
used as one criterion to evaluate substitution requests and comparable product requests.<br />
B. Additional LEED prerequisites and credits needed to obtain the indicated LEED<br />
certification depend on Architect's design and other aspects of <strong>Project</strong> that are not part of<br />
the Work of the Contract.<br />
C. A copy of the preliminary LEED <strong>Project</strong> checklist is attached at the end of this Section<br />
for information only.<br />
D. Owner will provide LEED-H provider and rater. Cooperate and coordinate with LEED-<br />
H provider and rater to document LEED application.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
A. Divisions 01 through 33 Sections for LEED requirements specific to the work of each of<br />
these Sections. Requirements may or may not include reference to LEED.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used<br />
to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to<br />
comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."<br />
Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an<br />
FSC-FSC-accredited certification body. FSC certification is required only for tropical woods (if<br />
used).<br />
B. LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design.<br />
C. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from plants that are typically harvested within a<br />
10-year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made from bamboo,<br />
cotton, flax, jute, straw, sunflower seed hulls, vegetable oils, or wool.<br />
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Locally Produced Materials: Materials that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as<br />
well as manufactured, within 500 miles of <strong>Project</strong> site. If only a fraction of a product or<br />
material is extracted/harvested/recovered and manufactured locally, then only that percentage<br />
(by weight) shall contribute to the regional value.<br />
E. Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured within a radius of 500<br />
miles from <strong>Project</strong> site. Manufacturing refers to the final assembly of components into the<br />
building product that is installed at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
F. Regionally Extracted and Manufactured Materials: Regionally manufactured materials made<br />
from raw materials that are extracted, harvested, or recovered within a radius of 500 miles from<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
G. Recycled Content: The recycled content value of a material assembly shall be determined by<br />
weight. The recycled fraction of the assembly is then multiplied by the cost of assembly to<br />
determine the recycled content value.<br />
A. "Post-consumer" material is defined as waste material generated by households or by<br />
commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end users of the product,<br />
which can no longer be used for its intended purpose.<br />
B. "Pre-consumer" material is defined as material diverted from the waste stream during the<br />
manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind, or<br />
scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that<br />
generated it.<br />
1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Respond to questions and requests from Architect and the USGBC regarding LEED credits that<br />
are the responsibility to the Contractor, that depend on product selection or product qualities, or<br />
that depend on Contractor’s procedures until the USGBC has made its determination on the<br />
project’s LEED certification application. Document responses as informational submittals.<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. General: Submit additional LEED submittals required by other Specification Sections.<br />
B. LEED submittals are in addition to other submittals. If submitted item is identical to that<br />
submitted to comply with other requirements, submit duplicate copies as a separate submittal to<br />
verify compliance with indicated LEED requirements.<br />
C. <strong>Project</strong> Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for materials used for<br />
<strong>Project</strong>. Costs exclude labor, overhead, and profit. Include breakout of costs for the following<br />
categories of items:<br />
A. Furniture.<br />
B. Plumbing.<br />
C. Mechanical.<br />
D. Electrical.<br />
E. Specialty items such as elevators and equipment.<br />
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 14 days of date established for<br />
commencement of the Work indicating how the following requirements will be met:<br />
A. Credit MR 2.1:<br />
a. Provide a copy of wood product suppliers’ notice containing all of the following<br />
elements:<br />
i. a statement that the builder’s preference is to purchase products containing<br />
tropical wood only if it is FSC-certified;<br />
ii. a request for the country of manufacture of each product supplied; and<br />
iii. a request for a list of FSC-certified tropical wood products the vendor can<br />
supply.<br />
iv. Required notice to all wood products suppliers. Accountability Form<br />
confirming that no tropical woods were used except those that were FSCcertified<br />
or reclaimed.<br />
b. If tropical wood is intentionally used (i.e., specified in purchasing documents), use<br />
only FSC-certified tropical wood products. Reused or reclaimed materials are<br />
exempt. (Owner’s Green rates will provide copy of form letter upon request).<br />
B. Credit MR 2.2: List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate cost, postconsumer<br />
recycled content for each product having recycled content.<br />
C. Credit MR 2.2: List of proposed locally-produced materials. Identify each material,<br />
including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight that is considered regional.<br />
D. Credit MR 3.1<br />
a. Relevant product stamps, certification labels, web links, and/or literature to the<br />
Verification Team as needed to demonstrate that the credit requirements were met.<br />
b. Signed and dated Accountability Form to indicate that each product being counted<br />
in this credit represents the required minimum percentage of the applicable<br />
component.<br />
E. Credit EQ 8.1: <strong>Construction</strong> indoor containment control plan.<br />
F. MR 3.1: <strong>Construction</strong> Waste Management Plan investigating and documenting all local<br />
options for diversion of all major constituents of the project waste stream.<br />
E. LEED Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports<br />
comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED action plans for the<br />
following:<br />
A. Credit MR 3.1: Document the diversion rate for <strong>Construction</strong> Waste including waste<br />
tickets<br />
B. Credit MR 2.2: Recycled content.<br />
C. Credit MR 2..2]: Locally-produced materials.<br />
D. Credit MR 2.1: Certified wood products.<br />
F. LEED Documentation Submittals:<br />
A. Credit MR 3.1 Comply with Division 01 Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Waste Management and<br />
Disposal."<br />
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Credit MR 2.: Product data and certification letter indicating percentages by weight of<br />
post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content.<br />
Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.<br />
C. Credit MR 2.2: Product data for regional materials indicating location and distance from<br />
<strong>Project</strong> of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each<br />
raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the<br />
fraction by weight that is considered locally produced.<br />
D. Retain first subparagraph below if Contractor determines which items will be made from<br />
certified wood to achieve the 50 percent requirement. Delete if other Specification<br />
Sections designate items to be made from certified wood. First option applies to LEED-<br />
CS; second to LEED-NC and LEED-CI.<br />
E. Credit MR 2.1 Product data and chain-of-custody certificates for products containing<br />
certified wood. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.<br />
F. Credit MR 8.1:<br />
a. <strong>Construction</strong> indoor containment control plan.<br />
b. <strong>Construction</strong> Documentation: Six photographs at three different times during the<br />
construction period, along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach<br />
employed, documenting implementation of the containment management<br />
measures, such as protection of ducts.<br />
c. Signed Accountability Forms indicating that the system is installed according to<br />
design specifications.<br />
G. Credit EQ 8.3:<br />
a. Signed Accountability Forms describing the building air flush-out procedures<br />
including the dates when flush-out was begun and completed according to<br />
requirements.<br />
H. Credit MR 2.2: Product data for adhesives and sealants used inside the weatherproofing<br />
system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L<br />
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.<br />
I. Credit MR 2.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing<br />
system indicating chemical composition and] VOC content of each product used.<br />
Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.<br />
J. Credit MR 2.2: Product data for cement concrete products containing fly-ash content by<br />
percentage of weight.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS<br />
A. Credit MR 2.2: Provide building materials with recycled content that meet LEED-H standard<br />
referenced percent of materials used for project.<br />
A. Recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of post-consumer<br />
recycled content in the item by total weight of the item.<br />
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.2 LOCALLY-PRODUCED MATERIALS<br />
A. Credit MR2.2: Provide LEED-H designated building materials that are locally-produced<br />
materials.<br />
A. Foundation aggregate<br />
B. Portland Cement<br />
C. Gypsum Board (drywall)<br />
D. Concrete Masonry<br />
2.3 CERTIFIED WOOD<br />
A. Credit MR2.1: If any tropical wood is used, provide a minimum of 50 percent (by cost) of<br />
wood-based materials that are produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSCaccredited<br />
certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for<br />
Forest Stewardship."<br />
B. Credit MR2.1: Provide all wood products suppliers with a Notice of Preference for FSC<br />
products.<br />
2.4 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS<br />
A. Credit MR 2.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives<br />
and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according<br />
to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D:<br />
A. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.<br />
B. Metal to Metal Adhesives: 30 g/L.<br />
C. Adhesives for Porous Materials (Except Wood): 50 g/L.<br />
D. Subfloor Adhesives: 50 g/L.<br />
E. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.<br />
F. Carpet Adhesives: 50 g/L.<br />
G. Carpet Pad Adhesives: 50 g/L.<br />
H. VCT and Asphalt Tile Adhesives: 50 g/L.<br />
I. Cove Base Adhesives: 50 g/L.<br />
J. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.<br />
K. Rubber Floor Adhesives: 60 g/L.<br />
L. Ceramic Tile Adhesives: 65 g/L.<br />
M. Multipurpose <strong>Construction</strong> Adhesives: 70 g/L.<br />
N. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.<br />
O. Contact Adhesive: 80 g/L.<br />
P. Structural Glazing Adhesives: 100 g/L.<br />
Q. Wood Flooring Adhesive: 100 g/L.<br />
R. Structural Wood Member Adhesive: 140 g/L.<br />
S. Special Purpose Contact Adhesive (contact adhesive that is used to bond melamine<br />
covered board, metal, unsupported vinyl, Teflon, ultra-high molecular weight<br />
polyethylene, rubber or wood veneer 1/16 inch or less in thickness to any surface): 250<br />
g/L.<br />
T. Top and Trim Adhesive: 250 g/L.<br />
U. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 250 g/L.<br />
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
V. ABS Welding Compounds: 325 g/L.<br />
W. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.<br />
X. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.<br />
Y. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 550 g/L.<br />
Z. Plastic Cement Welding Compounds: 350 g/L.<br />
AA. ABS Welding Compounds: 400 g/L.<br />
BB. CPVC Welding Compounds: 490 g/L.<br />
CC. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L.<br />
DD. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L.<br />
EE. Sheet Applied Rubber Lining Adhesive: 850 g/L.<br />
FF. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Mist Spray: 65 percent by weight.<br />
GG. Aerosol Adhesive, General Purpose Web Spray: 55 percent by weight.<br />
HH. Special Purpose Aerosol Adhesive (All Types): 70 percent by weight.<br />
II. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.<br />
JJ. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.<br />
KK. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.<br />
LL. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.<br />
MM. Other Sealants: 420 g/L.<br />
NN. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.<br />
OO. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.<br />
PP. Modified Bituminous Sealant Primers: 500 g/L.<br />
QQ. Other Sealant Primers: 750 g/L.<br />
B. Credit MR 2.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use paints and<br />
coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to<br />
40 CFR 59, Subpart D and the following chemical restrictions:<br />
A. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 50 g/L.<br />
B. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC not more than 150 g/L.<br />
C. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250<br />
g/L.<br />
D. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes: VOC not more than 350 g/L.<br />
E. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L.<br />
F. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.<br />
G. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.<br />
H. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.<br />
I. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.<br />
J. Flat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC not more than 50 g/L.<br />
K. Nonflat Interior Topcoat Paints: VOC not more than 150 g/L.<br />
L. Anticorrosive and Antirust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250<br />
g/L.<br />
M. Clear Wood Finishes, Varnishes and Sanding Sealers: VOC not more than 350 g/L.<br />
N. Clear Wood Finishes, Lacquers: VOC not more than 550 g/L.<br />
O. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.<br />
P. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.<br />
Q. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.<br />
R. Stains: VOC not more than 250 g/L.<br />
S. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC not more than 200 g/L.<br />
T. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC not more than 400 g/L.<br />
U. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC not more than 340 g/L.<br />
V. Pretreatment Wash Primers: VOC not more than 420 g/L.<br />
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
W. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by<br />
weight total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more<br />
benzene rings).<br />
X. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:<br />
a. Acrolein.<br />
b. Acrylonitrile.<br />
c. Antimony.<br />
d. Benzene.<br />
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.<br />
f. Cadmium.<br />
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.<br />
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.<br />
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.<br />
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.<br />
k. Diethyl phthalate.<br />
l. Dimethyl phthalate.<br />
m. Ethylbenzene.<br />
n. Formaldehyde.<br />
o. Hexavalent chromium.<br />
p. Isophorone.<br />
q. Lead.<br />
r. Mercury.<br />
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.<br />
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.<br />
u. Methylene chloride.<br />
v. Naphthalene.<br />
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).<br />
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.<br />
y. Vinyl chloride.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 QUALITY MANAGEMENT FOR DURABILITY<br />
A. ID 2.1: Review the Verification Checklist that is part of this Bid Package. At Substantial<br />
Completion provide signed, completed checklist to Green Rater.<br />
3.2 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT<br />
A. Credit MR 3.1 and Credit MR3.2: Comply with Division 01 Section "<strong>Construction</strong> Waste<br />
Management and Disposal." Develop waste management plan and submit waste tickets to<br />
Green Rater along with a summary of waste diverted at substantial completion.<br />
3.3 CONSTRUCTION CONTAINMENT CONTROL<br />
A. Credit EQ 8.1:<br />
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Credit EQ 8.3:<br />
1. After construction ends, prior to occupancy and will all interior finishes installed,<br />
perform a building flush-out for a minimum of 48 hours.<br />
3.4 EDUCATION<br />
A. Credit AE 1.1 and 1.3: Provide all necessary material and information to Green Rater for the<br />
purpose of educating the Owner and tenants in the operation and maintenance of all relevant<br />
building finishes and systems and equipment.<br />
B. Credit AE 1.2: Price all necessary material and information to Green Rater for the purpose of<br />
educating the Building Management in the operation and maintenance of all Building systems,<br />
equipment and finishes. Include walk through with Building Manager documented on digital<br />
media.<br />
3.5 MATERIAL-EFFICIENT FRAMING<br />
A. MR1.1 and MR 1.5: Submit shop drawings to Green Rater and to Architect, indicating all offsite<br />
fabricated panelized wall construction and engineered trusses for floor and roof structure.<br />
3.6 BASIC COMBUSTION VENTING AND LOCAL EXHAUST<br />
A. EQ 2.1: provide catalog cut sheets for all appliances, carbon monoxide monitors, space and water<br />
heating equipment for HERS to verify compliance with the prerequisite requirements for venting of<br />
appliances, CO monitoring on each floor, and closed combustion space and water heating equipment.<br />
B. EQ 5.1 and EQ 5.2: provide catalog cut sheets for all appliances and equipment for HERS rater to<br />
verify required performance of local exhaust system including occupancy sensor.<br />
END OF SECTION 018113<br />
SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 028100 - UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYTSTEM<br />
PART 1. GENERAL<br />
1.01 SUMMARY:<br />
A. The work consists of installing a complete underground irrigation system as specified<br />
in this document. Prior to commencing work ,CONTRACTOR shall provide a 30<br />
scale plan to the owner's representative showing complete system layout, schedule of<br />
valves, valve sizes, mainline and lateral pipe sizes, sleeve locations and sizes, and<br />
complete legend with a list of components. The CONTRACTOR performing this<br />
work shall furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and permits necessary for the<br />
completion of the system, except those specified to be furnished by others. Unless<br />
otherwise specified or indicated, the construction of the irrigation shall include the<br />
furnishing, installing, and testing of all pipe, fittings, valves, heads, controllers, wires,<br />
air release and vacuum valves, backflow preventers, automatic drain valves, manual<br />
drain valves, valve boxes, and all other components pertinent to the drawings and<br />
specifications of this system. The CONTRACTOR shall perform all trenching,<br />
excavating, boring, backfilling, compacting, concrete pouring, electrical work,<br />
welding, and any other work necessary for the completion of the project.<br />
1.02 IRRIGATION DESIGN CRITERIA<br />
A. Where ever applicable, place mainline and lateral piping within two (2') feet of face<br />
of curb (f.o.c) all valves shall be located in planting areas and all piping shall be<br />
installed prior to planting. No tees, ells or other turns in piping shall be located under<br />
paving. Cap all ends hand tight prior to backfill. All irrigation shall be installed<br />
within applicable right of ways.<br />
B. Each shrub shall be irrigated with one (1) .5 GPH bubbler. Each tree to be irrigated<br />
with three (3) .5 GPH bubblers.<br />
C. If the contract drawings and/or specifications do not thoroughly describe the method<br />
or techniques to be used for installation, then the contractor shall follow the<br />
installation methods recommended by the manufacturer.<br />
D. All plant materials installed shall have the automatic irrigation system fully operable<br />
at the time of plant installation.<br />
E. Contractor shall locate bubblers to provide uniform distribution to all plants.<br />
F. Contractor shall perform test & balance system to provide even distribution to all<br />
plants.<br />
G. Trees and shrubs must be zoned separately. Plant materials in parking islands to be<br />
zoned separately from plant materials at building foundation. Plant materials with<br />
northern and eastern exposures shall be zoned separately from those with south and<br />
western exposures.<br />
1.03 REFERENCES:<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
A. ASTM<br />
D 1784 D 2564<br />
D 1875 D 2774<br />
D 2241 D 3139<br />
D 2466<br />
D 2467<br />
1.04 SUBMITTALS AND RECORD DRAWINGS<br />
A. SUBMITTALS: CONTRACTOR shall prepare and make submittals to the<br />
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE on all irrigation equipment including irrigation plan<br />
controllers, heads, backflow preventers, valves, pipe, emitters, regulators and fittings.<br />
B. RECORD DRAWINGS:<br />
PART 2. PRODUCTS<br />
1. The CONTRACTOR shall provide and keep up to date a complete set of "asbuilt"<br />
drawings which shall be corrected daily to show all changes in the<br />
location of sprinkler heads, controllers, backflow preventers, valves, drains,<br />
meters, points of connection, wire splice points, pipe and wire routing and<br />
other changes that may have been made from the original drawings. All gate<br />
valves, manual drains, wire splices, automatic and manual valve locations,<br />
controllers, power supply, and mainline piping shall be shown with actual<br />
measurements to reference points so they may be easily located in the field.<br />
2. At the time of final acceptance the CONTRACTOR shall furnish a<br />
reproducible record drawing prepared by a qualified drafts-person showing the<br />
entire completed system as actually installed. The CONTRACTOR shall<br />
provide a legible, reduction of the drawings, laminated in plastic. This is the<br />
responsibility of the CONTRACTOR and shall not be construed to be the<br />
responsibility of any other party.<br />
2.01 2.01 GENERAL:<br />
A. All materials shall be new and without flaws or defects of any type and shall be the<br />
best of their class and kind. All materials shall have a minimum guarantee of one<br />
year against material defects or defective workmanship.<br />
B. All materials shall be of the brands and types noted on the drawings or as specified<br />
herein, or approved as equal.<br />
2.02 PLASTIC PIPE AND FITTINGS<br />
A. PLASTIC PIPE:<br />
1. All mainline plastic pipe which is 2½" or smaller, shall be Schedule 40 PVC<br />
and shall conform to ASTM D 1785. All mainline pipe which is larger than 2"<br />
diameter shall be PVC 1120 or 1220 (SDR-PR) pipe, SDR-21 with a 200 psi<br />
pressure rating and conforming to ASTM D 2241, with flexible joints<br />
conforming to ASTM D 3139 unless otherwise approved by LANDSCAPE<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
ARCHITECT. All lateral lines plastic pipe shall be Class 200 PVC and shall<br />
conform to ASTM D 2241.<br />
2. PVC pipe shall be continuously marked with identification of the manufacture,<br />
type, class, size and material and shall conform to ASTM D 1784. Solvent<br />
joints shall meet ASTM D 2774 and D 2855 requirements. Pipe shall be<br />
produced in 20 foot lengths. All plastic pipe shall be continuously and<br />
permanently marked with the following information: manufacturer's name,<br />
nominal pipe size, schedule, kind of material, kind of pipe, and the pressure<br />
rating in psi in accordance with the standards of the National Sanitation<br />
Foundation. Pipe shall be free of holes, foreign material, blisters, wrinkles<br />
dents, or sun scald.<br />
B. PVC Fittings: Fittings on PVC lines shall be Schedule 40 PVC, Type 1, Cell<br />
Classification 12454-B, and shall comply with ASTM D 2466, D 2467, and D 1784.<br />
C. Risers and Threaded Nipples: All threaded PVC nipples and risers shall be Schedule<br />
80 PVC pipe. All galvanized nipples and risers shall be Schedule 40 galvanized steel<br />
pipe.<br />
2.03 VALVES AND VALVE BOXES:<br />
A. Valves: Valves for use in electrically controlled automatic control systems shall be<br />
diaphragm activated and hydraulically operated solenoid valves.<br />
B. Valve Boxes: Valve boxes shall be Carson 1419 (or approved equal) or larger as<br />
required with brown or tan bolt down covers.<br />
2.04 SPRINKLER HEADS AND BUBBLERS:<br />
A. Sprinkler heads, and bubblers shall be as follows:<br />
2.05 CONTROLLERS:<br />
Grass areas – Hunter 1-20, 6” pop up height<br />
Bubblers – Rainbird 1400<br />
Install spray heads on swing joints.<br />
A. “Controller shall be Hunter ICC series installed in a locking outdoor all weather<br />
metal enclosure. Location to be approved by <strong>Project</strong> Manager.”<br />
2.06 BACKFLOW PREVENTER:<br />
A. The backflow prevention device shall be a reduced pressure assembly installed to<br />
meet all local codes and requirements. Install with power and heat tape. Provide<br />
ball drains on the vertical inlet and outlet pipes.<br />
2.07 CEMENTS, CLEANERS/PRIMERS AND JOINT COMPOUNDS:<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
A. Cement shall be No. 2200 series Uni-Weld or Rectorseal Gold low temperature<br />
plastic pipe cement for use on all sizes and schedules of PVC pipe and fittings.<br />
Cement must be NSF approved and meet ASTM D 2564 specifications.<br />
B. Cleaner/primer shall be No. 8700 United Elchem hi-etch cleaner/primer.<br />
Cleaner/primer must be any color other than clear.<br />
C. All threaded connections between PVC and metal pipe shall be made using<br />
Rectorseal No. 100 virgin heavy duty sealing paste of plasto-joint stick as<br />
manufactured by Lake Chemical Company and teflon tape.<br />
D. All metal to metal connections shall be made using Rectorseal No. 5, slow dry, soft<br />
set pipe thread compound. All PVC to PVC threaded connections shall use teflon<br />
tape.<br />
E. "O"-ring gasket and pipe spigot ends shall be lubricated using the lubricant<br />
recommended or supplied by the pipe manufacturer. If the pipe manufacturer does<br />
not provide a lubricant for the pipe, use IPS Weld-0n No.787 gasket lube as<br />
manufactured by Industrial Polychemical Service.<br />
2.08 WIRE (120 VOLTS):<br />
A. Wire for the 120 volt wiring shall be solid copper (or stranded copper in larger wire<br />
sizes) underground feeder for direct burial and PVC insulated. Size of wire shall be<br />
No.12 AWG.<br />
2.09 WIRE (24 volts):<br />
A. Wire for the 24 volt wiring shall be solid copper wire, PVC insulated, UL approved<br />
underground feeder wire for direct burial in ground. Common wires shall be No.12,<br />
white. Other wires hall be sized as specified by valve manufacturer based on length<br />
of run. The wire shall be supplied in either 500 feet or 2,500 feet rolls.<br />
2.010 WIRE SPLICING MATERIALS:<br />
A. All wire splices shall be made watertight wire connectors. All wiring installed under<br />
sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, etc., shall be installed in a separate 1 1/4 inch or<br />
larger Class 200 PVC sleeve.<br />
2.011 OTHER MISCELLANEOUS FITTINGS AND MATERIALS:<br />
A. All other miscellaneous fittings and materials shall be as specified on the drawings.<br />
PART 3. INSTALLATION:<br />
3.01 GENERAL:<br />
A. This section includes installation specifications for all items installed as a part of the<br />
irrigation systems. Certain construction procedures or minor equipment installation<br />
procedures may have been omitted from these specifications that are necessary for<br />
the proper installation of the system. In any case, all materials and equipment shall<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner according to manufacturer's published<br />
recommendations and specifications, local, and state codes, as shown on the detail<br />
drawings and as specified herein.<br />
3.02 PRODUCT HANDLING:<br />
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for correct procedures in loading,<br />
unloading, staking, transporting, and handling all materials to be used in the system.<br />
The CONTRACTOR shall avoid rough handling which could affect the useful life of<br />
equipment. Pipe shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's published<br />
recommendations on loading, unloading, and storage.<br />
3.03 EXCAVATION AND TRENCHING:<br />
A. The CONTRACTOR shall stake out the location of each run of pipe and all sprinkler<br />
heads and valves prior to trenching. Each run of the system shall be approved by the<br />
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE before actual installation is started. Prior to<br />
trenching, the Contractor shall contact NM One-Call to spot all utility lines.<br />
B. Excavation and trenching for pipe lines shall be true to line with the trench banks as<br />
nearly vertical as practicable. The width of the trenches shall not be greater than<br />
necessary to permit proper jointing, tamping, backfilling, bedding or any other<br />
installation procedures that my be necessary. Trench widths shall also be wide<br />
enough so that there will be a minimum horizontal separation of 2 (two) inches<br />
between pipes in the same trench.<br />
3.04 DEPTH OF BURY:<br />
A. There shall be 28" of cover for all constant pressure mainline. There shall be 18" of<br />
cover for all mainline located downstream of the master valve. There shall be 18" of<br />
cover for all lateral lines. There shall be a minimum of 6" of cover for all 3/4" drip<br />
poly tubing.<br />
3.05 PIPE AND FITTINGS:<br />
A. Installation of plastic pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's<br />
published recommendations and procedures and is mentioned in the specifications.<br />
Manufacturer's published recommended procedures for making solvent weld fittings<br />
shall be strictly adhered to.<br />
B. Caution shall be exercised by the CONTRACTOR in handling, loading, unloading<br />
and storing of PVC pipe and fittings. All PVC pipe shall be stored and transported in<br />
a vehicle with a bed long enough to allow the pipe to lie flat without subjecting it to<br />
undue bending or concentrated external load at any point. Any section of pipe that<br />
has been dented or damaged or in any other way found to be defective, either before,<br />
or after laying shall be replaced with sound pipe without additional expense to the<br />
OWNER.<br />
C. Before installation, the inside of the pipe shall be cleaned of all direct and foreign<br />
matter and shall be kept in a cleaned condition during and after laying of the pipe.<br />
When work is not in progress, open ends of pipe and fittings shall be securely closed<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
so that no trench water, earth or other foreign substances will enter the pipe or<br />
fittings. Where pipe ends are left for future expansion or connections, they shall be<br />
valved and capped, as directed on the drawings.<br />
D. All PVC pipe and fittings shall be assembled to permit the pipe or fittings to be<br />
joined at the true parallel position of the fitting. Placement of pipe in curving<br />
trenches which causes bending and stress on pipe and fittings will not be permitted.<br />
No excess piping or fittings shall be permitted in the installation of the system, which<br />
may increase pressure loss or potential blockage.<br />
E. Excavation and trenching shall be true to line and at the width and depth specified in<br />
other sections of these specifications. Before installing the pipe, all rubbish and rocks<br />
shall be removed from the trenches. If the soil is extremely rocky, the trenches shall<br />
be padded with dirt or sand as outlined in other portions of these specifications.<br />
Material used for pipe padding shall be approved by the OWNER'S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE. The full length of each section of the pipe shall rest solidly<br />
upon the pipe bed.<br />
F. Pipe shall not be laid in water or when trench or weather conditions are unsuitable for<br />
the work. Any water which may be encountered or may accumulate in the trenches<br />
or excavation shall be pumped out or otherwise removed as necessary to keep the<br />
bottom of the trench or excavation free and clear of water during the progress of the<br />
work.<br />
G. All pipe shall be installed in a manner so as to provide for expansion and contraction<br />
as recommended by the manufacturer.<br />
H. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, all piping passing under sidewalks,<br />
roadways, parking lots, etc., shall be sleeved in a Class 200 PVC pipe two sizes<br />
larger than the pipe to be sleeved.<br />
I. When more than one pipe is installed in the same trench, in no case shall one pipe be<br />
installed above or below another. Pipe can be installed in the same trench if pipes are<br />
laid side by side. In no case shall mainline and lateral pipe be installed in the same<br />
trench.<br />
J. The minimum horizontal clearance between lines in the same trench shall be 2 (two)<br />
inches.<br />
K. After all sprinkler piping, risers, valves, thrust blocks, etc., have been installed and<br />
partially backfilled as specified in other parts of these specifications, the control<br />
valve shall be opened and a full head of water used to flush out the system. After the<br />
system is thoroughly flushed, risers shall be capped off and the system pressure<br />
tested in accordance with the testing section of these specifications. At the conclusion<br />
of the pressure test the heads shall be installed and the backfill operation completed.<br />
3.06 SOLVENT WELDING PROCEDURE:<br />
A. PVC plastic pipe shall be squarely cut.<br />
B. Burrs left form cutting shall be wiped off with a clean, dry cloth.<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Utilizing a cleaner/primer, thoroughly clean the mating pipe end and the fitting<br />
socket with a clean dry cloth.<br />
D. Apply a uniform coat of solvent cement to the outside of the pipe end with a nonsynthetic<br />
brush or dauber.<br />
E. In like manner, apply a thin coating of solvent cement to the inside of the fitting<br />
socket.<br />
F. Re-apply a light coat of solvent cement to the pipe and quickly insert it into the<br />
fitting to the full depth of the fitting socket.<br />
G. Rotate the pipe or fitting approximately 1/4 turn to insure even distribution of the<br />
solvent cement.<br />
H. Hold in position for approximately 30 seconds.<br />
I. Wipe off any excess solvent cement that forms as a bead around the outer shoulder.<br />
J. Care should be taken so as not to use an excess amount of solvent cement that could<br />
cause burrs or obstructions to form on the inside of the pipe joint.<br />
K. Solvent weld joints shall be allowed to cure for at least 24 hours before pressure is<br />
applied to the system.<br />
3.07 BACKFILLING:<br />
A. Upon completion of a particular section of the irrigation system, and after sufficient<br />
time has elapsed for the curing of solvent weld joints, partial backfilling can begin,<br />
leaving all joints, risers and connections exposed for visual inspection during the<br />
hydrostatic test. After completion and acceptance of the hydrostatic test for a<br />
particular section of the irrigation system the backfill operation can be completed.<br />
B. All backfill material shall be subject to approval by the OWNER'S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE. Backfill material shall be free from rubbish, rock, large<br />
stones, brush, sod, frozen material or other unsuitable substances that may damage<br />
pipe during the backfilling operations.<br />
C. In the event that the material from the excavation or trenching is found to be<br />
unsuitable for use in backfill, it shall be removed from the site and properly disposed<br />
of by the CONTRACTOR at his own expense. The CONTRACTOR shall then, at no<br />
additional cost to the OWNER, arrange for, purchase, and furnish suitable backfill<br />
material consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand, or other approved materials free<br />
of large clods of earth or sharp stones.<br />
D. In rocky areas, the trench depth shall be 6 (six) inches below the normal trench depth<br />
to allow for 6 (six) inches of suitable backfill as padding for the pipe. In like manner,<br />
there shall be at least 6 (six) inches of padding on either side of the pipe as a padding<br />
against the rock wall of the trench.<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Backfill shall be placed in horizontal layers not exceeding 12 (twelve) inches in depth<br />
and shall be thoroughly tamped, rolled or otherwise compacted to near original<br />
density or so that a minimum of settling will result. Backfill shall be placed to the<br />
original ground level or to the limits designated on the drawings. If settlement of<br />
trenches occurs within one year from date of completion, it shall be the<br />
CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to refill trenches and re-seed or sod the repaired<br />
areas.<br />
3.08 SADDLE TAPS:<br />
A. No saddle taps shall be permitted.<br />
3.09 SLEEVED CROSSING:<br />
A. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, all piping installed under roadways, parking<br />
lots, etc., shall be sleeved in a Class 200 PVC pipe two sizes larger than the pipe to<br />
be sleeved. Where possible, wiring shall be placed in a separate sleeve from that of<br />
the pipe crossing and shall be 1 1/4 or larger Class 200.<br />
B. Every effort shall be made by the CONTRACTOR to install sleeving prior to the<br />
pouring or construction of the sidewalks, roadways, parking lots, etc., if at all<br />
possible. If prior sleeving is not possible, all crossings must be bored unless<br />
authorization for an open cut is obtained from the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE.<br />
C. Sleeving ends, with the inner pipe or wire installed, shall be taped closed using a<br />
good quality duct tape to prevent the entrance of dirt into the sleeve.<br />
3.010 THRUST BLOCKS:<br />
A. Concrete thrust blocks shall be provided where necessary to resist system pressure.<br />
Thrust blocks shall be constructed at all direction changes, size changes, valves and<br />
terminations, or at any other points of the system that will result in an unbalanced<br />
thrust line for equipment 2 (two) inches and larger. Do not obstruct the outlets of<br />
fittings which are intended for future connections. Thrush blocks shall be poured<br />
against undisturbed earth.<br />
3.011 SPRINKLER HEADS<br />
A. Sprinkler heads shall be the type and make specified and shall be installed to grade<br />
unless otherwise specified. Sprinkler heads shall be installed 8 (eight) inches from<br />
walls, walkways, and mowstrips. Sprinkler heads shall be installed 12" from back of<br />
street curb or sidewalk abutting curb. Heads shall be installed in the vertical<br />
positions, hand backfilled and compacted to near original density.<br />
B. Sprinkler head spacing shall not exceed the spacing shown on the approved drawings<br />
and shall be in the approximate locations and configuration as shown on the<br />
drawings. CONTRACTOR shall verify area dimensions while staking sprinkler head<br />
location. Sprinkler heads shall be spaced so that they are equidistant from one<br />
another for the given lengths and widths of the area to achieve uniform coverage.<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. After all piping and risers are in place and connected and before installation of the<br />
sprinkler heads, all control valves for a given section shall be fully opened and a full<br />
head of water shall be used to flush out the system for a time period sufficient to<br />
flush entire system.<br />
D. If water pressure without the heads installed is not sufficient to provide adequate<br />
water flow from end risers, the CONTRACTOR shall cap off enough heads closest to<br />
the water source to provide adequate flushing of the end riser assemblies.<br />
3.012 CONTROLLER:<br />
A. The Controller location shall be as approved by project manager.<br />
B. The controller shall be mounted and wired according to the manufacturer's<br />
recommended procedures and as specified in these specifications and on the<br />
approved drawings.<br />
C. Electric control valves shall be connected to controller in the numerical sequences as<br />
shown on the approved drawings.<br />
D. Controller shall be installed in a locking controller enclosure.<br />
E. Controller shall be grounded as per manufacturers’ recommendations.<br />
3.013 ELECTRIC CONTROL VALVES:<br />
A. All electric control valves shall be of the type and size as approved on the<br />
drawings/submittals and shall be installed where shown on the approved/drawings,<br />
following the published recommendations of the manufacturer and in accordance<br />
with these specifications.<br />
B. The valve boxes shall have bolt down lids and of the size and type as specified<br />
herein.<br />
C. Valve wire splices shall be waterproofed using 3M Scotchlok Connectors or<br />
approved equal and the CONTRACTOR shall leave 24 (twenty-four) inches of coiled<br />
slack to facilitate raising splices to ground level without cutting wires.<br />
3.014 VOLT CONTROL VALVE WIRING:<br />
A. All wire installation procedures as described herein shall be checked to conform to<br />
local electrical codes.<br />
B. All wire used for the 24 volt wiring from the controller to the electric control valves<br />
shall be type "UF", 600 volt, solid copper, single conductor, PVC insulated and bear<br />
UL approval for direct burial underground feeder cable. Unless otherwise approved<br />
on the drawings, the 24 volt common wires shall be wire No.12 A.W.G. and the<br />
remaining 24 volt control wires shall be of an A.W.G., recommended by valve<br />
manufactures for approved plan distance, and of colors other than white. These colors<br />
shall be noted on the "as-built" record drawings.<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Whenever possible, the CONTRACTOR shall install the 24 volt control valve wiring<br />
in the same trench as the irrigation system mainline piping. All wires shall be laid on<br />
the bottom of the trench to one side of the pipe only. The wires shall be laid loose in<br />
the trench to allow for contraction of the wire. Control wires shall be taped together<br />
in 10'0" increments. When trenches used for piping are not appropriate for routing of<br />
wire, a trench, 18" deep, shall be provided by the CONTRACTOR for 24 volt wires<br />
and shall be identified with dimensions on the "as-built" record drawings.<br />
D. Wire splices, other than at valve box locations, shall be kept to a minimum and if<br />
needed shall be made only at common splice points and placed in a wire splice box as<br />
shown on the drawings. The location of these wire splices boxes shall be shown on<br />
the "as-built" record drawings. There shall be a 24" coil in the wires placed in the<br />
wire splice boxes so that the splices can be pulled out above ground level to facilitate<br />
testing and trouble shooting. No buried wire splices shall be permitted. All wire<br />
splices shall be made waterproof using 3M Scotchlok Connectors.<br />
E. In no case shall wires of different colors be spliced together.<br />
F. Control wires shall be identified with E-Z Coder WDR Series Tape at each valve and<br />
at the Controller and at splices. Valves shall be numbered on the "as-built" record<br />
drawings and on inside of valve boxes (not covers).<br />
3.015 120 VOLT CONTROLLER POWER WIRING:<br />
A. The CONTRACTOR shall familiarize himself with the work required to complete<br />
this portion of the installation. All 120 volt wiring shall be installed in accordance<br />
with local electrical codes. The 120 volt service shall consist of one black and one<br />
white wire. The neutral wire must be bonded.<br />
B. 120 volt power shall be supplied to the controller and backflow locations by a<br />
licensed electrician.<br />
3.016 MANUAL DRAIN VALVE-MAINLINE:<br />
A. <strong>Manual</strong> drain valves shall be installed at all low points of each mainline piping<br />
section, and at any other points as specified herein.<br />
3.017 TESTING:<br />
A. Upon completion of the irrigation system's mainline, the entire mainline shall be<br />
tested for a 4 (four) hour period at 150 psi. Prior to testing the mainline shall be<br />
partially backfilled leaving all joints and connections exposed for visual inspection.<br />
All dirt shall be flushed from the system and the line filled with water to remove air.<br />
The mainline shall be brought to static pressure. A pressure gauge and temporary<br />
valve shall be installed at the end of the mainline to permit hydrostatic pressure to be<br />
applied to the main. A pressure of 150 psi must be retained for a 4 (four) hour period.<br />
Any leaks resulting in the 4 (four) hour pressure test shall be repaired and the system<br />
retested until the system passes the test.<br />
B. Upon completion of the irrigation system's lateral sections and after sufficient time<br />
has been allowed for solvent weld joints to cure, the entire system shall be<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
hydrostatically tested by capping off all sprinkler head risers. On systems using flex<br />
nipples, or swing joints, the lateral line shall be tested prior to installation of the flex<br />
nipples or swing joints. Prior to capping, all air and dirt shall be flushed from the<br />
system and the pipe partially backfilled by center loading, leaving all joints, risers,<br />
swing joints and connections exposed for visual inspection. All lateral irrigation<br />
piping must be pressure tested for 1 (one) hour at 100 psi. The procedure shall be the<br />
same as used for the main line. If after one hour no visual leakage has occurred and<br />
the 100 psi pressure has been retained, the heads shall be installed, and the backfill<br />
operation completed. Any leaks resulting from the hydrostatic test shall be repaired<br />
and the system retested until the system passes the test.<br />
3.018 ADJUSTING OF SYSTEM:<br />
A. Upon completion of the installation, the CONTRACTOR shall adjust all heads and<br />
valves and program controller to provide optimum system performance. The<br />
contractor shall provide and install nozzles other than those specified as instructed by<br />
the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE at no additional cost to the owner. It will be the<br />
OWNER'S responsibility to make any minor adjustments to the system during the<br />
guarantee period.<br />
B. CLEAN UP: The CONTRACTOR shall continuously keep a neat and orderly area in<br />
which he is installing the system. Disposal of rubbish and waste material resulting<br />
from the installation shall be continual. Upon completion of the system, the<br />
CONTRACTOR shall remove from the OWNER'S property at his own expense, all<br />
temporary structures, rubbish, waste material, tools, and equipment resulting from or<br />
used in the installation of the system.<br />
3.019 PROTECTION OF EXISTING UTILITIES:<br />
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for locating all cables, conduits, piping,<br />
and any other utilities or structures that may be encountered either above or below<br />
ground. All necessary precautions must be taken by the CONTRACTOR to prevent<br />
any damage to these existing improvements. In the event that such damage should<br />
occur from his operations, the CONTRACTOR shall repair or replace or bring to<br />
original condition the damaged utilities or improvements at his own expense.<br />
3.020 PROTECTION OF WORK:<br />
A. The CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for protection of on going work from the<br />
public and vice versa. Any necessary barriers, warning signs, etc. are the<br />
responsibility of the contractor and considered incidental to the irrigation contract.<br />
3.021 ROCK:<br />
A. If the CONTRACTOR encounters rock or other unfavorable trenching conditions, no<br />
additional compensation will be paid. When material from the excavation or<br />
trenching is unsuitable for use as backfill, additional backfill material suitable for this<br />
purpose shall be brought in at the expense of the CONTRACTOR. It shall also be the<br />
CONTRACTOR'S responsibility to remove and dispose of all unsuitable materials<br />
removed from the trench that cannot be used in the backfill operation.<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.022 FINAL ACCEPTANCE:<br />
A. When the CONTRACTOR is satisfied that the system is operating properly, that it is<br />
balanced and adjusted, that all work and cleanup is completed, he shall issue notice<br />
of completion to the OWNER and the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE requesting a<br />
system review at a given date and time. The OWNER and the OWNER'S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE will respond to the notice by the CONTRACTOR and shall<br />
appear at the given time for a tour of the <strong>Project</strong>. At that time, the CONTRACTOR<br />
shall demonstrate each system in its entirety. In judging the Work, no allowance for<br />
deviation from the approved drawings and specifications will be made unless prior<br />
approval has been obtained. This system review must be completed prior to<br />
beginning planting operations.<br />
B. Any inconsistencies to the specifications shall be noted by the OWNER and the<br />
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE and a written copy of corrections shall be given to<br />
the CONTRACTOR. Any work deemed not acceptable shall be reworked to the<br />
complete satisfaction of the OWNER and the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE.<br />
C. When all work is completed to the satisfaction of the OWNER, a written acceptance<br />
of the project work will be given to the CONTRACTOR upon furnishing, by the<br />
CONTRACTOR of a complete record drawing of the system which is acceptable to<br />
the OWNER.<br />
3.023 OPERATIONAL INSTRUCTION:<br />
A. After the system has been tested and accepted, the CONTRACTOR, along with the<br />
OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE shall instruct the OWNER in the operation and<br />
maintenance of the system.<br />
3.024 SYSTEM MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY:<br />
A. For a period of one (1) year from final acceptance of the system, the CONTRACTOR<br />
will promptly furnish and install, without cost to the OWNER, any and all parts or<br />
materials which prove defective in material or workmanship. Damage due to<br />
irrigation system line breaks caused by defective material or workmanship shall be<br />
repaired and brought to original condition by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to<br />
the OWNER. The CONTRACTOR shall complete all repairs within 24 hours of<br />
receipt of notification from the OWNER of system failure.<br />
B. Minor maintenance of the system shall be the responsibility of the OWNER.<br />
C. For a period of one year from final acceptance of the system, the CONTRACTOR<br />
shall repair any settlement of the trenches by one of the following methods as<br />
directed by the OWNER and the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE.<br />
D. Bring to grade by top dressing (raking appropriate material into settled area).<br />
E. Bring to grade with top soil and seed.<br />
F. Remove existing sod, fill depression with top soil, and replace with new sod to match<br />
existing sod.<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-12
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
G. Repair by any of the above methods must result in a smooth, level area. Maintenance<br />
of repaired areas shall be the responsibility of the OWNER. Repair shall be<br />
completed by the CONTRACTOR within 48 hours after notification from the<br />
OWNER of trench settlement problems.<br />
3.025 INSPECTIONS<br />
A. The following inspections shall be the minimum required inspections during the<br />
course of construction. Additional inspections shall be made at any time at the<br />
discretion of the OWNER or OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE. It shall be the<br />
responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to notify the OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE<br />
in writing 48 hours in advance of each required inspection. The sequence of required<br />
inspection shall not be changed from the sequence listed below. The CONTRACTOR<br />
shall not proceed with work in the next sequence without written acceptance of the<br />
previous sequence. Payment will not be approved for items which have not been<br />
inspected and approved in writing.<br />
B. Inspect staked locations of mainline, valves, laterals, and sprinkler heads. All trees<br />
irrigated with bubbler heads must be staked at this time to verify proper location.<br />
C. Inspect control wire installation.<br />
D. Inspect and pressure test mainline and electric control valve installation.<br />
E. Inspect and pressure test lateral irrigation line installation.<br />
F. Inspect automatic controller installation and operation.<br />
G. Inspect sprinkler and bubbler head placement, coverage and operating pressure prior<br />
to planting.<br />
H. Inspect for punch list at Substantial Completion.<br />
I. Inspect at final acceptance inspection.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
UNDERGROUND IRRIGATION SYSTEM 028100-13
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 029300<br />
LANDSCAPING<br />
PART 1 -GENERAL<br />
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. Work under this section consists of the planting of trees, shrubs, and ground covers, including<br />
the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials and performing all work in connection<br />
therewith in accordance with the drawings and specifications.<br />
B. The scientific and common names used for the plants called for on the drawings are generally<br />
in conformity with the approved names given in CRC World Dictionary of Plant Names 1999<br />
Ed. The names of varieties not included therein are generally in conformity with the names<br />
accepted in the nursery trade.<br />
1.2 REFERENCES<br />
A. U.S.A. Standard for Nursery Stock, 2004, published by Committee on Horticultural Standards<br />
of the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc.<br />
B. Western Garden Book, 2001, published by Sunset Publishing Corp.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Licensed landscape-contracting firm with not less than 5 years<br />
experience in the type and amount of work required in the Section.<br />
B. Source Quality Control<br />
1. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by<br />
governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials.<br />
2. Do no make substitutions. If specified landscape materials are not obtainable, submit<br />
to the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE proof of nonavailabliity and proposal for use<br />
of equivalent material.<br />
3. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer shall have<br />
certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory<br />
made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official<br />
Agricultural Chemists, wherever applicable.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 1 029300–1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Trees and Shrubs:<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
a. Label each tree, shrub and ground cover with securely attached waterproof<br />
tag bearing legible designation of botanical or common name.<br />
b. Grade plant material in accordance with the current codes and standards of<br />
American Association of Nurserymen. Use nomenclature conforming to<br />
References above. If names are not present in these listings, conform to<br />
accept botanical nomenclature in the nursery trade.<br />
5. Import Soil/Organic Matter<br />
a. Test import soil and/or portion of the planting backfill mixture at an<br />
approved soil testing laboratory. Test to verify characteristics listed under<br />
“Products” portion of this specification and include recommendation from<br />
the testing laboratory. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE may also test<br />
the final product as delivered or installed to verify the mixture matches the<br />
listed characteristics and the submitted soil report. Test data may be utilized<br />
up to one year.<br />
6. Inspection: The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE may inspect trees, shrubs and<br />
ground covers either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with<br />
requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality. The OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE retains right to further inspect plant material for size and<br />
condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject<br />
unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove<br />
rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site.<br />
A. Samples: Submit a one-eighth cubic foot sample of each type of mulch or planting soil<br />
material for approval.<br />
B. Plant and Material Certifications:<br />
1. Manufacturers or vendor’s certified analysis and materials safety data sheets for any<br />
soil amendments, herbicides, and fertilizer materials.<br />
2. Planting Backfill Mixture: Submit test results, at the OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE request, prior to delivery.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 2 029300–2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Maintenance <strong>Manual</strong>s: Submit two copies of typewritten instructions of any required<br />
landscape maintenance procedures to be followed by the OWNER for one full year during<br />
LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR warrantee period. Write instructions specifically for this<br />
project and note tasks by site area. Submit prior to final inspection for approval.<br />
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE AND HANDLING<br />
A. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE will inspect and accept plant materials prior to delivery<br />
to site and incorporation into the work.<br />
B. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and<br />
name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored<br />
at site.<br />
C. Plant Backfill Materials: Collect and provide load tickets to the OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE upon delivery. List the following information on the ticket:<br />
1. Source of material.<br />
2. Approximate volume of load.<br />
3. Date of delivery or loading.<br />
4. Typed name of individual representing the source.<br />
5. Inked original signature of individual representing the source.<br />
6. Area of site of the product delivery.<br />
D. Trees and Shrubs: Provide freshly dug or containerized trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior<br />
to delivery. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such manner as to damage bark, break<br />
branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop<br />
balled and burlapped stock during delivery. Handle container-grown materials by container<br />
only.<br />
E. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant<br />
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 8 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in<br />
shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.<br />
F. Handling Materials<br />
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS<br />
1. Lift trees only by methods that will not damage bark or root balls. Lift trees 3 inches<br />
in caliper and larger with chains triangulated around the rootball. Do not lift tree 3<br />
inches in caliper or larger by straps around the trunk.<br />
2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers until planting time.<br />
A. Existing Conditions:<br />
LANDSCAPING- 3 029300–3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in<br />
manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate as required. Maintain<br />
grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties<br />
concerned.<br />
2. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such<br />
as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify the OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE before planting.<br />
B. Sequencing and Scheduling:<br />
1.7 WARRANTY<br />
1. Planting Time: Proceed with and complete planting work as rapidly as portions of<br />
site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of<br />
planting work required.<br />
2. Plant or install material during normal planting seasons for each type of work<br />
required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide<br />
maintenance from date of substantial completion until final acceptance.<br />
3. Determine the acceptability of subgrade preparation prior to the start of landscaping<br />
work. Protect all existing items to remain and new work of other trades to ensure<br />
proper timing of each phase of work.<br />
A. Warranty trees, shrubs and ground cover through specified maintenance period and until final<br />
acceptance.<br />
B. Warranty trees, shrubs and ground cover for a period of one year after date of final<br />
acceptance, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth as determined by the<br />
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, unless defects are due to OWNER’S negligence in<br />
following the CONTRACTOR’S recommended maintenance procedure.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 4 029300–4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Remove and replace trees, shrubs or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthily condition<br />
during warranty period. Replace plant materials during the dormant season following the end<br />
of warranty period or as directed by the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. The dormant<br />
season is defined as September 30 through April 1. Replace trees and shrubs which are in<br />
doubtful condition at the end of the warranty period; unless in opinion of the OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE, it is advisable to extend warranty period for the remainder a fullgrowing<br />
season.<br />
PART 2 –PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PLANT MATERIALS<br />
A. A complete list of plants, including a schedule of quantities, sizes and other requirements is<br />
shown on the drawings. In the event that discrepancies occur between quantities of plants<br />
indicated in the schedule of plants and the planting plan, the plant quantities indicated on the<br />
planting plan shall govern.<br />
B. Plant material substitutions shall not be made without the written permission of the project<br />
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, OR OWNERS<br />
REPRESENTATIVE. The use of materials differing in kind, quality, or size from that<br />
specified will be allowed only after the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is convinced that all<br />
means of obtaining the specified materials have been exhausted. At the time bids are<br />
submitted, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have located the materials necessary to<br />
complete the job as specified. All requests for substitutions must be submitted no later than<br />
five days prior to the opening of bids.<br />
C. Plant material quality, size, and condition shall be in accordance with U.S.A. Standard for<br />
Nursery Stock, 2004, as published by the Committee on Horticultural Standards of the<br />
American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., the drawings and the following requirements:<br />
D. All plants shall be typical of their species or variety. All plants shall have normal, well<br />
developed branches and vigorous root systems. They shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and<br />
free from defects, disfiguring knots, abrasions of the bark, sunscald injuries, plant diseases,<br />
insect eggs, bores, and all other forms of infections.<br />
E. Unless otherwise stated on the drawings or approved by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, all<br />
plants shall be nursery grown and shall be tagged with nursery labels indicating species and<br />
variety. See planting plan for acceptable collected plants.<br />
F. Container grown plant material shall have been established in its delivery container for not<br />
less than six months, but for not more than two years. Any root bound material will not be<br />
accepted.<br />
G. Balled and burlapped plant material shall have a solid ball of earth of minimum specified size<br />
and held in place securely by burlap and a stout twine or rope. Broken or loose balls will be<br />
rejected.<br />
H. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, standard plant material shall have a uniform shape<br />
around its complete circumference. Plant material with irregular branching patterns or with<br />
branching patterns more highly developed on one side than on other sides shall not be<br />
acceptable, unless approved by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 5 029300–5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
I. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE shall inspect all plant material at the<br />
CONTRACTOR'S yard prior to delivery to the job site. All materials shall then be inspected<br />
at the job site prior to planting and after planting.<br />
J. At the option of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE will inspect plant<br />
material at a wholesale nursery of the CONTRACTOR's choice prior to delivery of materials<br />
to the CONTRACTOR's yard. However, at no additional expense to the OWNER, the<br />
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all travel expenses incurred by the OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE for any travel outside of the Las Cruces/El Paso Metropolitan Area,<br />
with the exception of the project site.<br />
K. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE shall be the judge of the quality and acceptability of all<br />
plant materials. All rejected material shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced<br />
with acceptable material at no additional cost to OWNER.<br />
2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS AND SURFACINGS<br />
A. Specification for complete planting backfill shall be as follows except where specifically<br />
noted on drawings.<br />
1. Structural soils – refer to section 02250<br />
2. Subject to compliance with state and Federal regulations, or directed and as approved<br />
by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE fertilizer and/or Root Stimulant may be used by<br />
CONTRACTOR.<br />
B. Planting Soil Mixture in Street Planters and Shade Structure Planters<br />
1. Planting soil mixture shall be a premixed, homogenous soil. It will consist of sand<br />
and organic matter and meet performance characteristics outlined below.<br />
a. Sand, 50% by volume of clean masonry sand with a sieve analysis of:<br />
LANDSCAPING- 6 029300–6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Sieve size % passing<br />
3/8” 100%<br />
#4 93-99%<br />
#8 82-88%<br />
#16 73-79%<br />
#30 55-61%<br />
#50 24-30%<br />
#100 6-12%<br />
#200 7-2%<br />
b. Organic Matter: 40% by volume of compost material specified as follows:<br />
Compost, or mulch, shall be a combination organic carbon sources such as<br />
straw, hay, bark, sawdust or wood shavings and nitrogen sources such as<br />
manure, blood meal, or chemical fertilizers. Nitrogen sources must be added<br />
prior to composting. It is recommended this mixture be aerobically<br />
composted at temperatures between 120 o F and 160 o F for a period of not less<br />
than 100 days. Weed seeds are to be destroyed during composting and urea<br />
and ammonia form nitrogen ration shall be as listed below. Finished compost<br />
is to be screened to provide less than 2% remaining on a ½” screen. Carbon<br />
to Nitrogen Ration of organic matter shall be less than 50 parts carbon to one<br />
part nitrogen.<br />
c. Perlite: 10% by volume of medium grade horticultural perlite.<br />
2. The complete planting soil mixtures shall have the following characteristics:<br />
a. Calcium to magnesium rations shall not exceed 20 parts calcium to one part<br />
magnesium.<br />
b. Potash (Potassium) (K) shall be present at a rate of at least 200 parts per<br />
million of exchangeable potassium.<br />
c. Salinity (EGXK) not to exceed 2 AMHOS/CM Nitrate nitrogen (NO3-N)<br />
shall be present at a rate of at least 30 parts per million.<br />
d. Phosphorus as measured by the Olson sodium bicarbonate measurement<br />
method shall be at greater than 25 parts per million.<br />
e. Ph of the planting soil mixture shall be between 6.5 and 7.5. Organic matter<br />
by weight (by simple combustion) shall be more than 5%. Available<br />
moisture capacity in the one third to 15 bar tension shall be greater than<br />
15%.<br />
f. TKN2 or Total Kjedahlnitrogen shall be 250 ppm or greater.<br />
g. NH4 shall be 25 ppm or less.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 7 029300–7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. The <strong>Construction</strong> Manager reserves the right to adjust the above characteristics and<br />
waive all irregularities.<br />
C. Imported Soil Criteria. Imported soils substituted when adequate quantities of native soils are<br />
not available, shall be of a similar soil composition to native soils and tested as specified in<br />
criteria listed below:<br />
1. Samples of the soil shall be tested for gradation, atterberg limits, chemical<br />
composition, pH levels, and organic content.<br />
2. The proposed imported soils shall match native soil to + 5% of all testing<br />
requirements specified herein.<br />
D. Submittals for Test.<br />
1. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all testing and shall submit to the<br />
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE all results for approval.<br />
2. CONTRACTOR shall be financially responsible for all testing and will be considered<br />
incidental to soil mixture cost.<br />
3. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with use of imported soils until written approval<br />
is obtained.<br />
E. Mulch: Other mulch/surfacing products shall be as specified on plans and approved by<br />
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE prior to use.<br />
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS<br />
A. All Evergreen trees and Deciduous trees over 2½“caliper or taller than 10’ height shall be<br />
anchored as per the construction drawings.<br />
B. Landscape Filter Fabric: Earthscape 351 ES (or approved equal).<br />
2.4 WATER<br />
The water shall be clean and free from pollutants which would be harmful to plant growth or<br />
contaminate the environment.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.1 PREPARATION<br />
A. Planting operations as specified herein shall begin only when other work including placing of<br />
topsoil to finished grade has progressed sufficiently to permit planting and shall be performed<br />
only during favorable weather conditions in accordance with accepted practice.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 8 029300–8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. In any one day, only those plant materials intended to be planted that day shall be delivered to<br />
the project site, unless otherwise approved by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. All plant<br />
materials shall be located where it is shown on the drawings except when adjustments due to<br />
field conditions are required. The location of all trees and shrubs shall be staked by the<br />
CONTRACTOR before making any excavations, and locations shall be inspected by the<br />
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE prior to installation. All plants shall be placed as specified<br />
except for minor adjustments made necessary by underground obstructions or other<br />
unforeseen causes.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. All planting and backfilling shall be performed in accordance with accepted nursery practice,<br />
the drawings, and the following requirements:<br />
1. Prepare all planting pits and planting beds as shown on the drawings. Set all plants<br />
plumb and straight unless otherwise indicated on drawings and in the center of pit<br />
such that the top rootball sits flush with finish grade. No filling will be permitted<br />
around trunks or stems.<br />
2. Backfill for planting pits shall consist of the planting soil mixture as specified in<br />
these specifications. The plant shall be positioned in the hole and backfilled no more<br />
than halfway up the rootball. The backfilling shall be completed, and material<br />
tamped. When pit is nearly filled, water thoroughly and allow water to soak away. If<br />
settling of the backfill occurs after watering, add more backfill to bring to finish<br />
grade.<br />
B. Mulching: Mulch shall be applied to all planting bed areas as indicated on the plans and<br />
details.<br />
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. The following inspections shall be the minimum required inspections during the course of<br />
construction. Additional inspections shall be made at any time at the discretion of the<br />
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.<br />
B. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to notify the OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE, in writing, 48 hours in advance of each required inspection.<br />
C. The sequence of required inspections shall not be changed from the sequence listed below.<br />
The CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with work of the next sequence without written<br />
approval of the work of the previous sequence. Payment will not be approved for items which<br />
have not been inspected and approved in writing.<br />
1. Inspect plant material at CONTRACTOR's yard prior to delivery to job site.<br />
2. Inspect staked locations of material prior to planting.<br />
3. Inspect material at the job site prior to and during planting and mulching.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 9 029300–9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Inspect at end of maintenance period.<br />
5. Inspect at end of warrantee period.<br />
3.4 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Maintenance and protecting of trees, shrubs, and groundcover shall begin immediately<br />
following the last operation of installation for each plant and shall continue until final<br />
acceptance. Maintenance shall include watering, weeding, cultivating, removal of dead<br />
material and debris, resetting of trees to upright positions, restoration of earth basins, and such<br />
other operations as may be necessary for the health of the planted stock and the general<br />
appearance of the landscaped areas. Protection shall include care of the planted stock from<br />
damages resulting from trespass, erosion (including watering), weather, vandalism, disease<br />
and the like.<br />
B. The CONTRACTOR shall not prune any plant material except under the specific direction of<br />
the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
LANDSCAPING- 10 029300–10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 029300<br />
LANDSCAPING<br />
PART 1 -GENERAL<br />
1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. Work under this section consists of the planting of trees, shrubs, and ground covers, including<br />
the furnishing of all labor, equipment, and materials and performing all work in connection<br />
therewith in accordance with the drawings and specifications.<br />
B. The scientific and common names used for the plants called for on the drawings are generally<br />
in conformity with the approved names given in CRC World Dictionary of Plant Names 1999<br />
Ed. The names of varieties not included therein are generally in conformity with the names<br />
accepted in the nursery trade.<br />
1.2 REFERENCES<br />
A. U.S.A. Standard for Nursery Stock, 2004, published by Committee on Horticultural Standards<br />
of the American Association of Nurserymen, Inc.<br />
B. Western Garden Book, 2001, published by Sunset Publishing Corp.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Licensed landscape-contracting firm with not less than 5 years<br />
experience in the type and amount of work required in the Section.<br />
B. Source Quality Control<br />
1. General: Ship landscape materials with certificates of inspection required by<br />
governing authorities. Comply with regulations applicable to landscape materials.<br />
2. Do no make substitutions. If specified landscape materials are not obtainable, submit<br />
to the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE proof of nonavailabliity and proposal for use<br />
of equivalent material.<br />
3. Analysis and Standards: Package standard products with manufacturer shall have<br />
certified analysis. For other materials, provide analysis by recognized laboratory<br />
made in accordance with methods established by the Association of Official<br />
Agricultural Chemists, wherever applicable.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 1 029300–1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Trees and Shrubs:<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
a. Label each tree, shrub and ground cover with securely attached waterproof<br />
tag bearing legible designation of botanical or common name.<br />
b. Grade plant material in accordance with the current codes and standards of<br />
American Association of Nurserymen. Use nomenclature conforming to<br />
References above. If names are not present in these listings, conform to<br />
accept botanical nomenclature in the nursery trade.<br />
5. Import Soil/Organic Matter<br />
a. Test import soil and/or portion of the planting backfill mixture at an<br />
approved soil testing laboratory. Test to verify characteristics listed under<br />
“Products” portion of this specification and include recommendation from<br />
the testing laboratory. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE may also test<br />
the final product as delivered or installed to verify the mixture matches the<br />
listed characteristics and the submitted soil report. Test data may be utilized<br />
up to one year.<br />
6. Inspection: The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE may inspect trees, shrubs and<br />
ground covers either at place of growth or at site before planting, for compliance with<br />
requirements for genus, species, variety, size and quality. The OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE retains right to further inspect plant material for size and<br />
condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries and latent defects, and to reject<br />
unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove<br />
rejected trees or shrubs immediately from project site.<br />
A. Samples: Submit a one-eighth cubic foot sample of each type of mulch or planting soil<br />
material for approval.<br />
B. Plant and Material Certifications:<br />
1. Manufacturers or vendor’s certified analysis and materials safety data sheets for any<br />
soil amendments, herbicides, and fertilizer materials.<br />
2. Planting Backfill Mixture: Submit test results, at the OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE request, prior to delivery.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 2 029300–2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Maintenance <strong>Manual</strong>s: Submit two copies of typewritten instructions of any required<br />
landscape maintenance procedures to be followed by the OWNER for one full year during<br />
LANDSCAPE CONTRACTOR warrantee period. Write instructions specifically for this<br />
project and note tasks by site area. Submit prior to final inspection for approval.<br />
1.5 DELIVERY AND STORAGE AND HANDLING<br />
A. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE will inspect and accept plant materials prior to delivery<br />
to site and incorporation into the work.<br />
B. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and<br />
name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored<br />
at site.<br />
C. Plant Backfill Materials: Collect and provide load tickets to the OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE upon delivery. List the following information on the ticket:<br />
1. Source of material.<br />
2. Approximate volume of load.<br />
3. Date of delivery or loading.<br />
4. Typed name of individual representing the source.<br />
5. Inked original signature of individual representing the source.<br />
6. Area of site of the product delivery.<br />
D. Trees and Shrubs: Provide freshly dug or containerized trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior<br />
to delivery. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such manner as to damage bark, break<br />
branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. Do not drop<br />
balled and burlapped stock during delivery. Handle container-grown materials by container<br />
only.<br />
E. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant<br />
immediately. If planting is delayed more than 8 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in<br />
shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.<br />
F. Handling Materials<br />
1.6 JOB CONDITIONS<br />
1. Lift trees only by methods that will not damage bark or root balls. Lift trees 3 inches<br />
in caliper and larger with chains triangulated around the rootball. Do not lift tree 3<br />
inches in caliper or larger by straps around the trunk.<br />
2. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers until planting time.<br />
A. Existing Conditions:<br />
LANDSCAPING- 3 029300–3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Utilities: Determine location of underground utilities and perform work in<br />
manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate as required. Maintain<br />
grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties<br />
concerned.<br />
2. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such<br />
as rubble fill, adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify the OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE before planting.<br />
B. Sequencing and Scheduling:<br />
1.7 WARRANTY<br />
1. Planting Time: Proceed with and complete planting work as rapidly as portions of<br />
site become available, working within seasonal limitations for each kind of<br />
planting work required.<br />
2. Plant or install material during normal planting seasons for each type of work<br />
required. Correlate planting with specified maintenance periods to provide<br />
maintenance from date of substantial completion until final acceptance.<br />
3. Determine the acceptability of subgrade preparation prior to the start of landscaping<br />
work. Protect all existing items to remain and new work of other trades to ensure<br />
proper timing of each phase of work.<br />
A. Warranty trees, shrubs and ground cover through specified maintenance period and until final<br />
acceptance.<br />
B. Warranty trees, shrubs and ground cover for a period of one year after date of final<br />
acceptance, against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth as determined by the<br />
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, unless defects are due to OWNER’S negligence in<br />
following the CONTRACTOR’S recommended maintenance procedure.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 4 029300–4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Remove and replace trees, shrubs or other plants found to be dead or in unhealthily condition<br />
during warranty period. Replace plant materials during the dormant season following the end<br />
of warranty period or as directed by the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. The dormant<br />
season is defined as September 30 through April 1. Replace trees and shrubs which are in<br />
doubtful condition at the end of the warranty period; unless in opinion of the OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE, it is advisable to extend warranty period for the remainder a fullgrowing<br />
season.<br />
PART 2 –PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PLANT MATERIALS<br />
A. A complete list of plants, including a schedule of quantities, sizes and other requirements is<br />
shown on the drawings. In the event that discrepancies occur between quantities of plants<br />
indicated in the schedule of plants and the planting plan, the plant quantities indicated on the<br />
planting plan shall govern.<br />
B. Plant material substitutions shall not be made without the written permission of the project<br />
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT, CONSTRUCTION MANAGER, OR OWNERS<br />
REPRESENTATIVE. The use of materials differing in kind, quality, or size from that<br />
specified will be allowed only after the CONSTRUCTION MANAGER is convinced that all<br />
means of obtaining the specified materials have been exhausted. At the time bids are<br />
submitted, the CONTRACTOR is assumed to have located the materials necessary to<br />
complete the job as specified. All requests for substitutions must be submitted no later than<br />
five days prior to the opening of bids.<br />
C. Plant material quality, size, and condition shall be in accordance with U.S.A. Standard for<br />
Nursery Stock, 2004, as published by the Committee on Horticultural Standards of the<br />
American Association of Nurserymen, Inc., the drawings and the following requirements:<br />
D. All plants shall be typical of their species or variety. All plants shall have normal, well<br />
developed branches and vigorous root systems. They shall be sound, healthy, vigorous, and<br />
free from defects, disfiguring knots, abrasions of the bark, sunscald injuries, plant diseases,<br />
insect eggs, bores, and all other forms of infections.<br />
E. Unless otherwise stated on the drawings or approved by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE, all<br />
plants shall be nursery grown and shall be tagged with nursery labels indicating species and<br />
variety. See planting plan for acceptable collected plants.<br />
F. Container grown plant material shall have been established in its delivery container for not<br />
less than six months, but for not more than two years. Any root bound material will not be<br />
accepted.<br />
G. Balled and burlapped plant material shall have a solid ball of earth of minimum specified size<br />
and held in place securely by burlap and a stout twine or rope. Broken or loose balls will be<br />
rejected.<br />
H. Unless otherwise indicated on plans, standard plant material shall have a uniform shape<br />
around its complete circumference. Plant material with irregular branching patterns or with<br />
branching patterns more highly developed on one side than on other sides shall not be<br />
acceptable, unless approved by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 5 029300–5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
I. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE shall inspect all plant material at the<br />
CONTRACTOR'S yard prior to delivery to the job site. All materials shall then be inspected<br />
at the job site prior to planting and after planting.<br />
J. At the option of the CONTRACTOR, the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE will inspect plant<br />
material at a wholesale nursery of the CONTRACTOR's choice prior to delivery of materials<br />
to the CONTRACTOR's yard. However, at no additional expense to the OWNER, the<br />
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all travel expenses incurred by the OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE for any travel outside of the Las Cruces/El Paso Metropolitan Area,<br />
with the exception of the project site.<br />
K. The OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE shall be the judge of the quality and acceptability of all<br />
plant materials. All rejected material shall be immediately removed from the site and replaced<br />
with acceptable material at no additional cost to OWNER.<br />
2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS AND SURFACINGS<br />
A. Specification for complete planting backfill shall be as follows except where specifically<br />
noted on drawings.<br />
1. Structural soils – refer to section 02250<br />
2. Subject to compliance with state and Federal regulations, or directed and as approved<br />
by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE fertilizer and/or Root Stimulant may be used by<br />
CONTRACTOR.<br />
B. Planting Soil Mixture in Street Planters and Shade Structure Planters<br />
1. Planting soil mixture shall be a premixed, homogenous soil. It will consist of sand<br />
and organic matter and meet performance characteristics outlined below.<br />
a. Sand, 50% by volume of clean masonry sand with a sieve analysis of:<br />
LANDSCAPING- 6 029300–6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Sieve size % passing<br />
3/8” 100%<br />
#4 93-99%<br />
#8 82-88%<br />
#16 73-79%<br />
#30 55-61%<br />
#50 24-30%<br />
#100 6-12%<br />
#200 7-2%<br />
b. Organic Matter: 40% by volume of compost material specified as follows:<br />
Compost, or mulch, shall be a combination organic carbon sources such as<br />
straw, hay, bark, sawdust or wood shavings and nitrogen sources such as<br />
manure, blood meal, or chemical fertilizers. Nitrogen sources must be added<br />
prior to composting. It is recommended this mixture be aerobically<br />
composted at temperatures between 120 o F and 160 o F for a period of not less<br />
than 100 days. Weed seeds are to be destroyed during composting and urea<br />
and ammonia form nitrogen ration shall be as listed below. Finished compost<br />
is to be screened to provide less than 2% remaining on a ½” screen. Carbon<br />
to Nitrogen Ration of organic matter shall be less than 50 parts carbon to one<br />
part nitrogen.<br />
c. Perlite: 10% by volume of medium grade horticultural perlite.<br />
2. The complete planting soil mixtures shall have the following characteristics:<br />
a. Calcium to magnesium rations shall not exceed 20 parts calcium to one part<br />
magnesium.<br />
b. Potash (Potassium) (K) shall be present at a rate of at least 200 parts per<br />
million of exchangeable potassium.<br />
c. Salinity (EGXK) not to exceed 2 AMHOS/CM Nitrate nitrogen (NO3-N)<br />
shall be present at a rate of at least 30 parts per million.<br />
d. Phosphorus as measured by the Olson sodium bicarbonate measurement<br />
method shall be at greater than 25 parts per million.<br />
e. Ph of the planting soil mixture shall be between 6.5 and 7.5. Organic matter<br />
by weight (by simple combustion) shall be more than 5%. Available<br />
moisture capacity in the one third to 15 bar tension shall be greater than<br />
15%.<br />
f. TKN2 or Total Kjedahlnitrogen shall be 250 ppm or greater.<br />
g. NH4 shall be 25 ppm or less.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 7 029300–7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. The <strong>Construction</strong> Manager reserves the right to adjust the above characteristics and<br />
waive all irregularities.<br />
C. Imported Soil Criteria. Imported soils substituted when adequate quantities of native soils are<br />
not available, shall be of a similar soil composition to native soils and tested as specified in<br />
criteria listed below:<br />
1. Samples of the soil shall be tested for gradation, atterberg limits, chemical<br />
composition, pH levels, and organic content.<br />
2. The proposed imported soils shall match native soil to + 5% of all testing<br />
requirements specified herein.<br />
D. Submittals for Test.<br />
1. CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all testing and shall submit to the<br />
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE all results for approval.<br />
2. CONTRACTOR shall be financially responsible for all testing and will be considered<br />
incidental to soil mixture cost.<br />
3. CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with use of imported soils until written approval<br />
is obtained.<br />
E. Mulch: Other mulch/surfacing products shall be as specified on plans and approved by<br />
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE prior to use.<br />
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS LANDSCAPE MATERIALS<br />
A. All Evergreen trees and Deciduous trees over 2½“caliper or taller than 10’ height shall be<br />
anchored as per the construction drawings.<br />
B. Landscape Filter Fabric: Earthscape 351 ES (or approved equal).<br />
2.4 WATER<br />
The water shall be clean and free from pollutants which would be harmful to plant growth or<br />
contaminate the environment.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION<br />
3.1 PREPARATION<br />
A. Planting operations as specified herein shall begin only when other work including placing of<br />
topsoil to finished grade has progressed sufficiently to permit planting and shall be performed<br />
only during favorable weather conditions in accordance with accepted practice.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 8 029300–8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. In any one day, only those plant materials intended to be planted that day shall be delivered to<br />
the project site, unless otherwise approved by OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE. All plant<br />
materials shall be located where it is shown on the drawings except when adjustments due to<br />
field conditions are required. The location of all trees and shrubs shall be staked by the<br />
CONTRACTOR before making any excavations, and locations shall be inspected by the<br />
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE prior to installation. All plants shall be placed as specified<br />
except for minor adjustments made necessary by underground obstructions or other<br />
unforeseen causes.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. All planting and backfilling shall be performed in accordance with accepted nursery practice,<br />
the drawings, and the following requirements:<br />
1. Prepare all planting pits and planting beds as shown on the drawings. Set all plants<br />
plumb and straight unless otherwise indicated on drawings and in the center of pit<br />
such that the top rootball sits flush with finish grade. No filling will be permitted<br />
around trunks or stems.<br />
2. Backfill for planting pits shall consist of the planting soil mixture as specified in<br />
these specifications. The plant shall be positioned in the hole and backfilled no more<br />
than halfway up the rootball. The backfilling shall be completed, and material<br />
tamped. When pit is nearly filled, water thoroughly and allow water to soak away. If<br />
settling of the backfill occurs after watering, add more backfill to bring to finish<br />
grade.<br />
B. Mulching: Mulch shall be applied to all planting bed areas as indicated on the plans and<br />
details.<br />
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. The following inspections shall be the minimum required inspections during the course of<br />
construction. Additional inspections shall be made at any time at the discretion of the<br />
OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.<br />
B. It shall be the responsibility of the CONTRACTOR to notify the OWNER’S<br />
REPRESENTATIVE, in writing, 48 hours in advance of each required inspection.<br />
C. The sequence of required inspections shall not be changed from the sequence listed below.<br />
The CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with work of the next sequence without written<br />
approval of the work of the previous sequence. Payment will not be approved for items which<br />
have not been inspected and approved in writing.<br />
1. Inspect plant material at CONTRACTOR's yard prior to delivery to job site.<br />
2. Inspect staked locations of material prior to planting.<br />
3. Inspect material at the job site prior to and during planting and mulching.<br />
LANDSCAPING- 9 029300–9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Inspect at end of maintenance period.<br />
5. Inspect at end of warrantee period.<br />
3.4 MAINTENANCE AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Maintenance and protecting of trees, shrubs, and groundcover shall begin immediately<br />
following the last operation of installation for each plant and shall continue until final<br />
acceptance. Maintenance shall include watering, weeding, cultivating, removal of dead<br />
material and debris, resetting of trees to upright positions, restoration of earth basins, and such<br />
other operations as may be necessary for the health of the planted stock and the general<br />
appearance of the landscaped areas. Protection shall include care of the planted stock from<br />
damages resulting from trespass, erosion (including watering), weather, vandalism, disease<br />
and the like.<br />
B. The CONTRACTOR shall not prune any plant material except under the specific direction of<br />
the OWNER’S REPRESENTATIVE.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
LANDSCAPING- 10 029300–10
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes cast-in-place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials,<br />
mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:<br />
1. Footings.<br />
2. Foundation walls.<br />
3. Slabs-on-grade.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the<br />
following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blastfurnace<br />
slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For products having recycled content, e.g. flyash,<br />
documentation indicating percentages by weight of recycled content.<br />
2. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For liquid floor treatments and curing and sealing<br />
compounds, documentation including printed statement of VOC content..<br />
3. Design Mixtures for Credit MR 2.2: For each concrete mixture containing fly ash as a<br />
replacement for portland cement or other portland cement replacements, and for<br />
equivalent concrete mixtures that do not contain portland cement replacements.<br />
C. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when<br />
characteristics of materials, <strong>Project</strong> conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances<br />
warrant adjustments.<br />
1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 1
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and<br />
placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar<br />
diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing,<br />
and supports for concrete reinforcement.<br />
E. <strong>Construction</strong> Joint Layout: Indicate proposed construction joints required to construct the<br />
structure.<br />
1. Location of construction joints is subject to approval of the Architect.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer.<br />
B. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:<br />
1. Cementitious materials.<br />
2. Admixtures.<br />
3. Steel reinforcement and accessories.<br />
4. Fiber reinforcement.<br />
C. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating<br />
compliance with requirements:<br />
1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of<br />
concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.<br />
D. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements indicating compliance with specified<br />
tolerances.<br />
E. Field quality-control reports.<br />
F. Minutes of preinstallation conference.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on <strong>Project</strong> personnel qualified as<br />
ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified<br />
Concrete Flatwork Technician.<br />
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete<br />
products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and<br />
equipment.<br />
1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete<br />
Production Facilities."<br />
C. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from<br />
the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from single source, and obtain admixtures from<br />
single source from single manufacturer.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 2
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
D. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract<br />
Documents:<br />
1. ACI 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete," Sections 1 through 5.<br />
2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete <strong>Construction</strong> and Materials."<br />
E. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material<br />
evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.<br />
F. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine<br />
procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each<br />
entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:<br />
a. Contractor's superintendent.<br />
b. Independent testing agency responsible for concrete design mixtures.<br />
c. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer.<br />
d. Concrete subcontractor.<br />
e. Special concrete finish subcontractor.<br />
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and<br />
damage.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS<br />
A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and<br />
smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.<br />
1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.<br />
2. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1,<br />
and as follows:<br />
a. High-density overlay, Class 1 or better.<br />
b. Medium-density overlay, Class 1 or better; mill-release agent treated and edge<br />
sealed.<br />
c. Structural 1, B-B or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.<br />
d. B-B (Concrete Form), Class 1 or better; mill oiled and edge sealed.<br />
B. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.<br />
C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with,<br />
stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of<br />
concrete surfaces.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 3
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.<br />
D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, removable or snap-off metal or glass-fiber-reinforced plastic<br />
form ties designed to resist lateral pressure of fresh concrete on forms and to prevent spalling of<br />
concrete on removal.<br />
1. Furnish units that will leave no corrodible metal closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to the plane<br />
of exposed concrete surface.<br />
2. Furnish ties that, when removed, will leave holes no larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in<br />
diameter in concrete surface.<br />
3. Furnish ties with integral water-barrier plates to walls indicated to receive dampproofing<br />
or waterproofing.<br />
2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.<br />
B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M.<br />
C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, plain, fabricated from asdrawn<br />
steel wire into flat sheets.<br />
2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening<br />
reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel<br />
wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "<strong>Manual</strong> of Standard Practice," of greater<br />
compressive strength than concrete and as follows:<br />
1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use<br />
CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.<br />
2. For epoxy-coated reinforcement, use epoxy-coated or other dielectric-polymer-coated<br />
wire bar supports.<br />
3. For zinc-coated reinforcement, use galvanized wire or dielectric-polymer-coated wire bar<br />
supports.<br />
2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS<br />
A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and<br />
source, throughout <strong>Project</strong>:<br />
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Supplement with the following:<br />
a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class F, 30%.<br />
B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3S coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide<br />
aggregates from a single source.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 4
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) nominal.<br />
2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.<br />
C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.<br />
2.5 ADMIXTURES<br />
A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.<br />
B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with<br />
other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those<br />
permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium<br />
chloride.<br />
1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A.<br />
2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B.<br />
3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D.<br />
4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F.<br />
5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,<br />
Type G.<br />
6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.<br />
2.6 FIBER REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: fibrillated polypropylene micro-fibers engineered and designed for use<br />
in concrete, complying with ASTM C 1116/C 1116M, Type III, 1/2 to 1-1/2 inches 13 to 38<br />
mm) long.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Fibrillated Micro-Fibers:<br />
1) Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; Fibrasol F.<br />
2) Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Fiberstrand F.<br />
3) FORTA Corporation; FORTA.<br />
4) Grace <strong>Construction</strong> Products, W. R. Grace & Co.; Grace Fibers.<br />
5) Nycon, Inc.; ProConF.<br />
6) Propex Concrete Systems Corp.; Fibermesh 300.<br />
7) Sika Corporation; Sika Fiber PPF.<br />
2.7 VAPOR RETARDERS<br />
A. Sheet Vapor Retarder: Polyethylene sheet, ASTM D 4397, not less than 10 mils (0.25 mm)<br />
thick.<br />
1. Radon Diffusion Coefficient: 1.3x10 -13 m 2 /Second or less.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 5
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
2.8 CURING MATERIALS<br />
A. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application<br />
to fresh concrete.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Axim Italcementi Group, Inc.; CATEXOL CimFilm.<br />
b. BASF <strong>Construction</strong> Chemicals - Building Systems; Confilm.<br />
c. ChemMasters; SprayFilm.<br />
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Aquafilm.<br />
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film (J-74).<br />
f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; BurkeFilm.<br />
g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Eucobar.<br />
h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Vapor-Aid.<br />
i. Lambert Corporation; LAMBCO Skin.<br />
j. L&M <strong>Construction</strong> Chemicals, Inc.; E-CON.<br />
k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; EVAPRE.<br />
l. Metalcrete Industries; Waterhold.<br />
m. Nox-Crete Products Group; MONOFILM.<br />
n. Sika Corporation; SikaFilm.<br />
o. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Film.<br />
p. Symons by Dayton Superior; Finishing Aid.<br />
q. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2120 TRI-FILM.<br />
r. Unitex; PRO-FILM.<br />
s. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Envio Set.<br />
B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing<br />
approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.<br />
C. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene<br />
sheet.<br />
D. Water: Potable.<br />
E. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,<br />
dissipating, certified, etc.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Curing Compound #2 DR WB.<br />
b. BASF <strong>Construction</strong> Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 200.<br />
c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.<br />
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; W.B. Resin Cure.<br />
e. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Rez Cure (J-11-W).<br />
f. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Res X Cure WB.<br />
g. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Kurez W VOX;<br />
TAMMSCURE WB 30C.<br />
h. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Thinfilm 420.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 6
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
i. Lambert Corporation; AQUA KURE - CLEAR.<br />
j. L&M <strong>Construction</strong> Chemicals, Inc.; L&M Cure R.<br />
k. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; 1100-CLEAR.<br />
l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Resin Cure E.<br />
m. Right Pointe; Clear Water Resin.<br />
n. SpecChem, LLC; Spec Rez Clear.<br />
o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Resi-Chem Clear.<br />
p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 DC WB.<br />
q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex Enviocure 100.<br />
F. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B,<br />
nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of<br />
floor covering.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Anti-Hydro International, Inc.; AH Clear Cure WB.<br />
b. BASF <strong>Construction</strong> Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal WB.<br />
c. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure & Seal 20.<br />
d. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Cure and Seal WB.<br />
e. Cresset Chemical Company; Crete-Trete 309-VOC Cure & Seal.<br />
f. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-18).<br />
g. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II.<br />
h. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Aqua Cure VOX;<br />
Clearseal WB 150.<br />
i. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Cure & Seal 309 Emulsion.<br />
j. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20.<br />
k. L&M <strong>Construction</strong> Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB.<br />
l. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20.<br />
m. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure.<br />
n. Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 150E.<br />
o. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E.<br />
p. TK Products, Division of Sierra Corporation; TK-2519 WB.<br />
q. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 309.<br />
G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18<br />
to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere<br />
with bonding of floor covering.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. BASF <strong>Construction</strong> Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal W.<br />
b. ChemMasters; Safe-Cure Clear.<br />
c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; High Seal.<br />
d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-19).<br />
e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Spartan Cote WB II 20 Percent.<br />
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Diamond Clear VOX;<br />
Clearseal WB STD.<br />
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; SureCure Emulsion.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 7
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
h. Lambert Corporation; Glazecote Sealer-20.<br />
i. L&M <strong>Construction</strong> Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB.<br />
j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20.<br />
k. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 0800.<br />
l. Nox-Crete Products Group; Cure & Seal 200E.<br />
m. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E.<br />
n. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Starseal 0800.<br />
H. Clear, Solvent-Borne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,<br />
Type 1, Class A.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. BASF <strong>Construction</strong> Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure-N-Seal 25 LV.<br />
b. ChemMasters; Spray-Cure & Seal Plus.<br />
c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315.<br />
d. Dayton Superior Corporation; Day-Chem Cure and Seal (J-22UV).<br />
e. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315.<br />
f. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear;<br />
LusterSeal 300.<br />
g. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25.<br />
h. Lambert Corporation; UV Super Seal.<br />
i. L&M <strong>Construction</strong> Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal Plus.<br />
j. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; CS-309/30.<br />
k. Metalcrete Industries; Seal N Kure 30.<br />
l. Right Pointe; Right Sheen 30.<br />
m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Certi-Vex AC 1315.<br />
2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or<br />
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
I. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing and Sealing Compound: ASTM C 1315,<br />
Type 1, Class A.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. BASF <strong>Construction</strong> Chemicals - Building Systems; Kure 1315.<br />
b. ChemMasters; Polyseal WB.<br />
c. Conspec by Dayton Superior; Sealcure 1315 WB.<br />
d. Edoco by Dayton Superior; Cureseal 1315 WB.<br />
e. Euclid Chemical Company (The), an RPM company; Super Diamond Clear VOX;<br />
LusterSeal WB 300.<br />
f. Kaufman Products, Inc.; Sure Cure 25 Emulsion.<br />
g. Lambert Corporation; UV Safe Seal.<br />
h. L&M <strong>Construction</strong> Chemicals, Inc.; Lumiseal WB Plus.<br />
i. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-30.<br />
j. Metalcrete Industries; Metcure 30.<br />
k. Right Pointe; Right Sheen WB30.<br />
l. Symons by Dayton Superior; Cure & Seal 31 Percent E.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 8
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
m. Vexcon Chemicals, Inc.; Vexcon Starseal 1315.<br />
2. VOC Content: Curing and sealing compounds shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or<br />
less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
2.9 RELATED MATERIALS<br />
A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.<br />
2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL<br />
A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of<br />
laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.<br />
1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture<br />
designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.<br />
B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than<br />
portland cement in concrete as follows:<br />
1. Fly Ash: 30 percent.<br />
C. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of<br />
cement.<br />
D. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Use water-reducing, high-range water-reducing or plasticizing admixture in concrete, as<br />
required, for placement and workability.<br />
2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low<br />
humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.<br />
3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial<br />
slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a<br />
water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.<br />
4. Use corrosion-inhibiting admixture in concrete mixtures where indicated.<br />
2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS<br />
A. Footings: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:<br />
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.<br />
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.<br />
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches 100 mm.<br />
4. Air Content: 5.5 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-1/2-inch<br />
(38-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.<br />
B. Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:<br />
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 9
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45.<br />
3. Slump Limit: 5 inches (125 mm).<br />
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm)<br />
nominal maximum aggregate size.<br />
C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:<br />
1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi (20.7 MPa) at 28 days.<br />
2. Minimum Cementitious Materials Content: 470 lb/cu. yd. (279 kg/cu. m.<br />
3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm).<br />
4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm)<br />
nominal maximum aggregate size.<br />
5. Synthetic Micro-Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's<br />
recommended rate, but not less than 1.5 lb/cu. yd. (0.90 kg/cu. m).<br />
2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "<strong>Manual</strong> of Standard Practice."<br />
2.13 CONCRETE MIXING<br />
A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to<br />
ASTM C 94/C 94M [ and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M], and furnish batch ticket information.<br />
1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and<br />
delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32<br />
deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 FORMWORK<br />
A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical,<br />
lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure<br />
can support such loads.<br />
B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment,<br />
elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.<br />
C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347 as abrupt or gradual, as follows:<br />
1. Class A, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces.<br />
2. Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.<br />
D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 10
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces.<br />
Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide<br />
top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.<br />
1. Install keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like, for easy removal.<br />
2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.<br />
F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required<br />
elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed<br />
strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.<br />
G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork<br />
is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to<br />
prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous<br />
locations.<br />
H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.<br />
I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads<br />
required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.<br />
J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and<br />
other debris just before placing concrete.<br />
K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and<br />
maintain proper alignment.<br />
L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written<br />
instructions, before placing reinforcement.<br />
3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS<br />
A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that<br />
is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates,<br />
diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.<br />
1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with<br />
tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and<br />
Bridges."<br />
2. Install reglets to receive waterproofing and to receive through-wall flashings in outer face<br />
of concrete frame at exterior walls, where flashing is shown at lintels, shelf angles, and<br />
other conditions.<br />
3. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.<br />
3.3 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS<br />
A. General: Formwork for sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the Work that does<br />
not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50<br />
deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete. Concrete has to be hard enough to not be<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 11
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
damaged by form-removal operations and curing and protection operations need to be<br />
maintained.<br />
1. Leave formwork for beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements that supports<br />
weight of concrete in place until concrete has achieved at least 70 percent of its 28-day<br />
design compressive strength.<br />
2. Remove forms only if shores have been arranged to permit removal of forms without<br />
loosening or disturbing shores.<br />
B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or<br />
otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply<br />
new form-release agent.<br />
C. When forms are reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten to close joints.<br />
Align and secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete<br />
surfaces unless approved by Architect.<br />
3.4 VAPOR RETARDERS<br />
A. Sheet Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair sheet vapor retarder according to<br />
ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.<br />
B. Granular Course: Cover vapor retarder with fine-graded granular material, moisten, and<br />
compact with mechanical equipment to elevation tolerances of plus 0 inch (0 mm) or minus 3/4<br />
inch (19 mm).<br />
1. Place and compact a 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) thick layer of fine-graded granular material over<br />
granular fill.<br />
3.5 STEEL REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. General: Comply with CRSI's "<strong>Manual</strong> of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.<br />
1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before<br />
placing concrete.<br />
B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that<br />
would reduce bond to concrete.<br />
C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and<br />
support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack<br />
weld crossing reinforcing bars.<br />
D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 12
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.<br />
F. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to<br />
minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset<br />
laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with<br />
wire.<br />
3.6 JOINTS<br />
A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.<br />
B. <strong>Construction</strong> Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at<br />
locations indicated or as approved by Architect.<br />
1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across<br />
construction joints unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through<br />
sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.<br />
2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete.<br />
3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset<br />
joints in girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder<br />
intersection.<br />
4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and<br />
girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs.<br />
5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls,<br />
near corners, and in concealed locations where possible.<br />
6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or<br />
partially hardened concrete surfaces.<br />
7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened<br />
or partially hardened concrete surfaces.<br />
C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning<br />
concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least onefourth<br />
of concrete thickness as follows:<br />
1. Grooved Joints: Form contraction joints after initial floating by grooving and finishing<br />
each edge of joint to a radius of 1/8 inch (3.2 mm). Repeat grooving of contraction joints<br />
after applying surface finishes. Eliminate groover tool marks on concrete surfaces.<br />
2. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof<br />
abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete<br />
when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before<br />
concrete develops random contraction cracks.<br />
D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab<br />
junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and<br />
other locations, as indicated.<br />
1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished<br />
concrete surface unless otherwise indicated.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 13
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) or more than 1 inch<br />
(25 mm) below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 07<br />
Section "Joint Sealants," are indicated.<br />
3. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is<br />
required, lace or clip sections together.<br />
3.7 CONCRETE PLACEMENT<br />
A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded<br />
items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.<br />
B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at <strong>Project</strong> site, or during placement unless<br />
approved by Architect.<br />
C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at <strong>Project</strong> site, subject to<br />
limitations of ACI 301.<br />
1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to<br />
mixture.<br />
D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new<br />
concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of<br />
weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated.<br />
Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.<br />
1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures<br />
and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.<br />
2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301.<br />
3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators<br />
vertically at uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6<br />
inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of<br />
concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration<br />
to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and<br />
other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.<br />
E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of<br />
construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.<br />
1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked<br />
around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.<br />
2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement.<br />
3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations.<br />
4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required.<br />
5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured<br />
surface plane, before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb<br />
slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.<br />
F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from<br />
physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low<br />
temperatures.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 14
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C)<br />
for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the<br />
temperature range required by ACI 301.<br />
2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete<br />
on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.<br />
3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or<br />
chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.<br />
G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:<br />
1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled<br />
mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water<br />
equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to<br />
cool concrete is Contractor's option.<br />
2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep<br />
subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.<br />
3.8 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES<br />
A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes<br />
and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified<br />
limits on formed-surface irregularities.<br />
1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.<br />
B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in<br />
an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and<br />
defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface<br />
irregularities.<br />
1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be<br />
covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.<br />
3.9 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS<br />
A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and<br />
finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.<br />
B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small<br />
or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots.<br />
Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular<br />
texture.<br />
1. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an<br />
unleveled, freestanding, 10-ft.- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on two high spots and<br />
placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 15
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces indicated and where<br />
ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is<br />
still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.<br />
1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel-finished floor surfaces.<br />
D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, ramps, and<br />
elsewhere as indicated.<br />
1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with<br />
fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish<br />
with Architect before application.<br />
3.10 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS<br />
A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures after work of other trades is in<br />
place unless otherwise indicated. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with inplace<br />
construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to<br />
complete the Work.<br />
B. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still<br />
green and by steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and<br />
terminations slightly rounded.<br />
C. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as<br />
shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at correct elevations,<br />
complying with diagrams or templates from manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.<br />
D. Steel Pan Stairs: Provide concrete fill for steel pan stair treads, landings, and associated items.<br />
Cast-in inserts and accessories as shown on Drawings. Screed, tamp, and trowel finish concrete<br />
surfaces.<br />
3.11 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING<br />
A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot<br />
temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hotweather<br />
protection during curing.<br />
B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or<br />
windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h (1 kg/sq. m x h) before and<br />
during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after<br />
placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.<br />
C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported<br />
slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after<br />
loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the<br />
remainder of the curing period.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 16
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed<br />
surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.<br />
E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:<br />
1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the<br />
following materials:<br />
a. Water.<br />
b. Continuous water-fog spray.<br />
c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete<br />
surfaces and edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.<br />
2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining<br />
cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped<br />
at least 12 inches (300mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less<br />
than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover<br />
material and waterproof tape.<br />
a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive<br />
floor coverings.<br />
b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive<br />
penetrating liquid floor treatements.<br />
3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller<br />
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall<br />
within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair<br />
damage during curing period.<br />
a. Removal: After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without<br />
damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound<br />
manufacturer[ unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere<br />
with bonding of floor covering used on <strong>Project</strong>].<br />
4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a<br />
continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written<br />
instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial<br />
application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity<br />
of coating and repair damage during curing period.<br />
3.12 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS<br />
A. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to<br />
hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
3.13 JOINT FILLING<br />
A. Prepare, clean, and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 17
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Defer joint filling until concrete has aged at least one month. Do not fill joints until<br />
construction traffic has permanently ceased.<br />
B. Remove dirt, debris, saw cuttings, curing compounds, and sealers from joints; leave contact<br />
faces of joint clean and dry.<br />
C. Install semirigid joint filler full depth in saw-cut joints and at least 2 inches (50 mm) deep in<br />
formed joints. Overfill joint and trim joint filler flush with top of joint after hardening.<br />
3.14 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS<br />
A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove<br />
and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.<br />
B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two<br />
and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water<br />
for handling and placing.<br />
C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks,<br />
spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and<br />
stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.<br />
1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than<br />
1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension to solid concrete. Limit cut depth to 3/4 inch (19<br />
mm). Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water,<br />
and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching<br />
mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone<br />
plugs secured in place with bonding agent.<br />
2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and<br />
standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding<br />
color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match<br />
before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher<br />
than surrounding surface.<br />
3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and<br />
structural performance as determined by Architect.<br />
D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and<br />
verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces<br />
sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.<br />
1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,<br />
honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or<br />
that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of<br />
width, and other objectionable conditions.<br />
2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding.<br />
3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing<br />
operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired<br />
areas to blend into adjacent concrete.<br />
4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment.<br />
Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 18
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather<br />
edges to match adjacent floor elevations.<br />
5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping. Cut out low<br />
areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 1/4 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent<br />
floor elevations. Prepare, mix, and apply repair topping and primer according to<br />
manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level<br />
surface.<br />
6. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in<br />
diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with<br />
clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm)<br />
clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and<br />
apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original<br />
concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with<br />
adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.<br />
7. Repair random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter with patching<br />
mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt,<br />
and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place<br />
patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Compact patching mortar and finish to<br />
match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours.<br />
E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive and<br />
patching mortar.<br />
F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's<br />
approval.<br />
3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and<br />
inspections and to submit reports.<br />
B. Inspections:<br />
1. Steel reinforcement placement.<br />
2. Verification of use of required design mixture.<br />
3. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing.<br />
C. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to<br />
ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:<br />
1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete<br />
mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for<br />
each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.<br />
2. Testing Frequency: Obtain at least one composite sample for each 100 cu. yd. (76 cu. m)<br />
or fraction thereof of each concrete mixture placed each day.<br />
a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests<br />
for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly<br />
selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 19
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample,<br />
but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform<br />
additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.<br />
4. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for<br />
each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete<br />
mixture.<br />
5. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is<br />
40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test<br />
for each composite sample.<br />
6. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test<br />
for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete<br />
mixture.<br />
7. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.<br />
a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each<br />
composite sample.<br />
b. Cast and field cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite<br />
sample.<br />
8. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured<br />
specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days.<br />
a. Test one set of two field-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens<br />
at 28 days.<br />
b. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of<br />
two specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.<br />
9. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratorycured<br />
cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures<br />
for protecting and curing in-place concrete.<br />
10. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three<br />
consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength<br />
and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by<br />
more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).<br />
11. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and<br />
Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain<br />
<strong>Project</strong> identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete<br />
testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive<br />
strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking<br />
strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.<br />
12. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may<br />
be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of<br />
concrete.<br />
13. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete<br />
when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other<br />
requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency<br />
may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with<br />
ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.<br />
14. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine<br />
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 20
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
15. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply<br />
with the Contract Documents.<br />
D. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M)<br />
within 48 hours of finishing.<br />
3.16 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS<br />
A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction<br />
period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in<br />
writing by liquid floor treatments installer.<br />
END OF SECTION 033000<br />
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000 - 21
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 035413 - GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling underlayment for application below<br />
interior floor coverings.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 09 Sections for patching and leveling compounds applied with floor coverings.<br />
1.3 UNIT PRICES<br />
A. Work of this Section is affected by underlayment unit price.<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit: For priming and sealing coatings, documentation including<br />
printed statement of VOC content.<br />
2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit: For priming and sealing coatings, documentation<br />
indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the<br />
California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile<br />
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
C. Shop Drawings: Include plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of<br />
underlayment based on survey of substrate conditions.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.<br />
B. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems<br />
certifying that products are compatible.<br />
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035413 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Minutes of preinstallation conference.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of<br />
underlayment products required for this <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in<br />
writing that products are compatible.<br />
C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment systems<br />
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing<br />
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.<br />
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of<br />
another qualified testing agency.<br />
D. Sound Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide gypsum-cement underlayment<br />
systems identical to those of assemblies tested for STC and IIC ratings per ASTM E 90 and<br />
ASTM E 492 by a qualified testing agency.<br />
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store materials to comply with manufacturer's written instructions to prevent deterioration from<br />
moisture or other detrimental effects.<br />
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate<br />
temperature, ventilation, ambient temperature and humidity, and other conditions affecting<br />
underlayment performance.<br />
1. Place gypsum-cement-based underlayments only when ambient temperature and<br />
temperature of substrates are between 50 and 80 deg F (10 and 27 deg C).<br />
1.9 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate application of underlayment with requirements of floor-covering products and<br />
adhesives, specified in Division 09 Sections, to ensure compatibility of products.<br />
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035413 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS<br />
A. Underlayment: Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum<br />
uniform thickness of 1/8 inch (3 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor<br />
elevations.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Maxxon Corporation; Gyp-Crete.<br />
b. USG Corporation; Levelrock 2500.<br />
2. Cement Binder: Gypsum or blended gypsum cement as defined by ASTM C 219.<br />
3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 2000 psi (13.8 MPa) at 28 days when tested<br />
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M.<br />
4. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer,<br />
formulated for use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.<br />
B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm); or coarse sand as<br />
recommended by underlayment manufacturer.<br />
1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for<br />
underlayment thickness required.<br />
C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C).<br />
D. Reinforcement: For underlayment applied to wood substrates, provide galvanized metal lath or<br />
other corrosion-resistant reinforcement recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.<br />
E. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate,<br />
conditions, and application indicated.<br />
1. Primer shall have a VOC content of 200 g/L or less when calculated according to<br />
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.<br />
2. Primer shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California<br />
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic<br />
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
F. Corrosion-Resistant Coating: Recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for<br />
metal substrates.<br />
1. Coating shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to<br />
40 CFR 59, Subpart D.<br />
2. Coating shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California<br />
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic<br />
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035413 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.2 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Sound Mat:<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Maxxon Corporation; Acoustimat II.<br />
b. USG Corporation; Levelrock Brand Sound Reduction Mat.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance.<br />
1. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to<br />
prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.<br />
2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.<br />
B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions,<br />
laitance, glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and<br />
other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.<br />
1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed<br />
with installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission<br />
rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/100 sq. m) in 24 hours.<br />
C. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate<br />
movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and<br />
remove sanding dust.<br />
1. Install underlayment reinforcement recommended in writing by manufacturer.<br />
D. Metal Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rust,<br />
foreign matter, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond. Apply corrosionresistant<br />
coating compatible with underlayment if recommended in writing by underlayment<br />
manufacturer.<br />
E. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes,<br />
sealants, and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces<br />
according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035413 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
F. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment<br />
according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
G. Sound Control Mat: Install sound control materials according to manufacturer's written<br />
instructions.<br />
1. Do not install mechanical fasteners that penetrate through the sound control materials.<br />
3.3 APPLICATION<br />
A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written<br />
instructions.<br />
1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after<br />
application recommended in writing by manufacturer.<br />
2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and<br />
intercoat adhesion.<br />
3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to<br />
continue through underlayment.<br />
B. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.<br />
C. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.<br />
1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to product surface.<br />
2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.<br />
D. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination<br />
during application and curing processes.<br />
E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in<br />
writing by underlayment manufacturer.<br />
F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including<br />
areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.<br />
3.4 PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.<br />
END OF SECTION 035413<br />
GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 035413 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 042200 - CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Concrete masonry units.<br />
2. Mortar and grout.<br />
3. Steel reinforcing bars.<br />
4. Masonry joint reinforcement.<br />
5. Ties and anchors.<br />
6. Embedded flashing.<br />
7. Miscellaneous masonry accessories.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s).<br />
B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing reinforcing steel in grouted cells.<br />
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Provideunit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days.<br />
1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive<br />
strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to Tables 1<br />
and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.<br />
2. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry by testing masonry prisms<br />
according to ASTM C 1314.<br />
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING<br />
A. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to<br />
perform preconstruction testing indicated below. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with<br />
specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.<br />
1. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit required, according to ASTM C 140<br />
for compressive strength.<br />
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to<br />
ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength.<br />
3. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 780<br />
for compressive strength.<br />
4. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix required, according to ASTM C 1019.<br />
5. Prism Test: For each type of construction required, according to ASTM C 1314.<br />
1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Certificates for Credit MR 2.2: For products and materials required to comply<br />
with requirements for regional materials indicating location and distance from <strong>Project</strong> of<br />
material manufacturer.<br />
C. Shop Drawings: For the following:<br />
1. Masonry Units: Show sizes, profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes.<br />
2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars.<br />
Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show<br />
elevations of reinforced walls.<br />
3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications.<br />
1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
Material Certificates: For each type and size of the following:<br />
1. Masonry units.<br />
a. Include data on material properties and material test reports substantiating<br />
compliance with requirements.<br />
b. For masonry units, include data and calculations establishing average net-area<br />
compressive strength of units.<br />
2. Cementitious materials. Include brand, type, and name of manufacturer.<br />
3. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.<br />
4. Reinforcing bars.<br />
5. Joint reinforcement.<br />
B. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of<br />
ingredients.<br />
1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test<br />
according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water<br />
retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.<br />
2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with<br />
compressive strength requirement.<br />
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Statement of Compressive Strength of Masonry: For each combination of masonry unit type<br />
and mortar type, provide statement of average net-area compressive strength of masonry units,<br />
mortar type, and resulting net-area compressive strength of masonry determined according to<br />
Tables 1 and 2 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.<br />
D. Cold-Weather and Hot-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and<br />
equipment to be used to comply with requirements.<br />
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated.<br />
B. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and<br />
color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source<br />
from single manufacturer for each product required.<br />
C. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality,<br />
including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious<br />
component and from single source or producer for each aggregate.<br />
D. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by<br />
requirements in the Contract Documents.<br />
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an<br />
enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. If<br />
units become wet, do not install until they are dry.<br />
B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not<br />
use cementitious materials that have become damp.<br />
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and<br />
contamination avoided.<br />
D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for use with<br />
dispensing silos. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms,<br />
under cover, and in a dry location or in covered weatherproof dispensing silos.<br />
E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt<br />
and oil.<br />
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with<br />
waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when<br />
construction is not in progress.<br />
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides of walls and hold cover securely<br />
in place.<br />
B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least<br />
three days after building masonry walls or columns.<br />
C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left<br />
exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such<br />
masonry.<br />
1. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading<br />
coverings on ground and over wall surface.<br />
2. Protect sills, ledges, and projections from mortar droppings.<br />
3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and<br />
integral finishes, from mortar droppings.<br />
4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from<br />
splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry.<br />
D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice<br />
or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost<br />
or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in<br />
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.<br />
1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40<br />
deg F and higher and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days<br />
after completing cleaning.<br />
E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in<br />
ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL<br />
A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to<br />
contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units<br />
where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.<br />
2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS<br />
A. Regional Materials: CMUs shall be manufactured within 500 miles of <strong>Project</strong> site from<br />
aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as<br />
manufactured, within 500 miles of <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
B. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows, with exposed surfaces matching exposed<br />
faces of adjacent units unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers,<br />
bonding, and other special conditions.<br />
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Provide square-edged units for outside corners unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. CMUs: ASTM C 90.<br />
1. Basis of Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide J.C. White as<br />
manufactured by Crego Block, or 230 Coral as manufactured by Utility Block Company,<br />
or approved equal.<br />
2. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive<br />
strength of 1350 psi.<br />
3. Density Classification: Lightweight.<br />
4. Size (Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions.<br />
5. Faces to Receive Plaster: Where units are indicated to receive a direct application of<br />
plaster, provide texture-face units made with gap-graded aggregates.<br />
2.3 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS<br />
A. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.<br />
1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or<br />
crushed stone.<br />
2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the<br />
No. 16 sieve.<br />
B. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.<br />
C. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with<br />
ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar<br />
of composition indicated.<br />
D. Water: Potable.<br />
2.4 REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60.<br />
B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.<br />
1. Interior Walls: Mill- galvanized, carbon steel.<br />
2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel.<br />
3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.<br />
4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter.<br />
5. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c.<br />
6. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet, with prefabricated corner and tee units.<br />
C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with<br />
single pair of side rods.<br />
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS ANCHORS<br />
A. Anchor Bolts: Headed steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563<br />
hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with<br />
ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.<br />
B. Postinstalled Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.<br />
1. Load Capacity: Capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load<br />
imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed<br />
in concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified<br />
independent testing agency.<br />
2. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with<br />
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5 unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from PVC, complying with ASTM D 2287,<br />
Type PVC-65406 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in<br />
masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.<br />
B. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226,<br />
Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).<br />
C. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry<br />
unit cells and hold reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed from 0.148-inch steel<br />
wire, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units designed for number of bars indicated.<br />
2.7 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES<br />
A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators,<br />
retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout.<br />
2. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to<br />
view, regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.<br />
B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the<br />
following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to<br />
provide required compressive strength of masonry.<br />
1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S.<br />
2. For reinforced masonry, use Type S.<br />
C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.<br />
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will<br />
comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces<br />
and pour height.<br />
2. Proportion grout in accordance with ASTM C 476, paragraph 4.2.2 for specified 28-day<br />
compressive strength indicated, but not less than 2000 psi.<br />
3. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to<br />
ASTM C 143/C 143M.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation<br />
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
1. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental<br />
to performance of work.<br />
2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified.<br />
3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed.<br />
B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify<br />
actual locations of piping connections.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite wall and other masonry construction to full thickness<br />
shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections.<br />
C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing<br />
equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening.<br />
D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous<br />
pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp,<br />
unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install<br />
cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.<br />
3.3 TOLERANCES<br />
A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:<br />
1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch or<br />
minus 1/4 inch.<br />
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or<br />
minus 1/2 inch.<br />
3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or<br />
minus 1/4 inch in a story height or 1/2 inch total.<br />
B. Lines and Levels:<br />
1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4<br />
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.<br />
2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary<br />
from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.<br />
3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet,<br />
3/8 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.<br />
4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and<br />
expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet,<br />
1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.<br />
5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, 3/8 inch<br />
in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.<br />
6. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4<br />
inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum.<br />
C. Joints:<br />
1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch,<br />
with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch.<br />
2. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from bed-joint thickness of adjacent courses by more<br />
than 1/8 inch.<br />
3. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8<br />
inch or minus 1/4 inch.<br />
4. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus<br />
1/8 inch.<br />
3.4 LAYING MASONRY WALLS<br />
A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint<br />
thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets.<br />
Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at<br />
other locations.<br />
B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in<br />
running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at<br />
corners or jambs.<br />
C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less<br />
than 4 inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with<br />
less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners and jambs.<br />
D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in<br />
course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive<br />
mortar before laying fresh masonry.<br />
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections.<br />
Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.<br />
F. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of<br />
metal lath, wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core.<br />
3.5 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING<br />
A. Lay hollow CMUs as follows:<br />
1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints.<br />
2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters.<br />
3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on<br />
footings.<br />
4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on<br />
footings where cells are not grouted.<br />
B. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint<br />
thickness unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3.6 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT<br />
A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8<br />
inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches.<br />
1. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls.<br />
2. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and<br />
extending 12 inches beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.<br />
B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.<br />
D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.<br />
E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns,<br />
offsets, column fireproofing, pipe enclosures, and other special conditions.<br />
3.7 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS<br />
A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses.<br />
Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for inplane<br />
wall or partition movement.<br />
B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows:<br />
1. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block.<br />
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.8 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION<br />
A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support<br />
reinforced masonry elements during construction.<br />
1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as<br />
indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace,<br />
tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of<br />
reinforced masonry.<br />
2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened<br />
sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during<br />
construction.<br />
B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.<br />
C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough<br />
strength to resist grout pressure.<br />
1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout<br />
placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.<br />
2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches.<br />
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections<br />
and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to<br />
perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements<br />
shall be done at Contractor's expense.<br />
B. Testing Prior to <strong>Construction</strong>: One set of tests.<br />
C. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof.<br />
D. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for<br />
compressive strength.<br />
E. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to<br />
ASTM C 780.<br />
F. Mortar Test (Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780. Test<br />
mortar for compressive strength.<br />
G. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.<br />
H. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C 1314 at 7 days and<br />
at 28 days.<br />
3.10 PARGING<br />
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
A. Parge exterior faces of below-grade masonry walls, where indicated, in 2 uniform coats to a<br />
total thickness of 3/4 inch. Dampen wall before applying first coat and scarify first coat to<br />
ensure full bond to subsequent coat.<br />
B. Use a steel-trowel finish to produce a smooth, flat, dense surface with a maximum surface<br />
variation of 1/8 inch per foot. Form a wash at top of parging and a cove at bottom.<br />
C. Damp-cure parging for at least 24 hours and protect parging until cured.<br />
3.11 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING<br />
A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise<br />
damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install<br />
in fresh mortar, pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement.<br />
B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and<br />
completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent<br />
construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application,<br />
where indicated.<br />
C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove<br />
mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.<br />
D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:<br />
1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes<br />
or chisels.<br />
2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for<br />
comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding<br />
with cleaning of masonry.<br />
3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering<br />
them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking<br />
tape.<br />
4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by<br />
rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.<br />
5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to<br />
type of stain on exposed surfaces.<br />
3.12 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL<br />
A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's<br />
property. At completion of unit masonry work, remove from <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
B. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess clean masonry waste that cannot be used as fill, as<br />
described above, and other masonry waste, and legally dispose of off Owner's property.<br />
END OF SECTION 042200<br />
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY 042200 - 11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Steel framing and supports for overhead doors and grilles.<br />
2. Steel framing and supports for countertops.<br />
3. Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.<br />
4. Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified<br />
in other Sections.<br />
5. Steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction.<br />
6. Prefabricated building columns.<br />
7. Shelf angles.<br />
8. Metal ladders.<br />
9. Ladder safety cages.<br />
10. Miscellaneous steel trim including steel edgings.<br />
11. Metal bollards.<br />
12. Downspout guards.<br />
13. Abrasive metal nosings.<br />
14. Metal downspout boots.<br />
15. Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other<br />
Sections.<br />
B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:<br />
1. Loose steel lintels.<br />
2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated<br />
to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.<br />
3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete for applications where they are not<br />
specified in other Sections.<br />
C. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing anchor bolts, steel pipe<br />
sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, wedge-type inserts, and other items cast into concrete.<br />
2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for installing loose lintels, anchor bolts, and other<br />
items built into unit masonry.<br />
3. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs."<br />
4. Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings."<br />
5. Division 06 Sections for metal framing anchors and timber connectors.<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
6. Division 12 Section "Site Furnishings" for bicycle racks.<br />
7. Division 32 Section "Plants" for tree grates.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Delegated Design: Design ladders and alternating tread devices, including comprehensive<br />
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and<br />
design criteria indicated.<br />
B. Structural Performance of Aluminum Ladders: Aluminum ladders, including landings, shall<br />
withstand the effects of loads and stresses within limits and under conditions specified in<br />
ANSI A14.3.<br />
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature<br />
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,<br />
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.<br />
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material<br />
surfaces.<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For the following:<br />
1. Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.<br />
2. Prefabricated building columns.<br />
3. Metal nosings and treads.<br />
4. Paint products.<br />
5. Grout.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.<br />
1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their<br />
connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.<br />
C. Samples for Verification: For each type and finish of extruded nosing and tread.<br />
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance<br />
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified<br />
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.<br />
B. Mill Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of stainless-steel certifying that products furnished<br />
comply with requirements.<br />
C. Welding certificates.<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers<br />
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,<br />
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."<br />
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:<br />
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."<br />
2. AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum."<br />
3. AWS D1.6, "Structural Welding Code - Stainless Steel."<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with<br />
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.<br />
1.8 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint<br />
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats<br />
are compatible with one another.<br />
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages and steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.<br />
Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves,<br />
concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in<br />
concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to <strong>Project</strong> site in time for installation.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 METALS, GENERAL<br />
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise<br />
indicated. For metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials<br />
without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.<br />
2.2 FERROUS METALS<br />
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
B. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, and Plate: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304<br />
Type 316L.<br />
C. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 304 Type 316L.<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.<br />
E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.<br />
F. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.<br />
1. Size of Channels: 1-5/8 by 1-5/8 inches (41 by 41 mm).<br />
2. Material: Galvanized steel, ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G90 (Z275) coating; 0.108-inch<br />
(2.8-mm) nominal thickness.<br />
3. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B<br />
minimum thickness; hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.<br />
G. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
2.3 NONFERROUS METALS<br />
A. Aluminum Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M), Alloy 6061-T6.<br />
B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T6.<br />
C. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.<br />
D. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.<br />
E. Bronze Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Bars: ASTM B 36/B 36M, Alloy UNS No. C28000 (muntz<br />
metal, 60 percent copper).<br />
F. Bronze Extrusions: ASTM B 455, Alloy UNS No. C38500 (extruded architectural bronze).<br />
G. Bronze Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C83600 (leaded red brass) or No. C84400<br />
(leaded semired brass).<br />
H. Nickel Silver Extrusions: ASTM B 151/B 151M, Alloy UNS No. C74500.<br />
I. Nickel Silver Castings: ASTM B 584, Alloy UNS No. C97600 (20 percent leaded nickel<br />
bronze).<br />
2.4 FASTENERS<br />
A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use<br />
and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941<br />
(ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class<br />
required.<br />
1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum.<br />
2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel.<br />
3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver.<br />
4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M,<br />
Property Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat<br />
washers.<br />
C. Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3 (ASTM A 325M,<br />
Type 3); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, Grade C3 (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S3); and, where<br />
indicated, flat washers.<br />
D. Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts,<br />
ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M); with hex nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M); and, where<br />
indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1 (A1).<br />
E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563;<br />
and, where indicated, flat washers.<br />
1. Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being<br />
fastened is indicated to be galvanized.<br />
F. Eyebolts: ASTM A 489.<br />
G. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).<br />
H. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).<br />
I. Wood Screws: Flat head, ASME B18.6.1.<br />
J. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).<br />
K. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).<br />
L. Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the<br />
load imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in<br />
concrete, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified<br />
independent testing agency.<br />
M. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise<br />
indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or<br />
ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip<br />
galvanized per ASTM F 2329.<br />
N. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.<br />
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with<br />
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1<br />
(A1) Group 2 (A4)] stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts,<br />
ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).<br />
O. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying<br />
with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with<br />
temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply<br />
with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.<br />
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy<br />
welded.<br />
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product<br />
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the<br />
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental<br />
Chambers."<br />
C. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.<br />
D. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer<br />
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.<br />
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.<br />
E. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and<br />
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.<br />
F. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.<br />
G. Nonshrink, Metallic Grout: Factory-packaged, ferrous-aggregate grout complying with<br />
ASTM C 1107, specifically recommended by manufacturer for heavy-duty loading applications.<br />
H. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout<br />
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for<br />
interior and exterior applications.<br />
I. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for<br />
normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000<br />
psi (20 MPa).<br />
2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units<br />
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain<br />
structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated<br />
installation.<br />
B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of<br />
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on<br />
exposed surfaces.<br />
C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or<br />
otherwise impairing work.<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.<br />
E. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:<br />
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion<br />
resistance of base metals.<br />
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.<br />
3. Remove welding flux immediately.<br />
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no<br />
roughness shows after finishing.<br />
F. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or<br />
welds where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head<br />
(countersunk) fasteners unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.<br />
G. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude<br />
water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.<br />
H. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws,<br />
and similar items.<br />
I. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring<br />
devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.<br />
1. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with<br />
integrally welded steel strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches (3.2 by 38 mm), with a<br />
minimum 6-inch (150-mm) embedment and 2-inch (50-mm) hook, not less than 8 inches<br />
(200 mm) from ends and corners of units and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS<br />
A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to<br />
complete the Work.<br />
B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise<br />
indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent<br />
construction.<br />
1. Fabricate units from slotted channel framing where indicated.<br />
2. Furnish inserts for units installed after concrete is placed.<br />
C. Fabricate steel pipe columns for supporting wood frame construction from steel pipe with steel<br />
baseplates and top plates as indicated. Drill or punch baseplates and top plates for anchor and<br />
connection bolts and weld to pipe with fillet welds all around. Make welds the same size as<br />
pipe wall thickness unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate from Schedule 40 steel pipe.<br />
2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide 1/2-inch (12.7-mm) baseplates with four 5/8-inch<br />
(16-mm) anchor bolts and 1/4-inch (6.4-mm) top plates.<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.<br />
E. Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer<br />
2.8 SHELF ANGLES<br />
A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete<br />
framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch (19-mm) bolts, spaced not more<br />
than 6 inches (150 mm) from ends and 24 inches (600 mm) o.c., unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Provide mitered and welded units at corners.<br />
2. Provide open joints in shelf angles at expansion and control joints. Make open joint<br />
approximately 2 inches (50 mm) larger than expansion or control joint.<br />
B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and<br />
concrete.<br />
C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.<br />
D. Prime shelf angles located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.<br />
E. Furnish wedge-type concrete inserts, complete with fasteners, to attach shelf angles to cast-inplace<br />
concrete.<br />
2.9 METAL LADDERS<br />
A. General:<br />
1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.<br />
B. Steel Ladders:<br />
1. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch (9.5-by-64-mm) steel flat bars, with eased<br />
edges.<br />
3. Rungs: 3/4-inch- (19-mm-) diameter steel bars.<br />
4. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.<br />
5. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminumoxide<br />
granules set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled<br />
with aluminum-oxide grout.<br />
6. Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material<br />
metallically bonded to rung.<br />
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1) IKG Industries, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac.<br />
2) SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a W. S. Molnar company; SlipNOT.<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
7. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel bar<br />
grating, supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch<br />
12 mm or 3/4 inch (19 mm) in least dimension.<br />
8. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with<br />
welded or bolted steel brackets.<br />
9. Prime exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.<br />
C. Aluminum Ladders:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
a. ACL Industries, Inc.<br />
b. Alco-Lite Industrial Products.<br />
c. Halliday Products.<br />
d. O'Keeffe's Inc.<br />
e. Precision Ladders, LLC.<br />
f. Royalite Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
g. Thompson Fabricating, LLC.<br />
2. Space siderails 18 inches (457 mm) apart unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum channels or tubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches<br />
(64 mm) deep, 3/4 inch (19 mm) wide, and 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick.<br />
4. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep and not less than<br />
1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, with ribbed tread surfaces.<br />
5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners or<br />
brackets and aluminum rivets.<br />
6. Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from pressure-locked aluminum bar grating or<br />
extruded-aluminum plank grating, supported by extruded-aluminum framing. Limit<br />
openings in gratings to no more than 1/2 inch (12 mm) in least dimension.<br />
7. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches (1500 mm) o.c. with<br />
welded or bolted aluminum brackets.<br />
8. Provide minimum 72-inch- (1830-mm-) high, hinged security door with padlock hasp at<br />
foot of ladder to prevent unauthorized ladder use.<br />
2.10 LADDER SAFETY CAGES<br />
A. General:<br />
1. Fabricate ladder safety cages to comply with ANSI A14.3. Assemble by welding or with<br />
stainless-steel fasteners.<br />
2. Provide primary hoops at tops and bottoms of cages and spaced not more than 20 feet<br />
(6 m) o.c. Provide secondary intermediate hoops spaced not more than 48 inches (1200<br />
mm) o.c. between primary hoops.<br />
3. Fasten assembled safety cage to ladder rails and adjacent construction by welding or with<br />
stainless-steel fasteners unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Steel Ladder Safety Cages:<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Primary Hoops: 1/4-by-4-inch (6.4-by-100-mm) flat bar hoops.<br />
2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4-by-2-inch (6.4-by-50-mm) flat bar hoops.<br />
3. Vertical Bars: 3/16-by-1-1/2-inch (4.8-by-38-mm) flat bars secured to each hoop.<br />
4. Galvanize ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners.<br />
5. Prime ladder safety cages, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer.<br />
C. Aluminum Ladder Safety Cages:<br />
1. Primary Hoops: 1/4-by-4-inch (6.4-by-100-mm) flat bar hoops.<br />
2. Secondary Intermediate Hoops: 1/4-by-2-inch (6.4-by-50-mm) flat bar hoops.<br />
3. Vertical Bars: 1/4-by-2-inch (6.4-by-50-mm) flat bars secured to each hoop.<br />
2.11 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM<br />
A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown<br />
with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed<br />
field splices where possible.<br />
B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with<br />
other work.<br />
1. Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry<br />
construction.<br />
C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.<br />
D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer. Primer specified in Division 09 Section<br />
"High-Performance Coatings."<br />
2.12 METAL BOLLARDS<br />
A. Fabricate metal bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe.<br />
1. Where bollards are indicated to receive controls for door operators, provide necessary<br />
cutouts for controls and holes for wire.<br />
2. Where bollards are indicated to receive light fixtures, provide necessary cutouts for<br />
fixtures and holes for wire.<br />
B. Fabricate internal sleeves for removable bollards from Schedule 40 steel pipe or 1/4-inch (6.4-<br />
mm) wall-thickness steel tubing with an OD approximately 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) less than ID of<br />
bollards. Match drill sleeve and bollard for 3/4 inch (19 mm) steel machine bolt.<br />
C. Prime bollards with zinc-rich primer.<br />
2.13 DOWNSPOUT GUARDS<br />
A. Fabricate downspout guards from 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick by 12-inch- (300-mm-) wide steel<br />
plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch<br />
(50-mm) clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch (19-mm)<br />
anchor bolts.<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Prime downspout guards with zinc-rich primer. primer specified in Division 09 Section "High-<br />
Performance Coatings."<br />
2.14 METAL DOWNSPOUT BOOTS<br />
A. Provide downspout boots made from cast iron in heights indicated with inlets of size and shape<br />
to suit downspouts. Provide units with flanges and holes for countersunk anchor bolts.<br />
1. Outlet: Vertical, to discharge into pipe.<br />
B. Prime cast iron downspout boots with zinc-rich primer.<br />
2.15 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES<br />
A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete<br />
construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.<br />
B. Prime plates with zinc-rich primer.<br />
2.16 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS<br />
A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and<br />
recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for<br />
each opening unless otherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single<br />
unit where indicated.<br />
B. Size loose lintels to provide bearing length at each side of openings equal to 1/12 of clear span<br />
but not less than 8 inches (200 mm) unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.<br />
D. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from<br />
concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than<br />
two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.<br />
2.17 FINISHES, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes <strong>Manual</strong> for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.<br />
C. Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into<br />
surrounding surface.<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.18 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES<br />
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for<br />
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.<br />
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint<br />
adhesion.<br />
B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded<br />
in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.<br />
C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with requirements indicated below:<br />
1. Exterior Items: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."<br />
2. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial<br />
Blast Cleaning."<br />
3. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."<br />
D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification<br />
No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.<br />
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.<br />
2.19 ALUMINUM FINISHES<br />
A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum<br />
Association for designating aluminum finishes.<br />
B. As-Fabricated Finish: AA-M10 (Mechanical Finish: as fabricated, unspecified).<br />
C. Class I, Clear Anodic Finish: AA-M12C22A41 (Mechanical Finish: nonspecular as fabricated;<br />
Chemical Finish: etched, medium matte; Anodic Coating: Architectural Class I, clear coating<br />
0.018 mm or thicker) complying with AAMA 611.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing<br />
metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with<br />
edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and<br />
levels.<br />
B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are<br />
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.<br />
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after<br />
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 12
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:<br />
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion<br />
resistance of base metals.<br />
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.<br />
3. Remove welding flux immediately.<br />
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no<br />
roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent<br />
surface.<br />
D. Fastening to In-Place <strong>Construction</strong>: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal<br />
fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for<br />
use with concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and<br />
other connectors.<br />
E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,<br />
masonry, or similar construction.<br />
F. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with<br />
grout, concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals with the following:<br />
1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint.<br />
2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer.<br />
3.2 INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS<br />
A. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported,<br />
including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.<br />
B. Anchor supports for operable partitions securely to and rigidly brace from building structure.<br />
C. Support steel girders on solid grouted masonry, concrete, or steel pipe columns. Secure girders<br />
with anchor bolts embedded in grouted masonry or concrete or with bolts through top plates of<br />
pipe columns.<br />
1. Where grout space under bearing plates is indicated for girders supported on concrete or<br />
masonry, install as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.<br />
D. Install pipe columns on concrete footings with grouted baseplates. Position and grout column<br />
baseplates as specified in "Installing Bearing and Leveling Plates" Article.<br />
1. Grout baseplates of columns supporting steel girders after girders are installed and<br />
leveled.<br />
3.3 INSTALLING PREFABRICATED BUILDING COLUMNS<br />
A. Install prefabricated building columns to comply with AISC's "Specification for Structural Steel<br />
Buildings" and with requirements applicable to listing and labeling for fire-resistance rating<br />
indicated.<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 13
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.4 INSTALLING METAL BOLLARDS<br />
A. Fill metal-capped bollards solidly with concrete and allow concrete to cure seven days before<br />
installing.<br />
1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.<br />
B. Anchor bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and align bollards in holes 3 inches (75<br />
mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate or tamp for consolidation.<br />
Support and brace bollards in position until concrete has cured.<br />
C. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in concrete by inserting into pipe sleeves preset<br />
into concrete or core-drilled holes not less than 8 inches (200 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (19 mm)<br />
larger than OD of sleeve. Fill annular space around internal sleeves solidly with nonshrink,<br />
nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch (3 mm) toward internal sleeve.<br />
D. Anchor internal sleeves for removable bollards in place with concrete footings. Center and<br />
align sleeves in holes 3 inches (75 mm) above bottom of excavation. Place concrete and vibrate<br />
or tamp for consolidation. Support and brace sleeves in position until concrete has cured.<br />
E. Place removable bollards over internal sleeves and secure with 3/4-inch (19-mm) machine bolts<br />
and nuts. After tightening nuts, drill holes in bolts for inserting padlocks. Owner will furnish<br />
padlocks.<br />
F. Fill bollards solidly with concrete, mounding top surface to shed water.<br />
1. Do not fill removable bollards with concrete.<br />
3.5 INSTALLING NOSINGS<br />
A. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level<br />
with tread surfaces.<br />
3.6 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES<br />
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to<br />
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.<br />
B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have<br />
been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if<br />
protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.<br />
1. Use nonshrink grout, either metallic or nonmetallic, in concealed locations where not<br />
exposed to moisture; use nonshrink, nonmetallic grout in exposed locations unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 14
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.7 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and<br />
abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop<br />
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.<br />
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.<br />
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and<br />
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.<br />
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair<br />
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.<br />
END OF SECTION 055000<br />
METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 15
G.A.H.P. PLAZA FELIZ<br />
SECTION 055100 - METAL STAIRS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Preassembled steel stairs with diamond-plate steel (“checker plate”) treads and risers.<br />
2. Steel tube railings attached to metal stairs.<br />
3. Steel tube handrails attached to walls adjacent to metal stairs.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a<br />
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.<br />
B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and<br />
the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.<br />
1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. (4.79 kN/sq. m).<br />
2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf (1.33 kN) applied on an area of 4 sq. in. (2580 sq. mm).<br />
3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.<br />
4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition<br />
to loads specified above.<br />
5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch (6.4<br />
mm), whichever is less.<br />
C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the<br />
following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.<br />
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:<br />
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.<br />
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.<br />
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.<br />
2. Infill of Guards:<br />
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 1
G.A.H.P. PLAZA FELIZ<br />
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.<br />
(0.093 sq. m).<br />
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For metal stairs and the following:<br />
1. Diamond-plate steel (“checker plate”).<br />
2. Paint products.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.<br />
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance<br />
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified<br />
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.<br />
B. Welding certificates.<br />
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers<br />
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.<br />
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified<br />
testing agency, for stairs and railings.<br />
1. Test railings according ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.<br />
B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for<br />
Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs <strong>Manual</strong>," for class of stair designated,<br />
unless more stringent requirements are indicated.<br />
1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class.<br />
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:<br />
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."<br />
2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."<br />
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 2
G.A.H.P. PLAZA FELIZ<br />
1.7 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint<br />
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats<br />
are compatible with one another.<br />
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and<br />
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items<br />
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site in time for installation.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 METALS, GENERAL<br />
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise<br />
indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without<br />
seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.<br />
2.2 FERROUS METALS<br />
A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
B. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed).<br />
C. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with<br />
ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.<br />
D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B,<br />
or structural steel, Grade 25 (Grade 170), unless another grade is required by design loads;<br />
exposed.<br />
F. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B,<br />
or structural steel, Grade 30 (Grade 205), unless another grade is required by design loads.<br />
G. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or<br />
ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where<br />
built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.<br />
H. Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property<br />
Class 4.6); with hex nuts, ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.<br />
I. Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563<br />
(ASTM A 563M); and, where indicated, flat washers.<br />
1. Provide mechanically deposited or hot-dip, zinc-coated anchor bolts for exterior stairs.<br />
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 3
G.A.H.P. PLAZA FELIZ<br />
J. Machine Screws: ASME B18.6.3 (ASME B18.6.7M).<br />
K. Lag Screws: ASME B18.2.1 (ASME B18.2.3.8M).<br />
L. Plain Washers: Round, ASME B18.22.1 (ASME B18.22M).<br />
M. Lock Washers: Helical, spring type, ASME B18.21.1 (ASME B18.21.2M).<br />
N. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of<br />
sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit<br />
masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing<br />
according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.<br />
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with<br />
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1<br />
(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594<br />
(ASTM F 836M).<br />
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy<br />
welded.<br />
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product<br />
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the<br />
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental<br />
Chambers."<br />
C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer<br />
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.<br />
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.<br />
D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.<br />
E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout<br />
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for<br />
interior and exterior applications.<br />
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips,<br />
brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and<br />
platforms on supporting structure.<br />
1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.<br />
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 4
G.A.H.P. PLAZA FELIZ<br />
3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to<br />
drain.<br />
B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units<br />
only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and<br />
coordinated installation.<br />
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of<br />
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on<br />
exposed surfaces.<br />
D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or<br />
otherwise impairing work.<br />
E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.<br />
F. Weld connections to comply with the following:<br />
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion<br />
resistance of base metals.<br />
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.<br />
3. Remove welding flux immediately.<br />
4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated.<br />
5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary<br />
Joint Finish Standards" for Type 2 welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting<br />
and pinholes okay.<br />
G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners<br />
where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk)<br />
screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.<br />
H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep<br />
holes where water may accumulate.<br />
2.5 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Alfab, Inc.<br />
2. American Stair, Inc.<br />
3. Sharon Companies Ltd. (The).<br />
B. Stair Framing:<br />
1. Fabricate stringers of steel tubes.<br />
a. Provide closures for exposed ends of tube stringers.<br />
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 5
G.A.H.P. PLAZA FELIZ<br />
2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel headers and miscellaneous framing<br />
members as needed to comply with performance requirements.<br />
3. Weld or bolt stringers to headers; weld or bolt framing members to stringers and headers.<br />
If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.<br />
C. Metal Floor Plate Stairs: Form treads and platforms to configurations shown from floor plate of<br />
thickness.<br />
1. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Form risers of same material as<br />
treads.<br />
2. Form tread with integral nosing and back edge stiffener. Form risers from steel sheet not<br />
less than 0.097 inch (2.5 mm) thick, welded to tread nosings and stiffeners and to<br />
platforms.<br />
3. Form treads with integral nosing and back edge stiffener, and with open risers.<br />
4. Weld steel supporting brackets to stringers and weld treads to brackets.<br />
5. Fabricate platforms with integral nosings matching treads and weld to platform framing.<br />
2.6 STAIR RAILINGS<br />
A. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 05 Section "Pipe and Tube Railings."<br />
1. Fabricate newels of square steel tubing and provide newel caps of gray-iron castings.<br />
2. Rails may be bent with a radius at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using<br />
prefabricated fittings.<br />
3. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Steel Tube Railings: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design,<br />
dimensions, details, finish, and member sizes, including wall thickness of tube, post spacings,<br />
and anchorage, but not less than that needed to withstand indicated loads.<br />
1. Rails and Posts: 1-5/8-inch- (41-mm-) diameter top and 1-1 ½ inch square bottom rails<br />
and 1-1/2-inch- (38-mm-) square posts.<br />
2. Picket Infill: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) square pickets spaced less than 4 inches (100 mm)<br />
clear.<br />
C. Welded Connections: Fabricate railings with welded connections. Cope components at<br />
connections to provide close fit, or use fittings designed for this purpose. Weld all around at<br />
connections, including at fittings.<br />
1. Finish welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 2<br />
welds: completely sanded joint, some undercutting and pinholes okay.<br />
D. Form changes in direction of railings as follows:<br />
1. By radius bends or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius indicated.<br />
E. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature<br />
for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire<br />
bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of<br />
components.<br />
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 6
G.A.H.P. PLAZA FELIZ<br />
F. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.<br />
G. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends<br />
of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.<br />
H. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges,<br />
miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other<br />
work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work.<br />
1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. For nongalvanized railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,<br />
fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors embedded in exterior masonry and<br />
concrete construction.<br />
I. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material, where<br />
needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to<br />
suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and<br />
overstressing of substrate.<br />
2.7 FINISHES<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes <strong>Manual</strong> for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Finish metal stairs after assembly.<br />
C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for<br />
steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.<br />
1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint<br />
adhesion.<br />
2. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work, unless indicated to remain<br />
as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.<br />
D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-<br />
SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."<br />
E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with<br />
galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise<br />
indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and<br />
Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.<br />
1. Stripe paint corners, crevices, bolts, welds, and sharp edges.<br />
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 7
G.A.H.P. PLAZA FELIZ<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Fastening to In-Place <strong>Construction</strong>: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary<br />
for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and<br />
masonry inserts, through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors.<br />
B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing<br />
metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from<br />
established lines and levels and free of rack.<br />
C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete,<br />
masonry, or similar construction.<br />
E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are<br />
not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.<br />
Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after<br />
fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.<br />
F. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.<br />
3.2 INSTALLING METAL STAIRS WITH GROUTED BASEPLATES<br />
A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to<br />
improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of baseplates.<br />
B. Set steel stair baseplates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After stairs have been positioned<br />
and aligned, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off<br />
flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.<br />
1. Use nonmetallic, nonshrink grout unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.<br />
3.3 INSTALLING RAILINGS<br />
A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space<br />
posts at spacing indicated or, if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each<br />
direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows:<br />
1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members.<br />
2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail<br />
ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts.<br />
B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for<br />
exposed bolt anchorage. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of<br />
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 8
G.A.H.P. PLAZA FELIZ<br />
handrail and finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing<br />
required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to<br />
comply with performance requirements.<br />
1. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between<br />
studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.<br />
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and<br />
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop<br />
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.<br />
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.<br />
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and<br />
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.<br />
END OF SECTION 055100<br />
METAL STAIRS 055100 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 055213 - PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Steel pipe and tube railings.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Section 011111 “Basis of Design Products and Systems”.<br />
2. Division 05 Section "Metal Stairs" for steel tube railings associated with metal stairs.<br />
3. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood blocking for anchoring railings.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Delegated Design: Design railings, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a<br />
qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.<br />
B. General: In engineering railings to withstand structural loads indicated, determine allowable<br />
design working stresses of railing materials based on the following:<br />
1. Steel: 72 percent of minimum yield strength.<br />
C. Structural Performance: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following<br />
loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:<br />
1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards:<br />
a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ ft. (0.73 kN/m) applied in any direction.<br />
b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf (0.89 kN) applied in any direction.<br />
c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.<br />
2. Infill of Guards:<br />
a. Concentrated load of 50 lbf (0.22 kN) applied horizontally on an area of 1 sq. ft.<br />
(0.093 sq. m).<br />
b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently.<br />
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature<br />
changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints,<br />
overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.<br />
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material<br />
surfaces.<br />
E. Control of Corrosion: Prevent galvanic action and other forms of corrosion by insulating metals<br />
and other materials from direct contact with incompatible materials.<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For the following:<br />
1. Manufacturer's product lines of mechanically connected railings.<br />
2. Railing brackets.<br />
3. Grout, anchoring cement, and paint products.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.<br />
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color, texture, or design.<br />
D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance<br />
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified<br />
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer.<br />
B. Welding certificates.<br />
C. Paint Compatibility Certificates: From manufacturers of topcoats applied over shop primers<br />
certifying that shop primers are compatible with topcoats.<br />
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified<br />
testing agency, according to ASTM E 894 and ASTM E 935.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of railing from single source from single manufacturer.<br />
B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,<br />
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."<br />
C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:<br />
1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."<br />
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with<br />
metal fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.<br />
1.8 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING<br />
A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint<br />
and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats<br />
are compatible with one another.<br />
B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for railings. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and<br />
directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items<br />
with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site in time for installation.<br />
C. Schedule installation so wall attachments are made only to completed walls. Do not support<br />
railings temporarily by any means that do not satisfy structural performance requirements.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide products by one of the<br />
following] [available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work<br />
include, but are not limited to, the following]:<br />
1. Steel Pipe and Tube Railings:<br />
a. Pisor Industries, Inc.<br />
b. Wagner, R & B, Inc.; a division of the Wagner Companies.<br />
2.2 METALS, GENERAL<br />
A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth surfaces, without seam marks, roller<br />
marks, rolled trade names, stains, discolorations, or blemishes.<br />
B. Brackets, Flanges, and Anchors: Cast or formed metal of same type of material and finish as<br />
supported rails unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2.3 STEEL AND IRON<br />
A. Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.<br />
B. Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type F or Type S, Grade A, Standard Weight (Schedule 40), unless<br />
another grade and weight are required by structural loads.<br />
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Provide galvanized finish for exterior installations and where indicated.<br />
C. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Perforated Metal: Galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating,<br />
commercial steel Type B.<br />
2.4 FASTENERS<br />
A. General: Provide the following:<br />
1. Ungalvanized-Steel Railings: Plated steel fasteners complying with ASTM B 633 or<br />
ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5 for zinc coating.<br />
2. Hot-Dip Galvanized Railings: Type 304 stainless-steel or hot-dip zinc-coated steel<br />
fasteners complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 for zinc coating.<br />
B. Fasteners for Anchoring Railings to Other <strong>Construction</strong>: Select fasteners of type, grade, and<br />
class required to produce connections suitable for anchoring railings to other types of<br />
construction indicated[ and capable of withstanding design loads].<br />
C. Fasteners for Interconnecting Railing Components:<br />
1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching<br />
them to other work, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnecting railing components and for attaching<br />
them to other work, unless exposed fasteners are unavoidable or are the standard<br />
fastening method for railings indicated.<br />
3. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
D. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors capable of<br />
sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed in unit<br />
masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, as determined by testing<br />
according to ASTM E 488, conducted by a qualified independent testing agency.<br />
1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc-plated to comply with<br />
ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1<br />
(A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594<br />
(ASTM F 836M).<br />
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy<br />
welded.<br />
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product<br />
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the<br />
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental<br />
Chambers."<br />
C. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal: Complying with MPI#25.<br />
D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and<br />
compatible with paints specified to be used over it.<br />
E. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer<br />
complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.<br />
1. Use primer containing pigments that make it easily distinguishable from zinc-rich primer.<br />
F. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.<br />
G. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Cementitious galvanized metal primer complying with<br />
MPI#26.<br />
H. Intermediate Coats and Topcoats: Provide products that comply with Division 09 painting<br />
Sections.<br />
I. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.<br />
J. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout<br />
complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for<br />
interior and exterior applications.<br />
K. Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydraulic-controlled expansion<br />
cement formulation for mixing with water at <strong>Project</strong> site to create pourable anchoring, patching,<br />
and grouting compound.<br />
1. Water-Resistant Product: At exterior locations and where indicated provide formulation<br />
that is resistant to erosion from water exposure without needing protection by a sealer or<br />
waterproof coating and that is recommended by manufacturer for exterior use.<br />
2.6 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Fabricate railings to comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,<br />
member sizes and spacing, details, finish, and anchorage, but not less than that required to<br />
support structural loads.<br />
B. Assemble railings in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and<br />
assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly<br />
mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain<br />
structural value of joined pieces.<br />
C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of<br />
approximately 1/32 inch (1 mm) unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on<br />
exposed surfaces.<br />
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Form work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces.<br />
E. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide<br />
weep holes where water may accumulate.<br />
F. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items.<br />
G. Connections: Fabricate railings with either welded or nonwelded connections unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
H. Welded Connections: Cope components at connections to provide close fit, or use fittings<br />
designed for this purpose. Weld all around at connections, including at fittings.<br />
1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion<br />
resistance of base metals.<br />
2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.<br />
3. Remove flux immediately.<br />
4. At exposed connections, finish exposed surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness<br />
shows after finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.<br />
I. Nonwelded Connections: Connect members with concealed mechanical fasteners and fittings.<br />
Fabricate members and fittings to produce flush, smooth, rigid, hairline joints.<br />
1. Fabricate splice joints for field connection using an epoxy structural adhesive if this is<br />
manufacturer's standard splicing method.<br />
J. Form changes in direction as follows:<br />
1. By radius bends of radius indicated or by inserting prefabricated elbow fittings of radius<br />
indicated.<br />
K. Bend members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain<br />
cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or<br />
otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components.<br />
L. Close exposed ends of railing members with prefabricated end fittings.<br />
M. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends<br />
of returns unless clearance between end of rail and wall is 1/4 inch (6 mm) or less.<br />
N. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, flanges, miscellaneous fittings,<br />
and anchors to interconnect railing members to other work unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. At brackets and fittings fastened to plaster or gypsum board partitions, provide crushresistant<br />
fillers, or other means to transfer loads through wall finishes to structural<br />
supports and prevent bracket or fitting rotation and crushing of substrate.<br />
O. Provide inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting railings to concrete or masonry<br />
work. Fabricate anchorage devices capable of withstanding loads imposed by railings.<br />
Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.<br />
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
P. For railing posts set in concrete, provide steel sleeves not less than 6 inches (150 mm) long with<br />
inside dimensions not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm) greater than outside dimensions of post, with<br />
metal plate forming bottom closure.<br />
Q. For removable railing posts, fabricate slip-fit sockets from steel tube or pipe whose ID is sized<br />
for a close fit with posts; limit movement of post without lateral load, measured at top, to not<br />
more than one-fortieth of post height. Provide socket covers designed and fabricated to resist<br />
being dislodged.<br />
1. Provide chain with eye, snap hook, and staple across gaps formed by removable railing<br />
sections at locations indicated. Fabricate from same metal as railings.<br />
R. Perforated-Metal Infill Panels: Fabricate infill panels from perforated metal made from<br />
galvanized steel.<br />
1. Edge panels with U-shaped channels made from metal sheet, of same metal as perforated<br />
metal and not less than 0.043 inch (1.1 mm) thick.<br />
2. Orient perforated metal with pattern parallel to top rail.<br />
S. Toe Boards: Where indicated, provide toe boards at railings around openings and at edge of<br />
open-sided floors and platforms. Fabricate to dimensions and details indicated.<br />
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes <strong>Manual</strong> for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,<br />
temporary protective covering before shipping.<br />
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are<br />
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations<br />
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are<br />
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to<br />
minimize contrast.<br />
D. Provide exposed fasteners with finish matching appearance, including color and texture, of<br />
railings.<br />
2.8 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES<br />
A. Galvanized Railings:<br />
1. Hot-dip galvanize indicated steel and iron railings, including hardware, after fabrication.<br />
2. Comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M for hot-dip galvanized railings.<br />
3. Comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for hot-dip galvanized hardware.<br />
4. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint<br />
adhesion.<br />
5. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in the finished Work, unless indicated to<br />
remain as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.<br />
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. For galvanized railings, provide hot-dip galvanized fittings, brackets, fasteners, sleeves, and<br />
other ferrous components.<br />
C. Preparing Galvanized Railings for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean railings<br />
of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.<br />
D. For nongalvanized steel railings, provide nongalvanized ferrous-metal fittings, brackets,<br />
fasteners, and sleeves, except galvanize anchors to be embedded in exterior concrete or<br />
masonry.<br />
E. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-<br />
SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."<br />
F. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of railings unless otherwise<br />
indicated. Comply with requirements in SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1:<br />
Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. Primer need not be applied<br />
to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.<br />
1. Shop prime uncoated railings with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is<br />
indicated.<br />
2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.<br />
G. Shop-Painted Finish: Comply with Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting."<br />
1. Color: Match Architect's sample.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine plaster and gypsum board assemblies, where reinforced to receive anchors, to verify<br />
that locations of concealed reinforcements have been clearly marked for Installer. Locate<br />
reinforcements and mark locations if not already done.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Fit exposed connections together to form tight, hairline joints.<br />
B. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing railings. Set railings accurately in<br />
location, alignment, and elevation; measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.<br />
1. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of railing components that have been coated or<br />
finished after fabrication and that are intended for field connection by mechanical or<br />
other means without further cutting or fitting.<br />
2. Set posts plumb within a tolerance of 1/16 inch in 3 feet (2 mm in 1 m).<br />
3. Align rails so variations from level for horizontal members and variations from parallel<br />
with rake of steps and ramps for sloping members do not exceed 1/4 inch in 12 feet (5<br />
mm in 3 m).<br />
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will be in contact with grout,<br />
concrete, masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint.<br />
D. Adjust railings before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints.<br />
E. Fastening to In-Place <strong>Construction</strong>: Use anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for<br />
securing railings and for properly transferring loads to in-place construction.<br />
3.3 RAILING CONNECTIONS<br />
A. Nonwelded Connections: Use mechanical or adhesive joints for permanently connecting railing<br />
components. Seal recessed holes of exposed locking screws using plastic cement filler colored<br />
to match finish of railings.<br />
B. Welded Connections: Use fully welded joints for permanently connecting railing components.<br />
Comply with requirements for welded connections in "Fabrication" Article whether welding is<br />
performed in the shop or in the field.<br />
3.4 ANCHORING POSTS<br />
A. Use metal sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts. After posts have been<br />
inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with nonshrink, nonmetallic<br />
grout or anchoring cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's<br />
written instructions.<br />
B. Form or core-drill holes not less than 5 inches (125 mm) deep and 3/4 inch (20 mm) larger than<br />
OD of post for installing posts in concrete. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill<br />
annular space between post and concrete with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout or anchoring<br />
cement, mixed and placed to comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written<br />
instructions.<br />
C. Leave anchorage joint exposed with anchoring material flush with adjacent surface.<br />
3.5 ATTACHING RAILINGS<br />
A. Anchor railing ends at walls with round flanges anchored to wall construction and welded to<br />
railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections.<br />
B. Anchor railing ends to metal surfaces with flanges bolted to metal surfaces and welded to<br />
railing ends or connected to railing ends using nonwelded connections.<br />
C. Attach railings to wall with wall brackets, except where end flanges are used. Provide brackets<br />
with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) clearance from inside face of handrail and finished wall surface.<br />
Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads.<br />
1. Use type of bracket with predrilled hole for exposed bolt anchorage.<br />
2. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not indicated, at spacing required to support structural<br />
loads.<br />
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Secure wall brackets and railing end flanges to building construction as follows:<br />
1. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between<br />
studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members.<br />
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and<br />
abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with the same material as used for shop<br />
painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.<br />
1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil (0.05-mm) dry film thickness.<br />
B. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and<br />
abraded areas of shop paint are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.<br />
C. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair<br />
galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.<br />
3.7 PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect finishes of railings from damage during construction period with temporary protective<br />
coverings approved by railing manufacturer. Remove protective coverings at time of<br />
Substantial Completion.<br />
END OF SECTION 055213<br />
PIPE AND TUBE RAILINGS 055213 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 061000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Framing with dimension lumber.<br />
2. Framing with engineered wood products.<br />
3. Shear wall panels.<br />
4. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.<br />
5. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.<br />
6. Wood furring and grounds.<br />
7. Wood sleepers.<br />
8. Utility shelving.<br />
9. Plywood backing panels.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing."<br />
2. Division 06 Section "Shop-Fabricated Wood Trusses" for wood trusses made from<br />
dimension lumber.<br />
3. Division 31 Section "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to wood<br />
framing.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Exposed Framing: Framing not concealed by other construction.<br />
B. Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in<br />
least dimension.<br />
C. Timber: Lumber of 5 inches nominal or greater in least dimension.<br />
D. Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:<br />
1. NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.<br />
2. NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.<br />
3. RIS: Redwood Inspection Service.<br />
4. SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.<br />
5. WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.<br />
6. WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component<br />
materials and dimensions and include construction and application details.<br />
1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and<br />
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate<br />
type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained.<br />
2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and<br />
certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include<br />
physical properties of treated materials based on testing by a qualified independent<br />
testing agency.<br />
3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before<br />
and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent<br />
testing agency according to ASTM D 5664.<br />
4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of<br />
treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of<br />
treatment.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For adhesives, documentation including printed<br />
statement of VOC content.<br />
2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit MR 2.2: For adhesives, documentation indicating that<br />
products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department<br />
of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from<br />
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
C. Fastener Patterns: Full-size templates for fasteners in exposed framing.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit<br />
stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the<br />
ALSC Board of Review.<br />
B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:<br />
1. Wood-preservative-treated wood.<br />
2. Fire-retardant-treated wood.<br />
3. Engineered wood products.<br />
4. Shear panels.<br />
5. Power-driven fasteners.<br />
6. Powder-actuated fasteners.<br />
7. Expansion anchors.<br />
8. Metal framing anchors.<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant<br />
treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that<br />
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is<br />
representative of the material tested.<br />
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation.<br />
Protect lumber from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide<br />
for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL<br />
A. Certified Wood: Materials shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an<br />
FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and<br />
Criteria for Forest Stewardship"for the following:<br />
1. Dimension lumber framing.<br />
2. Laminated-veneer lumber.<br />
3. Parallel-strand lumber.<br />
4. Rim boards.<br />
5. Miscellaneous lumber.<br />
B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency<br />
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency<br />
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the<br />
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.<br />
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.<br />
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on<br />
end or back of each piece or omit grade stamp and provide certificates of grade<br />
compliance issued by grading agency.<br />
3. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for<br />
moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed<br />
sizes for dry lumber.<br />
4. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.<br />
D. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities<br />
having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that<br />
show compliance with building code in effect for <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design<br />
stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated.<br />
Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational<br />
engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a<br />
qualified independent testing agency.<br />
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING<br />
A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: <strong>Construction</strong> or No. 2 grade.<br />
1. Application: Interior partitions not indicated as load-bearing.<br />
2. Species:<br />
a. Spruce-pine-fir; NLGA.<br />
b. Hem-fir; WCLIB, or WWPA.<br />
c. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.<br />
B. Load-Bearing Partitions: <strong>Construction</strong> or No. 2 grade.<br />
1. Application: Interior load-bearing partitions.<br />
2. Species:<br />
a. Douglas fir-larch; WCLIB or WWPA.<br />
b. Mixed southern pine; SPIB.<br />
c. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.<br />
C. Ceiling Joists: <strong>Construction</strong>, Stud, or No. 3 grade.<br />
1. Species:<br />
a. Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.<br />
2.3 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS<br />
A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde. Comply<br />
with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'<br />
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using<br />
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of engineered wood product from single source from a<br />
single manufacturer.<br />
C. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain<br />
primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and<br />
manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
a. Boise Cascade Corporation.<br />
b. Finnforest USA.<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
c. Georgia-Pacific.<br />
d. Jager Building Systems Inc.<br />
e. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.<br />
f. Pacific Woodtech Corporation.<br />
g. Roseburg Forest Products Co.<br />
h. Standard Structures Inc.<br />
i. Stark Truss Company, Inc.<br />
j. West Fraser Timber Co., Ltd.<br />
k. Weyerhaeuser Company.<br />
2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2600 psi 17.9 MPa for nominal – (286-mm<br />
actual-) depth members.<br />
3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 1,800,000 psi.<br />
D. Parallel-Strand Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood strand elements with<br />
grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to<br />
ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with<br />
ASTM D 2559.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
a. Louisiana-Pacific Corporation.<br />
b. Weyerhaeuser Company.<br />
2. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi for 12-inch nominal- depth<br />
members.<br />
3. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,200,000 psi.<br />
2.4 SHEAR WALL PANELS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated<br />
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.<br />
2. Weyerhaeuser Company.<br />
C. Wood-Framed Shear Wall Panels: Prefabricated assembly consisting of wood perimeter<br />
framing, tie downs, and Exposure I, Structural I plywood or OSB sheathing.<br />
1. Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde. Comply with the testing and product<br />
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the<br />
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale<br />
Environmental Chambers."<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by<br />
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be<br />
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by<br />
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.<br />
2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER<br />
A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other<br />
construction, including the following:<br />
1. Blocking.<br />
2. Nailers.<br />
3. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.<br />
4. Cants.<br />
5. Furring.<br />
6. Grounds.<br />
B. For items of dimension lumber size, provide <strong>Construction</strong> or No. 2 grade lumber and the<br />
following species:<br />
1. Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.<br />
2. Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.<br />
C. For concealed boards, provide lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and [any<br />
of ]the following species and grades:<br />
1. Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir; <strong>Construction</strong> or No. 2 Common grade;<br />
NeLMA, NLGA, WCLIB, or WWPA.<br />
D. For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber<br />
of any species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will<br />
interfere with its attachment and purpose.<br />
E. For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to<br />
eliminate knots and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.<br />
F. For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots<br />
capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.<br />
2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS<br />
A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, AC in thickness indicated or, if not indicated,<br />
not less than 1/2-inch (13-mm) nominal thickness.<br />
1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California<br />
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic<br />
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.7 FASTENERS<br />
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified<br />
in this article for material and manufacture.<br />
1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative<br />
treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating<br />
complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.<br />
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.<br />
C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.<br />
D. Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.<br />
E. Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.<br />
F. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and,<br />
where indicated, flat washers.<br />
G. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with<br />
capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to six times the load imposed when installed<br />
in unit masonry assemblies and equal to four times the load imposed when installed in concrete<br />
as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and<br />
inspecting agency.<br />
1. Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,<br />
Class Fe/Zn 5.<br />
2. Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and<br />
ASTM F 594, Alloy Group 1 or 2.<br />
2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated<br />
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.<br />
2. KC Metals Products, Inc.<br />
3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.<br />
4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.<br />
5. USP Structural Connectors.<br />
C. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by<br />
manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be<br />
determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by<br />
comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with<br />
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.<br />
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), highstrength<br />
low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B<br />
(HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.<br />
1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.<br />
F. Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing<br />
flanges at least 85 percent of joist depth.<br />
1. Thickness: 0.050 inch.<br />
G. I-Joist Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers with 2-inch- long seat and 1-1/4-inch- wide nailing<br />
flanges full depth of joist. Nailing flanges provide lateral support at joist top chord.<br />
1. Thickness: 0.050 inch.<br />
H. Top Flange Hangers: U-shaped joist hangers, full depth of joist, formed from metal strap with<br />
tabs bent to extend over and be fastened to supporting member.<br />
1. Strap Width: 1-1/2 inches.<br />
2. Thickness: 0.050 inch.<br />
I. Bridging: Rigid, V-section, nailless type, 0.050 inch thick, length to suit joist size and spacing.<br />
J. Post Bases: Adjustable-socket type for bolting in place with standoff plate to raise post 1 inch<br />
above base and with 2-inch- minimum side cover, socket 0.062 inch thick, and standoff and<br />
adjustment plates 0.108 inch thick.<br />
K. Joist Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying joists together over supports.<br />
1. Width: 1-1/4 inches.<br />
2. Thickness: 0.050 inch.<br />
3. Length: As indicated.<br />
L. Rafter Tie-Downs: Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof trusses to wall studs below, 1-1/2<br />
inches wide by 0.050 inch thick. Tie fastens to side of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side<br />
of stud below.<br />
M. Rafter Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening rafters or roof<br />
trusses to wall studs below, 2-1/4 inches wide by 0.062 inch thick. Tie fits over top of rafter or<br />
truss and fastens to both sides of rafter or truss, face of top plates, and side of stud below.<br />
N. Floor-to-Floor Ties: Flat straps, with holes for fasteners, for tying upper floor wall studs to<br />
band joists and lower floor studs, 1-1/4 inches wide by 0.050 inch thick by 36 inches long.<br />
O. Wall Bracing: T-shaped bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 1-1/8 inches wide by<br />
9/16 inch deep by 0.034 inch thick with hemmed edges.<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
P. Wall Bracing: Angle bracing made for letting into studs in saw kerf, 15/16 by 15/16 by 0.040<br />
inch thick with hemmed edges.<br />
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill<br />
sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's<br />
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.<br />
B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's<br />
standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.<br />
C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl<br />
rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum<br />
foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.<br />
D. Adhesives for Gluing Furring and Sleepers to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying<br />
with ASTM D 3498 that is approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.<br />
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to<br />
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California<br />
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic<br />
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
E. Water-Repellent Preservative: NWWDA-tested and -accepted formulation containing 3-iodo-2-<br />
propynyl butyl carbamate, combined with an insecticide containing chloropyrifos as its active<br />
ingredient.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and<br />
fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit.<br />
Locate furring, nailers, blocking, [grounds, ]and similar supports to comply with requirements<br />
for attaching other construction.<br />
B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame<br />
<strong>Construction</strong>," unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
D. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities<br />
requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with<br />
classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.<br />
E. Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
F. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written<br />
instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.<br />
G. Install sill sealer gasket to form continuous seal between sill plates and foundation walls.<br />
H. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.<br />
I. Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures,<br />
specialty items, and trim.<br />
1. Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where<br />
framing or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips<br />
not more than 16 inches o.c.<br />
J. Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and<br />
as follows:<br />
1. Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96<br />
inches o.c. with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to<br />
close furred spaces.<br />
2. Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at<br />
ceiling line of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not<br />
inherent in framing system used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width<br />
as framing members and 2-inch nominal- thickness.<br />
3. Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to<br />
limit concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below<br />
partitions.<br />
4. Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more<br />
than 20 feet o.c.<br />
K. Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with<br />
fastening other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with<br />
function of member or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or<br />
optimum joint arrangement.<br />
L. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated<br />
lumber.<br />
1. Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.<br />
2. Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.<br />
M. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated,<br />
complying with the following:<br />
1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.<br />
2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.<br />
3. Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2),<br />
"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-<br />
Family Dwellings.<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
N. Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully<br />
penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials.<br />
Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails<br />
snug but do not countersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.<br />
O. For exposed work, arrange fasteners in straight rows parallel with edges of members, with<br />
fasteners evenly spaced, and with adjacent rows staggered.<br />
1. Comply with approved indicated fastener patterns where applicable.<br />
2. Use finishing nails unless otherwise indicated. Countersink nail heads and fill holes with<br />
wood filler.<br />
3. Use common nails unless otherwise indicated. Drive nails snug but do not countersink<br />
nail heads.<br />
3.2 WOOD GROUND, SLEEPER, BLOCKING, and NAILER INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to<br />
shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate<br />
locations with other work involved.<br />
B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install<br />
continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.<br />
D. Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not<br />
less than 1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness<br />
of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.<br />
3.3 WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required<br />
for tolerance of finish work.<br />
B. Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 16<br />
inches o.c.<br />
3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal<br />
thickness whose widths equal that of studs, except single top plate may be used for non-loadbearing<br />
partitions and for load-bearing partitions where framing members bearing on partition<br />
are located directly over studs. Fasten plates to supporting construction unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
1. For exterior walls, provide 2-by-6-inch nominal- (38-by-140-mm actual-size wood studs<br />
spaced indicated.<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. For interior partitions and walls, provide 2-by-4-inch nominal – (38-by-89-mm actual<br />
size wood studs spaced 16 inches 600 mm 400 mm o.c. unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midheight of partitions more than 96 inches<br />
high, using members of 2-inch nominal thickness and of same width as wall or partitions.<br />
B. Construct corners and intersections with three or more studs, except that two studs may be used<br />
for interior non-load-bearing partitions.<br />
C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness<br />
equal to width of studs. Support headers on jamb studs.<br />
1. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs and headers not less than 4-<br />
inch nominal depth for openings 48 inches and less in width, 6-inch nominal depth for<br />
openings 48 to 72 inches in width, 8-inch nominal depth for openings 72 to 120 inches in<br />
width, and not less than 10-inch nominal depth for openings 10 to 12 feet in width.<br />
2. For load-bearing walls, provide double-jamb studs for openings 60 inches and less in<br />
width, and triple-jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers of depth indicated or, if<br />
not indicated, according to Table R502.5(1) or Table R502.5(2), as applicable, in ICC's<br />
International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.<br />
3.5 CEILING JOIST INSTALLATION<br />
A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements<br />
specified above for floor joists. Face nail to ends of parallel rafters.<br />
1. Where ceiling joists are at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to<br />
rafters from wall plate to first joist; nail to ends of rafters and to top plate and nail to first<br />
joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal- size<br />
or 2-by-4-inch nominal- size stringers spaced 48 inches o.c. crosswise over main ceiling<br />
joists.<br />
B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and[ toe nail or] use metal framing anchors. Double<br />
rafters to form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal<br />
hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge<br />
member or use metal ridge hangers.<br />
1. At valleys, provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same<br />
thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full<br />
bearing against valley rafters.<br />
2. At hips, provide hip rafter of size indicated or, if not indicated, of same thickness as<br />
regular rafters and 2 inches deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip<br />
rafter.<br />
C. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves, overhangs, dormers, and similar conditions if<br />
any.<br />
3.6 TIMBER FRAMING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install wood posts using metal anchors indicated.<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 12
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.7 STAIR FRAMING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Provide stair framing members of size, space, and configuration indicated or, if not indicated, to<br />
comply with the following requirements:<br />
1. Size: 2-by-12-inch nominal- size, minimum.<br />
2. Material: Solid lumber.<br />
3. Notching: Notch rough carriages to receive treads, risers, and supports; leave at least 3-<br />
1/2 inches of effective depth.<br />
4. Spacing: At least three framing members for each 36-inch clear width of stair.<br />
B. Provide stair framing with no more than 3/16-inch variation between adjacent treads and risers<br />
and no more than 3/8-inch variation between largest and smallest treads and risers within each<br />
flight.<br />
3.8 PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite<br />
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.<br />
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.<br />
B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes<br />
sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified, apply EPA-registered borate<br />
treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.<br />
END OF SECTION 061000<br />
ROUGH CARPENTRY 061000 - 13
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 061753 - SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Wood roof trusses.<br />
2. Wood floor trusses.<br />
3. Wood girder trusses.<br />
4. Wood truss bracing.<br />
5. Metal truss accessories.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for roof sheathing and subflooring.<br />
2. Division 31 Section "Termite Control" for site application of borate treatment to wood<br />
trusses.<br />
C. Allowances: Provide wood truss bracing under the Metal-Plate-Connected Truss Bracing<br />
Allowance as specified in Division 01 Section "Allowances."<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Metal-Plate-Connected Wood Trusses: Planar structural units consisting of metal-plateconnected<br />
members fabricated from dimension lumber and cut and assembled before delivery to<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For metal-plate connectors, metal truss accessories, and fasteners.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for trusses.<br />
1. Show location, pitch, span, camber, configuration, and spacing for each type of truss<br />
required.<br />
2. Indicate sizes, stress grades, and species of lumber.<br />
3. Indicate locations of permanent bracing required to prevent buckling of individual truss<br />
members due to design loads.<br />
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 1
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Indicate locations, sizes, and materials for permanent bracing required to prevent<br />
buckling of individual truss members due to design loads.<br />
5. Indicate type, size, material, finish, design values, orientation, and location of metal<br />
connector plates.<br />
6. Show splice details and bearing details.<br />
C. Delegated-Design Submittal: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses indicated to comply with<br />
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the<br />
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For metal connector-plate manufacturer and fabricator.<br />
B. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum specific<br />
gravity. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and specific gravity.<br />
C. Product Certificates: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses, signed by officer of truss<br />
fabricating firm.<br />
D. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:<br />
1. Metal-plate connectors.<br />
2. Metal truss accessories.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Metal Connector-Plate Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer that is a member of TPI<br />
and that complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 for manufacture of connector plates.<br />
1. Manufacturer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services<br />
needed to assume engineering responsibility.<br />
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings and comprehensive<br />
engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer.<br />
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that participates in a recognized quality-assurance program that<br />
complies with quality-control procedures in TPI 1 and that involves third-party inspection by an<br />
independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to Architect and authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fireretardant<br />
treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that<br />
periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is<br />
representative of the material tested.<br />
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Handle and store trusses to comply with recommendations in TPI BCSI, "Building Component<br />
Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing<br />
Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."<br />
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 2
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Store trusses flat, off of ground, and adequately supported to prevent lateral bending.<br />
2. Protect trusses from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored.<br />
3. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings.<br />
B. Inspect trusses showing discoloration, corrosion, or other evidence of deterioration. Discard<br />
and replace trusses that are damaged or defective.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Division 01 Section<br />
"Quality Requirements," to design metal-plate-connected wood trusses.<br />
B. Structural Performance: Provide metal-plate-connected wood trusses capable of withstanding<br />
design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. Comply with requirements in TPI 1<br />
unless more stringent requirements are specified below.<br />
1. Design Loads: As indicated.<br />
2. Maximum Deflection Under Design Loads:<br />
a. Roof Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of span.<br />
b. Floor Trusses: Vertical deflection of 1/480 of span.<br />
C. Comply with applicable requirements and recommendations of the following publications:<br />
1. TPI 1, "National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss <strong>Construction</strong>."<br />
2. TPI DSB, "Recommended Design Specification for Temporary Bracing of Metal Plate<br />
Connected Wood Trusses."<br />
3. TPI BCSI, "Building Component Safety Information: Guide to Good Practice for<br />
Handling, Installing, Restraining, & Bracing Metal Plate Connected Wood Trusses."<br />
D. Wood Structural Design Standard: Comply with applicable requirements in AF&PA's<br />
"National Design Specifications for Wood <strong>Construction</strong>" and its "Supplement."<br />
2.2 DIMENSION LUMBER<br />
A. Certified Wood: For metal-plate-connected wood trusses and permanent bracing, provide<br />
materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited<br />
certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest<br />
Stewardship."<br />
B. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency<br />
is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules writing agency<br />
certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the<br />
ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.<br />
1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.<br />
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 3
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp and<br />
provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency.<br />
3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S.<br />
4. Provide dry lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing.<br />
C. Permanent Bracing: Provide wood bracing that complies with requirements for miscellaneous<br />
lumber in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."<br />
2.3 METAL CONNECTOR PLATES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Alpine Engineered Products, Inc.; an ITW company.<br />
2. Cherokee Metal Products, Inc.; Masengill Machinery Company.<br />
3. CompuTrus, Inc.<br />
4. Eagle Metal Products.<br />
5. Jager Building Systems, Inc.; a Tembec/SGF Rexfor company.<br />
6. MiTek Industries, Inc.; a subsidiary of Berkshire Hathaway Inc.<br />
7. Robbins Engineering, Inc.<br />
8. Truswal Systems Corporation; an ITW company.<br />
B. Source Limitations: Obtain metal connector plates from single manufacturer.<br />
C. General: Fabricate connector plates to comply with TPI 1.<br />
D. Hot-Dip Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), high-strength<br />
low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS<br />
Type B); G60 (Z180) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm) thick.<br />
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Hot-Dip Heavy-Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), highstrength<br />
low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B<br />
(HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)<br />
thick.<br />
1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.<br />
2.4 FASTENERS<br />
A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified<br />
in this article for material and manufacture.<br />
1. Provide fasteners for use with metal framing anchors that comply with written<br />
recommendations of metal framing manufacturer.<br />
B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.<br />
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 4
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.5 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated<br />
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.<br />
2. USP Structural Connectors.<br />
C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with<br />
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180) coating designation.<br />
1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.<br />
D. Hot-Dip Heavy-Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; Structural Steel (SS), highstrength<br />
low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B<br />
(HSLAS Type B); G185 (Z550) coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch (0.9 mm)<br />
thick.<br />
1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.<br />
E. Truss Tie-Downs (Hurricane or Seismic Ties): Bent strap tie for fastening roof trusses to wall<br />
studs below, 2-1/4 inches (57 mm) wide by 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick. Tie fits over top of truss<br />
and fastens to both sides of truss, top plates, and one side of stud below.<br />
F. Roof Truss Clips: Angle clips for bracing bottom chord of roof trusses at non-load-bearing<br />
walls, 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) wide by 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick. Clip is fastened to truss<br />
through slotted holes to allow for truss deflection.<br />
G. Floor Truss Hangers: U-shaped hangers, full depth of floor truss, with 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-)<br />
long seat; formed from metal strap 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick with tabs bent to extend over and<br />
be fastened to supporting member.<br />
H. Roof Truss Bracing/Spacers: U-shaped channels, 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1 inch (25<br />
mm) deep by 0.040 inch (1.0 mm) thick, made to fit between two adjacent trusses and<br />
accurately space them apart, and with tabs having metal teeth for fastening to trusses.<br />
2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20, with dry film containing a minimum of 94 percent<br />
zinc dust by weight.<br />
2.7 FABRICATION<br />
A. Cut truss members to accurate lengths, angles, and sizes to produce close-fitting joints.<br />
B. Fabricate metal connector plates to sizes, configurations, thicknesses, and anchorage details<br />
required to withstand design loads for types of joint designs indicated.<br />
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 5
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Assemble truss members in design configuration indicated; use jigs or other means to ensure<br />
uniformity and accuracy of assembly with joints closely fitted to comply with tolerances in<br />
TPI 1. Position members to produce design camber indicated.<br />
1. Fabricate wood trusses within manufacturing tolerances in TPI 1.<br />
D. Connect truss members by metal connector plates located and securely embedded<br />
simultaneously in both sides of wood members by air or hydraulic press.<br />
2.8 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform special<br />
inspections.<br />
1. Provide special inspector with access to fabricator's documentation of detailed fabrication<br />
and quality-control procedures that provide a basis for inspection control of the<br />
workmanship and the fabricator's ability to conform to approved construction documents<br />
and referenced standards.<br />
2. Provide special inspector with access to places where wood trusses are being fabricated<br />
to perform inspections.<br />
B. Correct deficiencies in Work that special inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract<br />
Documents.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install wood trusses only after supporting construction is in place and is braced and secured.<br />
B. If trusses are delivered to <strong>Project</strong> site in more than one piece, assemble trusses before installing.<br />
C. Hoist trusses in place by lifting equipment suited to sizes and types of trusses required,<br />
exercising care not to damage truss members or joints by out-of-plane bending or other causes.<br />
D. Install and brace trusses according to TPI recommendations and as indicated.<br />
E. Install trusses plumb, square, and true to line and securely fasten to supporting construction.<br />
F. Space trusses as indicated; adjust and align trusses in location before permanently fastening.<br />
G. Anchor trusses securely at bearing points; use metal truss tie-downs or floor truss hangers as<br />
applicable. Install fasteners through each fastener hole in metal framing anchors according to<br />
manufacturer's fastening schedules and written instructions.<br />
H. Securely connect each truss ply required for forming built-up girder trusses.<br />
1. Anchor trusses to girder trusses as indicated.<br />
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 6
G.H.A.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
I. Install and fasten permanent bracing during truss erection and before construction loads are<br />
applied. Anchor ends of permanent bracing where terminating at walls or beams.<br />
1. Install bracing to comply with Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."<br />
2. Install and fasten strongback bracing vertically against vertical web of parallel-chord<br />
floor trusses at centers indicated.<br />
J. Install wood trusses within installation tolerances in TPI 1.<br />
K. Do not alter trusses in field. Do not cut, drill, notch, or remove truss members.<br />
L. Replace wood trusses that are damaged or do not meet requirements.<br />
1. Damaged trusses may be repaired according to truss repair details signed and sealed by<br />
the qualified professional engineer responsible for truss design, when approved by<br />
Architect.<br />
3.2 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite<br />
protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment.<br />
Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.<br />
B. Protect wood trusses from weather. If, despite protection, wood trusses become wet, apply<br />
EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPAregistered<br />
label.<br />
C. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint<br />
according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
D. Protective Coating: Clean and prepare exposed surfaces of metal connector plates. Brush apply<br />
primer, when part of coating system, and one coat of protective coating.<br />
1. Apply materials to provide minimum dry film thickness recommended by coating system<br />
manufacturer.<br />
END OF SECTION 061753<br />
SHOP-FABRICATED WOOD TRUSSES 061753 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 064023 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Interior standing and running trim.<br />
2. Interior frames and jambs.<br />
3. Stairrails.<br />
4. Interior ornamental work.<br />
5. Closet and utility shelving.<br />
6. Shop finishing of interior woodwork.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging<br />
strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before<br />
woodwork installation.<br />
2. Sectin 123530 “Residential Casework” for pre-manufactured cabinets and plasticlaminate<br />
countertops.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for<br />
installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork<br />
installation.<br />
B. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing,<br />
headers, partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stairwork are specified in<br />
Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry."<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories<br />
handrail brackets and finishing materials and processes.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Product Data for Credit: For installation adhesives, documentation including printed<br />
statement of VOC content.<br />
2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit: For adhesives and finishing materials,<br />
documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements<br />
of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of<br />
Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental<br />
Chambers."<br />
C. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale<br />
details, attachment devices, and other components.<br />
1. Show details full size.<br />
2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed<br />
blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections.<br />
3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for faucets and other items installed in<br />
architectural woodwork.<br />
4. Show veneer leaves with dimensions, grain direction, exposed face, and identification<br />
numbers indicating the flitch and sequence within the flitch for each leaf.<br />
5. Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings.<br />
D. Samples for Initial Selection:<br />
1. Shop-applied transparent finishes.<br />
2. Shop-applied opaque finishes.<br />
E. Samples for Verification:<br />
1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 50 sq. in., 5 inches wide by 24 inches<br />
long, for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge.<br />
2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparentfinished<br />
woodwork.<br />
3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, 12 by 24<br />
inches, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as<br />
specified.<br />
4. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied opaque finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 8<br />
by 10 inches for panels, for each finish system and color, with 1/2 of exposed surface<br />
finished.<br />
5. Corner pieces as follows:<br />
a. Miter joints for standing trim.<br />
6. Exposed accessories, one unit for each type and finish.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.<br />
B. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.<br />
C. Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program<br />
certificates .<br />
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products<br />
similar to those required for this <strong>Project</strong> and whose products have a record of successful inservice<br />
performance. Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.<br />
B. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility<br />
for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers and<br />
wood doors with face veneers that are sequence matched with woodwork and transparentfinished<br />
wood doors that are required to be of same species as woodwork.<br />
C. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork<br />
Quality Standards" for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction,<br />
finishes, installation, and other requirements.<br />
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Program labels and certificates indicating that<br />
woodwork, complies with requirements of grades specified.<br />
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to<br />
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.<br />
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of<br />
Substantial Completion.<br />
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork<br />
have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation<br />
areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified<br />
in "<strong>Project</strong> Conditions" Article.<br />
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet<br />
work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative<br />
humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.<br />
B. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify<br />
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate<br />
measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress<br />
to avoid delaying the Work.<br />
1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field<br />
measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.<br />
2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying<br />
the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field<br />
measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to<br />
ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.<br />
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.9 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related<br />
units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be<br />
supported and installed as indicated.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 WOODWORK FABRICATORS<br />
A. Available Fabricators: Subject to compliance with requirements, fabricators offering interior<br />
architectural woodwork that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
2.2 MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each<br />
type of woodwork and quality grade specified, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Certified Wood: For any tropical wood or veneers, interior architectural woodwork shall be<br />
produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to<br />
comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."<br />
C. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: White oak, rift sawn or cut White ash, plain<br />
sawn or sliced.<br />
D. Wood Species for Opaque Finish: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine.<br />
E. Wood Products: Comply with the following:<br />
1. Hardboard: AHA A135.4.<br />
2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD.<br />
3. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2.<br />
4. Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1.<br />
5. Veneer-Faced Panel Products (Hardwood Plywood): HPVA HP-1.<br />
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less<br />
than 15 percent moisture content.<br />
B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln<br />
dried to less than 15 percent moisture content.<br />
C. Rough Carriages for Stairs: No. 1 grade and any of the following species, kiln dried to 15<br />
percent maximum moisture content:<br />
1. Douglas fir-larch.<br />
2. Douglas fir-south.<br />
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Douglas fir-larch (north).<br />
4. Hem-fir.<br />
5. Hem-fir (north).<br />
D. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage.<br />
Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior<br />
walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead<br />
expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors.<br />
E. Handrail Brackets: Cast from aluminum with wall flange drilled for exposed anchor and with<br />
support arm for screwing to underside of rail. Sized to provide 1-1/2-inch clearance between<br />
handrail and wall.<br />
F. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of<br />
the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile<br />
Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
G. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Installation adhesives shall comply with the following<br />
limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):<br />
1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L.<br />
2. Multipurpose <strong>Construction</strong> Adhesives: 70 g/L.<br />
3. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L.<br />
2.4 FABRICATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Economy-grade interior<br />
woodwork complying with referenced quality standard.<br />
B. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood<br />
moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation<br />
areas.<br />
C. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius<br />
indicated for the following:<br />
1. Corners and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) and composite trim materials Members 3/4<br />
Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch.<br />
2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch.<br />
D. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum<br />
extent possible before shipment to <strong>Project</strong> site. Disassemble components only as necessary for<br />
shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for<br />
scribing, trimming, and fitting.<br />
1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will<br />
be complete.<br />
2. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled.<br />
Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be<br />
removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check<br />
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings<br />
before disassembling for shipment.<br />
E. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing<br />
fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or<br />
roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts<br />
to remove splinters and burrs.<br />
2.5 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH<br />
A. Grade: Economy.<br />
B. Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine, or Medex composite<br />
board, water resistant and formaldehyde-free.<br />
C. Backout or groove backs of flat trim wood members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members,<br />
except for members with ends exposed in finished work.<br />
D. Assemble moldings in plant to maximum extent possible. Miter corners in plant and prepare for<br />
field assembly.<br />
2.6 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM FOR OPAQUE FINISH<br />
A. Grade: Economy.<br />
A. Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine, or Medex composite<br />
board, water resistant and formaldehyde-free.<br />
2.7 INTERIOR FRAMES AND JAMBS FOR OPAQUE FINISH<br />
A. Grade: Economy.<br />
B. Wood Species: Eastern white pine, sugar pine, or western white pine.<br />
2.8 STAIRWORK AND RAILS<br />
A. Grade: Economy.<br />
B. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red-oak #1 fir, or hard-maple handrails.<br />
C. Finishes for Stair Parts: As follows:<br />
1. Stringers: Opaque.<br />
2. Handrails: Transparent.<br />
D. Cut carriages to accurately fit treads and risers. Glue treads to risers, and glue and nail treads<br />
and risers to carriages.<br />
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.9 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING<br />
A. Grade: Economy.<br />
B. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch medium-density fiberboard with radiused edge.<br />
C. Cleats: 3/4-inch solid lumber.<br />
2.10 SHOP FINISHING<br />
A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished.<br />
B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer<br />
only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.<br />
C. General: Shop finish transparent-finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as<br />
specified in this Section. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for finishing opaque-finished<br />
architectural woodwork.<br />
D. General: Drawings indicate items that are required to be shop finished. Finish such items at<br />
fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for<br />
finishing architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished.<br />
E. Finishing Materials: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the<br />
California Department of Health Services "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic<br />
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
F. Shop Priming: Shop apply the prime coat including backpriming, if any, for items specified to<br />
be field finished. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for material and application<br />
requirements.<br />
G. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling<br />
countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing<br />
architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work.<br />
1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to<br />
concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain<br />
surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require<br />
backpriming when surfaced with plastic laminate, backing paper, or thermoset decorative<br />
panels.<br />
H. Transparent Finish:<br />
1. Grade: Economy.<br />
2. AWI Finish System: Catalyzed polyurethane.<br />
3. Sheen: Satin, 31-45 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523.<br />
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 PREPARATION<br />
A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in<br />
installation areas.<br />
B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and<br />
complete work as required, including removal of packing and backpriming.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for<br />
fabrication of type of woodwork involved.<br />
B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at <strong>Project</strong> site to comply with requirements for<br />
fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop.<br />
C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims.<br />
Install level and plumb (including tops) to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.<br />
D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish<br />
at cuts.<br />
E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply<br />
with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used<br />
to install woodwork.<br />
F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with<br />
countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Use<br />
fine finishing nails or finishing screws for exposed fastening, countersunk and filled flush with<br />
woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated.<br />
G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full-length<br />
pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use<br />
pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf<br />
running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members.<br />
1. Fill gaps, if any, between top of base and wall with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and<br />
finish same as wood base if finished.<br />
2. Install wall railings on indicated metal brackets securely fastened to wall framing.<br />
3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch<br />
in 96 inches.<br />
H. Stairs: Securely anchor carriages to supporting substrates. Install stairs with treads and risers<br />
no more than 1/8 inch from indicated position.<br />
I. Railings:<br />
1. General: Install rails with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch variation from a straight line.<br />
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
J. Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes<br />
with matching filler where exposed.<br />
K. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not<br />
indicated to be shop finished.<br />
3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual<br />
defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform<br />
appearance.<br />
B. Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.<br />
C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to<br />
restore damaged or soiled areas.<br />
END OF SECTION 064023<br />
INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 064023 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 071416 – COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING<br />
PART 1-GENERAL<br />
1.1 SCOPE<br />
A. Provide all labor, materials and equipment necessary to apply the Pli-Dek waterproof system over<br />
horizontal plywood decks, walkways, and stairs.<br />
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Sealants: Vulkem 931 caulking or equivalent.<br />
1.3 DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Pli-Dek is a proprietary blend of high performance acrylic formulations. Pli-Dek is a<br />
waterproofing system providing a durable walking surface in a variety of textures, finishes, and<br />
colors.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Samples:<br />
1. The Pli-Dek Applicator shall make and submit samples of the proposed finish to the<br />
architect and/or owner for approval.<br />
B. Manufacturer’s Information:<br />
1. Submit manufacturer’s product information and specifications.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Qualification:<br />
1. Manufacturer shall be Pli-Dek Systems, Inc., www.plidek.com.<br />
2. The applicator shall be listed with Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. as a trained* installer.<br />
B. Substrates:<br />
1. The Pli-Dek system installs over a minimum 16 mm, 5/8’’ (3/4” recommended) sound and<br />
dry, exterior grade sheeting; installed in accordance with this specification and Pli-Dek<br />
Application Instructions, PD165.<br />
2. The applicator/contractor shall verify that the proposed substrate is acceptable prior to<br />
application of the Pli-Dek System. Contact Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. for applications over<br />
Oriented Strand Board (OSB).<br />
C. Certifications:<br />
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. The Pli-Dek System is recognized by the following Model Building Code organizations:<br />
a. ICC-ES<br />
b. The City of Los Angeles<br />
D. Performance Requirements:<br />
1. Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM E 96)<br />
2. Bond Strength (ASTM C 297)<br />
3. Abrasion Test (ASTM D 968)<br />
4. Weatherability Test (ASTM G 23)<br />
5. Class A Burn Tests (ASTM E 108)<br />
6. Freeze-Thaw Cycling (ASTM A75)<br />
7. Compressive Strength (ASTM C150-72)<br />
8. Water Absorption (ASTM D570)<br />
9. Chemical Resistance (ASTM D2299)<br />
10. Static Coefficient of Friction (ASTM C 1028-96)<br />
11. One-Hour System (ASTM E119)<br />
12. Wind-Up Lift (Factory Mutual 1.52)<br />
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING<br />
A. All materials shall be delivered to the job site in the original, unopened packages with labels<br />
intact. Upon arrival, materials shall be inspected for physical damage or freezing. Questionable<br />
materials shall not be used.<br />
B. Minimum storage temperature shall be 4°C (40°F). Maximum storage temperature shall be 43°C<br />
(110°F). All materials shall be stored in a dry location, out of direct sunlight and protected from<br />
weather and other damage.<br />
1.7 JOB CONDITIONS<br />
A. On-Site Conditions:<br />
1. The applicator shall have access to electrical power, clean potable water, and clean work<br />
area at the location where the Pli-Dek materials are to be applied.<br />
2. Other conflicting trades need to be made aware to keep off areas being covered by Pli-Dek<br />
materials during the application and curing process.<br />
3. All required framing and sheeting inspections must be made prior to the installations of the<br />
Pli-Dek materials.<br />
B. Environmental Conditions:<br />
1. The ambient air and surface temperature must be a minimum of 10°C (50°F) and a<br />
maximum of 43°C (110°F) and shall remain so for at least 24 hours.<br />
C. Protection:<br />
1. Adjacent areas and materials shall be protected from damage, drops and spills.<br />
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. The Pli-Dek material ls must be protected by permanent or temporary means from weather<br />
and other damage, before, during, and immediately after application. Care must be taken to<br />
prevent condensation and/or heat build up when using a tarp or plastic as protection.<br />
3. The materials shall be protected from weather and other trades which may damage the<br />
integrity of the product.<br />
D. Sequencing and Scheduling:<br />
1. Application shall be coordinated with other construction trades.<br />
2. Sufficient labor and equipment shall be employed to ensure a continuous operation.<br />
1.8 WARRANTY<br />
A. Contact Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. for complete details. Provide manufacture’s standard warranty.<br />
1.9 MAINTENANCE<br />
A. Sealants and flashing should be inspected on a regular basis and repairs made as necessary.<br />
B. Contact Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. for maintenance and warranty requirements.<br />
PART 2 –PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GENERAL<br />
A. All products shall be supplied by Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. and/or its authorized distributors.<br />
Substitutions or additions of other materials will void the warranty.<br />
2.2 COMPONENTS<br />
A. GU80-1 Base Coat (gray): A Portland cement and silicon dioxide composition that is to be mixed<br />
with GU80-1 Liquid Admixture.<br />
B. GU80-1 Liquid Admixture: An acrylic polymer emulsion.<br />
C. Fiberglass Mat: Chopped strand ¾ oz. woven mat (Not always required)<br />
D. PD Resin Base Coat: A high build elastomeric acrylic resin. (Not always required)<br />
E. GU80-1 Top Coat/Custom Top Coat (white): A Portland cement and silicon dioxide composition<br />
to be mixed with GU80-1 Liquid Admixture.<br />
F. GS88-1 Sealer: Pigmented water-based coating.<br />
G. GS99-1 Sealer: Water-based, clear sealer (optional).<br />
2.3 MATERIALS<br />
A. Water: clean and potable.<br />
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Galvanized Metal Lath weighing 1.4 kg/m² (2.5lb. /yd.²): An expanded metal lath, dipped (not<br />
electro-galvanized).<br />
C. Caulking: Urethane based. Contact Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. for recommendations.<br />
D. Flashing: 26 gauge Bonderized, Galvanized Sheet Metal.<br />
2.4 EQUIPMENT<br />
A. Mixing shall be done with a clean Wind-lock B-M1 mixing blade or equivalent powered by a 13-<br />
mm (1/2”) variable speed drill capable of producing 1000 RPM.<br />
B. Tools<br />
1. Refer to the Pli-Dek Application Instructions, PD-165, for a complete list of recommended<br />
tools.<br />
PART 3- EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSPECTION<br />
A. Examination of Substrate:<br />
1. Ensure that the substrate is of sound exterior grade exposure 1 sheeting.<br />
2. Refer to ICC-ES Legacy Report for framing requirements.<br />
3. All surfaces shall be sloped for positive drainage. A slope of 6.4 mm/.3m (1/4” per linear<br />
foot) is required.<br />
4. All plywood seams shall be staggered and a 3.2 mm (1/8”) space between all sheets shall<br />
exist.<br />
5. Framing or blocking must support all plywood edges, except as per APA guidelines,<br />
blocking is not required when tongue and groove plywood is used. Joists to be spaced 16”<br />
on center. For alternate assemblies contact Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. for written approval.<br />
6. Maximum deflection of the deck shall not exceed L/360th of the span.<br />
7. Minimum thickness of plywood shall be 16 mm (5/8”). 3/4” thick exposure 1 sheeting<br />
recommended.<br />
8. All adjacent edges of the plywood sheets shall not be more than 0.78 mm (1/32”) out of<br />
plane (i.e.: above or below each other).<br />
B. Flashing:<br />
1. Flashing shall be minimum 26 gauge galvanized, bonderized sheet metal.<br />
2. When copper flashing/drains are used, ensure that all galvanized metal; such as, nails,<br />
staples, lath, drains, etc. does not come into contact with copper (do not allow any<br />
dissimilar metals to come in contact with each other). The contact of the two dissimilar<br />
metals cause will create rust and corrosion (electrolysis). **Contact Pli-Dek Systems, Inc.<br />
for additional details and written recommendations.<br />
3. Proper flashing must be installed at all doors, walls, fascia edges, posts, penetrations,<br />
columns, etc. See Pli-Dek Details for further instructions (PD-150 Architectural Details).<br />
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Contact Pli-Dek for written approval on flashing details that vary or are not included in PD-<br />
150 Architectural Details.<br />
4. Flashing must be installed to accommodate all exterior wall coating applications from<br />
coming in contact with the deck surface. Exterior siding, stucco, etc. must be held off the<br />
deck a minimum of 50 mm (6”).<br />
5. All flashing splices must be overlapped a minimum of 100 mm (4”) and caulked between<br />
any two pieces of flashing with a Vulkem 931 Urethane sealant or equivalent. All flashing<br />
overlaps shall be installed as to not<br />
6. “buck” water.<br />
7. Flashing at walls must be installed behind the building paper (or equivalent) on all areas<br />
that intersect the deck surface.<br />
3.2 SUBSTRATE PREPARATIONS<br />
A. Plywood Deck:<br />
1. All seams in plywood shall be gapped 3.2 mm (1/8”), and covered with a maximum of 50<br />
mm<br />
2. (2”) wide Pli-Dek approved flashing paper and tacked in place.<br />
3. Plywood shall be free of dust, moisture, and/or other debris or residue that would affect<br />
adhesion.<br />
4. Delaminated plywood shall be replaced with sound plywood.<br />
5. Fascia boards shall be installed to be level with the plywood substrate.<br />
6. Perimeter walls should be framed so to be consistent with interior floor boundaries.<br />
3.3 APPLICATION<br />
A. General:<br />
1. Refer to the Pli-Dek Application Instructions, PD-165, for complete information.<br />
B. Base Coat:<br />
1. Mix the GU80-1 Liquid Admixture with GU80-1 Base Coat. Refer to Pli-Dek Application<br />
Instructions, PD-165 for complete instructions.<br />
2. Trowel Base Coat emulsion into the galvanized expanded metal lath completely covering<br />
the metal lath. Allow it to dry completely, for approximately 2 (two) to 6 (six) hours,<br />
depending on weather conditions.<br />
C. Screed Coat:<br />
1. Mix the GU80-1 Liquid Admixture with GU80-1 Top Coat until a uniform consistency is<br />
achieved. Refer to Pli-Dek Application Instructions, PD-165 for complete instructions.<br />
2. Apply a Screed coat over the previously applied GU80-1 Base Coat. Allow it to dry<br />
completely, for approximately 2 (two) to 6 (six) hours, depending on weather conditions.<br />
D. Pli-Dek Finish Options / Specification Reference: (See Pli-Dek Application Instructions, PD165)<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
A. The applicator shall be responsible for the proper application of the Pli-Dek materials.<br />
B. Pli-Dek Systems, Inc. assumes no responsibility for on-site inspections, application or<br />
workmanship.<br />
3.5 CLEAN-UP<br />
A. All excess Pli-Dek materials shall be removed from the job site by the contractor in accordance<br />
with contract provisions.<br />
B. All surrounding areas, where the Pli-Dek materials have been applied, shall be left free of debris<br />
and foreign substances resulting from the contractor’s work.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416 - 6
G.A.H. P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 072100 - BUILDING INSULATION<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Foam-plastic board insulation.<br />
2. Glass-fiber blanket insulation.<br />
3. Spray-applied cellulosic insulation.<br />
4. Spray polyurethane foam insulation.<br />
5. Vapor retarders.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 7 Section(s) " Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing" for insulation specified<br />
as part of roofing construction.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified<br />
testing agency, for each product.<br />
C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For foam-plastic insulation, from ICC-ES.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to<br />
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of<br />
applicable testing agency.<br />
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture,<br />
soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's<br />
written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.<br />
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 1
G.A.H. P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:<br />
1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and<br />
concealment.<br />
2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site before installation time.<br />
3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each<br />
area of construction.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION<br />
A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive<br />
strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and<br />
450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. DiversiFoam Products.<br />
b. Dow Chemical Company (The).<br />
c. Owens Corning.<br />
d. Pactiv Building Products.<br />
2. Type IV, 25 psi.<br />
B. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation<br />
securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.<br />
2.2 GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. CertainTeed Corporation.<br />
2. Guardian Building Products, Inc.<br />
3. Johns Manville.<br />
4. Knauf Insulation.<br />
5. Owens Corning.<br />
B. Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread<br />
and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing<br />
ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.<br />
C. Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:<br />
1. Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no<br />
formaldehyde.<br />
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 2
G.A.H. P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than<br />
0.05-ppm formaldehyde.<br />
2.3 SPRAY-APPLIED CELLULOSIC INSULATION<br />
A. Self-Supported, Spray-Applied Cellulosic Insulation: ASTM C 1149, Type II (materials<br />
containing a dry adhesive activated by water during installation; intended only for enclosed or<br />
covered applications), chemically treated for flame-resistance, processing, and handling<br />
characteristics.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. International Cellulos Corp<br />
b. ThermoCon<br />
c. Archiexpo<br />
d. All Tech Insulation<br />
2.4 POLYURETHANE FOAM INSULATION<br />
A. Open-Cell Polyurethane Foam Insulation: Spray-applied polyurethane foam using water as a<br />
blowing agent, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450,<br />
respectively, per ASTM E 84.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. BaySystems NorthAmerica, LLC.<br />
b. Demilec (USA) LLC.<br />
c. Gaco Western Inc.<br />
d. Icynene Inc.<br />
e. SWD Urethane Company.<br />
2. Minimum density of 0.4 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 3.4 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at<br />
75 deg F.<br />
2.5 VAPOR RETARDERS<br />
A. Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: ASTM D 4397, 10 mils thick, with maximum permeance rating<br />
of 0.13 perm.<br />
B. Reinforced-Polyethylene Vapor Retarders: Two outer layers of polyethylene film laminated to<br />
an inner reinforcing layer consisting of either nylon cord or polyester scrim and weighing not<br />
less than 25 lb/1000 sq. ft., with maximum permeance rating of 0.0507 perm.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:<br />
a. Raven Industries Inc.; DURA-SKRIM 6WW.<br />
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 3
G.A.H. P. Plaza Feliz<br />
b. Reef Industries, Inc.; Griffolyn T-65.<br />
C. Vapor-Retarder Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder<br />
manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.<br />
D. Vapor-Retarder Fasteners: Pancake-head, self-tapping steel drill screws; with fender washers.<br />
E. Single-Component Nonsag Urethane Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type I, Grade NS, Class 25,<br />
Use NT related to exposure, and Use O related to vapor-barrier-related substrates.<br />
F. Adhesive for Vapor Retarders: Product recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer and has<br />
demonstrated capability to bond vapor retarders securely to substrates indicated.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 PREPARATION<br />
A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or vapor retarders, including<br />
removing projections capable of puncturing vapor retarders, or that interfere with insulation<br />
attachment.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and<br />
applications indicated.<br />
B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice,<br />
rain, or snow at any time.<br />
C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions<br />
and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.<br />
D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard<br />
thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness<br />
indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION<br />
A. On vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's<br />
recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of full foundation and stem wall<br />
depth below exterior grade line.<br />
B. On horizontal surfaces under slabs, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's<br />
written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.<br />
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 4
G.A.H. P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches in from exterior<br />
walls.<br />
3.4 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION<br />
A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written<br />
instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use<br />
mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.<br />
B. Glass-Fiber or Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing<br />
members according to the following requirements:<br />
1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If<br />
more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a<br />
snug fit between ends.<br />
2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between<br />
edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.<br />
3. Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or<br />
protected from contact with insulation.<br />
C. Spray-Applied Insulation: Apply spray-applied insulation according to manufacturer's written<br />
instructions. Do not apply insulation until installation of pipes, ducts, conduits, wiring, and<br />
electrical outlets in walls is completed and windows, electrical boxes, and other items not<br />
indicated to receive insulation are masked. After insulation is applied, make flush with face of<br />
studs by using method recommended by insulation manufacturer.<br />
D. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where<br />
required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:<br />
1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
3.5 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION<br />
A. Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket<br />
insulation over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up<br />
either side of partitions.<br />
3.6 INSTALLATION OF VAPOR RETARDERS<br />
A. Place vapor retarders on side of construction indicated on Drawings. Extend vapor retarders to<br />
extremities of areas to protect from vapor transmission. Secure vapor retarders in place with<br />
adhesives or other anchorage system as indicated. Extend vapor retarders to cover<br />
miscellaneous voids in insulated substrates, including those filled with loose-fiber insulation.<br />
B. Seal vertical joints in vapor retarders over framing by lapping no fewer than two studs.<br />
1. Before installing vapor retarders, apply urethane sealant to flanges of metal framing<br />
including runner tracks, metal studs, and framing around door and window openings.<br />
Seal overlapping joints in vapor retarders with vapor-retarder tape according to vapor-<br />
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 5
G.A.H. P. Plaza Feliz<br />
retarder manufacturer's written instructions. Seal butt joints with vapor-retarder tape.<br />
Locate all joints over framing members or other solid substrates.<br />
2. Firmly attach vapor retarders to metal framing and solid substrates with vapor-retarder<br />
fasteners as recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer.<br />
C. Seal joints caused by pipes, conduits, electrical boxes, and similar items penetrating vapor<br />
retarders with vapor-retarder tape to create an airtight seal between penetrating objects and<br />
vapor retarders.<br />
D. Repair tears or punctures in vapor retarders immediately before concealment by other work.<br />
Cover with vapor-retarder tape or another layer of vapor retarders.<br />
3.7 PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures,<br />
physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation<br />
is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction<br />
immediately after installation.<br />
END OF SECTION 072100<br />
BUILDING INSULATION 072100 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 074213 - METAL WALL PANELS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Exposed-fastener, lap-seam metal wall panels.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing and other sheet metal<br />
work that is not part of metal wall panel assemblies.<br />
1.3 DEFINITION<br />
A. Metal Wall Panel Assembly: Metal wall panels, attachment system components, miscellaneous<br />
metal framing and trim, thermal insulation, and accessories necessary for a complete<br />
weathertight wall system.<br />
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General Performance: Metal wall panel assemblies shall comply with performance<br />
requirements without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other<br />
defects in construction.<br />
B. Structural Performance: Provide metal wall panel assemblies capable of withstanding the effects<br />
the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:<br />
1. Deflection Limits: Metal wall panel assemblies shall withstand wind loads with<br />
horizontal deflections no greater than 1/180 of the span.<br />
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature<br />
changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint<br />
sealants, failure of connections and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface<br />
temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.<br />
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces<br />
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material<br />
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each type of<br />
wall panel and accessory.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of metal wall panels; details of edge<br />
conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment system, trim, flashings,<br />
closures, and accessories; and special details. Distinguish between factory-, shop- and fieldassembled<br />
work.<br />
1. Accessories: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2<br />
inches per 12 inches:<br />
a. Flashing and trim.<br />
b. Anchorage systems.<br />
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size<br />
indicated below.<br />
1. Metal Wall: 12 inches long by actual panel width. Include fasteners, closures, and other<br />
metal wall panel accessories.<br />
2. Trim and Closures: 12 inches long. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories.<br />
3. Accessories: 12-inch-long Samples for each type of accessory.<br />
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.<br />
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified<br />
testing agency, for each product.<br />
F. Maintenance Data: For metal wall panels to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.<br />
1. Installer must have been in a commercial business installing similar metal wall panels for<br />
a minimum of 7 years.<br />
2. Installers must have a minimum of 2 years installation experience within the last 3 years<br />
installing similar metal wall panels.<br />
3. Installer must have a full service commercial metal shop with equipment required for<br />
fabrication and modifications of metal wall panels, including but not limited to shear<br />
table.<br />
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal wall panel from single source from single<br />
manufacturer.<br />
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's representative if applicable, metal wall panel<br />
Installer, metal wall panel manufacturer's representative (if requested), and installers<br />
whose work interfaces with or affects metal wall panels, including installers of doors,<br />
windows, and louvers.<br />
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's<br />
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to progress and avoid delays, particularly of<br />
other trades.<br />
3. Review methods and procedures related to metal wall panel installation, including<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
4. Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment<br />
between and attachment to structural members.<br />
5. Review layouts, flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and<br />
condition of other construction that will affect metal wall panels.<br />
6. Review temporary protection requirements for metal wall panel assembly during and<br />
after installation.<br />
7. Review wall panel observation and repair procedures after metal wall panel installation.<br />
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver components, sheets, metal wall panels, and other manufactured items so as not to be<br />
damaged or deformed. Package metal wall panels for protection during transportation and<br />
handling.<br />
B. Unload, store, and erect metal wall panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping, twisting,<br />
and surface damage.<br />
C. Stack metal wall panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitable weathertight<br />
and ventilated covering. Store metal wall panels to ensure dryness, with positive slope for<br />
drainage of water. Do not store metal wall panels in contact with other materials that might<br />
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.<br />
D. Retain strippable protective covering on metal wall panel for period of metal wall panel<br />
installation.<br />
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather<br />
conditions permit assembly of metal wall panels to be performed according to manufacturers'<br />
written instructions and warranty requirements.<br />
B. Field Measurements: Verify locations of structural members and wall opening dimensions by<br />
field measurements before metal wall panel fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop<br />
Drawings.<br />
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.9 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate metal wall panel assemblies with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and<br />
construction of girts (if any), studs or other substrates, soffits, and other adjoining work to<br />
provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.<br />
1.10 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace components of metal wall panel assemblies that fail in materials or workmanship within<br />
specified warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.<br />
b. Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.<br />
2. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer<br />
agrees to repair finish or replace metal wall panels that show evidence of deterioration of<br />
factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.<br />
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.<br />
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.<br />
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PANEL MATERIALS<br />
A. All panel materials are to be furnished by the same manufacturer.<br />
1. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacture’s standard white or light-colored<br />
acrylic or polyester backer finish consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum<br />
total dry film thickness of 0.5 mil.<br />
B. Panel Sealants:<br />
1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound<br />
sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic,<br />
nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.<br />
2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane, polysulfide, or silicone sealant;<br />
of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in metal wall panels<br />
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by metal wall panel<br />
manufacturer.<br />
3. Butyl-Rubber-Based, Solvent-Release Sealant: ASTM C 1311.<br />
2.2 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, self-locking rivets and bolts, end-welded<br />
studs, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed<br />
fasteners with heads matching color of metal wall panels. Provide EPDM sealing washers.<br />
2.3 EXPOSED-FASTENER, LAP-SEAM METAL WALL PANELS<br />
A. General: Provide factory-formed metal wall panels designed to be field assembled by lapping<br />
side edges of adjacent panels and mechanically attaching panels to supports using exposed<br />
fasteners in side laps. Include accessories required for weathertight installation.<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide<br />
a. AEP-Span “Box Rib”.<br />
b. Firestone Una-Clad VR Classic Omega.<br />
c. Alternate products meeting project requirements will be considered by prior<br />
approval.<br />
2. Material: Zincalume or Acrylume coated steel sheet materials meeting ASTM A792; 22<br />
ga. nominal thickness as shown on Drawings.<br />
a. Exterior Finish: 1 mil “Kynar”.<br />
b. Color: As selected by Architect form manufacturer’s full range of standard and<br />
premium colors.<br />
3. Rib Spacing: 7.2” nominal spacing.<br />
4. Panel Coverage: 36” net coverage<br />
5. Panel Height: 1-1/2”<br />
2.4 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete metal wall panel<br />
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants,<br />
gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of metal wall panels,<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Closures: Provide closures at eaves and rakes, fabricated of same metal and of same<br />
guage as wall panles.<br />
2. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from<br />
material recommended by manufacturer.<br />
3. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin-foam or<br />
closed cell laminated plyethylene; minimum 1-inch-thick, flexible closure strips; cut or<br />
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
premolded to match metal wall panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or<br />
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.<br />
B. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and of same guage as adjacent wall panels.<br />
Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished<br />
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners,<br />
endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps, soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish<br />
flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal wall panels.Protect mechanical and<br />
painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporarySee<br />
Editing Instruction No. 1 in the Evaluations for cautions about naming manufacturers. Retain<br />
one of first two subparagraphs and list of manufacturers below. See Division 01 Section<br />
"Product Requirements."<br />
2.5 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Fabricate and finish metal wall panels and accessories at the factory to greatest extent<br />
possible, by manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated<br />
performance requirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles<br />
and with dimensional and structural requirements.<br />
B. Fabricate metal wall panels in a manner that eliminates condensation on interior side of panel<br />
and with joints between panels designed to form weathertight seals.<br />
C. Provide panel profile, including major ribs and intermediate stiffening ribs, if any, for full<br />
length of panel.<br />
1. East and West elevations may have panel joints (in long dimension) if required by<br />
Manufacturer’s Manufacturing production process.<br />
D. Fabricate metal wall panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator strips that<br />
provide a tight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that will minimize noise from<br />
movements within panel assembly.<br />
E. Sheet Metal Accessories: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in<br />
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal <strong>Manual</strong>" that apply to the design, dimensions, metal,<br />
and other characteristics of item indicated.<br />
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling,<br />
and tool marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded<br />
back to form hems.<br />
2. Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flatlock<br />
seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.<br />
3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate<br />
elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards.<br />
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible.<br />
5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored<br />
or from compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.<br />
a. Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal <strong>Manual</strong>" or<br />
metal wall panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal<br />
being secured.<br />
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes <strong>Manual</strong> for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are<br />
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations<br />
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are<br />
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to<br />
minimize contrast.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for installation tolerances, metal wall panel supports, and other conditions<br />
affecting performance of work.<br />
1. Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural<br />
panel support members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances<br />
required by metal wall panel manufacturer.<br />
2. Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or<br />
blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal wall panel<br />
manufacturer.<br />
3. Verify that weather-resistant sheathing paper has been installed over sheathing or backing<br />
substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.<br />
4. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental<br />
to performance of work.<br />
B. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating metal wall panels to verify actual<br />
locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal wall panels before metal wall panel<br />
installation.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 METAL WALL PANEL INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install metal wall panels according to manufacturer's written instructions in<br />
orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to girts and<br />
subgirts unless otherwise indicated. Anchor metal wall panels and other components of the<br />
Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.<br />
1. Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal wall panels.<br />
2. Flash and seal metal wall panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with self-tapping<br />
screws. Do not begin installation until weather barrier and flashings that will be<br />
concealed by metal wall panels are installed.<br />
3. At horizontal wall applications, lay up panels from bottom to top to prevent water<br />
intrusion into joints.<br />
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.<br />
5. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.<br />
6. Install flashing and trim as metal wall panel work proceeds.<br />
7. Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices<br />
and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.<br />
8. Apply elastomeric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle) and<br />
concrete and elsewhere as indicated or, if not indicated, as necessary for waterproofing.<br />
9. Align bottom of metal wall panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping<br />
screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with selftapping<br />
screws.<br />
10. Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls.<br />
B. Fasteners:<br />
1. Use stainless-steel fasteners with EPDM metal-backed washers and heads colored to<br />
match panel finish.<br />
C. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,<br />
protect against galvanic action as recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.<br />
D. Joint Sealers: Install gaskets, joint fillers, and sealants where indicated and where required for<br />
weathertight performance of metal wall panel assemblies. Provide types of gaskets, fillers, and<br />
sealants indicated or, if not indicated, types recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.<br />
1. Seal metal wall panel end laps with double beads of tape or sealant, full width of panel.<br />
Seal side joints where recommended by metal wall panel manufacturer.<br />
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section<br />
"Joint Sealants."<br />
E. Lap-Seam Metal Wall Panels: Fasten metal wall panels to supports with fasteners at each<br />
lapped joint at location and spacing recommended by manufacturer.<br />
1. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items<br />
for neat and weathertight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line.<br />
a. At horizontal wall applications, lay up panels from bottom to top to prevent water<br />
intrusion into joints.<br />
2. Provide metal-backed washers under heads of exposed fasteners bearing on weather side<br />
of metal wall panels.<br />
3. Locate and space exposed fasteners in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Use<br />
proper tools to obtain controlled uniform compression for positive seal without rupture of<br />
washer.<br />
4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress<br />
washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in<br />
predrilled holes.<br />
5. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of metal wall panels and between panels and<br />
protruding equipment, vents, and accessories.<br />
6. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end<br />
laps; on side laps of nesting-type panels; on side laps of corrugated nesting-type, ribbed,<br />
or fluted panels; and elsewhere as needed to make panels weathertight.<br />
7. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch end lap, sealed with butyl-rubber<br />
sealant and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates.<br />
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.3 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting, and<br />
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.<br />
1. Install components required for a complete metal wall panel assembly including trim,<br />
copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and<br />
similar items.<br />
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation<br />
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal <strong>Manual</strong>." Provide concealed fasteners<br />
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,<br />
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.<br />
1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool<br />
marks and that is true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to<br />
form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in<br />
waterproof and weather-resistant performance.<br />
2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.<br />
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches<br />
of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would<br />
not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of<br />
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant<br />
(concealed within joints).<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Remove and replace metal wall panels where field review or other inspection indicates that they<br />
do not comply with specified requirements.<br />
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal wall panels are<br />
installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On<br />
completion of metal wall panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metal<br />
wall panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.<br />
B. After metal wall panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions, dirt,<br />
and sealant.<br />
C. Replace metal wall panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful<br />
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.<br />
END OF SECTION 074213<br />
METAL WALL PANELS 074213 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Adhered TPO membrane roofing system.<br />
2. Vapor retarder.<br />
3. Roof insulation.<br />
B. Section includes the installation of acoustical roof deck rib insulation strips furnished under<br />
Division 05 Section "Steel Decking."<br />
C. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood<br />
nailers, curbs, and blocking.<br />
2. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for wood-based, structural-use roof deck panels.<br />
3. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation beneath the roof deck.<br />
4. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for metal roof penetration<br />
flashings, flashings, and counterflashings.<br />
5. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint sealants, joint fillers, and joint preparation.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. TPO: Thermoplastic polyolefin.<br />
B. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and<br />
Waterproofing <strong>Manual</strong>" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.<br />
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General Performance: Installed membrane roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified<br />
uplift pressures, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to<br />
defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Membrane<br />
roofing and base flashings shall remain watertight.<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Material Compatibility: Provide roofing materials that are compatible with one another under<br />
conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by membrane roofing<br />
manufacturer based on testing and field experience.<br />
C. Roofing System Design: Provide membrane roofing system that is identical to systems that<br />
have been successfully tested by a qualified testing and inspecting agency to resist uplift<br />
pressure calculated according to ASCE/SEI 7.<br />
D. FM Approvals Listing: Provide membrane roofing, base flashings, and component materials<br />
that comply with requirements in FM Approvals 4450 and FM Approvals 4470 as part of a<br />
membrane roofing system, and that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for Class 1 or<br />
noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Approvals markings.<br />
1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class 1A-90.<br />
2. Hail Resistance: SH.<br />
E. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 29 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based<br />
on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.<br />
F. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system that is listed on the DOE's ENERGY STAR<br />
"Roof Products Qualified Product List" for low-slope roof products.<br />
G. Energy Performance: Provide roofing system with initial solar reflectance not less than 0.70<br />
and emissivity not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.<br />
1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and<br />
attachments to other work.<br />
1. Base flashings and membrane terminations.<br />
2. Tapered insulation, including slopes.<br />
3. Roof plan showing orientation of steel roof deck and orientation of membrane roofing<br />
and fastening spacings and patterns for mechanically fastened membrane roofing.<br />
4. Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.<br />
C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:<br />
1. Sheet roofing, of color specified, including T-shaped side and end lap seam.<br />
2. Roof insulation.<br />
3. Walkway pads or rolls.<br />
4. Six insulation fasteners of each type, length, and finish.<br />
5. Six roof cover fasteners of each type, length, and finish.<br />
1.6 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and manufacturer.<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system<br />
complies with requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.<br />
1. Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.<br />
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer<br />
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for components of membrane roofing system.<br />
D. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of membrane roofing system, from the ICC-ES.<br />
E. Field quality-control reports.<br />
F. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.<br />
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for membrane roofing<br />
system identical to that used for this <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by membrane<br />
roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive<br />
manufacturer's special warranty.<br />
C. Source Limitations: Obtain components including fasteners and preformed flashings for<br />
membrane roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or approved by<br />
membrane roofing manufacturer.<br />
D. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated,<br />
as determined by testing identical membrane roofing materials by a qualified testing agency.<br />
Materials shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.<br />
E. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide fire-resistance-rated roof assemblies<br />
identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing<br />
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.<br />
F. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck construction, conduct conference at<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency<br />
representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck<br />
Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers<br />
of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.<br />
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's<br />
written instructions.<br />
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's<br />
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Review deck substrate requirements for conditions and finishes, including flatness and<br />
fastening.<br />
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.<br />
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,<br />
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.<br />
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if<br />
applicable.<br />
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after<br />
installation.<br />
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.<br />
G. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency<br />
representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck<br />
Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers<br />
of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.<br />
2. Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's<br />
written instructions.<br />
3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's<br />
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.<br />
4. Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements,<br />
including flatness and fastening.<br />
5. Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.<br />
6. Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations,<br />
equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect roofing system.<br />
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if<br />
applicable.<br />
8. Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after<br />
installation.<br />
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.<br />
1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver roofing materials to <strong>Project</strong> site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled<br />
with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or<br />
listing agency markings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.<br />
B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location<br />
and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored<br />
liquid material from direct sunlight.<br />
1. Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated<br />
shelf life.<br />
C. Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight,<br />
moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation<br />
manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Handle and store roofing materials and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent<br />
deflection of deck.<br />
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather<br />
conditions permit roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions<br />
and warranty requirements.<br />
1.11 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in<br />
which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of membrane roofing system that<br />
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Special warranty includes membrane roofing, base flashings, fasteners, roofing<br />
accessories, and other components of membrane roofing system.<br />
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Special <strong>Project</strong> Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this<br />
Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of<br />
membrane roofing system such as membrane roofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners,<br />
cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roof pavers, and walkway products, for the<br />
following warranty period:<br />
1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 TPO MEMBRANE ROOFING<br />
A. Fabric-Reinforced Thermoplastic Polyolefin Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric or scrim<br />
reinforced, uniform, flexible TPO sheet.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.<br />
b. Custom Seal Roofing.<br />
c. Firestone Building Products Company.<br />
d. GAF Materials Corporation.<br />
e. GenFlex Roofing Systems.<br />
f. Johns Manville.<br />
g. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc.<br />
h. Stevens Roofing Systems; Division of JPS Elastomerics.<br />
i. Versico Incorporated.<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Thickness: 45 mils, nominal, except where noted as 80 mils.<br />
3. Exposed Face Color: White.<br />
2.2 AUXILIARY MEMBRANE ROOFING MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Auxiliary membrane roofing materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer<br />
for intended use, and compatible with membrane roofing.<br />
1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having<br />
jurisdiction.<br />
2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply<br />
with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,<br />
Subpart D (EPA Method 24):<br />
a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L.<br />
b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L.<br />
c. Multipurpose <strong>Construction</strong> Adhesives: 70 g/L.<br />
d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L.<br />
e. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L.<br />
f. Other Adhesives: 250 g/L.<br />
g. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L.<br />
h. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L.<br />
i. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.<br />
j. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.<br />
3. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply<br />
with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health<br />
Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various<br />
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced thermoplastic polyolefin sheet flashing,<br />
55 mils thick, minimum, of same color as sheet membrane.<br />
C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.<br />
D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.<br />
E. Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,<br />
approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.<br />
F. Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,<br />
approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.<br />
G. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance<br />
provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening membrane to substrate, and<br />
acceptable to membrane roofing system manufacturer.<br />
H. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,<br />
preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination<br />
reglets, and other accessories.<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.3 SUBSTRATE BOARDS<br />
A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate,<br />
Type X, 5/8 inch thick.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck.<br />
B. Substrate Board: ASTM C 728, perlite board, 3/4 inch thick, seal coated.<br />
C. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance<br />
provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening substrate board to roof<br />
deck.<br />
2.4 VAPOR RETARDER<br />
A. Polyethylene Film: ASTM D 4397, 6 mils thick, minimum, with maximum permeance rating of<br />
0.13 perm.<br />
1. Tape: Pressure-sensitive tape of type recommended by vapor-retarder manufacturer for<br />
sealing joints and penetrations in vapor retarder.<br />
2. Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard lap adhesive, FM Approvals approved for vaporretarder<br />
application.<br />
2.5 ROOF INSULATION<br />
A. General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO membrane<br />
roofing manufacturer, selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of<br />
thicknesses indicated and that produce FM Approvals-approved roof insulation.<br />
1.<br />
B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber<br />
mat facer on both major surfaces.<br />
C. Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728, rigid, mineral-aggregate thermal insulation board<br />
composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofing agents with top<br />
surface seal coated.<br />
D. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch<br />
per 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where<br />
indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES<br />
A. General: Furnish roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for<br />
intended use and compatibility with membrane roofing.<br />
B. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosionresistance<br />
provisions in FM Approvals 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to substrate,<br />
and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.<br />
C. Bead-Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended bead-applied, lowrise,<br />
one- or multicomponent urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate<br />
or to another insulation layer.<br />
D. Full-Spread Applied Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended sprayapplied,<br />
low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to<br />
substrate or to another insulation layer.<br />
E. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water<br />
permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system<br />
manufacturer for application.<br />
2.7 WALKWAYS<br />
A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured<br />
walkway pads, approximately 3/16 inch thick, and acceptable to membrane roofing system<br />
manufacturer.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with the<br />
following requirements and other conditions affecting performance of roofing system:<br />
1. Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place and curbs are set and braced and<br />
that roof drain bodies are securely clamped in place.<br />
2. Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at<br />
penetrations and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installation<br />
according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or<br />
migrating onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking<br />
place or when rain is forecast.<br />
C. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from<br />
entering completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is<br />
forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.<br />
3.3 SUBSTRATE BOARD<br />
A. Install substrate board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes<br />
with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt substrate boards together.<br />
1. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck according to recommendations in FM<br />
Approvals' "RoofNav" and FM Global Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-29 for specified<br />
Windstorm Resistance Classification.<br />
2. Fasten substrate board to top flanges of steel deck to resist uplift pressure at corners,<br />
perimeter, and field of roof according to membrane roofing system manufacturers'<br />
written instructions.<br />
3.4 VAPOR-RETARDER INSTALLATION<br />
A. Polyethylene Film: Loosely lay polyethylene-film vapor retarder in a single layer over area to<br />
receive vapor retarder, side and end lapping each sheet a minimum of 2 inches and 6 inches,<br />
respectively.<br />
1. Continuously seal side and end laps with [tape] [adhesive].<br />
B. Completely seal vapor retarder at terminations, obstructions, and penetrations to prevent air<br />
movement into membrane roofing system.<br />
3.5 INSULATION INSTALLATION<br />
A. Coordinate installing membrane roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to<br />
precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.<br />
B. Comply with membrane roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for<br />
installing roof insulation.<br />
C. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.<br />
D. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation<br />
thickness is 2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer<br />
staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.<br />
1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install<br />
noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable,<br />
and install composite board insulation for top layer.<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does<br />
not restrict flow of water.<br />
F. Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints<br />
staggered between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch<br />
with insulation.<br />
1. Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.<br />
G. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:<br />
1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft. and allow<br />
primer to dry.<br />
2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus<br />
or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature.<br />
3. Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly<br />
pressing and maintaining insulation in place.<br />
4. Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive,<br />
firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.<br />
H. Mechanically Fastened Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure to deck using<br />
mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for fastening specified board-type roof<br />
insulation to deck type.<br />
1. Fasten insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" for specified<br />
Windstorm Resistance Classification.<br />
2. Fasten insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.<br />
I. Mechanically Fastened and Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and secure first<br />
layer of insulation to deck using mechanical fasteners specifically designed and sized for<br />
fastening specified board-type roof insulation to deck type.<br />
1. Fasten first layer of insulation according to requirements in FM Approvals' "RoofNav"<br />
for specified Windstorm Resistance Classification.<br />
2. Fasten first layer of insulation to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of<br />
roof.<br />
3. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied<br />
within plus or minus 25 deg F of equiviscous temperature.<br />
4. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive,<br />
firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.<br />
5. Set each subsequent layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation<br />
adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.<br />
3.6 ADHERED MEMBRANE ROOFING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Adhere membrane roofing over area to receive roofing and install according to membrane<br />
roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Start installation of membrane roofing in presence of membrane roofing system manufacturer's<br />
technical personnel.<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Accurately align membrane roofing and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum<br />
dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.<br />
D. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of membrane roofing at rate required by<br />
manufacturer and allow to partially dry before installing membrane roofing. Do not apply to<br />
splice area of membrane roofing.<br />
E. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten membrane roofing securely at terminations,<br />
penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.<br />
F. Apply membrane roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.<br />
G. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap membrane roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of<br />
membrane roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure<br />
a watertight seam installation.<br />
1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut<br />
edges of sheet membrane.<br />
2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily and repair seam sample areas.<br />
3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that does not comply with requirements.<br />
H. Spread sealant bed over deck drain flange at roof drains and securely seal membrane roofing in<br />
place with clamping ring.<br />
3.7 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories and adhere to substrates according to<br />
membrane roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate and allow<br />
to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.<br />
C. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet<br />
flashing.<br />
D. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side<br />
and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.<br />
E. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through<br />
termination bars.<br />
3.8 WALKWAY INSTALLATION<br />
A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or<br />
adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.<br />
B. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to<br />
inspect roofing installation on completion.<br />
C. Repair or remove and replace components of membrane roofing system where inspections<br />
indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.<br />
D. Additional inspections, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of<br />
replaced or additional work with specified requirements.<br />
3.10 PROTECTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Protect membrane roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction<br />
period. When remaining construction will not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for<br />
deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to<br />
Architect and Owner.<br />
B. Correct deficiencies in or remove membrane roofing system that does not comply with<br />
requirements; repair substrates; and repair or reinstall membrane roofing system to a condition<br />
free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty<br />
requirements.<br />
C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures<br />
recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.<br />
3.11 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY<br />
A. WHEREAS of , herein called the "Roofing Installer," has<br />
performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:<br />
1. Owner: .<br />
2. Address: .<br />
3. Building Name/Type: .<br />
4. Address: .<br />
5. Area of Work: .<br />
6. Acceptance Date: .<br />
7. Warranty Period: .<br />
8. Expiration Date: .<br />
B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a<br />
subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and<br />
workmanship for designated Warranty Period,<br />
C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein<br />
set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 12
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and<br />
defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.<br />
D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:<br />
1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the<br />
building, and to building contents, caused by:<br />
a. Lightning;<br />
b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 90 `;<br />
c. Fire;<br />
d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive<br />
deflection, deterioration, and decomposition;<br />
e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents,<br />
equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work;<br />
f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and<br />
g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance<br />
personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by<br />
Owner.<br />
2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and<br />
void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense<br />
thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated.<br />
3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not<br />
liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or<br />
faults or defects of work.<br />
4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than<br />
Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with<br />
penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this<br />
Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent<br />
said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing<br />
Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless<br />
Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing,<br />
showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or<br />
deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this<br />
Warranty.<br />
5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but<br />
was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded<br />
basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall<br />
become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects<br />
work covered by this Warranty.<br />
6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks,<br />
defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to<br />
inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration.<br />
7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work<br />
and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources<br />
lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall<br />
not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work<br />
according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract<br />
was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 13
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this day of<br />
, .<br />
1. Authorized Signature: .<br />
2. Name: .<br />
3. Title: .<br />
END OF SECTION 075423<br />
THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 14
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 076100 - SHEET METAL ROOFING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Standing-seam metal roofing, on-site, roll formed.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 7 Section "Building Insulation" for roof insulation and sheet vapor retarders<br />
separate from self-adhering underlayments.<br />
2. Division 7 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for gutters, downspouts, fasciae,<br />
copings, and flashings that are not part of sheet metal roofing.<br />
3. Division 7 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for manufactured fasciae and<br />
copings that are not part of sheet metal roofing.<br />
4. Division 7 Section "Roof Accessories" for manufactured roof accessories.<br />
5. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for field-applied sealants adjoining sheet metal<br />
roofing.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General Performance: Sheet metal roofing system including, but not limited to, metal roof<br />
panels, cleats, clips, anchors and fasteners, sheet metal flashing integral with sheet metal<br />
roofing, fascia panels, trim, underlayment, and accessories shall comply with requirements<br />
indicated without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects<br />
in construction. Sheet metal roofing shall remain watertight.<br />
B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal roofing that allows for thermal movements from<br />
ambient and surface temperature changes. Base calculations on surface temperatures of<br />
materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.<br />
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.<br />
C. Energy Performance: Provide metal roofing with solar reflectance index not less than 78 when<br />
calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on testing identical products by a qualified testing<br />
agency.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material<br />
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each<br />
manufactured product and accessory.<br />
B. LEED Submittal:<br />
1. Product Test Reports for Credit SS 7.2: For roof panels, indicating that panels comply<br />
with Solar Reflectance Index requirement.<br />
C. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal roofing, including<br />
plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and<br />
field-assembled work. Include the following:<br />
1. Details for forming sheet metal roofing, including seams and dimensions.<br />
2. Details for joining and securing sheet metal roofing, including layout of fasteners, cleats,<br />
clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.<br />
3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.<br />
4. Details of expansion joints, including showing direction of expansion and contraction.<br />
5. Details of roof penetrations.<br />
6. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and<br />
counterflashings.<br />
7. Details of special conditions.<br />
8. Details of connections to adjoining work.<br />
9. Details of any minor crickets needed to adjust flow around hatches, skylights or similar<br />
penetrations.<br />
10. Detail and submit coordination drawings as necessary for the installation of and<br />
coordination with the following accessory items, at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches<br />
per 12 inches:<br />
a. Flashing and trim.<br />
b. Gutters and downspouts as they relate to adjacent sheet metal roofing.<br />
c. Roof curbs.<br />
d. Snow guards.<br />
e. Roof-mounted items including (but not limited to): roof hatches, equipment<br />
supports, pipe supports and penetrations, lighting fixtures, snow guards, and items<br />
mounted on roof curbs.<br />
f. Other items as required in the Contract Documents for the <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
D. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated<br />
below:<br />
1. Sheet Metal Roofing: 12 inches long by actual width of unit, including finished seam and<br />
in required profile. Include fasteners, clips, and other attachments.<br />
2. Snow Guards: Full-size Sample.<br />
E. Qualification Data: For Installer:<br />
1. Install shall have received training and licensing / certification from the metal roofing<br />
manufacturer for the installation of the specified roof system.<br />
2. A letter certifying the installer (as qualified per the above at the date of submittal) shall<br />
accompany the submittal package.<br />
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
F. Qualification Data: For Manufacturer:<br />
1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years experience in manufacturing metal<br />
roofing systems. Panels specified in this section shall be produced either in a factory<br />
with fixed-base roll forming equipment or by a factory using manufacturer-authorized<br />
equipment. A letter certifying the manufacturer’s qualifications shall accompany the<br />
submittal package.<br />
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified<br />
testing agency, for each product.<br />
H. Maintenance Data: For roofing sheet metals and accessories to include in maintenance<br />
manuals.<br />
I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Roll-Formed Sheet Metal Roofing Fabricator Qualifications: Fabricator authorized by portable<br />
roll-forming equipment manufacturer to fabricate and install sheet metal roofing units required<br />
for this <strong>Project</strong>, and who maintains current UL certification of its portable roll-forming<br />
equipment.<br />
B. Sheet Metal Roofing Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal <strong>Manual</strong>"<br />
unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.<br />
C. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof deck sheathing construction, conduct<br />
conference at <strong>Project</strong> site. Comply with requirements for preinstallation conferences in<br />
Division 1<br />
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's representative, sheet metal roofing<br />
Installer, portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer's representative for sheet metal<br />
roofing, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects sheet metal roofing<br />
including installers of roof accessories and roof-mounted equipment.<br />
2. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's<br />
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.<br />
3. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal roofing installation, including<br />
portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
4. Examine metal deck sheathing conditions for compliance with requirements, including<br />
flatness and attachment to structural members.<br />
5. Review structural loading limitations of metal deck sheathing during and after roofing<br />
installation.<br />
6. Review flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment<br />
curbs, and condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal roofing.<br />
7. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and testing<br />
and inspecting if applicable.<br />
8. Review temporary protection requirements for sheet metal roofing during and after<br />
roofing installation.<br />
9. Review roof observation and repair procedures after sheet metal roofing installation.<br />
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
10. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish<br />
copy of record to each participant.<br />
E. Installation Quality Control:<br />
1. All roof systems are subject to interim and final inspections at the discretion of the<br />
Manufacturer by a technical field representative / inspector to inspect the installation of<br />
the metal roofing system and its interface with adjacent construction in accordance with<br />
the manufacturer’s warranty requirements.<br />
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Do not store sheet metal roofing materials in contact with other materials that might cause<br />
staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal roofing materials away from<br />
uncured concrete and masonry.<br />
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal roofing from exposure to sunlight and high<br />
humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal roofing installation.<br />
1.7 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations, which are<br />
specified in other Sections.<br />
B. Coordinate sheet metal roofing with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, and construction of<br />
metal decks, sheathing, parapets, walls, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure,<br />
and noncorrosive installation.<br />
1.8 WARRANTIES<br />
A. Installer’s (Roofer's) Guarantee: Provide written guarantee from the Contractor stating that the<br />
Contractor will respond within 24 hours and repair within 5 business days, any leaks or defects<br />
in the roofing assembly for 2 years at no cost to the Owner.<br />
B. Manufacturer’s Special Warranty: Manufacturer's No Dollar Limit as described below:<br />
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
2. Manufacturer’s liability requirement: No dollar limit.<br />
3. Warranty coverage to include: All system panels, insulations and system components and<br />
accessories manufactured by the Manufacturer of the roofing system. The warranty shall<br />
cover weathertightness, finish, materials, labor, and workmanship.<br />
4. Roof system is subject to inspection, at Manufacturer’s option, at completion of<br />
installation and must be installed in compliance with the manufacturer’s application<br />
requirements and standards, including such necessary adjustments to standard details as<br />
are required to adapt the system to the specific requirements of the project and only as per<br />
submitted and approved submittals described herein. The Manufacturer’s technical field<br />
representative, at Manufacturer’s option, may conduct interim and final inspections.<br />
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to<br />
repair finish or replace sheet metal roofing that shows evidence of deterioration of factoryapplied<br />
finishes within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.<br />
b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.<br />
c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.<br />
2. Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 ROOFING SHEET METALS<br />
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a<br />
strippable, temporary protective film, or by other means, before shipping.<br />
B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, roll-formed and coated to comply<br />
with ASTM A 792/792M; AZ 50 (lock-forming quality), extra smooth, tension leveled steel;<br />
minimum 50 KSI.<br />
1. Thickness: 24 ga. 0.028 inch unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Surface: Smooth, flat.<br />
3. Finish: “Galvalume Plus” or “Acrylume”.<br />
4. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or<br />
polyester-backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry<br />
film thickness of 0.5 mil.<br />
C. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:<br />
a. Firestone “R-Panel” system.<br />
b. Alternate products meeting project requirements will be considered by prior<br />
approval.<br />
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS<br />
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 60 mils thick, consisting of slip-resisting<br />
polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive,<br />
with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment<br />
manufacturer.<br />
1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F.<br />
2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F.<br />
3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:<br />
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Rainproof 60 Plus and Ice & Water Guard as manufactured by<br />
ProtectoWrap Company, 1955 South Cherokee Street, Denver, Colorado 80223, 303-77-3001,<br />
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:<br />
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT.<br />
b. Grace <strong>Construction</strong> Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra.<br />
c. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High-Temperature Underlayment.<br />
d. Or other product acceptable to Manufacturer of metal panels.<br />
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,<br />
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a complete roofing system<br />
and as recommended by primary sheet metal or portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Fasteners: Series 300 stainless steel; furnish suitable fasteners designed to withstand design<br />
loads.<br />
1. General:<br />
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal roofing using plastic caps<br />
or factory-applied coating.<br />
b. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed,<br />
with hex-washer head.<br />
2. Fasteners for Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: .<br />
C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant<br />
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining<br />
tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.<br />
D. Elastomeric Sealant: (if required by Manufacturer): ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer<br />
sealant as recommended by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer for installation<br />
indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in<br />
sheet metal roofing and remain watertight.<br />
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;<br />
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited<br />
movement.<br />
2.4 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Sheet Metal Accessories: Provide components required for a complete sheet metal roofing<br />
assembly including trim, copings, fasciae, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers,<br />
metal closures, closure strips, and similar items. Match material and finish of sheet metal<br />
roofing unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Provide accessories as recommended by portable roll-forming equipment manufacturer to<br />
produce sheet metal roofing assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift<br />
resistance classification specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.<br />
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Clips: Minimum 0.062-inch- thick, stainless-steel panel clips designed to withstand<br />
negative-load requirements.<br />
3. Backing Plates: Plates at roofing splices, fabricated from material recommended by<br />
SMACNA.<br />
4. Closure Strips: Closed-cell, expanded, cellular, rubber or crosslinked, polyolefin foam or<br />
closed-cell laminated polyethylene; minimum 1-inch- thick, flexible-closure strips; cut or<br />
premolded to match sheet metal roofing profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or<br />
necessary to ensure weathertight construction.<br />
5. Flashing and Trim: Formed from same material and with same finish as sheet metal<br />
roofing, minimum thickness matching the sheet metal roofing.<br />
B. Pipe Flashing: Premolded, EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base.<br />
C. Roof Curbs (where not specified elsewhere): Fabricated from same material and finish as sheet<br />
metal roofing, minimum thickness matching the sheet metal roofing; with bottom of skirt<br />
profiled to match roof panel profiles; with weatherproof top box and integral full-length cricket.<br />
Fabricate curb subframing of nominal 0.062-inch- thick, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped galvanized<br />
steel or stainless-steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads of size<br />
and height indicated. Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of<br />
equipment to be supported.<br />
1. Insulate curbs with 1-inch- thick, rigid insulation.<br />
2.5 SNOW GUARDS<br />
A. Snow Guards, General: Prefabricated, noncorrosive units designed to be installed without<br />
penetrating sheet metal roofing; complete with predrilled holes, clamps, or hooks for anchoring.<br />
B. Seam-Mounted, Bar-Type Snow Guards: Rail- or fence-type assembly consisting of aluminum<br />
or stainless steel rods and bars, held in place by clamps attached to vertical ribs of standingseam<br />
sheet metal roofing.<br />
1. Finish: satin<br />
2. Products: Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide:<br />
a. S-5 “Sno-Rail”<br />
b. Alternate products meeting project requirements will be considered by prior<br />
approval.<br />
2.6 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal roofing panels with UL-certified, portable rollforming<br />
equipment capable of producing roofing panels for sheet metal roofing assemblies that<br />
comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift resistance classification specified in "Quality Assurance"<br />
Article. Fabricate roll-formed sheet metal according to equipment manufacturer's written<br />
instructions and to comply with details shown.<br />
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal roofing that is capable of installation to a<br />
tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch<br />
offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.<br />
C. Form exposed sheet metal work to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and<br />
tool marks; true to line and levels indicated; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.<br />
1. Lay out sheet metal roofing so transverse seams, if required, are made in direction of<br />
flow with higher panels overlapping lower panels.<br />
2. Offset transverse seams from each other 12 inches minimum.<br />
3. Fold and cleat eaves and transverse seams in the shop.<br />
4. Form and fabricate sheets, seams, strips, cleats, valleys, ridges, edge treatments, integral<br />
flashings, and other components of metal roofing to profiles, patterns, and drainage<br />
arrangements shown on Drawings and as required for leakproof construction.<br />
D. Expansion Provisions: Fabricate sheet metal roofing to allow for expansion in running work<br />
sufficient to prevent leakage, damage, and deterioration of the Work. Where lapped expansion<br />
provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than<br />
1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.<br />
E. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are indicated or required to produce<br />
weathertight seams, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant in<br />
compliance with SMACNA standards.<br />
F. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other, protect against galvanic<br />
action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by applying self-adhering sheet<br />
underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent separation as recommended by<br />
fabricator of sheet metal roofing or manufacturers of the metals in contact.<br />
G. Sheet Metal Accessories: Custom fabricate flashings and trim to comply with recommendations<br />
in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal <strong>Manual</strong>" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and<br />
other characteristics of item indicated. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop<br />
fabrication.<br />
1. Form exposed sheet metal accessories without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool<br />
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form<br />
hems.<br />
2. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with<br />
elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended<br />
use. Rivet joints where necessary for strength.<br />
3. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate<br />
elastomeric sealant.<br />
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not<br />
allowed on faces of accessories exposed to view.<br />
5. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's<br />
"Architectural Sheet Metal <strong>Manual</strong>" for application, but not less than thickness of metal<br />
being secured.<br />
H. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.<br />
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of<br />
the Work.<br />
1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or<br />
blocking, that tops of fasteners are flush with surface, and that installation is within<br />
flatness tolerances required for finished roofing installation.<br />
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely<br />
anchored, and that provision has been made for drainage, flashings, and penetrations<br />
through sheet metal roofing.<br />
B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to<br />
performance of the Work.<br />
C. Examine roughing-in for components and systems penetrating sheet metal roofing to verify<br />
actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of sheet metal roofing before<br />
installation.<br />
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION<br />
A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free, on<br />
roof sheathing under sheet metal roofing. Apply primer if required by underlayment<br />
manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for<br />
installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply<br />
over entire roof, in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches<br />
staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps<br />
with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.<br />
B. Install flashings to cover underlayment to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section<br />
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Anchor sheet metal roofing and other components of the Work securely in place, with<br />
provisions for thermal and structural movement. Install fasteners, solder, welding rods,<br />
protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for a<br />
complete roofing system and as recommended by fabricator for sheet metal roofing.<br />
1. Field cutting of sheet metal roofing by torch is not permitted.<br />
2. Provide metal closures at peaks rake edges rake walls eaves and each side of ridge and<br />
hip caps.<br />
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips at eaves, rakes, and perimeter of all<br />
openings. Fasten with self-tapping screws.<br />
4. Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment. Predrill panels<br />
for fasteners.<br />
5. Install ridge caps as sheet metal roofing work proceeds.<br />
6. Locate roofing splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger roofing<br />
splices and end laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition. Install backing plates at<br />
roofing splices.<br />
7. Install sealant tape where indicated.<br />
8. Lap metal flashing over sheet metal roofing to allow moisture to run over and off the<br />
material.<br />
9. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.<br />
B. Thermal Movement. Rigidly fasten metal roof panels to structure at only one location for each<br />
panel. Allow remainder of panel to move freely for thermal expansion and contraction.<br />
1. Point of Fixity: Fasten each panel along a single line of fixing located at eave ridge<br />
center of panel length.<br />
2. Avoid attaching accessories through roof panels in a manner that will inhibit thermal<br />
movement.<br />
C. Fasteners: Use fasteners of sizes that will substrate to satisfaction of Manufacturer; installer<br />
shall coordinate specifically with Manufacturer for type and size recommendations.<br />
D. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,<br />
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating, by<br />
applying self-adhering sheet underlayment to each contact surface, or by other permanent<br />
separation as recommended by SMACNA.<br />
E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to<br />
minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight<br />
installation.<br />
F. Fasciae: Align bottom of sheet metal roofing and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping<br />
screws. Flash and seal sheet metal roofing with closure strips where fasciae meet soffits, along<br />
lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings.<br />
3.4 ON-SITE, ROLL-FORMED SHEET METAL ROOFING INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install on-site, roll-formed sheet metal roofing fabricated from UL-certified<br />
equipment to comply with equipment manufacturer's written instructions for UL wind-uplift<br />
resistance class indicated. Provide sheet metal roofing of full length from eave to ridge unless<br />
otherwise restricted by on-site or shipping limitations.<br />
B. Standing-Seam Sheet Metal Roofing: Fasten sheet metal roofing to supports with concealed<br />
clips at each standing-seam joint at location, at spacing, and with fasteners recommended by<br />
manufacturer of portable roll-forming equipment.<br />
1. Install clips to substrate with self-tapping fasteners.<br />
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Install pressure plates at locations indicated in equipment manufacturer's written<br />
installation instructions.<br />
3. Before panels are joined, apply continuous bead of sealant to top of flange of lower<br />
panel.<br />
4. Seamed Joint: Crimp standing seams with manufacturer-approved motorized seamer tool<br />
so cleat, sheet metal roofing, and field-applied sealant are completely engaged.<br />
C. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. For roofing with 3:12 slopes<br />
or less, use cleats at transverse seams.<br />
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than<br />
1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient<br />
temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint<br />
members for 50 percent movement either way. Adjust setting proportionately for<br />
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at<br />
temperatures below 40 deg F.<br />
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 7 Section<br />
"Joint Sealants."<br />
3.5 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting and<br />
provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.<br />
1. Install components required for a complete sheet metal roofing assembly including trim,<br />
copings, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, metal closures, closure strips,<br />
and similar items.<br />
2. Install accessories integral to sheet metal roofing that are specified in Division 7 Section<br />
"Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" to comply with that Section's requirements.<br />
B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation<br />
instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal <strong>Manual</strong>." Provide concealed fasteners<br />
where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints,<br />
and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.<br />
1. Install flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished<br />
appearance. Locations include, but are not limited to, eaves, rakes, corners, bases,<br />
framed openings, ridges, fasciae, and fillers.<br />
2. Install continuous strip of self-adhering underlayment at edge of continuous flashing<br />
overlapping self-adhering underlayment, where "continuous seal strip" is indicated in<br />
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal <strong>Manual</strong>," and where indicated on Drawings.<br />
3. Install exposed flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks<br />
and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.<br />
Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and<br />
weather-resistant performance.<br />
4. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.<br />
Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches<br />
of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would<br />
not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of<br />
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, and filled with butyl sealant<br />
concealed within joints.<br />
C. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and sheet metal roofing. Fasten and seal<br />
to sheet metal roofing as recommended by SMACNA.<br />
D. Roof Curbs: Install curbs at locations indicated on Drawings. Install flashing around bases<br />
where they meet sheet metal roofing.<br />
E. Bar-Type Snow Guards: Attach bar supports to vertical ribs of standing-seam sheet metal<br />
roofing with clamps or set screws. Do not use fasteners that will penetrate sheet metal roofing.<br />
1. Provide 1 row of snow guards continuous (unless fewer locations are indicated on<br />
Drawings), spaced with clip at every rib, at 16” up from roof edge; verify location with<br />
Architect prior to proceeding.<br />
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES<br />
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerance of 1/4<br />
inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining<br />
faces and of alignment of matching profiles.<br />
B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal roofing within installed tolerances specified<br />
in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."<br />
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and<br />
weathering.<br />
B. Clean off excess sealants.<br />
C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal roofing is installed<br />
unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of<br />
sheet metal roofing installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by sheet metal roofing<br />
manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal roofing in a clean condition during construction.<br />
D. Replace sheet metal roofing components that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond<br />
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.<br />
END OF SECTION 072100<br />
SHEET METAL ROOFING 076100 - 12
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Manufactured Products:<br />
a. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing.<br />
2. Formed Products:<br />
a. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 05 Section “Architectural Joint Systems” for manufactured sheet metal<br />
expansion –joint covers.<br />
2. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking.<br />
3. Division 07 Section “Built-up Roofing” for installing sheet metal flashing and trim<br />
integral with membrane roofing.<br />
4. Division 07 Section "Metal Wall Panels" for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with<br />
metal wall panels.<br />
5. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Roofing" for custom-formed sheet metal flashing and<br />
trim integral with sheet metal roofing.<br />
6. Division 07 Section "Manufactured Roof Specialties" for manufactured roof specialties<br />
not part of sheet metal flashing and trim.<br />
7. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof<br />
hatches, vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads,<br />
structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due<br />
to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed<br />
sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.<br />
B. Fabricate and install roof edge flashing capable of resisting the following forces according to<br />
recommendations in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49:<br />
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements<br />
from ambient and surface temperature changes.<br />
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material<br />
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each<br />
manufactured product and accessory.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim,<br />
including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between<br />
shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following:<br />
1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in<br />
<strong>Project</strong>.<br />
2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and<br />
dimensions.<br />
3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including<br />
layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.<br />
4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points.<br />
5. Details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and<br />
counterflashings as applicable.<br />
6. Details of special conditions.<br />
7. Details of connections to adjoining work.<br />
8. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.<br />
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessory<br />
indicated with factory-applied color finishes involving color selection.<br />
1. Sheet Metal Flashing: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual width of unit, including<br />
finished seam and in required profile. Include fasteners, cleats, clips, closures, and other<br />
attachments.<br />
2. Trim, Metal Closures, Expansion Joints, Joint Intersections, and Miscellaneous<br />
Fabrications: 12 inches (300 mm) long and in required profile. Include fasteners and<br />
other exposed accessories.<br />
3. Accessories and Miscellaneous Materials: Full-size Sample.<br />
D. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.<br />
E. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance<br />
manuals.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal<br />
flashing and trim similar to that required for this <strong>Project</strong> and whose products have a record of<br />
successful in-service performance.<br />
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal<br />
<strong>Manual</strong>" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.<br />
C. Copper Sheet Metal Standard: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook."<br />
Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to<br />
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.<br />
1. Build mockup of typical roof eave, including fascia, fascia trim, approximately 10 feet<br />
long, including supporting construction cleats, seams, attachments, underlayment, and<br />
accessories.<br />
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract<br />
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations<br />
in writing.<br />
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of<br />
Substantial Completion.<br />
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose<br />
work interfaces with or affects sheet metal flashing and trim including installers of<br />
roofing materials, roof accessories, unit skylights, and roof-mounted equipment.<br />
2. Review methods and procedures related to sheet metal flashing and trim.<br />
3. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and<br />
attachment to structural members.<br />
4. Review special roof details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs, and<br />
condition of other construction that will affect sheet metal flashing.<br />
5. Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish<br />
copy of record to each participant.<br />
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might<br />
cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials<br />
away from uncured concrete and masonry.<br />
B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to<br />
sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing<br />
and trim installation.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SHEET METALS<br />
A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a<br />
strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.<br />
B. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead-soft,<br />
fully annealed stainless-steel sheet of minimum uncoated thickness indicated; coated on both<br />
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
sides with a zinc-tin alloy (50 percent zinc, 50 percent tin), with factory-applied gray<br />
preweathering.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:<br />
a. Follansbee Steel; TCS II.<br />
C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip<br />
process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.<br />
1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation;<br />
structural quality.<br />
2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 coating<br />
designation, Grade 40; structural quality.<br />
3. Surface: Smooth, flat with manufacturer's standard clear acrylic coating on both sides.<br />
4. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:<br />
a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less<br />
than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply<br />
coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers'<br />
written instructions.<br />
5. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
6. Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or<br />
polyester backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a minimum total dry<br />
film thickness of 0.5 mil.<br />
2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS<br />
A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slipresisting<br />
polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt<br />
adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by<br />
underlayment manufacturer.<br />
1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F.<br />
2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970: passes after testing at minus 20 deg F.<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Rainproof 60 Plus and Ice & Water Guard as manufactured by<br />
ProtectoWrap Company, 1955 South Cherokee Street, Denver, Colorado 80233, 303-77-3001,<br />
Subject to compliance with requirements provide:<br />
a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT.<br />
b. Grace <strong>Construction</strong> Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra.<br />
c. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.<br />
d. Or other product acceptable to Manufacturer of metal panels.<br />
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings,<br />
separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing<br />
and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured<br />
item unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and<br />
bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by<br />
manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.<br />
1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.<br />
a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or<br />
factory-applied coating.<br />
b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for<br />
metal being fastened.<br />
c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching<br />
internal gutter width.<br />
2. Fasteners for Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.<br />
3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: Hotdip<br />
galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300<br />
stainless steel.<br />
C. Solder:<br />
1. For Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin.<br />
2. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50<br />
percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.<br />
D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant<br />
tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining<br />
tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.<br />
E. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant;<br />
polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited<br />
movement.<br />
2.4 MANUFACTURED SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM<br />
A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of<br />
separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factorymitered<br />
and -welded corners and junctions with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of<br />
same metal as reglet.<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide two part<br />
reglets as manufactured by Fry Reglet Corporation or comparable product by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Cheney Flashing Company.<br />
b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.<br />
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
c. Hickman, W. P. Company.<br />
d. Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; STF Sawtooth Flashing.<br />
e. Keystone Flashing Company, Inc.<br />
f. National Sheet Metal Systems, Inc.<br />
g. Sandell Manufacturing Company, Inc.<br />
2. Material: Galvanized steel, 0.022 inch thick.<br />
3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide with slotted holes for fastening to substrate, with<br />
neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top<br />
edge.<br />
4. Masonry Type: Provide with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint.<br />
5. Accessories:<br />
a. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure<br />
flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal<br />
counterflashing or where Drawings show reglet without metal counterflashing.<br />
b. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before<br />
counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge.<br />
6. Finish: With manufacturer's standard color coating.<br />
2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in<br />
SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal <strong>Manual</strong>" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry,<br />
metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to<br />
greatest extent possible.<br />
1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with<br />
performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.<br />
2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.<br />
3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool<br />
marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form<br />
hems.<br />
4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not<br />
allowed on faces exposed to view.<br />
B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to<br />
a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and<br />
within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.<br />
C. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric<br />
sealant.<br />
D. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion<br />
joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl<br />
sealant concealed within joints.<br />
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural<br />
Sheet Metal <strong>Manual</strong>" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less<br />
than thickness of metal being secured.<br />
F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams,<br />
and solder.<br />
G. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.<br />
2.6 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS<br />
A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch-long, but not<br />
exceeding 12-foot-long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate<br />
discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches beyond each side of wall<br />
openings. Form with 2-inch-high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from<br />
the following materials:<br />
1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.015 inch thick.<br />
B. Opening Flashings in Frame <strong>Construction</strong>: Fabricate head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to<br />
extend 4 inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch-high, end dams.<br />
Fabricate from the following materials:<br />
1. Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel: 0.022 inch thick.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations,<br />
dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.<br />
2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely<br />
anchored.<br />
B. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to<br />
performance of the Work.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install underlayment as indicated on Drawings.<br />
B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free.<br />
Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions<br />
of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing<br />
underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not<br />
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2<br />
inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in<br />
place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding<br />
rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to<br />
complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.<br />
1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform,<br />
neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.<br />
2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight<br />
performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating<br />
sheet metal.<br />
3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend<br />
tabs over fasteners.<br />
4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and<br />
tool marks.<br />
5. Install sealant tape where indicated.<br />
6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.<br />
7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.<br />
B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates,<br />
protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other<br />
permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.<br />
1. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood<br />
substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a<br />
course of polyethylene sheet.<br />
C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space<br />
movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or<br />
intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently<br />
watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep,<br />
filled with sealant concealed within joints.<br />
D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate metal decking not less than<br />
recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.<br />
E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.<br />
1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than<br />
1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient<br />
temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint<br />
members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for<br />
installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at<br />
temperatures below 40 deg F.<br />
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section<br />
"Joint Sealants."<br />
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges<br />
of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned<br />
surface would show in completed Work.<br />
1. Do not solder metallic-coated steel sheet.<br />
2. Pre-tinning is not required for zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel.<br />
3. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into<br />
joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.<br />
4. Copper Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated copper sheets using solder for copper.<br />
3.4 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet<br />
metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet<br />
Metal <strong>Manual</strong>." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as<br />
indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and<br />
weather resistant.<br />
B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations<br />
in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal <strong>Manual</strong>" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of<br />
roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.<br />
C. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations<br />
in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for specified wind zone and as indicated. Interlock<br />
bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at 16-inch<br />
centers.<br />
D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.<br />
Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend<br />
counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches<br />
and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of snap-in installation and<br />
sealant or lead wedges and sealant.<br />
E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation<br />
of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes<br />
that penetrate roof.<br />
3.5 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture<br />
according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall<br />
flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.<br />
B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 04<br />
Section "Unit Masonry."<br />
C. Reglets: Installation of reglets is specified in Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry."<br />
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Opening Flashings in Frame <strong>Construction</strong>: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar<br />
flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.<br />
3.6 ERECTION TOLERANCES<br />
A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance<br />
of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of<br />
adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.<br />
B. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances<br />
specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."<br />
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and<br />
weathering.<br />
B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.<br />
C. Clean off excess sealants.<br />
D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim<br />
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On<br />
completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a<br />
clean condition during construction.<br />
E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond<br />
successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.<br />
END OF SECTION 076200<br />
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls.<br />
2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.<br />
3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit MR2.2: For penetration firestopping sealants and sealant<br />
primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.<br />
C. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design<br />
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.<br />
1. Where <strong>Project</strong> conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting<br />
agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit<br />
illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping<br />
manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fireresistance-rated<br />
assembly.<br />
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.<br />
B. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in<br />
compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.<br />
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified<br />
testing agency, for penetration firestopping.<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in<br />
material, design, and extent to that indicated for this <strong>Project</strong>, whose work has resulted in<br />
construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the<br />
necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified<br />
requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to<br />
Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.<br />
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following<br />
requirements:<br />
1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to<br />
authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in<br />
"Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems complying with the following<br />
requirements:<br />
a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing<br />
and inspecting agency.<br />
b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations<br />
listed by the following:<br />
1) UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."<br />
2) Intertek ETL SEMKO in its "Directory of Listed Building Products."<br />
3) FM Global in its "Building Materials Approval Guide."<br />
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate<br />
temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when<br />
substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.<br />
B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural<br />
means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.<br />
1.7 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration<br />
firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.<br />
B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate<br />
penetration firestopping.<br />
C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping<br />
installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. A/D Fire Protection Systems Inc.<br />
2. Grace <strong>Construction</strong> Products.<br />
3. Hilti, Inc.<br />
4. Johns Manville.<br />
5. Nelson Firestop Products.<br />
6. NUCO Inc.<br />
7. Passive Fire Protection Partners.<br />
8. RectorSeal Corporation.<br />
9. Specified Technologies Inc.<br />
10. 3M Fire Protection Products.<br />
11. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Fire Protection Systems Group.<br />
12. USG Corporation.<br />
2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING<br />
A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according<br />
to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fireresistance<br />
rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be<br />
compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items<br />
if any.<br />
B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings<br />
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of<br />
0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).<br />
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire walls, smoke-barrier walls and fire partitions.<br />
2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.<br />
C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings<br />
determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of<br />
0.01-inch wg (2.49 Pa).<br />
1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies and ceiling membranes of<br />
roof/ceiling assemblies.<br />
2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions<br />
penetrated.<br />
3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions<br />
penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.<br />
D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per<br />
UL 1479.<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. (0.025 cu. m/s per sq. m) of penetration opening<br />
at 0.30-inch wg (74.7 Pa) at both ambient and elevated temperatures.<br />
E. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested<br />
according to UL 1479.<br />
F. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed<br />
indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.<br />
G. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the<br />
following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA<br />
Method 24):<br />
1. Sealants: 250 g/L.<br />
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.<br />
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.<br />
H. Low-Emitting Materials: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply<br />
with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services'<br />
"Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using<br />
Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
I. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to<br />
install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by<br />
penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency<br />
for firestopping indicated.<br />
1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following:<br />
a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation.<br />
b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to<br />
prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state.<br />
c. Fire-rated form board.<br />
d. Fillers for sealants.<br />
2. Temporary forming materials.<br />
3. Substrate primers.<br />
4. Collars.<br />
5. Steel sleeves.<br />
2.3 FILL MATERIALS<br />
A. Cast-in-Place Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled devices for use in cast-in-place concrete<br />
floors and consisting of an outer metallic sleeve lined with an intumescent strip, a radial<br />
extended flange attached to one end of the sleeve for fastening to concrete formwork, and a<br />
neoprene gasket.<br />
B. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during<br />
exposure to moisture.<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with<br />
intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.<br />
D. Intumescent Composite Sheets: Rigid panels consisting of aluminum-foil-faced elastomeric<br />
sheet bonded to galvanized-steel sheet.<br />
E. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents,<br />
inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.<br />
F. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum<br />
foil on one side.<br />
G. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement,<br />
fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at <strong>Project</strong> site to form a<br />
nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.<br />
H. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled<br />
with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant<br />
additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect<br />
pillows/bags from being easily removed.<br />
I. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand<br />
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.<br />
J. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of<br />
grade indicated below:<br />
1. Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal<br />
surfaces, and nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless<br />
indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.<br />
2.4 MIXING<br />
A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping<br />
manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required),<br />
type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other<br />
items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance<br />
characteristics for application indicated.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting<br />
performance of the Work.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to<br />
comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements:<br />
1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials<br />
that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping.<br />
2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable<br />
of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles<br />
remaining from cleaning operation.<br />
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.<br />
B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that<br />
manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not<br />
allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.<br />
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining<br />
surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be<br />
permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains.<br />
Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation<br />
instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.<br />
B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during<br />
their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths<br />
required to achieve fire ratings indicated.<br />
1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible<br />
forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of<br />
firestopping.<br />
C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:<br />
1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and<br />
penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.<br />
2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and<br />
penetrating items.<br />
3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce<br />
smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.<br />
3.4 IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels<br />
permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of firestopping edge so labels<br />
will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to<br />
surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:<br />
1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building<br />
Management of Any Damage."<br />
2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number.<br />
3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency.<br />
4. Date of installation.<br />
5. Manufacturer's name.<br />
6. Installer's name.<br />
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.<br />
B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of<br />
testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.<br />
C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection<br />
reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.<br />
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with<br />
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and<br />
that do not damage materials in which openings occur.<br />
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that<br />
penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.<br />
If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove<br />
damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems<br />
complying with specified requirements.<br />
3.7 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE<br />
A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire<br />
Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.<br />
B. Where Intertek ETL SEMKO-listed systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers in<br />
Intertek ETL SEMKO's "Directory of Listed Building Products" under "Firestop Systems."<br />
C. Where FM Global-approved systems are indicated, they refer to design numbers listed in FM<br />
Global's "Building Materials Approval Guide" under "Wall and Floor Penetration Fire Stops."<br />
END OF SECTION 078413<br />
PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Silicone joint sealants.<br />
2. Urethane joint sealants.<br />
3. Polysulfide joint sealants.<br />
4. Latex joint sealants.<br />
5. Solvent-release-curing joint sealants.<br />
6. Preformed joint sealants.<br />
7. Acoustical joint sealants.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glazing sealants.<br />
2. Division 09 Section "Tiling" for sealing tile joints.<br />
3. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Panel Ceilings" for sealing edge moldings at perimeters<br />
with acoustical sealant.<br />
C. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to<br />
<strong>Project</strong> joint substrates as follows:<br />
1. Locate test joints where indicated on <strong>Project</strong> or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.<br />
2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below:<br />
a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated.<br />
3. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be<br />
erected.<br />
4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative<br />
present.<br />
a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant<br />
Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail<br />
Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.<br />
1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate<br />
separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side.<br />
Repeat procedure for opposite side.<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include<br />
data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants<br />
that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.<br />
6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing<br />
adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with<br />
requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to<br />
joint substrates during testing.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit MR-2.0: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the<br />
weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content.<br />
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants<br />
showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.<br />
D. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples<br />
with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-)<br />
long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.<br />
E. Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:<br />
1. Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.<br />
2. Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.<br />
3. Joint-sealant formulation.<br />
4. Joint-sealant color.<br />
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer.<br />
B. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each<br />
sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program.<br />
C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified<br />
testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements.<br />
D. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer,<br />
indicating the following:<br />
1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for<br />
compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants.<br />
2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate<br />
preparation needed for adhesion.<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation<br />
methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in<br />
"Preconstruction Testing" Article.<br />
F. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.<br />
G. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single<br />
manufacturer.<br />
B. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated<br />
to receive joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods<br />
specified in this Section.<br />
C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:<br />
1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by jointsealant<br />
manufacturer or are below 40 deg F (5 deg C).<br />
2. When joint substrates are wet.<br />
3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for<br />
applications indicated.<br />
4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed<br />
from joint substrates.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL<br />
A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible<br />
with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as<br />
demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.<br />
B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the<br />
weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when<br />
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):<br />
1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L.<br />
2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L.<br />
3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Low-Emitting Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing<br />
system shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of<br />
Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various<br />
Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
D. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for<br />
each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920<br />
classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.<br />
1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints<br />
that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone<br />
testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water,<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
E. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous<br />
substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have<br />
not stained porous joint substrates indicated for <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
F. Suitability for Contact with Food: Where sealants are indicated for joints that will come in<br />
repeated contact with food, provide products that comply with 21 CFR 177.2600.<br />
G. Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS<br />
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S,<br />
Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790 NS Parking Structure Sealant.<br />
b. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.<br />
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 290.<br />
d. Pecora Corporation; 301 NS.<br />
e. Sika Corporation, <strong>Construction</strong> Products Division; SikaSil-C990.<br />
f. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.<br />
B. Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:<br />
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100/50, for Use T.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 890-SL.<br />
b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 728 SG.<br />
c. Pecora Corporation;300 SL.<br />
d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 900 SL.<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant:<br />
ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Pecora Corporation; 898.<br />
D. Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,<br />
Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated<br />
into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus.<br />
b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant.<br />
c. GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; Sanitary SCS1700.<br />
d. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex Sil 100 WF.<br />
e. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.<br />
2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS<br />
A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,<br />
Class 100/50, for Use NT.<br />
B. Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S,<br />
Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:<br />
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP1.<br />
b. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex PUR 40 FC.<br />
c. Pacific Polymers International, Inc.; Elasto-Thane 230 Type II.<br />
d. Sika Corporation, <strong>Construction</strong> Products Division; Sikaflex - 1a.<br />
e. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116.<br />
2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS<br />
A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP,<br />
Grade NF.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:<br />
a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolac.<br />
b. Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 600.<br />
c. May National Associates, Inc.; Bondaflex 600.<br />
d. Pecora Corporation; AC-20+.<br />
e. Schnee-Morehead, Inc.; SM 8200.<br />
f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.5 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS<br />
A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant<br />
complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through<br />
perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative<br />
assemblies according to ASTM E 90.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:<br />
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR, AIS-919.<br />
b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.<br />
2.6 JOINT SEALANT BACKING<br />
A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint<br />
substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated<br />
by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.<br />
B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface<br />
skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing<br />
optimum sealant performance.<br />
C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant<br />
manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or<br />
joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.<br />
2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of<br />
sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate<br />
tests and field tests.<br />
B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants<br />
and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or<br />
harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to<br />
promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.<br />
C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces<br />
adjacent to joints.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting jointsealant<br />
performance.<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to<br />
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:<br />
1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of<br />
joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and<br />
approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint<br />
sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.<br />
2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a<br />
combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing<br />
optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning<br />
operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.<br />
Porous joint substrates include the following:<br />
a. Concrete.<br />
b. Masonry.<br />
c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.<br />
d. Exterior insulation and finish systems.<br />
3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.<br />
4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do<br />
not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint<br />
sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following:<br />
a. Metal.<br />
b. Glass.<br />
c. Porcelain enamel.<br />
d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.<br />
B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as<br />
indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to<br />
comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of jointsealant<br />
bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.<br />
C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with<br />
adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or<br />
by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling<br />
without disturbing joint seal.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS<br />
A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products<br />
and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.<br />
B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint<br />
sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position<br />
required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint<br />
widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.<br />
1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.<br />
2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.<br />
3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and<br />
replace them with dry materials.<br />
D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants<br />
and backs of joints.<br />
E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time<br />
backings are installed:<br />
1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.<br />
2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.<br />
3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow<br />
optimum sealant movement capability.<br />
F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or<br />
curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form<br />
smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure<br />
contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.<br />
1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.<br />
2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not<br />
discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.<br />
3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193.<br />
5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per<br />
Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.<br />
a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.<br />
G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements:<br />
1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system.<br />
2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with<br />
preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a<br />
bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch (10 mm). Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch (6<br />
mm) inside masking tape.<br />
3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet<br />
extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform<br />
contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.<br />
4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical<br />
joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion<br />
with a razor knife.<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
H. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal<br />
construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a<br />
continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at<br />
perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's<br />
written recommendations.<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:<br />
1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:<br />
a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length for each kind of<br />
sealant and joint substrate.<br />
b. Perform 1 test for each 1000 feet (300 m) of joint length thereafter or 1 test per<br />
each floor per elevation.<br />
2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint<br />
Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in<br />
ASTM C 1521.<br />
a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;<br />
extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure<br />
for opposite side.<br />
3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following:<br />
a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.<br />
b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified<br />
requirements.<br />
c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint<br />
substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind<br />
of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion<br />
passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.<br />
4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were<br />
installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints<br />
were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration,<br />
and sealant dimensions.<br />
5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures<br />
used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new<br />
sealant contacts original sealant.<br />
B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from<br />
testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory.<br />
Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other<br />
requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated<br />
requirements.<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.5 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods<br />
and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of<br />
products in which joints occur.<br />
3.6 PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances<br />
and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without<br />
deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage<br />
or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately<br />
so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.<br />
END OF SECTION 079200<br />
JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Solid-core doors.<br />
2. Shop priming Factory finishing flush wood doors.<br />
3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction<br />
and trim for openings.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;<br />
construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and<br />
other pertinent data.<br />
1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.<br />
2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts.<br />
3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching.<br />
C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is certified for chain of custody by<br />
an FSC-accredited certification body.<br />
B. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors and wood paneling from single manufacturer.<br />
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's "Architectural<br />
Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."<br />
1. Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels or an AWI letter of licensing for <strong>Project</strong><br />
indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades specified.<br />
D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.<br />
C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and<br />
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and<br />
maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the<br />
remainder of the construction period.<br />
B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and<br />
weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and<br />
maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and relative humidity between 17 and 50<br />
percent during the remainder of the construction period.<br />
1.7 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.<br />
b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch<br />
span.<br />
2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair<br />
or replacement of defective doors.<br />
3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.<br />
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.<br />
2. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company.<br />
3. Vancouver Door Company.<br />
4. VT Industries Inc.<br />
5. Simpson.<br />
2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL<br />
A. Low-Emitting Materials: Provide doors made with adhesives and composite wood products that<br />
do not contain urea formaldehyde.<br />
2.3 VENEERED-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH<br />
A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:<br />
1. Grade: Custom Grade A faces.<br />
2. Species: Select white birch.<br />
3. Cut: Plain sliced (flat sliced).<br />
4. Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.<br />
5. Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces: Balance match.<br />
6. Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening or separated only by<br />
mullions.<br />
7. Room Match: Match door faces within each separate room or area of building.<br />
8. Room Match: Provide door faces of compatible color and grain within each separate<br />
room or area of building.<br />
9. Exposed Vertical and Top Edges: Same species as faces or a compatible species.<br />
10. Core: Either glued wood stave or structural composite lumber.<br />
11. <strong>Construction</strong>: Seven plies, either bonded or nonbonded construction.<br />
12. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.<br />
2.4 FABRICATION<br />
A. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply<br />
with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings,<br />
DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates.<br />
B. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory.<br />
1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.<br />
2. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with<br />
applicable requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing."<br />
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.5 SHOP PRIMING<br />
A. Doors for Transparent Finish: Shop prime doors with stain (if required), other required<br />
pretreatments, and first coat of finish as specified in Division 09 Section "Exterior.” “ Painting<br />
Interior Painting." Seal all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with first coat of finish.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.<br />
1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing<br />
characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.<br />
2. Reject doors with defects.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."<br />
B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and<br />
the referenced quality standard, and as indicated.<br />
C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated<br />
below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for firerated<br />
doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises<br />
after fitting and machining.<br />
1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8<br />
inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise<br />
indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door<br />
to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Bevel non-fire rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges.<br />
3.3 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.<br />
B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements.<br />
Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence<br />
of repair or refinishing.<br />
END OF SECTION 081416<br />
FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 083613 - SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.0 PAYMENT PROCEDURES: Notice of Extended Payment Provision. This contract<br />
requires the Owner to make payment within 45 days after submission of an undisputed<br />
request for payment.<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes aluminum-framed sectional overhead doors.<br />
B. See Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for lock cylinders and keying.<br />
1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Structural Performance: Provide doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity<br />
loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation<br />
of components:<br />
1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward<br />
and outward.<br />
2. Operational Life: Design components to operate for not less than 100,000<br />
cycles.<br />
a. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle begins with door in closed position.<br />
Door is then moved to open position and back to closed position.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each product indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details of installation, and<br />
attachments to other Work.<br />
1. Verify openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate<br />
measurements on Shop Drawings.<br />
C. Samples: For each exposed finish.<br />
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with<br />
specified requirements.<br />
E. Manufacturers' Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with<br />
requirements specified in "Quality Assurance" Article. On request, submit evidence of<br />
manufacturing experience.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized<br />
representative of the sectional overhead door manufacturer for both installation and<br />
maintenance of units required for this <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing sectional<br />
overhead doors similar to those indicated for this <strong>Project</strong> and with a record of successful<br />
in-service performance.<br />
C. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional overhead doors through one source from a single<br />
manufacturer.<br />
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of<br />
sectional overhead doors and accessories and are based on the specific system indicated.<br />
Other manufacturers' systems with equal performance and dimensional characteristics<br />
may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section "Substitutions."<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for sectional overhead door is based on Series<br />
521 Aluminum Sectional Door as Manufactured by Overhead Door. Subject to<br />
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by<br />
one of the following:<br />
1. Haas Door Co.<br />
2. Overhead Door Corporation.<br />
3. Raynor Garage Doors.<br />
4. Wayne-Dalton Corp.<br />
5. Windsor Door; a United Dominion Company.<br />
2.2 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS<br />
A. Fabricate door sections from extruded-aluminum shapes, ASTM B 221; alloy and<br />
temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish<br />
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
indicated; with wall thickness not less than 0.065 inch for door section 1-3/4 inches<br />
deep.<br />
1. Join stiles and rails by welding or with concealed, 1/4-inch- minimum-diameter,<br />
aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless-steel through bolts, full height of door<br />
section.<br />
2. Form meeting rails to provide a weathertight-seal joint.<br />
3. Reinforce for hardware attachment.<br />
B. Aluminum Panels: Fabricate from aluminum sheet, ASTM B 209; alloy and temper<br />
recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated;<br />
not less than 0.050 inch thick, alloy 6063-T6; set in continuous rubber or neoprene<br />
glazing gasket with aluminum stop.<br />
C. Aluminum Finish: Manufacturer's standard powder coat.<br />
1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect’s sample .<br />
2.3 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Tracks: Galvanized steel track system complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60<br />
zinc coating, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated.<br />
1. Provide complete track assembly including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement<br />
for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size.<br />
2. Slot vertical sections of track at 2 inches o.c. for door-drop safety device.<br />
3. Slope tracks at proper angle from vertical or otherwise design to ensure tight<br />
closure at jambs when door unit is closed.<br />
4. Weld or bolt to track supports.<br />
B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized steel and support members, complying<br />
with ASTM A 36/A 36M and ASTM A 123. Secure, reinforce, and support tracks as<br />
required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag, sway, and<br />
vibration during opening and closing of doors.<br />
C. Support and attach tracks to opening jambs with continuous angle welded to tracks and<br />
attached to wall. Support horizontal (ceiling) tracks with continuous angle welded to<br />
track and supported by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members at<br />
curve and end of tracks.<br />
D. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping<br />
gaskets of rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom, jamb and at top of overhead door.<br />
1. Jamb Seals: Continuous flexible seals at door jambs for weathertight installation.<br />
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Windows: With removable stops of same material as door section frames.<br />
1. Metal-Framed Doors: Set glazing in rubber, or neoprene glazing channel.<br />
2. Size: Manufacturer's standard panel for type of glazing indicated.<br />
3. Clear ½” tempered thermal pane.<br />
2.4 HARDWARE<br />
A. General: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainlesssteel,<br />
or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.<br />
B. Hinges: Heavy-duty galvanized steel hinges, of not less than 0.0747-inch- thick<br />
uncoated steel, at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, per manufacturer's<br />
written recommendations for door size.<br />
1. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or<br />
lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is<br />
not possible.<br />
2. Use double-end hinges, where required, for doors exceeding 16 feet in width,<br />
unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.<br />
C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rollers, with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races,<br />
mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track.<br />
1. Double Hinges: Extend roller shaft through both hinges.<br />
a. Tire Material: Case-hardened steel.<br />
D. Locking Device: Fabricate assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating<br />
handle, cam plate, and adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks.<br />
1. Locking Bars: Full-disc Cremone type, both jamb sides.<br />
a. Operation: From inside only .<br />
2. Lock Cylinder: As specified in Division 8 Section "Door Hardware."<br />
E. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.<br />
2.5 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM<br />
A. Torsion Spring: Operation by counterbalance mechanism with adjustable-tension<br />
torsion springs, fabricated from oil-tempered-steel wire complying with<br />
ASTM A 229/A 229M, Class II, mounted on cross-header tube or steel shaft. Connect<br />
to door with galvanized aircraft-type lift cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1.<br />
Calibrate springs for 100,000 cycles minimum.<br />
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Cable Drums: Cast-aluminum castings grooved to receive cable. Mount<br />
counterbalance mechanism with ball-bearing brackets at each end of shaft.<br />
1. Include one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long.<br />
2. Include two additional brackets at 1/3 points to support shafts more than 16 feet<br />
long, unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer.<br />
C. Cable Safety Device: Spring-loaded, bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller<br />
assembly on each side, designed to automatically stop door if either cable breaks.<br />
D. Bracket: Anchor support bracket, as required to connect stationary end of spring to the<br />
wall, to level shaft and prevent sag.<br />
E. Spring Bumper: Include at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening<br />
operation.<br />
2.6 MANUAL DOOR OPERATORS<br />
A. Reduction-Drive Chain-Hoist Operator: Side-mounted unit with endless steel hand<br />
chain, chain pocket wheel with at least 3:1 reduction unit, and roller chain and sprocket<br />
drive or suitable gearing, end mounted on counterbalance shaft; operating with not more<br />
than 35-lbf pull.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install door, track, and operating equipment complete with necessary<br />
hardware, jamb and head mold strips, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment<br />
supports.<br />
B. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24 inches o.c. Double hang<br />
horizontal track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers welded<br />
and bolt fastened in place. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement<br />
as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment.<br />
C. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts; adjust doors to operate easily, free from warp,<br />
twist, or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter.<br />
3.2 DEMONSTRATION<br />
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance<br />
personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain doors. Refer to Division 1 Section 01700<br />
"Contract Closeout."<br />
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
END OF SECTION 08361<br />
SECTIONAL DOORS 083613 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Exterior storefront framing.<br />
2. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.<br />
3. Interior storefront framing.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 8 Section “Aluminum Windows” for operable windows as part of this<br />
completed system.<br />
2. Division 8 Section “Glazing” for glass as part of this completed system.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. ADA/ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance<br />
Board's "Americans with Disability Act (ADA) and Architectural Barriers Act (ABA)<br />
Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."<br />
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following<br />
performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective<br />
manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction:<br />
1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to,<br />
story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.<br />
2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction.<br />
3. Failure includes the following:<br />
a. Deflection exceeding specified limits.<br />
b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.<br />
c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and<br />
structural movements to glazing.<br />
d. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements.<br />
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Structural Loads:<br />
e. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.<br />
f. Sealant failure.<br />
g. Failure of operating units.<br />
1. Wind Loads:<br />
a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph.<br />
b. Importance Factor: 1.15.<br />
c. Exposure Category: C.<br />
2. Seismic Loads:<br />
a. Size Class D.<br />
b. Importance Factor: 1.25.<br />
C. Deflection of Framing Members:<br />
1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to<br />
glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite<br />
or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch,<br />
whichever is less.<br />
2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch,<br />
whichever is smaller.<br />
D. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to<br />
ASTM E 330 as follows:<br />
1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not<br />
evidence deflection exceeding specified limits.<br />
2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems,<br />
including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent<br />
deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.<br />
3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not fewer than 10 seconds.<br />
E. Air Infiltration: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed<br />
glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to<br />
ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..<br />
F. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not<br />
evidence water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to<br />
ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load<br />
design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..<br />
G. Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not<br />
evidence water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to<br />
AAMA 501.1 under dynamic pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design<br />
pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft.<br />
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating aluminum-framed systems<br />
or water appearing on systems' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other<br />
than condensation. Water leakage does not include water controlled by flashing and<br />
gutters that is drained to exterior and water that cannot damage adjacent materials or<br />
finishes.<br />
H. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements<br />
resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures.<br />
Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain<br />
and nighttime-sky heat loss.<br />
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.<br />
2. Test Performance: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing,<br />
anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to<br />
AAMA 501.5.<br />
a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metalsurface<br />
temperature of 180 deg F.<br />
b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F.<br />
3. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 68 deg F.<br />
I. Condensation Resistance: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing<br />
areas having condensation-resistance factor (CRF) of not less than 53 when tested according to<br />
AAMA 1503.<br />
J. Sound Transmission: Provide aluminum-framed systems with fixed glazing and framing areas<br />
having the following sound-transmission characteristics:<br />
1. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Minimum 35 STC when tested for laboratory sound<br />
transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E 413.<br />
2. Outdoor-Indoor Transmission Class (OITC): Minimum 34 OITC when tested for<br />
laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by ASTM E<br />
1332.<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material<br />
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for aluminumframed<br />
systems.<br />
B. LEED Submittal:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit EQ: For adhesives and sealants used inside of the<br />
weatherproofing system, including printed statement of VOC content.<br />
C. Shop Drawings: For all aluminum-framed systems. Include plans, elevations, sections, details,<br />
and attachments to other work.<br />
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Include details of provisions for system expansion and contraction and for drainage of<br />
moisture in the system to the exterior.<br />
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard<br />
sizes.<br />
E. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed systems,<br />
made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following:<br />
1. Joinery, including concealed welds.<br />
2. Anchorage.<br />
3. Expansion provisions.<br />
4. Glazing.<br />
5. Flashing and drainage.<br />
F. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed systems indicated to comply with<br />
performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the<br />
qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.<br />
1. Detail fabrication and assembly of aluminum-framed systems.<br />
2. Include design calculations.<br />
G. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and testing agency.<br />
H. Welding certificates.<br />
I. Preconstruction Test Reports: For sealant.<br />
J. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified<br />
testing agency, for aluminum-framed systems, indicating compliance with performance<br />
requirements.<br />
K. Source quality-control reports.<br />
L. Field quality-control reports.<br />
M. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed systems to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
N. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved<br />
for installation of units required for this <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
1. Installer must have a minimum of 5 years of installations of similar systems and sizes within the<br />
last 7 years.<br />
B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.<br />
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for aluminum-framed systems, including Shop<br />
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in systems<br />
similar to those indicated for this <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for<br />
systems' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are indicated by<br />
dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate<br />
to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are<br />
indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction<br />
testing, field testing, and in-service performance.<br />
1. Do not revise intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with<br />
Architect's approval. If revisions are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data<br />
to Architect for review.<br />
E. Source Limitations for Aluminum-Framed Systems: Obtain from single source from single<br />
manufacturer.<br />
F. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.2, "Structural<br />
Welding Code - Aluminum."<br />
G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to<br />
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.<br />
1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings.<br />
2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract<br />
Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations<br />
in writing.<br />
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of<br />
Substantial Completion.<br />
H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed<br />
systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop<br />
Drawings.<br />
1.8 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that<br />
fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.<br />
b. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements.<br />
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal<br />
weathering.<br />
d. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas.<br />
e. Failure of operating components.<br />
2. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair<br />
or replace components on which finishes do not comply with requirements or that fail in<br />
materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Warranty does not include normal<br />
weathering.<br />
1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE<br />
A. Entrance Door Hardware:<br />
1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance<br />
instructions as needed for Owner’s continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and<br />
replacement of entrance door hardware.<br />
2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months’ full<br />
maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly<br />
preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,<br />
cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rate speed and<br />
capacity. Provide parts and supplies the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of<br />
original equipment.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Trifab Versa<br />
Glaze”, 451/452.T Series and comparable non-thermally broken products for interior use, as<br />
manufactured by Tubelite or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. EFCO Corporation.<br />
2. Kawneer North America; an Alcoa company.<br />
3. Tubelite.<br />
4. Vistawall Architectural Products; The Vistawall Group; a Bluescope Steel company.<br />
2.2 MATERIALS<br />
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.<br />
2. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.<br />
3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429.<br />
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.<br />
5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.10/A5.10M.<br />
B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying<br />
with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and<br />
pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-<br />
SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.<br />
1. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.<br />
3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.<br />
2.3 FRAMING SYSTEMS<br />
A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness<br />
required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong>: Thermally broken.<br />
2. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.<br />
3. Glazing Plane: Center.<br />
B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with<br />
nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.<br />
C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining,<br />
nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.<br />
1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from<br />
thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.<br />
2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.<br />
D. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts,<br />
complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M.<br />
E. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding<br />
flashing compatible with adjacent materials.<br />
F. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by<br />
manufacturer for joint type.<br />
1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of<br />
250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
2.4 GLAZING SYSTEMS<br />
A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."<br />
2.5 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS<br />
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.<br />
1. Door <strong>Construction</strong>: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick, extrudedaluminum<br />
tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets<br />
that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.<br />
a. Thermal <strong>Construction</strong>: High-performance plastic connectors separate aluminum members<br />
exposed to the exterior from members exposed to the interior.<br />
2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width.<br />
a. Accessible Doors: Smooth surfaced for width of door in area within 10 inches above floor<br />
or ground plane.<br />
3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.<br />
a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.<br />
B. Entrance Door Hardware: As specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."<br />
2.6 ACCESSORY MATERIALS<br />
A. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in<br />
Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."<br />
1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of<br />
250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
B. Self-adhering double-sided SBS modified rubberized asphalt waterproof membrane.<br />
1. Basis-of-design product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Jiffy Seal<br />
500 as manufactured by Protecto Wrap Company, 1955 S. Cherokee St., Denver, CO<br />
80223, 1-800-759-9727 or equal.<br />
2.7 FABRICATION<br />
A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.<br />
B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration<br />
of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or<br />
grinding.<br />
C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following<br />
characteristics:<br />
1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.<br />
2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.<br />
3. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture<br />
migrating within the system to exterior.<br />
4. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.<br />
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
5. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to<br />
maintain required glazing edge clearances.<br />
6. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from interior.<br />
7. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest<br />
extent possible.<br />
D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.<br />
E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system.<br />
F. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in <strong>Project</strong> according to<br />
Shop Drawings.<br />
G. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for<br />
installing entrance door hardware.<br />
H. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.<br />
I. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent<br />
possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.<br />
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES<br />
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General:<br />
1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
2. Do not install damaged components.<br />
3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.<br />
4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.<br />
5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic<br />
deterioration.<br />
6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Metal Protection:<br />
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by<br />
painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing<br />
nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose.<br />
2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting<br />
contact surfaces with bituminous paint.<br />
C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing<br />
members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior.<br />
D. Peal and stick double-sided bitumen at window sill condition per manufacturer’s written<br />
instructions.<br />
E. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section<br />
"Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.<br />
F. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without<br />
warp or rack.<br />
G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.<br />
1. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware<br />
according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners<br />
to greatest extent possible.<br />
H. Install aluminum operable windows in frame per Division 8 Section “Aluminum Windows.”<br />
I. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing."<br />
3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES<br />
A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances:<br />
1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet;<br />
1/4 inch over total length.<br />
2. Alignment:<br />
a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.<br />
b. Where surfaces meet at corners, limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch.<br />
B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch.<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Repair or remove work if test results and inspections indicate that it does not comply with<br />
specified requirements.<br />
B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine<br />
compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.<br />
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Aluminum-framed assemblies will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and<br />
inspections.<br />
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.<br />
3.5 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by<br />
manufacturer.<br />
1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3-<br />
second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches<br />
from the latch, measured to the leading door edge.<br />
END OF SECTION 084113<br />
ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS 084113 - 11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 085113 - ALUMINUM WINDOWS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes aluminum-framed operable windows for exterior locations.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts" for coordinating<br />
finish among aluminum fenestration units.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:<br />
1. C: Commercial.<br />
B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:<br />
1. Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural<br />
test pressure and water test pressure.<br />
C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the<br />
design pressure.<br />
D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size).<br />
Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to<br />
comply with requirements for performance class.<br />
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General: Provide aluminum windows capable of complying with performance requirements<br />
indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified,<br />
and that are of minimum test size indicated below:<br />
1. Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for gateway performance for both<br />
gateway performance and optional performance grade.<br />
2. Size indicated on Drawings.<br />
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Structural Performance: Provide aluminum windows capable of withstanding the effects of the<br />
following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for <strong>Project</strong> that pass<br />
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test:<br />
1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to <strong>Project</strong> from basic wind<br />
speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7,<br />
Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade<br />
indicated on Drawings.<br />
a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph.<br />
b. Importance Factor: 1.15<br />
c. Exposure Category: C.<br />
2. Deflection: Design glass framing system to limit lateral deflections of glass edges to less<br />
than 1/175 of glass-edge length or 3/4 inch, whichever is less, at design pressure based on<br />
testing performed according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load<br />
Deflection Test or structural computations.<br />
C. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum windows, including anchorage, that allow for thermal<br />
movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface<br />
temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of<br />
joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering<br />
calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky<br />
heat loss.<br />
1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces.<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods,<br />
dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating<br />
instructions for each type of aluminum window indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other<br />
work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following:<br />
1. Joinery details.<br />
2. Expansion provisions.<br />
3. Flashing and drainage details.<br />
4. Weather-stripping details.<br />
5. Thermal-break details.<br />
6. Glazing details.<br />
7. Window cleaning provisions.<br />
8. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis<br />
data prepared by or under the supervision of a qualified professional engineer detailing<br />
fabrication and assembly of aluminum windows and used to determine the following:<br />
a. Structural test pressures and design pressures from wind loads indicated.<br />
b. Deflection limitations of glass framing systems.<br />
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Samples for Verification: For aluminum windows and components required, prepared on<br />
Samples of size indicated below.<br />
1. Operable Window: Full-size unit with factory-applied finish.<br />
2. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finishes.<br />
3. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- long sections.<br />
D. Product Schedule: For aluminum windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.<br />
E. Qualification Data: For Installer, manufacturer and testing agency.<br />
F. Field quality-control test reports.<br />
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performedby a qualified<br />
testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of aluminum window. Test results based on<br />
use of downsized test units will not be accepted.<br />
H. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, operating hardware, weather stripping and<br />
finishes to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
I. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to aluminum window manufacturer for<br />
installation of units required for this <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
1. Installer's responsibilities include providing professional engineering services needed to<br />
assume engineering responsibility.<br />
2. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of data for aluminum windows, including Shop<br />
Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in<br />
assemblies similar to those indicated for this <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating aluminum windows that<br />
meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by<br />
inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.<br />
C. Source Limitations: Obtain aluminum windows through one source from a single manufacturer.<br />
D. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for<br />
aluminum windows' aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects are<br />
indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies<br />
as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction. Performance<br />
characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including<br />
preconstruction testing, field testing, and in-service performance.<br />
E. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of aluminum<br />
windows and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 1 Section "Product<br />
Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.<br />
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with<br />
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory<br />
data to Architect for review.<br />
F. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American<br />
Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass<br />
Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components,<br />
accessories, and fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.<br />
1. Provide AAMA, WDMA-certified aluminum windows with an attached label.<br />
G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and<br />
with GANA's "Glazing <strong>Manual</strong>" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.<br />
H. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to<br />
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.<br />
1. Build mockup for type(s) of window(s) indicated, in location(s) shown on Drawings.<br />
I. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site to comply with requirements in<br />
Division 1 Section "<strong>Project</strong> Management and Coordination."<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Verify aluminum window openings by field measurements before<br />
fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.<br />
1.8 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace aluminum windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty<br />
period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.<br />
b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or<br />
condensation.<br />
c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.<br />
d. Deterioration of metals, other materials, and metal finishes beyond normal<br />
weathering.<br />
e. Failure of insulating glass.<br />
2. Warranty Period:<br />
a. Window: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
b. Glazing: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
c. Metal Finish: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Trifab Versa Glaze<br />
451/451T as manufactured by Kawneer, an Alcoa Company.<br />
1. Tubelite, Inc.<br />
2.2 WINDOW<br />
A. Window Type: As indicated on Drawings.<br />
B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide aluminum windows of performance<br />
indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS unless more stringent performance<br />
requirements are indicated.<br />
1. Performance Class and Grade: AW 65 (2700) and AW 40 (3500).<br />
C. Condensation-Resistance Factor (CRF): Provide aluminum windows tested for thermal<br />
performance according to AAMA 1503, showing a CRF of 54 (2700) and 55 (3500).<br />
D. Thermal Transmittance: Provide aluminum windows with a whole-window, U-factor maximum<br />
indicated at 15-mph exterior wind velocity and winter condition temperatures when tested<br />
according to ASTM E 1423 NFRC 100.<br />
E. Sound Transmission Class (STC): Provide glazed windows rated for not less than 35 STC<br />
when tested for laboratory sound transmission loss according to ASTM E 90 and determined by<br />
ASTM E 413.<br />
2.3 GLAZING<br />
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 8 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing<br />
requirements applicable to glazed aluminum window units.<br />
2.4 HARDWARE<br />
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel,<br />
carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with<br />
aluminum; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock aluminum windows,<br />
and sized to accommodate sash or ventilator weight and dimensions. Do not use aluminum in<br />
frictional contact with other metals. Where exposed, provide die-cast zinc with special coating<br />
finish or nonmagnetic stainless steel.<br />
B. Sill Cap/Track: Extruded-aluminum track with natural anodized finish, of thickness,<br />
dimensions, and profile indicated; designed to comply with performance requirements indicated<br />
and to drain to the exterior.<br />
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Locks and Latches: Designed to allow unobstructed movement of the sash across adjacent sash<br />
in direction indicated and operated from the inside only.<br />
D. Roller Assemblies: Low-friction design.<br />
E. Gear-Type Rotary Operators: Comply with AAMA 901 when tested according to<br />
ASTM E 405, Method A.<br />
1. Operation Function: All ventilators move simultaneously and securely close at both<br />
jambs without using additional manually controlled locking devices.<br />
F. Four- or Six-Bar Friction Hinges: Comply with AAMA 904.<br />
1. Locking mechanism and handles for manual operation.<br />
2. Friction Shoes: Provide friction shoes of nylon or other nonabrasive, nonstaining,<br />
noncorrosive, durable material.<br />
G. Limit Devices: Provide limit devices designed to restrict sash or ventilator opening.<br />
1. Safety Devices: Limit clear opening to 6 inches for ventilation; with custodial key<br />
release.<br />
H. Horizontal-Sliding Windows: Provide the following operating hardware:<br />
1. Sash Rollers: Stainless-steel, lubricated ball-bearing rollers with nylon tires.<br />
2. Sash Lock: Cam-action sweep sash lock and keeper at meeting rails.<br />
3. Limit Device: Sash stop limit device; mounted in bottom of pull stile.<br />
4. Removable Lift-Out Sash: Design windows and provide with tamperproof, key-operated<br />
hardware to permit removal of sash from inside for cleaning.<br />
I. <strong>Project</strong>ed Awning Windows: Provide the following operating hardware:<br />
1. Operator: Gear-type rotary operator located on jamb at sill.<br />
a. Handle: Standard crank.<br />
2. Hinge: Concealed four- or six-bar friction hinge located on each jamb near top rail; two<br />
per ventilator.<br />
3. Lock: Pole-operated, face-mounted transom latch and keeper.<br />
4. Limit Device: Concealed friction adjustor, adjustable stay bar limit device; located on<br />
jamb of each ventilator.<br />
5. Extended pole crank device for operating tall windows.<br />
2.5 INSECT SCREENS<br />
A. General: Design windows and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting, removable<br />
arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect screens to<br />
fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on outside of window and provide for each<br />
operable exterior sash or ventilator.<br />
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for<br />
Windows," for minimum standards of appearance, fabrication, attachment of screen<br />
fabric, hardware, and accessories unless more stringent requirements are indicated.<br />
B. Aluminum Wire Fabric: 18-by-16 mesh of 0.011-inch- diameter, coated aluminum wire.<br />
1. Wire-Fabric Finish: Mill Finish.<br />
C. Wickets: Provide sliding or hinged wickets, framed and trimmed for a tight fit and for<br />
durability during handling.<br />
2.6 FABRICATION<br />
A. Fabricate aluminum windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling<br />
components and anchoring windows.<br />
B. Fabricate aluminum windows that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator framing.<br />
C. Thermally Improved <strong>Construction</strong>: Fabricate aluminum windows with an integral, concealed,<br />
low-conductance thermal barrier; located between exterior materials and window members<br />
exposed on interior side; in a manner that eliminates direct metal-to-metal contact.<br />
1. Provide thermal-break construction that has been in use for not less than three years and<br />
has been tested to demonstrate resistance to thermal conductance and condensation and to<br />
show adequate strength and security of glass retention.<br />
2. Provide thermal barriers tested according to AAMA 505; determine the allowable design<br />
shear flow per the appendix in AAMA 505.<br />
3. Provide hardware with low conductivity or nonmetallic material for hardware bridging<br />
thermal breaks at frame or vent sash.<br />
D. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash and<br />
ventilator.<br />
1. Horizontal-Sliding Windows: Provide operable sash with a double row of sliding<br />
weather stripping in horizontal rails and single- or double-row weather stripping in<br />
meeting or jamb stiles, as required to meet specified performance requirements. Provide<br />
compression-type weather stripping at perimeter of each movable panel where slidingtype<br />
weather stripping is not appropriate.<br />
2. Vertically Pivoted Windows: Provide double-row weather stripping.<br />
E. Weep Holes: Provide weep holes and internal passages to conduct infiltrating water to exterior.<br />
F. Provide water-shed members above side-hinged ventilators and similar lines of natural water<br />
penetration.<br />
G. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Glaze aluminum windows in the factory where practical and<br />
possible for applications indicated. Comply with requirements in Division 8 Section "Glazing"<br />
and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.<br />
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
H. Glazing Stops: Provide snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 8 Section "Glazing"<br />
and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator frames.<br />
2.7 FINISHES, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes <strong>Manual</strong> for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,<br />
temporary protective covering before shipping.<br />
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are<br />
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations<br />
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are<br />
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to<br />
minimize contrast.<br />
2.8 ALUMINUM FINISHES<br />
A. General: Comply with NAAMM “Metal Finishes <strong>Manual</strong>” for recommendations relative to<br />
application and designations of finishes.<br />
B. Finish designations prefixed by “AA” conform to the system established by the Aluminum<br />
Association for designating aluminum finishes.<br />
C. Clear anodi Finish:<br />
1. Color and Gloss: Match aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer<br />
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions<br />
affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and<br />
operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers,<br />
and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation.<br />
1. Masonry Surfaces: Visibly dry and free of excess mortar, sand, and other construction<br />
debris.<br />
2. Metal Surfaces: Dry; clean; free of grease, oil, dirt, rust, corrosion, and welding slag;<br />
without sharp edges or offsets at joints.<br />
3. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing<br />
windows, hardware, accessories, and other components.<br />
B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding thermal<br />
movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall<br />
flashing and other adjacent construction.<br />
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.<br />
D. Install windows and components to drain condensation, water penetrating joints, and moisture<br />
migrating within windows to the exterior.<br />
E. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic<br />
action at points of contact with other materials.<br />
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Adjust operating sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, operators, and accessories for a tight<br />
fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.<br />
Lubricate hardware and moving parts.<br />
B. Clean aluminum surfaces immediately after installing windows. Avoid damaging protective<br />
coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.<br />
C. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from<br />
construction operations. In addition, monitor window surfaces adjacent to and below exterior<br />
concrete and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits,<br />
stains, or other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove<br />
contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.<br />
3.4 DEMONSTRATION<br />
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to<br />
adjust, operate, and maintain window operating system. Refer to Division 1 Section<br />
"Demonstration and Training."<br />
END OF SECTION 085113<br />
ALUMINUM WINDOWS 085113 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 085313 - VINYL WINDOWS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes fixed and operable vinyl-framed windows and sliding patio doors.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Performance class designations according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:<br />
1. R: Residential.<br />
B. Performance grade number according to AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS:<br />
1. Design pressure number in pounds force per square foot used to determine the structural<br />
test pressure and water test pressure.<br />
C. Structural Test Pressure: For uniform load structural test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the<br />
design pressure.<br />
D. Minimum Test Size: Smallest size permitted for performance class (gateway test size).<br />
Products must be tested at minimum test size or at a size larger than minimum test size to<br />
comply with requirements for performance class.<br />
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General: Provide vinyl windows capable of complying with performance requirements<br />
indicated, based on testing manufacturer's windows that are representative of those specified,<br />
and that are of test size indicated below:<br />
1. Size indicated on Drawings.<br />
B. Structural Performance: Provide vinyl windows capable of withstanding the effects of the<br />
following loads, based on testing units representative of those indicated for <strong>Project</strong> that pass<br />
AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, Uniform Load Structural Test:<br />
1. Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to <strong>Project</strong> from basic wind<br />
speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7,<br />
VINYL WINDOWS 085313 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
Section 6.5, "Method 2-Analytical Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade<br />
indicated on Drawings.<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: Include assembly solar heat gain coefficients (SHGC), assembly U-values,<br />
construction details, material descriptions, fabrication methods, dimensions of individual<br />
components and profiles, hardware, finishes, and operating instructions for each type of vinyl<br />
window indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, hardware, attachments to other<br />
work, operational clearances, installation details, and the following:<br />
1. Mullion details, including reinforcement and stiffeners.<br />
2. Joinery details.<br />
3. Expansion provisions.<br />
4. Flashing and drainage details.<br />
5. Weather-stripping details.<br />
6. Glazing details.<br />
7. Window cleaning provisions.<br />
C. Samples for Verification: For vinyl windows, doors and components required, prepared on<br />
Samples of size indicated below.<br />
1. Window Corner Fabrication: 12-by-12-inch- long, full-size window corner including<br />
full-size sections of window frame with factory-applied color finish, weather stripping,<br />
and glazing.<br />
2. Hardware: Full-size units with factory-applied finish.<br />
3. Weather Stripping: 12-inch- long sections.<br />
D. Product Schedule: For vinyl windows and doors. Use same designations indicated on<br />
Drawings.<br />
E. Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.<br />
F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last<br />
four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, class, grade, and size of vinyl window<br />
and door. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted.<br />
G. Maintenance Data: For operable window sash, doors, operating hardware, weather stripping<br />
and finishes to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to vinyl window manufacturer for installation<br />
of units required for this <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
1. Minimum three years documented experience installing products specified in this section.<br />
VINYL WINDOWS 085313 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating vinyl windows and doors<br />
that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance<br />
by inclusion in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.<br />
C. Source Limitations: Obtain vinyl windows and doors through one source from a single<br />
manufacturer.<br />
D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of vinyl<br />
windows and doors and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01<br />
Section "Product Requirements." Do not modify size and dimensional requirements.<br />
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with<br />
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory<br />
data to Architect for review.<br />
E. Fenestration Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American<br />
Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass<br />
Doors," for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components,<br />
accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.<br />
1. Provide AAMA-certified vinyl windows with an attached label.<br />
F. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass manufacturers and<br />
with GANA's "Glazing <strong>Manual</strong>" unless more stringent requirements are indicated.<br />
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site to comply with requirements in<br />
Division 01 Section "<strong>Project</strong> Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures<br />
related to vinyl windows and doors including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's<br />
personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.<br />
2. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of vinyl windows and doors with<br />
other exterior wall components. Include provisions for structural anchorage, glazing,<br />
flashing, weeping, sealants, and protection of finishes.<br />
3. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and<br />
weathertight exterior building envelope.<br />
4. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by<br />
other trades.<br />
1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Field Measurements: Verify vinyl window openings by field measurements before fabrication<br />
and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.<br />
1.8 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace vinyl doors and windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified<br />
warranty period.<br />
VINYL WINDOWS 085313 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Failure to meet performance requirements.<br />
b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, air infiltration, or<br />
condensation.<br />
c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware.<br />
d. Deterioration of vinyl, other materials, and finishes beyond normal weathering.<br />
e. Failure of insulating glass.<br />
B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Furnish manufacturer’s Lifetime Limited Warranty on window and<br />
door products, including five-year SureStart Protection, transferable to subsequent owners.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Cascade Windows, or equal.<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product is WinPro Series 9011, 9200, and 9700/9730, with SB70+argon<br />
glass.<br />
2. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Division 1.<br />
2.2 MATERIALS<br />
A. Vinyl Extrusions: Rigid (unplasticized) hollow PVC extrusions, formulated and extruded for<br />
exterior applications, complying with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS and the following:<br />
1. PVC Resins: 100 percent virgin resin.<br />
2. PVC Formulation: High impact, low heat buildup, lead free, nonchalking, and color and<br />
UV stabilized.<br />
3. Extrusion Wall Thickness: Not less than 0.090 inch.<br />
4. Multichamber Extrusions: Profile designed with multichambers between interior and<br />
exterior faces of the extrusions.<br />
B. Vinyl Trim and Glazing Stops: Material and finish to match frame members.<br />
C. Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, epoxy adhesive, or other materials<br />
warranted by manufacturer to be noncorrosive and compatible with vinyl window members,<br />
cladding, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.<br />
1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless unavoidable for applying hardware, do not use exposed<br />
fasteners. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish of member or<br />
hardware being fastened, as appropriate.<br />
D. Anchors, Clips, and Accessories: Aluminum, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or zinc-coated steel<br />
or iron complying with ASTM B 633 for SC 3 severe service conditions; provide sufficient<br />
strength to withstand design pressure indicated.<br />
VINYL WINDOWS 085313 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Compression-Type Weather Stripping: Provide compressible weather stripping designed for<br />
permanently resilient sealing under bumper or wiper action, and for complete concealment<br />
when vinyl window is closed.<br />
1. Weather-Stripping Material: Manufacturer's standard system and materials complying<br />
with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.<br />
F. Sliding-Type Weather Stripping: Provide woven-pile weather stripping of wool, polypropylene,<br />
or nylon pile and resin-impregnated backing fabric.<br />
2.3 WINDOWS<br />
A. Window and Door Type: As indicated on Drawings.<br />
2.4 GLAZING<br />
A. Glass and Glazing Materials: Refer to Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass units and glazing<br />
requirements applicable to glazed vinyl window units.<br />
B. Factory Glazing: Insulating high-performance Glass Unit, Type Double Glazed SB-70+argon.<br />
2.5 INSECT SCREENS<br />
A. General: Design windows, doors and hardware to accommodate screens in a tight-fitting,<br />
removable arrangement, with a minimum of exposed fasteners and latches. Fabricate insect<br />
screens to fully integrate with window frame. Locate screens on inside of window and provide<br />
for each operable exterior sash or ventilator.<br />
1. Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens: Comply with SMA 1004, "Specifications for<br />
Aluminum Tubular Frame Screens for Windows," Residential R-20 class.<br />
B. Aluminum Insect Screen Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with<br />
SMA 1004. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed<br />
fasteners, adjustable rollers, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame.<br />
1. Aluminum Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum<br />
sheet with minimum wall thickness as required for class indicated.<br />
2. Finish: Match frame and sash color.<br />
C. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-14 or 18-by-16 mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads;<br />
woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact<br />
damage, and weather deterioration, in the following color. Comply with ASTM D 3656.<br />
1. Mesh Color: Charcoal gray.<br />
D. Type installable from interior side, providing only reasonable insect control when operable sash<br />
is in open position; re-wirable glass fiber mesh, 14 x 18 mesh, secured in channel of aluminum<br />
box frame with continuous vinyl spline.<br />
VINYL WINDOWS 085313 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.6 FABRICATION<br />
A. Fabricate vinyl windows and doors in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for<br />
assembling components and anchoring windows and doors.<br />
1. Welded Frame and Sash/Ventilator Corners: Miter-cut and fusion welded.<br />
B. Fabricate vinyl windows and doors that are reglazable without dismantling sash or ventilator<br />
framing.<br />
C. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable door, sash and<br />
ventilator, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Single-Hung Windows: Provide weather stripping only at horizontal rails of operable<br />
sash.<br />
D. Factory-Glazed Fabrication: Except for light sizes in excess of 100 united inches, glaze vinyl<br />
windows in the factory where practical and possible for applications indicated. Comply with<br />
requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS.<br />
E. Glazing Stops: Provide nailed or snap-on glazing stops coordinated with Division 08 Section<br />
"Glazing" and glazing system indicated. Provide glazing stops to match sash and ventilator<br />
frames.<br />
F. Hardware: Mount hardware through double walls of vinyl extrusions or provide corrosionresistant<br />
steel reinforcement complying with requirements for reinforcing members, or do both.<br />
1. Angled mullion posts with interior and exterior trim.<br />
2. Angled interior and exterior extension and trim.<br />
3. Clear pine head and seat boards.<br />
4. Top and bottom plywood platforms.<br />
5. Exterior head and sill casings and trim.<br />
6. Support brackets.<br />
G. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory<br />
to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and<br />
installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
2.7 VINYL FINISHES<br />
A. Integral Finish and Color: Uniform, solid, homogeneous white interior and exterior.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage and conditions, with Installer<br />
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions<br />
affecting performance of work. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and<br />
VINYL WINDOWS 085313 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
operational clearances. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers,<br />
and other built-in components to ensure a coordinated, weathertight window installation.<br />
1. Wood Frame Walls: Dry, clean, sound, well nailed, free of voids, and without offsets at<br />
joints. Ensure that nail heads are driven flush with surfaces in opening and within 3<br />
inches of opening.<br />
2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with Drawings, Shop Drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions for installing<br />
windows, doors, hardware, accessories, and other components.<br />
B. Install windows and doors level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion or impeding<br />
thermal movement, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to<br />
wall flashing and other adjacent construction.<br />
C. Set sill members in bed of sealant or with gaskets, as indicated, for weathertight construction.<br />
D. Separate aluminum and other corrodible surfaces from sources of corrosion or electrolytic<br />
action at points of contact with other materials.<br />
3.3 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Adjust operating doors, sashes and ventilators, screens, hardware, and accessories for a tight fit<br />
at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure.<br />
Lubricate hardware and moving parts.<br />
B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installation. Avoid damaging protective coatings and<br />
finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.<br />
C. Clean factory-glazed glass immediately after installing windows. Comply with manufacturer's<br />
written recommendations for final cleaning and maintenance. Remove nonpermanent labels,<br />
and clean surfaces.<br />
D. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during<br />
construction period.<br />
E. Protect window and door surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from<br />
construction operations. In addition, monitor surfaces adjacent to and below exterior concrete<br />
and masonry surfaces during construction for presence of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, stains, or<br />
other contaminants. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove<br />
contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written recommendations.<br />
END OF SECTION 085313<br />
VINYL WINDOWS 085313 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 086200 - UNIT SKYLIGHTS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Self-flashing unit skylights with integral curb.<br />
2. Unit skylights mounted on site-built curbs.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood<br />
framing and blocking at unit skylights.<br />
2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for flashing at unit skylights.<br />
1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. AAMA/WDMA Performance Designation: Provide unit skylights capable of complying with<br />
performance requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's unit skylights that are<br />
representative of those specified and that are of minimum test size indicated below:<br />
1. Size required by AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS for gateway performance.<br />
2. Size: Indicated on Drawings.<br />
B. AAMA/WDMA Performance Requirements: Provide unit skylights of performance class and<br />
grade indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS unless more stringent<br />
performance requirements are indicated.<br />
1. Performance Class and Grade: SKG-R15/15-1200x1200.<br />
C. Test Performance Criteria: Provide unit skylights capable of complying with performance<br />
requirements indicated, based on testing manufacturer's unit skylights that are representative of<br />
those specified.<br />
1. Air Infiltration: Provide unit skylights with maximum air leakage through assembly of<br />
0.3 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure<br />
difference of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..<br />
2. Water Penetration: Provide unit skylights that do not evidence water penetration through<br />
assembly when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a zero static-air-pressure difference<br />
across unit.<br />
UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of unit skylight indicated. Include construction details, material<br />
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for unit skylights.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For unit skylight work. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and<br />
connections to supporting structure and other adjoining work.<br />
C. Product Schedule: For unit skylights. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed within the last<br />
four years by a qualified testing agency for each type, performance class, performance grade,<br />
and size of unit skylight. Test results based on use of downsized test units will not be accepted.<br />
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified<br />
testing agency for each type and size of unit skylight.<br />
C. Field quality-control reports.<br />
D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.<br />
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Maintenance Data: For unit skylights to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating unit skylights that meet or<br />
exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by inclusion<br />
in lists and by labels, test reports, and calculations.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to unit skylight manufacturer for installation of<br />
units required for this <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
C. Source Limitations: Obtain unit skylights from single source from single manufacturer.<br />
D. Surface-Burning Characteristics of Plastic Glazing: Provide plastic glazing sheets identical to<br />
those tested for fire-exposure behavior per test method indicated below by a testing and<br />
inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materials with<br />
appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.<br />
1. Self-Ignition Temperature: 650 deg F or more for plastic sheets in thickness indicated<br />
when tested per ASTM D 1929.<br />
2. Smoke-Production Characteristics: Comply with either requirement below:<br />
a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 84 on plastic<br />
sheets in manner indicated for use.<br />
UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
b. Smoke Density: 75 or less when tested per ASTM D 2843 on plastic sheets in<br />
thickness indicated for use.<br />
3. Burning Characteristics: Tested per ASTM D 635.<br />
a. Acrylic Glazing: Class CC2, burning rate of 2-1/2 inches per minute or less for<br />
nominal thickness of 0.060 inch or thickness indicated for use.<br />
E. Unit Skylight Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA 101/I.S.2/NAFS, "North American<br />
Fenestration Standard Voluntary Performance Specification for Windows, Skylights and Glass<br />
Doors," for minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and<br />
fabrication. Comply with more stringent requirements if indicated.<br />
1. Provide AAMA-certified unit skylights with an attached label.<br />
1.8 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate unit skylight flashing requirements with roofing system.<br />
B. Coordinate sizes and locations of site-built curbs with actual unit skylights provided.<br />
C. Provide anchors and inserts to be placed in adjacent construction in proper sequence so as not to<br />
delay the Work.<br />
1.9 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace components of unit skylights that fail in materials or workmanship within specified<br />
warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Uncontrolled water leakage.<br />
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal<br />
weathering.<br />
c. Yellowing of acrylic glazing.<br />
d. Breakage of polycarbonate glazing.<br />
e. Deterioration of insulating-glass hermetic seal.<br />
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product for single-dome skylight: Subject to compliance with requirements,<br />
provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. American Skylites.<br />
2. APC Dayliter; C/S Group.<br />
3. Auburn Skylights; Major Industries, Inc.<br />
4. Bristolite Skylights.<br />
5. CPI International.<br />
6. Dur-Red Products.<br />
7. Exarc Skylights, Inc.<br />
8. Fiore Skylights, Inc.<br />
9. Fox Lite, Inc.; Skymaster Skylights.<br />
10. GE Polymer Shapes; General Electric Company.<br />
11. Glazed Structures Inc.<br />
12. Hi Pro International, Inc.<br />
13. Kalwall Corporation.<br />
14. Lane-Aire Manufacturing Corp.<br />
15. Naturalite Skylight Systems; Vistawall Group (The).<br />
16. Plasteco, Inc.<br />
17. Plastic Engineering Company of Tulsa, Inc.<br />
18. Skyline Sky-Lites, LLC.<br />
19. Solar Industries, Inc.<br />
20. Sunglo Skylight Products.<br />
21. VELUX America.<br />
22. Wasco Products, Inc.<br />
C. Basis of design for triple-dome skylight: Sunoptics (www.sunoptics.com) 2040 “Signature<br />
Series #800 MD, with u-value=0.82.<br />
2.2 MATERIALS<br />
A. Aluminum Components:<br />
1. Sheets: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper to suit forming operations and finish<br />
requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of alclad Alloy 3005-H25.<br />
2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper to suit structural and finish<br />
requirements but with not less than the strength and durability of Alloy 6063-T52.<br />
B. Fasteners: Same metal as metal being fastened, nonmagnetic stainless steel, or other<br />
noncorrosive metal as recommended by manufacturer. Finish exposed fasteners to match<br />
material being fastened.<br />
1. Where removal of exterior exposed fasteners might allow access to building, provide<br />
nonremovable fastener heads.<br />
UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.3 GLAZING<br />
A. Acrylic Glazing: ASTM D 4802, thermoformable, monolithic sheet, category as standard with<br />
manufacturer, Finish 1 (smooth or polished), Type UVF (formulated with UV absorber).<br />
1. Double-Glazing Profile: Dome, 25 percent rise.<br />
a. Thicknesses: Not less than thicknesses required to exceed performance<br />
requirements.<br />
b. Outer Glazing Color: Colorless, transparent.<br />
c. Inner Glazing Color: White, translucent.<br />
B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard EPDM, neoprene, partially vulcanized butyl tape, or<br />
liquid-applied elastomeric sealant.<br />
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS<br />
A. Bituminous Coating: SSPC-Paint 12, solvent-type, bituminous mastic, nominally free of sulfur<br />
and containing no asbestos fibers, formulated for 15-mil dry film thickness per coating.<br />
B. Joint Sealants: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."<br />
C. Mastic Sealant: Polyisobutylene; nonhardening, nonskinning, nondrying, nonmigrating sealant.<br />
D. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, designed for trowel application or other<br />
adhesive compatible with roofing system.<br />
2.5 UNIT SKYLIGHTS<br />
A. General: Provide factory-assembled unit skylights that include glazing, extruded-aluminum<br />
glazing retainers, gaskets, and inner frames and that are capable of withstanding performance<br />
requirements indicated.<br />
B. Site-Built Curb: As indicated.<br />
C. Unit Shape and Size: As indicated.<br />
D. Condensation Control: Fabricate unit skylights with integral internal gutters and nonclogging<br />
weeps to collect and drain condensation to the exterior.<br />
E. Thermal Break: Fabricate unit skylights with thermal barrier separating exterior and interior<br />
metal framing.<br />
2.6 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes <strong>Manual</strong> for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.<br />
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of<br />
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.<br />
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES<br />
A. Mill Finish: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer<br />
present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions<br />
affecting performance of the Work.<br />
B. Proceed with unit skylight installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Coordinate installation of unit skylight with installation of substrates, vapor retarders, roof<br />
insulation, roofing membrane, and flashing as required to ensure that each element of the Work<br />
performs properly and that combined elements are waterproof and weathertight.<br />
B. Comply with recommendations in AAMA 1607 and with manufacturer's written instructions for<br />
installing unit skylights.<br />
C. Install unit skylights level, plumb, and true to line, without distortion.<br />
D. Anchor unit skylights securely to supporting substrates.<br />
E. Where metal surfaces of unit skylights will contact incompatible metal or corrosive substrates,<br />
including preservative-treated wood, apply bituminous coating on concealed metal surfaces, or<br />
provide other permanent separation recommended in writing by unit skylight manufacturer.<br />
F. Set unit skylight flanges in thick bed of roofing cement to form a seal unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
G. Where cap flashing is indicated, install to produce waterproof overlap with roofing or roof<br />
flashing. Seal with thick bead of mastic sealant except where overlap is indicated to be left<br />
open for ventilation.<br />
3.3 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean exposed unit skylight surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up<br />
damaged metal coatings and finishes.<br />
UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.<br />
C. Remove and replace glazing that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged<br />
during construction period.<br />
D. Protect unit skylight surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from<br />
construction operations.<br />
END OF SECTION 086200<br />
UNIT SKYLIGHTS 086200 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 087100 - DOOR HARDWARE<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Commercial door hardware for the following:<br />
a. Swinging doors.<br />
b. Non-fire-rated sliding doors.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors" for provided as part of fire-rated labeled<br />
assemblies.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: Include construction and installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of<br />
individual components and profiles, and finishes.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:<br />
C. Samples for Verification: For exposed door hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size.<br />
Tag with full description for coordination with the door hardware sets. Submit Samples before,<br />
or concurrent with, submission of the final door hardware sets.<br />
1. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged<br />
through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of<br />
operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements.<br />
D. Qualification Data: For Installer.<br />
E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer<br />
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for locks latches.<br />
F. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals. Include<br />
final hardware and keying schedule.<br />
G. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.<br />
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
H. Other Action Submittals:<br />
1. Door Hardware Sets: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing<br />
fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.<br />
Coordinate the final door hardware sets with doors, frames, and related work to ensure<br />
proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.<br />
a. Format: Use same scheduling sequence and format and use same door numbers as<br />
in the Contract Documents.<br />
b. Content: Include the following information:<br />
1) Identification number, location, hand, fire rating, and material of each door<br />
and frame.<br />
2) Type, style, function, size, quantity, and finish of each door hardware<br />
item. Include description and function of each lockset and exit device.<br />
3) Complete designations of every item required for each door or opening<br />
including name and manufacturer.<br />
4) Fastenings and other pertinent information.<br />
5) Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on<br />
floor plans and in door and frame schedule.<br />
6) Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule.<br />
7) Mounting locations for door hardware.<br />
8) Door and frame sizes and materials.<br />
c. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final door hardware sets at earliest possible date,<br />
particularly where approval of the door hardware sets must precede fabrication of<br />
other work that is critical in <strong>Project</strong> construction schedule. Include Product Data,<br />
Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other<br />
information essential to the coordinated review of the door hardware sets.<br />
2. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of Installer, detailing Owner's<br />
final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key<br />
set to unique door designations.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by lock manufacturer.<br />
1. Installer's responsibilities include supplying and installing door hardware and providing a<br />
qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant available during the course of the Work to<br />
consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.<br />
2. Installer shall have warehousing facilities in <strong>Project</strong>'s vicinity.<br />
3. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.<br />
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer,<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site to comply with requirements in<br />
Division 01 Section "<strong>Project</strong> Management and Coordination." In addition to<br />
Owner, <strong>Construction</strong> Manager, Contractor, and Architect, conference participants shall also<br />
include Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant. Incorporate keying conference decisions<br />
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not<br />
limited to, the following:<br />
1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required,<br />
and plans for future expansion.<br />
2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram.<br />
3. Requirements for key control system.<br />
4. Address for delivery of keys.<br />
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final door hardware sets,<br />
and include basic installation instructions, templates, and necessary fasteners with each item or<br />
package.<br />
C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system for subsequent delivery to Owner.<br />
1.6 COORDINATION<br />
A. Templates: Distribute door hardware templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to<br />
be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to<br />
confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply<br />
with indicated requirements.<br />
B. Existing Openings: Where new hardware components are scheduled for application to existing<br />
construction or where modifications to existing door hardware are required, field verify existing<br />
conditions and coordinate installation of door hardware to suit opening conditions and to<br />
provide for proper operation.<br />
1.7 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified<br />
warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.<br />
b. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware.<br />
c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal<br />
weathering and use.<br />
2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE<br />
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and<br />
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and<br />
removal and replacement of door hardware.<br />
B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full<br />
maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive<br />
maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and<br />
adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies same as<br />
those used in the manufacture and installation of original products.<br />
1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish full-size units of door hardware described below, before installation begins, that match<br />
products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with<br />
labels describing contents.<br />
1. Door Hardware: 4 of each type<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE<br />
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section and<br />
door hardware sets indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.<br />
1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named<br />
manufacturers' products.<br />
B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive<br />
qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.<br />
Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:<br />
1. Named Manufacturers' Products: Manufacturer and product designation are listed for<br />
each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements.<br />
Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in Part 3 "Door Hardware Sets" Article.<br />
2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and<br />
requirements for description, quality, and function.<br />
C. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to<br />
product selection:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by<br />
manufacturers for various products listed below. An asterisk (*) following<br />
manufacturer's name designates manufacturer whose products are indicated in Hardware<br />
Schedule. Such products are listed in the schedule by specific reference to manufacturer's<br />
catalog numbers. Except as otherwise indicated, products of equivalent quality, design,<br />
and function by other listed manufacturers may be used, subject to approval of Architect.<br />
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Butts and Hinges: Bommer, Hager*, McKinney, H. Soss, Stanley.<br />
3. Cylinders and Locks: Schlage*, Easy Set.<br />
4. Sliding, Sliding Pocket, and Bifold Door Hardware: Grant, Henderson, L. E. Johnson,<br />
Stanley.<br />
5. Door Stripping and Seals: Hager, National Guard, Pemko, Reese*, Sealeze, Ultra, Zero.<br />
6. Thresholds: Hager, National Guard, Pemko*, Reese, Sealeze, Zero.<br />
2.2 FABRICATION<br />
A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide products that have manufacturer's name or trade<br />
name displayed in a visible location except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as<br />
otherwise approved by Architect.<br />
1. Manufacturer's identification is permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.<br />
B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method<br />
indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness.<br />
Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and<br />
BHMA A156.18. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if<br />
different from specified standard.<br />
C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally<br />
prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to<br />
commercially recognized industry standards for application intended, except aluminum<br />
fasteners are not permitted. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match<br />
surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed,<br />
except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for<br />
installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means<br />
of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door<br />
and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt.<br />
2. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements in DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended<br />
Fasteners for Wood Doors."<br />
2.3 FINISHES<br />
A. Standard: BHMA A156.18, as indicated in door hardware sets.<br />
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,<br />
temporary protective covering before shipping.<br />
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are<br />
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations<br />
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are<br />
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to<br />
minimize contrast.<br />
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and<br />
other conditions affecting performance.<br />
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring<br />
connections before electrified door hardware installation.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to<br />
ANSI A250.6.<br />
B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W Series.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated as follows unless otherwise<br />
indicated or required to comply with governing regulations.<br />
1. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for<br />
Wood Flush Doors."<br />
2. As recommended by the Door and Hardware Institute, unless indicated otherwise.<br />
B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where<br />
cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be<br />
painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface<br />
protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 09 Sections. Do not install<br />
surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.<br />
1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment<br />
substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation.<br />
2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space<br />
fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.<br />
C. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in peal and stick butyl-rubber<br />
attached to closed cell foam. Remove excess sealant and clean adjacent surfaces.<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner will engage a qualified independent<br />
Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.<br />
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in<br />
each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements,<br />
including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.<br />
3.5 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to<br />
ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to<br />
operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating<br />
and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.<br />
1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely<br />
from an open position of 30 degrees.<br />
2. Door Closers: Unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction, adjust sweep<br />
period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds<br />
to move to a point 3 inches from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.<br />
B. Occupancy Adjustment: Approximately one month after Owner’s occupancy date of<br />
Substantial Completion, Installer's Architectural Hardware Consultant shall examine and<br />
readjust, including adjusting operating forces, each item of door hardware as necessary to<br />
ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. Instruct Owner's<br />
personnel in proper maintenance and adjustment.<br />
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.<br />
B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.<br />
C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure that door hardware is without<br />
damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.<br />
3.7 DEMONSTRATION<br />
A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to<br />
adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes. Refer to Division 01<br />
Section "Demonstration and Training."<br />
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS<br />
A. Hardware Schedule: Provide hardware for each door as in the following list of hardware sets:<br />
MATERIAL MANUFACTURER APPROVED SUBSTITUTE<br />
BUTTS HAGER HAG STANLEY<br />
LOCKSETS SCHLAGE SCH No Substitute<br />
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
HDW SET 1<br />
DEADBOLTS SCHLAGE SCH No Substitute<br />
DOOR TRIM IVES IVE DON-JO, HAGER<br />
WEATHERSTRIP PEMKO PEM NATIONAL GUARD, REESE<br />
THRESHOLDS PEMKO PEM NATIONAL GUARD, REESE<br />
END OF SECTION 087100<br />
DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 088000 - GLAZING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified<br />
in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:<br />
1. Storefront framing.<br />
2. Glazed entrances.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 8 Section “Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts.”<br />
2. Division 8 Section “Vinyl Windows.”<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in<br />
referenced glazing publications.<br />
B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to<br />
ASTM C 1036.<br />
C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.<br />
D. Interlayer: As defined by laminated glass.<br />
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and<br />
impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to<br />
the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets<br />
to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in<br />
construction and thermal stress (heat breaks).<br />
B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to<br />
ASTM E 1300 ICC's 2003 International Building Code by a qualified professional engineer,<br />
using the following design criteria:<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Design Wind Pressures: Determine design wind pressures applicable to <strong>Project</strong><br />
according to ASCE/SEI 7, based on heights above grade indicated on Drawings.<br />
a. Basic Wind Speed: 90 mph (40 m/s)<br />
b. Importance Factor: 1.15<br />
c. Exposure Category: C<br />
2. Design Snow Loads: 20 p.s.f.<br />
3. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass<br />
to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.<br />
4. Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15 degrees from vertical, design<br />
glass to resist each of the following combinations of loads:<br />
a. Outward design wind pressure minus the weight of the glass. Base design on glass<br />
type factors for short-duration load.<br />
b. Inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus half of the design<br />
snow load. Base design on glass type factors for short-duration load.<br />
c. Half of the inward design wind pressure plus the weight of the glass plus the<br />
design snow load. Base design on glass type factors for long-duration load.<br />
5. Probability of Breakage for Sloped Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped more than 15<br />
degrees from vertical, design glass for a probability of breakage not greater than 0.001.<br />
6. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass<br />
deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1<br />
inch, whichever is less.<br />
7. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential<br />
shading within individual glass lites.<br />
8. Differential shading due to window treatments: Design glass to resist thermal stress by<br />
differential shading and window treatments.<br />
C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature<br />
changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.<br />
1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.<br />
1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING<br />
A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape<br />
sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility<br />
with elastomeric glazing sealants.<br />
1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current<br />
sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted.<br />
2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation<br />
techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass,<br />
tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.<br />
3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates,<br />
shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.<br />
4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for<br />
corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.<br />
1.6 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For glazing sealants used inside of the weatherproofing<br />
system, including printed statement of VOC content.<br />
C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass the<br />
following products; 12 inches square.<br />
1. Tinted glass.<br />
2. Coated glass.<br />
3. Laminated glass with colored interlayer.<br />
4. Insulating glass.<br />
5. Laminated glass with translucent interlayer.<br />
D. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets and sealants, in 12-inch lengths. Install sealant<br />
Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.<br />
E. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use<br />
same designations indicated on Drawings.<br />
F. Qualification Data: For installers, manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated,<br />
low-e coatings, glass testing agency and sealant testing agency.<br />
G. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.<br />
H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified<br />
testing agency, for tinted glass, coated glass, insulating glass, glazing sealants and glazing<br />
gaskets.<br />
1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations<br />
within previous 36-month period.<br />
I. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.<br />
J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings:<br />
A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass<br />
manufacturer.<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer, with a minimum of five years experience, who<br />
employs glass installers for this <strong>Project</strong> who are certified under the National Glass Association's<br />
Certified Glass Installer Program.<br />
C. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited<br />
according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.<br />
D. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to<br />
ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.<br />
E. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain ultraclear float glass, tinted float glass, coated float glass,<br />
laminated glass and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass<br />
type.<br />
F. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single<br />
manufacturer for each product and installation method.<br />
G. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers<br />
and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these<br />
publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.<br />
1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference <strong>Manual</strong>" and `ANA's<br />
"Glazing <strong>Manual</strong>."<br />
2. AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and<br />
AAMA TIR-A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines."<br />
3. IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped<br />
Glazing."<br />
4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing<br />
Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."<br />
H. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing<br />
with certification label of the SGCC the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to<br />
authorities having jurisdiction or the manufacturer. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name,<br />
type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. Provide a letter<br />
certifying that laminated glass has been installed as indicated on the drawings.<br />
I. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least<br />
one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.<br />
J. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to<br />
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.<br />
1. Install glazing in mockups specified in Division 8 Section "Aluminum-Framed Entrances<br />
and Storefronts, Aluminum Windows, Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls" to match<br />
glazing systems required for <strong>Project</strong>, including glazing methods.<br />
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of<br />
Substantial Completion.<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to<br />
glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or<br />
other causes.<br />
B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and sealing<br />
units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.<br />
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate<br />
temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when<br />
glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.<br />
1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are<br />
outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F<br />
1.10 WARRANTY<br />
A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in<br />
which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within<br />
specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from<br />
normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass<br />
contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other<br />
indications of deterioration in coating.<br />
1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Laminated Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which<br />
laminated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within<br />
specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed<br />
from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning<br />
laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge<br />
separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding<br />
those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard.<br />
1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which<br />
insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within<br />
specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal<br />
under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning<br />
insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the<br />
obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.<br />
1. Warranty Period: 10 years weather seal from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL<br />
A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in<br />
thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.<br />
1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Refer to glazing schedule.<br />
B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind heat-strengthen<br />
(HS) heat-treated float glass, or Kind fully-tempered (FT) heat-treated float glass as needed to<br />
comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated,<br />
provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to<br />
comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered glass is indicated,<br />
provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.<br />
C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties<br />
specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated<br />
below:<br />
1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick.<br />
2. For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.<br />
3. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall<br />
unit and for each lite.<br />
4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's<br />
WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.<br />
5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values,<br />
according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.<br />
6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.<br />
2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS<br />
A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following provide one of<br />
the following available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are<br />
not limited to, the following:<br />
a. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear.<br />
b. Guardian Industries Corp.; Ultrawhite.<br />
c. Pilkington North America; Optiwhite.<br />
d. PPG Industries, Inc.; Starphire.<br />
e. Oldcastle glass<br />
f. Visteon float glass<br />
B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise<br />
indicated; of kind and condition indicated.<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion<br />
parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A.<br />
3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).<br />
C. Coated Heat-Treated Tinted Float Glass: Class 2, complying with other requirements specified.<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide PPG<br />
Solarbronze as manufactured by PPG Industries, Inc. or approved equal.<br />
2. Tint Color: Bronze.<br />
3. Visible Light Transmittance: See schedule for percent minimum.<br />
2.3 LAMINATED GLASS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following<br />
1. AFG Industries, Inc.<br />
2. Oldcastle glass.<br />
B. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172, and complying with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 for<br />
Category II materials, and with other requirements specified. Use materials that have a proven<br />
record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after<br />
fabrication and installation.<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong>: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer<br />
manufacturer's written recommendations.<br />
2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to<br />
comply with requirements.<br />
3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article as indicated by<br />
designations in "Laminated-Glass Types" Article.<br />
2.4 INSULATING GLASS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. AFG Industries, Inc.; Krystal Klear.<br />
2. Northwestern Industries.<br />
3. Oldcastle glass.<br />
4. Visteon float glass.<br />
B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by<br />
a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other<br />
requirements specified.<br />
1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary.<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction Aluminum with mill or<br />
clear anodic finish.<br />
3. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.<br />
C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article and in "Laminated<br />
Glass" Article as indicated by designations in "Insulating-Glass Types" Article and in<br />
"Insulating-Laminated-Glass Types" Article.<br />
2.5 GLAZING GASKETS<br />
A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to<br />
maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:<br />
1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864.<br />
2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864.<br />
3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115.<br />
4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.<br />
B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene EPDM<br />
silicone or [thermoplastic polyolefin rubber gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II,<br />
black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.<br />
1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting dense<br />
compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of<br />
pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.<br />
C. Lock-Strip Gaskets: Neoprene extrusions in size and shape indicated, fabricated into frames<br />
with molded corner units and zipper lock-strips, complying with ASTM C 542, black.<br />
2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS<br />
A. General:<br />
1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with<br />
other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units,<br />
and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as<br />
demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.<br />
2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for<br />
selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at<br />
time of installation.<br />
3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than<br />
250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D.<br />
4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full<br />
range.<br />
B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,<br />
Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 790.<br />
b. Pecora Corporation; 890.<br />
c. Sika Corporation, <strong>Construction</strong> Products Division; SikaSil-C990.<br />
d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.<br />
2. Applications: Perimeter of all window units.<br />
C. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,<br />
Grade NS, Class 50, Use non-traffic (NT)<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:<br />
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 795.<br />
b. Pecora Corporation; 895.<br />
c. Sika Corporation, <strong>Construction</strong> Products Division; SikaSil-C995.<br />
d. Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2 Spectrem 3.<br />
2. Applications: In structural glazing applications or perimeter.<br />
D. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,<br />
Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:<br />
a. Dow Corning Corporation; 799.<br />
b. Schnee-Morehead, Inc., an ITW company; SM5731 Poly-Glaze Plus.<br />
c. Tremco Incorporated; Proglaze SSG, Tremsil 600.<br />
2. Applications: During fabrication of units.<br />
2.7 GLAZING TAPES<br />
A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric<br />
tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer<br />
rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and<br />
complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:<br />
1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous<br />
pressure.<br />
2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous<br />
pressure.<br />
B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive<br />
on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:<br />
1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant.<br />
2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with<br />
a full bead of liquid sealant.<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing<br />
standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application<br />
indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.<br />
B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.<br />
C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or<br />
minus 5.<br />
D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass<br />
manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.<br />
E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side<br />
walking).<br />
F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and<br />
density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant<br />
performance.<br />
2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS<br />
A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for <strong>Project</strong>, with edge and face<br />
clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product<br />
manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance<br />
requirements.<br />
B. Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges<br />
with slight chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.<br />
2.10 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES<br />
A. Glass Type: Tempered Clear Glass<br />
1. Overall thickness: ¼”.<br />
2. Clear Tempered.<br />
3. Provide safety glazing labeling.<br />
2.11 LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES<br />
A. Glass Type: Laminated Clear Glass<br />
1. Overall thickness: 5/16”.<br />
2. Heat-Strengthened Laminated Clear Glass<br />
a. Outboard lite: 1/8” clear annealed.<br />
b. Interlayer: .060 PVB.<br />
c. Inboard lite: 1/8” clear annealed.<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Provide safety glazing labeling.<br />
2.12 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS TYPES<br />
A. Glass Type: Low-e Coated, Clear Insulating Glass<br />
1. Overall thickness: 1”.<br />
2. Outdoor lite: 5/16” Heat Strengthened Laminated Clear Glass.<br />
a. Outboard lite: 1/8” clear heat strengthened.<br />
b. Interlayer: .060 PVB.<br />
c. Inboard lite: 1/8” clear heat strengthened.<br />
3. Air space: 7/16” (air).<br />
4. Indoor lite: ¼” clear tempered PPG Solarban 70XL 5 th surface.<br />
5. Visible Light Transmittance: 64%.<br />
6. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: .28 maximum.<br />
7. Summer Daytime U-Factor: .26 maximum.<br />
8. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: .37 maximum.<br />
9. Shading Coefficient: .42.<br />
10. Provide safety glazing labeling.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the<br />
following:<br />
1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and<br />
offsets at corners.<br />
2. Presence and functioning of weep systems.<br />
3. Minimum required face and edge clearances.<br />
4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing.<br />
Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.<br />
B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so<br />
that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave<br />
visible marks in the completed work.<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and<br />
other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in<br />
referenced glazing publications.<br />
B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by <strong>Project</strong> conditions during installation to<br />
provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant<br />
thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.<br />
C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site and legally dispose of off <strong>Project</strong> site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or<br />
other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and<br />
appearance.<br />
D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by<br />
preconstruction testing.<br />
E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing<br />
publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of<br />
compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.<br />
F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.<br />
G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.<br />
1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass.<br />
Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and<br />
glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances<br />
and to comply with system performance requirements.<br />
2. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant<br />
width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of<br />
tape.<br />
H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways<br />
in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to<br />
requirements in referenced glazing publications.<br />
I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.<br />
J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.<br />
K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket<br />
on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is<br />
subjected to movement.<br />
L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by<br />
gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with<br />
sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 12
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.4 TAPE GLAZING<br />
A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush<br />
with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.<br />
B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to<br />
make them fit opening.<br />
C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover<br />
horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.<br />
D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped.<br />
Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.<br />
E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.<br />
F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense<br />
compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops.<br />
Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.<br />
3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)<br />
A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings<br />
exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.<br />
B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place<br />
with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.<br />
C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and<br />
press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and<br />
installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners<br />
and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without<br />
developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket<br />
manufacturer.<br />
D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and<br />
press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressureglazing<br />
stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to<br />
produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints<br />
with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.<br />
E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.<br />
3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)<br />
A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass<br />
lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding<br />
into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and<br />
backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance<br />
for optimum sealant performance.<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 13
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond<br />
of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.<br />
C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.<br />
3.7 LOCK-STRIP GASKET GLAZING<br />
A. Comply with ASTM C 716 and gasket manufacturer's written instructions. Provide<br />
supplementary wet seal and weep system unless otherwise indicated.<br />
3.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers<br />
to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove<br />
nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.<br />
B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction<br />
operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with<br />
glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.<br />
C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at<br />
frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum,<br />
alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.<br />
D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from<br />
natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.<br />
E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of <strong>Project</strong> not more than four days before date<br />
scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as<br />
recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.<br />
END OF SECTION 08800<br />
GLAZING 088000 - 14
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 092400 - PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 05 Section "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for structural, load-bearing<br />
(transverse and axial) steel studs and joists that support lath and portland cement plaster.<br />
2. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring included in<br />
portland cement plaster assemblies.<br />
3. Division 07 Section "Building Insulation" for thermal insulations and vapor retarders<br />
included in portland cement plaster assemblies.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit MR 4.1 and Credit MR 4.2: For products having recycled<br />
content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of postconsumer and<br />
preconsumer recycled content.<br />
a. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.<br />
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For sealants, including printed statement of VOC<br />
content.<br />
C. Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including<br />
plans, elevations, sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.<br />
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated.<br />
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of factory-prepared , colored, textured finish, coat<br />
indicated; 12 by 12 inches, and prepared on rigid backing.<br />
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical<br />
to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency.<br />
Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.<br />
1. Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of<br />
another qualified testing agency.<br />
B. Sound-Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster<br />
assemblies identical to those of assemblies tested for STC ratings per ASTM E 90 and classified<br />
according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified testing agency.<br />
C. Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to<br />
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.<br />
1. Install mockups for each type of finish indicated.<br />
2. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of<br />
Substantial Completion.<br />
D. Cold Joints or staggered marks are not acceptable. Work from corner to corner in one pass top<br />
to bottom without stopping<br />
E. Single Source Responsibility: Provide primers, bonding agents, additives, base and finish coats<br />
from a single manufacturer source.<br />
F. Applicator Qualifications: Applicators specializing in the installation of exterior stucco<br />
assembly with a minimum of 7 years experience in commercial work similar to that required by<br />
this section.<br />
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from<br />
weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.<br />
B. Exterior Plasterwork:<br />
1. Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use<br />
procedures required by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings,<br />
and providing barriers to deflect sunlight and wind.<br />
2. Tent and heat exterior walls to maintain temperature.<br />
3. Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F.<br />
4. Do not use frozen materials in cement stucco mixtures.<br />
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
5. Do not apply cement stucco to frozen surfaces containing front or ice.<br />
6. Inclement Weather: Do not apply basecoat during inclement weather, unless appropriate<br />
protection is employed.<br />
7. Do not apply basecoats or finish coats over substraits that are over 120 deg. F (49 deg.<br />
C).<br />
8. Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has<br />
occurred.<br />
9. Wet cure all cement based materials a minimum of 2 times per day for a minimum of 3<br />
days prior to application of any successive coats. Air cure an additional 7 days prior to<br />
application of finish coat.<br />
10. Air cure all acrylic based finish coats.<br />
C. Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for<br />
environmental conditions for applying finishes.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 METAL LATH<br />
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc<br />
coating.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.<br />
b. CEMCO.<br />
c. Clark Western Building Systems.<br />
d. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.<br />
e. MarinoWARE.<br />
f. Phillips Manufacturing Co.<br />
2. Recycled Content: Provide steel products with average recycled content such that<br />
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less<br />
than 25 percent.<br />
3. Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 2.5 lb/sq. yd.<br />
4. 3/8-Inch Rib Lath: 4 lb/sq. yd..<br />
B. Wire-Fabric Lath: Wire Mesh Reinforcement: 1-3/8 inch galvanized steel 17-gauge wire,<br />
woven mesh, self-furring type.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Davis Wire Corporation; a Heico Wire Group company.<br />
b. Jaenson Wire Company.<br />
c. Keystone Steel & Wire Co.<br />
d. K-Lath; a division of Georgetown Wire.<br />
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Woven-Wire Lath: ASTM C 1032; self-furring, with stiffener wire backing, minimum<br />
17 guage.<br />
2.2 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with<br />
thicknesses and number of plaster coats required.<br />
B. Secondary Fiberglass Mesh Reinforcing: Mesh consisting of 4.5 oz woven fiberglass mesh treated for<br />
alkaline resistance.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:<br />
a. El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.: Premium Stucco Finish.<br />
b. LaHabra , a brand of ParexLaHabra, Incl.; Exterior Stucco Color Coat.<br />
c. SonoWall, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; Thoro Stucco.<br />
d. Parex, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; e-lastic.<br />
2. Basis of Design: Krak-Master Mesh manufactured by El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of<br />
ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Premium Stucco Finish.<br />
C. Metal Accessories:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.<br />
b. CEMCO.<br />
c. Clark Western Building Systems.<br />
d. Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.<br />
e. MarinoWARE.<br />
f. Phillips Manufacturing Co.<br />
2. Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet,<br />
ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 zinc coating.<br />
3. Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip<br />
galvanized zinc coating.<br />
4. External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M,<br />
G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.<br />
5. Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel.<br />
a. Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.<br />
b. Small nose cornerbed with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening<br />
rib; use on columns and for finishing masonry corners.<br />
6. Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; square-edged style; with<br />
expanded flanges.<br />
7. Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; one-piece-type, folded<br />
pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and<br />
removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.<br />
8. Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; folded pair of<br />
unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with expanded flanges.<br />
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
9. Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel; formed to<br />
produce slip-joint and square-edged reveal that is adjustable form ¼ to 5/8 inch wide;<br />
with perforated flanges.<br />
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of<br />
damaging plaster, lath, or accessories.<br />
B. Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of<br />
contaminants, manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.<br />
C. Bonding Compound: ASTM C 932.<br />
D. Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required<br />
by thickness of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths<br />
required to achieve penetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed threads.<br />
E. Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.<br />
F. Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch<br />
diameter, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
G. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 7 Section “Joint Sealants”.<br />
1. Provide sealants that have a VOC content of 250g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR<br />
59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
2.4 PLASTER MATERIALS<br />
A. Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.<br />
B. Water: Potable.<br />
C. Ready-Mixed Fiber Reinforced Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, chopped fibers,<br />
aggregates, coloring agents, and proprietary ingredients.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:<br />
a. El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Premium Stucco<br />
Finish.<br />
b. LaHabra, a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.: Exterior Stucco Color Coat.<br />
c. SonoWall, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; Thoro Stucco.<br />
d. Parex, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; e-lastic.<br />
2. Color: Manufacturers standard.<br />
3. Basis of Design: Fiber-47 as manufactured by El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of<br />
ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Premium Stucco Finish.<br />
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.5 PLASTER MIXES<br />
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.<br />
B. Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with<br />
manufacturer’s written instructions.<br />
C. Mix only as much plaster as can be used in one hour.<br />
D. Withhold 10% of mixing water until mixing is almost complete, then add as needed to produce<br />
necessary consistency.<br />
E. Mechanically mix plaster materials at the project site; do not hand mix except where small<br />
amounts are needed, using less than one bag of plaster.<br />
F. Protect mixtures from frost, contamination, and evaporation.<br />
G. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames,<br />
cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions<br />
affecting performance of the Work.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects<br />
caused by plastering.<br />
1. Install tape and plastic covering on all building openings, penetrations and exposed metal<br />
including but not limited to doors, windows, frames, exposed metal, and flashing.<br />
2. Maintain protection in place undamaged for the duration of the stucco installation.<br />
3. Cover horizontal surfaces as required to protect finish materials for the duration of stucco<br />
installation.<br />
B. Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability<br />
required to bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design<br />
designations from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.<br />
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Acoustical Sealant: Where required, seal joints between edges of plasterwork and abutting<br />
construction with acoustical sealant.<br />
3.4 INSTALLING METAL LATH<br />
A. Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.<br />
1. Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install woven-wire lath.<br />
2. Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install 3/8-inch rib lath.<br />
3. On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath.<br />
4. Reinforce all areas of high stress including but not limited to all corners, parapet caps,<br />
windows, doors and through wall penetrations.<br />
3.5 INSTALLING ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.<br />
B. Reinforcement for External Corners:<br />
1. Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.<br />
C. Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings.<br />
1. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes:<br />
a. Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft.<br />
b. Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft.<br />
2. At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c.<br />
3. As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater<br />
than 2-1/2:1.<br />
4. Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.<br />
5. Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and to<br />
relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change.<br />
3.6 PLASTER APPLICATION<br />
A. Inspection<br />
1. Substrate Examination: Examine prior to installation as follows:<br />
a. Substrate shall be of a type listed in IBC 2006 or as required by local codes and agencies<br />
having jurisdiction. Plywood and OSB substrates must be gapped 1/8” between panels.<br />
b. Substrate shall be examined for soundness, and/or other harmful conditions.<br />
c. Substrate shall be free of dust, dirt, efflorescence, and other harmful contaminates.<br />
d. High pressure water-blast all areas of stucco that are to be repaired taking care to remove<br />
all loose and flaking paint and other materials.<br />
e. Saw cut and remove entire sections of stucco that appears to be delaminated or are<br />
buckling from the substrate. Replace with new weather barriers, lathing and basecoats.<br />
f. Notify contractor of discrepancies preventing installation of the stucco assembly<br />
2. Verify that weather resistive barrier and flashing is installed in compliance with requirements of<br />
applicable codes, regulations, and agencies having jurisdiction.<br />
3. Verify that lath is tight, properly secured, and that all accessories are properly set and secured.<br />
4. Isolation: Where lath and metal support assembly abuts building structure horizontally, and where<br />
partition wall work abuts the overhead structure, isolate work from structure movements. Install<br />
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
expansion or control joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support. Frame both sides of<br />
expansion and control joints separately and do not bridge joints with furring or lath.<br />
5. Examine substrates, grounds and accessories to insure that finished stucco work will be true to<br />
line, plane, level and plumb.<br />
B. Preparation Over Masonry Substrates: Direct Bond Applications.<br />
1. Verify that masonry surfaces to receive direct bond applications of stucco basecoats are<br />
rough, free from form release agents or otherwise properly prepared to provide for<br />
adequate bond.<br />
2. Spray absorptive surfaces with a fine mist of water to produce a uniformly moist<br />
condition.<br />
3. If substrate will not form a mechanical key, apply a uniform coating of the acrylic<br />
bonding agent in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and instructions.<br />
C. Installation<br />
1. General: Apply stucco basecoat assembly in accordance with ASTM C926 and in strict<br />
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and recommendations and in compliance<br />
with requirements of applicable codes, regulations and agencies having jurisdiction.<br />
2. Interrupt or delay stucco application only at junctions of stucco planes, at openings, at<br />
control joints or at expansion joints.<br />
3. Basecoat:<br />
a. Apply scratch coat to a thickness of 3/8” using sufficient trowel pressure or spray<br />
velocity to key stucco into lath or onto direct bond substrate.<br />
b. Scratch horizontally and in order to provide for a key with the brown coat.<br />
c. Apply brown coat directly over scratch coat to a thickness of 3/8” using sufficient<br />
trowel pressure or spray velocity to key brown coat into scratch coat.<br />
d. Darby, then rod surface to true plane.<br />
e. While basecoat is still wet, embed secondary fiberglass reinforcement utilizing a<br />
wood float, and smooth to flush. Take care to completely embed mesh into wet<br />
base coat. Overlap all seams 2” and remove all wrinkles, rough edges etc.<br />
f. Float or lightly broom surface to provide bond with cement based stucco finish<br />
coat, or trowel smooth in preparation for acrylic based finish coat.<br />
g. Tool brown coat to provide a V-joint at intersection of stucco with frames or other<br />
items of metal, wood, or plastic which act as stucco grounds.<br />
4. Crack and Patch Treatment<br />
a. Apply manufacturer’s recommended crack patching material over all cracks.<br />
b. While material is still wet, embed a strip of fiberglass mesh and smooth to flush.<br />
c. At severely cracked panels, apply a leveling coat over all wall surfaces and embed<br />
fiberglass mesh throughout.<br />
5. Finish Coat: Tinted Acrylic Based Stucco Finish<br />
a. Apply Primer OR Conditioner as recommended by product manufacturer written<br />
instructions and recommendations.<br />
b. Apply exterior wall finish coat to thickness recommended by manufacturer to<br />
achieve texture indicated, using sufficient trowel pressure or spray velocity to bond<br />
finish to base coat.<br />
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Curing<br />
c. Apply exterior wall finish in a number of coats and consistency required to achieve<br />
texture to match approved sample.<br />
1. Moist cure cement based base and finish coats with a fog spray of clear water with<br />
sufficiently frequent applications to maintain stucco uniformly moist for a minimum of<br />
48 hours following applications. Cure brown coat a minimum of 7 days. Provide<br />
sufficient moisture during curing to permit continuous hydration of the cementitious<br />
materials.<br />
2. Air cure acrylic based finish coats only, do not wet cure.<br />
3.7 PLASTER REPAIRS<br />
A. Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking,<br />
dry outs, efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.<br />
1. Cut out and replace defective or damaged exterior stucco wall finish coat.<br />
2. Match patches to surrounding finish coat in form and texture.<br />
3.8 CLEANING<br />
A. Remove exterior wall finish and protective materials from perimeter trim and adjacent surfaces.<br />
B. Remove all excess materials from the project site.<br />
END OF SECTION 092400<br />
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
PART 2 - RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
2.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Interior gypsum board.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry" for wood framing and furring that supports<br />
gypsum board.<br />
2. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation" for insulation and vapor retarders installed in<br />
assemblies that incorporate gypsum board.<br />
3. Division 09 painting Sections for primers applied to gypsum board surfaces.<br />
2.3 ASSEMBLY PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For gypsum board assemblies with STC ratings, provide<br />
materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose STC ratings were determined<br />
according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a qualified independent<br />
testing agency.<br />
B. Fire Resistance: Provide gypsum board assemblies with fire-resistance ratings indicated.<br />
2.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and<br />
Division 1 Specification Sections.<br />
C. Samples: For the following products:<br />
1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory<br />
indicated.<br />
2. Textured Finishes: 1’ by 1’ for each textured finish indicated and on same backing<br />
indicated for Work.<br />
D. LEED Submittals:<br />
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For products having local production, documentation<br />
indicating location of manufacturer.<br />
E. Product certificates signed by manufacturers of gypsum board assembly components certifying<br />
that their products comply with specified requirements.<br />
2.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and<br />
construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an<br />
independent testing agency. Where fire-resistance-rated gypsum board assemblies are<br />
indicated, provide gypsum board assemblies that comply with the following requirements:<br />
1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: As indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600 "Fire Resistance<br />
Design <strong>Manual</strong>" or design designations in UL "Fire Resistance Directory" or in the listing<br />
of another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
2. Gypsum board assemblies indicated are identical to assemblies tested for fire resistance<br />
according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to<br />
authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical<br />
to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to<br />
ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.<br />
C. Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in<br />
surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and<br />
execution.<br />
1. Install mockups for the following:<br />
a. Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.<br />
b. Each texture finish indicated.<br />
2. Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on<br />
exposed surfaces for review of mockups.<br />
3. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.<br />
4. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of<br />
Substantial Completion.<br />
D. Single-Source Responsibility for Panel Products: Obtain each type of gypsum board and other<br />
panel products from a single manufacturer.<br />
E. Single-Source Responsibility for Finishing Materials: Obtain finishing materials from either the<br />
same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer<br />
acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer.<br />
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.6 STORAGE AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and<br />
identification of manufacturer or supplier.<br />
B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from<br />
weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack panels flat<br />
to prevent sagging.<br />
2.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board<br />
manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.<br />
B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.<br />
C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold<br />
damaged.<br />
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,<br />
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.<br />
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or<br />
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.<br />
D. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not<br />
less than 40 deg F For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less<br />
than 50 deg F for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed<br />
95 deg F when using temporary heat sources.<br />
E. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to dry joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts<br />
during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly.<br />
PART 3 - PRODUCTS<br />
3.1 PANELS, GENERAL<br />
A. Recycled Content: Provide gypsum panel products with recycled content such that<br />
postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content constitutes a<br />
minimum of 20 percent by weight.<br />
B. Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area<br />
and that correspond with support system indicated.<br />
1. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches.<br />
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD<br />
A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to<br />
type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Domtar Gypsum<br />
b. G-P Gypsum.<br />
c. National Gypsum Company.<br />
d. USG Corporation.<br />
B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following products<br />
where proprietary gypsum wallboard is indicated:<br />
1. Gyprock Fireguard C Gypsum Board; Domtar Gypsum.<br />
2. Firestop Type C; Georgia-Pacific Corp.<br />
3. Fire-Shield G; National Gypsum Co.; Gold Bond Building Products Division.<br />
4. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, FIRECODE C Core; United States Gypsum Co.<br />
5. SHEETROCK Brand Gypsum Panels, ULTRACODE Core; United States Gypsum Co.<br />
C. Type X:<br />
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.<br />
2. Long Edges: Tapered.<br />
D. Ceiling Type: Manufactured to have more sag resistance than regular-type gypsum board.<br />
1. Thickness: 5/8 inch.<br />
2. Long Edges: Tapered.<br />
E. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: With moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces.<br />
1. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.<br />
2. Long Edges: Tapered.<br />
F. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows:<br />
1. Type: Type X where required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.<br />
2. Edges: Tapered.<br />
3. Thickness: 5/8 inch where indicated.<br />
3.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.<br />
1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc or Plastic.<br />
2. Shapes:<br />
a. Cornerbead on outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
b. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.<br />
3.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.<br />
B. Joint Tape:<br />
1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper.<br />
2. Paper reinforcing tape, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
a. Use pressure-sensitive or staple-attached, open-weave, glass-fiber reinforcing tape<br />
with compatible joint compound where recommended by manufacturer of gypsum<br />
board and joint treatment materials for application indicated.<br />
C. Drying-Type Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation<br />
that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. Factorypackaged<br />
vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and<br />
intended use.<br />
1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound.<br />
2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and<br />
trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound.<br />
a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.<br />
3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.<br />
4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.<br />
5. All-purpose compound formulated for both taping and topping compounds.<br />
3.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS<br />
A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and<br />
manufacturer's written recommendations.<br />
B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering<br />
gypsum panels to continuous substrate.<br />
1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to<br />
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated for the following applications.<br />
1. Fastening gypsum board to steel members less than 0.033 inch thick.<br />
2. Fastening gypsum board to wood members.<br />
3. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from<br />
0.033 to 0.112 inch thick.<br />
D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."<br />
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Vapor Retarder: As specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation."<br />
F. Gypsum Board Nails: ASTM C 514.<br />
PART 4 - EXECUTION<br />
4.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine areas and substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach or abut, with Installer<br />
present, and including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, and cast-in-anchors for<br />
compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.<br />
B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold<br />
damaged.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
4.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with ASTM C 840.<br />
B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid<br />
abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels<br />
not less than one framing member.<br />
C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with<br />
not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.<br />
D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate<br />
supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered<br />
edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not<br />
make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.<br />
E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.<br />
F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings,<br />
etc.), except in chases braced internally.<br />
1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke<br />
ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.<br />
2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.<br />
3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof<br />
slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow<br />
1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.<br />
G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural<br />
abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations, and trim<br />
edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and<br />
abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.<br />
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
H. Wood Framing: Install gypsum panels over wood framing, with floating internal corner<br />
construction. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber,<br />
including floor joists and headers. Float gypsum panels over these members, or provide control<br />
joints to counteract wood shrinkage.<br />
I. Space fasteners in panels that are tile substrates a maximum of 8 inches o.c.<br />
4.3 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD<br />
A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:<br />
1. Type X: Vertical surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.<br />
B. Single-Layer Application:<br />
1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest<br />
extent possible and at right angles to framing, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels horizontally (perpendicular to framing), unless<br />
otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end<br />
joints.<br />
a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses<br />
of panels.<br />
b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally, unless otherwise<br />
indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.<br />
3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end<br />
joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.<br />
4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.<br />
C. Laminating to Substrate: Where gypsum panels are indicated as directly adhered to a substrate<br />
(other than studs, joists, furring members, or base layer of gypsum board), comply with gypsum<br />
board manufacturer's written recommendations and temporarily brace or fasten gypsum panels<br />
until fastening adhesive has set.<br />
4.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES<br />
A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same<br />
fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written<br />
instructions.<br />
B. Interior Trim: Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed.<br />
Provide edge trim type with face flange formed to receive joint compound, except where other<br />
types are indicated. Install in the following locations:<br />
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. L-Bead: Use where edge trim can only be installed after gypsum panels are installed.<br />
C. Exterior Trim: Install in the following locations:<br />
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners.<br />
2. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.<br />
4.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD<br />
A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control<br />
joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare<br />
gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent<br />
surfaces.<br />
B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas using setting-type<br />
joint compound.<br />
C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except those with trim accessories having flanges<br />
not intended for tape.<br />
D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM<br />
C 840:<br />
1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.<br />
2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in other Division 09 Sections.<br />
E. Use the following joint compound combination as applicable to the finish levels specified:<br />
1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping compound.<br />
Fill (Second) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound. Finish<br />
(Third) Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or topping compound.<br />
F. For Level 4 gypsum board finish, embed tape in joint compound and apply first, fill (second),<br />
and finish (third) coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories.<br />
Touch up and sand between coats and after last coat as needed to produce a surface free of<br />
visual defects and ready for decoration.<br />
4.6 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES<br />
A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces<br />
receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth.<br />
B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a<br />
uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin<br />
application or of application patterns.<br />
C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture<br />
finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite<br />
these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and<br />
overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written<br />
recommendations.<br />
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4.7 PROTECTION<br />
A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight,<br />
construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.<br />
B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.<br />
1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to,<br />
discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.<br />
2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or<br />
splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.<br />
4.8 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.<br />
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to Installer, that ensure<br />
gypsum board assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Substantial<br />
Completion.<br />
4.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Above-Ceiling Observation: General contractor will conduct an above-ceiling observation prior<br />
to installation of gypsum board ceilings and report any deficiencies in the Work observed. Do<br />
not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have<br />
been corrected.<br />
1. Notify general contractor one week in advance of the date and the time when the <strong>Project</strong>,<br />
or part of the <strong>Project</strong>, will be ready for an above-ceiling observation.<br />
2. Prior to notifying general contractor, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum<br />
board ceilings:<br />
a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures, powered for operation.<br />
b. Installation, insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems.<br />
c. Installation of air duct systems.<br />
d. Installation of air devices.<br />
e. Installation of mechanical system control air tubing.<br />
f. Installation of ceiling support framing.<br />
END OF SECTION 092900<br />
GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 093000 - TILING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Ceramic tile.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and<br />
isolation joints in tile surfaces.<br />
2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for cementitious backer units glass-mat, waterresistant<br />
backer board.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1<br />
apply to Work of this Section unless otherwise specified.<br />
B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B,<br />
ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9,<br />
ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14,<br />
ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American<br />
National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."<br />
C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.<br />
D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For adhesives and sealants, documentation including<br />
printed statement of VOC content.<br />
TILING 093000 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and<br />
locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished<br />
tile surfaces.<br />
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of<br />
accessories involving color selection.<br />
E. Samples for Verification:<br />
1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish<br />
required. For ceramic mosaic tile in color blend patterns, provide full sheets of each<br />
color blend.<br />
2. Assembled samples mounted on a rigid panel, with grouted joints, for each type and<br />
composition of tile and for each color and finish required. Make samples at least 12<br />
inches square, but not fewer than 4 tiles. Use grout of type and in color or colors<br />
approved for completed Work.<br />
3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.<br />
B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile<br />
manufacturer and Installer.<br />
C. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.<br />
D. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.<br />
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and<br />
that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing<br />
contents.<br />
1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount<br />
installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.<br />
2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type,<br />
composition, and color indicated.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile from one source or producer.<br />
1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent<br />
quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.<br />
TILING 093000 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality<br />
for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate<br />
from one source or producer.<br />
C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this<br />
Section from a single manufacturer for each product:<br />
1. Stone thresholds.<br />
2. Waterproof membrane.<br />
3. Crack isolation membrane.<br />
4. Joint sealants.<br />
5. Cementitious backer units.<br />
6. Metal edge strips.<br />
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to<br />
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.<br />
1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation.<br />
2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation.<br />
3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of<br />
Substantial Completion.<br />
E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.<br />
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact<br />
until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.<br />
B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.<br />
C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and<br />
contamination can be avoided.<br />
D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.<br />
E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces<br />
from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile,<br />
remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.<br />
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and<br />
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in<br />
referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
TILING 093000 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL<br />
A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types,<br />
compositions, and other characteristics indicated.<br />
1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.<br />
B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with<br />
ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced<br />
by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements<br />
specified.<br />
C. Low-Emitting Materials: Tile flooring systems shall comply with the testing and product<br />
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the<br />
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental<br />
Chambers."<br />
D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and<br />
package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from<br />
other packages and match approved Samples.<br />
E. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard<br />
with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile<br />
assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is<br />
suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.<br />
F. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect<br />
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous<br />
film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.<br />
2.2 TILE PRODUCTS<br />
A. Tile Type Unglazed paver tile.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Daltile<br />
“Cliff Pointe” colorbody porcelain or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
a. American Marazzi Tile, Inc.<br />
b. American Olean; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.<br />
c. Crossville, Inc.<br />
d. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.<br />
e. Deutsche Steinzeug America, Inc.<br />
TILING 093000 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
f. Florida Tile Industries, Inc.<br />
g. Florim USA.<br />
h. GranitiFiandre; c/o Trans Ceramica, Ltd.<br />
i. Interceramic.<br />
j. Laufen.<br />
k. Lone Star Ceramics Company.<br />
l. Grupo Porcelanite.<br />
m. Portobello America, Inc.<br />
n. Seneca Tiles, Inc.<br />
o. United States Ceramic Tile Company.<br />
3. Composition: Porcelain.<br />
4. Face Size: 11-13/16 by 11-13/16 inches.<br />
5. Thickness: 1/4 inch.<br />
6. Face: Plain with square or cushion edges Plain with cushion edges.<br />
7. Finish: Mat, opaque glaze.<br />
8. Tile Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
9. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
10. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where<br />
applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows,<br />
selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:<br />
a. Base Cove and base cove corner (for Day Care only): Cove, module size same as<br />
adjoining flat tile.<br />
b. Base Cap for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size same as<br />
adjoining flat tile.<br />
c. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size<br />
same as adjoining flat tile.<br />
2.3 THRESHOLDS<br />
A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between<br />
adjacent floor finishes.<br />
1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above<br />
adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of<br />
threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.<br />
2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS<br />
A. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 or ASTM C 1325, in maximum lengths available to<br />
minimize end-to-end butt joints.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:<br />
a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990.<br />
b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard.<br />
c. FinPan, Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board.<br />
d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.<br />
TILING 093000 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.<br />
B. Fiber-Cement Underlayment: ASTM C 1288, in maximum lengths available to minimize endto-end<br />
butt joints.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. CertainTeed Corp.; FiberCement Underlayment.<br />
b. James Hardie; Hardiebacker.<br />
2. Thickness: 1/4 inch.<br />
2.5 SETTING MATERIALS<br />
A. Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.1.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company.<br />
b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.<br />
c. Bostik, Inc.<br />
d. C-Cure.<br />
e. Custom Building Products.<br />
f. Jamo Inc.<br />
g. Laticrete International, Inc.<br />
h. MAPEI Corporation.<br />
i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.<br />
j. Summitville Tiles, Inc.<br />
k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.<br />
2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging<br />
mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.1.<br />
2.6 GROUT MATERIALS<br />
A. Sand-Portland Cement Grout: ANSI A108.10, composed of white or gray cement and white or<br />
colored aggregate as required to produce color indicated.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
a. Boiardi Products; a QEP company.<br />
b. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company.<br />
c. Bostik, Inc.<br />
d. C-Cure.<br />
TILING 093000 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
e. Custom Building Products.<br />
f. Jamo Inc.<br />
g. Laticrete International, Inc.<br />
h. MAPEI Corporation.<br />
i. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.<br />
j. Summitville Tiles, Inc.<br />
k. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.<br />
2.7 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS<br />
A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with<br />
the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint<br />
Sealants."<br />
1. Sealants shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to<br />
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
2. Sealants shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California<br />
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic<br />
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
3. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer.<br />
B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed<br />
joints unless otherwise indicated.<br />
C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25;<br />
Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with<br />
fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that<br />
are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. DAP Inc.; 100 percent Silicone Kitchen and Bath Sealant.<br />
b. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786.<br />
c. GE Silicones; a division of GE Specialty Materials; Sanitary 1700.<br />
d. Laticrete International, Inc.; Latasil Tile & Stone Sealant.<br />
e. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant.<br />
f. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White.<br />
2.8 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS<br />
A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based<br />
formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Metal Edge Strips: Angle or L-shape, height to match tile and setting-bed thickness, metallic or<br />
combination of metal and PVC or neoprene base, designed specifically for flooring<br />
applications; half-hard brass exposed-edge material.<br />
TILING 093000 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Temporary Protective Coating: Either product indicated below that is formulated to protect<br />
exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout; compatible with tile, mortar, and<br />
grout products; and easily removable after grouting is completed without damaging grout or tile.<br />
1. Petroleum paraffin wax, fully refined and odorless, containing at least 0.5 percent oil with<br />
a melting point of 120 to 140 deg F per ASTM D 87.<br />
2. Grout release in form of manufacturer's standard proprietary liquid coating that is<br />
specially formulated and recommended for use as temporary protective coating for tile.<br />
D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and<br />
grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout<br />
manufacturers.<br />
E. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints and that does not<br />
change color or appearance of grout.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following<br />
available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company; Grout Sealer.<br />
b. Bostik, Inc.; CeramaSeal Grout & Tile Sealer.<br />
c. C-Cure; Penetrating Sealer 978.<br />
d. Custom Building Products; Surfaceguard Sealer.<br />
e. Jamo Inc.; Matte Finish Sealer.<br />
f. MAPEI Corporation; KER 003, Silicone Spray Sealer for Cementitious Tile Grout.<br />
g. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.; Silicone Grout Sealer.<br />
h. Summitville Tiles, Inc.; SL-15, Invisible Seal Penetrating Grout and Tile Sealer.<br />
i. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company; TA-256 Penetrating Silicone Grout<br />
Sealer.<br />
F. Crack Control Membrane: Dietra or equal.<br />
2.9 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT<br />
A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout<br />
manufacturers' written instructions.<br />
B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.<br />
C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and<br />
other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance<br />
characteristics for installations indicated.<br />
TILING 093000 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for<br />
compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting<br />
performance of installed tile.<br />
1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are<br />
incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances<br />
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by<br />
ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.<br />
2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar<br />
comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.<br />
a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically<br />
scarified.<br />
b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or<br />
grinding.<br />
3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical<br />
units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.<br />
4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if<br />
not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set<br />
mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tilesetting<br />
material manufacturer.<br />
B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar<br />
bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.<br />
C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and<br />
packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from<br />
other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to<br />
manufacturer or blend tiles at <strong>Project</strong> site before installing.<br />
D. Field-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: If indicated under tile type or needed to prevent<br />
grout from staining or adhering to exposed tile surfaces, precoat them with continuous film of<br />
temporary protective coating, taking care not to coat unexposed tile surfaces.<br />
E. Install crack isolation membrane strictly per manufacturer’s recommendations.<br />
TILING 093000 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.3 TILE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods<br />
specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series<br />
"Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation<br />
methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting<br />
materials used.<br />
1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile<br />
installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage.<br />
a. Tile floors in laundries.<br />
b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger.<br />
c. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.<br />
B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete<br />
covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at<br />
obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.<br />
C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring<br />
visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for<br />
straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other<br />
penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.<br />
D. Provide manufacturer's standard trim shapes where necessary to eliminate exposed tile edges.<br />
E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and<br />
center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to<br />
minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within<br />
tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work.<br />
2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same<br />
size, align joints.<br />
3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on<br />
floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.<br />
F. Joint Widths: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with the following joint widths:<br />
1. Paver Tile: 3/16 inch.<br />
G. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated.<br />
H. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control,<br />
contraction, and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting<br />
materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles.<br />
1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above<br />
them.<br />
TILING 093000 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section<br />
"Joint Sealants."<br />
I. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
1. At locations where mortar bed (thickset) would otherwise be exposed above adjacent<br />
floor finishes, set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar (thin set).<br />
J. Metal Edge Strips: Install where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, or other<br />
flooring that finishes flush with or below top of tile and no threshold is indicated.<br />
K. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to groutsealer<br />
manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints,<br />
remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.<br />
3.4 TILE BACKING PANEL INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install cementitious backer units and fiber-cement underlayment and treat joints according to<br />
ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. Use<br />
latex-portland cement mortar for bonding material unless otherwise directed in manufacturer's<br />
written instructions.<br />
3.5 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to<br />
produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.<br />
B. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and<br />
been tested to determine that it is watertight.<br />
3.6 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written<br />
instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.<br />
B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.<br />
3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTING<br />
A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are<br />
free of foreign matter.<br />
1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible.<br />
2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written<br />
instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners<br />
recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners<br />
are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect<br />
TILING 093000 - 11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean<br />
water before and after cleaning.<br />
3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer<br />
and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent<br />
drain clogging.<br />
B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to<br />
prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral<br />
protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.<br />
C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is<br />
completed.<br />
D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from<br />
tile surfaces.<br />
3.8 INTERIOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE<br />
A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:<br />
1. Tile Installation F113: Thin-set mortar; TCA F113.<br />
a. Tile Type: Paver tile.<br />
b. Thin-Set Mortar: Dry-set or Latex- portland cement mortar.<br />
c. Grout: Standard sanded cement grout.<br />
END OF SECTION 093000<br />
TILING 093000 - 12
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.<br />
B. Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceiling<br />
attachment devices to be cast in concrete.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product.<br />
B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required,<br />
prepared on Samples of size indicated below.<br />
1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch-square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.<br />
2. Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch-long Samples<br />
of each type, finish, and color.<br />
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items<br />
are shown and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:<br />
1. Suspended ceiling components.<br />
2. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.<br />
3. Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.<br />
4. Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:<br />
a. Lighting fixtures.<br />
b. Air outlets and inlets.<br />
c. Speakers.<br />
d. Sprinklers.<br />
5. Perimeter moldings.<br />
B. Qualification Data: For testing agency.<br />
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer<br />
and witnessed by a qualified testing agency.<br />
D. Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and<br />
fastener type, from ICC-ES.<br />
E. Field quality-control reports.<br />
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective<br />
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.<br />
2. Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2<br />
percent of quantity installed.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to NVLAP for testing indicated.<br />
B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to<br />
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.<br />
1. Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.<br />
2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the<br />
completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.<br />
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to <strong>Project</strong> site in<br />
original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they<br />
will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct<br />
sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.<br />
B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized<br />
moisture content.<br />
C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.<br />
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 2
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
1.9 FIELD CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed<br />
and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and<br />
ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for <strong>Project</strong><br />
when occupied for its intended use.<br />
1. Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before<br />
beginning acoustical panel ceiling installation.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Seismic Performance: Acoustical ceiling shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions<br />
determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.<br />
B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing<br />
agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.<br />
1. Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.<br />
2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.<br />
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL<br />
C. Low-Emitting Materials: Acoustical panel ceilings shall comply with the testing and product<br />
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the<br />
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental<br />
Chambers."<br />
D. Source Limitations:<br />
1. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.<br />
2. Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.<br />
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension<br />
system from single source from single manufacturer.<br />
F. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated<br />
that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical<br />
ratings, and light reflectances unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of<br />
test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.<br />
G. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each<br />
product type.<br />
1. Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern<br />
designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations,<br />
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 3
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
provide products selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply<br />
with requirements indicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical<br />
performance, edge detail, and size.<br />
2.2 ACOUSTICAL PANELS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated<br />
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.<br />
2. CertainTeed Corp.<br />
3. Chicago Metallic Corporation.<br />
4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.<br />
C. Classification: Provide panels complying with ASTM E 1264 for type, form, and pattern as<br />
follows:<br />
1. Type and Form: Type III, mineral base with painted finish; Form 1, nodular.<br />
2. Pattern: CD (perforated, small holes and fissured).<br />
D. Color: White.<br />
E. LR: Not less than 0.65.<br />
F. NRC: Not less than 0.10.<br />
G. CAC: Not less than 20.<br />
H. AC: Not less than 170.<br />
I. Edge/Joint Detail: Reveal sized to fit flange of exposed suspension-system members.<br />
J. Thickness: 5/8 inch.<br />
K. Modular Size: 24 by 24 inches.<br />
L. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Provide acoustical panels<br />
treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold,<br />
mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or<br />
bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to<br />
ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.<br />
2.3 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL<br />
A. Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal<br />
suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with<br />
applicable requirements in ASTM C 635/C 635M.<br />
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 4
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
1. High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating<br />
Classification for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M,<br />
Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.<br />
C. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:<br />
1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft<br />
temper.<br />
2. Stainless-Steel Wire: ASTM A 580/A 580M, Type 304, nonmagnetic.<br />
3. Nickel-Copper-Alloy Wire: ASTM B 164, nickel-copper-alloy UNS No. N04400.<br />
4. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load<br />
(ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but<br />
provide not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.<br />
D. Hanger Rods: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.<br />
E. Angle Hangers: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide; formed with 0.04-inch-thick,<br />
galvanized-steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation; with<br />
bolted connections and 5/16-inch-diameter bolts.<br />
F. Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to<br />
accommodate seismic forces.<br />
G. Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic<br />
forces.<br />
H. Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical<br />
panels in place.<br />
2.4 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated<br />
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.<br />
2. CertainTeed Corp.<br />
3. Chicago Metallic Corporation.<br />
4. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.<br />
C. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll<br />
formed from cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip<br />
galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with<br />
prefinished 15/16-inch-wide metal caps on flanges.<br />
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 5
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.<br />
2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type.<br />
3. Face Design: Flat, flush.<br />
4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.<br />
5. Cap Finish: Natural finish for aluminum.<br />
2.5 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated<br />
on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.<br />
2. CertainTeed Corp.<br />
3. Chicago Metallic Corporation.<br />
4. Fry Reglet Corporation.<br />
5. Gordon, Inc.<br />
6. USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.<br />
C. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not<br />
indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with<br />
seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that<br />
used for exposed flanges of suspension-system runners.<br />
1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and<br />
suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners<br />
unless otherwise indicated.<br />
2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide stepped edge molding that forms<br />
reveal of same depth and width as that formed between edge of panel and flange at<br />
exposed suspension member.<br />
3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter<br />
required to fit penetration exactly.<br />
2.6 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT<br />
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:<br />
a. Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.<br />
b. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.<br />
2. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:<br />
a. Henkel Corporation; OSI Pro-Series SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant.<br />
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 6
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
b. Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.<br />
c. Tremco, Inc.; Tremco Acoustical Sealant.<br />
B. Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective<br />
in reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building<br />
construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.<br />
1. Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.<br />
2. Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable,<br />
synthetic-rubber sealant.<br />
3. Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated<br />
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical<br />
panel ceilings attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified<br />
in this and other Sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements<br />
for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel<br />
ceilings.<br />
B. Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture<br />
damaged, or mold damaged.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at<br />
opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply<br />
with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic<br />
design requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's<br />
"Ceiling Systems Handbook."<br />
B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows:<br />
1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling<br />
plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system.<br />
2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces<br />
by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.<br />
3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger<br />
spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard<br />
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 7
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
suspension-system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in<br />
form of trapezes or equivalent devices.<br />
4. Secure wire hangers to ceiling-suspension members and to supports above with a<br />
minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts,<br />
eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not<br />
deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.<br />
5. Secure flat, angle, channel, and rod hangers to structure, including intermediate framing<br />
members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and<br />
appropriate for both the structure to which hangers are attached and the type of hanger<br />
involved. Install hangers in a manner that will not cause them to deteriorate or fail due to<br />
age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures.<br />
6. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required,<br />
install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.<br />
7. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.<br />
8. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.<br />
9. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from<br />
hangers unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of<br />
each member.<br />
10. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within<br />
performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.<br />
C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four<br />
tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers,<br />
without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires<br />
into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.<br />
D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and<br />
where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.<br />
1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of<br />
moldings before they are installed.<br />
2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more<br />
than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8<br />
inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely.<br />
3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.<br />
E. Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another.<br />
Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.<br />
F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system<br />
runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat,<br />
precise fit.<br />
1. Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:<br />
a. As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.<br />
2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of<br />
reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges.<br />
3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed<br />
panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel<br />
manufacturer.<br />
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 8
G.A.H.P Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having<br />
jurisdiction, and for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel<br />
manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.<br />
5. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fireresistance-rated<br />
assembly.<br />
3.4 CLEANING<br />
A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and<br />
suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and<br />
touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be<br />
successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.<br />
END OF SECTION 095113<br />
ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Resilient base.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Sheet Flooring" for resilient sheet floor coverings.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.1: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC<br />
content.<br />
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.<br />
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size<br />
Samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern<br />
required.<br />
E. Product Schedule: For resilient products. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.<br />
F. Maintenance data for products specified in this Section, to include in Operating and<br />
Maintenance <strong>Manual</strong> specified in Division 1.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to<br />
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.<br />
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.<br />
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Mockups: Provide resilient products with mockups specified in other Sections.<br />
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with<br />
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than<br />
50 deg F or more than 90 deg F.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than<br />
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time<br />
periods:<br />
1. 48 hours before installation.<br />
2. During installation.<br />
3. 48 hours after installation.<br />
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by<br />
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.<br />
C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been<br />
completed.<br />
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective<br />
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, in roll<br />
form of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 RESILIENT BASE<br />
A. Resilient Base:<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.<br />
b. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.<br />
c. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc.<br />
d. Johnsonite.<br />
e. Mondo Rubber International, Inc.<br />
f. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co.<br />
g. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.<br />
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
h. Roppe Corporation, USA.<br />
B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.<br />
1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset) or Type TP (rubber,<br />
thermoplastic).<br />
2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous) or Group II (layered).<br />
3. Style: Cove (base with toe).<br />
C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.<br />
D. Height: 6 inches (restrooms) or 4 inches (restrooms) or 4 inches.<br />
E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.<br />
F. Outside Corners: Job formed.<br />
G. Inside Corners: Job formed.<br />
H. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
I. Colors and Patterns: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.<br />
2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS<br />
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or<br />
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for<br />
applications indicated.<br />
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and<br />
substrate conditions indicated.<br />
1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated<br />
according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):<br />
a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.<br />
b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.<br />
C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to<br />
protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum<br />
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in<br />
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign<br />
deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
D. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur, with Installer<br />
present, to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with<br />
manufacturer's requirements.<br />
1. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 before beginning<br />
installation.<br />
2. For wood subfloors verify that underlayment surface is free of surface irregularities and<br />
substances with potential to interfere with adhesive bond, show through surface, or stain<br />
products specified in this Section.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of<br />
resilient products.<br />
B. Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Treads and Accessories: Prepare according to<br />
ASTM F 710.<br />
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.<br />
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and<br />
that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by<br />
manufacturer. Do not use solvents.<br />
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer.<br />
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed<br />
with installation only after substrates pass testing.<br />
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation<br />
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of<br />
water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.<br />
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with<br />
installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level<br />
measurement.<br />
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching<br />
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.<br />
D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to<br />
be installed.<br />
1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed<br />
at least 48 hours in advance of installation.<br />
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before<br />
installation.<br />
3.3 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.<br />
B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other<br />
permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.<br />
C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of<br />
adjacent pieces aligned.<br />
D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in<br />
continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.<br />
E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.<br />
F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient<br />
base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.<br />
G. Job-Formed Corners:<br />
1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible. Form without<br />
producing discoloration (whitening) at bends.<br />
2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible.<br />
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient<br />
products.<br />
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation:<br />
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.<br />
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.<br />
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.<br />
C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction<br />
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.<br />
D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.<br />
E. Clean products specified in this Section after installation and 4 days prior to date scheduled for<br />
inspections intended to establish date of Substantial Completion.<br />
F. Apply protective polish according to resilient accessory manufacturer's directions.<br />
END OF SECTION 096513<br />
RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 096516 - LINOLEUM FLOORING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Linoleum floor tile and sheet.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer<br />
strips, and other accessories installed with linoleum floor covering.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content.<br />
2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For adhesives, documentation indicating that<br />
products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department<br />
of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from<br />
Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
C. Shop Drawings: For each type of floor covering. Include floor covering layouts, locations of<br />
seams, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.<br />
1. Show details of special patterns.<br />
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of floor covering indicated.<br />
1. Include similar Samples of installation accessories involving color selection.<br />
E. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer’s standard size, but not less than 6-by-9-inch<br />
sections of each color and pattern of floor covering required.<br />
1. Heat-Welding Bead: Include manufacturer’s standard-size Samples, but not less than 9<br />
inches long, of each color required.<br />
F. Heat Welded Seam Samples: For each floor covering product and welding bead color and<br />
pattern combination required; with seam running lengthwise and in center of 6-by-9 inch<br />
sample applied to rigid backing and prepared by Installer for this <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
G. Product Schedule: For floor covering. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.<br />
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.<br />
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Maintenance Data: For each type of floor covering to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.6 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective<br />
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
1. Floor Covering: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color,<br />
and pattern of floor tile installed.<br />
2. Sheet Flooring: Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction<br />
thereof, in roll form and in full roll width for each color, pattern, and type of sheet<br />
flooring installed.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs workers for this <strong>Project</strong> who are<br />
competent in techniques required by manufacturer for floor covering installation.<br />
1. Engage an installer who employs workers for this <strong>Project</strong> who are trained or certified by<br />
manufacturer for installation techniques required.<br />
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to<br />
ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.<br />
1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.<br />
C. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to<br />
demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.<br />
1. Build mockups for floor coverings including resilient base and accessories.<br />
a. Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by<br />
Architect.<br />
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store floor coverings and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with<br />
ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than<br />
65 deg F or more than 90 deg F.<br />
1. Floor Tile: Store on flat surfaces.<br />
2. Sheet Flooring: Store rolls upright.<br />
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than<br />
70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor coverings during the following time<br />
periods:<br />
1. 72 hours before installation.<br />
2. During installation.<br />
3. 72 hours after installation.<br />
B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by<br />
manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.<br />
C. Close spaces to traffic during floor covering installation.<br />
D. Close spaced to traffic 72 hours after floor covering installation.<br />
E. Install floor coverings after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.;<br />
2. Forbo Flooring, Inc.;<br />
3. Tarkett Inc.<br />
2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. FloorScore Compliance: Resilient sheet flooring shall comply with requirements of FloorScore<br />
Standard.<br />
B. Low-Emitting Materials: Flooring system shall comply with the testing and product<br />
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the<br />
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C.<br />
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental<br />
Chambers."<br />
2.3 LINOLEUM FLOOR COVERING<br />
A. Floor Tile: ASTM F 2195,Type I, linoleum floor tile with fibrous backing.<br />
1. Nominal Floor Tile Size: Manufacturer’s Standard.<br />
B. Sheet Flooring: ASTM F 2034. Type I, linoleum sheet with backing.<br />
1. Roll Size: In manufacturer’s standard length by not less than 78 inches wide.<br />
C. Seaming Method: Heat welded.<br />
D. Colors and Patterns: As selected by the Architect from full range of industry colors.<br />
2.4 INSTALLATION MATERIALS<br />
A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or<br />
blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for<br />
applications indicated.<br />
B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit products and substrate<br />
conditions indicated.<br />
1. Adhesives shall have a VOC content of not more than 50 when calculated according to<br />
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).<br />
2. Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California<br />
Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic<br />
Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."<br />
C. Heat-Welding Bead: Color blend matching strand product of linoleum floor covering<br />
manufacturer.<br />
1. Match linoleum floor covering.<br />
D. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum<br />
moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.<br />
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in<br />
other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign<br />
deposits that might interfere with adhesion of floor coverings.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of floor<br />
coverings.<br />
B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.<br />
1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.<br />
2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with floor covering<br />
adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods<br />
recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.<br />
3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed<br />
with installation only after substrates pass testing.<br />
4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed<br />
with installation only after substrates pass testing.<br />
a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation<br />
only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of<br />
water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.<br />
b. Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes, ASTM F 2170. Proceed with<br />
installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level<br />
measurement.<br />
C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching<br />
compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.<br />
D. Do not install floor coverings until they are same temperature as space where they are to be<br />
installed.<br />
1. Move floor coverings and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at<br />
least 72 hours in advance of installation.<br />
E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by floor coverings immediately before<br />
installation.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor coverings.<br />
B. Scribe and cut floor coverings to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures,<br />
and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings.<br />
C. Extend floor coverings into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.<br />
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Maintain reference markers, holes, or openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by<br />
repeating on floor coverings as marked on subfloor. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking<br />
device.<br />
E. Install floor coverings on covers for telephone and electrical ducts and similar items in finished<br />
floor areas. Maintain overall continuity of color and pattern between pieces of floor covering<br />
installed on covers and adjoining floor covering. Tightly adhere floor covering edges to<br />
substrates that abut covers and to cover perimeters.<br />
F. Adhere floor coverings to substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to<br />
produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints,<br />
telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.<br />
G. Heat-Welded Seams: Comply with ASTM F 1516. Rout joints and use welding bead to<br />
permanently fuse sections into a seamless floor covering. Prepare, weld, and finish seams to<br />
produce surfaces flush with adjoining floor covering surfaces.<br />
3.4 LINOLEUM FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION<br />
A. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor<br />
offsets, so floor tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to<br />
avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.<br />
1. Lay floor tiles square with room axis.<br />
B. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in same sequence as<br />
manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed<br />
floor tiles.<br />
1. Lay floor tiles square with grain direction alternating in adjacent floor tiles (basket-weave<br />
pattern).<br />
3.4 LINOLEUM SHEET FLOORING INSTALLATION<br />
A. Unroll sheet floorings and allow them to stabilize before cutting and fitting.<br />
B. Lay out sheet floorings as follows:<br />
1. Maintain uniformity of floor covering direction.<br />
2. Minimize number of seams; place seams in inconspicuous and low-traffic areas, at least 6<br />
inches away from parallel joints in floor covering substrates.<br />
3. Match edges of floor coverings for color shading at seams.<br />
4. Avoid cross seams.<br />
5. Eliminate deformations that result from hanging method used during drying process<br />
(stove bar marks).<br />
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor coverings.<br />
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor covering installation:<br />
1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.<br />
2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.<br />
3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.<br />
C. Protect floor coverings from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction<br />
operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.<br />
D. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor coverings before<br />
applying liquid floor polish.<br />
1. Apply three coat(s).<br />
E. After allowing drying room film (yellow film caused by linseed oil oxidation) to disappear,<br />
cover floor coverings until Substantial Completion.<br />
END OF SECTION 096516.13<br />
LINOLEUM FLOORING 096516 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following<br />
interior substrates:<br />
1. Concrete masonry units (CMU).<br />
2. Steel.<br />
3. Galvanized metal.<br />
4. Wood.<br />
5. Gypsum board.<br />
6. Spray-textured ceilings.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this<br />
Section.<br />
2. Division 06 Sections for shop priming carpentry with primers specified in this Section.<br />
3. Division 09 Section "Exterior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of<br />
paint systems on exterior substrates.<br />
C. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop<br />
priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.<br />
D. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is<br />
not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an<br />
item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces<br />
whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the<br />
Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.<br />
E. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and<br />
labels.<br />
1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or<br />
other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or<br />
nomenclature plates.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. Manufacturer's color<br />
charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.<br />
After color selection, the General Contractor will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.<br />
C. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat<br />
indicated. Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions,<br />
on representative Samples of the actual substrate.<br />
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.<br />
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.<br />
3. Label each coat of each Sample.<br />
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.<br />
5. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers.<br />
Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required<br />
sheen, color, and texture are achieved.<br />
6. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each<br />
sample for location and application.<br />
7. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and<br />
texture only:<br />
a. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch- (300-mm-) square samples of each color and<br />
material on hardboard.<br />
D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:<br />
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same<br />
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.<br />
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in<br />
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.<br />
E. LEED Submittal:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC<br />
content and chemical components.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. MPI Standards:<br />
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved<br />
Products List."<br />
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural<br />
Painting Specification <strong>Manual</strong>" for products and paint systems indicated.<br />
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish<br />
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate<br />
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Comply with procedures<br />
specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. Painting contractor to<br />
hold off on the pruchase of materials required to complete entire project until Mockup has been<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
accepted for color, application and finish. Only those minimum required materials to complete<br />
the Mockup should be obtained.<br />
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of<br />
each paint system specified in Part 3. The General Contractor will select one room or<br />
surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be<br />
painted.<br />
a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..<br />
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.<br />
c. After finishes are accepted, the General Contractor will use the room or surface to<br />
evaluate coating systems of a similar nature.<br />
2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services<br />
have been activated.<br />
3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.<br />
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark<br />
samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.<br />
C. Source Limitations: Obtain primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the<br />
same manufacturer as the finish coats.<br />
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver materials to the <strong>Project</strong> Site in manufacturer's original, unopened packages and<br />
containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. Provide vendors sales receipt for paint<br />
material purchase as part of pay application process along with vendors calculation of paint<br />
quantity and coverage on vendors letterhead.<br />
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient<br />
temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.<br />
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.<br />
2. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are<br />
between 50 and 95 deg F.<br />
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist, or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at<br />
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.<br />
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as<br />
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing<br />
contents.<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and<br />
color applied.<br />
2. All materials to be packaged in unopened containers with original manufactures labels.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Dunn-Edwards Corporation.<br />
2. ICI Paints.<br />
3. Kwal-Howells Paint.<br />
4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).<br />
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL<br />
A. Material Compatibility:<br />
1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another<br />
and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by<br />
manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.<br />
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by<br />
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.<br />
B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating<br />
types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification<br />
will not be acceptable.<br />
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors<br />
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the<br />
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers.<br />
C. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with<br />
the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when<br />
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not<br />
apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:<br />
1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.<br />
2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.<br />
3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250<br />
g/L.<br />
4. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.<br />
5. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
6. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.<br />
7. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L.<br />
8. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L.<br />
9. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250<br />
g/L.<br />
10. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L.<br />
11. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L.<br />
12. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L.<br />
13. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.<br />
14. Dry-Fog Coatings: VOC content of not more than 400 g/L.<br />
15. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L.<br />
16. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L.<br />
D. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints<br />
and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following<br />
chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in<br />
a fabrication or finishing shop:<br />
1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by<br />
weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more<br />
benzene rings).<br />
2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:<br />
a. Acrolein.<br />
b. Acrylonitrile.<br />
c. Antimony.<br />
d. Benzene.<br />
e. Butyl benzyl phthalate.<br />
f. Cadmium.<br />
g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate.<br />
h. Di-n-butyl phthalate.<br />
i. Di-n-octyl phthalate.<br />
j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene.<br />
k. Diethyl phthalate.<br />
l. Dimethyl phthalate.<br />
m. Ethylbenzene.<br />
n. Formaldehyde.<br />
o. Hexavalent chromium.<br />
p. Isophorone.<br />
q. Lead.<br />
r. Mercury.<br />
s. Methyl ethyl ketone.<br />
t. Methyl isobutyl ketone.<br />
u. Methylene chloride.<br />
v. Naphthalene.<br />
w. Toluene (methylbenzene).<br />
x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane.<br />
y. Vinyl chloride.<br />
E. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS<br />
A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.<br />
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.<br />
B. Wood-Knot Sealer: Sealer recommended in writing by topcoat manufacturer for use in paint<br />
systems indicated.<br />
2.4 METAL PRIMERS<br />
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.<br />
1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.<br />
B. Waterborne Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #134.<br />
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.<br />
2.5 WOOD PRIMERS<br />
A. Interior Latex-Based Wood Primer: MPI #39.<br />
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.<br />
2.6 LATEX PAINTS<br />
A. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).<br />
1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.<br />
B. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).<br />
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.<br />
2.7 ALKYD PAINTS<br />
A. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5).<br />
1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.<br />
B. Interior Alkyd (Gloss): MPI #48 (Gloss Level 6).<br />
1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements<br />
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.<br />
B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter<br />
as follows:<br />
1. Concrete: 12 percent.<br />
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.<br />
3. Wood: 15 percent.<br />
4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.<br />
5. Plaster: 12 percent.<br />
C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing<br />
finishes and primers.<br />
D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces<br />
are dry.<br />
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and<br />
conditions.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural<br />
Painting Specification <strong>Manual</strong>" applicable to substrates indicated.<br />
B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted.<br />
If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surfaceapplied<br />
protection before surface preparation and painting.<br />
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to<br />
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.<br />
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,<br />
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.<br />
C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and<br />
similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible<br />
because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface<br />
preparation and painting. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall<br />
items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved.<br />
D. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and<br />
incompatible paints and encapsulants.<br />
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required<br />
to produce paint systems indicated.<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Cementitious Materials: Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release<br />
agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to<br />
improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. Use abrasive blast-cleaning<br />
methods if recommended by paint manufacturer.<br />
1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If<br />
surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this<br />
condition. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in<br />
writing by paint manufacturer.<br />
G. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;<br />
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or<br />
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC)<br />
recommendations.<br />
1. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush,<br />
clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same<br />
primer as the shop coat.<br />
H. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal<br />
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that<br />
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints. Clean galvanized surfaces with<br />
nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove<br />
pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.<br />
I. Wood Substrates: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,<br />
mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off.<br />
1. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply coat of white shellac or other<br />
recommended knot sealer before applying primer.<br />
2. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.<br />
3. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood. Prime, stain, or seal wood<br />
to be painted immediately on delivery.<br />
4. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic<br />
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.<br />
5. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or<br />
sealer immediately on delivery.<br />
J. Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and<br />
sanded smooth.<br />
K. Spray-Textured Ceiling Substrates: Do not begin paint application until surfaces are dry.<br />
L. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written<br />
instructions.<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required<br />
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface<br />
film and strain material before using.<br />
2. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.<br />
3.3 APPLICATION<br />
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated.<br />
2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces.<br />
Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture<br />
with prime coat only.<br />
3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar<br />
hinged items to match exposed surfaces.<br />
4. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, nails, tacks, tape, hangers<br />
or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.<br />
5. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in items are in place.<br />
Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired<br />
protection.<br />
6. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.<br />
7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.<br />
B. Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for<br />
painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration.<br />
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of<br />
application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as<br />
recommended by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even<br />
surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.<br />
2. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat<br />
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under<br />
moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause<br />
the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.<br />
C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's<br />
recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as<br />
recommended by the manufacturer.<br />
D. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete<br />
coverage with pores filled.<br />
E. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by<br />
the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been<br />
prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or<br />
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects<br />
due to insufficient sealing.<br />
F. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish,<br />
or repaint work not complying with requirements.<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
G. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of<br />
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide<br />
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.<br />
H. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film<br />
has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges,<br />
corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of<br />
flat surfaces.<br />
I. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,<br />
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color<br />
breaks.<br />
J. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and<br />
occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Mechanical Work:<br />
a. Uninsulated metal piping.<br />
b. Uninsulated plastic piping.<br />
c. Pipe hangers and supports.<br />
d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes.<br />
e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets<br />
and outlets.<br />
f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering<br />
or other paintable jacket material.<br />
g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field<br />
painting.<br />
2. Electrical Work:<br />
a. Switchgear.<br />
b. Panelboards.<br />
c. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field<br />
painting.<br />
K. Back roll all finish coat paint application regardless of how prime coats have been applied.<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any<br />
time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:<br />
1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials<br />
being used. Samples of material delivered to <strong>Project</strong> site will be taken, identified, sealed,<br />
and certified in presence of Contractor.<br />
2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements.<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being<br />
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplyingpaint<br />
materials from <strong>Project</strong> site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with<br />
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from<br />
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are<br />
incompatible.<br />
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by<br />
washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.<br />
C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of<br />
other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and<br />
leave in an undamaged condition.<br />
D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or<br />
defaced painted surfaces.<br />
E. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective<br />
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.<br />
3.6 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE<br />
A. CMU Substrates:<br />
1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Kwal Block Filler 5940 or equal.<br />
b. Topcoat: Kwal 3000 Accu-Pro Acrylic (semi-gloss) or equal.<br />
B. Gypsum Board Substrates (standard):<br />
1. Latex System: MPI INT 9.2A.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Kwal 0890 Accu-Pro or equal.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Kwal 3000 Accu-Pro Acrylic PC (semi-gloss) or equal.<br />
c. Topcoat: Kwal 3000 Accu-Pro Acrylic (semi-gloss) or equal.<br />
C. Gypsum Board Substrates (heavy smoker units):<br />
1. Clean walls and ceiling with mild detergent and warm water, non-ammonia.<br />
2. If a more stringent cleaner is needed, add phosphate.<br />
3. Seal walls with a stain blocking primer: MPI INT 9.2K.<br />
a. X-Terminator by Aro-Tec Coatings or equal.<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 11
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Topcoat: Kwal 3000 Accu-Pro Acrylic (semi-gloss) or equal.<br />
END OF SECTION 099123<br />
INTERIOR PAINTING 099123 - 12
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 099133 - EXTERIOR PAINTING<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following<br />
exterior substrates:<br />
1. Steel.<br />
2. Galvanized metal.<br />
3. Wood.<br />
4. Exterior fiber-cement panels (Hardipanel).<br />
5. Exterior gypsum board.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 05 Sections for shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this<br />
Section.<br />
2. Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for surface preparation and the application of<br />
paint systems on interior substrates.<br />
C. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of exposed exterior items and<br />
surfaces.<br />
1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to<br />
shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections.<br />
D. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is<br />
not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an<br />
item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces<br />
whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the<br />
Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available.<br />
E. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts,<br />
and labels.<br />
1. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or<br />
other code-required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or<br />
nomenclature plates.<br />
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Submittals: For each paint system specified, provide the following:<br />
1. Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material<br />
and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each<br />
material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification.<br />
2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label<br />
analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material<br />
proposed for use.<br />
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of topcoat product indicated. Manufacturer's color<br />
charts showing the full range of colors available for each type of finish-coat material indicated.<br />
After color selection, the General Contractor will furnish color chips for surfaces to be coated.<br />
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and each color and gloss of topcoat<br />
indicated. Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions,<br />
on representative Samples of the actual substrate.<br />
1. Submit Samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square.<br />
2. Step coats on Samples to show each coat required for system.<br />
3. Label each coat of each Sample.<br />
4. Label each Sample for location and application area.<br />
5. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers.<br />
Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required<br />
sheen, color, and texture are achieved.<br />
6. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each<br />
sample for location and application.<br />
7. Submit Samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and<br />
texture only:<br />
a. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch- (300-mm-) square samples of each color and<br />
material on hardboard.<br />
E. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following:<br />
1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same<br />
designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.<br />
2. Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in<br />
Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.<br />
F. LEED Submittal:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For paints, including printed statement of VOC<br />
content and chemical components.<br />
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. MPI Standards:<br />
1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved<br />
Products List."<br />
2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural<br />
Painting Specification <strong>Manual</strong>" for products and paint systems indicated.<br />
B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish<br />
selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate<br />
aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. Comply with procedures<br />
specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. Painting contractor to<br />
hold off on the purchase of materials required to complete entire project until Mockup has been<br />
accepted for color, application and finish. Only those minimum required materials to complete<br />
the Mockup should be obtained.<br />
1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of<br />
each paint system specified in Part 3.<br />
a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft..<br />
b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.<br />
2. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.<br />
a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark<br />
samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.<br />
C. Source Limitations: Obtain primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the<br />
same manufacturer as the finish coats.<br />
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver materials to the <strong>Project</strong> Site in manufacturer’s original, unopened packages and<br />
containers bearing manufacturer’s name and label. Provide vendors sales receipt for paint<br />
material purchase as part of pay application process along with vendors calculation of paint<br />
quantity and coverage on vendors letterhead.<br />
B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient<br />
temperatures of continuously maintained at not less than 45 deg F.<br />
1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.<br />
2. Protect from freezing<br />
3. Keep storage area neat and orderly<br />
4. Remove oily rags and waste from storage areas daily.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are<br />
between 50 and 95 deg F.<br />
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Do not apply paints in snow, rain, fog, or mist; when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at<br />
temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.<br />
C. Do not apply paints when wind is present or forecasted above 5 miles per hour.<br />
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as<br />
materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing<br />
contents.<br />
1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 1 gal. of each material and<br />
color applied.<br />
2. All materials to be packaged in unopened containers with original manufactures labels.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. Dunn-Edwards Corporation.<br />
2. ICI Paints.<br />
3. Kwal-Howells Paint.<br />
4. Sherwin-Williams Company (The).<br />
2.2 PAINT, GENERAL<br />
A. Material Compatibility:<br />
1. Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish coat materials use within each paint<br />
system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of<br />
service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field<br />
experience.<br />
2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by<br />
manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.<br />
B. Colors: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
C. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating<br />
types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification<br />
will not be acceptable.<br />
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors<br />
or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the<br />
exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers.<br />
2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS<br />
A. Alkali-Resistant Primer: MPI #3.<br />
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.<br />
2.4 METAL PRIMERS<br />
A. Alkyd Anticorrosive Metal Primer: MPI #79.<br />
1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.<br />
2.5 WOOD PRIMERS<br />
A. Exterior Latex Wood Primer: MPI #6.<br />
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.<br />
2.6 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS<br />
A. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI (Gloss Level 5).<br />
1. VOC Content: E Range of E3.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements<br />
for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.<br />
B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure<br />
compatibility of the total system for various substrates.<br />
C. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter<br />
as follows:<br />
1. Cement-fiber panels: 12 percent.<br />
2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.<br />
3. Wood: 15 percent.<br />
4. Plaster: 12 percent.<br />
5. Gypsum Board: 12 percent.<br />
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing<br />
finishes and primers.<br />
E. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces<br />
are dry.<br />
1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and<br />
conditions.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural<br />
Painting Specification <strong>Manual</strong>" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.<br />
B. Remove hardware and hardware accessories plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures and<br />
similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible<br />
because of size or weight of item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation<br />
and painting.<br />
1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to<br />
reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any.<br />
2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name,<br />
identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.<br />
C. Before applying paint or other surface treatments, Clean substrates of substances that could<br />
impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.<br />
Schedule cleaning and painting sawdust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will<br />
not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces.<br />
1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required<br />
to produce paint systems indicated.<br />
D. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's<br />
written instructions for each particular substrate condition.<br />
E. Cement Fiber Panel Substrates: Remove release agents, curing compounds, efflorescence, and<br />
chalk dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or<br />
alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written<br />
instructions.<br />
1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If<br />
surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this<br />
condition. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in<br />
manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
F. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in<br />
writing by paint manufacturer.<br />
G. Galvanized-Metal Substrates: Remove grease and oil residue from galvanized sheet metal<br />
fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods to produce clean, lightly etched surfaces that<br />
promote adhesion of subsequently applied paints.<br />
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
H. Wood Substrates: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers,<br />
mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required.<br />
1. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or<br />
other recommended coat of knot sealer before applying primer.<br />
2. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery.<br />
3. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view, and dust off.<br />
4. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.<br />
5. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in the finish surfaces with putty or plastic<br />
wood filler. Sand smooth when dried.<br />
6. Seal tops, bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or<br />
sealer immediately on delivery.<br />
I. Plastic Trim Fabrication Substrates: Remove dust, dirt, and other foreign material that might<br />
impair bond of paints to substrates.<br />
J. Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until plaster is fully cured and dry.<br />
K. Exterior Gypsum Board Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is<br />
dry and sanded smooth.<br />
L. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated;<br />
remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or<br />
mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC)<br />
recommendations.<br />
1. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush,<br />
clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with the same<br />
primer as the shop coat.<br />
2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so<br />
surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized<br />
sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods.<br />
M. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written<br />
instructions.<br />
1. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required<br />
during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface<br />
film and strain material before using.<br />
2. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits.<br />
3.3 APPLICATION<br />
A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Use applicators and techniques best suited for paint and substrate indicated and type of<br />
material being applied.<br />
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, nails, tacks, tape,<br />
hangers or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film.<br />
3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used.<br />
4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in items are<br />
in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and<br />
provide desired protection.<br />
5. Paint surfaces behind movable items same as similar exposed surfaces. Before the final<br />
installation of equipment, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture<br />
with prime coat only.<br />
6. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces.<br />
7. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces.<br />
8. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat.<br />
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or<br />
otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent<br />
surface deterioration.<br />
1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application<br />
method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended<br />
by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface<br />
according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications.<br />
C. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of<br />
same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide<br />
sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.<br />
D. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final topcoat, apply additional coats<br />
until cured paint film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.<br />
1. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat<br />
surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under<br />
moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause<br />
the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion.<br />
E. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks,<br />
roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color<br />
breaks.<br />
F. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators<br />
according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
G. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's<br />
recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as<br />
recommended by the manufacturer.<br />
H. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by<br />
the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been<br />
prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or<br />
unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other<br />
defects due to insufficient sealing.<br />
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
I. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove,<br />
refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements.<br />
J. Back roll all finish coat paint application regardless of how prime coats have been applied.<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any<br />
time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied:<br />
1. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being<br />
used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplyingpaint<br />
materials from <strong>Project</strong> site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with<br />
rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from<br />
previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are<br />
incompatible.<br />
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from<br />
<strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
B. After completing painting paint application, clean glass and paint- spattered surfaces. Remove<br />
spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent<br />
finished surfaces.<br />
C. Protect work of other trades, against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work<br />
of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and<br />
leave in an undamaged condition.<br />
D. Provide “wet paint” signs to protect newly painted finishes. Remove temporary protective<br />
wrappings provided by others to protect their work after completing painting operations.<br />
E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or<br />
defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P1.<br />
F. Paint schedules: Provide the following paint systems for the various substrates indicated:<br />
3.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE<br />
A. Cement Fiber Board Substrates:<br />
1. Latex System:<br />
B. Steel Substrates:<br />
a. Prime Coat: Kwal 5940 Acu-Guard or equal.<br />
b. Topcoats: Kwal Liquid Vinyl Coro-Tile (semi gloss) or equal.<br />
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Alkyd System: MPI EXT 5.1D.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Kwal 9210 or equal.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Kwal 9800 Accu-Pro Alkyd or equal.<br />
c. Topcoat: Kwal 9800 Accu-Pro Alkyd (gloss level 6) or equal.<br />
C. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:<br />
1. Latex Over Water-Based Primer System: MPI EXT 5.3H.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Kwal 5810 Ambassador G-Prime (non-flat) or equal.<br />
b. Topcoat: Kwal 3900 Accu-Shield (semi-gloss) or equal.<br />
D. Dressed Lumber Substrates: Including doors.<br />
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.3L.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Kwal 5862 Embassy Cancel or equal.<br />
b. Topcoat: Kwal 3900 Accu-Shield (semi-gloss) or equal.<br />
c. Sherwin-Williams A100 (semi-gloss).<br />
E. Wood Panel Substrates: Including plywood siding fascias soffits.<br />
1. Latex System: MPI EXT 6.4K.<br />
a. Prime Coat: Kwal 5862 Embassy Cancel or equal.<br />
b. Intermediate Coat: Kwal 3000 Accu-Pro Acrylic PC (semi-gloss) or equal.<br />
c. Topcoat: Kwal 3000 Accu-Pro Acrylic PC (semi-gloss) or equal.<br />
END OF SECTION 099113<br />
EXTERIOR PAINTING 099133 - 10
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Markerboards.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 09 Section "Fabric-Wrapped Panels" for tackable, fabric-covered wall surfaces.<br />
2. Division 10 Section "Display Cases" for individually framed and enclosed, wall-mounted<br />
bulletin boards and for bulletin boards in built-in trophy and display cases.<br />
3. Division 10 Section "Directories" for bulletin boards within built-in directories.<br />
4. Division 26 Sections for wiring and other electrical work associated with power-operated,<br />
visual display surfaces.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Tackboard: Framed or unframed, tackable, visual display board assembly.<br />
B. Visual Display Board Assembly: Visual display surface that is factory fabricated into<br />
composite panel form, either with or without a perimeter frame; includes chalkboards,<br />
markerboards, and tackboards.<br />
C. Visual Display Surface: Surfaces that are used to convey information visually, including<br />
surfaces of chalkboards, markerboards, tackboards, and surfacing materials that are not<br />
fabricated into composite panel form but are applied directly to walls.<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.[ Include construction details, material<br />
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for visual<br />
display surfaces.]<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Data for Credit MR 2.2: For adhesives, documentation including printed<br />
statement of VOC content.<br />
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and<br />
attachments to other work.<br />
1. Show locations of panel joints.<br />
2. Show locations of special-purpose graphics for visual display surfaces.<br />
3. Include sections of typical trim members.<br />
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display surface indicated, for units with<br />
factory-applied color finishes, and as follows:<br />
1. Actual sections of porcelain-enamel face sheet.<br />
2. Fabric swatches of fabric-faced tack assemblies.<br />
3. Include accessory Samples to verify color selected.<br />
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated.<br />
1. Visual Display Surface: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches, mounted on substrate indicated<br />
for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required.<br />
2. Trim: 6-inch- long sections of each trim profile.<br />
3. Display Rail: 6-inch- long sections.<br />
4. Modular Support System: 6-inch- long sections.<br />
5. Accessories: Full-size Sample of each type of accessory.<br />
F. Product Schedule: For visual display surfaces.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.<br />
B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified<br />
testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics.<br />
C. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.<br />
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance<br />
manuals.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved<br />
for installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units required for this <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
B. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display surfaces from single source from single<br />
manufacturer.<br />
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to<br />
ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of<br />
applicable testing agency.<br />
1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.<br />
2. Smoke-Developed Index: [50] [450] or less.<br />
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver factory-built visual display surfaces, including factory-applied trim where indicated,<br />
completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed<br />
maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to<br />
Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the<br />
factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site.<br />
B. Store visual display surfaces vertically with packing materials between each unit.<br />
1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display surfaces until spaces are<br />
enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is<br />
complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and<br />
humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.<br />
B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display<br />
surfaces by field measurements before fabrication.<br />
1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might<br />
delay the Work.<br />
1.10 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer's standard form in which<br />
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or<br />
workmanship within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Surfaces lose original writing and erasing qualities.<br />
b. Surfaces exhibit crazing, cracking, or flaking.<br />
2. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL<br />
A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: ASTM A 424, enameling-grade steel, uncoated thickness<br />
indicated; with exposed face and edges coated with primer, 1.7-to-2.5-mil- thick ground coat,<br />
and color cover coat; and with concealed face coated with primer and 1.7-to-2.5-mil- thick<br />
ground coat.<br />
1. Gloss-Finish Cover Coat: Gloss as indicated; dry-erase markers wipe clean with dry<br />
cloth or standard eraser. Minimum 3.0-to-4.0-mil- thick cover coat. Cover and ground<br />
coats shall be fused to steel at manufacturer's standard firing temperatures but not less<br />
than 1475 deg F.<br />
a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following.<br />
1) PolyVision Corporation, a Steelcase company; P 3 ceramicsteel<br />
Markerboard.<br />
B. Natural Cork Sheet: Seamless, single-layer, compressed fine-grain cork sheet; bulletin board<br />
quality; face sanded for natural finish[ with surface-burning characteristics indicated].<br />
C. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered.<br />
D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1.<br />
E. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208.<br />
F. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063.<br />
G. Adhesives: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with the testing and product<br />
requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the<br />
Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental<br />
Chambers."<br />
2.2 MARKERBOARD ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboards: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard<br />
assembly of three-ply construction consisting of backing sheet, core material, and 0.021-inchthick,<br />
porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
a. AARCO Products, Inc.<br />
b. ADP Lemco, Inc.<br />
c. Aywon.<br />
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
d. Bangor Cork Company, Inc.<br />
e. Best-Rite Manufacturing.<br />
f. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc.<br />
g. Egan Visual Inc.<br />
h. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
i. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group.<br />
j. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.<br />
k. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.<br />
l. Tri-Best Visual Display Products.<br />
2. Hardboard Core: 1/4 inch thick; with backing.<br />
3. Particleboard Core: [3/8 inch] [1/2 inch] thick; with [0.005-inch- thick, aluminum foil]<br />
[0.015-inch- thick, aluminum sheet] [0.013-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet]<br />
backing.<br />
4. Fiberboard Core: [3/8 inch] [1/2 inch] thick; with [0.001-inch- thick, aluminum foil]<br />
[0.015-inch- thick, aluminum sheet] [0.013-inch- thick, galvanized-steel sheet]<br />
backing.<br />
5. Manufacturer's Standard Core: Minimum 1/4 inch thick, with manufacturer's standard<br />
moisture-barrier backing.<br />
6. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.<br />
2.3 MARKERBOARD ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- thick, extruded<br />
aluminum; standard size and shape.<br />
1. Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard, snap-on trim with no visible screws or<br />
exposed joints.<br />
2. Factory-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
B. Chalktray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous.<br />
1. Box Type: Extruded aluminum with slanted front, grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end<br />
closures.<br />
2.<br />
2.4 FABRICATION<br />
A. Porcelain-Enamel Visual Display Assemblies: Laminate porcelain-enamel face sheet and<br />
backing sheet to core material under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard flexible,<br />
waterproof adhesive.<br />
B. Visual Display Boards: Field assemble visual display boards unless otherwise indicated.<br />
1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual<br />
display boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment.<br />
C. Factory-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate factory-assembled units with trim and<br />
accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.<br />
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate<br />
with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to<br />
Architect.<br />
2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint [spline] [H-trim] system between abutting<br />
sections of markerboards.<br />
3. Provide manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between markerboards of<br />
combination units.<br />
4. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to<br />
normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by<br />
Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions<br />
indicated.<br />
D. Modular Visual Display Boards: Fabricated with integral panel clips attached to core material.<br />
E. Aluminum Frames[ and Trim]: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to<br />
a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure.<br />
1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual<br />
display units at manufacturer's factory before shipment.<br />
2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes <strong>Manual</strong> for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,<br />
temporary protective covering before shipping.<br />
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.<br />
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of<br />
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.<br />
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES<br />
A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.<br />
B. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A32/A34, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.<br />
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness<br />
of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion<br />
coating, and applying and baking finish.<br />
2.7 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACE SCHEDULE<br />
A. Visual Display Board Factory assembled.<br />
1. Markerboard: Porcelain-enamel markerboard assembly.<br />
a. Color: White.<br />
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Corners: Square.<br />
3. Width: As indicated on Drawings.<br />
4. Height: As indicated on Drawings.<br />
5. Mounting: Wall.<br />
6. Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings.<br />
7. Factory-Applied Aluminum Trim: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color<br />
densities.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of<br />
the Work.<br />
B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of connections<br />
before installation of motor-operated, sliding visual display units.<br />
C. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display surfaces.<br />
D. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth where sliding visual display units will<br />
be installed.<br />
E. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.<br />
B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth,<br />
finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew.<br />
C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings,<br />
cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual<br />
display surfaces and wall surfaces.<br />
1. Prime wall surfaces indicated to receive visual display wall coverings and as<br />
recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall covering manufacturer.<br />
2. Prepare surfaces to receive visual display wall coverings and test for moisture according<br />
to requirements specified in Division 09 Section "Wall Coverings."<br />
3. Prepare substrates indicated to receive visual display wall covering as required by<br />
manufacturer's written instructions to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound<br />
surface that is uniform in color.<br />
a. Moisture Content: Maximum of [4] percent when tested with<br />
an electronic moisture meter.<br />
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
b. Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Prime with<br />
primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall<br />
covering manufacturer.<br />
c. Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply metal as recommended in writing<br />
by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall covering manufacturer.<br />
d. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer<br />
manufacturer and wall covering manufacturer.<br />
e. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.<br />
D. Prepare recesses for sliding visual display units as required by type and size of unit.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on<br />
Drawings. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing<br />
materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete<br />
installation.<br />
3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIELD-FABRICATED VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS AND<br />
ASSEMBLIES<br />
A. Field-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate field-assembled units with grounds, trim,<br />
and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.<br />
1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate<br />
with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to<br />
Architect.<br />
2. Provide manufacturer's standard vertical-joint [spline] [H-trim] system between abutting<br />
sections of markerboards.<br />
3. Provide manufacturer's standard mullion trim at joints between markerboards of<br />
combination units.<br />
4. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to<br />
normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by<br />
Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Natural-Slate Chalkboards: Align and level joints between adjoining panels and apply<br />
manufacturer's recommended joint-filler compound. Hone and finish joints to continuous even<br />
plane.<br />
3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one<br />
cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.<br />
B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.<br />
C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning.<br />
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
END OF SECTION 101100<br />
VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 101100 - 9
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Dimensional characters.<br />
2. Panel signs.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary <strong>Project</strong><br />
identification signs and for temporary information and directional signs.<br />
2. Division 22 Section "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment for labels, tags,<br />
and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment.<br />
3. Division 23 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment" for labels, tags, and<br />
nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment.<br />
4. Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labels, tags, and<br />
nameplates for electrical equipment.<br />
5. Division 26 Section "Interior Lighting" for illuminated Exit signs.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance<br />
Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and<br />
Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.<br />
1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by<br />
others, and accessories.<br />
2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and<br />
Braille, and layout for each sign.<br />
SIGNAGE 101400 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections<br />
of units showing the full range of colors available for the following:<br />
1. Aluminum.<br />
2. Acrylic sheet.<br />
3. Polycarbonate sheet.<br />
4. Fiberglass sheet.<br />
5. Die-cut vinyl characters and graphic symbols. Include representative samples of<br />
available typestyles and graphic symbols.<br />
D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color,<br />
texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated:<br />
1. Aluminum: For each form, finish, and color, on 6-inch- long sections of extrusions and<br />
squares of sheet at least 4 by 4 inches.<br />
2. Acrylic Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required.<br />
3. Polycarbonate Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required.<br />
4. Fiberglass Sheet: 8 by 10 inches for each color required.<br />
5. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches square including border.<br />
E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.<br />
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products<br />
similar to those required for this <strong>Project</strong> and whose products have a record of successful inservice<br />
performance.<br />
B. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single<br />
manufacturer.<br />
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility<br />
Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.<br />
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather<br />
conditions permit installation of signs in exterior locations to be performed according to<br />
manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements.<br />
SIGNAGE 101400 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and<br />
indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.<br />
1.9 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.<br />
1.10 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty<br />
period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering.<br />
b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image colors and sign lamination.<br />
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, of alloy and temper recommended by sign<br />
manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated.<br />
B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum<br />
producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and<br />
durability properties of Alloy 5005-H32.<br />
C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer<br />
and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with at least the strength and durability<br />
properties of Alloy 6063-T5.<br />
D. Fiberglass Sheet: Molded, seamless, thermosetting, glass-fiber-reinforced polyester panels with<br />
a minimum tensile strength of 15,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 638 and with a<br />
minimum flexural strength of 30,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790.<br />
E. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).<br />
F. Polycarbonate Sheet: Of thickness indicated, manufactured by extrusion process, coated on<br />
both surfaces with abrasion-resistant coating:<br />
1. Impact Resistance: 16 ft-lbf/in. per ASTM D 256, Method A.<br />
2. Tensile Strength: 9000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 638.<br />
3. Flexural Modulus of Elasticity: 340,000 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 790.<br />
4. Heat Deflection: 265 deg F at 264 lbf/sq. in. per ASTM D 648.<br />
SIGNAGE 101400 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
5. Abrasion Resistance: 1.5 percent maximum haze increase for 100 revolutions of a Taber<br />
abraser with a load of 500 g per ASTM D 1044.<br />
2.2 DIMENSIONAL CHARACTERS<br />
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc.<br />
2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division.<br />
3. A. R. K. Ramos.<br />
4. ASI-Modulex, Inc.<br />
5. Bunting Graphics, Inc.<br />
6. Charleston Industries, Inc.<br />
7. Gemini Incorporated.<br />
8. Grimco, Inc.<br />
9. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.<br />
10. Metal Arts; Div. of L&H Mfg. Co.<br />
11. Mills Manufacturing Company.<br />
12. Mohawk Sign Systems.<br />
13. Nelson-Harkins Industries.<br />
14. Signature Signs, Incorporated.<br />
15. Southwell Company (The).<br />
C. Cast Characters: Produce characters with smooth flat faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed<br />
lines and profiles, free of pits, scale, sand holes, and other defects. Cast lugs into back of<br />
characters and tap to receive threaded mounting studs. Alloy and temper recommended by sign<br />
manufacturer for casting process used and for use and finish indicated. Comply with the<br />
following requirements.<br />
1. Character Material: Aluminum.<br />
2. Thickness: As indicated.<br />
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
4. Mounting: Concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered.<br />
D. Aluminum Extrusions: Comply with the following requirements:<br />
1. Finish: Anodized.<br />
2. Thickness: As indicated.<br />
3. Color(s): As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
4. Mounting: Concealed studs, noncorroding for substrates encountered.<br />
E. Dimensional Character Sign Schedule:<br />
1. Sign Type:<br />
a. Sign Size: As indicated.<br />
SIGNAGE 101400 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
b. Character Size: 6”.<br />
c. Text/Message: Plaza Feliz.<br />
d. Location: As indicated.<br />
2.3 PANEL SIGNS<br />
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc.<br />
2. Advance Corporation; Braille-Tac Division.<br />
3. Allen Industries Architectural Signage<br />
4. Allenite Signs; Allen Marking Products, Inc.<br />
5. APCO Graphics, Inc.<br />
6. ASI-Modulex, Inc.<br />
7. Best Sign Systems Inc.<br />
8. Bunting Graphics, Inc.<br />
9. Fossil Industries, Inc.<br />
10. Gemini Incorporated.<br />
11. Grimco, Inc.<br />
12. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc.<br />
13. InPro Corporation<br />
14. Matthews International Corporation; Bronze Division.<br />
15. Mills Manufacturing Company.<br />
16. Mohawk Sign Systems.<br />
17. Nelson-Harkins Industries.<br />
18. Seton Identification Products.<br />
19. Signature Signs, Incorporated.<br />
20. Supersine Company (The)<br />
B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under<br />
installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from<br />
corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:<br />
1. Laminated, Polycarbonate-Faced Sheet: 0.060-inch-thick, polycarbonate face sheet<br />
laminated to each side of 0.197-inch-thick phenolic backing.<br />
2. Acrylic Sheet: 0.060 inch-thick.<br />
3. PVC Sheet: 0.060-inch-thick, extruded, high-impact PVC plastic in color to match face<br />
color.<br />
4. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: 0.048 inch thick.<br />
5. Phenolic-Backed Photopolymer Sheet: Provide light-sensitive, water-wash photopolymer<br />
face layer bonded to a phenolic base layer to produce a composite sheet with overall, face<br />
layer, and base-layer thicknesses, respectively, of 0.120, 0.040, and 0.080 inch.<br />
6. Laminated Sheet: High-pressure engraved stock with contrasting color face laminated to<br />
acrylic core as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
7. Edge Condition: Square cut.<br />
8. Corner Condition: Square.<br />
9. Mounting: Unframed.<br />
a. Wall mounted with two-face tape.<br />
b. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered.<br />
SIGNAGE 101400 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
10. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
11. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface with<br />
contrasting colors.<br />
C. Tactile and Braille Sign: Manufacturer's standard process for producing text and symbols<br />
complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1. Text shall be<br />
accompanied by Grade 2 Braille. Produce precisely formed characters with square-cut edges<br />
free from burrs and cut marks; Braille dots with domed or rounded shape.<br />
1. Panel Material: Opaque acrylic sheet.<br />
2. Raised-Copy Thickness: Not less than 1/32 inch.<br />
D. Engraved Copy: Machine engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic devices into<br />
panel sign on face indicated to produce precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth.<br />
1. Engraved Plastic Laminate: Engrave through exposed face ply of plastic-laminate sheet<br />
to expose contrasting core ply.<br />
2. Engraved Metal: Fill engraved copy with enamel.<br />
3. Engraved Opaque Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel.<br />
4. Face-Engraved Clear Acrylic Sheet: Fill engraved copy with enamel. Apply opaque<br />
background color coating to back face of acrylic sheet.<br />
E. Subsurface Copy: Apply minimum 4-mil-thick vinyl copy to back face of clear acrylic sheet<br />
forming panel face to produce precisely formed opaque image. Image shall be free of rough<br />
edges.<br />
F. Subsurface Engraved Acrylic Sheet: Reverse-engrave back face of clear acrylic sheet. Fill<br />
resulting copy with enamel. Apply opaque background color coating over enamel-filled copy.<br />
G. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background colors, provide colored coatings,<br />
including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum<br />
adherence to acrylic surface and are UV and water resistant for three years for application<br />
intended.<br />
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
2.4 ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for<br />
exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or<br />
lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set<br />
into concrete or masonry work.<br />
2.5 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated.<br />
1. Welded Connections: Comply with AWS standards for recommended practices in shop<br />
welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of<br />
SIGNAGE 101400 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
exposed side. Clean exposed welded surfaces of welding flux and dress exposed and<br />
contact surfaces.<br />
2. Mill joints to tight, hairline fit. Form joints exposed to weather to exclude water<br />
penetration.<br />
3. Preassemble signs in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble signs only as<br />
necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and<br />
installation, in location not exposed to view after final assembly.<br />
4. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be<br />
inconspicuous.<br />
2.6 FINISHES, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes <strong>Manual</strong> for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,<br />
temporary protective covering before shipping.<br />
C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are<br />
acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations<br />
in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are<br />
acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to<br />
minimize contrast.<br />
2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES<br />
A. Clear Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 clear anodic coating, 0.018 mm or<br />
thicker, over a satin directionally textured mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.<br />
B. Color Anodic Finish: Manufacturer's standard Class 1 integrally colored or electrolytically<br />
deposited color anodic coating, 0.018 mm or thicker, in dark bronze applied over a satin<br />
directionally textured mechanical finish, complying with AAMA 611.<br />
C. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter<br />
and leave surfaces chemically clean.<br />
2.8 ACRYLIC SHEET FINISHES<br />
A. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Sheet: For copy and background and frame colors, provide<br />
colored coatings, including inks, dyes, and paints, that are recommended by acrylic<br />
manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and that are UV and water resistant for<br />
three-five years for application intended.<br />
SIGNAGE 101400 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with<br />
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.<br />
B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, and electrical power are sized and located to<br />
accommodate signs.<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and<br />
complying with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion<br />
and other defects in appearance.<br />
2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable.<br />
Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent<br />
walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding<br />
objects or standing within swing of door.<br />
B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more<br />
stringent requirements apply.<br />
1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for<br />
vinyl-covered or rough surfaces.<br />
2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered<br />
surfaces.<br />
3. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to<br />
conceal mounting materials.<br />
C. Dimensional Characters: Mount characters using standard fastening methods to comply with<br />
manufacturer's written instructions for character form, type of mounting, wall construction, and<br />
condition of exposure indicated. Provide heavy paper template to establish character spacing<br />
and to locate holes for fasteners.<br />
1. Flush Mounting: Mount characters with backs in contact with wall surface.<br />
2. <strong>Project</strong>ed Mounting: Mount characters at projection distance from wall surface indicated.<br />
D. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.<br />
END OF SECTION 101400<br />
SIGNAGE 101400 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 102600 - WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Corner guards.<br />
2. Impact-resistant wall coverings.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for metal angle corner guards .<br />
2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware" for metal armor, kick, mop, and push plates.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, impact strength, dimensions<br />
of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each impact-resistant wall protection<br />
unit.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Certificates for Credit MR 7: Chain-of-custody certificates certifying that wood rails<br />
comply with forest certification requirements. Include evidence that manufacturer is<br />
certified for chain of custody by an FSC-accredited certification body.<br />
a. Include statement indicating costs for each certified wood product.<br />
2. Product Data for Credit EQ 4: For adhesives, including printed statement of VOC<br />
content.<br />
3. Product Data for Credit EQ 4: For particleboard, documentation indicating that products<br />
contain no urea formaldehyde.<br />
C. Shop Drawings: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit showing locations and extent.<br />
Include sections, details, and attachments to other work.<br />
1. For installed products indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis<br />
data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their<br />
preparation.<br />
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of impact-resistant wall protection unit indicated.<br />
1. Include similar Samples of accent strips and accessories involving color selection.<br />
E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size<br />
indicated below.<br />
1. Corner Guards: 12 inches long. Include examples of joinery, corners, end caps, top caps,<br />
and field splices.<br />
2. Impact-Resistant Wall Covering: 6 by 6 inches square.<br />
F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.<br />
G. Material Certificates: For each impact-resistant plastic material, from manufacturer.<br />
H. Material Test Reports: For each impact-resistant plastic material.<br />
I. Maintenance Data: For each impact-resistant wall protection unit to include in maintenance<br />
manuals.<br />
1. Include recommended methods and frequency of maintenance for maintaining optimum<br />
condition of plastic covers under anticipated traffic and use conditions. Include<br />
precautions against using cleaning materials and methods that may be detrimental to<br />
plastic finishes and performance.<br />
J. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.<br />
B. Source Limitations: Obtain impact-resistant wall protection units from single source from<br />
single manufacturer.<br />
C. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of impactresistant<br />
wall protection units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to<br />
Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."<br />
1. Do not modify intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with<br />
Architect's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory<br />
data to Architect for review.<br />
D. Forest Certification: Fabricate wood rails from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSCaccredited<br />
certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for<br />
Forest Stewardship."<br />
E. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Provide impact-resistant, plastic wall protection units with<br />
surface-burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84,<br />
NFPA 255, or UL 723 by UL or another qualified testing agency.<br />
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
F. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &<br />
Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and<br />
ICC/ANSI A117.1.<br />
G. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Store impact-resistant wall protection units in original undamaged packages and containers<br />
inside well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and<br />
humidity.<br />
1. Maintain room temperature within storage area at not less than 70 deg F during the period<br />
plastic materials are stored.<br />
2. Keep plastic sheet material out of direct sunlight.<br />
3. Store plastic wall protection components for a minimum of 72 hours, or until plastic<br />
material attains a minimum room temperature of 70 deg F.<br />
a. Store corner-guard covers in a vertical position.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install impact-resistant wall protection units until<br />
building is enclosed and weatherproof, wet work is complete and dry, and HVAC system is<br />
operating and maintaining temperature at 70 deg F for not less than 72 hours before beginning<br />
installation and for the remainder of the construction period.<br />
1.7 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace components of impact-resistant wall protection units that fail in materials or<br />
workmanship within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Structural failures.<br />
b. Deterioration of plastic and other materials beyond normal use.<br />
2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective<br />
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
B. Include mounting and accessory components. Replacement materials shall be from same<br />
production run as installed units.<br />
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M.<br />
B. Adhesive: As recommended by impact-resistant plastic wall protection manufacturer and with a<br />
VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA<br />
Method 24).<br />
2.2 CORNER GUARDS<br />
A. Surface-Mounted, Metal Corner Guards: Fabricated from one-piece, formed or extruded metal<br />
with formed edges; with 90- or 135-degree turn to match wall condition.<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide model 180<br />
CMT as manufactured by IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems, InPro Corporation or<br />
equal product by one of the following:<br />
a. American Floor Products Co., Inc.<br />
b. Arden Architectural Specialties, Inc.<br />
c. Balco, Inc.<br />
d. Boston Retail Products.<br />
e. <strong>Construction</strong> Specialties, Inc.<br />
f. IPC Door and Wall Protection Systems; Division of InPro Corporation.<br />
g. Korogard Wall Protection Systems; a division of RJF International Corporation.<br />
h. Pawling Corporation.<br />
i. Tepromark International, Inc.<br />
j. WallGuard.com.<br />
2. Material: Stainless steel, Type 430.<br />
a. Thickness: 16 gauge.<br />
b. Finish: Directional satin, No. 4.<br />
3. Wing Size: Nominal 3-1/2 by 3-1/2 inches.<br />
4. Corner Radius: 1/8 inch .<br />
5. Mounting: Adhesive.<br />
2.3 IMPACT-RESISTANT WALL COVERINGS<br />
A. Impact-Resistant Sheet Wall Covering: Fabricated from fiberglass reinforced plastic wallcovering<br />
material.<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide FRP as<br />
manufactured by Marlite, 202 Harger St. Dover, Ohio 44622, 1-800-377-1221 or equal<br />
by one of the following:<br />
2. Size: 48 by 96 inches for sheet .<br />
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Sheet Thickness: 3/32” inches.<br />
4. Color and Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range, embossed.<br />
5. Height: Full wall As indicated.<br />
6. Trim and Joint Moldings: Extruded rigid plastic that matches sheet wall covering color.<br />
7. Mounting: Adhesive, manufacturers recommended low VOC adhesive.<br />
2.4 FABRICATION<br />
A. Fabricate impact-resistant wall protection units to comply with requirements indicated for<br />
design, dimensions, and member sizes, including thicknesses of components.<br />
B. Assemble components in factory to greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly.<br />
Disassemble only as necessary for shipping and handling.<br />
C. Fabricate components with tight seams and joints with exposed edges rolled. Provide surfaces<br />
free of wrinkles, chips, dents, uneven coloration, and other imperfections. Fabricate members<br />
and fittings to produce flush, smooth, and rigid hairline joints.<br />
D. Miter corners and ends of wood handrails for returns.<br />
2.5 METAL FINISHES<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes <strong>Manual</strong> for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
1. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.<br />
2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform finish, free of cross scratches.<br />
3. Run grain of directional finishes with long dimension of each piece.<br />
4. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign<br />
matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.<br />
B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary<br />
protective covering before shipping.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and wall areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.<br />
B. Examine walls to which impact-resistant wall protection will be attached for blocking, grounds,<br />
and other solid backing that have been installed in the locations required for secure attachment<br />
of support fasteners.<br />
1. For impact-resistant wall protection units attached with adhesive or foam tape, verify<br />
compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing<br />
finishes or primers.<br />
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Complete finishing operations, including painting, before installing impact-resistant wall<br />
protection system components.<br />
B. Before installation, clean substrate to remove dust, debris, and loose particles.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install impact-resistant wall protection units level, plumb, and true to line without<br />
distortions. Do not use materials with chips, cracks, voids, stains, or other defects that might be<br />
visible in the finished Work.<br />
1. Install impact-resistant wall protection units in locations and at mounting heights<br />
indicated on Drawings including but not limited to;<br />
a. Corner protection to be installed 4’ high on all drywall outside corners at the<br />
following locations:<br />
1) Classroom entry door walls<br />
2) Library ramp and stair low walls<br />
2. Install impact-resistant wall protection panels in locations indicated on Drawings<br />
including but not limited to:<br />
a. Custodial closets on walls adjacent to floor sink<br />
3. Provide splices, mounting hardware, anchors, and other accessories required for a<br />
complete installation.<br />
a. Provide anchoring devices to withstand imposed loads.<br />
b. Where splices occur in horizontal runs of more than 20 feet, splice aluminum<br />
retainers and plastic covers at different locations along the run, but no closer than<br />
12 inches.<br />
c. Adjust end and top caps as required to ensure tight seams.<br />
B. Impact-Resistant Wall Covering: Install top and edge moldings, corners, and divider bars as<br />
required for a complete installation.<br />
3.4 CLEANING<br />
A. Immediately after completion of installation, clean plastic covers and accessories using a<br />
standard, ammonia-based, household cleaning agent.<br />
B. Remove excess adhesive using methods and materials recommended in writing by<br />
manufacturer.<br />
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
END OF SECTION 102600<br />
WALL AND DOOR PROTECTION 102600 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 102800 - TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Private-use bathroom accessories.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following:<br />
1. <strong>Construction</strong> details and dimensions.<br />
2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work<br />
and substrate preparation.<br />
3. Material and finish descriptions.<br />
4. Features that will be included for <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
5. Manufacturer's warranty.<br />
B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements.<br />
1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.<br />
C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each<br />
accessory required.<br />
1. Identify locations using room designations indicated on Drawings.<br />
2. Identify products using designations indicated on Drawings.<br />
D. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same articles in Part 2, provide products<br />
of same manufacturer unless otherwise approved by Architect.<br />
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.5 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required<br />
for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation,<br />
cleaning, and servicing of accessories.<br />
B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent<br />
delaying the Work.<br />
1.6 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to<br />
replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or<br />
workmanship within specified warranty period.<br />
1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.0312-inch minimum nominal thickness, unless<br />
otherwise indicated.<br />
B. Brass: ASTM B 19 flat products; ASTM B 16, rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with<br />
finished edges; or ASTM B 30, castings.<br />
C. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.0359-<br />
inch minimum nominal thickness. Surface preparation and metal pretreatment as required for<br />
applied finish.<br />
D. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.<br />
E. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after<br />
fabrication.<br />
F. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-andtheft<br />
resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.<br />
G. Chrome Plating: Nickel and chromium electro-deposited on base metal, ASTM B 456, Service<br />
Condition Number SC 2 (moderate service).<br />
H. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick,<br />
Type I, Class 1, Quality q2, and with silvering, electro-plated copper coating, and protective<br />
organic coating.<br />
I. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.<br />
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.2 PRIVATE-USE BATHROOM ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering<br />
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the<br />
following:<br />
C. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for accessories is based on products indicated. Subject to<br />
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by one of<br />
the following:<br />
1. Basco or equal.<br />
D. Grab Bar:<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Basco Model#17 and #19 at HC toilet rooms.<br />
2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.<br />
3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch thick.<br />
a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4, satin finish on ends and slip-resistant texture in grip area.<br />
Gripping Surfaces: Manufacturer's standard nonslip texture.<br />
4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/4 inches.<br />
5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.<br />
6. Clearance: 1-1/2-inch clearance between wall surface and inside face of bar.<br />
E. Toilet Tissue Dispenser:<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Basco Model #511.<br />
2. Description: Single-roll dispenser.<br />
3. Mounting: Surface mounted.<br />
4. Capacity: Designed for 5-inch- diameter tissue rolls.<br />
5. Material and Finish: Polished chrome-plated zinc alloy (zamac).<br />
F. Shower Curtain Rod:<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Basco Model #1210.<br />
2. Outside Diameter: 1 inch.<br />
3. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.<br />
4. Rod Material and Finish: aluminum, satin finish.<br />
5. Flange Material and Finish: Adjustable chrome plated, Model #1201.<br />
6. Accessories: Integral chrome-plated brass glide hooks.<br />
G. Medicine Cabinet:<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Basco Model #FM325PE-W.<br />
2. Mounting: Recessed, for nominal 4-inch wall depth.<br />
3. Size: 16” x 24”.<br />
4. Door: 3/16” plate glass mirror door.<br />
5. Shelves: Three glass shelves.<br />
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
H. Robe Hook:<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Basco Model #535.<br />
2. Description: Double-prong unit.<br />
3. Material and Finish: Aluminum.<br />
I. Towel Bar:<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Basco Model 5530A.<br />
2. Description: 5/8” square.<br />
3. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners.<br />
4. Length: 30 inches.<br />
5. Material and Finish: Polished aluminum.<br />
2.3 FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and<br />
access panels with full-length, continuous stainless steel piano hinges. Equip units for<br />
concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.<br />
B. Only a maximum 1-1/2-inch diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as approved by<br />
Architect, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior<br />
surface not exposed to view or back surface, provide additional identification by means of either<br />
a waterproof, printed label or a stamped nameplate, indicating manufacturer's name and product<br />
model number.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate<br />
to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and<br />
firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.<br />
B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to<br />
method in ASTM F 446.<br />
C. Secure mirrors to walls in concealed, tamperproof manner with special hangers, toggle bolts, or<br />
screws. Set units plumb, level, and square at locations indicated, in accordance with<br />
manufacturer's instructions for type of substrate involved.<br />
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.<br />
B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.<br />
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations after<br />
removing temporary labels and protective coatings.<br />
END OF SECTION 102800<br />
TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 102800 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes portable, fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 10 Section "Fire Extinguisher Cabinets."<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rating and classification, material<br />
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire<br />
extinguisher and mounting brackets.<br />
B. Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire extinguisher schedule with fire<br />
protection cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated<br />
on Drawings.<br />
1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.<br />
1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable<br />
Fire Extinguishers."<br />
B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent<br />
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FMG.<br />
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104116 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.7 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and<br />
function.<br />
1.8 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty<br />
period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.<br />
b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.<br />
2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS<br />
A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting<br />
bracket indicated.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kidde<br />
Model “Fireaway #FA110G 110” (inside residential units) and “Badger” Model # 5MB-<br />
6H (all other locations) indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. Amerex Corporation.<br />
b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.<br />
c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.<br />
d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.<br />
e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.<br />
f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar <strong>Construction</strong> Products Group.<br />
g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc.<br />
h. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.<br />
i. Moon-American.<br />
j. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc.<br />
k. Potter Roemer LLC.<br />
l. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.<br />
3. Valves: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
4. Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104116 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
5. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10,<br />
Appendix B.<br />
B. Pressurized, AFFF-Foam Type: UL-rated 2-A:10-B, 1.6-gal. nominal capacity, with AFFF<br />
foam in stainless-steel container; with pressure-indicating gage.<br />
C. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: UL-rated 2-A:10-B:C, 5-lb nominal<br />
capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.<br />
2.2 MOUNTING BRACKETS<br />
A. Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wall<br />
or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated<br />
or red baked-enamel finish.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product by<br />
one of the following:<br />
a. Amerex Corporation.<br />
b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd.<br />
c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company.<br />
d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company.<br />
e. Fire End & Croker Corporation.<br />
f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar <strong>Construction</strong> Products Group.<br />
g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.<br />
h. Potter Roemer LLC.<br />
B. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size,<br />
spacing, and location. Locate as indicated by Architect.<br />
1. Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in<br />
red letter decals applied to mounting surface.<br />
a. Orientation: Vertical.<br />
2.3 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.<br />
1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104116 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.4 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in<br />
compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.<br />
B. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations<br />
indicated.<br />
END OF SECTION 104416<br />
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104116 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Fire protection cabinets for the following:<br />
a. Portable fire extinguishers.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material<br />
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire protection<br />
cabinets.<br />
1. Fire Protection Cabinets: Include roughing-in dimensions, details showing mounting<br />
methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware,<br />
cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and<br />
attachments to other work.<br />
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of fire protection cabinet indicated.<br />
D. Product Schedule: For fire protection cabinets. Coordinate final fire protection cabinet schedule<br />
with fire extinguisher schedule to ensure proper fit and function.<br />
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Maintenance Data: For fire protection cabinets to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in<br />
ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.<br />
B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at <strong>Project</strong> site.<br />
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Review methods and procedures related to fire protection cabinets including, but not<br />
limited to, the following:<br />
a. Schedules and coordination requirements.<br />
1.6 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers<br />
indicated are accommodated.<br />
B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire hoses, hose<br />
valves, and hose racks indicated are accommodated.<br />
C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.<br />
1.7 SEQUENCING<br />
A. Apply decals or vinyl lettering on field-painted, fire protection cabinets after painting is<br />
complete.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.<br />
B. Tempered Break Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 1.5 mm<br />
thick.<br />
2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET<br />
A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.<br />
1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Fire End & Croker Corporation.<br />
b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar <strong>Construction</strong> Products Group.<br />
c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc.<br />
d. Larsen's Manufacturing Company.<br />
e. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc..<br />
f. Moon-American.<br />
g. Potter Roemer LLC.<br />
h. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.<br />
B. Cabinet <strong>Construction</strong>: Nonrated and 1-hour fire rated, as indicated on Drawings.<br />
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from<br />
0.0428-inch-thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch-thick, fire-barrier<br />
material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.<br />
C. Cabinet Material: Steel sheet.<br />
1. Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.<br />
2. Exposed Flat Trim: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping<br />
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge<br />
(backbend).<br />
D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of<br />
trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping<br />
surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).<br />
Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to<br />
accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation.<br />
1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.<br />
E. Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.<br />
F. Door Material: Steel sheet.<br />
G. Door Style: Fully glazed panel with frame.<br />
H. Door Glazing: Tempered break glass.<br />
I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet<br />
type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.<br />
1. Provide manufacturer's standard.<br />
2. Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open<br />
180 degrees.<br />
J. Accessories:<br />
1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire<br />
protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers<br />
indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.<br />
2. Break-Glass Strike: Manufacturer's standard metal strike, complete with chain and levertype<br />
with built-in hammer, secured to cabinet.<br />
3. Lettered Door Handle: One-piece, cast-iron door handle with the word "FIRE" embossed<br />
into face.<br />
4. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling<br />
sharply on door handle or Cylinder lock, keyed alike to other cabinets, as indicated.<br />
5. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style,<br />
size, spacing, and location.<br />
a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE<br />
EXTINGUISHER."<br />
1) Location: Applied to cabinet door.<br />
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2) Application Process: Decals or Pressure-sensitive vinyl letters.<br />
3) Lettering Color: Red.<br />
4) Orientation: Vertical.<br />
K. Finishes:<br />
1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following:<br />
a. Exterior of cabinet door, and trim except for those surfaces indicated to receive<br />
another finish.<br />
b. Interior of cabinet and door.<br />
2. Steel: Baked enamel or powder coat.<br />
2.3 FABRICATION<br />
A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and<br />
hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.<br />
1. Weld joints and grind smooth.<br />
2. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.<br />
3. Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.<br />
4. Install door locks at factory.<br />
B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated<br />
and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.<br />
1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2<br />
inch thick.<br />
2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.<br />
C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground<br />
smooth.<br />
2.4 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes <strong>Manual</strong> for Architectural and Metal Products" for<br />
recommendations for applying and designating finishes.<br />
B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire protection cabinets from damage by<br />
applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.<br />
C. Finish fire protection cabinets after assembly.<br />
D. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.<br />
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of<br />
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.<br />
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.5 STEEL FINISHES<br />
A. Surface Preparation: Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying<br />
with SSPC-SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning" or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling".<br />
B. Factory Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free,<br />
universal primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.<br />
C. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply<br />
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting<br />
topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to<br />
achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils.<br />
1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed<br />
cabinets will be installed.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Prepare recesses for semirecessed fire protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet<br />
and trim style.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General: Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not<br />
indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.<br />
1. Fire Protection Cabinets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of cabinet.<br />
B. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.<br />
1. Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.<br />
2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire protection cabinets, square and plumb.<br />
C. Identification: Apply decals or vinyl lettering at locations indicated.<br />
3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING<br />
A. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire protection cabinets<br />
are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturers written installation instructions.<br />
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral<br />
locking devices operate properly.<br />
C. On completion of fire protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as<br />
recommended by manufacturer.<br />
D. Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factoryfinished<br />
appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire<br />
protection cabinet and mounting bracket manufacturers.<br />
E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful<br />
repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.<br />
END OF SECTION 104413<br />
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 113100 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Cooking appliances.<br />
2. Refrigeration appliances.<br />
3. Clothes washing and drying appliances.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating<br />
characteristics, dimensions, furnished accessories, and finishes for each appliance.<br />
B. LEED Submittals:<br />
1. Product Data for LEED for Homes Credit EA 1: For appliances indicated, and where<br />
appliance and fuel type is rated by Energy Star, documentation that products are<br />
ENERGY STAR rated.<br />
C. Product Schedule: For appliances. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.<br />
D. Qualification Data: For qualified manufacturer.<br />
E. Product Certificates: For each type of appliance, from manufacturer.<br />
F. Field quality-control reports.<br />
G. Operation and Maintenance Data: For each residential appliance to include in operation and<br />
maintenance manuals.<br />
H. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Maintains, within 100 miles of <strong>Project</strong> site, a service center<br />
capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance repairs.<br />
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the following:<br />
1. NFPA: Provide electrical appliances listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a<br />
qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.<br />
2. ANSI: Provide gas-burning appliances that comply with ANSI Z21 Series standards.<br />
C. Accessibility: Where residential appliances are indicated to comply with accessibility<br />
requirements, comply with the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance<br />
Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and ICC/ANSI A117.1.<br />
1.5 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranties: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace residential appliances or components that fail in materials or workmanship within<br />
specified warranty period.<br />
1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
B. Refrigerator/Freezer, Sealed System: Full warranty including parts and labor for on-site service<br />
on the product.<br />
1. Warranty Period for Sealed Refrigeration System: Five years from date of Substantial<br />
Completion.<br />
2. Warranty Period for Other Components: five years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 RANGES<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated<br />
or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: General Electric JGBP25DEM.<br />
2. General Electric Company (GE).<br />
3. General Electric Company (Hotpoint).<br />
4. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.<br />
5. Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore).<br />
6. Width: 30 inches.<br />
7. Gas Burners: Four.<br />
a. Power Ratings: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
b. Controls: <strong>Manual</strong>-dial controls, located on front.<br />
c. Grates: Individual.<br />
d. Other Feature(s): Sealed burners.<br />
8. Oven Features:<br />
a. Operation: Baking and self-cleaning.<br />
b. Broiler: Located in top of oven.<br />
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
c. Oven Door(s): Counterbalanced, removable, with observation window and fullwidth<br />
handle.<br />
d. Gas Power Ratings:<br />
1) Oven(s): Manufacturer's standard.<br />
2) Broiler: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
e. Controls: <strong>Manual</strong>-dial controls and timer display, located on front.<br />
9. Anti-Tip Device: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
10. Electric Power Supply: 120 V, 60 Hz, 1 phase, 15 A.<br />
11. Material: Porcelain-enameled steel with manufacturer's standard cooktop.<br />
a. Color/Finish: White.<br />
2.2 REFRIGERATOR/FREEZERS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated<br />
or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. Electrolux Home Products (Frigidaire).<br />
2. General Electric Company (GE).<br />
3. General Electric Company (Hotpoint).<br />
4. KitchenAid; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.<br />
5. Maytag; a division of Whirlpool Corporation.<br />
6. Sears Brands LLC (Kenmore).<br />
7. Whirlpool Corporation.<br />
B. Refrigerator/Freezer: Two-door refrigerator/freezer with freezer on top and complying with<br />
AHAM HRF-1.<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Hotpoint Energy Star HTH17CBTWW.<br />
2. Type: Freestanding.<br />
3. Dimensions:<br />
a. Width: 28 inches.<br />
b. Depth: 29-1/8 inches, less door handle.<br />
c. Height: 64-1/4 inches.<br />
d. Height to mid-freezer: 54-3/8 inches.<br />
4. Storage Capacity: 16.6 cu. ft.<br />
5. Energy Performance, ENERGY STAR: Provide appliances that qualify for the<br />
EPA/DOE ENERGY STAR product labeling program.<br />
6. Appliance Color/Finish: White.<br />
C. Washer: White High-Efficiency, Front 4.0 cubic foot capacity, Energy Star rated, stackable.<br />
Basis of design products (contractor option): Kenmore 26-40272 or Samsung<br />
WF210ANW/XAA.<br />
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Dryer: GE or equal, White High-Efficiency, Front Load 7.3 cu.ft. gas dryer, stackable. Basis<br />
of design products (contractor option): Kenmore 26-902T2 or Samsung DV210AGW/XAA.<br />
2.3 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,<br />
temporary protective covering before shipping.<br />
B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.<br />
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of<br />
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances, power connections, and other conditions affecting installation and<br />
performance of residential appliances.<br />
B. Examine roughing-in for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections before<br />
appliance installation.<br />
C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of<br />
the Work.<br />
D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in<br />
each area. Verify that clearances are adequate to properly operate equipment.<br />
C. Range Anti-Tip Device: Install at each range according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Perform tests and inspections.<br />
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to<br />
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and<br />
to assist in testing.<br />
B. Tests and Inspections:<br />
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Perform visual, mechanical, and electrical inspection and testing for each appliance<br />
according to manufacturers' written recommendations. Certify compliance with each<br />
manufacturer's appliance-performance parameters.<br />
2. Leak Test: After installation, test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest until no leaks exist.<br />
3. Operational Test: After installation, start units to confirm proper operation.<br />
4. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and<br />
components.<br />
C. An appliance will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.<br />
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.<br />
END OF SECTION 113100<br />
RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES 113100 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 122113 - HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and<br />
Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. This Section includes the following:<br />
1. Horizontal louver blinds with aluminum slats.<br />
B. Related Sections include the following:<br />
1. Division 6 Section "Miscellaneous Carpentry" for wood blocking and grounds for mounting<br />
horizontal louver blinds and accessories.<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for horizontal louver blinds.<br />
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated.<br />
1. Include similar Samples of accessories involving color selection.<br />
D. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of horizontal louver blind indicated.<br />
1. Slat: Not less than 12 inches long.<br />
2. Tapes: Full width, not less than 6 inches long.<br />
3. Horizontal Louver Blind: Full-size unit, not less than 16 inches wide by 24 inches long.<br />
4. Valance: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches wide.<br />
5. Cornice: Full-size unit, not less than 12 inches wide.<br />
E. Window Treatment Schedule: For horizontal louver blinds. Use same designations indicated on<br />
Drawings.<br />
F. Product Certificates: For each type of horizontal louver blind, signed by product manufacturer.<br />
G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and<br />
witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of horizontal louver blind.<br />
H. Maintenance Data: For horizontal louver blinds to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
A. Source Limitations: Obtain horizontal louver blinds through one source from a single manufacturer.<br />
B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide horizontal louver blinds with the fire-test-response<br />
characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by<br />
UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify<br />
materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.<br />
1. Flame-Resistance Ratings: Passes NFPA 701.<br />
C. Product Standard: Provide horizontal louver blinds complying with WCSC A 100.1.<br />
D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic<br />
effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.<br />
1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial<br />
Completion.<br />
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING<br />
A. Deliver horizontal louver blinds in factory packages, marked with manufacturer and product name, firetest-response<br />
characteristics, lead-free designation, and location of installation using same designations<br />
indicated on Drawings and in a window treatment schedule.<br />
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install horizontal louver blinds until construction and wet and dirty<br />
finish work in spaces, including painting, is complete and dry and ambient temperature and humidity<br />
conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for <strong>Project</strong> when occupied for its intended use.<br />
B. Field Measurements: Where horizontal louver blinds are indicated to fit to other construction, verify<br />
dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on<br />
Shop Drawings. Allow clearances for operable glazed units' operation hardware throughout the entire<br />
operating range. Notify Architect of discrepancies. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction<br />
progress to avoid delaying the Work.<br />
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with<br />
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
1. Horizontal Louver Blinds: Before installation begins, for each size, color, texture, pattern, and<br />
gloss indicated, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 5 units.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS, ALUMINUM SLATS<br />
A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Model H200, 2” Aluminum<br />
Blinds as manufactured by HunterDouglas Contract, 12400 Stowe Drive, Poway, Ca. 92064 or a<br />
comparable product by one of the following:<br />
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Levolor<br />
B. Slats: Aluminum; alloy and temper recommended by producer for type of use and finish indicated; with<br />
crowned profile and radiused corners.<br />
1. Width: 2 inches.<br />
a. Spacing: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
2. Thickness: .008 Gauge.<br />
3. Finish: #190 Bright aluminum.<br />
a. Reflective Coating: Manufacturer's special coating enhancing the reflection of solar energy<br />
on the outside-facing slat surface.<br />
C. Headrail: Formed steel or extruded aluminum; long edges returned or rolled; fully enclosing operating<br />
mechanisms on three sides and end plugs and the following:<br />
1. Capacity: One blind per headrail.<br />
2. Integrated Headrail/Valance: Curved face.<br />
3. Tilt limiter with preselected degree settings.<br />
D. Bottom Rail: Formed-steel or extruded-aluminum tube, with plastic or metal capped ends top contoured<br />
to match crowned shape of slat; with enclosed ladders and tapes to prevent contact with sill.<br />
E. Ladders: Evenly spaced to prevent long-term slat sag.<br />
1. For Blinds with Nominal Slat Width 2 Inches or More: Manufacturer's standard-width reinforced<br />
vinyl tapes.<br />
a. Tape Color, Texture, and Pattern: Color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from<br />
manufacturer's full range.<br />
F. Lift Cords: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
G. Tilt Control: Enclosed worm-gear mechanism, slip clutch or detachable wand preventing overrotation,<br />
and linkage rod, and the following:<br />
1. Tilt Operation: <strong>Manual</strong> with rod operated tilter.<br />
2. Length of Tilt Control: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
3. Tilt: Two-direction, positive stop or lock-out limited at an angle of 75 degrees from zero-degree<br />
horizontal, both directions.<br />
H. Lift Operation: <strong>Manual</strong>, top-locking cord lock; locks pull cord to stop blind in either fully opened or fully<br />
closed position only and is equipped with a ring pull not more than 4 inches long.<br />
I. Tilt-Control and Cord-Lock Position: Right and left side of headrail, respectively, unless otherwise<br />
indicated.<br />
J. Mounting: Wall mounting Wall extension brackets, permitting easy removal and replacement without<br />
damaging blind or adjacent surfaces and finishes; with spacers and shims required for blind placement<br />
and alignment indicated.<br />
1. Provide intermediate support brackets if end support spacing exceeds spacing recommended by<br />
manufacturer for weight and size of blind.<br />
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
K. Side Channels and Perimeter Light Gap Seals: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
L. Colors, Textures, Patterns, and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
2.2 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLIND FABRICATION<br />
A. Concealed Components: Noncorrodible or corrosion-resistant-coated materials.<br />
1. Lift-and-Tilt Mechanisms: With permanently lubricated moving parts.<br />
B. Unit Sizes: Obtain units fabricated in sizes to fill window and other openings as follows, measured at 74<br />
deg F:<br />
1. Blind Units Installed between (inside) Jambs: Width equal to 1/4 inch per side or 1/2 inch total,<br />
plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than jamb-to-jamb dimension of opening in which each blind is<br />
installed. Length equal to 1/4 inch, plus or minus 1/8 inch, less than head-to-sill dimension of<br />
opening in which each blind is installed.<br />
2. Blind Units Installed outside Jambs: Width and length as indicated, with terminations between<br />
blinds of end-to-end installations at centerlines of mullion or other defined vertical separations<br />
between openings.<br />
C. Installation Brackets: Designed for easy removal and reinstallation of blind, for supporting<br />
headrail, valance, and operating hardware, and for hardware position and blind mounting method<br />
indicated.<br />
D. Installation Fasteners: No fewer than two fasteners per bracket, fabricated from metal noncorrosive to<br />
blind hardware and adjoining construction; type designed for securing to supporting substrate; and<br />
supporting blinds and accessories under conditions of normal use.<br />
E. Color-Coated Finish:<br />
1. Metal: For components exposed to view, apply manufacturer's standard baked finish complying<br />
with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation including pretreatment,<br />
application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.<br />
F. Component Color: Provide rails, cords, ladders, and exposed-to-view metal matching or coordinating<br />
with slat color, unless otherwise indicated.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
installation tolerances, operational clearances,and other conditions affecting performance.<br />
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Install horizontal louver blinds level and plumb and aligned with adjacent units according to<br />
manufacturer's written instructions, and located so exterior slat edges in any position are not closer than 1<br />
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
inch to interior face of glazing unit. Install intermediate support as required to prevent deflection in<br />
headrail. Allow clearances between adjacent blinds and for operating glazed opening's operation<br />
hardware if any.<br />
B. Flush Mounted: Install horizontal louver blinds with slat edges flush with finish face of opening if slats<br />
are tilted open.<br />
3.3 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Adjust horizontal louver blinds to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free of binding or malfunction<br />
throughout entire operational range.<br />
3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION<br />
A. Clean horizontal louver blind surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.<br />
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer,<br />
that ensure that horizontal louver blinds are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial<br />
Completion.<br />
C. Replace damaged horizontal louver blinds that cannot be repaired, in a manner approved by Architect,<br />
before time of Substantial Completion.<br />
END OF SECTION 12491<br />
HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 122113 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 129300 - SITE FURNISHINGS<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes:<br />
1. Seating.<br />
2. Tables.<br />
3. Bicycle racks.<br />
4. Bicycle lockers.<br />
5. Trash receptacles.<br />
6. Bollards.<br />
7. Dog waste bag dispenser.<br />
B. Related Requirements:<br />
1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for installing pipe sleeves cast and<br />
installing anchor bolts cast in concrete footings.<br />
2. Division 31 Section "Earth Moving" for excavation for installing concrete footings.<br />
1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product.<br />
B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.<br />
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes.<br />
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish, not less than 6-inch- long linear<br />
components and 4-inch- square sheet components.<br />
E. Product Schedule: For site furnishings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.<br />
1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Maintenance Data: For site furnishings to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective<br />
covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.<br />
1. Bench Replacement Planks: No fewer than two full-size units for each size indicated.<br />
2. Trash Receptacle Inner Containers: Five full-size units for each size indicated, but no<br />
fewer than two units.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SEATING AND TABLES<br />
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Dumor 88.50-PL Bench with heavy-duty recycled plastic seat planks and Dumor 100-60<br />
PL picnic table. One table to be ADA-compliant.<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated<br />
or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. A & T Iron Works, Inc.<br />
2. BCI Burke Company, LLC.<br />
3. BRP Enterprises, Inc.<br />
4. Canterbury International.<br />
5. Columbia Cascade Company.<br />
6. Country Casual.<br />
7. Creative Pipe, Inc.<br />
8. DuMor Inc.<br />
9. FairWeather Site Furnishings; Division of Leader Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
10. Fibrex Group Inc. (The).<br />
11. Forms+Surfaces.<br />
12. GameTime; a PlayCore, Inc. company.<br />
13. Gardenside, Ltd.<br />
14. Henderson Recreation Equipment Ltd.<br />
15. Huntco Supply, LLC.<br />
16. Kay Park Recreation.<br />
17. Keystone Ridge Designs, Inc.<br />
18. Kingsley~Bate, Ltd.<br />
19. Landscape Forms.<br />
20. Landscape Structures Inc.<br />
21. L. A. Steelcraft.<br />
22. Madrax; Division of Trilary, Inc.<br />
23. Maglin Site Furniture Inc.<br />
24. Miracle Recreation Equipment Co.; a division of PlayPower, Inc.<br />
25. Playworld Systems, Inc.<br />
26. Recreation Creations, Inc.<br />
27. RPI.<br />
SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
28. Sitecraft.<br />
29. Smith & Hawken, Ltd.<br />
30. SportsPlay Equipment, Inc.<br />
31. Thomas Steele; Division of Trilary, Inc.<br />
32. Urban Accessories, Inc.<br />
33. Victor Stanley, Inc.<br />
34. Wausau Tile, Inc.<br />
35. Weatherend Estate Furniture.<br />
C. Frame: Steel.<br />
D. Seat and Back:<br />
1. Material:<br />
a. Recycled Plastic Planks: Evenly spaced, parallel.<br />
2. Arms: None.<br />
E. Table Top:<br />
1. Material:<br />
a. Recycled Plastic Planks: Evenly spaced, parallel.<br />
F. Steel Finish: Polyester powder coated.<br />
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
2.2 BICYCLE RACKS<br />
A. Bicycle Rack <strong>Construction</strong>:<br />
1. Frame: Galvanized steel.<br />
a. Pipe OD: Not less than 1-5/8 inches.<br />
2. Style: As indicated.<br />
a. Overall Height: As indicated.<br />
b. Overall Width: As indicated.<br />
c. Overall Depth: As indicated.<br />
d. Capacity: Designed to accommodate no fewer than five bicycles.<br />
B. Steel Finish: Galvanized.<br />
2.3 TRASH RECEPTACLES<br />
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be<br />
incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
1. Dumor receptacle 41-32 PL/<br />
SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated<br />
C. or comparable product by one of the following:<br />
1. A & T Iron Works, Inc.<br />
2. BCI Burke Company, LLC.<br />
3. BRP Enterprises, Inc.<br />
4. Canterbury International.<br />
5. Columbia Cascade Company.<br />
6. Country Casual.<br />
7. Creative Pipe, Inc.<br />
8. DuMor Inc.<br />
9. FairWeather Site Furnishings; Division of Leader Manufacturing, Inc.<br />
10. Fiberglass Engineering Company.<br />
11. Fibrex Group Inc. (The).<br />
12. Forms+Surfaces.<br />
13. GameTime; a PlayCore, Inc. company.<br />
14. Gardenside, Ltd.<br />
15. Henderson Recreation Equipment Ltd.<br />
16. Huntco Supply, LLC.<br />
17. Kay Park Recreation.<br />
18. Keystone Ridge Designs, Inc.<br />
19. Landscape Forms.<br />
20. Landscape Structures Inc.<br />
21. L. A. Steelcraft.<br />
22. Maglin Site Furniture Inc.<br />
23. Miracle Recreation Equipment Co.; a division of PlayPower, Inc.<br />
24. Playworld Systems, Inc.<br />
25. Recreation Creations, Inc.<br />
26. RPI.<br />
27. Sitecraft.<br />
28. Smith & Hawken, Ltd.<br />
29. Thomas Steele; Division of Trilary, Inc.<br />
30. Urban Accessories, Inc.<br />
31. Victor Stanley, Inc.<br />
32. Wausau Tile, Inc.<br />
33. Weatherend Estate Furniture.<br />
D. Plastic Facing Surrounds: Match benches.<br />
E. Support Frames: Steel; welded.<br />
F. Trash Receptacles:<br />
1. Receptacle Shape and Form: Round cylinder with tapered funnel top; with opening for<br />
depositing trash in lid or top.<br />
2. Lids and Tops: Steel HDPE secured by cable or chain, hinged, swiveled, or permanently<br />
secured.<br />
a. Description: Flat rim ring lid with center opening.<br />
SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Inner Container: Galvanized –steel sheet container with lift-out handles; designed to be<br />
removeable and reusable.<br />
4. Disposable Liners: Provide receptacle designed to accommodate disposable liners.<br />
5. Capacity: Not less than 32 gal.<br />
6. Service Access: Removable lid or top; inner container and disposable liner lift or slide<br />
out for emptying; lockable with padlock hasps.<br />
7. Post Mount: Color-coated steel pipe; color to match receptacle; for mounting one<br />
receptacle.<br />
G. Steel Finish: Color coated.<br />
1. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
H. HDPE Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
2.4 DOG WASTE BAG DISPENSER<br />
A. Product, basis of design: Barco (1-800-338-2697) # KPW 3005.<br />
2.5 MATERIALS<br />
A. Steel and Iron: Free of surface blemishes and complying with the following:<br />
1. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
2. Steel Pipe: Standard-weight steel pipe complying with ASTM A 53/A 53M, or electricresistance-welded<br />
pipe complying with ASTM A 135/A 135M.<br />
3. Tubing: Cold-formed steel tubing complying with ASTM A 500/A 500M.<br />
4. Mechanical Tubing: Cold-rolled, electric-resistance-welded carbon or alloy steel tubing<br />
complying with ASTM A 513, or steel tubing fabricated from steel complying with<br />
ASTM A 1011/A 1011M and complying with dimensional tolerances in<br />
ASTM A 500/A 500M; zinc coated internally and externally.<br />
5. Sheet: Commercial steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.<br />
B. Fiberglass: Multiple laminations of glass-fiber-reinforced polyester resin with UV-light stable,<br />
colorfast, nonfading, weather- and stain-resistant, colored polyester gel coat, and with<br />
manufacturer's standard finish.<br />
C. Plastic: Color impregnated, color and UV-light stabilized, and mold resistant.<br />
1. Polyethylene: Fabricated from virgin plastic HDPE resin.<br />
2. Recycled Content of Polyethylene: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of<br />
preconsumer recycled content not less than 90 percent.<br />
D. Anchors, Fasteners, Fittings, and Hardware: [Stainless steel] [Brass] [Galvanized steel] [Zincplated<br />
steel] [Manufacturer's standard, corrosion-resistant-coated or noncorrodible materials];<br />
commercial quality[, tamperproof, vandal and theft resistant] [, concealed, recessed, and capped<br />
or plugged].<br />
SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Angle Anchors: For inconspicuously bolting legs of site furnishings to below-grade<br />
substrate; [one per leg] [extent as indicated].<br />
2. Antitheft Hold-Down Brackets: For securing site furnishings to substrate; [two per unit]<br />
[extent as indicated on Drawings].<br />
E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive,<br />
nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M; recommended in writing by<br />
manufacturer, for exterior applications.<br />
F. Erosion-Resistant Anchoring Cement: Factory-packaged, nonshrink, nonstaining, hydrauliccontrolled<br />
expansion cement formulation for mixing with potable water at <strong>Project</strong> site to create<br />
pourable anchoring, patching, and grouting compound; resistant to erosion from water exposure<br />
without needing protection by a sealer or waterproof coating; recommended in writing by<br />
manufacturer, for exterior applications.<br />
G. Galvanizing: Where indicated for steel and iron components, provide the following protective<br />
zinc coating applied to components after fabrication:<br />
1. Zinc-Coated Tubing: External, zinc with organic overcoat, consisting of a minimum of<br />
0.9 oz./sq. ft. of zinc after welding, a chromate conversion coating, and a clear, polymer<br />
film. Internal, same as external or consisting of 81 percent zinc pigmented coating, not<br />
less than 0.3 mil thick.<br />
2. Hot-Dip Galvanizing: According to ASTM A 123/A 123M, ASTM A 153/A 153M, or<br />
ASTM A 924/A 924M.<br />
2.6 FABRICATION<br />
A. Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and<br />
angles. Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.<br />
B. Welded Connections: Weld connections continuously. Weld solid members with full-length,<br />
full-penetration welds and hollow members with full-circumference welds. At exposed<br />
connections, finish surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness or unevenness shows after<br />
finishing and welded surface matches contours of adjoining surfaces.<br />
C. Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce<br />
uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section<br />
of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming<br />
exposed surfaces of handrail and railing components.<br />
D. Exposed Surfaces: Polished, sanded, or otherwise finished; all surfaces smooth, free of burrs,<br />
barbs, splinters, and sharpness; all edges and ends rolled, rounded, or capped.<br />
E. Factory Assembly: Assemble components in the factory to greatest extent possible to minimize<br />
field assembly. Clearly mark units for assembly in the field.<br />
SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.7 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable.<br />
Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of<br />
approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.<br />
2.8 STEEL AND GALVANIZED-STEEL FINISHES<br />
A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat<br />
finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,<br />
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.<br />
2.9 IRON FINISHES<br />
A. Baked-Enamel, Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked, polyester, powder-coat<br />
finish complying with finish manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation,<br />
including pretreatment, application, baking, and minimum dry film thickness.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for<br />
correct and level finished grade, mounting surfaces, installation tolerances, and other conditions<br />
affecting performance of the Work.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent requirements<br />
are indicated. Complete field assembly of site furnishings where required.<br />
B. Unless otherwise indicated, install site furnishings after landscaping and paving have been<br />
completed.<br />
C. Install site furnishings level, plumb, true, and securely anchored at locations indicated on<br />
Drawings.<br />
D. Post Setting: Set cast-in support posts in concrete footing with smooth top, shaped to shed<br />
water. Protect portion of posts above footing from concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set<br />
plumb or at correct angle and are aligned and at correct height and spacing. Hold posts in<br />
position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently cured.<br />
E. Posts Set into Voids in Concrete: Form or core-drill holes for installing posts in concrete to<br />
depth recommended in writing by manufacturer of site furnishings and 3/4 inch larger than OD<br />
of post. Clean holes of loose material, insert posts, and fill annular space between post and<br />
SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
concrete with [nonshrink, nonmetallic grout] [or] [anchoring cement], mixed and placed to<br />
comply with anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and<br />
shaped to shed water.<br />
F. Pipe Sleeves: Use steel pipe sleeves preset and anchored into concrete for installing posts.<br />
After posts have been inserted into sleeves, fill annular space between post and sleeve with<br />
[nonshrink, nonmetallic grout] [or] [anchoring cement], mixed and placed to comply with<br />
anchoring material manufacturer's written instructions, with top smoothed and shaped to shed<br />
water.<br />
END OF SECTION 129300<br />
SITE FURNISHINGS 129300 - 8
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15010<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section Includes: General Mechanical Requirements specifically applicable to<br />
Division 15 sections in addition to Division 1- General Requirements.<br />
B. SCOPE:<br />
1. The work covered by this division consists of performing all operations in<br />
connection with the installation of heating, cooling, ventilating, and plumbing<br />
including site utility work as indicated under this section. This entire section<br />
applies to all mechanical work and all mechanical sections of these<br />
specifications. This Contractor shall read and comply with all sections of these<br />
specifications including all General and Special Conditions.<br />
1.2 MECHANICAL DIVISION INDEX<br />
15010 GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
15043 BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS<br />
15060 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS<br />
15080 PIPING SPECIALTIES<br />
15100 VALVES<br />
15160 VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION<br />
15180 PIPING INSULATION<br />
15190 DUCT INSULATION<br />
15402 DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS<br />
15403 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS<br />
15404 SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS<br />
15450 PLUMBING FIXTURES<br />
15501 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS<br />
15651 REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS<br />
15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION<br />
15900 CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION<br />
15902 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND INTERLOCKS<br />
1.3 REFERENCES<br />
A. Standard Requirements:<br />
1. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or Federal<br />
Standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid<br />
requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
B. All work shall be executed in accordance with the local and state codes, ordinances,<br />
and regulations governing the particular class of work involved. This Contractor<br />
shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit<br />
these requirements. In the event of a conflict between the various codes and<br />
standards, the more stringent shall govern. Where these specifications and<br />
accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report<br />
the matter to the Architect/Engineer. The Architect/Engineer shall prepare any<br />
supplementary drawings required, illustrating how the work may be installed so as to<br />
comply. On approval of the change by the Architect/Engineer, the Contractor shall<br />
install the work in a satisfactory manner without additional cost to the Owner. On<br />
completion of the various parts of the work, the installation shall be tested by the<br />
constituted authorities and approved, and on completion of the work, this Contractor<br />
shall obtain and deliver to the Owner final certificates of acceptance. This Contractor<br />
shall furnish copies of each certificate to the Architect/Engineer.<br />
C. The Contractor shall secure all permits and licenses for his work and shall pay all fees<br />
in connection with such permits and licenses.<br />
D. The contractor shall hold and save the Owner free and harmless from liability of any<br />
nature or kind arising from his failure to comply with codes and ordinances.<br />
E. Any and all meter deposits and all utility extension costs shall be paid by the<br />
Contractor whose work is done in connection with the service that the meter is<br />
connected to.<br />
F. Schedule of Referenced Organizations: The following is a list of the acronyms of<br />
organizations referenced in these Specifications:<br />
1. AABC Associated Air Balance Council<br />
2. ADC Air Diffusion Council<br />
435 North Michigan Ave.<br />
Chicago, IL 60611<br />
3. AGA American Gas Association<br />
1515 Wilson Boulevard<br />
Arlington, VA 22209<br />
4. AMCA Air Movement and Control Association<br />
30 West University Drive<br />
Arlington Heights, IL 60004<br />
5. ANSI American National Standards Institute<br />
1430 Broadway<br />
New York, NY 10018<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
6. ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air<br />
Conditioning Engineers<br />
345 East 47th Street<br />
New York, NY 10017<br />
7. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers<br />
345 East 45th Street<br />
New York, NY 10017<br />
8. ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers<br />
960 Illuminating Building<br />
Cleveland, OH 44113<br />
9. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials<br />
1916 Race Street<br />
Philadelphia, PA 19103<br />
10. AWWA American Water Works Association<br />
6666 West Quincy Avenue<br />
Denver, CO 80235<br />
11. AWS American Welding Society<br />
2501 NW 7th Street<br />
Miami, FL 33125<br />
12. CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute<br />
1499 Chain Bridge Road<br />
McLean, VA 22101<br />
13. FM Factory Mutual System<br />
1151 Boston-Providence Turnpike<br />
Norwood, MA 02062<br />
14. FS Federal Specification<br />
General Services Administration<br />
Specifications and Consumer Information Distribution<br />
Section (WFSIS)<br />
Washington Navy Yard, Building 197<br />
Washington, DC 20407<br />
15. NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters<br />
5530 Wisconsin Avenue, Suite 750<br />
Chevy Chase, Maryland 20815<br />
16. NEC National Electric Code (of NFPA)<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
17. NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau<br />
8224 Old Courthouse Road<br />
Vienna, VA 22180<br />
18. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer's Association<br />
2101 L Street, NW<br />
Washington, DC 20037<br />
19. NFPA National Fire Protection Association<br />
Battery March Park<br />
Quincy, MA 02269<br />
20. NSF National Sanitation Foundation<br />
Box 1468<br />
Ann Arbor, MI 48106<br />
21. OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration<br />
U.S. Department of Labor<br />
22. PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute<br />
5342 Boulevard Place<br />
Indianapolis, Indiana 46208<br />
23. SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's<br />
National Association<br />
8224 Old Courthouse Road<br />
Vienna, VA 22180<br />
24. TIMA Thermal Insulation Manufacturers Association<br />
Technical Services<br />
1420 King Street<br />
Alexandria, VA 22314<br />
25. UL Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.<br />
333 Pfingston Road<br />
Northbrook, IL 60062<br />
G. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): All materials, appliances, equipment, devices<br />
or appurtenances shall conform to the applicable standards of Underwriters<br />
Laboratories Inc., where such standards have been established.<br />
1.4 DRAWINGS<br />
A. Drawings and specifications shall be considered as cooperative, and work or<br />
materials called for by one and not mentioned in the other, or vice versa, shall be<br />
done and furnished as though treated by both.<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
B. In the cases of discrepancies in figures, drawings, or specifications, the<br />
Architect/Engineer shall be notified immediately and his decision shall determine the<br />
necessary adjustment. Without such decision, said discrepancies shall not be adjusted<br />
by the Contractor save only at his expense, and, in case of any settlement or any<br />
complication arising from such adjustment to the Contractor, he shall bear all extra<br />
expense involved.<br />
C. Should it appear that the work intended to be done, or any of the matters relative<br />
thereto, are not sufficiently detailed or explained on the drawings or specifications,<br />
the Contractor shall apply to the Architect/Engineer for such further drawings or<br />
explanations as may be necessary, allowing a reasonable time for the<br />
Architect/Engineer to supply same, and the Contractor shall conform to same as part<br />
of the Contract.<br />
D. Should any doubt or question arise in respect to the true meaning of the drawings or<br />
specifications, reference shall be made to the Architect\Engineer whose decision shall<br />
be final and conclusive. No alleged oral admission, condonation, or inadvertent<br />
neglect on the part of the Architect/Engineer will be accepted as an excuse for<br />
inferior work.<br />
E. The mechanical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of ductwork and<br />
piping, exact locations, etc., and do not show all offsets, control lines, pilot lines, and<br />
other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to<br />
conform to the structural conditions, provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all<br />
obstructions, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturer of the<br />
equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactory<br />
operational installation.<br />
F. Should the particular equipment which any Bidder proposes to install, require other<br />
space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, the Bidder shall arrange for<br />
such space with the Architect/Engineer before submitting his bid. Should changes<br />
become necessary on account of failure to comply with these details, the Contractor<br />
shall make such necessary changes at the Contractor's own expense.<br />
G. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and<br />
equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans which shall<br />
be checked by the Architect/Engineer and approved before the work is started,<br />
Contractor before work proceeds. Interference with structural conditions shall be<br />
corrected by the Contractor.<br />
H. All equipment shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's<br />
recommendations. Provide all accessories and components for optimum operation as<br />
recommended by the manufacturer.<br />
I. Utilities: The location, size, and pressure of utility lines are shown in accordance<br />
with the data given this office by others. As Architect/Engineers, we cannot and do<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
not guarantee the accuracy of this data. Each Bidder shall check and verify this data.<br />
The points of connection to utility lines are approximate only and shall be verified by<br />
each Bidder prior to submitting his Bid.<br />
J. Site visit: It is recommended that the Contractor visit the site prior to bidding and<br />
satisfy himself as the conditions under which the mechanical systems are to be<br />
installed. No subsequent allowance shall be made in his behalf for failure to make<br />
such a visit. Contractor shall examine all work noted under the demolition drawings<br />
and all new work and shall satisfy himself as to the extent of work required to be<br />
completed.<br />
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS<br />
A. Not Used.<br />
1.6 PRIOR APPROVALS<br />
A. Each equipment item for which the Contractor desires to install equipment other than<br />
the specific item identified in the equipment schedule or equivalent equipment by<br />
manufacturers specifically named in the schedule, the Contractor shall bear full<br />
responsibility to prove to the Engineer that the furnished equipment is equivalent to<br />
or better than the specified item. Failure to provide such proof will result in rejection<br />
of the shop drawing submittal by the Engineer. Prior written or verbal approval by<br />
the Engineer of equipment by other manufacturers will not relieve the Contractor of<br />
responsibility to provide equivalence. Prior approval is required, however, any prior<br />
approval given is intended only to provide preliminary agreement that the alternate<br />
manufacturer may make equipment that complies with the specification requirements<br />
and not that all equipment manufactured by him is acceptable.<br />
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS<br />
A. Shop drawings or fully descriptive catalog data shall be submitted by the Contractor<br />
for all items of material and equipment furnished and installed under this Contract.<br />
This shall include piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, plumbing equipment,<br />
control items, etc. The Contractor shall submit to the Architect/Engineer a sufficient<br />
number of copies of all such shop drawings or catalog data to provide him with as<br />
many review copies as he may need, plus three (3) copies for retention by the<br />
Architect/Engineer. No materials or equipment shall be installed until officially<br />
approved by the Architect/Engineer.<br />
B. Before submitting Shop Drawings to the Architect/Engineer for review, the<br />
Contractor shall examine them and satisfy himself that they are correctly<br />
representative of the material or equipment to which they pertain. The Contractor<br />
shall so note these Drawings before submitting them. The Contractor's review of<br />
Shop Drawings is not intended to take the place in any way of the official review of<br />
the Architect/Engineer, and the Shop Drawings which have not been reviewed by the<br />
Architect/Engineer shall not be used in fabrication or installing any work.<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-6
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
C. The review of Shop Drawings or catalog data by the Architect/Engineer shall not<br />
relieve the Contractor from responsibility for deviations from the plans and<br />
Specifications unless he has, in writing, specifically called attention to such<br />
deviations as the time of submission and has obtained the permission of the<br />
Architect/Engineer thereon, nor shall it relieve him from the responsibility for error<br />
of any kind in Shop Drawings. When the Contractor does call such deviations to the<br />
attention of the Architect/Engineer, he shall state in his letter whether or not such<br />
deviations involve any extra cost. If this is not mentioned, it will be assumed that no<br />
extra costs is involved for making the change.<br />
D. After receiving approval on the make and type of materials, the Contractor shall order<br />
such materials in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is<br />
done to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor shall<br />
render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays occasioned by failure on<br />
this part to provide necessary details. All shop drawings shall be delivered to the<br />
Architect/Engineer's office within thirty (30) days from the date of the contract.<br />
E. Shop drawings will be returned unchecked unless the following information is<br />
included: reference to all pertinent data in the Specifications or on the drawings, size<br />
and characteristics of the equipment, name of the project and a space large enough to<br />
accept an approval stamp. The data submitted shall reflect the actual equipment<br />
performance under the specified conditions and shall not be a copy of the scheduled<br />
data on the drawings.<br />
1.8 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Submittal data shall be organized in commercial quality, three ring binders with<br />
durable and cleanable covers. Product information for each piece of equipment shall<br />
be separated by an indexing leaf with clear tabs. The product name and symbol (i.e.<br />
AHU/Air Handling Unit) shall be typed on white paper inserts and placed in<br />
appropriate tab. Complete data must be furnished showing performance, quality and<br />
dimensions. A signed review by the Architect/Engineer must be obtained before<br />
purchasing any equipment.<br />
B. The following items shall be submitted for review by the Architect/Engineer but are<br />
not limited to:<br />
1. Air Conditioning Units<br />
2. Fans<br />
3. Diffusers, Registers and Grilles<br />
4. Fire Dampers and Smoke/Fire Dampers<br />
5. Pipe Insulation<br />
6. Duct Insulation<br />
7. Coils<br />
8. Air Washer Assembly<br />
9. Fire Protection Drawings & Hydraulic Calculations<br />
10. Temperature Controls<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-7
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
11. Plumbing Fixtures and Trim<br />
12. Cross Connection Control Devices<br />
13. Plenum Materials and Supports<br />
14. Evaporative Coolers<br />
15. Pumps<br />
16. Hydraulic Air Control Devices<br />
17. Hood and Fans<br />
18. Filter Assemblies and Filters<br />
19. Fan Coil Units<br />
20. Plumbing Equipment<br />
21. Heat Exchangers<br />
22. Flexible Pipe Connections<br />
23. Heating Terminal Equipment<br />
24. Roof Top Equipment<br />
25. Fire Protection Equipment<br />
26. Ductwork Shop Drawings<br />
27. Radiant Heating Equipment<br />
28. Vibration Equipment and Calculations<br />
1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. General: Comply with Section 01400.<br />
B. Welder Qualifications: Welders shall be certified by the American Society of<br />
Mechanical Engineers (ASME) National Certified Pipe for the type of work being<br />
performed. Current operators' certificates in accordance with ASME standards shall<br />
be on file at the site and shall be available to the Architect/Engineer for examination.<br />
Coupons shall be available for review by the Architect and Engineer.<br />
C. Locations of all pipes, ducts, outlets, appliance, etc., as shown on the drawings, are<br />
approximate only and are understood to be subject to such revisions as may prove<br />
necessary or desirable at the time the work is installed. Each Contractor will be<br />
required to install his work with relation to existing building conditions and shall be<br />
entirely responsible for the correctness of his work with reference to finished<br />
elevations, etc. Piping shown on the drawings is diagrammatic only and their exact<br />
locations, depths, and invert elevations shall be as required for proper flow and<br />
coordination with other trades.<br />
D. The contract drawing depicts graphically the arrangement of piping and ductwork.<br />
Should local conditions necessitate a rearrangement, or if any of the piping or<br />
ductwork can be installed to better advantage in a different manner, the Contractor<br />
shall, before proceeding with the work, prepare and submit three (3) copies of<br />
Drawings of the proposed arrangement for the Architect/Engineer's review.<br />
E. If the Contractor proposes to install equipment, including piping and ductwork,<br />
requiring space conditions other than those shown, or to rearrange the equipment, he<br />
shall assume full responsibility for the rearrangement of the space and shall have the<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-8
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
Architect/Engineer review the change before proceeding with the work. The request<br />
for such change shall be accompanied by Shop Drawings of the space in question.<br />
F. Each Contractor is responsible for the proper location and size of all slots, holes, or<br />
openings in the building structure pertaining to his work, and for the correct location<br />
of pipe sleeves.<br />
G. Each Contractor shall coordinate his work with that of all other trades that it may be<br />
installed in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering or<br />
handicapping the other trades. Piping interference’s shall be handled by giving<br />
precedence to pipe lines which require a stated grade for proper operation. Drainage<br />
lines shall take precedence over water lines in determination of elevations. In all<br />
cases, lines requiring a stated grade for their proper operation shall have precedence<br />
over electrical conduit and ductwork.<br />
H. All oiling devices and all parts of equipment requiring adjustment shall be easily<br />
accessible. Lubricate all equipment properly in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
instructions. Furnish zerk grease fittings on all greaseable bearings.<br />
I. Equipment and Materials: The materials and equipment shall be new and shall be the<br />
standard products of the manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of<br />
Plumbing, Heating, Cooling, Ventilation, and Fire Protection Equipment, and shall be<br />
the manufacturer's latest standard design. Where two or more units of the same class<br />
of equipment are required, these units shall be the products of the same manufacturer.<br />
However, the component parts of the systems need not be the products of the same<br />
manufacturer. Specific equipment specified hereinafter is to be considered a standard<br />
of quality and operation. In general, all capacities of equipment, and motor and<br />
starter characteristics are shown in schedules on the drawings. Reference shall be<br />
made to the schedules for specific information. The capacities shown are minimum<br />
capacities. Variations in the characteristics will be permitted only on written<br />
approval of the Architect/Engineer. All equipment shall be shipped to the job with<br />
not less than a prime coat of paint or as specified hereinafter. Insofar as is possible<br />
all items of the same type (i.e., pumps, fans, etc.) shall be by the same manufacturer.<br />
Where installation instructions are not included in these specifications or on the<br />
plans, the manufacturer's instructions shall be followed. All equipment affected by<br />
altitude shall be rated to operate at the altitude where it is to be installed.<br />
J. Excavation and Backfilling: This Contractor shall do all necessary excavation and<br />
backfill for the installation of the Mechanical systems as may be required. Curb cuts,<br />
asphalt and concrete patching, cutting and patching existing floor, etc., shall be part<br />
of this Contractor's responsibility. No extra payment will be made for rock<br />
excavation. Trenches for all underground piping shall be excavated to the required<br />
depths. The bottoms of trenches shall be tamped hard and graded to secure maximum<br />
fall. Bell holes shall be excavated to assure the pipe resting for its entire length on<br />
solid ground. Should rock be encountered, it shall be excavated to a depth of 6 inches<br />
below the bottom of the pipe, and before laying the pipe, the space between the<br />
bottom of the pipe and the rock surface shall be filled with gravel, thoroughly<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-9
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
tamped. Pipe laid in trenches dug in fill shall be supported down in the trenches and<br />
shall be filled. No roots, rocks or foreign materials of any description shall be used in<br />
backfilling the trenches. The backfill material shall be identical to the surrounding<br />
fill material and shall be placed in 6-inch layer, wetted, and compacted to the density<br />
of the adjacent soil. See Division 2 for additional information for site utilities. All<br />
surplus materials shall be hauled from the project by the Contractor at his expense.<br />
K. Cutting and Repairing:<br />
1. Responsibility of the Contractor whose work is involved. Coordinate with others<br />
to prevent unnecessary cutting and repairing.<br />
2. Lay out and locate equipment, openings, and chases. Install sleeves, inserts, and<br />
supports. Arrange with those whose work is involved to do cutting and replacing<br />
caused by negligence or error with costs reimbursed by the Contractor at fault.<br />
Cutting and replacing of existing work shall be the responsibility of the<br />
Contractor whose work is being installed.<br />
3. Removal or terminating connections of existing work which is abandoned or<br />
replaced shall also be done hereunder to provide correct and finished work.<br />
L. Foundations: All equipment shall be provided with suitable foundations and<br />
supports. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide for the proper<br />
locations of these foundations and supports. This applies to all rooftop equipment<br />
also.<br />
1. All concrete foundations required by equipment furnished by the Mechanical<br />
Contractor shall be constructed by them (except where otherwise noted) the<br />
conformity with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the respective<br />
equipment, and with the approval of the Architect/Engineer. All corners of the<br />
foundations shall be neatly chamfered. Foundation bolts shall be placed in the<br />
forms when the concrete is poured. Allow 1 inch below the equipment base for<br />
alignment, leveling and grouting with nonshrinking grout. Grouting shall be<br />
done after the equipment is leveled in place. After the grout has hardened, the<br />
foundation bolts shall be pulled up tight and the equipment shimmed, if<br />
necessary. After removal of the forms, the surface of the foundation shall be<br />
rubbed.<br />
2. Unless otherwise noted, foundations shall be a minimum of 6-inch high. All<br />
concrete work performed by these Contractors shall conform entirely to the<br />
requirements of the Concrete Specifications which describe this class of work.<br />
M. Code Requirements: Comply with state and local code requirements and ordinances.<br />
Call for inspections required by responsible building inspection authority.<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-10
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
N. Applicable Building Codes and Ordinances: Including the latest edition of each code,<br />
but not limited to the following:<br />
1. International Building Code.<br />
2. Uniform Mechanical Code.<br />
3. Uniform Plumbing Code.<br />
4. International Energy Compliance Code.<br />
5. Governing Fire Department Requirements<br />
6. Utility Company Requirements<br />
7. National Fire Protection Association Standards<br />
8. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code<br />
9. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems<br />
10. NEPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems<br />
11. NFPA 13 - Sprinkler Systems<br />
12. NFPA 101 - Life Safety<br />
13. NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and Grease<br />
Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment<br />
O. ACCESS PANELS<br />
1. Similar to Milcor, or as noted on the drawings, size as required for concealed<br />
expansion joints, valving, gauges, balancing dampers, valves, traps, pitot<br />
stations, equipment and similar items requiring accessibility. Notify the General<br />
Contractor of each access panel location and the required size. Panels shall be<br />
proper type for ceiling or wall in which they are installed. The panels shall be<br />
furnished under this section of the Specifications, unless otherwise directed, but<br />
shall be coordinated to be compatible with walls and ceilings furnished under<br />
other sections.<br />
1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING<br />
A. General: Comply with Section 01600.<br />
B. Large Items: Make arrangements with other trades on the job for introduction into<br />
the building of equipment too large to pass through finished openings.<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-11
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Acceptance: Check and sign for materials to be furnished by others for installation<br />
under Division 15 upon delivery. Contractor shall be responsible for the storage and<br />
safekeeping of such materials from time of delivery until final acceptance.<br />
D. Protection: Close ends of pipe and ductwork at the close of each working day during<br />
construction to prevent entry of foreign material. Protect insulation against dirt,<br />
water, chemical or mechanical damage before, during and after installation. Protect<br />
fixtures and equipment against damage during mechanical work with heavy paper or<br />
plastic until final clean-up.<br />
E. Storage: Store equipment in covered enclosure or wrap with weather tight 6 mil<br />
Visqeen.<br />
F. Shipping Protection: Protective casings, crating, and coverings to remain in place<br />
until start-up of equipment.<br />
1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Performance: All systems are to be rated at [5,500 ft.] elevation.<br />
1.12 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING<br />
A. General: Comply with Division 1 General Requirements.<br />
B. Schedule: Coordinate and order the progress of mechanical work to conform to the<br />
progress of the work of the other trades. Complete the entire installation as soon as<br />
the condition of the building will permit.<br />
C. Utility Interruptions: Schedule mechanical utility interruptions with the<br />
Architect/Engineer/Owner minimum of seven (7) days prior to the requested outage.<br />
Plan work so that duration of the interruptions a maximum of one day.<br />
1.13 CONTROLS WIRING AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT<br />
A. All mechanical equipment controls wiring, conduit, relays, interlocks, and all<br />
accessories required for a completely operational controls system shall be the<br />
complete responsibility of the mechanical contractor. The mechanical contractor has<br />
the option to hire the project electrical contractor or any qualified controls contractor<br />
to install mechanical controls wiring and conduit. Refer to specification 15902 for<br />
installation requirements. Refer to specification 16900 for coordination requirements<br />
between mechanical, electrical, and controls subcontractors.<br />
B. Electrical items such as disconnect switches and motor starters associated with<br />
equipment provided by Division 15, when specifically mentioned to be furnished by<br />
the Mechanical Contractor, whether in these specifications or on the Electrical or<br />
Mechanical Drawings, shall be furnished by the this Contractor. These items shall be<br />
mounted and connected as required for a completely operational system. See Control<br />
Systems Specification for further information.<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-12
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
C. All electrical equipment characteristics (voltage, etc.) must be verified by the<br />
Contractor prior to ordering. If the Contractor proposes to furnish motors varying in<br />
horsepower and/or characteristics from those specified, he shall first inform the<br />
Architect/Engineer of the change and shall then coordinate the change with the<br />
Electrical Contractor and shall pay all additional charges in connection with the<br />
change.<br />
D. All motors shall meet all the requirements of specification 16150.<br />
1. All motors shall be built in accordance with the current applicable IEEE, ASA,<br />
and NEMA standards. All general purpose motors shall be open drip-proof<br />
machines for installation indoors and/or in protected locations. Totally enclosed<br />
fan cooled (TEFC) motors shall be used in all areas of exposure to weather or<br />
other environmental contamination. All motors shall have copper windings. All<br />
motors to have minimum power factor of 85% or have switched correction to<br />
90%. Unless indicated otherwise, motors shall be NEMA design B with a service<br />
factor of 1.15 with 40°C rise and total temperature rise of 65°C ambient and<br />
when powered from the system voltage feeding the motor. TEFC motors shall a<br />
service factor of 1.00 with total temperature is of 65°C in the above conditions.<br />
Motors located in areas exceeding 40°C ambient shall be factory-rated for the<br />
ambient temperature of the motor environment. Single phase motors shall<br />
generally be NEMA Type N split phase induction motors with built-in thermal<br />
protectors. Single phase motors connected on loads requiring high starting<br />
torque shall be capacitor-start induction motors. Single phase motors of 1/10 HP<br />
or less may be shaded pole induction motors.<br />
1.14 PROTECTION AGAINST HAZARDOUS CONDITIONS<br />
A. The Contractor shall take precautions against hazardous construction conditions at all<br />
times during construction. The final condition of the facilities shall be safe, and<br />
where safety to operating personnel is jeopardized, suitable signage shall be posted.<br />
B. Protruding metal (bolts, steel angles, etc.) potentially hazardous to maintenance and<br />
operating personnel, shall be cut back and/or protected to reduce the risk of injury.<br />
All openings between floors shall be protected with barriers around the openings,<br />
gratings across the openings, or steel bars through the openings to avoid and protect<br />
against injury.<br />
1.15 HAZARDOUS SIGNS<br />
A. Equipment room contains moving or rotating parts, floor openings, or other<br />
potentially hazardous environments and shall include a sign on the door entering it<br />
that shall read similar to the following: Hazardous Area - Authorized Personnel Only.<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-13
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS<br />
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a bound manual in triplicate,<br />
containing complete repair parts lists, and operating, service, and maintenance<br />
instructions on all mechanical equipment, fixtures, and systems.<br />
B. The Mechanical Contractor shall also provide training as required by Section 15046<br />
to the Owner’s operation and maintenance personnel.<br />
1.17 OPERATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE<br />
A. The Owner shall have the right to operate any and all apparatus as soon as and as<br />
long as it is in operating condition, after Owner personnel have received operational<br />
training, whether or not such apparatus has been accepted as complete and<br />
satisfactory, except that this shall not be construed to mean operations before any<br />
required alterations or repairs have been made. This operation does not indicate<br />
acceptance of the equipment by the Owner. When the Contractor enters into a<br />
contract with the Owner, he agrees to the above.<br />
1.18 WARRANTY AND SERVICE PROGRAM<br />
A. Due to the critical performance requirements and to clearly establish warranty<br />
responsibility for this project, the Contractor shall provide a full service maintenance<br />
and warranty program to the Owner for one full year after beneficial occupancy<br />
(substantial completion).<br />
B. This service program shall be included as part of the base bid and shall include<br />
service, maintenance, repair, replacement, lubrication, temperature control calibration<br />
and repairs, and documenting proof for all service and maintenance work on all<br />
equipment and system furnished by the Contractor.<br />
C. A single representative in the employment of the Contractor shall be responsible for<br />
coordination and follow through of this program. This representative's name and<br />
phone number shall be submitted to the Owner as part of the maintenance manuals<br />
and supportive data. The Contractor shall respond to a request for service with 24<br />
hours if so requested.<br />
D. During this first year of operation, the following sequence of maintenance service<br />
shall be performed as a minimum.<br />
1. Clean strainers in piping.<br />
2. Fans and/or pumps be lubricated and oiled once every four (4) months.<br />
3. Controls shall be calibrated throughout the facility at the end of six (6) months<br />
(following substantial completion). Any leaks in the piping systems shall be<br />
repaired.<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-14
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
4. All equipment manufacturer's service recommend-ations shall be followed<br />
during this period.<br />
1.19 FLUSHING AND DRAINING<br />
A. It shall be the responsibility of this Contractor to properly drain and flush all ducts<br />
and pipes before use or acceptance to ensure that all debris is completely removed.<br />
Damage caused by such debris remaining in the ducts or pipes shall be repaired by<br />
this Contractor at his expense. This Contractor shall demonstrate to the<br />
Architect/Engineer's representative that all piping is clean.<br />
1.20 CLEANING<br />
A. This Contractor shall remove from the building construction site all rubbish and dirt<br />
as it accumulates under the contract. At completion, all areas shall be broom cleaned<br />
and all obstructions, surplus materials, etc., removed.<br />
1.21 GUARANTEE<br />
A. The Contractor shall guarantee all materials, equipment, and workmanship furnished<br />
and installed by him under this Contract, to be free from all defects of workmanship<br />
and materials, and shall agree to replace at his expense, without expense to the<br />
Owner, at any time within one year after installation is accepted by the<br />
Architect/Engineer, any and all defective equipment, parts, etc., that may be found.<br />
(This excludes normal maintenance and daily servicing of equipment which is the<br />
Owner's responsibility.)<br />
1.22 FLOOR, WALL, AND CEILING PLATES<br />
A. Where exposed pipes pass through floors, finished walls, or finished ceiling, they<br />
shall be fitted with chromium-plated escutcheons of an approved pattern.<br />
Escutcheons and plates in Mechanical Rooms do not require chrome finish.<br />
B. This Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing all counter flashing.<br />
All openings in the roof shall be flashed and counterflashed. Use four pound lead<br />
flashing materials for all vent lines and welded flashing in steel lines passing through<br />
roof. The Mechanical Contractor shall notify the General Contractor where each roof<br />
penetrations is and the size of the opening.<br />
1.23 PIPE SLEEVES<br />
A. Schedule 40 steel pipe sleeves or pipe sleeves made of No. 20 gauge galvanized steel,<br />
properly secured in place with approximately 1/4" space between each sleeve and the<br />
surface of the pipe and/or insulation passing through it, shall be provided for all pipes<br />
passing through concrete floors, roofs, and masonry walls. All pipe sleeves shall be<br />
fixed in place as the walls and floors are built up. The Contractor shall furnish and<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-15
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
locate all sleeves and pipes passing through concrete floors, exterior masonry walls,<br />
and roofs shall be made watertight with approved non-hardening plastic material.<br />
Sleeves through pipe chase or equipment room floors shall project a minimum of 2-<br />
inch above the floor and shall be of black steel pipe with waterproof flange at center<br />
of floor thickness. Each sleeve through a fireproof wall shall be packed with<br />
approved fireproof rope in the annular space.<br />
1.24 PIPE HANGERS<br />
A. Pipe hangers shall be Fee and Mason of a type suitable for each use. Perforated<br />
straps shall not be used in any work. For ferrous pipes up to and including 4 inch in<br />
size, use Fee and Mason Fig. 199 malleable iron, adjustable, split ring, swivel hanger.<br />
For plumbing piping larger than 4 inch, use Fee and Mason Fig 239 steel clevis<br />
hanger. Where several pipes are parallel at the same elevation, trapeze hangers may<br />
be used. Where trapeze hangers are used, the pipes shall be supported on rollers<br />
where indicated on the Drawings. For copper pipes up to and including 3 inch in<br />
size, use Fee and Mason Fig. 360 malleable iron, copper plated hangers. For copper<br />
pipes larger than 3 inch, use Fee and Mason Fig. 364 copper plated clevis hanger.<br />
B. Hanger rod sizes shall conform to the following schedule:<br />
1. Pipe up to and including 2" 3/8" rods<br />
2. Pipe 2-1/2", 3" and 3-1/2" 1/2" rods<br />
3. Pipe 4" and 5" 5/8" rods<br />
4. Pipe 6" 3/4" rods<br />
5. Pipe 8”, 10”, and 12” 7/8” rods<br />
C. Unless shown otherwise on the Plans, all horizontal runs of ferrous piping shall be<br />
suspended from the floor or roof construction, as the case may be, by means of<br />
hangers with the following spacing:<br />
1. Pipe up to and including 1-1/4" 8'<br />
2. Pipe 1-1/2" and 2" 10'<br />
3. Pipe 2-1/2" and 3" 12'<br />
4. Pipe 3 1/2” and 4” 14’<br />
5. Pipe 5” and 6” 16’<br />
6. Pipe 8” and 10” 20’<br />
D. Unless shown otherwise on the Plans, all horizontal runs of copper piping shall be<br />
suspended from the floor or roof construction as the case may be, by means of<br />
hangers with the following maximum spacing:<br />
1. Pipe up to 3/4" in size 5'<br />
2. Pipe 1" and 1-1/4" 6'<br />
3. Pipe 1-1/2" and larger 10'<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-16
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
E. There shall be a hanger within 2 inch of each elbow or tee. Additional supports shall<br />
be provided for valves, strainers, etc. Cast iron pipe shall have not less than one<br />
hanger per length of pipe. Vertical risers shall be supported by approved riser clamps<br />
at each floor. Vertical pipes within a space shall have not less than two supports.<br />
F. Supports and hangers shall be installed to permit free expansion and contraction in<br />
the piping systems. Hangers shall permit vertical adjustment to maintain proper<br />
pitch. Where necessary to control expansion and contraction, the piping shall be<br />
guided and firmly anchored. No piping shall be self-supporting, nor shall it be<br />
supported from equipment connection.<br />
G. Expansion bolts shall be Ackerman-Johnson or Hilti.<br />
H. Beam clamps suitable for use with this type of steel construction involved shall be<br />
Grinnell.<br />
1.25 PRESSURE VESSEL CERTIFICATION<br />
A. Not used.<br />
1.26 ISOLATION<br />
A. Excessive vibration or objectionable noise created in any part of the building by the<br />
operation of any equipment furnished and/or installed under the Mechanical Contract<br />
will be extremely objectionable and the Contractor shall take all precautions against<br />
the same by isolating the various items of equipment from the building structure and<br />
by such other means as may be necessary to eliminate all excessive vibration and<br />
objectionable noise produced by any equipment installed by them, and consequently,<br />
they shall design all foundations, supports, etc., for their equipment, and all piping<br />
with this end in view. In addition, these Contractors shall supervise the construction<br />
of all foundations and supports, whether they build them or not, in order that they<br />
may be constructed in such a manner as to prevent the transmission of objectionable<br />
noise and/or excessive vibration. Submit calculations on all vibration isolation<br />
equipment.<br />
B. All equipment having moving parts shall be isolated from the building structure by<br />
means of Korfund isolation materials, unless specifically noted otherwise. All<br />
isolators shall be the same brand and shall be supplied from the same source.<br />
Equipment manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed in the isolation of<br />
equipment.<br />
C. Vibration isolators shall have sufficient resilience to meet the following minimum<br />
efficiencies:<br />
Motor HP<br />
Equipment Room<br />
Up to 5 90%<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-17
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
7-1/2 to 15 93%<br />
20 to 40 95%<br />
50 to 100 97.5%<br />
D. Spring isolators shall be of the housed type with ribbed pads bonded to the underside<br />
of the baseplate, or may be unhoused stable springs. Isolators shall be furnished with<br />
snubbers and limit stops where so recommended by the equipment manufacturer.<br />
E. The Supplier of the isolating equipment shall, upon completion of the job, check all<br />
isolating materials and verify that they are installed properly, and submit a report in<br />
writing to the Architect/Engineer.<br />
1.27 TESTING<br />
A. Before completion of this project, the Mechanical Contractor shall test all materials<br />
and equipment which normally require testing. All piping, etc., shall be tested to<br />
meet code requirements or the Specification requirements, whichever is more<br />
stringent.<br />
B. All equipment shall be operated sufficiently long enough to prove to the<br />
Architect/Engineer that the equipment performs satisfactorily and meets the<br />
requirements set forth on the Plans or in these Specifications.<br />
1.28 CERTIFICATIONS<br />
A. Before receiving final payment, the contractor shall verify that all equipment<br />
furnished and all work done is in compliance with all applicable codes mentioned in<br />
these Specifications. Submit certifications and acceptable certificates to the<br />
Architect/Engineer.<br />
1.29 GENERAL PIPING INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Provisions for Drainage: All piping systems shall be installed so that they may be<br />
easily drained. Drain caps, plugs, or hose bibbs shall be installed at low points.<br />
Grade piping toward drain locations.<br />
B. Alignment: All installed pipe lines shall be straight and shall remain straight against<br />
strains. Proper allowance shall be made for expansion and contraction.<br />
C. Clean as Installed: All piping shall be kept free from scale or loose dirt when<br />
installed, and must be kept clean during the completion of the installation. All<br />
openings in the piping system shall be capped or plugged while awaiting further<br />
connections. All detergents, solvents and other cleaning agents shall be compatible<br />
with the materials of fabrication of the system in which they are used. They shall not<br />
adversely affect the materials of mechanisms in the systems and they shall be<br />
acceptable to equipment manufacturers. All detergents, solvents, and other cleaning<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-18
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
agents shall also be compatible with the process streams to be handled by the systems<br />
in which they are used.<br />
D. Insulated Fittings: Install between any dissimilar metals such as steel and copper.<br />
E. Expansion and Contraction: The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for<br />
expansion and contraction with proper fittings, anchors, dresser couplings, loops, etc.<br />
Install flexible connectors on each pipe at each building expansion joint.<br />
F. Welding: Refer to Paragraph 1.30 of this section of these specifications.<br />
G. Bending: No bending of pipe will be permitted.<br />
H. General: The installation shall be coordinated with respect to space available with<br />
heating, cooling, ventilating, and electrical installation. In every instance where there<br />
is a conflict in the routing of the piping and the ducting, the routing of the ducting<br />
shall govern. Installed piping shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of<br />
doors or windows, shall not encroach on aisles, passageways, and equipment, and<br />
shall not interfere with the servicing or maintenance of equipment. Pipe shall be cut<br />
accurately to measurements established at the construction site and shall be worked<br />
into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all openings and equipment.<br />
Cutting or weakening of structural members to facilitate piping, installation is not<br />
permitted. Pipes shall have burrs removed by reaming and shall be so installed as to<br />
permit free expansion and contraction without damage to joints or hangers. Piping<br />
above ground shall be run parallel with the lines of the building unless otherwise<br />
noted on the drawings. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, horizontal piping<br />
shall pitch down in the direction of flow with grade of not less than 1 inch in 40 feet.<br />
Piping connections to equipment shall be in accordance with details shown on the<br />
drawings or as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. Service pipe valves<br />
and fittings shall be kept a sufficient distance from other work to permit finished<br />
covering not less than 1/2 inch from such other work, and not less than 1/2 inch<br />
between finished coverings on the different services.<br />
I. Installation of Valves: Valves shall be installed at the locations shown on the<br />
drawings and where specified and where directed at site. Gate valves shall be used<br />
unless otherwise shown, specified, or directed. All valves shall be installed with their<br />
stems horizontal or above. Where tight shutoff is required, a composition seat globe<br />
valve or resilient seat ball valve shall be used.<br />
J. All valves which must be used during operation, all control valve assemblies,<br />
instrument control cases, liquid level controls, gage glasses, orifices, relief valves,<br />
and other equipment which must be observed, adjusted, or serviced during operation<br />
shall be located conveniently accessible from an operating platform or grade.<br />
K. In general, relief valves within processing unit limits shall be located conveniently<br />
accessible from an operating platform or grade.<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-19
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Those in non-hazardous service, such as water, shall discharge directly to<br />
outside.<br />
2. Relief valves should have no piping between the vessel or line and the valve<br />
inlet, except as shown on the drawings.<br />
3. Relief valves shall be installed in a vertical position. Vent piping shall be braced<br />
and supported in a manner that will not produce excessive stresses in the relief<br />
valve and will permit removal of the relief valve without necessary temporary<br />
supports for the vent lines.<br />
L. Equipment Connections: All piping connections to pumps and other equipment shall<br />
be installed without strain at the pipe connection of the equipment. The contractor<br />
shall be required as directed to remove the bolts in flanged connections or disconnect<br />
piping to demonstrate that the piping has been so connected. Pipe connections to<br />
equipment shall be made with unions or flanged fittings. Provide removable headers<br />
for large equipment for service access.<br />
M. Joints<br />
1. Flanged Joints: All flanged joints shall be face matched. Raised face flanges<br />
shall not be mated to flat-faced cast-iron flanges on valves or equipment. The<br />
raised face must be turned off. All flanged bolt holes shall straddle the<br />
horizontal and vertical center line unless otherwise noted.<br />
2. Screwed Joints: Screwed pipe joints shall have American Standard Taper Pipe<br />
Threads ANSI-B2.1 Latest Edition. Burrs formed when cutting pipe shall be<br />
removed by reaming. Care shall be taken that the inside of pipe is thoroughly<br />
clean and free of cutting oil and foreign matter before installation. Joints shall be<br />
made perfectly tight by the use of Teflon tape or approved Teflon thread sealing<br />
and lubricating compound.<br />
3. Solder-Joints: Tubing shall be cut square and burrs removed. Both inside of<br />
fittings and outside of tubing shall be well cleaned with steel wool or wire brush<br />
before seating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings and hard<br />
drawn tubing when making connections. Joints for serrated fittings on water,<br />
compressed air below 60 psig, and vacuum lines shall be made with a 95 percent<br />
tin and 5 percent antimony. Cored solder or solder containing lead will not be<br />
permitted.<br />
N. Reducers: Reduction in pipe size shall be made with one piece reducing fittings.<br />
Bushings reducing at least two pipe sizes will be acceptable only when there is no<br />
room for reducing couplings or swaged nipples.<br />
O. Unions: All piping unions shall be of the ground joint type constructed from<br />
materials equivalent in alloy composition and strength to other fittings specified with<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-20
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1.30 WELDING<br />
which they are sued. Union Pressure classes and end connections shall be the same<br />
as the fittings used in the lines with the unions. Steel unions shall have hardened<br />
stainless steel seating surfaces on both faces.<br />
A. All welding of piping covered by this specification, regardless of condition of service<br />
shall be accompanied as follows:<br />
1. The welding shall be in accordance with the recommendations of the American<br />
Welding Society. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching to form these, or<br />
any similar construction will not be permitted. Welding fittings shall be installed<br />
on all welded lines. Joints to be welded shall be properly aligned and spaced,<br />
using special welding clamps where necessary. All welders to be employed shall<br />
have passed qualification tests prescribed by the National Certified Pipe Welding<br />
bureau (or by another reputable testing laboratory or agency) using procedures<br />
approved by the American Society of Mechanical Engineers or the American<br />
Welding Society. The welders will be required to pass qualification tests when<br />
the work of the welder creates a reasonable doubt as to his proficiency. Tests<br />
shall be conducted at no additional expense to the Owner.<br />
2. Each welder shall, in addition to having passed the prescribed qualification tests<br />
(as noted in Paragraph 12 A), prepare sample coupons at the job site on a portion<br />
of pipe that is cut such that the cross section of the weld is open to view. The<br />
sample weld should be prepared using a 6 inch diameter pipe. The sample shall<br />
reflect a continuous weld with perpendicular cut out to show the weld in cross<br />
sectional view. This sample, when accepted and approved by a certified welding<br />
inspector, shall be used as a standard of quality to compare to other welds that<br />
this welder will be performing on the job. This same sample weld will also be a<br />
basis for accepting or rejecting the welder for working on this project. The<br />
sample weld shall be identified with a date and the welder's name and shall be<br />
kept at the site throughout the project.<br />
3. All welding on pressure piping shall conform to all of the requirements of the<br />
American Society of Mechanical Engineers Code for Pressure Piping - B31.1<br />
(An American National Standards Institute publication), as defined in the latest<br />
edition of the ANSI Power Piping B31.1 <strong>Manual</strong>. All welding shall also<br />
conform to all of the requirements of the American Society of Mechanical<br />
Engineers Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. All chapters, current addenda and<br />
supplements of these manuals shall apply. This code shall be used to establish<br />
standards of performance and quality of welds.<br />
However, the Owner reserves the right to perform radiographic testing of all<br />
welds, to compare any of the welds to the approved "standard" sample welds of<br />
each welder, and to compare the welds to the welding diagrams and sketches of<br />
those recommended in the ANSI B31.1 Power Piping <strong>Manual</strong>. The intent is to<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-21
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
obtain the highest quality welding job possible. The cost of any initial<br />
radiographic testing, for random inspection, shall be paid for by the Owner. If<br />
radiographic random testing reveals that a weld is defective, the Contractor shall<br />
bear the cost of all repairs and re-testing necessary to be made to subject weld<br />
until conformance with radiographic tests is reached. The potential for random<br />
radiographic testing and welding quality control applies to all pressure piping<br />
systems in this project, including systems below 100 psig. If a question should<br />
arise regarding the possibility of faulty welding or if there are obvious visual<br />
defects in the welding, the Contractor shall be required to correct such<br />
deficiencies to a quality level consistent with the recommendations, welding<br />
diagrams and sketches in the ANSI B31.1 <strong>Manual</strong>. The quality level shall also<br />
reflect that of the approved sample welds accomplished by each welder for this<br />
particular project.<br />
1.31 TESTING FOR PIPING SYSTEMS<br />
A. General: Before insulation is applied, all piping, equipment, and accessories installed<br />
under this contract shall be inspected and tested by the Contractor. All labor,<br />
material, and equipment required for testing shall be furnished by the Contractor.<br />
The Contractor shall be responsible for all repairs and retesting as required. All<br />
instruments and other equipment whose safe pressure range is below that of the test<br />
pressure shall be removed from the line or blanked off before applying tests. Prior to<br />
performing tests, all lines shall be "blown" free of all loose dirt and foreign particles.<br />
The lines shall then be thoroughly flushed with water (liquid lines only) at a sufficient<br />
flow rate and period of time, to ensure complete cleaning of the lines of all dirt, scale,<br />
and foreign matter. Satisfactory flushing of the lines shall be subject to approval.<br />
After testing and flushing lines, all filters and strainers shall be cleaned.<br />
B. Safety: Since the Risk of failure, with the attendant possibility of injury, is<br />
appreciable greater with further testing, all safety measures required by codes or<br />
ordinance or reasonable applicable to the situation shall be taken.<br />
C. Concealment: Equipment or piping to be pressure tested shall not be insulated,<br />
covered, or concealed prior to that test. Compression joint underground piping may<br />
be backfilled prior to pressure test except that joints shall remain exposed until after<br />
the test, but tie rods, clamps, etc., shall be in place and fastened.<br />
D. Pressure Ratings: These tests shall not be used to establish pressure ratings.<br />
E. System Protection: Protect all piping and equipment against overpressure, collapse<br />
from vacuum, and hydraulic shock during the filling, testing and draining procedures.<br />
Seats of iron valves shall not be subjected to a pressure in excess of the maximum<br />
cold working pressure of the valve. Pressure tests against other closed valves shall<br />
not exceed twice the normal rating. Note that where significant differences in<br />
elevation exists, there is a risk of overpressure in the lower portions of the system in<br />
order to attain test pressure in the upper portion of the system<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-22
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
F. Test Temperature: Apply test pressure only after the system and test medium are at<br />
approximately the same temperature, preferably not less than 60°F. Note that some<br />
applicable codes require testing above a specified minimum temperature.<br />
G. Sectionalizing: Systems may be separated into sub-systems for testing if such action<br />
will expedite or simplify the testing.<br />
H. Temporary Supports: During hydrostatic testing of lines provide temporary supports<br />
to prevent overstressing supports or hangers. When tests are completed, remove all<br />
temporary supports, locks, stops, etc., and adjust supports for their cold load and<br />
alignment.<br />
I. Testing: Domestic hot and cold water piping and heating water piping shall be tested<br />
hydrostatically at the test pressures specified and shall show no drop in pressure in a<br />
2 hour period. Leaks shall be located by soap testing<br />
1. Test Pressures:<br />
a) Natural gas piping: as required by governing code<br />
b) Domestic Hot and Cold Water: 100 psig or 50% more than operating<br />
pressure, which ever is greater.<br />
J. Sanitary Waste and Soil System:<br />
1. After all soil and waste pipes and vent stacks have been installed, the outlets<br />
shall be plugged and the piping system filled with water in vertical sections to<br />
the highest point of the system and allowed to remain filled for twenty-four (24)<br />
hours and shall prove to be leaktight under such conditions. A one inch drop<br />
will be allowed in water level in standpipe. This test may be conducted in<br />
segments as required by the sequence of construction. Contractor shall certify in<br />
writing that all tests were satisfactorily completed before piping was concealed,<br />
and shall submit the certification to the Architect/Engineer for his records and<br />
for transmittal to the Owner.<br />
K. Test Report<br />
1. A detailed report of pressure tests on piping and equipment shall be forwarded in<br />
duplicate to the Architect/Engineer. This report shall show date of test, lines<br />
tested, test medium, length of time test pressure was held, pressure drop or rise,<br />
and extent of venting or repressurizing.<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-23
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1.32 COOPERATION WITH OTHER TRADES<br />
A. The Contractor shall refer to other sections of these specifications covering the work<br />
of other trades which must be carried out in conjunction with the mechanical work so<br />
that the construction operations can proceed without harm to the Owner from<br />
interference, delay or absence of coordination.<br />
1.33 FIELD MEASUREMENTS<br />
A. The Contractor shall verify the dimensions covering the mechanical work at the<br />
building. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed on account of<br />
difference between actual dimensions and those indicated on the drawings. He shall<br />
examine the adjoining work on which Mechanical work is dependent for maximum<br />
efficiency, and shall report any work which must be corrected. No waiver of<br />
responsibility for defective work shall be claimed or allowed due to failure to report<br />
unfavorable work conditions affecting Mechanical work.<br />
1.34 SAFETY GUARDS<br />
A. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish and install safety guards required in order to<br />
obtain certificates of inspection from all authorities having jurisdiction. All belt<br />
driven equipment, projecting shafts, and other rotating parts shall be enclosed or<br />
adequately guarded. Provide coupling guards on all rotating shafts.<br />
1.35 PROTECTION<br />
A. All work, equipment, and materials shall be protected at all times to prevent<br />
obstruction, damage, or breakage. All pipe openings shall be closed with caps or<br />
plugs during installation. All equipment shall be covered and protected against dirt,<br />
water, chemical, or mechanical injury. At the completion of the work, all equipment<br />
shall be thoroughly cleaned and the entire system shall be delivered in a perfect,<br />
unblemished condition.<br />
1.36 PAINTING AND IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. All equipment shall be delivered to the job with suitable factory finish. Should the<br />
finish be marred in transit or during installation, it shall be finished to present a neat,<br />
workmanlike appearance.<br />
B. Except as elsewhere hereinafter specifically required, any painting of equipment,<br />
piping, ductwork, grilles, insulation, etc., furnished and installed under this Section of<br />
the Specifications will be done by the Painting Contractor. However, the Mechanical<br />
Contractor shall leave his equipment clean and free from any grease, dirt, rust, etc.,<br />
and in suitable condition for painting.<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-24
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
C. No nameplates on equipment shall be painted, and suitable protection shall be<br />
afforded to the plates to prevent their being rendered illegible during the painting<br />
operation.<br />
D. The piping shall be painted the basic color as indicated in other sections of these<br />
specifications and shall be marked every 10 feet on centers with Brady pipe markers.<br />
Arrows, approximately 6 inch in length and spaced about 10 feet on centers shall<br />
indicate the direction of the flow pipe. Locate additional labels as required in<br />
Mechanical Rooms. Staple in place, brush with clear lacquer. Markers shall state<br />
pipe size, flow direction, and pipe usage (such as "cold water," etc.).<br />
1.37 RECORD DRAWINGS<br />
A. The Contractor shall, during the execution of the work, maintain a complete set of<br />
drawings upon which all dimensional locations of equipment piping and all<br />
deviations and/or changes in the work shall be recorded.<br />
Water, storm, and drainage mains shall be delivered to the Architect/Engineer in good<br />
condition upon the completion and acceptance of the work and before final payment<br />
is made.<br />
1.38 SUPPLIER RESPONSIBILITY<br />
A. Each supplier, whether furnishing equipment as specified or as a substitution shall be<br />
responsible for certifying that the equipment is properly installed and that the<br />
warranty is valid. Submit written reports on the installation and the equipment<br />
performance when requested to do so by the Architect/Engineer (or his<br />
representative). Each supplier shall be responsible for furnishing qualified personnel<br />
at the job site at anytime requested by the Architect/Engineer (or his representative)<br />
during the construction or warranty periods.<br />
END OF SECTION<br />
GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010-25
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15043<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and<br />
the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.<br />
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. Furnish all labor, materials and equipment required to test and balance the<br />
mechanical systems identified on the contract drawings and these specifications,<br />
including but not limited to:<br />
1. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic, steam, and refrigerating systems.<br />
2. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.<br />
3. Sound measurement of equipment operating conditions.<br />
4. Vibration measurement of equipment operating conditions.<br />
5. Adjustment of the mechanical systems shall include but not limited to impellers<br />
trimmed, new sheeves and belts to match cfm required, etc. as required to match<br />
equipment specified.<br />
6. Operating Test<br />
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS<br />
A. Section 15010 – General Mechanical Requirements.<br />
B. Section 15046 – Demonstration and Training.<br />
C. Section 15800 – Ductwork.<br />
D. Section 15902 – Electrical Controls and Interlocks.<br />
1.4 REFERENCES<br />
A. The publications listed below form a part of these specifications to the extent<br />
referenced. Each publication shall be the latest edition of each except as noted.<br />
1. AABC - National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and<br />
Air Conditioning System.<br />
2. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers.<br />
3. ASHRAE 111 - Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of<br />
Building Heating, Ventilation, Air-conditioning, and Refrigeration Systems.<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS<br />
4. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of<br />
Environmental Systems.<br />
5. NFPA – NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating System.<br />
6. SMACNA - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing.<br />
A. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing,<br />
adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.<br />
B. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting,<br />
balancing, and equipment data required.<br />
C. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of <strong>Project</strong>. Provide<br />
final copies for Architect/Engineer and for inclusion in operating and maintenance<br />
manuals.<br />
D. Provide reports in letter size, 3-ring binder manuals, complete with index page and<br />
indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced<br />
drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets,<br />
and indicating thermostat locations.<br />
E. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms and copy of AABC<br />
National <strong>Project</strong> Performance Guaranty prior to commencing system balance.<br />
F. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC National Standards for Total System Balance<br />
forms.<br />
G. When test and balancing has been completed, the balancing agency shall prepare a<br />
complete report including design and test conditions compared. The report shall be<br />
as outlined below.<br />
H. Seven copies of the complete and compiled test data shall be submitted to the<br />
Contractor for forwarding to the Architect/Engineer for evaluation and approval.<br />
1. The Report shall be on standard 8-1/2” x 11” good quality paper and bound<br />
together to form a complete report. All forms shall be typewritten. Field data<br />
may be handwritten on appropriate printed or typewritten forms. Copies of<br />
handwritten field notes shall be legible.<br />
2. Each sheet shall have the Building number, name of the Testing Firm,<br />
instruments used to perform the tests, name of personnel performing the test, and<br />
date test was performed. Date and firm performing the calibration on<br />
photometry equipment shall also be included.<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Outside weather conditions shall be noted during the times the tests were made;<br />
cloud cover, temperature, wind speed and direction, precipitation, etc.<br />
I. The Report shall have a T & B Summary section including:<br />
1. Identification of any system or equipment item the Contractor had difficulty<br />
balancing to specification or could not be balanced to specification.<br />
2. Identification of any piece of equipment or system whose balance should be<br />
rechecked and/or reset during weather conditions different from those present<br />
during system balancing.<br />
1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Record actual locations of flow measuring stations balancing valves and rough<br />
setting. Show locations on Test and Balance report reduced size plan drawings.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Perform total system balance in accordance with NEBB Procedural Standards for<br />
Testing, Balancing, and Adjusting of Environmental Systems.<br />
1.8 QUALIFICATIONS<br />
A. The balancing shall be performed by Energy Balance, Inc. or Kirk Air. Qualified<br />
personnel are limited to registered mechanical Engineers and agencies regularly<br />
engaged in testing and balancing work. The Contractor shall submit, prior to the start<br />
of the balancing work, the qualifications and experience record of the balancing<br />
personnel for approval by the Architect/Engineer.<br />
B. Perform Work under supervision of registered Professional Engineer experienced in<br />
performance of this Work and licensed in the state where the <strong>Project</strong> is located.<br />
C. The balancing agency shall not be associated with or the same contractor furnishing<br />
the controls or instrumentation.<br />
1.9 PRE-BALANCING CONFERENCE<br />
A. Convene pre-balancing conference one week prior to commencing work of this<br />
section in coordination with Architect/Engineer/General Contractor and his<br />
Subcontractors.<br />
1.10 SEQUENCING<br />
A. Sequence work to commence after completion of systems and schedule completion of<br />
work before Substantial Completion of <strong>Project</strong>. See section 3.1 for pre-balancing<br />
inspection.<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 2 PRODUCT<br />
2.1 INSTRUMENTS<br />
A. Instruments in general shall be direct reading. Pressures between 2" W.G. and 12"<br />
W.G. shall be measured with manometers. Duct velocities above 600 fpm shall be<br />
measured with a pitot tube. Averaging hoods with tight seal shall be used for airflow<br />
measurement at diffusers, registers and grilles. RPM shall be measured with a<br />
revolution counter and stopwatch. Mercury thermometers are preferred; bi-metallic<br />
thermometers may be used if calibration is checked daily. Test report shall list all<br />
instruments used and include accuracy and date calibrated. The Contractor shall<br />
provide all instruments to make the tests herein specified and required for complete<br />
system balancing.<br />
2.2 AIR HANDLERS<br />
A. After the air system is balanced and an optimum fan speed is selected, the adjustable<br />
sheaf or sheaves furnished shall be replaced by the Mechanical Contractor with new<br />
non-adjustable sheaves for permanent operation.<br />
2.3 PUMPS<br />
A. After the water system is balanced and an optimum pump operating point is selected,<br />
the pump impeller shall be trimmed to supply the required capacity for pumps over 2<br />
HP, without throttling the flow.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. The test and balance agency shall review the plans and specifications prior to<br />
installation of the system and submit a report to the Architect/Engineer of any<br />
deficiencies in the system which could preclude proper adjusting, balancing and<br />
testing of the system.<br />
B. The test and balance agency shall inspect the system prior to adjusting, balancing,<br />
and testing work to insure that all specified components which will affect proper<br />
execution of such work are installed and are operating properly. A report shall be<br />
submitted to the Architect/Engineer indicating the results of the inspection within<br />
three days of the inspection. The following is a partial list of items to be inspected<br />
and report provided to the Architect/Engineer.<br />
1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.<br />
2. Temperature control systems and control systems are installed complete and<br />
operable.<br />
3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in<br />
addition to final filters.<br />
5. Duct systems are clean of debris.<br />
6. Fans are rotating correctly.<br />
7. Fire/smoke and volume dampers are in place and open. The smoke detectors and<br />
power to them is installed and the dampers are operational. Air coil fins are<br />
cleaned and combed.<br />
8. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.<br />
9. Air outlets are installed and connected.<br />
10. Duct system leakage is minimized.<br />
11. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented.<br />
12. Pumps are rotating correctly.<br />
13. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place.<br />
14. Service and balance valves are open.<br />
C. Submit field reports in a timely manner within one week of pre-balancing conference.<br />
Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which prevent<br />
system balance.<br />
D. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions of the installed system<br />
and equipment on the project.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make<br />
instruments available to Architect/Engineer to facilitate spot checks during testing.<br />
B. Provide additional balancing devices as required.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES<br />
A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply<br />
systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.<br />
B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of<br />
design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent<br />
of design.<br />
C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.<br />
3.4 ADJUSTING<br />
A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.<br />
B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing<br />
settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that<br />
such disruption has been rectified.<br />
D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors,<br />
closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified<br />
settings.<br />
E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck<br />
points or areas as selected and witnessed by the Owner.<br />
3.5 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE<br />
A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply,<br />
return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude.<br />
B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross<br />
sectional area of duct.<br />
C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.<br />
D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from<br />
objectionable drafts and noise.<br />
E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extent that adjustments<br />
do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct<br />
internal devices such as dampers and splitters.<br />
F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes<br />
required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation.<br />
G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each<br />
outlet or inlet.<br />
H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil<br />
pressure drops, and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent<br />
loading of filters.<br />
I. Adjust outside air automatic dampers, outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for<br />
design conditions.<br />
J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to<br />
check leakage.<br />
K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme<br />
conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling,<br />
and at minimum air flow rate, full heating.<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-6
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to<br />
provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05 inches<br />
positive static pressure near the building entries.<br />
M. For variable air volume system powered units set volume controller to air flow setting<br />
indicated. Confirm connections properly made and confirm proper operation for<br />
automatic variable air volume temperature control.<br />
N. On fan powered VAV boxes, adjust airflow switches for proper operation.<br />
3.6 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE<br />
A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities.<br />
B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gages to<br />
determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow-metering devices are not<br />
installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer<br />
elements in the system.<br />
C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer<br />
elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature<br />
differential in conjunction with air balancing.<br />
D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer<br />
elements.<br />
E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves,<br />
and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for<br />
balance point.<br />
F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual<br />
system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow<br />
to other parts.<br />
3.7 SCHEDULES<br />
A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing<br />
1. Electric Water Coolers<br />
2. Plumbing Pumps<br />
3. HVAC Pumps<br />
4. Forced Air Furnaces<br />
5. Direct Fired Furnaces<br />
6. Air Cooled Refrigerant Condensers<br />
7. Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units<br />
8. Packaged Terminal Air Conditioning Units<br />
9. Unit Air Conditioners<br />
10. Computer Room Air Conditioning Units<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-7
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
11. Air Coils<br />
12. Evaporative Humidifier<br />
13. Radiant Heating Systems<br />
14. Terminal Heat Transfer Units<br />
15. Induction Units<br />
16. Air Handling Units<br />
17. Fans<br />
18. Air Filters<br />
19. Air Terminal Units<br />
20. Air Inlets and Outlets<br />
B. Report Forms<br />
1. Title Page<br />
a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency<br />
b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency<br />
c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency<br />
d. <strong>Project</strong> name<br />
e. <strong>Project</strong> location<br />
f. <strong>Project</strong> Architect<br />
g. <strong>Project</strong> Engineer<br />
h. <strong>Project</strong> Contractor<br />
i. <strong>Project</strong> altitude<br />
j. Report date<br />
2. Summary Comments<br />
a. Design versus final performance<br />
b. Notable characteristics of system<br />
c. Description of systems operation sequence<br />
d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building<br />
pressurization<br />
e. Nomenclature used throughout report<br />
f. Test conditions, including weather conditions<br />
3. Instrument List:<br />
a. Instrument<br />
b. Manufacturer<br />
c. Model number<br />
d. Serial number<br />
e. Range<br />
f. Calibration date<br />
4. Electric Motors:<br />
a. Manufacturer<br />
b. Model/Frame<br />
c. HP/BHP<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-8
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
d. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load<br />
e. RPM<br />
f. Service factor<br />
g. Starter size, rating, heater elements<br />
h. Sheave Make/Size/Bore<br />
5. V-Belt Drive:<br />
a. Identification/location<br />
b. Required driven RPM<br />
c. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM<br />
d. Belt, size and quantity<br />
e. Motor sheave diameter and RPM<br />
f. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual<br />
6. Pump Data:<br />
a. Identification/number<br />
b. Manufacturer<br />
c. Size/model<br />
d. Impeller<br />
e. Service<br />
f. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP<br />
g. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP<br />
h. Discharge pressure<br />
i. Suction pressure<br />
j. Total operating head pressure<br />
k. Shut off, discharge and suction pressures<br />
l. Shut off, total head pressure<br />
7. Combustion Test:<br />
a. Boiler manufacturer<br />
b. Model number<br />
c. Serial number<br />
d. Firing rate<br />
e. Overfire draft<br />
f. Gas meter timing dial size<br />
g. Gas meter time per revolution<br />
h. Gas pressure at meter outlet<br />
i. Gas flow rate<br />
j. Heat input<br />
k. Burner manifold gas pressure<br />
l. Percent carbon monoxide (CO)<br />
m. Percent carbon dioxide (CO2)<br />
n. Percent oxygen (O2)<br />
o. Percent excess air<br />
p. Flue gas temperature at outlet<br />
q. Ambient temperature<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-9
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
r. Net stack temperature<br />
s. Percent stack loss<br />
t. Percent combustion efficiency<br />
u. Heat output<br />
8. Gas Fired Equipment<br />
a. Manufacturer<br />
b. Model number<br />
c. Serial number<br />
d. Firing rate<br />
e. Overfire draft<br />
f. BTUH at sea level<br />
g. BTUH at altitude<br />
h. Gas pressure at meter outlet<br />
i. Gas flow rate in cfh<br />
j. Heat input<br />
k. Burner manifold gas pressure<br />
l. Orifice size<br />
m. Air temperature rise for gas fired equipment<br />
n. Check all limit devices for proper operation, setting and calibration<br />
o. Make up water pressure setting<br />
p. Working pressure<br />
q. Ambient temperature<br />
r. Relief valve setting<br />
s. Static pressure<br />
t. Fan hydronic system and fan cfm<br />
u. Heat output<br />
9. Air Cooled Condenser:<br />
a. Identification/number<br />
b. Location<br />
c. Manufacturer<br />
d. Model number<br />
e. Serial number<br />
f. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual<br />
g. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual<br />
h. Number of compressors<br />
10. Chillers:<br />
a. Identification/number<br />
b. Manufacturer<br />
c. Capacity<br />
d. Model number<br />
e. Serial number<br />
f. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual<br />
g. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-10
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
h. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual<br />
i. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual<br />
j. Condenser entering water temperature, design and actual<br />
k. Condenser pressure drop, design and actual<br />
l. Condenser water flow rate, design and actual<br />
11. Cooling Tower:<br />
a. Tower identification/number<br />
b. Manufacturer<br />
c. Model number<br />
d. Serial number<br />
e. Rated capacity<br />
f. Entering air WB temperature, specified and actual<br />
g. Leaving air WB temperature, specified and actual<br />
h. Ambient air DB temperature<br />
i. Condenser water entering temperature<br />
j. Condenser water leaving temperature<br />
k. Condenser water flow rate<br />
l. Fan RPM<br />
12. Heat Exchanger:<br />
a. Identification/number<br />
b. Location<br />
c. Service<br />
d. Manufacturer<br />
e. Model number<br />
f. Serial number<br />
g. Steam pressure, design and actual<br />
h. Primary water entering temperature, design and actual<br />
i. Primary water leaving temperature, design and actual<br />
j. Primary water flow, design and actual<br />
k. Primary water pressure drop, design and actual<br />
l. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual<br />
m. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual<br />
n. Secondary water flow, design and actual<br />
o. Secondary water pressure drop, design and actual<br />
13. Cooling Coil Data:<br />
a. Identification/number<br />
b. Location<br />
c. Service<br />
d. Manufacturer<br />
e. Air flow, design and actual<br />
f. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual<br />
g. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual<br />
h. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-11
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
i. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual<br />
j. Water flow, design and actual<br />
k. Water pressure drop, design and actual<br />
l. Entering water temperature, design and actual<br />
m. Leaving water temperature, design and actual<br />
n. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual<br />
o. Air pressure drop, design and actual<br />
14. Heating Coil Data:<br />
a. Identification/number<br />
b. Location<br />
c. Service<br />
d. Manufacturer<br />
e. Air flow, design and actual<br />
f. Water flow, design and actual<br />
g. Water pressure drop, design and actual<br />
h. Entering water temperature, design and actual<br />
i. Leaving water temperature, design and actual<br />
j. Entering air temperature, design and actual<br />
k. Leaving air temperature, design and actual<br />
l. Air pressure drop, design and actual<br />
15. Electric Duct Heater:<br />
a. Manufacturer<br />
b. Identification/number<br />
c. Location<br />
d. Model number<br />
e. Design kW<br />
f. Number of stages<br />
g. Phase, voltage, amperage<br />
h. Test voltage (each phase)<br />
i. Test amperage (each phase)<br />
j. Air flow, specified and actual<br />
k. Temperature rise, specified and actual<br />
16. Induction Unit Data:<br />
a. Manufacturer<br />
b. Identification/number<br />
c. Location<br />
d. Model number<br />
e. Size<br />
f. Design air flow<br />
g. Design nozzle pressure drop<br />
h. Final nozzle pressure drop<br />
i. Final air flow<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-12
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
17. Air Moving Equipment<br />
a. Location<br />
b. Manufacturer<br />
c. Model number<br />
d. Serial number<br />
e. Arrangement/Class/Discharge<br />
f. Air flow, specified and actual<br />
g. Return air flow, specified and actual<br />
h. Outside air flow, specified and actual<br />
i. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual<br />
j. Inlet pressure<br />
k. Discharge pressure<br />
l. Sheave Make/Size/Bore<br />
m. Number of Belts/Make/Size<br />
n. Fan RPM<br />
18. Return Air/Outside Air Data:<br />
a. Identification/location<br />
b. Design air flow<br />
c. Actual air flow<br />
d. Design return air flow<br />
e. Actual return air flow<br />
f. Design outside air flow<br />
g. Actual outside air flow<br />
h. Return air temperature<br />
i. Outside air temperature<br />
j. Required mixed air temperature<br />
k. Actual mixed air temperature<br />
l. Design outside/return air ratio<br />
m. Actual outside/return air ratio<br />
19. Exhaust Fan Data:<br />
a. Location<br />
b. Manufacturer<br />
c. Model number<br />
d. Serial number<br />
e. Air flow, specified and actual<br />
f. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual<br />
g. Inlet pressure<br />
h. Discharge pressure<br />
i. Sheave Make/Size/Bore<br />
j. Number of Belts/Make/Size<br />
k. Fan RPM<br />
20. Duct Traverse:<br />
a. System zone/branch<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-13
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
b. Duct size<br />
c. Area<br />
d. Design velocity<br />
e. Design air flow<br />
f. Test velocity<br />
g. Test air flow<br />
h. Duct static pressure<br />
i. Air temperature<br />
j. Air correction factor<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-14
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
21. Duct Leak Test:<br />
a. Description of ductwork under test<br />
b. Duct design operating pressure<br />
c. Duct design test static pressure<br />
d. Duct capacity, air flow<br />
e. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor<br />
f. Test apparatus<br />
I. Blower<br />
II. Orifice, tube size<br />
III. Orifice size<br />
IV. Calibrated<br />
g. Test static pressure<br />
h. Test orifice differential pressure<br />
i. Leakage<br />
22. Air Monitoring Station Data:<br />
a. Identification/location<br />
b. System<br />
c. Size<br />
d. Area<br />
e. Design velocity<br />
f. Design air flow<br />
g. Test velocity<br />
h. Test air flow<br />
23. Flow Measuring Station:<br />
a. Identification/number<br />
b. Location<br />
c. Size<br />
d. Manufacturer<br />
e. Model number<br />
f. Serial number<br />
g. Design Flow rate<br />
h. Design pressure drop<br />
i. Actual/final pressure drop<br />
j. Actual/final flow rate<br />
k. Station calibrated setting<br />
24. Terminal Unit Data:<br />
a. Manufacturer<br />
b. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct<br />
c. Identification/number<br />
d. Location<br />
e. Model number<br />
f. Size<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-15
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
g. Minimum static pressure<br />
h. Minimum design air flow<br />
i. Maximum design air flow<br />
j. Maximum actual air flow<br />
k. Inlet static pressure<br />
25. Air Distribution Test Sheet:<br />
a. Air terminal number<br />
b. Room number/location<br />
c. Terminal type<br />
d. Terminal size<br />
e. Area factor<br />
f. Design velocity<br />
g. Design air flow<br />
h. Test (final) velocity<br />
i. Test (final) air flow<br />
j. Percent of design air flow<br />
26. Sound Level Report:<br />
a. Location<br />
b. Octave bands - equipment off<br />
c. Octave bands - equipment on<br />
27. Vibration Test:<br />
a. Location of points:<br />
I.Fan bearing, drive end<br />
II.Fan bearing, opposite end<br />
III.Motor bearing, center (if applicable)<br />
IV.Motor bearing, drive end<br />
V.Motor bearing, opposite end<br />
VI.Casing (bottom or top)<br />
VII.Duct after flexible connection (discharge)<br />
VIII.Duct after flexible connection (suction)<br />
3.8 CALCULATIONS<br />
b. Test readings:<br />
I. Horizontal, velocity and displacement<br />
II. Vertical, velocity and displacement<br />
III. Axial, velocity and displacement<br />
c. Normally acceptable readings, velocity and acceleration<br />
d. Unusual conditions at time of test<br />
e. Vibration source (if non-complying)<br />
A. The following calculations shall be made and become part of the reported data.<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-16
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. The CFM at each heating, cooing, and fan coil, the heating and/or cooling<br />
capacity of each and the air temperature change of each.<br />
2. The water flow at each heating, cooling, and fan coil, the heating and/or cooling<br />
capacity of each and the water temperature change of each.<br />
3. The fuel flow to each gas fired unit and the BTUH input.<br />
4. The capacity of each refrigeration unit in BTUH or tons at full capacity and at<br />
each unloaded step.<br />
5. The saturation efficiency of each dry cooler and air washer.<br />
3.9 OPERATING TEST<br />
A. The test and balance agency shall coordinate and set up an operating test when Test<br />
& Balance is completed to ensure complete operation of the system in all modes. The<br />
controls contractor, sheet metal trade and the general contractor shall certify in<br />
writing test completion and all units are operating as designed. Attach copy of<br />
operating test to Test & Balance report.<br />
END OF SECTION 15043<br />
TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15043-17
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15060<br />
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and<br />
the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.<br />
1.2 SCOPE<br />
A. This section of the specifications encompasses the basic materials and methods of the<br />
various piping systems covered in Division 15.<br />
B. Standards: The latest edition of each standard referenced shall be used to determine<br />
compliance.<br />
1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS<br />
15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
15080 - PIPING SPECIALTIES<br />
15100 - VALVES<br />
15160 - VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION<br />
15180 - PIPING INSULATION<br />
15402 - DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS<br />
15403 - ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS<br />
15404 - SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS<br />
1.4 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING<br />
A. All accessible piping shall be labeled at not more than 10 ft. intervals with labels<br />
indicating the service and direction of flow. Pipe labels shall be self-adhesive labels,<br />
all-temperature Perma-Code pipe markers No. B-500, manufactured by the W.H.<br />
Brady Company. The background color code for all markers shall conform to the<br />
American National Standard A13.1 - 1975 "Scheme for the Identification of Piping<br />
Systems."<br />
B. The color red shall be for the exclusive use on fire protection service piping and<br />
sprinkler piping per OSHA regulations (CFR 1910.144).<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PIPING SYSTEMS<br />
A. Domestic water system<br />
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Above grade:<br />
a. Copper: Shall be Type K soft drawn, or Type L hard drawn, seamless<br />
copper tubing conforming to ASTM B88, with wrought copper and bronze<br />
solder joint pressure fittings conforming to ANSI B16.22.<br />
b. Piping and fittings shall be equal to Zurn “PEX”. Refer to plans and notes<br />
for suggested piping schematics.<br />
2. Underground:<br />
a. Copper: Type K hard, seamless copper tubing conforming to ASTM B-88<br />
with silver brazed joints (ASTM B-260 Class BAg-1) with wrought copper<br />
fittings per ANSI B16.22.<br />
B. Soil and waste system<br />
1. Above ground:<br />
a. Cast iron: Shall be cast iron hub and spigot soil pipe or hubless cast iron<br />
pipe and fittings, conforming to ASTM A74 and Cast Iron Institute CS-188.<br />
The hub and spigot pipe may utilize either hot poured or compression gasket<br />
joints per ASTM C-644XH.<br />
b. PVC: Piping shall be polyvinylchloride (schedule 40 for size 4" and smaller,<br />
SDR-35 for sizes 6" and larger), exterior sewer pipe (PVC) ASTM D3034<br />
with gaskets per ASTM D1869. Allowed only where Owner agrees.<br />
2. Underground inside building:<br />
a. Cast iron: Shall be cast iron hub and spigot soil pipe and fittings,<br />
conforming to ASTM A74 and Cast Iron Institute CS-188. The hub and<br />
spigot may utilize either hot poured or compression gasket joints per ASTM<br />
C-644XH.<br />
b. PVC: Piping shall be polyvinylchloride (schedule 40 for size 4" and<br />
smaller, SDR-35 for sizes 6" and larger), exterior sewer pipe (PVC) ASTM<br />
D3034 with gaskets per ASTM D1869. Allowed only where Owner agrees<br />
3. Underground outside buildings:<br />
a. Under traffic areas and parking lots: Shall be cast iron hub and spigot soil<br />
pipe or hubless cast iron pipe and fittings, conforming to ASTM A74 and<br />
Cast Iron Institute CS-188.<br />
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
b. PVC: Piping shall be polyvinylchloride (schedule 40 for size 4" and<br />
smaller, SDR-35 for sizes 6" and larger), exterior sewer pipe (PVC) ASTM<br />
D3034 with gaskets per ASTM D1869. Allowed only where Owner agrees.<br />
c. Risers and base fittings for grade cleanouts shall be extra heavy cast iron<br />
pipe and fittings with hot poured joints per USA Standard A40.8.<br />
4. Manholes:<br />
a. Manholes shall be of either precast or brick construction. Precast shall be<br />
48" diameter, Class II, Type V reinforced concrete per ASTM C-478. Top<br />
section shall be built to grade with brick or concrete grade rings. Brick<br />
manholes shall be constructed to the standard and with approval of local<br />
jurisdiction authorities.<br />
b. Frame and covers shall consist of grey iron, ASTM Class 45 with lid indexed<br />
"Sanitary Sewer" or "Storm Sewer" as applicable. Frame and cover shall be<br />
Neenah Foundry Company model R-1370 with Type C lid or equal.<br />
C. Sanitary vent system<br />
1. Vent piping 2" and smaller in diameter may be schedule 40 galvanized steel<br />
pipe conforming to ASTM A-53 with 150 pound galvanized malleable iron<br />
screwed fittings conforming with ANSI B16.3. Vent piping larger than 2" shall<br />
be cast iron as specified for interior soil and waste.<br />
2. PVC: Piping shall be polyvinylchloride (schedule 40 for size 4" and smaller,<br />
SDR-35 for sizes 6" and larger), exterior sewer pipe (PVC) ASTM D3034 with<br />
gaskets per ASTM D1869. Allowed only where Owner agrees.<br />
D. Refrigeration piping system<br />
1. COPPER: Shall be "ACR" Type L hard drawn, seamless copper tubing<br />
conforming to ASTM B280, with wrought copper and bronze solder joint<br />
pressure fittings conforming to ANSI B16.22.<br />
E. Roof drain system<br />
1. The roof drain system shall be the same as the soil and waste system except that<br />
for drains 2" and smaller in diameter, Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe<br />
conforming to ASTM A-53 with 150 pound galvanized malleable iron screwed<br />
fittings conforming with ANSI B16.3, may be used.<br />
F. Natural gas piping system<br />
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2.2 JOINTS<br />
1. Black steel: Above grade piping shall be Schedule 40, black steel pipe<br />
conforming to ASTM A-53, with 150 pound malleable iron screwed fittings<br />
conforming with ANSI B16.3. or seamless carbon steel weld fittings conform to<br />
ASTM A-234.<br />
2. Underground piping shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe conforming to ASTM<br />
A-53 machine wrapped with Scotchwrap PVC tape using 50% overlap. Fittings<br />
and joints shall be double wrapped to a minimum 6 inches beyond the fitting.<br />
Pipe shall be primed prior to wrapping per manufacturer's recommendations.<br />
PVC or similar plastic piping materials may be used underground with written<br />
approval of the code authority and serving utility company.<br />
A. Copper:<br />
1. Silver brazed joints shall use brazing material containing approximately 45%<br />
silver, 15% zinc, 25% cadmium and 15% copper. Joints shall conform to ASTM<br />
B-260 Class BAg-1. Approved materials include Mueller #122, Handy and<br />
Harmon "Easy Flo45" and United Wire and Supply "Sil-Bond 45".<br />
2. Solder joints shall use solder material containing no more than 0.2% lead for<br />
potable water systems and no more than 5% lead for other systems with a noncorrosive<br />
flux in accordance with ASTM B32.<br />
B. Cast Iron:<br />
1. Neoprene Rubber gaskets for hub and spigot piping per ASTM C564.<br />
2. No hub joints shall consist of neoprene gaskets and series 300 stainless steel<br />
clamps and shields similar to Alabama Pipe Company "NO HUB" system<br />
conforming to CISPI Std. 301-64T.<br />
C. Ductile Iron: Joints shall be of the stuffing box type per ANSI 21.11 as modified by<br />
ANSI 21.51 or push-on type per ANSI 21.51. Rubber gaskets and lubricant shall be<br />
per ANSI 21.11.<br />
D. Black Steel:<br />
1. Screwed joints shall be made with no more than three threads showing using<br />
teflon tape or teflon joint sealing compound.<br />
2. Welded joints shall be fusion welded to full metal depth with width at least 2 1/2<br />
times the depth of the metal being joined.<br />
E. Galvanized Steel:<br />
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Screwed joints shall be made with no more than three threads showing using<br />
teflon tape or teflon joint sealing compound.<br />
F. Polyethylene:<br />
1. Joints shall be threaded clamp type or other method approved by the pipe<br />
manufacturer.<br />
G. Bell and spigot joints shall conform to AWWA C200 with rubber gaskets.<br />
H. Bonded joints shall have metallic bond including joints made with flexible couplings,<br />
caulking or rubber gaskets. Metallic bond shall be of ferrous material to effect<br />
continuous conductivity. Bond wire shall be type RHW-USE, size 1/0 neoprene<br />
gasketed copper conductor. Bond shall be thermal weld type.<br />
I. Insulating joints shall be installed between nonthreaded ferrous and nonferrous<br />
metallic pipe. Insulating joints shall consist of a sandwich type flange insulating<br />
gasket of the dielectric type, insulating washers and insulating sleeves for flange<br />
bolts. Gaskets shall be full faced. Bolt insulating sleeves shall be full length. Units<br />
shall be of a construction to prevent metal to metal contact of dissimilar piping<br />
materials.<br />
2.3 FLOOR, WALL AND CEILING PLATES<br />
A. Where exposed pipes pass through finished floors, finished walls or finished ceilings,<br />
they shall be fitted with chromium plated spun brass flanges or flanges to match the<br />
type of pipe or pipe finish used. Plates shall be large enough to completely close the<br />
hole around the pipe and shall be not less than 1-1/2" or more than 2-1/2" larger than<br />
the diameter of the pipes. All plates shall be securely held in place.<br />
2.4 UNIONS<br />
A. Piping 2-1/2" and larger to have bolted flange unions with gaskets of material suitable<br />
for the specified service. Ground joint unions with brass to iron seats shall be used in<br />
piping 2" and smaller. Unions shall be installed at all valves and equipment<br />
connections.<br />
B. Insulating Unions: See Specification Section 15080.<br />
2.5 HANGERS AND ANCHORS<br />
A. All piping shall be rigidly supported from the building structure by means of<br />
adjustable ring type hangers. Where pipes run side by side, support on rod and angle<br />
trapeze hangers. Hangers shall be spaced not greater than 5 feet on centers for cast<br />
iron piping, 6 feet on centers for copper piping and 10 feet on centers for steel piping.<br />
Plastic pipe shall be supported on not more than 3 feet centers. Round rods<br />
supporting the pipe hangers shall be of the following dimensions:<br />
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. 1/2 inch to 2 inch pipe 3/8 inch rod<br />
2. 2-1/2" inch to 3 inch pipe 1/2 inch rod<br />
3. 4 inch to 5 inch pipe 5/8 inch rod<br />
4. 6 inch pipe 3/4 inch rod<br />
5. 8 inch pipe 7/8 inch rod<br />
B. Rods for trapeze hangers shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch and shall have the<br />
equivalent cross section listed above per pipe supported. The use of pipe hoods,<br />
chains, or perforated iron for pipe supports will not be permitted. Insulated piping<br />
shall have hangers outside of insulation with 18 ga. protection sleeves 12" long.<br />
Anchors and guides shall be as detailed on the drawings. The Contractor shall<br />
provide inserts in the building construction at the time the concrete is poured, and the<br />
hangers shall be attached to these inserts. Where inserts cannot be used expansion<br />
shields may be used provided the hanger is not attached rigidly to the bolt but is<br />
supported from an angle held in place by the expansion bolt. The use of expansion<br />
shields must be approved by the Architect/Engineer. See drawings and details for<br />
support of tunnel piping.<br />
2.6 THRUST BLOCKS<br />
A. All underground water line tees, crosses, bends and valves shall be provided with<br />
concrete blocking. Concrete blocking shall be used for cast-iron or vitrified clay tile<br />
fittings where a change of flow direction occurs. All fittings at bends in the pipe line<br />
shall be firmly wedged against the vertical face of the trench by means of concrete<br />
thrust blocks bearing on undisturbed earth, to prevent the fittings from being blown<br />
off the line when under pressure. Fittings at vertical bends downward shall be<br />
anchored with concrete anchors as required. Thrusts blocks shall be determined<br />
using an allowable soil bearing pressure of 1,500 PSF at 200 psi test pressure in water<br />
line. No blocking will be covered or backfilled until inspected and approved by the<br />
Architect/Engineer.<br />
2.7 VALVE BOXES<br />
A. Valve boxes shall be of cast iron extension type with flared base and shall be M & H<br />
Valve and Fittings Company, two-piece, 5 1/4" shaft, screw type to fit depth of bury.<br />
The minimum thickness of metal shall 3/16" and the nominal diameter of the box<br />
shall be at least four inches. The cover shall have the name of the utility service cast<br />
in the metal. Boxes shall be installed over each outside gate valve unless otherwise<br />
shown on the drawings. The boxes shall be of such length as will provide without<br />
extension a cover of not less than three feet over all water pipes. Valve boxes shall<br />
have concrete collars.<br />
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060-6
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 GENERAL<br />
A. Provide and erect in a workmanlike manner according to the best practices of the<br />
trade all piping shown on drawings and required for the complete installation of the<br />
systems. The piping shown on the drawings shall be considered as diagrammatic for<br />
clarity in indicating the general run and connections, and may or may not in all parts<br />
be shown in its true position. The piping may have to be offset, lowered or raised as<br />
required or as directed at the site. This does not relieve the Contractor from<br />
responsibility for the proper erection of systems or piping in every respect suitable for<br />
the work intended as described in the specifications and approved by the<br />
Architect/Engineer.<br />
B. In the erection of all piping, it shall be properly supported and proper provisions shall<br />
be made for expansion, contraction and anchoring of piping. All piping shall be cut<br />
accurately for fabrication to measurements established at the construction site. Pipe<br />
shall be worked into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing equipment<br />
and all windows, door, and other openings. Cutting or other weakening of the<br />
building structure to facilitate installation will not be permitted. All pipes shall have<br />
burrs and/or cutting slag removed by reaming or other cleaning methods. All changes<br />
in direction shall be made with fittings.<br />
C. All open ends of pipes and equipment shall be properly capped or plugged with plugs<br />
manufactured for this purpose to keep dirt and other foreign materials out of the<br />
system. Plugs of rags, wool, cotton waste or similar materials may not be used in<br />
plugging.<br />
D. All piping shall be arranged avoiding interference with removal and maintenance of<br />
equipment, filters or devices; and not blocking access to manholes, access openings,<br />
etc. Flanges or unions as applicable for the type of piping specified shall be provided<br />
at the piping connections to all items of equipment.<br />
E. Valves and specialties shall be placed to permit easy operation and access, and valves<br />
shall be regulated, packed and adjusted at the completion of the work before final<br />
acceptance.<br />
F. All piping shall be erected to insure proper draining. Steam mains shall be pitched<br />
down in the direction of flow, a minimum of one inch per 40 feet or appropriately<br />
trapped. Where steam and condensate flow in opposite directions within the same<br />
pipe, the pipe shall be 2 sizes larger than shown unless specifically shown on the<br />
drawings that counterflow of condensate was intended by the design. Condensate<br />
return mains shall be pitched down in the direction of flow, one inch per 20 feet.<br />
Domestic water piping may be run level but shall be free from traps.<br />
G. Soil and waste piping and other gravity drains shall be sloped down in direction of<br />
flow minimum one inch in 20 feet.<br />
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060-7
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3.2 ACCESS DOORS<br />
A. Furnish all access doors required for access to valves, controls, or other items for<br />
which access is required for either operation or servicing. All costs incurred through<br />
failure to perform this function as the proper sequence of the work dictates shall be<br />
borne by this Mechanical Contractor.<br />
B. The type of access door shall be as required by the room finish schedule. Acoustical<br />
tile access doors shall be equal to Krueger Style B, Style A for acoustical plaster, or<br />
Style C-CF for sidewall drywall or plaster construction.<br />
3.3 JOINTS<br />
A. Caulked joints in hub and spigot piping shall be packed firmly with oakum or hemp<br />
and caulked with pure molten lead not less than one inch deep. Resilient molded<br />
gaskets may be used on hub and spigot piping in lieu of lead and oakum packing. For<br />
cast iron soil pipe not located under buildings, the Contractor may also use the Nohub<br />
sanitary system for pipe 6" and below with neoprene sealing gaskets, stainless<br />
steel retaining sleeves and two draw bands. An adequate torque wrench shall be used<br />
for system installation in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.<br />
B. Screwed Joints: Screwed joints shall be American Standard taper pipe threads. Ream<br />
pipe ends and remove burrs after threading. Make up joints using an approved<br />
compound or teflon tape, applied to the male threads only.<br />
C. Brazed and Soldered Joints: Tubing shall be cut square and burrs removed. Both<br />
inside of fittings and outside of tubing shall be well cleaned with steel wool before<br />
sweating. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing<br />
when making connections.<br />
D. Welded Joints: On black steel piping 2 inches and above in size, the joints shall be<br />
welded. Welding shall be done using either gas or electric welding equipment.<br />
Certified welders shall be used. All pipe surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned before<br />
welding. Each joint shall be beveled before being welded. Piping shall be securely<br />
aligned and spaced and the width of circumferential welds shall form a gradual<br />
increase in thickness from the outside surface to the center of the weld. The<br />
Contractor shall use appropriate materials to protect the structure and provide<br />
adequate fire protection at all locations where welding is done. All elbows shall be<br />
long radius unless otherwise specified. Wherever tee connections are made to piping<br />
systems on the main run, welding sockets may be installed for the branch connections<br />
up to one half the size of the main run. On connections larger than one half the size<br />
of the main run, welding tees shall be used. The use of fittings formed from welded<br />
pipe sections will not be permitted.<br />
E. Flanged Joints:<br />
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060-8
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Cast iron flanges shall conform to the American Standard for cast iron pipe<br />
flanged fittings, Class 125 (B.16.1). Gaskets shall be suitable for the service on<br />
which used.<br />
2. Steel flanges shall be 150 lb. raised face type.<br />
F. Solvent Welded Joints:<br />
1. Pipe shall be cut square with pipe cutters designed specifically for plastic pipe.<br />
Pipe shall be protected from serrated holding devices and abrasion. Remove<br />
burrs from inside and outside of pipe. Clean the joining surfaces using an<br />
approved ABS Cleaning compound. Following the instructions on the can, apply<br />
the ABS cement and assemble the joint as quickly as possible before the cement<br />
dries.<br />
3.4 PUMP AND EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS<br />
A. All piping connecting to pumps or other equipment shall be installed with isolation<br />
valves and flexible connections to prevent strain at the connection to equipment. The<br />
Contractor shall be required as directed to disconnect piping to demonstrate that<br />
piping has been so connected. Provide a suction diffuser at each end suction pump<br />
where the inlet piping has a straight run of less than 15 pipe diameters in length.<br />
Suction diffusers shall consist of angle type body with inlet vanes and combination<br />
diffuser-strainer-orifice cylinder with 3/16 inch diameter openings for pump<br />
protection. Strainer free area shall be five times the section area of the pump<br />
connection. Provide an adjustable support foot for diffusers installed on end suction<br />
pumps.<br />
3.5 PIPE SLEEVES<br />
A. Pipe sleeves shall be furnished and set by the Contractor and he shall be responsible<br />
for their proper and permanent location. Piping will not be permitted to pass through<br />
footings, beams or ribs unless so noted on the drawings or with the consent of the<br />
Architect/Engineer. Pipe sleeves shall be installed and properly secured in place at<br />
all points where pipes pass through concrete or masonry construction. Pipe sleeves,<br />
except sleeves in footings and beams shall be of sufficient diameter to provide<br />
approximately 1/4 inch clearance around the pipe, and in cases of insulated pipes,<br />
approximately 1/4 inch around the insulation. Pipe sleeves in footings and beams<br />
shall be of steel pipe. Sleeves in footings shall be not less than one inch or more than<br />
two inches larger in diameter than the pipe to be installed. Pipe sleeves in floors shall<br />
be cut flush with finished floor. Openings between piping and sleeves shall be made<br />
watertight with plastic cement to a minimum depth of two inches. Openings between<br />
piping and sleeves in all masonry or concrete interior walls and partitions shall be<br />
similarly caulked for acoustical reasons.<br />
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060-9
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3.6 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION<br />
A. The Contractor shall make all necessary provisions for expansion and contraction of<br />
piping with offsets or loops and anchors to prevent undue strain.<br />
3.7 PROTECTIVE COATINGS<br />
A. All underground pipe except exterior cast iron water distribution pipe shall be<br />
wrapped with "Scotchwrap" No. 50 tape to give not less than two complete layers on<br />
the entire underground piping system, or piping shall have X-TRU Coat factory<br />
applied plastic protective covering.<br />
B. All buried exterior cast iron water distribution piping shall be tar coated.<br />
3.8 TESTING<br />
A. Before any insulation is installed or before piping is covered or enclosed all piping<br />
systems shall be tested and proved tight at not less than 1 1/2 times the maximum<br />
service pressure which the piping systems will be required to handle, unless<br />
otherwise specified.<br />
B. All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect/Engineer and the building<br />
Owner or his representative. Any systems failing to meet the specified test<br />
requirements shall be corrected and retested until the test requirements are met.<br />
3.9 FLUSHING, DRAINING AND CLEANING PIPE SYSTEMS<br />
A. The Contractor shall flush water piping systems with water before placing them in<br />
operation. After systems are in operation and during the test period all strainer<br />
screens shall be removed and thoroughly cleaned. The Contractor shall notify the<br />
Architect/Engineer in writing when this requirement is to be accomplished.<br />
B. All domestic water lines shall be sterilized as described in Section 15402 -<br />
DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEM of these specifications.<br />
END OF SECTION 15060<br />
PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS 15060-10
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15080<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and<br />
the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.<br />
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all piping specialties necessary for<br />
satisfactory operation of the systems.<br />
B. <strong>Manual</strong> air vents shall be installed at all high points in heating and cooling water<br />
piping systems and as shown on the contract drawings.<br />
C. Valves shall be installed in all primary and secondary plumbing loops and branch<br />
lines feeding groups of fixtures in order to isolate such loops and branches without<br />
disrupting the service as a whole.<br />
D. Unions shall be installed where necessary to facilitate maintenance of pumps, valves,<br />
regulators and other specialties.<br />
E. Dielectric unions shall be installed wherever dissimilar metals are joined, except<br />
valves in closed loop piping systems.<br />
1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS<br />
15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
15060 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS<br />
15100 - VALVES<br />
15160 - VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION<br />
15180 - PIPING INSULATION<br />
15402 - DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS<br />
15403 - ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS<br />
15404 - SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 STRAINERS<br />
A. Mueller Steam Specialty model 352M cast bronze, threaded ends, y-strainer, 20 mesh<br />
stainless steel screens for water service and .033” dia. opening screens for steam<br />
service. Provide blow-off valves full size of strainer tapping with drain lines to<br />
nearest drain.<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES 15080-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Mueller Steam Specialty model 752, 250 SWP, flanged for size 2-1/2” and larger<br />
with 1/16” dia openings screen for water and 3/64” dia openings stainless steel screen<br />
for steam. Provide blow-off valves full size of strainer tapping with drain lines to<br />
nearest drain.<br />
2.2 PRESSURE GAUGES<br />
A. Marshalltown “Permagage”, Ashcroft “Duragage”, “Trerice No. 500X, or approved<br />
equal. Dials shall be 4-1/2” unless otherwise noted. Proved needle valve for each<br />
gauge, and syphon for each steam gauge. Pressure gauges shall be range noted on<br />
plans or at mid range of service (as shown on drawings).<br />
2.3 THERMOMETERS<br />
A. Where indicated on the drawings and the piping diagrams, thermometers shall be<br />
installed as manufactured by the H.O. Trerice Co., Mueller, Albert Weiss, or<br />
approved equal. Thermometers shall be provided with expansion heads so that<br />
thermometer will not break under extremes of temperature. Each thermometer shall<br />
be provided with a separable socket well which shall be place in the piping system.<br />
The well shall be the length required for accurate reading of the thermometer.<br />
2.4 AIR VENTS<br />
A. <strong>Manual</strong> air vents shall be 1/2” brass ball valves, Nibco No. T-585-70 or approved<br />
equal.<br />
2.5 THERMOMETER WELLS<br />
A. Machined brass test wells with screwed caps and chains. H.O. Trerice No. 5573 or<br />
5574 as required, or approved equal.<br />
B. Temperature and Pressure Test Plugs: Furnish pressure and temperature test plugs at<br />
all locations as shown on the drawings. These test plugs shall be furnished with a<br />
Nordel valve core and 1/2” NPT brass body complete with gasket cap.<br />
C. Furnish 4 each thermometers and pressure gauges for use by the Owner for checking<br />
temperatures and pressures.<br />
2.6 INSULATING UNIONS<br />
A. Insulating unions having a plastic insert for electrical isolation shall be similar to<br />
EPCO Sales Company.<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES 15080-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. All specialties shall be installed in accordance with the best standard practices and as<br />
recommended by the manufacturer.<br />
B. Where thermometers or test fittings occur in insulated piping systems or on insulated<br />
equipment, extension necks shall be provided to extend beyond the insulation.<br />
C. Dielectric union shall be installed wherever piping of dissimilar metallic material is<br />
connected. Insulating unions are not required between bronze valve bodies and<br />
connecting steel pipe in closed loop systems such as heating and chilled water<br />
systems.<br />
END OF SECTION 15080<br />
PIPING SPECIALTIES 15080-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15100<br />
VALVES<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and<br />
the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.<br />
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. All valves except lubricated plug valves and butterfly valves shall be manufactured<br />
by Nibco, Hammond, Lunkenheimer, Kennedy, Stockham, Walworth, Powell or<br />
Milwaukee.<br />
B. Lubricated plug valves shall be as manufactured by Rockwell, Milwaukee or<br />
Walworth.<br />
C. Butterfly valves shall be as manufactured by W.C. Norris, Centerline, Nibco, Demco,<br />
Grinell, Milwaukee or Keystone.<br />
1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS<br />
15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
15080 - PIPING SPECIALTIES<br />
15160 - VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION<br />
15180 - PIPING INSULATION<br />
15402 - DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS<br />
15403 - ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS<br />
15404 - SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS<br />
1.4 IDENTIFICATION OF VALVES<br />
A. Each valve shall be provided with a stamped metal tag secured to the valve with<br />
metal chain. Tag shall indicate both the service and function of each valve. The<br />
Contractor shall furnish two prints of drawings showing floor plan for each floor with<br />
all valves accurately located and labeled. These drawings shall be neat and easily<br />
read.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 VALVES<br />
A. Domestic Water:<br />
VALVES 15100-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Gate Valves 2" and Under: Nibco No. T134, rising stem, ductile iron hand<br />
wheel, union bonnet, solid wedge disc, bronze body, Class 150 psi working<br />
pressure.<br />
2. Gate Valves 2-1/2" and Larger: Nibco No. F617-0, bronze trimmed, solid wedge<br />
disc, iron body, O.S. & Y., 125 psi working pressure.<br />
3. Swing Check 2" and Under: Nibco No. T433, swing type, Y-pattern, all bronze,<br />
renewable seat & disc, regrinding, 200 psi working pressure.<br />
4. Swing Check, 2-1/2" and Larger: Nibco No. F938-31, iron body, bolted bonnet,<br />
Class 150, bronze trimmed, check valves installed at discharge of pumps shall be<br />
non-slam type.<br />
5. Globe Valves 2" and under: Nibco No. T235, union bonnet, integral seat, Class<br />
150 bronze body with renewable disc.<br />
6. Globe Valves, 2-1/2" and Larger: Nibco No. 718-B, bolted bonnet, cast iron<br />
body, 125 psi working pressure 0.S. & Y., pattern bronze trimmed.<br />
7. Gate Valves 3” and Under for Copper Pipe: Nibco No. S134, union bonnet,<br />
Class 150 bronze rising stem wedge disc.<br />
8. Globe Valves 2” Under for Copper Pipe: Nibco S-235, Class 150, bronze union<br />
bonnet, integral seat, renewable seat and disc.<br />
9. Angle Valves 2” and Under Copper Pipe: Nibco T335, Class 150, Union Bonnet,<br />
integral seat, renewable seat & disc.<br />
10. Angle Valves 2 1/2” and Larger: Nibco F8180-B, Class 125, bolted bonnet cast<br />
iron, renewable seat & disc., bronze trim.<br />
11. Check Valve for 3” and under for Copper Pipe: Nibco S-433, Y-pattern, swing<br />
type, all bronze, renewable seat & disc.<br />
12. <strong>Manual</strong> Balancing Valves:<br />
a. 2” and Under: Nibco T-585-70 ball valve or Milwaukee Butterball butterfly<br />
valve with calibrated flow set handle.<br />
b. 2-1/2” and Larger: W.C. Norris butterfly valves with lever with infinite<br />
throttling position as specified below.<br />
13. Circuit Balancing Valves: Balance Valves shall be “Circuit Setter” balance<br />
valves as manufactured by Bell & Gossett.<br />
14. Automatic Balancing Valves: Shall be spring loaded, variable orifice type<br />
capable of maintaining present flow within 5% over an operating pressure<br />
VALVES 15100-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
differential of at least 14 times the minimum valve pressure requirement.<br />
Maximum controlled pressure differential shall be at least 75% of the system<br />
pump head. Valve shall be Griswold Automatic Flow Control Valve or<br />
approved equal. At Contractor’s option, automatic flow control valves may be<br />
used in 2” size and above in lieu of manual balancing valves.<br />
15. Butterfly Valves: Lug type butterfly valves, ductile iron or cast iron body,<br />
bronze blade, stainless steel shaft and with EPT liner for tight shutoff up to 150<br />
psi, bonded seat. Valves to be suitable for mounting between flanges, with lugs<br />
drilled and tapped so that pipe line can be disconnected with the valve still<br />
holding pressure. Valves 3” and smaller to have lever operators with infinite<br />
throttling positions. Valves 4” and larger to have worm gear and hand wheel<br />
manual operators. Butterfly valves may be used in lieu of gate valves for water<br />
service 2” and larger. Liner shall be suitable for -30 F to + 275 F.<br />
16. Ball Valves:<br />
a. 1/2” to 2”: Nibco No. T-585-70, two piece body, bronze, screwed ends,<br />
Teflon seats, straight through flow design.<br />
17. Lubricated Plug Valves: Rockwell Mfg. Co. “Permaturn” lubricated plug valves<br />
Fig. No. 143. Provide valve handle for each valve. Valves shall have tapered<br />
plugs with thermally bonded lubricated film.<br />
18. Water Pressure Relief Valves for makeup to heating and cooling systems, and<br />
relief for heating and cooling system, Bell & Gossett No. 480-75 unless<br />
otherwise noted.<br />
19. Relief Valves for hot water generators and heating converters. ASME labled<br />
temperature and pressure relief valves shall be installed on the hot water<br />
generator. Pressure relief valve shall be installed on the converter set for 30 psi.<br />
Valves shall be sized for the full heating capacity. Discharge from valves shall<br />
be piped to the nearest floor drain.<br />
20. Drain Valves: Nibco No. T134, 3” and smaller.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. All valves shall be installed in locations which will allow easy operation and facilitate<br />
maintenance.<br />
B. Gate and globe valves shall be installed with stems up.<br />
C. System balancing valves shall be installed where shown or required to balance<br />
waterflows to all system components. In general balancing valves shall be provided<br />
at the following locations:<br />
VALVES 15100-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Each pump discharge, lubricated plug valve.<br />
2. Each main branch circuit, circuit balancing valve.<br />
3. At each water coil, circuit balance valve.<br />
END OF SECTION 15100<br />
VALVES 15100-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15160<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and<br />
the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.<br />
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. Vibration Isolation: All vibration isolation equipment including flexible pipe and<br />
duct connections hangers and bases shall be under the direct supervision of the<br />
vibration isolation manufacturer's representative. This specification provides the<br />
necessary design criteria to avoid excessive noise or vibration due to the operation of<br />
machinery, connecting piping, ductwork or conduit.<br />
1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS<br />
15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS<br />
15080 - PIPING SPECIALTIES<br />
15100 - VALVES<br />
15180 - PIPING INSULATION<br />
1.4 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITY<br />
A. The Contractor shall provide a submittal to the Architect/Engineer for approval prior<br />
to any installation of his equipment containing the following information:<br />
1. Catalog cuts and data sheets on specific vibration isolators to be utilized showing<br />
compliance with this specification and the recommendation of the isolator<br />
manufacturer as to suitability for the specific service.<br />
2. An itemized list showing the items of equipment, piping and ductwork to be<br />
isolated, the isolator type and model number selected, isolator loading and<br />
deflection, and reference to specific drawings showing equipment frame<br />
construction where applicable.<br />
3. Drawings showing equipment frame construction for each machine, including<br />
dimensions, structural member sizes, support point locations, etc.<br />
4. Written approval of the frame design to be used, obtained from the equipment<br />
manufacturer.<br />
VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION 15160-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
5. Drawings showing methods of suspension, support, guides, etc., for piping and<br />
ductwork.<br />
6. Drawings showing methods for isolation of piping and ductwork piercing walls,<br />
slabs, beams, etc.<br />
7. The Contractor shall bring to the Architect/Engineer's attention prior to<br />
installation any conflict with other trades which will result in unavoidable<br />
contact to the equipment, piping, etc., described herein, due to inadequate space.<br />
Corrective work necessitated by conflicts after installation shall be at the<br />
responsible contractor's expense.<br />
8. The Contractor shall bring to the Architect/Engineer’s attention any<br />
discrepancies between the specifications and field conditions, changes required<br />
due to specific equipment selection, etc., prior to installation. Corrective work<br />
necessitated by discrepancies after installation shall be at the expense of the<br />
Contractor.<br />
9. The Contractor shall obtain inspection and approval from the Architect/Engineer<br />
of any installation to be covered or enclosed prior to such closure.<br />
10. The Contractor shall obtain written and/or oral instructions from the vibration<br />
isolation manufacturer as to the proper installation and adjustment of vibration<br />
isolation devices; alternatively the equipment may be installed by the vibration<br />
isolation manufacturer.<br />
11. The Contractor shall correct, at no additional cost, all installations which are<br />
deemed defective in workmanship or materials by the Architect/Engineer.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS: Vibration isolation equipment shall be as manufactured by<br />
Flexonics, Kinetics, Mason Industries, Vibration Eliminator, Co., or approved equal.<br />
2.2 ISOLATOR TYPES<br />
A. SPRING TYPE<br />
1. All spring isolators shall have either known undeflected heights or other<br />
markings so that, after adjustment, when carrying their load the deflection under<br />
load can be verified, thus determining that the load is within the proper range of<br />
the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being provided<br />
according to the design.<br />
2. All spring isolators shall operate in the linear portion of their load versus<br />
deflection curve. Load versus deflection curves shall be furnished by the<br />
VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION 15160-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
manufacturer and must be linear over a deflection range 50% above the design<br />
deflection.<br />
3. The ratio of lateral to vertical stiffness shall not be less than 1.0 or greater than<br />
1.6.<br />
4. The vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon the load per<br />
isolator, and isolator stiffness, shall not differ by more than plus or minus 10%.<br />
5. Type MS shall be bare spring type (without housings or snubbers) equipped with<br />
leveling bolts and with two layers of ribbed or waffled neoprene pad separated<br />
by a 1/16 " galvanized steel plate under the base plate.<br />
6. Type HS shall be suspension hanger having a steel frame and spring element in<br />
series with a neoprene pad or washer. The isolator shall be designed so hanger<br />
rod may be misaligned 15 relative to the vertical without touching hanger box<br />
frame.<br />
B. NEOPRENE PAD TYPE<br />
1. Type MN shall be a neoprene isolator unit having a minimum static deflection of<br />
1/4" and show hardness of 40 to 65 after minimum aging.<br />
C. Flexible pipe connectors shall consist of a minimum 12 inch length of metal<br />
reinforced or corrugated flexible metal hose of appropriate pressure and temperature<br />
rating with end connections suitably for the adjacent piping system. Connectors shall<br />
be Flexonics type MMT FLG or Vibrasorber or approved equal.<br />
D. Flexible duct connectors shall be neoprene coated glass fabric, ventglass or equal.<br />
See Section 15800 AIR DISTRIBUTION.<br />
2.3 EQUIPMENT FRAMES AND BASES<br />
A. GENERAL:<br />
1. Equipment frames and base shall be furnished and installed where specifically<br />
shown on the drawings and at other locations recommended by the isolator<br />
manufacturer. In general rigid steel frames will be required for base mounted<br />
pumps, 30 HP and smaller, air handling units, some fans 30 HP and smaller,<br />
water chillers, cooling towers. Concrete inertia bases shall be furnished and<br />
installed for base mounted pumps 40 HP and larger and fans 40 HP and larger.<br />
B. RIGID STEEL FRAMES<br />
1. Mounting frame and/or brackets shall be provided to carry the load of the<br />
equipment without causing mechanical distortion or stress to the equipment.<br />
VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION 15160-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2. The mounting frames shall consist of welded wide flange of channel structural<br />
steel with welded brackets to accept the isolators. The section depth of the frame<br />
member shall be greater than 1/10 the length of the longest frame member.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 GENERAL<br />
A. Location: Vibration isolation equipment shall be installed at the following locations<br />
and at other locations recommended by the isolator manufacturer or required to<br />
reduce transmitted vibrations to a level acceptable to the Contracting Officer and<br />
Owner.<br />
1. All reciprocating or rotating equipment such as fans, AHU's, forced draft boilers,<br />
chiller, cooling towers, furnaces, pumps and compressors except as follows:<br />
a. Equipment installed on slab on grade construction.<br />
b. AHU's having factory installed internal spring isolation at fans.<br />
c. Inline pumps having motors 1/2 HP or smaller.<br />
2. At all connections between rotating equipment and piping or ductwork.<br />
3. All piping and ductwork within mechanical equipment rooms or within 10 feet of<br />
connections to rotating or reciprocating equipment.<br />
B. The Contractor shall install equipment and piping avoiding rigid contact with the<br />
building structure.<br />
C. The Contractor shall coordinate his work with other trades to assure rigid contact<br />
between the building structure and mechanical equipment and piping is minimized.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. LARGE EQUIPMENT<br />
1. Objective: Installation of vibration isolators shall not result in any change of<br />
position of equipment or piping which would result in stresses in piping<br />
connections or misalignment of shafts or bearings. In order to meet this<br />
objective, equipment and piping shall be maintained in a rigid position during<br />
installation. Equipment shall be shimmed into final, loaded position prior to<br />
making piping connections. Equipment load shall not be transferred to the<br />
isolator until the installation is complete and the equipment is under full<br />
operational load. This is particularly important where equipment installation<br />
weight is substantially different from operating weight such as cooling towers,<br />
VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION 15160-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
chillers, boilers, air washers and evaporative coolers which operate with<br />
substantial water content.<br />
2. The machine to be isolated shall be supported by a structural steel frame or<br />
concrete inertia base.<br />
3. Brackets shall be provided to accommodate the isolator and provide a<br />
mechanical stop. The vertical position and size of the bracket shall be specified<br />
by the isolator manufacturer.<br />
4. The operating clearance at steel frames between the bracket and the pad or floor<br />
shall be 3/8 inch, plus or minus 1/16 inch. The minimum operating clearance<br />
between the frame and the housekeeping pad or floor shall be one inch.<br />
5. The frame shall be placed in position and the brackets supported temporarily by<br />
3/8 inch shims prior to the installation of the machine or isolators.<br />
6. The isolators shall be installed without raising the machine and frame assembly.<br />
7. After the entire system installation is completed and under full operational load,<br />
the isolator shall be adjusted so that the load is transferred from the shims to the<br />
isolator. When all isolators are properly adjusted the shims will be barely free<br />
and shall be removed. Thereafter, the shims will be used as a gauge to check<br />
that the 3/8 inch clearance is maintained so that the system will remain free of<br />
stress.<br />
B. PIPE AND DUCT HANGERS<br />
1. General: Vertical rise and horizontally supported piping connected to<br />
reciprocating or rotating equipment are included herein. Domestic water and fire<br />
standpipe systems are excluded from this section of the specifications.<br />
2. Pipe and duct hangers shall be suspended from spring isolators within<br />
mechanical equipment rooms and within 10 feet of connections to rotating or<br />
reciprocating equipment.<br />
3. The isolators shall be installed with the isolator hanger box as close as possible<br />
to the structure.<br />
4. The isolators shall be suspended from substantial structural members, not from<br />
slab diaphragms unless specifically approved.<br />
5. Hanger rods shall be aligned to clear the hanger box.<br />
VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION 15160-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
6. Horizontal suspended pipe 2" and smaller shall be suspended by HS isolator type<br />
with a minimum 1.0 inch static deflection. Pipes larger than 2" shall be the same<br />
except with a minimum of 1-1/2" static deflection.<br />
7. Horizontal pipe floor supported at slab shall be supported via Type MS with a<br />
minimum static deflection of 1.0 inches.<br />
8. Vertical riser pipe supports shall utilize Type MS mounts selected for a<br />
minimum static deflection of 1.5 inches.<br />
9. Vertical riser guides, if required, shall utilize Type MN mounts to avoid direct<br />
contact of piping with building.<br />
10. Pipe sway braces where required shall utilize two neoprene elements (Type MN)<br />
to accommodate tension and compression forces.<br />
C. PIPE CLAMPS:<br />
1. All piping whether or not spring isolated hangers are used, shall be supported<br />
with a resilient wrapping or clamp system employing a resilient element of wool<br />
felt, neoprene or other suitable material.<br />
D. Flexible pipe connectors shall be installed between each piece of rotating or<br />
reciprocating piece of equipment and the distribution piping system.<br />
E. Flexible duct connectors shall be installed between each unit containing a fan and the<br />
distribution ductwork. Allow at least 1" slack in fabric connectors. Fabric may be<br />
attached to ductwork by folding into the sheet metal or attaching with metal flanges.<br />
F. Flexible duct connectors for kitchen hood exhaust systems shall be slip joint type<br />
with high temperature resilient packing material.<br />
END OF SECTION 15160<br />
VIBRATION ISOLATION AND EXPANSION COMPENSATION 15160-6
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15180<br />
PIPING INSULATION<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Furnish and Install:<br />
1. Piping insulation.<br />
2. Jackets and accessories.<br />
B. Related Documents:<br />
1. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Special<br />
Conditions and the General Requirements apply to the work specified in this<br />
section.<br />
2. Section 15010- General Mechanical Requirements.<br />
C. Insulation furnished under this specification shall comply with all requirements of the<br />
State Energy Code and the recommendations of the latest edition of ASHRAE Std. 90<br />
and these specifications. The more stringent of these shall be the standard for the<br />
work provided under these specifications.<br />
D. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor,<br />
accessories, equipment and materials necessary for installation of all piping, and<br />
mechanical equipment insulation systems. This includes but is not limited to:<br />
1.2 REFERENCES<br />
1. Thermal Insulation<br />
a. Domestic hot water piping<br />
b. Refrigerant piping<br />
c. Heat exchangers<br />
2. Condensation Prevention Insulation<br />
a. Domestic cold water piping<br />
b. Roof drain and overflow piping and roof drains<br />
c. Cooling coil condensate piping<br />
A. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.<br />
PIPING INSULATION 15180-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
B. ASTM C177 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission<br />
Properties by Means of Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus.<br />
C. ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement.<br />
D. ASTM C335 - Steady-State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation.<br />
E. ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing<br />
Cement.<br />
F. ASTM C518 - Test Methods for Steady-State Heat Flux, Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.<br />
G. ASTM C533 - Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.<br />
H. ASTM C534 - Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet<br />
and Tubular Form.<br />
I. ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.<br />
J. ASTM C585 - Inner and Outer Diameters of Rigid Thermal Insulation for Nominal<br />
Sizes of Pipe and Tubing (NPS System).<br />
K. ASTM C921 - Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.<br />
L. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Exposed Location: Exposed in mechanical rooms, rooms with finished walls or<br />
ceilings, and pipe chase between toilet rooms and equipment rooms.<br />
B. Concealed Location: Located in furred spaces, attics, crawl spaces, above suspended<br />
ceilings in finished or unfinished rooms, or all other locations not exposed to view.<br />
C. Cold Piping: Shall include domestic water and other piping with surface<br />
temperatures less than 60F.<br />
D. Hot Piping: Domestic hot water, supply and return and other piping with surface<br />
temperatures greater than 105F.<br />
E. Exterior Locations: All locations exposed, unexposed above grade or below grade<br />
beyond the building floor, wall or roof line of the structure or building<br />
F. Location and Insulation Requirements:<br />
1. Cold Water, including Non-potable Water (NPW): Insulate as follows:<br />
a. All piping above ceilings and in walls.<br />
PIPING INSULATION 15180-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
b. Entire system except for stubouts to fixtures.<br />
2. Domestic Hot: Insulate as follows:<br />
a. Entire system except for stubouts to fixtures.<br />
1) Chilled Water Supply and Return and Heating Water Supply and Return:<br />
a) All piping above ceilings, drops in wall and in mechanical rooms.<br />
2) Roof drains and over flows:<br />
a) All piping in building, ceilings, walls<br />
3) K Factors: All K Factors shown in this Specification are Expressed in<br />
BTU-in/hr.-ft 2 -F.<br />
A. Comply with Section 15010.<br />
B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each<br />
service and location.<br />
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensures<br />
acceptable workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Qualifications of Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application<br />
with five years minimum experience.<br />
B. Regulatory Requirements Fire Hazard Classification: Insulation shall have a<br />
composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive to secure jacket or facing) fire<br />
hazard rating as tested by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 not to exceed 25 flame<br />
spread, 50 fuel contribution, and 50 smoke developed. Materials shall be labeled<br />
accordingly.<br />
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING<br />
A. Compliance: Comply with Section 15010. Deliver materials to job site in original<br />
non-broken factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density and thickness.<br />
Store in a warm, dry location.<br />
PIPING INSULATION 15180-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1.7 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS<br />
A. Storage Environment: Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by<br />
manufacturers of adhesive and insulation while in storage.<br />
B. Environmental Requirements: Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures<br />
as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.<br />
C. Protection: Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage<br />
before, during and after installation. Repair or replace any such insulation or<br />
covering damaged prior to final acceptance of work.<br />
D. Application Surfaces: Surface shall be dry, free of dust, oil, construction residues or<br />
other foreign materials before insulation is applied. Piping joints shall be dry, leak<br />
free and tested before application of insulation occurs.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:<br />
1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation.<br />
2. Knauf.<br />
3. Certainteed.<br />
4. Pittsburgh-Corning.<br />
5. Manville.<br />
2.2 MATERIALS<br />
A. Glass Fiber:<br />
1. Insulation: ASTM C547; rigid molded, noncombustible.<br />
a. 'k' value: ASTM C335, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.<br />
1) K values shall conform to the following @ 75F<br />
a) Heating water to 250F: .28<br />
b) Water 40F to 55F: .24<br />
c) Domestic water 105F or greater: .24<br />
b. Minimum Service Temperature: -20F.<br />
PIPING INSULATION 15180-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2.3 JACKETS<br />
c. Maximum Service Temperature: +450F.<br />
d. Maximum Moisture Absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.<br />
e. Insulation shall be constructed 3.5 lb. minimum density.<br />
2. Vapor Barrier Jacket:<br />
a. White kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized<br />
film.<br />
b. Moisture Vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.02 perm inches.<br />
c. Secure with self sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips.<br />
A. A.PVC Plastic<br />
1. Jacket: ASTM C921, One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material,<br />
off white color.<br />
a. Minimum Service Temperature: -40F.<br />
b. Maximum Service Temperature: +150F.<br />
c. Moisture Vapor Transmission : ASTM E96; 0.002 percent by volume.<br />
d. Maximum Flame Spread: ASTM E84: 25.<br />
e. Maximum Smoke Developed: ASTM E84; 50.<br />
f. Thickness: 20 mil.<br />
g. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.<br />
2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.<br />
B. Canvas Jacket; UL listed.<br />
1. Fabric: ASTM C921, 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire<br />
retardant lagging adhesive.<br />
2. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.<br />
PIPING INSULATION 15180-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209.<br />
a. Thickness: 20 mil inch sheet.<br />
b. Finish: Smooth.<br />
c. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints with 2 inch laps.<br />
d. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped covers with factory attached protective<br />
liners.<br />
e. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.<br />
C. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209<br />
1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.<br />
2. Finish: Smooth.<br />
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch (50mm) laps.<br />
4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached<br />
protective liner.<br />
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch (0.38mm) thick aluminum.<br />
D. Stainless Steel Jacket: Type 304 stainless steel.<br />
1. Thickness: 0.016 inch (0.40mm)<br />
2. Finish: Smooth.<br />
3. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch (10mm) wide; 0.016 inch (0.40mm) thick stainless<br />
steel.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Inspect work in conformance with Section 15010.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Pipe Testing: Testing of piping shall be completed and leaks repaired prior to<br />
application of insulation. Surfaces shall be clean and dry before proceeding.<br />
B. Installation: Install materials after piping has been tested and approved. See Section<br />
15010.<br />
PIPING INSULATION 15180-6
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Surface Cleaning: Clean surfaces for adhesives.<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Pipe Insulation:<br />
1. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install materials according to manufacturer's<br />
instructions.<br />
2. Finished Surface Temperature: Insulation thickness shall conform to those<br />
recommended ASHRAE 90A, latest edition, unless otherwise specified.<br />
Thickness of insulation shall be sufficient to keep surface temperatures below<br />
115 F.<br />
3. Continuity: Apply insulation tightly over clean, dry surfaces with sections or<br />
edges firmly butted together. Make insulation continuous through sleeves or<br />
openings in walls and floors.<br />
4. Name Plates: Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal<br />
insulation around such.<br />
5. Supports: Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions.<br />
Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations.<br />
6. Inserts: Provide an insert, not less than 6-inches long, of same thickness and<br />
contour as adjoining insulation, between support shield and piping, but under the<br />
finish jacket, on piping 2-inches diameter or larger, to prevent insulation from<br />
compressing at support points. Inserts shall be cork, hardwood or other heavy<br />
density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. Factory<br />
fabricated inserts may be used with field fabricated insulation value equal to<br />
insulation approved by the <strong>Project</strong> Engineer.<br />
7. Enclosures: Do not insulate hot water heating pipe within radiation enclosures.<br />
8. Flanges: On insulated piping without vapor barrier and piping conveying fluids<br />
140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment, but bevel<br />
and seal ends of insulation at such locations.<br />
9. Equipment Fittings and Valve Coverings: Insulate all equipment, fittings and<br />
valves. Terminate insulation neatly with insulating and finishing cement<br />
troweled on bevel.<br />
10. Preformed Fittings Locations: All fittings and valves shall be insulated with<br />
preformed fiberglass for fittings, mitered sections of pipe insulation or fiberglass<br />
blanket insulation of equal thickness to the adjacent pipe insulation. Cover the<br />
PIPING INSULATION 15180-7
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
fittings, valves and insulation with preformed PVC jacket. Close jacket with<br />
stainless steel tacks and compatible adhesive.<br />
11. Radiation Barrier: When insulating hot pipe fittings, a layer of kitchen-type<br />
aluminum foil shall be applied over the first fiber glass insert applied, making<br />
sure the aluminum foil is extended over the adjacent pipe insulation. A second<br />
fiber glass insert shall then be applied over the foil with a vapor seal at all the<br />
aluminum foil edges. Insulation thickness shall be such that the surface<br />
temperature shall not exceed 115F.<br />
12. Expansion Devices: On insulated piping with vapor barrier; insulate all<br />
equipment, fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and<br />
expansion joints.<br />
13. Fasteners: Avoid the use of staples on vapor barrier jackets. Seal vapor barrier<br />
penetrations with white vapor barrier finish and adhesive.<br />
14. Adhesive Limitations: Apply adhesives to not exceed the coverage recommended<br />
by the manufacturer.<br />
15. Wall, Floor and Ceiling Penetrations: Continue insulation with vapor barrier<br />
through penetrations including walls, floors and ceilings.<br />
16. Enclosure: All insulation ends shall be firmly butted and secured with minimum<br />
3 inch wide butt strips. Exposed end of pipe insulation shall be sealed with<br />
vapor barrier mastic.<br />
17. Repairs: Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to thermal<br />
movement or poor workmanship.<br />
18. Service Access: When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening<br />
for maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it<br />
can be easily removed and replaced without damage.<br />
19. Unless preinsulated pipe is used, all insulation below grade shall be polyurethane<br />
spray foam covering suitable for use in wet environments without degradation.<br />
Piping shall be supported by a rigid styrofoam board 4" thick which exceeds the<br />
width of the pipes laid in the trench parallel to the pipe. All pipes shall be<br />
wrapped with two wraps of 1 1/2" thick fiberglass blanket before spraying.<br />
Spray foam shall be applied to assure a 2" MINIMUM coverage. Insulation shall<br />
be coated with Deer-O Foam Cap W-256 applied at the rate of one gallon per<br />
100 square ft. or vapor barrier protection with a perm rating of 0.0019.<br />
20. A complete moisture and vapor seal shall be provided on cold surfaces where<br />
vapor barrier jackets or coatings are required. Anchors, hangers and other<br />
projections shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation. For heat<br />
PIPING INSULATION 15180-8
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
traced piping, insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material,<br />
thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and<br />
heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of<br />
horizontal piping.<br />
21. Insulation shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by workmen regularly<br />
engaged in this type of work. Insulation shall not be applied until all surfaces are<br />
clean and dry and until inspection and release for insulation application.<br />
B. Jackets:<br />
1. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated pipes conveying fluids above<br />
ambient temperature shall have standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier,<br />
factory-applied or field-applied. Finish fittings, joints, and valves with<br />
premolded PVC jackets secured with stainless steel tacks. The precut insulation<br />
shall be held in place by copper wire or hemp twine, and be removable without<br />
damage to the insulation or jacket. Leave surfaces clean and ready for painting.<br />
2. Indoor, Concealed Applications: Insulated dual-temperature pipes or pipes<br />
conveying fluids below ambient temperature shall have vapor barrier jackets,<br />
factory-applied or field-applied. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded<br />
insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe, and finish with<br />
premolded PVC jackets.<br />
3. Indoor, Exposed Applications: Mechanical Equipment Rooms, all insulated<br />
piping to be finished with aluminum jacket secured with metal jacket bands.<br />
4. Indoor, Exposed Applications: Same as Indoor, Concealed Applications except<br />
that in addition the insulation shall be covered with an aluminum jacket secured<br />
with metal jacket bands.<br />
5. Exterior Applications: Same as Indoor, Exposed Applications plus connect with<br />
a modified S lock equal to Premetco “Loc-Jack” Z-Crimp, Factory or Field<br />
installed. All seams shall be sealed with silocone caulking and have seams<br />
oriented So that the jacketing will shed water & not tend to trap and enter rain<br />
water.<br />
3.4 APPLICATION<br />
A. Fittings and Valves Insulation:<br />
1. Premolded Fittings: All insulated pipe fittings shall be insulated with 20 mil<br />
PVC Zeston one piece premolded insulated fittings wherever possible. If Zeston<br />
fittings are not available for the use required, comply with the following<br />
paragraph #2. Insulate fittings with fiberglass tightly wrapped with copper wire<br />
or heavy hemp twine to within 1/4" of thickness of adjoining copper wire or<br />
PIPING INSULATION 15180-9
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
insulation, finished with 1/4" of insulating cement troweled flush with pipe<br />
insulation. A tack coat of mastic vapor barrier Foster 60-25 or 26 to 1/16 inch<br />
thickness or equal shall be applied to fittings and valves. Apply 6 oz. fiberglass<br />
canvas jacket to build-up (not PVC) fitting band valve insulation. Cement laps<br />
thoroughly with Foster 81-42 or 30-36 adhesive.<br />
B. Perm Rating Vapor Barrier Mastic Coatings:<br />
1. Perm rating not more than 0.25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E-96,<br />
Procedure A Fire Retardant.<br />
C. Adhesives, Sealers, Facings, and Vapor Barrier Coatings:<br />
3.5 SCHEDULE<br />
1. Compatible with materials to which applied, and shall not corrode, soften, or<br />
otherwise attach the pipe or insulation materials in either the wet or dry state.<br />
Use only adhesives, sealers, facings, and vapor barrier coatings recommended by<br />
the approved manufacturers of insulation materials.<br />
Service Pipe Size Thickness<br />
HW, HWC 1/2" to 1 ¼ " 1 inch<br />
HW, HWC 1-1/2" and Larger 1-1/2 inch<br />
NPW & Cooling All sizes<br />
1 inch<br />
Condensate<br />
CW All sizes 1 inch<br />
RD & OF<br />
Steam & Condensate<br />
All sizes<br />
END OF SECTION 15180<br />
1 inch<br />
PIPING INSULATION 15180-10
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15190<br />
DUCTWORK INSULATION<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 SUMMARY<br />
A. Furnish and Install<br />
1. Ductwork insulation.<br />
2. Duct liner.<br />
3. Insulation jackets.<br />
B. Related Documents<br />
1. General Provisions.<br />
a. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special<br />
Conditions and the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this<br />
section<br />
2. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting insulation jackets.<br />
3. Section 15010 - General Mechanical Requirements.<br />
4. Section 15800 - Air Distribution.<br />
C. Description of Work<br />
1. Work Included: The work included by this specification consists of furnishing<br />
all labor, accessories, equipment and materials necessary for the installation of<br />
all insulation for ductwork and mechanical equipment in accordance with the<br />
specification and applicable drawings. This includes but is not limited to:<br />
a. All supply ductwork<br />
b. Return ductwork not within the conditioned space<br />
c. All ductwork in the mechanical room<br />
d. Outside air inlet ductwork that is within the conditioned space.<br />
e. Mechanical equipment not factory insulated.<br />
DUCTWORK INSULATION 15190-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Do not internally insulate ductwork from evaporative coolers unless specifically<br />
indicated on the drawings.<br />
3. Exterior duct wrap insulation with vapor barrier shall be used on all outdoor air<br />
ductwork within conditioned spaces.<br />
4. Supply and return air ductwork shall be insulated with duct liner except in air<br />
handling systems having air washers or humidifiers. Where air washers or<br />
humidifiers are used, exterior duct insulation shall be used. Where duct liner is<br />
used, dimensions shown on the drawings shall be clear inside duct liner.<br />
D. Testing:<br />
1.2 REFERENCES<br />
1. All ductwork and mechanical equipment shall be tested for leakage and approved<br />
by the Architect/Engineer before any insulation is applied. The insulation<br />
contractor shall have this verified in writing before beginning work.<br />
A. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.<br />
B. ASTM C518 - Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission<br />
Properties by Means of the Heat Flow Meter Apparatus.<br />
C. ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation.<br />
D. ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.<br />
E. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.<br />
F. ASTM E96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.<br />
G. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.<br />
H. SMACNA - HVAC Duct <strong>Construction</strong> Standards 1985 Ed. - Metal and Flexible.<br />
I. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Exposed Location: Exposed in mechanical rooms or rooms with finished walls or<br />
ceilings.<br />
B. Concealed Location: Located in pipe chase, furred spaces, attics, crawl spaces, above<br />
suspended ceilings in finished and unfinished rooms, or all other locations not<br />
exposed to view.<br />
C. Duct Sizes: Inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.<br />
DUCTWORK INSULATION 15190-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
D. K Factors: All K Factors shown in the following specifications are expressed in<br />
BTU-in/hr-sq.ft-F.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. General: Comply with Section 15010.<br />
B. Product Data: Provide product description, list of materials and thickness for each<br />
service, and locations.<br />
C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate procedures which ensure acceptable<br />
workmanship and installation standards will be achieved.<br />
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Regulatory Requirements Fire Hazard Classification: Insulation shall have a<br />
composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive to secure jacket or facing) fire<br />
hazard rating as tested by ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723 not to exceed 25 flame<br />
spread, 50 fuel contribution, and 50 smoke development. Materials shall be labeled<br />
accordingly.<br />
B. Certifications of Insulation and Covering Materials: UL listed; flame spread/fuel<br />
contributed/smoke development rating of 25/50 in accordance with ASTM E84,<br />
NFPA 255, and UL 723.<br />
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS<br />
A. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with<br />
minimum five years of documented experience.<br />
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING<br />
A. General Requirements: Comply with Section 15010. Deliver materials to job site in<br />
original non-broken factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's density and<br />
thickness. Store in a warm, dry location and protect against dirt, water, chemical, and<br />
mechanical damage.<br />
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS<br />
A. Manufacturer's Requirements: Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions<br />
required by manufacturers of adhesive and insulation while in storage.<br />
B. Environmental Requirements: Perform work at ambient and equipment temperatures<br />
as recommended by the insulation manufacturer.<br />
C. Protection: Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical or mechanical damage<br />
before, during and after installation. Repair or replace any such insulation or<br />
covering damaged prior to final acceptance of work.<br />
DUCTWORK INSULATION 15190-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1.9 WARRANTY<br />
A. General: Satisfy requirements of Section 15010.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:<br />
1. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation.<br />
2. Knauf.<br />
3. Certainteed.<br />
4. Manville.<br />
2.2 INSULATION MATERIALS<br />
A. Glass Fiber, Flexible:<br />
1. Insulation: ASTM C-553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.<br />
a. 'K' value: ASTM C518, of 0.29 at 75 degrees F.<br />
b. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.<br />
c. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.20 percent by volume.<br />
d. Density: 0.75 lb/cu ft.<br />
2. Vapor Barrier Tape:<br />
a. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum film.<br />
3. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage.<br />
B. Glass Fiber, Rigid:<br />
1. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.<br />
a. 'K' value: ASTM C518, of 0.29 at 75 degrees F.<br />
b. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.<br />
c. Maximum moisture abortion: 0.20 percent by volume.<br />
DUCTWORK INSULATION 15190-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
d. Density: 0.75 lb/cu ft.<br />
2. Vapor Barrier Jacket:<br />
a. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum film.<br />
b. Moisture vapor Transmission: ASTM E96; 0.04 perm.<br />
c. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.<br />
3. Vapor Barrier Tape:<br />
a. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminum film,<br />
with pressure sensitive rubber based adhesive.<br />
C. Glass Fiber Duct Liner, Flexible<br />
1. Insulation: ASTM C-553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.<br />
a. 'K' value: ASTM C518, of 0.28 at 75 degrees F.<br />
b. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.<br />
c. Density: 2.0 lb/cu ft.<br />
d. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4000 ft/min.<br />
2. Adhesive<br />
a. Waterproof, fire-retardant type.<br />
3. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head.<br />
D. Glass Fiber Duct Liner, Rigid:<br />
1. Insulation: ASTM C-612; flexible, noncombustible.<br />
a. 'K' value: ASTM C518, of 0.23 at 75 degrees F.<br />
b. Maximum service temperature: 250 degrees F.<br />
c. Density: 2.0 lb/cu ft.<br />
d. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 4000 ft/min.<br />
DUCTWORK INSULATION 15190-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2.3 JACKETS<br />
2. Adhesive:<br />
a. Waterproof, fire-retardant, type.<br />
3. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head.<br />
A. Canvas Jackets: UL listed.<br />
1. Fabric: 6 oz/sq yd, plain weave cotton treated with dilute fire retardant lagging<br />
adhesive.<br />
2. Lagging Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.<br />
B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209.<br />
1. Thickness: 0.025-inch sheet.<br />
2. Finish: Smooth or Corrugated.<br />
3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2-inch laps.<br />
4. Fittings: 0.016-inch thick die shaped fittings covers with factory attached<br />
protective liner.<br />
5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8-inch wide, 0.016-inch thick aluminum.<br />
6. Flexible glass fiber with fire resistant coating facing air stream; ASTM<br />
E-84/ASTM C518-70; 'k' value of 0.25 maximum at 75 F, 2 lb. density, one-inch<br />
thickness.<br />
C. Type C: Neoprene faced, rigid glass fiberboard, 2 lb. density, ASTM E- 84/ASTM<br />
C-518; 'k' value of 0.23 at 75 F; one-inch thickness.<br />
D. Jackets:<br />
1. Interior Applications<br />
a. Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil vapor barrier with self-sealing<br />
adhesive joints.<br />
2. Exterior Applications<br />
DUCTWORK INSULATION 15190-6
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2.4 ACCESSORIES<br />
a. Sheet metal enclosure of corrugated aluminum, 0.02 in. thick, with metal<br />
jacket bands: 3/8 inch wide, 0.016 thick aluminum; or stick clips with<br />
smooth finish.<br />
A. Impale Anchors: Galvanized steel, 12 gage, self-adhesive pad and press on washer<br />
head.<br />
B. Joint Tape: Glass fiber cloth, open mesh.<br />
C. Lagging Adhesive: Fire resistive to ASTM E-84 or NFPA 255 or UL 723.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Verify that ductwork has been tested before applying insulation materials.<br />
B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General<br />
1. Applications: Apply insulation tightly over clean, dry surfaces with sections or<br />
edges firmly butted together or lapped. Make insulation continuous through<br />
sleeves or openings in walls or floors.<br />
2. Vapor Barriers: Seal vapor barriers and run continuous throughout for heated<br />
and cooled supply air ductwork.<br />
3. Finishes: Finish insulation neatly at hangers, supports and other protrusions.<br />
Locate insulation or cover seams in least visible locations.<br />
4. Installation Repairs: Repair separation of joints or cracking of insulation due to<br />
thermal movement or poor workmanship.<br />
5. Exterior Locations: Re-cover with corrugated aluminum jacket attached with<br />
suitable aluminum rivets.<br />
6. Manufacturer's Instructions: Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
instructions.<br />
7. Thermal Units: Provide insulation with vapor barrier on ductwork downstream<br />
of fan coil terminal units.<br />
DUCTWORK INSULATION 15190-7
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
8. Factory Insulated Equipment: Do not insulate factory insulated equipment.<br />
9. Attachment: Apply insulation as close as possible to equipment by grooving,<br />
scoring, and bevelling insulation, if necessary. Secure insulation to equipment<br />
with studs, pins, clips, adhesive, wires, or bands.<br />
10. Cement and Fillers: Fill joints, cracks, seams, and depressions with bedding<br />
compound to form smooth surface. On cold equipment, use vapor barrier<br />
cement.<br />
11. Placards: Do not insulate over nameplate or ASME stamps. Bevel and seal<br />
insulation around such nameplate or any operable device.<br />
12. Service Access: When equipment with insulation requires periodical opening for<br />
maintenance, repair, or cleaning, install insulation in such a manner that it can be<br />
easily removed and replaced without damage.<br />
13. Insulation shall be installed in a workmanlike manner by workmen regularly<br />
engaged in this type of work. Insulation shall not be applied until all surfaces are<br />
clean and dry and until inspection and release for insulation application.<br />
14. A complete moisture and vapor seal shall be provided on cold surfaces where<br />
vapor barrier jackets or coatings are required. Anchors, hangers and other<br />
projections shall be insulated and vapor sealed to prevent condensation.<br />
15. Duct insulation shall be continuous through walls and floor openings except<br />
where walls or floors are required to be fire stopped or required to have a fire<br />
resistance ratings.<br />
B. Locations for Insulation:<br />
1. External: Outside of ducts not internally lined, located interior of building, in<br />
mechanical room.<br />
a. Rectangular: 1-1/2-inch thick glass fiber insulation. Fasten to duct with<br />
weld pins or stock clips spaced 12 inches to 18 inches o.c. with minimum of<br />
two rows per side of duct. Secure with washers firmly embedded in<br />
insulation. Seal joints, breaks and punctures in cold air ductwork wire<br />
fire-retardant vapor adhesive reinforced with a three-inch wide strip similar<br />
to that of facing.<br />
b. Round: Two-inches thick glass fiber blanket duct wrap. Adhere insulation<br />
to duct with fire retardant adhesive applied in bands around the duct. Butt<br />
tight with facing overlapping all joints at least two inches. Seal cold air<br />
ductwork with fire retardant vapor barrier adhesive. Seal breaks and<br />
DUCTWORK INSULATION 15190-8
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
punctures in the facing of cold air ductwork with vapor barrier tape sealed<br />
with fire retardant adhesive.<br />
2. For exterior applications, provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket w/2” thick<br />
rigid insulation w/minimum R-value of 8.9. Cover with caulked aluminum<br />
jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section.<br />
3. Insulation below grade shall be polyurethane spray foam, suitable for use in wet<br />
environments without degradation and having the following properties.<br />
C. Duct Liner<br />
a. All duct shall be supported on 2” thick rigid polystyrene board exceeding the<br />
width of the duct. Spray foam shall be applied to assure a 2” MINIMUM<br />
coverage. Insulation shall be coated with Deer-O Foam Cap W-256 applied<br />
at the rate of one gallon per 100 square ft. for vapor barrier protection with a<br />
perm rating of 0.00019.<br />
1. Duct liner shall be installed in accordance with Figures 6-1 through 607 of the<br />
SMACNA High Velocity Duct <strong>Manual</strong> and the Manufacturer’s<br />
recommendations.<br />
END OF SECTION 15190<br />
DUCTWORK INSULATION 15190-9
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15402<br />
DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and<br />
the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.<br />
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the Domestic Water System as shown on the<br />
drawings including specialties shown or called out in the fixture and/or equipment list<br />
and as necessary for satisfactory operation of the system.<br />
1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS<br />
15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
15060 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS<br />
15080 - PIPING SPECIALTIES<br />
15100 - VALVES<br />
15180 - PIPING INSULATION<br />
1.4 STERILIZATION<br />
A. All domestic water piping shall be sterilized as described in Part 3 of this section.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS<br />
A. Pipe and pipe fittings shall be as described in Section 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE<br />
FITTINGS.<br />
B. All piping in any utilities tunnel shall have welded or silver brazed joints.<br />
2.2 SHOCK ABSORBERS<br />
A. Shock absorbers and/or air cushions shall be installed where shown on the drawings.<br />
Shock absorbers shall be equal to Zurn Z-1700, Diatrol Series 500 or approved equal<br />
sized for the system being protected.<br />
DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS 15402-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. The installation shall conform to the requirements of Section 15010 - GENERAL<br />
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS, and Section 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE<br />
FITTINGS.<br />
B. Insulating couplings shall be furnished and installed at all connections between<br />
copper and steel pipe to prevent electrolysis.<br />
C. Each water service main, branch main, riser and branch to a group of fixtures shall be<br />
valved. Stop valves shall be provided at each fixture.<br />
3.2 STERILIZATION<br />
A. Domestic Water lines shall be sterilized as follows: Chlorine shall be applied to<br />
provide a solution of not less than 250 PPM. The chlorinating material shall be<br />
introduced into the waterline in a manner approved by the Architect/Engineer. The<br />
solution shall be circulated if provided with pumps and all valves in the line shall be<br />
operated several times during the contact period. After a contact period of no less<br />
than eight (8) hours the system shall be flushed with clean water until the residual<br />
chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 PPM.<br />
B. The sterilization procedure shall be witnessed by the Architect/Engineer and Owner.<br />
3.3 TESTS<br />
A. General: All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Architect/Engineer or his<br />
representative. Any systems failing to meet the specified test requirements shall be<br />
corrected and retested until the test requirements are met.<br />
B. Water Systems: The complete water systems shall be hydrostatically tested at a<br />
pressure of 150 psi and shall show no loss in pressure for a period of one hour.<br />
END OF SECTION 15402<br />
DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS 15402-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15403<br />
ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and<br />
the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.<br />
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the roof drainage system as shown on the<br />
drawings and/or listed in the fixture schedule and as necessary for satisfactory roof<br />
drainage.<br />
1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS<br />
15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
15060 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS<br />
15180 - PIPING INSULATION<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS<br />
A. Pipe and pipe fittings shall be as described in Section 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE<br />
FITTINGS.<br />
2.2 SPLASH BLOCKS<br />
A. Splash blocks shall be provided where required to prevent erosion of the soil and<br />
shall be sized to cover the splash area.<br />
2.3 OVERFLOW DRAINS<br />
A. Where roof drains are required, overflow drains having the same size as the roof<br />
drains shall be installed with the inlet flow line located 2" above the low point of the<br />
roof unless overflow scuppers are provided.<br />
B. Overflow Drains shall be piped separated from the roof drains to discharge or<br />
underground storm sewer connection.<br />
ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 15403-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Installation shall conform to the requirements of Section 15010 - GENERAL<br />
PROVISIONS, and Section 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS.<br />
B. All roof drainage piping shall be carefully coordinated with ductwork and piping<br />
shown on the mechanical plans and routed so that no conflict occurs.<br />
C. All roof drainage piping shall be carefully coordinated with the structural work and<br />
any conflicts shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer.<br />
3.2 TESTS<br />
A. Roof drainage piping shall be tested by filling the system to the highest level with no<br />
drop in water level for a period of 15 minutes.<br />
END OF SECTION 15403<br />
ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEMS 15403-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15404<br />
SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and<br />
the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.<br />
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. The Contractor shall furnish and install the soil and waste piping system as shown on<br />
the drawings including specialties shown or called out in the equipment list and as<br />
necessary for satisfactory operation of the system.<br />
1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS<br />
15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
15060 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS<br />
1.4 REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. See Sections 15010 - GENERAL PROVISIONS and 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE<br />
FITTINGS for general requirements.<br />
B. Furnish and install all concrete, grout and other required materials to fill all blockouts<br />
and/or sleeves left open for this Subcontractor's convenience or for the installation of<br />
this work.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS<br />
A. The pipe and pipe fittings shall be as described in Section 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE<br />
FITTINGS.<br />
2.2 FLOOR DRAINS<br />
A. Drains shall be Zurn, Josam or Smith and shall be equal to those specified on the<br />
drawings.<br />
2.3 FLOOR SINKS<br />
A. Drains shall be Zurn, Josam or Smith and shall be equal to those specified on the<br />
drawings.<br />
SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS 15404-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2.4 CLEANOUTS<br />
A. Cleanouts shall be as manufactured by Zurn, Josam or Smith and shall be of the same<br />
size as the pipe except that cleanout plugs larger than four inches will not be required.<br />
Cleanouts installed in connection with cast iron soil pipe shall consist of a long<br />
sweep, quarterbend or one or two eighth bends extended to an easily accessible place,<br />
or as indicated on the drawings.<br />
B. Cleanouts in finish floors shall be of the type made to match the floor and/or<br />
covering. All exposed metal shall be polished or chrome plated brass.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Installation shall conform to Section 15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL<br />
REQUIRMENTS, and Section 15060 - PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS.<br />
B. Flashings: Vent pipes shall be flashed and made watertight at the roof with sheet lead<br />
flashing. Flashing shall weigh at least four pounds per square foot, shall be 24 inches<br />
square and shall be turned up around the pipe and into the top of the pipe. Vent pipes<br />
shall extend at least 12 inches above roof.<br />
C. Traps: Each fixture and piece of equipment connecting to the drainage system shall<br />
be equipped with a trap. Each trap shall be placed as near to the fixture as possible<br />
and no fixture shall be double trapped.<br />
D. Floor Drains: All floor drains shall be installed with grates square with the building<br />
lines.<br />
3.2 TESTS<br />
A. The entire sanitary system shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of the<br />
State Plumbing Code, all local codes and ordinances, and the Uniform Plumbing<br />
Code.<br />
END OF SECTION 15404<br />
SOIL AND WASTE PIPING SYSTEMS 15404-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15450<br />
PLUMBING FIXTURES<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 SCOPE<br />
A. Plumbing fixtures shall be supplied, set and connected as shown on plans. Fixtures<br />
shall be protected from damage during construction and shall be thoroughly cleaned<br />
of all tape, paint and adhesive prior to final acceptance.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES<br />
A. Plumbing fixtures shall be as manufactured by KOHLER, AMERICAN<br />
STANDARD, ELJER or CRANE and shall be as scheduled on the drawings.<br />
B. Flush valves shall be as manufactured by Zurn, Delany or Sloan.<br />
2.2 FITTINGS AND PIPES<br />
A. Fittings and piping shall be brass and whenever exposed, shall be polished chromeplated.<br />
Provide tight fitting wall and/or floor escutcheons of chrome-plated brass<br />
whenever pipes pass through floors, wall or ceilings.<br />
B. All porcelain or vitreous china shall be clean, smooth and bright. All shall be<br />
warranted not to craze, discolor or scale.<br />
C. This contractor shall furnish and install all required water, waste, soil and vent<br />
connections to all plumbing fixtures together with all fittings, supports, fastening<br />
devices, cocks, valves, traps, etc., leaving all in complete working order.<br />
D. All automatic or self-closing valves for faucets shall be adjusted in accordance with<br />
manufacturer's instructions and supervised as necessary by equipment supplier's<br />
representative at the request of the Architect or Engineer.<br />
E. Owner furnished equipment shall be connected with drains, traps, hot water, cold<br />
water and other services required for optimum operation. This contractor shall obtain<br />
information from the Owner or his approved representative for services required or<br />
field verify specific requirements.<br />
END OF SECTION 15450<br />
PLUMBING FIXTURES 15450-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15501<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 WORK INCLUDED<br />
A. This specification, in conjunction with the contract drawings and all other<br />
specifications indicate materials and operations required for the installation of<br />
automatic sprinkler systems, including design, shop drawings, equipment,<br />
underground supply system, pipe and fittings above ground, fire department<br />
connections, sprinkler systems, guard rail, operating instructions, identification, tests,<br />
and sterilization of piping and system.<br />
B. Any variation of the specification’s intent or apparent conflict from this specification<br />
shall be submitted to the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER for written response. The<br />
response shall be incorporated into the drawings and shall be the final word on the<br />
item. The Contractor shall incorporate any change at no charge to the Owner.<br />
1.2 REFERENCES<br />
A. This specification section is not limited to the following specification:<br />
1. 15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
B. The current editions of the following standards are a part of this specification.<br />
1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards.<br />
a. 13 Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.<br />
b. 13R Standard for the insulation of Residential Sprinkler System<br />
c. 14 Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems.<br />
d. 24 Private Fire Service Mains.<br />
e. 70 National Electrical Code.<br />
f. 72 National Fire Alarm Code.<br />
g. 25 Standard for Inspection, Testing and Maintenance of Water Based Fire<br />
Protection Systems.<br />
2. American Water Works Association Standard Specifications.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
a. C600 Standard for the Installation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and<br />
Their Appurtenances.<br />
b. C151 Ductile-Iron Pipe<br />
c. C11O Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Fittings.<br />
d. C111 Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron and Gray IronPressure Pipe<br />
and Fittings.<br />
e. C104 Cement-Mortar Lining for Ductile-Iron and Gray Iron Pipe and<br />
Fittings.<br />
f. C500 Metal Seated Gate Valves for Water Supply Service.<br />
g. C601 Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains.<br />
C. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL), Publication: Fire Protection Equipment List.<br />
D. Factory Mutual System Publication: Approval Guide.<br />
E. American Insurance Association Publication: Internal cleaning of sprinkler piping<br />
(GP-4).<br />
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION<br />
A. Design<br />
1. The designer of the fire protection systems shall meet one of the requirements<br />
below.<br />
a. A registered Professional Fire Protection Engineer in the State of New<br />
Mexico.<br />
b. Minimum National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies<br />
(NICET) Level III for wet-pipe or dry-pipe, Ordinary Hazard, Group II<br />
Sprinkler Systems, regardless of size.<br />
c. Minimum NICET Level IV for all other types of systems, including special<br />
hazard protection.<br />
d. Where NICET design is used, copies of the designer’s certificates from<br />
NICET shall be submitted along with the drawings for approval. The<br />
registered Professional Engineer shall stamp all other plans.<br />
2. The contractor is responsible for the design and installation of the fire protection<br />
system in accordance with these specifications and the contract drawings. The<br />
Contractor shall coordinate with architectural, civil, mechanical, and electrical,<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
design and construction documents, to ascertain the required information, to<br />
effect a properly designed fire protection system for the building construction<br />
and occupancy classification.<br />
a. The contractor is responsible to design the automatic sprinkler system in<br />
accordance with these specifications and the contract drawings. The<br />
contractor shall refer to all architectural, mechanical, and electrical drawings,<br />
to ascertain the required information, to effect a properly designed sprinkler<br />
system for the building construction and occupancy classification.<br />
3. The design of fire protection systems shall be complete with all necessary<br />
accessories for proper operation and shall include seismic support details.<br />
4. The fire protection water supply lines, controlling devices, protective devices,<br />
alarm systems, supervisory devices, and related equipment shall be compatible<br />
so that all equipment will function together as specified.<br />
5. The design shall comply with all mandatory, advisory interpretations, and<br />
recommended applicable rules of the latest editions of the referenced codes and<br />
standards in Section 1.3, “References,” except where otherwise noted on the<br />
drawings or specified herein.<br />
6. The Contractor shall produce design drawings that indicate the extent and<br />
arrangement of the fire protection system.<br />
7. The contract drawings indicate the extent and general arrangement of the<br />
automatic sprinkler systems.<br />
B. Spacing and Pipe Sizing<br />
1. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, the sprinkler system shall<br />
be a wet pipe system, utilizing a Light Hazard hydraulic design.<br />
2. Hydraulically system shall be designed on the contract drawings having the<br />
following characteristics:<br />
a. The design area shall be the hydraulically most demanding "rectangular area"<br />
having a dimension parallel to the branch lines equal to 1.4 times the square<br />
root of the area of sprinkler operation.<br />
b. Where the design area includes a corridor or tunnel protected by a single row<br />
of sprinklers, the maximum number of sprinklers that need be calculated is<br />
10, unless openings into the corridor are unprotected by fire rated<br />
construction.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
c. Maximum waterflow velocity shall not exceed 20 feet per second in any<br />
sprinkler system piping of hydraulically designed systems.<br />
d. The hose allowance shall be added to the sprinkler requirement at the<br />
point(s) where the hose station(s) connect(s) to the sprinkler system. The<br />
selected hose station(s) shall be within or nearest to the area of sprinkler<br />
application.<br />
e. Hydraulic design shall be based upon the water supply data shown on the<br />
drawings or obtained from the local Municipal Water Department.<br />
f. Pipe schedule method shall be permitted only for additions or modifications<br />
(less than 3000 feet 2 to existing Ordinary Hazard Pipe Schedule systems. All<br />
other designs shall be hydraulically calculated.<br />
g. Hydraulic calculation methods shall be used as a minimum for Light Hazard,<br />
wet-pipe systems, unless otherwise specified. The minimum operating area<br />
allowed shall be either 1500 feet 2 or the entire area for smaller systems. No<br />
allowances or reductions shall be permitted without written approval from<br />
the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER.<br />
h. Extend all (regardless of job size, and including modifications, new<br />
installations, retrofits, recalculations, etc.) hydraulic calculations back to the<br />
effective point of connection (ring-main) of the sprinkler lead-in to the fire<br />
water main supplying the building, unless indicated on the contract drawings.<br />
i. The distance between sprinklers either on branch lines or between branch<br />
lines shall not be less than 6 feet distance apart.<br />
C. Seismic Protection<br />
1. Seismic protection for automatic sprinkler systems if required for all new<br />
systems. Modifications to existing systems shall require seismic protection when<br />
indicated on the contract drawings.<br />
a. For modifications to existing systems, seismic protection will be required for<br />
only that portion of the system being modified, the feedmain supplying the<br />
modification area, and the riser for that area.<br />
b. Seismic separation joints are required in areas separating the modified area of<br />
the sprinkler system and that area which is not to be upgraded for seismic<br />
protection.<br />
c. The installation guidelines for seismic protection in NFPA 13 shall be used.<br />
Where an alternative method (other than NFPA 13) of providing seismic<br />
protection of a sprinkler system is to be used, only UL Listed or FM<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Standpipes<br />
Approved material shall be permitted. The alternative method shall have a<br />
design based on a dynamic seismic analysis certified by a registered<br />
Professional Engineer in the State of New Mexico and the registered PE shall<br />
stamp all drawings.<br />
1. Standpipes, where shown on the drawings, shall be installed as Class I system<br />
per NFPA 14. Hydraulic calculations are required for all wet standpipes serving<br />
two or more hose stations.<br />
E. Protection of Areas Subject to Freezing<br />
1. All anti-freeze systems require the installation of a reduced pressure backflow<br />
prevention (RPBFP) device. If a RPBFP is installed on the entire sprinkler<br />
system, then no additional RPBFP is required for the anti-freeze system.<br />
2. Gridded or looped dry pipe or preaction systems are not allowed. The design for<br />
these systems shall be of the conventional tree design.<br />
3. All dry-pipe systems, regardless of the volume, are required to deliver sustained<br />
waterflow to the inspector’s test connection within 60 seconds of the opening of<br />
the inspector’s test valve. All dry pipe systems in excess of 500 gallons shall be<br />
provided with a UL listed or FM approved quick opening device, exceptions to<br />
NFPA 13 in this instance do not apply.<br />
F. Manifolding of sprinkler risers to one single sprinkler lead-in shall not be permitted.<br />
G. Fire Department connections shall be as follows:<br />
1. Install Fire Department connections, where shown on the drawings.<br />
2. When the sprinkler system hydraulic demand (not including exterior hose<br />
demand) exceeds 1000 gpm, a 6-inch 3-way Fire Department connection shall be<br />
provided.<br />
3. A single fire department connection shall be provided to supply all fire<br />
protection systems for a building that has greater than 5 sprinkler risers.<br />
H. Exposure protection design shall be as follows:<br />
1. A minimum of 3 gpm per linear feet using ½-inch orifice sprinklers spaced a<br />
maximum of 10 feet apart horizontally apart shall be calculated. Sprinklers shall<br />
be high-temperature rated.<br />
2. The vertical distance protected by a single line of sprinklers shall not exceed 15<br />
feet. A single line of sprinklers may protect a single-story building that has a 20<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
feet maximum height. All heights exceeding this will require more than one row<br />
of sprinklers vertically.<br />
3. Hydraulic calculations shall include all of the sprinklers facing the exposure, on<br />
every row.<br />
I. Elevator Shafts and Machine Rooms<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
1. Sprinklers are required at the tops of all elevator shafts and in the elevator<br />
equipment rooms. Sprinklers shall be protected from freezing.<br />
2. Provide an OS&Y gate valve to shut off all sprinkler water flow into the elevator<br />
shaft and into the elevator machine room. Where possible, piping should be<br />
arranged such that a single valve can shut off water to both locations.<br />
3. The valve(s) shall be at a readily accessible location, no more than 7’0” above<br />
finished floor, inside a clearly marked wall cabinet.<br />
A. Shop Drawing Submittals<br />
1. Provide as required by Specification Section 01300, Descriptive Submittals, to<br />
the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER.<br />
2. As soon as practicable after award of contract and prior to fabrication, contractor<br />
shall submit to the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER for approval, complete shop<br />
drawings, manufacturers' catalog data, system and component operating<br />
instructions and hydraulic calculations for the sprinkler system and underground<br />
piping shown on plot plans.<br />
3. NO INSTALLATION WILL BE PERMITTED prior to the<br />
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER approval of complete shop drawings.<br />
B. Presentation:<br />
1. New Sprinkler Systems<br />
a. New drawings shall be identical in size, scale, orientation, and title as the<br />
original building construction contract drawings unless otherwise noted.<br />
C. Drawing Details<br />
1. Unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings, new floor plans and full<br />
height cross sections shall be drawn at a scale of 1/4" = 1'-0" and arranged such<br />
that the north arrow points to the top or to the left of the sheet. Other details<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-6
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
shall be drawn to a larger scale, as required. Riser elevation details shall be<br />
drawn to a scale of 1/2" = 1'-0"<br />
2. No more than one building or one floor shall be shown on a sheet.<br />
3. Drawings shall show all details required and recommended by NFPA 13, for<br />
"Working Plans" in addition to the following:<br />
D. Plot Plans<br />
a. A name or room number shall appear in each room; and a scaled key plan,<br />
oriented the same as the floor plan, shall appear on each partial plan sheet.<br />
b. All obstructions to the sprinkler layout shall be shown, including but not<br />
limited to, HVAC ducts, lighting, electrical buss ducts.<br />
c. Building column lines shall be labeled.<br />
d. Existing work and new construction shall be clearly differentiated on the<br />
drawings (where applicable).<br />
e. All lines and details shall be drawn; "opposite hand" or mirror image IS NOT<br />
acceptable -- separate drawings shall be made.<br />
f. All pipe lengths shall be shown, center to center of fittings.<br />
g. Where more than one type of pipe is used, each piece of pipe shall be<br />
identified as to type on the drawings.<br />
h. The drawings shall be kept neat and well arranged, with legible notes and<br />
figures to permit photographic reduction to one half size or smaller.<br />
i. No lettering shall be smaller than 1/8 inch.<br />
1. Plot plans shall be drawn to 1" = 20'-0" unless otherwise shown on the contract<br />
drawings.<br />
2. Previous references to orientation, legibility, and lettering shall apply.<br />
3. Plot plans shall show all details required by NFPA 13 and 24.<br />
E. As-Built Drawings<br />
1. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall revise all drawings to agree<br />
with the construction as actually accomplished. The notation "As-Built" shall be<br />
entered in the revision block, dated and initialed.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-7
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2. The As-Built drawings shall show the entire sprinkler system as it existed at the<br />
completion of the contract work.<br />
3. The original As-Built drawings shall be delivered as directed by the<br />
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER.<br />
1.5 ALTERNATES/ALTERNATIVES<br />
A. Where specific manufacturers or model numbers are mentioned in these<br />
specifications, proposed substitutions shall be included in the submittal package<br />
furnished to the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER for approval after contract award.<br />
B. If UL-listed or FM-approved equipment is commercially available, none other will be<br />
approved.<br />
1.6 WARRANTY<br />
A. All sprinkler system components furnished under this contract shall be guaranteed<br />
against defective design, materials, and workmanship for the full warranty time,<br />
which is standard with the manufacturer and/or supplier, but in no case less than one<br />
year from the date of system acceptance.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL<br />
A. Materials and equipment used in the installation of the sprinkler system shall be new<br />
and listed by the UL Fire Protection Equipment Directory or the FM Approval Guide,<br />
latest edition. The standard products and the latest design of the manufacturer shall<br />
be used, and installed per their listing, approval, or manufacturer recommendations.<br />
All products listed or approved by prior editions of the UL Director of FM Approval<br />
Guide will not be acceptable, if not listed or approved in the most recent edition of<br />
the directory or approval guide.<br />
B. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are required, these units<br />
shall be products of the same manufacturer (e.g., couplings shall be from one<br />
manufacturer.) All materials shall be installed per their listing or approval and per<br />
the manufacturer’s recommendations and specifications.<br />
C. New dry-pipe, preaction and deluge sprinkler systems shall be provided with the<br />
following devices:<br />
1. A FM approved or UL listed air dryer for the sprinkler control air supply for drypipe<br />
and preaction systems.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-8
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2. A FM approved or UL listed air dryer for the air supply to any pneumatic tubing<br />
used for heat detection (if used).<br />
3. Where air compressors are used, the air compressor will come equipped with a<br />
minimum 10-gallon tank. Nitrogen bottles are permitted to supply nitrogen<br />
pressure to systems smaller than 125 gallons in size. Where the system capacity<br />
is larger than 125 gallons, air compressors shall be used.<br />
D. Tape for screwed joints shall be minimum ½-inch wide.<br />
E. Corrosion protection tape shall be Scotchwrap 51, manufactured by 3M Company or<br />
approved equivalent.<br />
2.2 SPRINKLERS<br />
A. Types<br />
1. Unless otherwise specified, allowed per other section of this document, or shown<br />
on the drawings, sprinklers shall be nominal, ½-inch orifice, automatic, closedhead<br />
sprinklers rated at 155ºF (68ºC) Quick Response, frangible bulb type<br />
fusible element.<br />
2. Higher temperature rated sprinklers shall be installed where heads are exposed to<br />
high ambient temperature, exposed to the direct rays of the sun, beneath<br />
skylights or windows and installed in the vicinity of heating equipment, or in<br />
attics. The sprinkler temperature chosen shall be a minimum of 50ºF above the<br />
maximum ambient temperature, and no greater than 100ºF above the ambient<br />
conditions, unless specifically directed by NFPA 13.<br />
3. Rooms containing electrical equipment shall be protected with sprinklers having<br />
the following minimum temperature ratings, but no less than 50ºF above normal<br />
ambient room temperature:<br />
a. Transformer and switchgear rooms; 212ºF (100ºC)<br />
Elevator machine rooms<br />
b. Computer rooms 155ºF (68ºC)QR<br />
c. Telephone equipment rooms 155ºF (68ºC)QR<br />
d. Top of elevator shafts 212ºF (100ºC)<br />
4. On-Off sprinklers are not allowed. FM approved or UL listed on-off sprinkler<br />
systems, like the Viking FireCycle (or approved equal), are allowed.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-9
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
5. Quick Response (QR) sprinklers, where specified on the drawings, shall have a<br />
Response Time Index (RTI) of 50 or less in English units and 28 or less in metric<br />
units.<br />
6. Sidewall sprinklers shall be Underwriters’ Laboratories listed or Factory Mutual<br />
approved for Ordinary Hazard Occupancy.<br />
7. Extended coverage sprinklers are not allowed.<br />
8. Only sprinklers with a “Belleville” type seal shall be used. No O-Ring sealed<br />
sprinklers shall be allowed either in “crush” seals or “radial” seal styles.<br />
Sprinklers shall be of all brass frame construction with a coated metal to metal<br />
seating mechanism.<br />
9. Only sprinklers with integral shields listed by UL as “intermediate level”<br />
sprinklers or by FM as “racked storage” sprinklers are acceptable indoor where<br />
shield are required over ordinary sprinklers. Shop-made water shields are not<br />
allowed, nor are after market attachments designed as water shields. “Heat<br />
collection devices” for use with sprinklers shall not be allowed.<br />
10. Sprinklers installed in storage racks shall be equipped with a listed sprinkler<br />
head guard with an integral water shield to protect the in-rack sprinklers fusible<br />
element from water spray by a sprinkler above it. Roof sprinklers subject to<br />
mechanical damage shall be equipped with a listed sprinkler head guard.<br />
B. Protection Against Freezing<br />
1. Horizontal dry sidewall sprinklers shall be used in lieu of antifreeze loops for<br />
narrow unheated areas adjacent to heated areas, such as docks, covered loading<br />
platforms, vehicular air locks, elevator hoistways, and gas bottle or other storage<br />
sheds.<br />
2. The depth of the protected space shall not exceed 10 feet.<br />
3. The dry sprinkler shall extend a minimum of 12 inches into the heated space.<br />
For refrigerated spaces, the length dry sprinklers shall extend into the heated<br />
space shall be as specified by the ARCHITECT/ENGINEER.<br />
C. Position and Finish<br />
1. Sprinklers installed on exposed piping shall be manufacturer’s standard finish<br />
pendent sprinklers. Sprinklers and escutcheons installed below dropped ceilings<br />
shall have a finish matching the color of the ceiling tile. Only factory applied<br />
finishes shall be acceptable. If the factory has a finish that cannot match the<br />
ceiling tile color, standard finish sprinklers are allowed.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-10
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2. In rooms where sprinkler heads penetrate a suspended ceiling, only quick<br />
response, semi-recessed or recessed sprinklers are acceptable. Standard pendant<br />
sprinklers with “cup and skirt” escutcheons, one-piece escutcheons, or flush or<br />
concealed sprinklers are not allowed.<br />
3. EXCEPTION: On existing installations only, where sprinkler head relocations<br />
or small modifications (less than 20 heads) take place, the new sprinklers and<br />
escutcheons shall match the existing sprinklers.<br />
4. Escutcheons, head guards, and water shield from the supplied sprinkler<br />
manufacturer shall be used solely with the installed sprinkler. No after market<br />
escutcheons, head guards, or water shields are allowed.<br />
5. Head guards shall be two-piece, universal attachments, bolted in place on the<br />
sprinkler. “Snap-on” one-piece units are not allowed.<br />
2.3 PIPE<br />
A. Pipe for installation above ground shall be metal conforming to the requirements of<br />
NFPA 13. No plastic pipe is permitted where permitted by NFPA and the Authority<br />
having jurisdiction. Pipe shall be listed by UL and be FM approved, and installed per<br />
its listing and approval and meet the following requirements:<br />
1. Unless otherwise specified, the minimum steel pipe wall thickness shall be<br />
Schedule 10 for pipe sizes 3 inches or larger. Pipe sizes smaller than 3 inches<br />
shall be Schedule 40. Threaded or cut groove steel pipe shall be Schedule 40 for<br />
sizes less than 8 inches and a minimum of Schedule 30 in sizes 8 inches and<br />
larger for pressures up to 300 psi.<br />
2. Mechanical rolled groove pipe or welded pipe shall be a minimum of Schedule<br />
10 for sizes 3 inches up to 5 inches, 0.134-inch wall thickness for 6 inches, and<br />
0.188-inch wall thickness for 8- and 10-inch pipe for pressures up to 300-psi.<br />
3. Steel pipe, installed for the water motor alarm line, piping from drain line valves<br />
and inspector’s test valves, dry pipe and preaction sprinkler system piping, and<br />
where pipe is exposed to outdoor weather, etc., shall be internally and externally<br />
galvanized. Galvanized fittings are required where galvanized piping is used.<br />
Any piping leading to a pressure-operated waterflow indication device shall also<br />
be galvanized. The starting point is on the alarm connection to the alarm check<br />
valve.<br />
2.4 PIPE FITTINGS<br />
A. Pipe fittings for installation above ground shall conform to the requirements of NFPA<br />
13 and shall be FM approved or UL listed.<br />
1. Mechanical groove couplings are required on all 4 inches and larger pipe.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-11
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Plain-end pipe couplings shall not be used in any new installation.<br />
3. Galvanized pipe fittings shall be installed where galvanized piping is specified.<br />
4. Welded branch outlet fittings (weld-o-lets, groove-o-lets, etc) shall be minimum<br />
Schedule 10 for pipe sizes 3 inches or larger. Pipe sizes smaller than 3 inches<br />
shall be Schedule 40 standard wall pipe thickness. Welded outlets shall be UL<br />
listed or FM approved, affixed with the UL or FM identification stamps, and<br />
pressure rated for 300-PSI maximum.<br />
5. Adjustable, two-piece drop nipples shall not be used. All drop nipples shall be<br />
one-piece, non-adjustable units with a minimum 1-inch diameter.<br />
2.5 PIPE HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND SEISMIC BRACING<br />
A. Pipe hangers, and hangar assemblies shall be UL listed of FM approved.<br />
B. C-clamps and beam clamps shall have lock nuts and retaining straps, or clips, and<br />
pipe rings shall be of the solid-band adjustable swivel type.<br />
C. Provide rod ceiling plates at finished ceilings for coach screw rods, expansion shields,<br />
and toggle hangers.<br />
D. All seismic bracing devices and flexible couplings shall be specifically UL listed or<br />
FM approved and installed per their listing or approval.<br />
E. When fastening hangars to purlins, bolt-through fastening methods shall be used.<br />
Beam clamps with restraining straps shall not be used in any circumstance.<br />
F. All seismic brace members shall be continuous. Under no circumstances shall<br />
members be spliced or off-set.<br />
G. Tension-only seismic bracing systems shall meet the following.<br />
1. The tension-only system shall be UL or FM approved for seismic service, and<br />
installed in accordance with listing limitations and installation instructions.<br />
2. A means to prevent vertical motion due to seismic forces shall be installed at the<br />
brace location.<br />
3. Two tension only braces shall be installed in opposing directions at each brace<br />
location.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-12
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2.6 FIRE PROTECTION CHECK VALVES<br />
A. Check valves in sprinkler system shall be UL listed or FM approved, have hand hole<br />
covers to provide adequate access to facilitate inspection and repair, without the<br />
removal of the valve from the system, and shall be listed for installation in the<br />
vertical or horizontal position. Wafer check valves are unacceptable. All check<br />
valves shall have a working water pressure of 250 PSI.<br />
B. Alarm check valves (wet pipe, dry pipe, deluge, preaction, etc.) shall be provided on<br />
all sprinkler risers and have the following.<br />
1. The alarm check valve (ACV) shall be equipped with a removable hand hole<br />
cover assembly, and shall be listed for installation in the vertical or horizontal<br />
position.<br />
2. The ACV shall be equipped with gauge connections on the system side and<br />
supply side of the valve clapper.<br />
3. ACV trim piping and fittings shall be internally and externally galvanized.<br />
4. Ported alarm connections on the ACV shall be to a retard chamber to absorb<br />
variable pressure surges.<br />
5. Only “Flange x Flange” ACV devices shall be installed.<br />
6. Wet-pipe systems shall use a variable-pressure alarm check valve. Plain-type<br />
check valves are not allowed. Sprinkler alarm valve shall be equipped with an<br />
external bypass to eliminate false water flow alarms.<br />
7. Dry-pipe valves shall be a positive latching clapper, differential type dry valve<br />
and air pressure to water pressure area differential shall be approximately 5 to 1.<br />
8. Deluge valves shall be externally re-settable by hydraulic means, and shall<br />
employ a positive vent on the priming line to ensure that the deluge valve will<br />
not prematurely reset.<br />
C. Backflow prevention devices shall be installed on all sprinkler systems as follows.<br />
1. A reduced pressure backflow prevention assembly (RPBFP) shall be installed to<br />
prevent cross-connection contamination between potable water systems and any<br />
fire sprinkler system, at the service connection for the fire sprinkler system.<br />
2.7 FIRE PROTECTION INTERIOR CONTROL VALVES<br />
A. Each system shall have interior control valves as follows:<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-13
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. A control valve shall be installed for isolation of each floor of multistory<br />
buildings.<br />
2. Interstitial spaces, in-rack sprinkler systems, mezzanines, etc., shall have control<br />
valves for system isolation at the feed-main.<br />
3. All control valves shall be provided with an electric valve supervision device,<br />
connected to the Fire Alarm System.<br />
4. All inside control valves shall be OS&Y. Butterfly valves are not permitted.<br />
Valves shall be manufactured in accordance with AWWA Standard C500, and<br />
have a clear waterway equal to the full nominal diameter of the valve. Valves<br />
shall be provided with a handwheel, with arrow cast in metal to indicate<br />
direction of opening.<br />
2.8 SUPERVISORY DEVICES<br />
A. When specified on the contract drawings, supervisory devices shall be compatible<br />
with the Fire Alarm System.<br />
B. Provide the equipment listed below.<br />
1. Electric valve supervision switches shall be installed for all internal (inside) and<br />
external (outside) fire protection valves 2-1/2 inches or larger. The devices shall<br />
be electrical; single-pole, double-throw; with normally closed contacts and<br />
include design that signals controlled valve is in other than fully open position.<br />
2. For wet pipe sprinkler systems, install vane-type waterflow alarm initiation<br />
devices with 250 psig pressure rating and designed for horizontal or vertical<br />
installation. Include two single-pole, double-throw, circuit switches for isolated<br />
alarm and auxiliary contacts and complete with tamperproof cover that sends<br />
signal if removed.<br />
3. All vane type waterflow alarm initiation devices shall be equipped with an<br />
adjustable delay of audible alarm initiation. Adjustment range shall be from 0 to<br />
120 seconds. Vane type waterflow switch shall be Potter Model VSR-F or<br />
approved equal.<br />
4. Waterflow vane-type alarm initiation devices shall be labeled as to the correct<br />
orientation of flow when mounted on system piping. When drilling of the<br />
system riser it is necessary to mount flow switch, the drilled out disc (coupon)<br />
shall be retrieved and attached to the mounting u-bolt of the flow switch.<br />
5. Where pressure operated waterflow alarm initiation devices are used, any valve<br />
installed upstream of the device on the alarm line shall be electrically supervised,<br />
using the Potter Model BVS or approved equal. Pressure operated alarm<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-14
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
initiation devices shall be an electrical-supervision type, waterflow switch with<br />
retard feature. The device shall include single-pole, double-throw, normally<br />
closed contacts and design that operate on rising pressure and signals waterflow.<br />
EXCEPTION: Where the waterflow alarm initiation device is used only for the<br />
purpose of an outside electric bell in lieu of the water motor gong device.<br />
6. Low-pressure supervision shall be installed on all dry pipe or preaction systems<br />
and be connected into the Fire Alarm System.<br />
7. Any device that is to be installed in a hazardous location defined by NFPA 70<br />
shall be rated for occupancy.<br />
2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS<br />
A. Fire Department connections shall have a minimum of two 2-1/2 inch inlets with<br />
National Standard Hose (NWSH) threads, internal double clapper check valve, brass<br />
plugs, and attached chains.<br />
B. Fire Department connections shall be installed at each new alarm check valve, dry<br />
pipe valve, deluge and preaction valve and standpipe, unless the sprinkler system is<br />
supplied by a Fire Department connection in the yard main, or as otherwise noted in<br />
NFPA 13<br />
C. The completed installations shall include a metal sign or escutcheon plate, with raised<br />
lettering, marked “FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION STANDPIPE-AUTO<br />
S0KR,” ‘AUTOMATIC SPKR,” or “STANDPIPE,” as appropriate. Additional signs<br />
for systems such as foam water sprinkler systems or other alternative designed<br />
systems, as required by other NFPA Standards, shall also be provided by the<br />
Contractor where required.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Responsibilities<br />
1. The Contractor is responsible for the installation of the automatic sprinkler<br />
system in accordance with these specifications and the contract drawings. The<br />
Contractor shall coordinate with architectural, mechanical, and electrical, design<br />
and construction documents, to ascertain the required information, to effect a<br />
properly designed and installed sprinkler system for the building construction<br />
and occupancy classification.<br />
2. The installation of the automatic sprinkler system shall be complete with all<br />
necessary accessories for proper operation and shall be accomplished by a<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-15
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
licensed sprinkler contractor or licensed company regularly engaged in this type<br />
of work, and in accordance with requirements of the National Fire Protection<br />
Association Standards (NFPA).<br />
3. An individual with a minimum NICET Level II shall supervise the installation.<br />
4. The fire protection system installation shall be coordinated with the other trades<br />
(mechanical, electrical and structural, etc.)<br />
5. The installation shall comply with all mandatory, advisory interpretations, and<br />
recommended applicable rules of the latest editions of the standards listed in<br />
Section 1.3 of this document, except where otherwise noted on the drawings or<br />
specified herein.<br />
B. Contamination and Obstruction Prevention<br />
1. Pipe interiors shall be kept free of debris.<br />
C. Pipe and Fittings Aboveground<br />
1. Pipe, fittings, and hangers shall be installed where shown on the drawings and in<br />
accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13R.<br />
2. Overhead sprinkler piping, drain and test piping, fire department connection<br />
piping, etc. installed through exterior walls shall be galvanized. All sprinkler<br />
piping shall be substantially supported from building structure and only UL<br />
listed or FM approved type hangers shall be used. Sprinkler lines under ducts<br />
shall not be supported from ductwork but shall be supported from building<br />
structure (with trapeze hangers where necessary).<br />
3. Flanged Fittings or Mechanical Groove Couplings<br />
a. Flanged fittings or mechanical groove couplings shall be used at the base of<br />
risers, in the risers of multiple-story sprinkler systems at each floor-system<br />
connection, and in feed main. Flanged fitting shall be used for alarm valve<br />
assemblies.<br />
b. A flanged tapered reducer shall be installed at the flange and spigot piece<br />
when riser is smaller than the underground supply line.<br />
c. Pipe shall be installed straight and true with no greater deflection at<br />
mechanical groove pipe couplings than is recommended by the manufacturer.<br />
d. Pipe end couplings are not acceptable.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-16
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
e. Only rigid-type mechanical couplings shall be used, unless specifically<br />
directed by NFPA 13 such as for specific seismic locations. Only in those<br />
areas identified by NFPA 13 where flexible type mechanical couplings are<br />
specified will the use of flexible couplings be permitted. All other parts of<br />
the system shall use rigid-type mechanical groove couplings.<br />
4. Pipe Hangers and Anchors<br />
a. Offsets in hanger rods will not be permitted.<br />
b. Concrete anchors shall be installed by drilling and installing a UL listed or<br />
FM approved anchor. Explosive driven fasteners as a method of installing<br />
anchors or hangers shall not be permitted.<br />
c. Supports, hangers, braces, etc., shall be attached to the building primary<br />
structural members only.<br />
d. When fastening hangers or braces to bar joists, the fastener shall be located<br />
within 4 inches of the panel point on the bar joist.<br />
e. All piping larger than 4 inches in diameter shall be supported from a<br />
minimum of two-bar joists when run parallel to a bar joist.<br />
5. Welded Joints<br />
a. Welded joints are acceptable when shop fabricated in conformance to<br />
provisions of NFPA 13.<br />
6. Screwed Joints<br />
a. Teflon paste and tape shall be used as pipe-joint compound at screwed joints.<br />
7. Bushings<br />
a. Bushings shall not be permitted.<br />
8. Control Valves<br />
a. Control valves shall be provided with identification signs describing the<br />
areas protected. Where the valve location is concealed above the ceiling, a<br />
sign below the ceiling shall indicate the valve location, and identify the<br />
protected area.<br />
9. Wall, Ceiling, and Floor Penetrations<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-17
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
a. Pipe sleeves shall be installed and properly secured in place at all points<br />
where sprinkler piping passes through concrete or masonry construction.<br />
Sleeves through all walls and floors shall provide adequate clearance for<br />
slight movement of the piping. The guidance in NFPA 13 guidance for<br />
seismic areas shall be followed.<br />
b. Sleeves for pipes passing through floors of concrete or waterproof<br />
construction shall project 3 to 6 inches above floors to prevent leakage.<br />
Sleeves through walls shall be cut flush with each surface unless otherwise<br />
specified. Sleeves shall be caulked to make penetration watertight.<br />
c. Unless otherwise specified, sleeves shall be of Schedule 40 steel and a<br />
minimum of two pipe sizes larger in diameter than the passing pipe.<br />
d. Holes through walls, floors, and ceilings of other than concrete or masonry<br />
construction shall be large enough to accommodate pipe expansion. Holes<br />
through existing concrete floors and walls shall be core drilled to provide<br />
clean, neat holes. Spaces between pipe and sleeve or pipe and opening for<br />
floors and exterior walls shall be filled with a non-hardening sealant material<br />
and made watertight.<br />
e. Where fire rated barriers are penetrated, a UL listed fire barrier system shall<br />
be installed to retain the fire resistance rating of the barrier.<br />
f. Escutcheons shall be provided at wall, ceiling and floor penetrations of<br />
piping in occupied areas.<br />
10. The cutting of structural members for the passage of sprinkler piping or for pipehanger<br />
fastenings is not permitted.<br />
11. Joints<br />
a. Joints shall be made in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 13.<br />
b. Joints shall be left exposed until final inspection and testing have been<br />
witnessed.<br />
c. Swing joints are preferred for connecting pendent sprinklers to branch lines.<br />
12. Dielectric unions shall be used to connect dissimilar metals (such as steel to<br />
copper) to prevent electrolytic action.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-18
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3.2 SPRINKLER SYSTEM ALARM CHECK VALVES<br />
A. Alarm Check Valves (ACV) shall be provided with internally and externally<br />
galvanized trim piping and fittings, pressure gages, a retarding chamber, water motor<br />
gong, alarm switch, testing bypass, and all necessary pipe, fittings and accessories.<br />
B. The retarding chamber drain line shall be piped independently of the main drain line.<br />
C. The drain line from the water motor gong shall be piped to discharge through the wall<br />
as close to the grade line as possible.<br />
D. Piping between the ACV and a pressure actuated alarm initiating device shall be<br />
galvanized piping not less than 3/8 inch nominal pipe size.<br />
E. Piping supplying the retard chamber, water motor gong, and water motor gong drain<br />
shall be galvanized. Galvanized fittings are to be used where galvanized piping is<br />
required.<br />
3.3 SPRINKLERS<br />
A. Pendent sprinklers below ceiling shall be aligned, and parallel to ceiling features,<br />
walls, etc. In areas without a suspended ceiling, install sprinkler piping as high as<br />
possible, using necessary fittings and auxiliary drains to maintain maximum clear<br />
headroom.<br />
B. Where two sprinkler systems abut the pendent sprinklers shall be aligned in different<br />
directions to distinguish the boundaries of each sprinkler system.<br />
C. Sprinklers under open grating shall be intermediate levels.<br />
D. Sprinklers shall not be installed closer than 6 feet apart.<br />
E. Dry pendant and horizontal dry sidewall sprinklers shall only be installed in screwed<br />
tee fittings.<br />
F. Ceiling Areas: Where suspended ceilings are installed, the sprinkler contractor shall<br />
install pendent sprinklers as shown on the reflected ceiling plans. Where these plans<br />
do not specify the location of the pendent sprinklers, the Contractor shall obtain the<br />
reflected ceiling plans and design sprinkler locations at least six inches from ceiling<br />
tile edges, 2 feet 6 inches from HVAC supply and return louvers, dimension the<br />
locations, follow a repetitive pattern, and locate sprinklers along straight lines to the<br />
extent possible. Swing joints shall feed pendant sprinklers from 1-inch outlet tees in<br />
branch lines.<br />
G. Stairs: Sprinklers shall be installed throughout stairways, and at every landing.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-19
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3.4 ELEVATOR SHAFTS AND MACHINE ROOMS<br />
A. Sprinklers at the tops of all elevator shafts and in the elevator equipment rooms shall<br />
be protected from freezing.<br />
B. Provide an OS&Y gate valve to shut off all sprinkler water flow into the elevator<br />
shaft and into the elevator machine room. Where possible, piping should be arranged<br />
such that a single valve can shut off water to both locations, and shall be at a readily<br />
accessible location, no more than 7’0” above finished floor, inside a clearly marked<br />
wall cabinet.<br />
3.5 DRAINS<br />
A. Two-inch drains shall be installed on all main risers and downstream of any interior<br />
sectional valves, and shall be piped to drain.<br />
B. A pressure gage cock and approved gage shall be installed downstream of interior<br />
sectional valves of 4-inch size and larger. 3/4-inch valve auxiliary drains with<br />
standard hose threads and caps shall be installed at all low points in the system, where<br />
more than five sprinklers are trapped. Where the capacity of trapped piping exceeds<br />
20 gallons, the overflow shall be piped to drain.<br />
C. Inspector's test connections shall be installed on each sprinkler system as near the<br />
most hydraulically remote end of the system as possible. The orifice shall be sized to<br />
discharge a flow equivalent to the smallest orifice sprinkler in the system. The<br />
inspector's test valve shall be located not more than seven feet above the floor in a<br />
visible, easily accessible location. For antifreeze systems, the orifice shall be<br />
replaced by a plugged outlet.<br />
D. In multi-story buildings where waterflow alarm devices are provided for each floor or<br />
where more than one alarm device is provided in a single sprinkler system, a separate<br />
inspector's test connection shall be provided for each alarm device. For convenience,<br />
in multi-level buildings where more than one inspector's test connection is required,<br />
all the valves shall be manifolded together at a single location on the grade floor, with<br />
a sight glass and a common drain line discharging outdoors.<br />
E. Drains shall be piped to discharge to drain, and the discharge shall be visible either<br />
by open-end or sight drain fitting.<br />
F. Drains and inspector's test connections through outside walls shall be run through the<br />
walls as close to the floor or grade line as possible, terminating with a 45-degree<br />
galvanized elbow turned down to splash blocks.<br />
G. Concrete splash blocks, 18” x 18” x 4” minimum in size, shall be installed under each<br />
drain or test outlet. The top of the block shall be 1 inch above grade, with a slope of<br />
1/2 inch per foot away from the building wall.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-20
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3.6 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS<br />
A. The check valve and normally open automatic ball drip (ABD) shall be located at<br />
points where they will not be subject to freezing temperatures, and the discharge from<br />
the ball drip shall be piped to drain. The ball drip shall close when the flow of water<br />
through the valve is in the range of 4 through 10 gpm. All ball drips shall be rated at<br />
175 psi. Use valve- drains in place of automatic ball drip drains when the static head<br />
of water above the ABD will exceed 11'6". Check valves shall be UL or FM<br />
approved and shall have bodies with the UL or FM stamp.<br />
B. The Fire Department connection shall be installed between 18 inches and 36 inches<br />
above grade.<br />
3.7 FIRE HOSE STATIONS<br />
A. Where hose stations are called for on the contract drawings, they shall be 2-1/2-inch<br />
hose valves, with 2-1/2” x 1-1/2” National Standard Hose thread adapters, connected<br />
to the sprinkler system in accordance with NFPA 13, or as shown on the contract<br />
drawings.<br />
B. The centerline of the hose valve shall be installed between 4' and 5' above finished<br />
floor.<br />
C. Unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings, no hose is required.<br />
D. Where hose cabinets are required, they shall be of the horizontal fold, hump type,<br />
with full tempered glass doors.<br />
3.8 IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. Control, drain, test, and alarm valves and zone waterflow switches shall be provided<br />
with identification signs of the standard design adopted by the automatic-sprinkler<br />
industry, or their equivalent.<br />
B. A hydraulic data information nameplate shall be secured to the riser with durable<br />
wire, chain, or equivalent, directly above the controlling alarm check valve and shall<br />
include the following design data.<br />
1. Building designation<br />
2. Location of remote area<br />
3. Design density<br />
4. Area of application<br />
5. System demand (gpm and psi at base of riser)<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-21
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
6. Data shall be permanently engraved on the nameplate as follows:<br />
a. Material shall be durable plastic or aluminum., Minimum height of lettering<br />
is 1/8”.<br />
C. The Contractor shall furnish and place in a plastic envelope attached to each sprinkler<br />
alarm check valve riser, one complete set of typed or printed maintenance and<br />
operating instructions, a set of prints of the as-built working drawings and hydraulic<br />
calculations of the sprinkler system.<br />
D. Contractor shall supply each riser with a cabinet containing maintenance and repair<br />
equipment (spare heads, wrench, etc.)<br />
E. Each Contractor shall affix an identification tag on each system riser indicating<br />
3.9 FLUSHING<br />
Name of the Contractor<br />
Business Address of the Installing Contractor<br />
Phone Number<br />
24-hour emergency contact phone number<br />
A. Before connecting sprinkler systems to the main supply, each sprinkler supply line<br />
shall be flushed out thoroughly by the Sprinkler Contractor through an unrestricted<br />
opening not less than 4 inches in diameter. Minimum flowing quantities are specified<br />
in NFPA 13.<br />
B. Failure to comply with this requirement shall necessitate flushing of the entire<br />
sprinkler system by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.<br />
C. A 4-inch temporary pipe or two 2-1/2" fire hoses shall be provided by the Contractor<br />
to discharge water to a suitable location, as designated by the<br />
ARCHITECT/ENGINEER.<br />
3.10 TESTING<br />
A. Aboveground Tests:<br />
1. Prior to acceptance of the installation, the Contractor shall subject the system to<br />
the tests required by NFPA 13 for the completion of the Contractor’s Material<br />
and Test Certificate. In addition, complete operating test of dry pipe, preaction,<br />
deluge, water-spray and foam water systems shall be performed.<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-22
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Hydrostatic testing shall be performed before any ceiling is installed below the<br />
sprinkler piping. Each water control valve shall be fully opened and closed<br />
under water pressure to ensure proper operation.<br />
3. Where sprinkler locations are roughed-in, using plugged drop nipples projecting<br />
below the level of the finished ceiling, the hydrostatic testing shall be performed<br />
two times.<br />
a. First, after the system is completed using the plugged drops, and before the<br />
ceiling panels are installed.<br />
b. Second, after the plugged drop nipples are cut to length for the finished<br />
ceiling, or replaced with other drop nipples of the correct length, and the<br />
sprinklers installed.<br />
4. The addition of sodium silicate (also known as water-glass) and related<br />
substances before hydrostatic testing, to stop water leakage, is not permitted.<br />
5. Pipe interiors shall be kept free of debris.<br />
B. Alarm Testing<br />
1. Contractor shall be responsible for testing new alarms and modified alarms<br />
installed under this contract. Defective alarms shall be replaced immediately.<br />
3.11 PROTECTION AGAINST FREEZING<br />
A. Sprinkler piping passing through any unheated spaces in, under, or outside buildings<br />
exposed to freezing, shall be protected as shown on the plans or in accordance with<br />
the methods specified in NFPA 13. Exposed to freezing is defined as any location<br />
where the temperature may drop below (40F) 5C at any time during the year.<br />
B. Heating shall be provided for sprinkler protected spaces in lieu of providing antifreeze<br />
systems except where otherwise noted on the drawings or specified herein.<br />
3.12 PROTECTION FOR BACKFLOW PREVENTION<br />
A. A reduced pressure backflow prevention assembly (RPBFP) shall be installed on all<br />
new systems and where shown on the drawings for modifications to systems to<br />
prevent cross-connection contamination between potable water systems and any fire<br />
sprinkler system. Install the RPBFP at the service connection for the fire sprinkler<br />
system or as noted on the contract drawings.<br />
B. RPBFP assemblies shall be either FM approved or UL listed and be approved by the<br />
Foundation for Cross-Connection Control and Hydraulic Research, University of<br />
Southern California (USC-FCCHR) and the International Association of Plumbing<br />
and Mechanical Officials (IAPMO).<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-23
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Backflow prevention assemblies used or installed under this contract shall be tested<br />
by a “Certified Backflow Control Assembly Tester” who possesses a current (within<br />
three (3) years from date of issuance) certificate that confirms successful completion<br />
of an approved training course.<br />
D. RDBFP assemblies shall be installed in accordance with AWWA <strong>Manual</strong> M14<br />
requirements, or as directed by the SDR.<br />
E. If RDBFP devices will be installed outside the building they must be in heated<br />
enclosures and with adequate space for inspection, tests and maintenance.<br />
F. Adequate drainage shall be provided for RDBFP and meet the following:<br />
1. Discharge shall be piped full size (of the relief valve) and extended to a drain.<br />
2. Discharge piping shall be sloped 1/8” per foot and be Schedule 40, galvanized.<br />
3. French Drains are not allowed.<br />
G. The Contractor shall perform an operational test on any new backflow prevention<br />
assemblies used or installed under this contract.<br />
3.13 PAINTING AND LABELING<br />
A. Contractor shall paint those portions of fire protection as required by Painting<br />
Specification 09900. Labeling shall be as follows:<br />
1. Sprinkler system (e.g., inspectors tests, drain valves) shall be labeled with all<br />
information required by NFPA Standard 13.<br />
2. Labeling shall be accomplished with the use of permanently marked<br />
weatherproof metal or rigid plastic identification signs. The signs shall be<br />
secured with corrosion-resistant wire, chain, or other approved means. These<br />
signs shall be provided by the manufacturer, manufacturer’s representative, or<br />
installer of the sprinkler system.<br />
3. Sprinkler riser shall be labeled with building and sprinkler system riser numbers.<br />
Labeling shall be accomplished with the use of “Brady” or approved equal selfsticking<br />
labels. The color and size shall contrast the surface that it is applied to.<br />
3.14 DISINFECTION<br />
A. Piping installed under this contract shall be disinfected per AWWA C651 before it is<br />
placed in operation, by using one of the following methods.<br />
B. Continuous Feed Method<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-24
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Place calcium hypochlorite in pipe sections when installing pipe or inject liquid<br />
chlorine into the system via the injection port. Pipe is filled with water and<br />
chlorine concentration shall remain at 10 mg/l for a minimum of 24 hours.<br />
During this time, all valves in new section will be cycled open and closed to<br />
allow for adequate disinfection. Valves connecting the new or repaired line with<br />
mains in active service shall remain closed to prevent chlorine pollution.<br />
2. Samples shall be drawn at 1-, 4-, 8-, 12-, 16-, 20-, and 24-hour marks to<br />
determine the chlorine concentration. Acceptable tests are the N-diethyl-pphenylenediamine<br />
(DPD) drop dilution method (AWWA C651, Appendix A) or<br />
the High Range Test Kit. The tests shall be done by the Contractor.<br />
C. Slug Method<br />
1. Similar to the continuous feed method. Follow AWWA C651. Chlorine<br />
concentration to be 100 mg/l for a minimum of 3 hours. During this time, all<br />
valves shall be cycled open and closed to allow for adequate disinfection.<br />
Valves connecting new or repaired lines with mains in active service shall<br />
remain closed to prevent chlorine pollution.<br />
2. Samples shall be drawn every 15 minutes to determine concentration.<br />
Acceptable tests are the DPD drop dilution method or the High Range Test Kit.<br />
The tests shall be conducted by the Contractor.<br />
D. Repairing or Cutting into Existing Mains<br />
1. New interior piping surfaces shall be swabbed with a one-percent hypochlorite<br />
solution. The section being modified shall be subjected to a high chlorine<br />
disinfection process per AWWA C651. The concentration shall be a minimum<br />
of 300 mg/l for 15 minutes.<br />
2. Samples shall be drawn before the chlorine is injected and every 5 minutes<br />
thereafter. Chlorine concentration shall be tested by the Contractor using the<br />
High Range Test Kit.<br />
E. Flushing<br />
1. After the lines have been chlorinated using one of the above methods, it becomes<br />
necessary to flush the lines with water until test sample indicates that the water is<br />
suitable for drinking. The residual chlorine concentration in the water is to be<br />
between 0.2 and 2.0 mg/l, as measured using a Low Range Test Kit.<br />
F. Bacteriological Testing<br />
1. All new and modified water lines require testing for coliform organisms per<br />
AWWA C651. The testing shall occur after successful chlorination and flushing<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-25
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
of the lines. Samples shall be taken from the new line in sodium thiosulfate<br />
treated sterile bottles and analyzed as specified by APHA’s Standard Methods<br />
for the Examination of Water and Wastewater.<br />
2. Results shall be recorded with the original documentation of results attached.<br />
These will be used for auditing purposes.<br />
3. Fire protection lines will not be accepted until a negative bacteriological test is<br />
performed. Lines will be chlorinated and flushed repeatedly, until such a<br />
negative test is accomplished.<br />
END OF SECTION 15501<br />
AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 15501-26
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15651<br />
REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and<br />
the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.<br />
1.2 SCOPE<br />
A. Materials and operations required for the installation of refrigeration systems,<br />
including piping, fittings, equipment, refrigerant accessories, refrigerant and<br />
lubricating oil, joints, testing, evacuation and charging, and vibration isolators.<br />
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Brazing: Certify brazing procedures and brazers in accordance with ANSI B31.5<br />
paragraph 527.5 for shop and job site brazing of piping.<br />
B. Soldering: Shall conform to ANSI/ASME B31, Pressure Piping.<br />
1.4 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS<br />
15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
15080 - PIPING SPECIALTIES<br />
15100 - VALVES<br />
15180 - PIPING INSULATION<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. The firms mentioned in the following Materials Section are acceptable type, quality<br />
and performance.<br />
2.2 PIPING MATERIALS<br />
A. Piping materials shall be as follows unless otherwise indicated on the applicable<br />
contract drawings.<br />
1. Pipe: Shall be "ACR" Type L hard drawn straight lengths copper tubing, ASTM<br />
B280, "Specification for seamless copper tube for air conditioning and<br />
refrigeration field service."<br />
REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 15651-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2.3 EQUIPMENT<br />
2. Fittings: Shall be wrought copper long radius, wrought copper and bronze solder<br />
joint, ANSI B16.22.<br />
A. All major items of equipment shall be as specified in the equipment schedules on the<br />
drawings and shall be furnished complete with all accessories normally supplied with<br />
the catalog item listed and all other accessories necessary for a complete and<br />
satisfactory operating system.<br />
2.4 CONNECTION MATERIAL<br />
A. Brazing Rods:<br />
1. AWS Classification BCuP-4 Copper Phosphorus (6% Silver)<br />
2. AWS Classification BCuP-5 Copper Phosphorus (15% Silver)<br />
3. AWS Classification BAg-5 Silver (45% Silver)<br />
B. No rods containing cadmium shall be used.<br />
C. Flux:<br />
1. "Stay-Silv White Brazing Flux" by J.T. Harris Co. or approved equal.<br />
2.5 REFRIGERANT ACCESSORIES<br />
A. Shutoff Valves:<br />
1. Shall be of the diaphragm type for lines sized 1" OD or smaller.<br />
2. Shall be Wing cap packed bronze valves with bolted bonnets back seating type,<br />
repackable under pressure, for lines 1-1/8" OD or larger.<br />
3. Shall be Mueller (Linemaster, Globemaster) or Henry ("Golden Bantam", type<br />
203) or equal Superior, Virginia, or approved equal.<br />
B. Expansion Valves:<br />
1. Shall be of the thermostatic types as manufactured by Alco, Henry, Mueuer,<br />
Singer, Sporlan or approved equal, and shall be gas charged with capillary type<br />
external superheat adjustment and external equalizing connection.<br />
2. Each type shall be designed to meter liquid equally to all distribution tubes, and<br />
shall be properly sized for the refrigerant used and the capacity required.<br />
REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 15651-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Liquid Line Strainers:<br />
1. Each expansion valve shall be protected by a strainer in the refrigerant liquid<br />
line.<br />
2. The strainer shall be as manufactured by the Henry Valve Co. ("800 Series"), or<br />
approved equal, not less than line size and installed with isolation valves.<br />
D. Solenoid Valves:<br />
1. Solenoid valves shall be suitable for the system in which they are used and<br />
designed specifically for use with the respective refrigerant.<br />
2. Valves shall be Alco or Skinner.<br />
E. Filter Drier:<br />
1. When shown on the drawings, install a Sporlan (Catch-All), Henry (V8000 "Dry-<br />
Cor"), Mueller ("Drymaster Micro-Guard") or approved equal, silica gel filter<br />
and drier in each liquid line.<br />
2. Filter drier shall be the replaceable cartridge type sized for compressor capacity<br />
and shall be installed with a three valve bypass.<br />
F. Liquid Indicators: Install a Henry (MI-31 series), Alco ( AMI-1), or Mueller<br />
(Sightmaster or Vuemaster) liquid indicator with double ports and seal caps in each<br />
liquid line or approved equal.<br />
G. Pressure Relief Valves:<br />
1. Shall conform to Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, ANSI/ASHRAE 15,<br />
and Section VIII, Division I of the ASME Pressure Vessel Code. The valve shall<br />
be factory set to maintain an operating or standby pressure not to exceed the<br />
receiver maximum allowable working pressure (MAWP).<br />
2. Relief valves shall be Mueller (Safteymaster) or Henry (Series 500 or 5000) or<br />
approved equal.<br />
H. Charging and Purging Valves:<br />
1. Shall be the diaphragm packless type forged brass with positive back seating.<br />
Flare connection shall have seal cap with copper gasket chained to valve body.<br />
2. Valves shall be Henry (6000 series) or approved equal.<br />
REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 15651-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. General<br />
1. Installation shall conform with the American National Standard Code, ANSI<br />
V31.5, Refrigeration Piping.<br />
2. Installed piping shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of door or<br />
windows; shall not encroach on aisles, passageways, and equipment; and shall<br />
not interfere with the servicing or maintenance of equipment.<br />
3. Pipe shall be cut to measurements established at the construction site and shall<br />
be worked into place without springing or forcing, properly clearing all openings<br />
and equipment.<br />
4. Cutting or weakening of structural members to facilitate piping installation is not<br />
permitted.<br />
5. Pipes shall have burrs removed by reaming and shall be so installed as to permit<br />
free expansion and contraction without damage to joints or hangers.<br />
6. Piping shall be installed in a straight manner, with appropriate pitch free from<br />
traps, and shall be provided with capped or plugged ends, as it is erected, to<br />
prevent contaminating the system.<br />
7. The piping system shall be provided with isolating hangers to prevent<br />
compressor vibration being carried to the building structure.<br />
8. The piping system shall be provided with appropriate ranged continuous duty<br />
temperature and pressure gauges. The suction connection from each coil shall be<br />
provided with a test thermometer well in the pipe for adjustment of the<br />
thermostatic expansion valves.<br />
B. Cleanliness:<br />
1. All refrigerant lines and fittings shall be absolutely clean to avoid system<br />
operating difficulties and contamination. Use a good cleaning agent such as<br />
Refrigerant 113 or Virginia Number 10 Degreasing Solvent. Cleaning chemicals<br />
must be disposed of as directed by State and Local Codes.<br />
C. Solder Joints:<br />
1. Tubing shall be cut square and burrs removed.<br />
REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 15651-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Both inside of fittings and outside of tubing shall be well cleaned with wire<br />
brush or fine emery cloth before sweating. Steel wool is not permitted.<br />
3. An inert gas (such as oil pumped dry nitrogen) shall be continuously passed<br />
through the copper piping when sweating joints to prevent formation of copper<br />
oxide.<br />
4. Care shall be taken to prevent annealing of fittings and tubing when making<br />
connections.<br />
5. Joints shall be made with silver solder containing a minimum of 45% silver.<br />
3.2 LEAK TESTING REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEM<br />
A. The completed refrigeration piping system shall be tested by the halide electronic<br />
leak detector method at normal working pressures.<br />
B. The testing media shall be a small charge of the working refrigerant plus the inert<br />
pressurizing agent, oil pumped dry nitrogen. The leak test shall be performed by the<br />
contractor before insulating, evacuating and charging in the presence of the<br />
Architect/Engineer. The leak test media, apparatus and tester shall be furnished by the<br />
contractor.<br />
C. Isolate the compressor from the leak test by firmly closing the suction and discharge<br />
valves.<br />
D. Do not attempt to repair any leak while the system is pressurized. Each repair must be<br />
retested.<br />
3.3 EVACUATION AND CHARGING<br />
A. After completion of the piping pressure test, the refrigeration system shall be<br />
evacuated and dehydrated using a vacuum pump capable of producing at least 1mm<br />
Hg absolute. Do not use cooling compressor to evacuate system nor operate it while<br />
system is under high pressure. The following procedure shall be followed unless<br />
otherwise noted:<br />
1. Connect an accurate high vacuum gage, such as Stokes or Zimmerli gage, to the<br />
system.<br />
2. Connect the vacuum pump to both the high and low side of the system. Leave the<br />
compressor suction and discharge service valves closed. Start the pump.<br />
3. Keep ambient air temperatures above 60`F during the evacuation process.<br />
4. Operate the vacuum pump until the system is evacuated to 2.5 mm Hg absolute.<br />
REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 15651-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
5. Break the system vacuum with oil pumped dry nitrogen. Open the compressor<br />
suction and discharge service valves and reevacuate the system to 2.5 mm Hg<br />
absolute.<br />
6. After the system has been double evacuated to 2.5 mm Hg absolute, close the<br />
vacuum pump suction valve and stop the pump. Allow the system to stand under<br />
a vacuum a minimum of 12 hours. If no noticeable rise in pressure has taken<br />
place after 12 hours, the system may be charged. This test shall be made in the<br />
presence of the Architect/Engineer.<br />
7. The contractor shall furnish and install all of the refrigerant required to develop<br />
the system to its full rating, and in addition to the initial charge, he shall provide,<br />
without cost, all necessary refrigerant for the proper operation of the<br />
refrigeration apparatus during the first year's operation.<br />
8. The contractor shall be required to provide the initial charge of lubricating oil for<br />
all refrigeration equipment and related apparatus.<br />
END OF SECTION 15651<br />
REFRIGERATION SYSTEMS 15651-6
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15800<br />
AIR DISTRIBUTION<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and<br />
the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.<br />
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. Furnish and install fans, filters, sheet metal work, grilles, louvers, diffusers, registers,<br />
sound traps, special fan bases, fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers and<br />
sleeves, accessories and natural gas fired appliance flue vents.<br />
B. All automatically controlled dampers furnished under Section 15900 - CONTROLS<br />
AND INSTRUMENTATION will be installed under this section. After dampers are<br />
set they shall be balanced for free and easy operation.<br />
C. Where ductwork has an interior lining, dimensions shown on drawings shall be clear<br />
dimensions inside the liner.<br />
D. Prior to system test and balance, supply and install new, clean air filters throughout<br />
the air handling systems except for any high efficiency filters which have pressure<br />
drop within normal operating limits.<br />
1.3 REQUIREMENTS AND RELATED WORK<br />
15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
15043 - BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS<br />
15190 - DUCT INSULATION<br />
15900 - CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION<br />
1.4 REFERENCES<br />
A. ASTM A 36 - Structural Steel.<br />
B. ASTM A 90 - Weight of Coating on Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Iron or Steel Articles.<br />
C. ASTM A 167 - Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet,<br />
and Strip.<br />
D. ASTM A 366 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Cold Rolled, Commercial Quality.<br />
E. ASTM A 480 - General Requirements for Flat-Rolled Stainless and Heat-Resisting<br />
Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip.<br />
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
F. ASTM A 525 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by<br />
the Hot-Dip Process.<br />
G. ASTM A 527 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by Hot-Dip Process, Lock<br />
Forming Quality.<br />
H. ASTM A 568 - Steel, Sheet, Carbon, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and<br />
Cold-Rolled.<br />
I. ASTM A 569 - Steel, Carbon (0.15 Maximum, Percent), Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip,<br />
Commercial Quality.<br />
J. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate.<br />
K. AWS D9.1 - Welding of Sheet Metal.<br />
L. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems - Latest<br />
Edition.<br />
M. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems - Latest<br />
Edition.<br />
N. NFPA 91 - Installation of Blower and Exhaust Systems for Dust, Stock and<br />
Vapor Removal or Conveying - Latest Edition.<br />
O. NFPA 96 - Installation of Equipment for the Removal of Smoke and<br />
Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment - Latest Edition.<br />
P. SMACNA - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
Q. SMACNA - HVAC Duct <strong>Construction</strong> Standards - Metal and Flexible - 1985.<br />
R. UL STANDARD 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Connectors.<br />
S. UL STANDARD 555 – Standard for Safety Fire Dampers<br />
T. UL STANDARD 555S – Leakage Rated Dampers for use in Smoke Control Systems<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 EQUIPMENT SCHEDULES<br />
A. All major items of equipment are specified in the equipment schedule on the<br />
drawings and shall be furnished complete with all accessories normally supplied with<br />
the catalog item listed and all other accessories necessary for a complete and<br />
satisfactory operating system.<br />
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
B. All registers, grilles and diffusers shall be as listed in the schedule on the drawings.<br />
Frame style shall be coordinated by the Contractor to match the ceiling type shown<br />
on the reflected ceiling plans of the Contract Documents.<br />
2.2 DUCTWORK<br />
A. SHEETMETAL<br />
1. Materials and Gauges: Construct all ducts, casings, plenums, etc., of galvanized<br />
steel sheets, of the gauges specified below, unless otherwise shown. Sheets shall<br />
be free from blisters, slivers, pits and imperfectly galvanized spots.<br />
2. All ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with "HVAC DUCT<br />
CONSTRUCTION STANDARDS - METAL AND FLEXIBLE". First Edition,<br />
1985 as published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National<br />
Association, Inc. Pressure class for all ductwork shall be 2” or unless otherwise<br />
noted on plans.<br />
3. Construct low velocity ducts using Pittsburgh or "Snap-Lock" corner seams. All<br />
seams shall be made airtight. Using United Mc Grill “UNI-FLEX” duct sealer or<br />
approved equal.<br />
4. Connections of high pressure and/or velocity ducts, fittings and high pressure<br />
boxes shall be made airtight by tack welding on 8" centers and coating joints<br />
with United Mc Grill “United duct Sealer”.<br />
5. Round ducts and fittings for high velocity systems shall be spiral lockseam<br />
conduit as manufactured by United Mc Grill Co., Inc.,or approved equal. All 90<br />
elbows shall be at least 5-piece construction. Standard manufactured ducts of<br />
other than spiral construction will be acceptable if constructed of the following<br />
gauges with welded seams. Sizes thru 12 inch diameter shall be 22 gauge, 23<br />
inch thru 36 inch diameter shall be 20 gauge, 37 inches and over shall be 18<br />
gauge. Basic high velocity fittings are detailed on the drawings. Spun or tapered<br />
takeoffs shall be used from all vertical high velocity risers.<br />
B. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of<br />
duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows are used,<br />
provide air foil turning vanes. Where acoustical lining is indicated, provide turning<br />
vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.<br />
C. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever<br />
possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees<br />
convergence downstream.<br />
D. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than<br />
duct gages indicated in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch<br />
cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded. Prime coat welded joints.<br />
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90<br />
degree conical tee connections may be used.<br />
F. FLEXIBLE<br />
1. Flexible ducts for connections between rigid ductwork and variable volume<br />
boxes shall be Factory Insulated flexible conduit capable of holding 5 inches<br />
W.C. without development leaks and shall not exceed a flame spread of 25 or a<br />
smoke development of 50. Thermoflex Type N-KH or approved equal.<br />
2. Flexible connections between the diffusers and the runout ducts shall be factory<br />
insulated, sound absorbing low velocity flexible conduit conforming to the<br />
following duct fabrication shall not exceed a flame spread of 25 or a smoke<br />
development of 50.<br />
a) Two ply vinyl film supported by helically wound spring steel wire:<br />
fiberglass insulation: polyethylene vapor barrier film.<br />
b) Pressure Rating: 10 inches WG (2.50 kPa) positive and 1.0 inches WG (250<br />
Pa) negative.<br />
c) Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm (20.3 m/sec).<br />
d) Temperature Range: -10 degrees F to 160 degrees F (-23 degrees C to 71<br />
degrees C).<br />
2.3 COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS<br />
A. Furnish and install at locations shown on plans, or as required by code combination<br />
fire/smoke dampers meeting the following specifications. Frame shall be galvanized<br />
steel formed into a structural hat channel shape with tabbed corners for<br />
reinforcement.<br />
B. Each combination fire smoke damper shall be 1-1/2 hour fire rated under UL<br />
Standard 555 or greater where noted on architectural plans, and bear a UL label<br />
attesting to same. Damper manufacturer shall have tested, and qualified with UL, a<br />
complete range of damper sizes covering all dampers required by this specification.<br />
The leakage rating under UL555S shall be Leakage Class II (10 cfm/ft. at 1” w.g.)<br />
C. In addition to the leakage ratings already specified herein, the dampers and their<br />
actuators shall be qualified under UL555S to an elevated temperature of 250º F,<br />
350ºF, or 450ºF depending upon the actuator. Appropriate electric “Firestat” operator<br />
shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at time of damper fabrication. Damper<br />
and actuator shall be supplied as a single entity which meets all applicable UL555<br />
and UL555S qualifications for both dampers and actuators. Manufacturer shall<br />
provide factory assembled sleeve of 16” minimum length (contractor to verify<br />
requirement). Factory supplied caulked sleeve shall be 16 gage for dampers up to 36”<br />
wide by 24” tall and 14 gage above 36” wide X 24” tall.<br />
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Combination Fire/Smoke dampers shall be Ruskin FSD6O rectangular dampers<br />
and Ruskin FSDR25 for round dampers or approved equal with correct mounting<br />
frames and sleeves for actual installation.<br />
2. Combination Fire/Smoke dampers for corridors ceiling shall be Ruskin FSD36<br />
with internally mounted actuator.<br />
D. Each combination fire and smoke damper shall include an integral factory furnished<br />
and installed duct smoke detector compatible with the building fire alarm system.<br />
Assembly by Ruskin DSDN or approved equal.<br />
E. Size of access doors in ductwork shall be 2 inches less than the width of the duct by<br />
12 inches, up to a maximum size of 24 inches by 24 inches.<br />
2.4 FIRE DAMPERS<br />
A. Furnish and install at locations shown on the drawings or as required by code fire<br />
dampers meeting the following requirements. Provide access doors at all fire damper<br />
locations of sufficient size to allow easy resetting of fire damper linkage. Fire<br />
damper links shall be of the test strength recommended to prevent nuisance closing.<br />
All fire dampers shall conform to the requirements of NFPA Pamphlet 90A and shall<br />
meet the required UL Standard 555.<br />
B. High Velocity Round or Oval Fire Dampers: High velocity fire dampers shall be of<br />
the folding blade type designed for minimum static pressure drop. Fusible links shall<br />
be accessible from either side of the damper. Each damper shall be furnished<br />
complete with a galvanized welded steel sleeve (round or oval) and closure<br />
compartment to house the folded blades. Fire dampers shall be Ruskin FD35 with<br />
165F fusible link or approved equal.<br />
C. Rectangular Fire Dampers: Fire dampers for rectangular ductwork shall be of the<br />
folding blade type with the hinged blades completely out of the air stream of the<br />
single hinged blade type. Fusible links shall be accessible from either side of the<br />
damper. Each damper shall have a galvanized welded steel sleeve (rectangular or<br />
square) and closure compartment to house the folded blades. Rectangular fire<br />
dampers mounted in the horizontal plane are to be spring loaded. Fire dampers shall<br />
be Ruskin DIBD with 165F fusible link or approved equal.<br />
D. Provide access doors at all fire damper locations of sufficient size to allow easy<br />
resetting of fire damper linkage. Size of access doors in ductwork shall be 2 inches<br />
less than the width of the duct by 12 inches, up to a maximum size of 24 inches by 24<br />
inches.<br />
E. Each fire damper shall be provided with spare fusible link(s) secured to the damper.<br />
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2.5 ACCESS DOORS<br />
A. Wall and Ceiling Access Doors: Furnish as required in Section 15010, paragraph 3.6.<br />
B. Duct Access Doors: Duct access doors at fire dampers and other locations which<br />
require access to mechanical devices inside of ductwork shall be Controlair 16 gauge<br />
access door with continuous hinge, neoprene gasket, thumb screw locks and baked<br />
enamel finish. Doors shall be sized for easy access to mechanical device.<br />
C. Walk Thru Plenum Access Doors: Doors shall be provided with a flat iron or angle<br />
iron stiffening frame and so constructed that they can be operated without twisting or<br />
distortion. Doors on insulated ductwork shall be of double panel construction<br />
provided with an approved type insulated filler, not less than one inch thick. The<br />
duct opening at each door shall be provided with a continuous reinforcing galvanized<br />
bar or angle against which the door will close, this being provided with a sponge<br />
rubber gasket to make the door airtight.<br />
D. Door frames on insulated ductwork shall be placed on an extended metal collar flush<br />
with the face of the finished insulation.<br />
E. Latches shall be operable from either side of door and shall be "Ventlok" No. 310.<br />
2.6 BURIED UNDERGROUND DUCTS<br />
A. Buried ducts may be concrete encased sheet metal PVC jacketed sheet metal as<br />
indicated.<br />
B. Fabricate metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA Low Pressure Duct<br />
<strong>Construction</strong> Standards, except as indicated. Fabricate using two gages heavier<br />
material than indicated for 2 inch WG pressure class.<br />
2.7 FILTERS<br />
A. Filters shall be as listed in the schedule on the drawings.<br />
B. Filter gauge for each bank of filters in the mechanical rooms and roof top equipment<br />
will be supplied and installed by the Controls Contractor as specified in Section<br />
15900 - CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION.<br />
2.8 COILS<br />
A. In no case shall specified air or water pressure drops be exceeded more than 10%.<br />
Piping connections shall be as shown on the drawings. Coils shall be as specified in<br />
the equipment schedule on the drawings. In no case shall rows or fin spacing be less<br />
than the minimum surface scheduled.<br />
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800-6
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2.9 TURNING VANES<br />
A. Turning vanes shall be installed in all square elbows. Turning Vanes shall be air foil<br />
blade type, shop or factory fabricated.<br />
2.10 FLUE GAS VENTS<br />
A. Gas fired equipment shall be vented in accordance with the Uniform Mechanical<br />
Code, Uniform Plumbing Code and local codes and ordinances. Natural draft<br />
appliances shall have Type “B” vents. Forced draft appliances shall have per<br />
Manufacturer’s requirements vents.<br />
2.11 FAN PLENUMS<br />
A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct <strong>Construction</strong> Standards<br />
- Metal and Flexible and construct for operating pressures indicated.<br />
B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch 100 high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet<br />
panels on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide<br />
liner of 18 gage galvanized expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned<br />
up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields.<br />
C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum<br />
supporting angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access<br />
to equipment for cleaning and inspection. [Provide clear wire glass observation ports,<br />
minimum 6 X 6 inch size.]<br />
D. Fabricate acoustic casings with reinforcing turned inward. Provide 16 gage back<br />
facing and 22 gage perforated front facing with 3/32 inch diameter holes on 5/32 inch<br />
centers. Construct panels 3 inches thick packed with 4.5 lb/cu ft minimum glass fiber<br />
media, on inverted channels of 16 gage.<br />
E. Plenum Access Doors: As indicated on the drawings, provide and install sheet metal<br />
access doors of the size as noted or as required for proper access to the equipment.<br />
These doors shall be constructed as integral parts of the plenum walls. Fasteners:<br />
Walk-thru type doors at plenum chambers shall be provided with two fastening<br />
devices equal to Ventlok #301, that can be operated on either side of the door. These<br />
devices are to be readily operated and moving parts to have bronze pins.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION OF SHEET METAL WORK<br />
A. All necessary allowance and provisions shall be made in the installation of sheet<br />
metal ducts for the structural conditions of the building, and ducts shall be<br />
transformed or divided as may be required. Whenever this is necessary the required<br />
area shall be maintained. All of these changes, however, must be approved and<br />
installed as directed at the project. During the installation, the open ends of ducts<br />
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800-7
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
shall be protected to prevent debris and dirt from entering. Whenever exposed ducts<br />
pass through walls, floors or ceilings, a flanged sheet metal collar fitting close around<br />
ducts shall be slipped along duct until flange is tight against finished surface covering<br />
edges of openings and presenting a neat appearance. Collar shall be locked to duct.<br />
B. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and<br />
maintenance activities.<br />
C. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.<br />
D. Connect diffusers or light troffer boots to low pressure ducts with 5 feet (1.5 m)<br />
maximum length of flexible duct held in place with strap or clamp.<br />
E. Set plenum doors 6 to 12 inches above floor. Arrange door swings so that fan static<br />
pressure holds door in closed position.<br />
F. Encase buried metal ductwork in 3 inch minimum of concrete. Provide adequate<br />
tie-down points to prevent ducts from floating during concrete placement. Introduce<br />
no heat into ducts for 20 days following placement of concrete.<br />
G. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on<br />
open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.<br />
H. All ducts, coils, housings, registers, grilles, fans, etc., shall be clean when installed<br />
and shall be kept clean until the system is completed. As the various parts of the<br />
system are installed they shall be wiped or blown clean and openings taped dust-tight<br />
with heavy paper or cardboard until the system is completed and ready for testing. At<br />
that time all covers and protective wrappings shall be removed. Where one has been<br />
torn or previously removed, the duct, coil, register, etc., shall be carefully cleaned of<br />
any dirt or dust that has entered the opening.<br />
3.2 DUCTS AT MASONRY<br />
A. Where ducts are shown connecting to masonry openings and along edges of all<br />
plenums at floors and walls, provide a continuous 2" x 2" x 1/8" galvanized angle<br />
iron which shall be bolted to the construction and made airtight to the same by<br />
applying caulking compound. Sheet metal in these locations shall be bolted to the<br />
angle iron.<br />
3.3 HAND AND SPLITTER DAMPERS<br />
A. Install hand operated volume and splitter dampers at all locations of branches of main<br />
ducts, from equipment, supply ducts, return ducts and at all locations where air flow<br />
splits or is balanced, whether shown or not. Volume dampers shall be controlled by<br />
heavy duty locking quadrants mounted on the outside of the duct. Where ducts are<br />
insulated the damper rod shall be extended and the operator shall be mounted on the<br />
outside of the insulation. Where volume dampers are installed in ducts over 12"<br />
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800-8
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
deep, the dampers shall be made in two sections and each independently operated.<br />
Splitter dampers shall be at least 1 1/2 times as long as the narrowest adjacent split.<br />
All damper fittings must be heavy commercial items and must be approved by the<br />
Architect/Engineer before installation.<br />
3.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS<br />
A. Provide glass fabric, neoprene coated flexible connections, not less than 6" wide at<br />
the inlet and outlet connection of each fan unit, securely fastened to the unit and to<br />
the ductwork. Materical shall comply with Underwriter's Laboratories Standard 214.<br />
B. Indoor applications shall have Metaledge Ventglas with heavy glass fabric, double<br />
coated with Dupont's Neoprene.<br />
C. Outdoor applications shall have Metaledge Ventlon with heavy glass fabric, double<br />
coated with Dupont's Hypalon.<br />
3.5 CROSS BREAKING<br />
A. Rectangular sheet metal ducts shall be cross-broken on the four sides of each 4-foot<br />
panel. All vertical and horizontal sheet metal barriers, duct offsets, elbows, as well as<br />
4-foot panels of straight sections of ducts shall be cross-broken. Cross breaking shall<br />
be applied to the sheet metal between the standing seams or reinforcing angles. The<br />
center of the cross break shall be of the required height to assure surfaces being rigid.<br />
High velocity plenum panels and ductwork shall not be cross-broken.<br />
3.6 TEST HOLES IN DUCTWORK<br />
A. Furnish test holes in ducts at locations required by the testing and balancing team for<br />
testing of air quantities in ducts. Ventlok No. 699, closures shall be provided and<br />
installed for each test hole, with sufficient neck length to penetrate the insulation.<br />
3.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS<br />
A. Hangers for ducts up to 18 inches in width or diameter shall be placed not more than<br />
ten foot centers. Ducts 19 inches and over in width or diameter shall be supported on<br />
not more than five foot centers. Hangers shall be placed plumb and present for a neat<br />
appearance. Construct hangers for high velocity boxes and for ductwork form<br />
galvanized iron 1" x 1" x 1/16" for ducts up to 36 inches in width or diameter. For<br />
ducts over 36 inches in width or diameter, support ducts every 4'-0" with 1 1/4" x 1<br />
1/2" x 1/8" angles. The use of perforated band iron for duct support is prohibited.<br />
Hangers shall extend down the sides of the ducts using not less than three rivets or<br />
parker screws of appropriate sizes. It is essential that all ducts be rigidly supported.<br />
Where vertical ducts pass thru floors or roofs heavy supporting angles shall be<br />
attached to ducts and to the structure. Angles shall be of sufficient size to support<br />
ductwork rigidly. Place supporting angles on at least two sides of the duct.<br />
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800-9
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3.8 FABRICATION<br />
A. All duct work shall be fabricated with the mill markings on the outside.<br />
3.9 TESTS<br />
A. Testing and balancing of the air tempering systems will be as specified in Section<br />
15043 - BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS.<br />
B. If specified conditions cannot be obtained due to deficiencies in equipment<br />
performance or improper installation or workmanship, the Mechanical Contractor<br />
shall make any changes necessary to provide the specified conditions.<br />
C. Cleaning ducts and testing for tightness: Before the ceiling is installed and final<br />
connections are made to air outlet devices, operate the fans at full capacity to blow<br />
out dirt and debris from the ducts. If it is not practical to use the main supply blower<br />
for cleaning, the ducts may be blown out in sections by a portable fan. After the<br />
ducts have been cleaned, an air tightness test shall be made on all ductwork. A<br />
minimum pressure equal to fan static pressure at less than 10% of design flow or 2<br />
1/2 times design external static pressure, whichever is less shall be maintained during<br />
the test. A soap test shall be applied to all sheet metal connections and joints to<br />
locate air leaks. Air leaks which are in excess of that required to bubble the soap suds<br />
(that is, actually blow the suds away), shall be sealed by additional taping and<br />
caulking to reduce the leakage to a rate not to exceed slow bubbles forming. In lieu<br />
of the above tightness tests, the Contractor may test the ducts by attaching a fan with<br />
a capacity of not over 300 cfm at 2 1/2" static pressure to the ductwork and with<br />
outlets blocked air tight, build up the pressure in the ducts to 2" water gauge. If this<br />
pressure cannot be obtained the Contractor shall locate and repair the leaks as<br />
specified above. The Architect/Engineer and Owner's Representative shall witness<br />
the test and the Contractor shall notify the Insulation Contractor in writing when the<br />
test has been satisfactorily completed.<br />
END OF SECTION 15800<br />
AIR DISTRIBUTION 15800-10
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15900<br />
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions<br />
and the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.<br />
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. Furnish and install a control system, complete in all respects to provide the<br />
Sequence of Control shown on the drawings.<br />
B. The mechanical trade is entirely responsible for furnishing, installing, wiring,<br />
connecting and placing the control systems in operation. Electrical work required<br />
will be the final responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor either by his own<br />
electricians or by his subcontract with an Electrical Contractor.<br />
1.3 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS<br />
DIVISION 16 - ELECTRICAL<br />
15010 - GENERAL MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
15043 - BALANCING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS<br />
15046 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING<br />
15902 - ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND INTERLOCKS<br />
1.4 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. The control system shall be furnished complete for the heating and air<br />
conditioning systems by the suppliers HVAC equipment Manufacturer or<br />
approved by the Manufacturer. A complete stock of all repair and replacement<br />
parts for all items furnished under this contract shall be carried in stock at the<br />
local office at all times.<br />
B. Submittals: Shall include plan size drawings, with individual literature on each<br />
item, showing control sequences, complete electrical ladder diagrams and all<br />
control components and their wiring requirements. The Contractor shall be<br />
responsible to see that all systems are properly coordinated.<br />
C. Operation and Maintenance <strong>Manual</strong>s: As soon as possible after Award of<br />
Contract, the Contractor shall prepare an Operation and Maintenance (O & M)<br />
<strong>Manual</strong> and submit it to the Engineer for review and approval. The control<br />
system testing and training specified hereafter shall not be conducted until the O<br />
& M <strong>Manual</strong> has been approved. The <strong>Manual</strong> shall contain, as a minimum:<br />
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 15900-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Approved control diagrams.<br />
2. Equipment and device catalog cuts identifying each control device with a<br />
unique number or symbol coordinated with the control diagram symbols.<br />
3. A Sequence of Control for each system's control diagram identifying the<br />
function and physical location of each adjustable control device, written in<br />
language understandable to personnel not specifically trained in HVAC<br />
control systems.<br />
4. A Troubleshooting section for each control system indicating what tests<br />
and/or adjustments can be made to identify and/or correct common<br />
problems with control systems of the type installed. This description<br />
should address procedures to determine the cause of high or low space<br />
temperature and/or humidity in a typical room served by each air handling<br />
system. The description should be adequate to lead untrained persons to<br />
conclude, at minimum, whether the unit is receiving adequate primary<br />
cooling or heating, whether mixed air and supply air temperatures are<br />
reasonable and whether field adjustments or technical service is required<br />
to solve the problem. This troubleshooting section shall be bound in a<br />
separate section of O & M <strong>Manual</strong> and shall clearly refer to control device<br />
symbols shown on the Control Diagram drawings.<br />
1.5 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. No compression fittings shall be used in concealed places.<br />
B. The controls trade shall check and adjust his control system completely, twice<br />
during the guarantee period. The second check to be made during the final thirty<br />
days of the guarantee period.<br />
C. The controls trade will furnish the Owner with an accurate, up-to-date wiring<br />
diagram of all electrical and electronic equipment installed under this contract.<br />
D. The Contractor shall furnish a complete set of parts lists, operating instructions<br />
and maintenance literature, in duplicate, for proper maintenance of all control<br />
equipment.<br />
E. Clear plastic lockable covers shall be provided for all space thermostats where<br />
shown on the drawings or where the space thermostat could be damaged.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 AUTOMATIC DAMPERS<br />
A. All automatic dampers shall be furnished by the controls trade and shall be<br />
constructed of galvanized sheet steel with bushings made of oil impregnated<br />
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 15900-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
sintered bronze to give constant lubrication. Each damper section shall have<br />
positive closing neoprene blade and edge seals. Outside air, return air and relief<br />
dampers shall have blades designed so that the blades are interconnected to give<br />
parallel movement. Each modulating damper shall provide a near linear<br />
relationship between damper opening and air flow. All volume dampers shall<br />
have opposed blades which will produce equal pressure drop flow characteristics.<br />
Blade width shall not exceed 6 inches. Dampers shall be equal to Pacific Air<br />
Products.<br />
2.2 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES<br />
A. The controls trade shall provide all automatic control valves and shall be made by<br />
the control manufacturer. All electric control valves 2" and smaller in size shall<br />
be brass body and trim, 2-1/2" and larger shall be iron body with brass or stainless<br />
steel trim. Valves shall be provided with renewable type seats and adjustable<br />
springs. Valves shall be designed to pass the quantity of water and with a<br />
maximum pressure loss not to exceed 10 ft. Valves shall be provided with "V"<br />
port or throttling type seat. Valves 2" or smaller shall be screwed. Valves 2-1/2"<br />
and larger shall be flanged. All sequencing valves shall have positive positioners.<br />
2.3 DAMPER MOTORS - ELECTRIC<br />
A. The damper motor shall be electro-hydraulic type capable of providing full<br />
proportional control of dampers. The actuator shall be compatible with any low<br />
voltage controller or auxiliary device. One motor shall be provided per damper<br />
section.<br />
2.4 SMOKE AND FIRE DETECTORS<br />
A. Smoke detectors shall be furnished and installed in each air handling unit or<br />
system 2000 CFM and larger. The contractor shall coordinate smoke detectors<br />
with the mechanical equipment schedule. Some detectors may be furnished by<br />
Mechanical Contractor with factory packaged equipment, see equipment schedule<br />
otherwise it is the contractors responsibility to provide and install smoke<br />
detectors.<br />
B. Smoke detector units shall be self-contained ionization type units. These units<br />
shall be designed for detection of products of combustion in compliance with the<br />
National Fire Protection Association, Recommended Practices Pamphlet No. 90A.<br />
The assembly shall consist of a casting to accommodate sampling tubes which<br />
extend across the duct of the ventilation system.<br />
C. The unit shall provide the following functions:<br />
1. Neon alarm and trouble indicators.<br />
2. One set of single pole, double throw alarm operated relay contacts.<br />
3. One set of single pole double throw trouble operated relay contacts.<br />
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 15900-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
4. Alarm reset switch.<br />
2.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION<br />
A. The operation of the control system shall be as indicated on the drawings and<br />
control diagrams. The sequence shall be rewritten and shown on the control<br />
submittal drawing diagramming that system. The sequence on the submittal<br />
drawing shall identify control devices by number and physical location<br />
coordinated with the submittal drawing device numbers.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. No control work shall be performed until the control diagram shop drawings have<br />
been approved by the Engineer and returned to the contractor.<br />
3.2 CONTROL WIRING<br />
A. All control wiring shall be furnished and installed by the temperature control<br />
subcontractor.<br />
B. Terminal strips shall be used in all boxes and cabinets where more than six<br />
control wires are terminated, spliced or both.<br />
C. All control wiring shall be color coded and marked in each box, at each<br />
termination with Brady wrap around labels or suitable tags approved by the<br />
Architect. The schematic control diagrams shown on the contract drawings are<br />
for the convenience of the contractor and may not be complete in all details of<br />
control wiring for the equipment purchased for installation.<br />
3.3 SYSTEM TESTING<br />
A. The integrity and accuracy of each function and control point shall be<br />
demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Architect/Engineer during the test period.<br />
At the termination of the testing period the Contractor shall spend one working<br />
day instructing the Owner or his designated personnel in the control system<br />
operation. A complete operating booklet shall be provided and used during the<br />
training period.<br />
B. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor or his authorized<br />
representative, shall be sent to the installation to certify that all necessary<br />
electrical tests and control adjustments have been completed. He shall then file a<br />
letter of Certification indicating that the system functions and conforms to the<br />
intent of these specifications.<br />
END OF SECTION 15900<br />
CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION 15900-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 15902<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND INTERLOCKS<br />
1.1 Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions<br />
and General Requirements.<br />
1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS<br />
A. General Provisions; Raceways, Boxes and Fittings; Conductors; Wiring Devices and<br />
Plates; Grounding; Motor Starters.<br />
1.3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK<br />
A. All disconnect means, motor controllers, electrical controls, protective, and signal<br />
devices for equipment furnished under Division 15 of these specifications will be<br />
installed and connected as scheduled herein or as otherwise noted on the drawings.<br />
B. Electrical items not shown on the electrical drawings, but which are required for<br />
equipment furnished under Division 15 of this specification shall be furnished under<br />
this section of the specifications and shall be installed and electrically connected in<br />
conformance with Division 16 Specifications.<br />
1.4 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Submittal data for each individual electrically controlled item of equipment or device<br />
furnished under this Division of these specifications shall include complete electrical<br />
wiring diagrams, and elementary control diagrams (ladder form) showing all internal<br />
and external wiring connections and services. The submittal data shall itemize all<br />
electrical characteristics that are of a special nature or critical to the electrical<br />
installation or control system. Such equipment and devices will not be considered for<br />
approval until these requirements are met. These submittals shall form a part Section<br />
15900 requirements and shall be properly coordinated by the Contractor.<br />
B. As soon as possible after contract notice to proceed, one print of the ladder diagrams<br />
shall be submitted by the contractor showing all necessary wiring for the mechanical<br />
equipment and devices proposed for installation. This print shall be reviewed and<br />
approved by the contractor, and then submitted to the Architect/Engineer for<br />
approval. The print shall indicate all components which shall be wired to the<br />
control/power circuits by the contractor, with all terminals for external connections of<br />
the components identified and labeled to correspond to the manufacturer's<br />
designations. Internal or factory installed wiring of package-type components need<br />
not be shown. Control diagrams shall show all internal and external wiring<br />
connection and shall clearly indicate field wiring furnished and installed under<br />
ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AN INTERLOCKS 15902-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
Division 15, differentiated from field wiring furnished and installed under Division<br />
16.<br />
C. Revised Drawings: After the Architect/Engineer has approved the marked copy of<br />
the control diagrams submitted in accordance with Paragraph B above, the Contractor<br />
shall issue prints to all involved parties. The control diagrams shall be certified in<br />
writing as being acceptable to the contractor. The approved drawings will then be<br />
included in the control submittal and the Operating and Maintenance <strong>Manual</strong>.<br />
1.5 INSTALLATION<br />
A. No control work shall be performed until control submittal has been approved by the<br />
Architect/Engineer.<br />
1.6 CHANGES DURING CONSTRUCTION<br />
A. The complete responsibility and costs for revisions during construction to the<br />
approved control diagrams, and the resultant changes to the installation requirements,<br />
not covered by contract change order, shall be assigned to the contractor requesting<br />
such revisions.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 CONTROL AND INTERPOSING RELAYS<br />
A. Relays other than those on I/O cards shall be general purpose, enclosed plug-in type<br />
with 8 pin octal plug and protected by a heat and shock resistant dust cover. Relays<br />
shall be of the Neon or LED indicator type.<br />
B. Relay contact configuration and ratings shall be for rated load voltage and exceed<br />
load current rating by no less than fifty percent. Minimum contact rating shall be 10<br />
amps at 120 volts AC.<br />
2.2 TERMINAL STRIPS<br />
A. Terminal strips shall be of the molded nylon or polypropylene barrier type, individual<br />
plug-in mounted on a mounting channel. Terminal connections shall be rated 300<br />
volt, 40 amp and shall be of the tubular clamp type for use with bare wire ends, or of<br />
the strap screw type for use with crimp spade lug prepared wire ends. Terminal strips<br />
shall provide for removable marking strips or have prepainted matte finish marking<br />
surfaces. Buchanan 600 series or approved substitute.<br />
ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AN INTERLOCKS 15902-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 RELAYS<br />
A. All remote field devices shall be controlled through the use of an interposing relay.<br />
In no case shall a contactor or motor starter be directly controlled from a solid state<br />
device output or relay contact of a rating less than that stated above.<br />
3.2 COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION<br />
A. All individual components (relays, timers, terminal strips, etc.) shall be clearly<br />
marked with the identification nomenclature shown on the manufacturer's shop<br />
drawings. Identification shall be by the use of press-type tape strip (kroy) covered<br />
with Scotch 600 clear tape or approved substitute method.<br />
3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION<br />
A. The installation and wiring of all electrical equipment installed under this contract<br />
shall meet all Division 16 specifications. Special attention is called to the following:<br />
1. All wiring to be in conduit.<br />
2. All control wiring to be color-coded throughout. Conductor color shall be<br />
consistent for the entire length of circuit.<br />
3. All splices shall be made in junction boxes on terminal strips.<br />
4. All control wiring to terminate on marked terminal strips and shall be marked at<br />
all terminal points. Both ends of each wire shall be marked with a designation<br />
shown on the manufacturer's shop drawings, using interlocking chevron shaped<br />
snap-on plastic markers, hot-marked shrinkable tubing, hot stamping of the wire,<br />
or clear shrink-on tubing securing adhesive labels. Markers which depend solely<br />
on adhesive are not acceptable.<br />
END OF SECTION 15902<br />
ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AN INTERLOCKS 15902-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16010<br />
GENERAL PROVISIONS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this<br />
section.<br />
1.2 ELECTRICAL DIVISION INDEX<br />
16010 General Provisions<br />
16110 Raceways<br />
16120 Wires and Cables<br />
16130 Outlet Boxes<br />
16133 Cabinets<br />
16140 Wiring Devices<br />
16150 Motors<br />
16155 Motor Starters<br />
16160 Panelboards<br />
16170 Motor and Circuit Disconnects<br />
16181 Fuses<br />
16190 Relays and Contactors<br />
16450 Grounding<br />
16470 Distribution Circuits<br />
16485 Elevator Wiring<br />
16501 Lamps<br />
16502 Ballasts and Accessories<br />
16511 Fluorescent Fixtures<br />
16612 Generator Systems<br />
16722 Small Fire Alarm System<br />
1.3 REQUIREMENTS<br />
A. Furnish all labor, materials, service, equipment and appliances required to complete<br />
the installation of the complete Electrical System in accordance with the<br />
Specifications and Contract Drawings.<br />
B. Refer to the Table in Division 15, Section 15902, 1.02 A for specific direction on<br />
items to include or exclude from this work.<br />
1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS<br />
A. Regulatory Agencies: Installation, materials, equipment and workmanship shall<br />
conform to the applicable provisions of the National Electrical Code (NEC), the<br />
National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) and the terms and conditions of the<br />
Electrical Utility and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the<br />
work required. All modifications required by these codes, rules, regulations and<br />
authorities shall be made by the Contractor without additional charge.<br />
GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) or Factory Mutual (FM): All materials, appliances,<br />
equipment or devices shall conform to the applicable standards of Underwriters<br />
Laboratories, Inc. or Factory Mutual, Inc. The label of, or listing by, UL or FM is<br />
required.<br />
C. Standards: Where referenced in these Specifications or on the Drawings, the<br />
publications and standards of the following organizations shall apply: Joint<br />
Commission on Accrediation of Healthcare Organizations (JCAHO), American<br />
Society of Testing and Materials (ASTM), Insulated Power Cable Engineers<br />
Association (IPCEA), National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), American<br />
National Standards Institute (ANSI), and National Electrical Manufacturers<br />
Association (NEMA).<br />
D. Conflicting code requirements shall be brought to the attention of the Architect.<br />
Where two or more codes apply, the most stringent of the codes shall govern.<br />
1.5 SUBMITTALS AND SUBSTITUTIONS<br />
A. Material List: Within 30 days of Contract Award or Notice to Proceed and before<br />
material is ordered, the Contractor shall submit for approval a list of all proposed<br />
material and equipment, indicating manufacturer's name and general description.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for approval a minimum of six copies of all shop drawings<br />
no later than 30 days after the material list has been approved and prior to ordering<br />
any material. Show complete outlines, dimensions, electrical services, control<br />
diagrams, electrical characteristics of special nature or critical to the installation and<br />
pertinent data required for installation. Indicate in the transmittal that submittal has<br />
been reviewed and accepted and all Contract deviations identified. In addition to<br />
specific references or requests; submit shop drawings for the following applicable<br />
items: panelboards, lighting fixtures, transformers, primary cable and gear, alarm<br />
systems and all special equipment.<br />
C. Substitutions may be requested in accordance with Section 01640, 1.04.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS: The Electrical requirements for equipment specified or<br />
indicated on the Drawings are based on information available at the time of design. If<br />
equipment furnished for installation has Electrical requirements other than indicated on<br />
the Electrical Drawings, the Contractor shall make all adjustments to wire and conduit<br />
size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as required to accommodate the<br />
equipment supplied, without additional charge to the Owner. All adjustments to the<br />
Drawings reflecting the Electrical System shall be delineated in a submittal to the<br />
Architect immediately upon knowledge of the required adjustments. The complete<br />
responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of<br />
these Specifications in which the equipment is furnished.<br />
2.2 MATERIALS<br />
A. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer.<br />
GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Where no specific material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any first-class<br />
product made by a reputable manufacturer may be used, providing it conforms to the<br />
Contract requirements and meets the approval of the Architect.<br />
C. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly<br />
engaged in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current<br />
and standard design.<br />
2.3 ALTITUDE: Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily the function<br />
intended at the altitude of the project site. The altitude of this project is 5250 feet mean<br />
sea level.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 GENERAL: Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete Electrical System shall<br />
be done in a first class workmanlike manner by qualified personnel experienced in such<br />
work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to hold up the progress of the<br />
project. The Contractor shall check all areas and surface where Electrical equipment or<br />
material is to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions<br />
before starting work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of the<br />
prevailing conditions.<br />
3.2 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHTING: Furnish and install all temporary Electrical<br />
facilities required for construction and safety operation. No part of the permanent<br />
Electrical Systems or the existing Electrical System may be used for temporary service<br />
unless approved by the Architect.<br />
3.3 UTILITIES<br />
A. GENERAL: The Drawings reflect requirements of the serving utilities based on<br />
information derived from representatives of the utilities. During the project design<br />
phase, the fact that the Architect may undertake to show the utility(s) requirements,<br />
does not necessarily indicate that the Architect represents the utilities or their<br />
requirements; therefore, within 10 working days after Contract Award and/or Notice<br />
to Proceed has been issued, the Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating the<br />
requirements of the utilities for the Power System. The Owner shall be responsible<br />
for coordinating the requirements for the Telephone and Television Systems.<br />
B. Any deviations from the documents shall be brought to the attention of the Architect<br />
no later than 10 working days after Award of Contract and/or Notice to Proceed.<br />
Failure to notify the Architect within the 10-day time frame signifies the acceptance<br />
of documents and utility requirements by the Contractor and all associated costs<br />
therein.<br />
3.4 EXCAVATION: Comply with Section 02200, Earthwork.<br />
3.5 PERFORMANCE TESTS<br />
A. Thoroughly test all fixtures, services and all circuits for proper operating conditions<br />
and freedom from grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All<br />
equipment appliances and devices shall be operated under load conditions.<br />
B. After the interior-wiring system installation is complete and at such time as the<br />
Architect may direct, conduct operating tests for approval. When requested, test all<br />
GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
the wire, cable, devices and equipment after installation to assure that all material<br />
continues to possess all the original characteristics as required by the governing codes<br />
and standards as listed in these Specifications.<br />
C. After occupancy of the building has taken place and nominal building power loads<br />
have been established, make voltage readings at all panelboards. Based on these<br />
readings make final adjustments of taps on all transformers in the building as directed<br />
by the Architect. Submit to Architect correspondence and/or drawing delineating<br />
readings.<br />
D. Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these Specifications or as<br />
requested by the Architect to prove acceptability.<br />
E. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing.<br />
3.6 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS AND MANUALS<br />
A. Instructions: Without additional charge to the Owner, the Contractor shall provide an<br />
experienced and competent representative to instruct the Owner or his representative<br />
fully in the concept, theory, operations, adjustment and maintenance of all equipment<br />
furnished for the Electrical System. Contractor shall provide at least two (2) weeks<br />
notice to the Architect in advance of this period.<br />
B. <strong>Manual</strong>s: Upon completion of the work, prepare and deliver to the Owner two (2) sets<br />
of complete operating and maintenance manuals for the systems and major equipment<br />
installed. Include catalog data, shop drawings, wiring diagrams, performance curves<br />
and rating data, spare parts lists and manufacturer's operating and maintenance data.<br />
Operating and maintenance manuals as required herein shall be submitted to the<br />
Architect for review and distribution to the Owner not less than two (2) weeks prior<br />
to the scheduled final acceptance of the <strong>Project</strong>.<br />
C. Other: The above requirements are in addition to specific instruction and manuals<br />
specified for individual systems or equipment.<br />
3.7 DRAWINGS<br />
A. General: The Electrical Drawings show the general arrangement of all conduit,<br />
equipment, etc. and shall be followed as closely as actual building construction and<br />
the work of other trades will permit. The Architectural and Structural Drawings shall<br />
be considered as a part of the work insofar as these Drawings furnish the Contractor<br />
with information relating to the design and construction of the building. Architectural<br />
Drawings shall take precedence over Electrical Drawings. The Contractor shall<br />
investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting the work and shall arrange<br />
his work accordingly, providing such fittings, elbows, pullboxes and accessories as<br />
may be required to meet such conditions.<br />
B. Field Measurements: The Contractor shall verify the dimensions governing the<br />
Electrical work at the building. No extra compensation shall be claimed or allowed on<br />
account of differences between actual dimensions and those indicated on the<br />
Drawings.<br />
3.8 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND OUTLETS<br />
GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
A. The approximate locations of cabinets, panelboards, wiring gutters, switches, light<br />
outlets, power outlets, etc., are indicated on the Drawings; however, the exact<br />
location shall be determined after thoroughly examining the general building plans<br />
and by actual measurements during construction to avoid conflicts with any<br />
Structural, Architectural, or other trades, with all locations subject to the approval of<br />
the Architect.<br />
B. Verify with the Architect all locations of conduit, boxes, etc., stubbed in the floor<br />
prior to installation.<br />
3.9 IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS<br />
A. Mark each individual motor controller, disconnect switch, transformer and remote<br />
control device to identify each item with its respective service using engraved<br />
nameplates.<br />
B. Provide nameplates with engraved lettering not less than 3/8" high where specified or<br />
noted. In general, use white core laminated plastic, attached with screws. Embossed<br />
plastic adhesive tape is not acceptable. Flush mounted devices may have<br />
identification engraved in the device plate.<br />
C. Identify panelboards, transformers and cabinets by engraved nameplates with<br />
descriptions indicated on the Drawings together with indication of the location of the<br />
feeder overcurrent protection. Install on inside of hinged doors or panelboards and<br />
cabinets.<br />
Example: Panel 2P<br />
120/208V, 3-phase, 4-wire<br />
Fed from Panel MDP/cct. #4<br />
D. Provide warning signs on all equipment or devices operating at 300 volts or more,<br />
reading "DANGER-480 VOLTS", etc. with white letters on red background of<br />
standard code size. Signs shall be decals.<br />
E. All underground utilities indicated on the Drawings shall have a 6" wide plastic<br />
marker installed continuously in the trench at 12" below grade. The marker shall have<br />
continuous markings embossed in the tape identifying the system installed, i.e.,<br />
communications, telephone, power, and secured computer.<br />
F. Identify all exposed conduits, junction and pullboxes at maximum intervals of twenty<br />
feet and as indicated below. Identify exposed conduits according to the system<br />
carried by means of Brady #B-350 permacode thin film pipe markers or approved<br />
equal by the Owner. Identify junction and pullboxes by painted on stencils or<br />
approved labels. Identification shall be placed at necessary intervals on straight<br />
conduit runs, close to all terminations, adjacent to all changes in directions and where<br />
conduits pass through walls or floors. Stencils to be painted on with legible<br />
contrasting colors without abbreviations. Painting shall be in accordance with<br />
DIVISION - FINISHES.<br />
GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Approved Electrical Conduit Color Codes:<br />
120/208 Volt Black<br />
277/480 Volt Orange<br />
Fire Alarm Red<br />
Nurse Call Blue<br />
Voice Paging Pink<br />
Television Purple<br />
Security<br />
White<br />
Telephone Gray<br />
Monitoring Maroon/White<br />
Grounding Green<br />
Emergency. Red/Black<br />
120/208<br />
Emergency. Red/Orange<br />
277/480<br />
Computer/Data Dark Blue/ White<br />
Medical Gas Yellow<br />
Alarms<br />
110 Volt Control Black/White<br />
G. Identify all receptacle and switch devices with the circuit and overcurrent protection<br />
device. Identification may be by waterproof, permanent marker on the rear of the<br />
device cover plate or as approved by the Architect and Owner.<br />
3.10 WARRANTY: Deliver originals of all guarantees and warranties on this portion of the<br />
work to the Architect. Warrant all equipment, materials and workmanship for one year in<br />
accordance with the terms of the Contract.<br />
3.11 PRODUCT HANDLING: Use all means necessary to protect Electrical materials and<br />
equipment before, during and after installation and to protect the installed work of other<br />
trades.<br />
3.12 RECORD DRAWINGS: As part of this Contract, the Contractor shall provide a complete<br />
marked-up set of Contract Documents indicating all changes to the documents during the<br />
project construction phase to the Architect. Changes to the Electrical System shall be<br />
documented on a set of "Record Drawings" on a daily basis.<br />
END OF SECTION 16010<br />
GENERAL PROVISIONS 16010-6
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16110<br />
RACEWAYS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 CONDUITS<br />
A. Rigid Steel Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick-wall with zinc-coated on the inside and<br />
either zinc-coated or coated with an approved corrosion-resistant coating on the<br />
outside.<br />
B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit: Rigid, threaded, thick-wall type, approved for the<br />
application.<br />
C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid, threaded, lightweight steel, zinc-coated or<br />
coated on the outside and either zinc-coated or coated with an approved<br />
corrosion-resistant coating on the inside.<br />
D. Rigid Non-Metallic Conduit: Schedule 40, high impact PVC with 7,000 psi tensile<br />
strength at 73.4 degrees fahrenheit, 11,000 psi flexural strength, 8,600 psi<br />
compression strength, approved 90 degree conductors. Carlon, Triangle or approved<br />
equal.<br />
E. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): Mild steel, zinc-coated on the outside and either<br />
zinc-coated or coated with an approved corrosion-resistant coating on the inside.<br />
F. Flexible Conduit: Commercial Greenfield, galvanized steel, with a separate<br />
grounding bond wire installed in the conduit in addition to other wires.<br />
G. Liquid-Tight Flexible Conduit: Flexible galvanized steel tubing with extruded<br />
liquid-tight PVC outer jacket and a separate grounding conductor installed in the<br />
conduit.<br />
H. Conduit Size: Minimum conduit size 1/2" except where specifically approved for<br />
equipment connections. Sizes not noted on the Drawings shall be as required by the<br />
NEC.<br />
2.2 CONDUIT FITTINGS<br />
A. Rigid Steel Conduit, IMC and EMT Fittings: Iron, steel, or die-cast only.<br />
RACEWAYS 16110-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Rigid Aluminum Conduit Fittings: Malleable iron, steel or aluminum alloy. Ferrous<br />
fittings zinc-coated or cadmium plated. Aluminum alloy fittings shall conform to the<br />
characteristics defined by UL for rigid aluminum metallic conduit and shall not<br />
contain more than 0.04 percent copper.<br />
C. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit Fittings: Approved for the purpose and as recommended<br />
by the manufacturer.<br />
D. Flexible Conduit Fittings (Commercial Greenfield): Either die-cast, steel, or<br />
malleable iron only with insulated throats and shall be of one of the following types:<br />
1. Squeeze or clamp type with bearing surface contoured to wrap around the conduit<br />
and clamped by one or more screws.<br />
2. Steel, multiple point type, for threading into internal wall of the conduit<br />
convolutions.<br />
3. Wedge and screw type with angular in-edge fitting between the convolutions of<br />
the conduit.<br />
E. Liquid-tight Flexible Conduit Fittings: With threaded grounding cone, a steel, nylon,<br />
or equal plastic compression ring and a gland for tightening. Either steel or malleable<br />
iron only with insulated throats and male thread and locknut or male bushing with or<br />
without "O" ring seal.<br />
F. Connectors and Couplings: Compression type threadless fittings for rigid steel<br />
conduit or IMC not permitted. Set-screw type fittings for rigid aluminum conduit not<br />
permitted. EMT couplings and connectors either die-cast, steel, or malleable iron<br />
only, "Concrete-tight" or "Raintight", and either the gland and ring compression type<br />
or the stainless steel multiple point locking type. Connectors to have insulated<br />
throats. EMT fittings using set-screws or indentations as a means of attachment are<br />
not permitted.<br />
G. Bushings: Insulated type, designed to prevent abrasion of the wires without impairing<br />
the continuity of the conduit grounding system, for rigid steel conduit, IMC, and rigid<br />
aluminum conduit.<br />
H. Expansion Fittings: Each conduit that is buried in or rigidly secured to the building<br />
construction on opposite sides of a building expansion joint and each run of 100 feet<br />
of exposed conduit shall be provided with an expansion fitting. Expansion fittings<br />
shall be hot dipped galvanized malleable iron with factory-installed packing and a<br />
grounding ring.<br />
I. Sealing Fittings: Threaded, zinc or cadmium coated, cast or malleable iron type for<br />
steel conduits and threaded cast aluminum type for aluminum conduits. Fittings used<br />
to prevent passage of water vapor shall be of the continuous drain type.<br />
2.3 WIREWAYS: Square D Company square duct lay in type without knockouts with lengths<br />
and fittings hinged to provide an unobstructed wireway to "lay-in" conductors, use<br />
standard lengths. Field cuts permitted where absolutely necessary. Rust-inhibiting<br />
phosphatizing coating on sheet metal parts. Blue-gray baked enamel finish. Hardware<br />
plated to prevent cross fittings, transposition section, gussett brackets, nipples, pull boxes,<br />
RACEWAYS 16110-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
reducer fittings, wall flanges, panels or cabinet flanges, elbows, ceiling and wall support<br />
brackets and supporting hardware, etc.<br />
2.4 FIRE AND SMOKING PROOFING COMPOUNDS: Comply with Section 13900. No<br />
substitutions accepted.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION<br />
A. Conduit Systems: Rigid steel conduit, IMC, rigid non-metallic conduit or EMT unless<br />
otherwise specified.<br />
B. Aluminum Conduit: Aluminum conduit may be used only in dry locations above<br />
ground in sizes two inch or larger for Power and Communications Systems.<br />
C. Rigid Non-metallic Conduit: Install in accordance with manufacturer's<br />
recommendations. Joints shall be solvent welded. Field bends shall utilize approved<br />
bending equipment. Provide rigid steel elbows and rigid steel conduit risers on<br />
underground runs or runs in concrete. Provide a suitable bond wire in each run except<br />
low voltage communications runs. Underground runs under concrete slabs may be<br />
direct buried without concrete encasement if of approved type. Rigid non-metallic<br />
conduit may be installed outside the perimeter of the building only when encased in<br />
concrete. Concrete total encasement shall be a minimum of four inches around<br />
outside of conduit. Rigid non-metallic conduit is not permitted to be surface mounted<br />
in ducts, plenums or other air handling spaces. All 90 degree bends shall be rigid steel<br />
conduit. For encased conduits carrying 600 volts or more, the concrete shall be<br />
colored red using a permanent dye.<br />
D. EMT: Not permitted underground or embedded in concrete.<br />
E. Flexible Conduits: Use flexible conduit only for motor or equipment connections and<br />
then only to the extent of minimum lengths required for connections. Length shall not<br />
exceed 5 feet without approval from the Architect and Owner. Install flexible conduit<br />
connections at all resilient-mounted equipment. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit<br />
in exterior, wet or damp locations and for connections to wet pipe mechanical<br />
systems.<br />
F. Conduit in Concrete: Rigid steel conduit or rigid non-metallic conduit may not be<br />
embedded in concrete that is in direct contact with the earth. When embedded, the<br />
outside diameter shall not exceed one-third the thickness of the concrete slab, wall or<br />
beam, shall be located entirely within the center third of the member, and the lateral<br />
spacing of conduits shall not be less than three diameter unless otherwise prohibited<br />
by Architect.<br />
G. Steel Conduit in Ground: Rigid steel conduit that is not completely encased in<br />
concrete but is in contact with ground or on a vapor barrier shall be wrapped with<br />
Scotchwrap 51 half-lapped, or shall have an additional outside factory coating of<br />
polyvinyl chloride with a minimum coat thickness of 20 mils. Other PVC or<br />
Phenolic-resin epoxy coating material which is equally flexible and chemically<br />
resistant may be used providing approval by the Architect is obtained prior to the<br />
installation.<br />
RACEWAYS 16110-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
H. Exposed Conduits: Install exposed conduit systems parallel to or at right angles to the<br />
lines of the building. Right angle bends in exposed runs shall be made with standard<br />
elbows, screw jointed conduit fittings or conduit bent to radii not less than those of<br />
standard elbows.<br />
I. Concealed Conduits: Install conduit systems concealed unless otherwise noted.<br />
Conduit systems may be exposed in unfinished utility areas, ceiling cavities, and<br />
where specifically approved by the Architect. Install concealed conduit systems in as<br />
direct lines as possible.<br />
J. Conduit Openings: Protect all vertical runs of conduits or EMT terminating in the<br />
bottoms of boxes or cabinets, etc., from the entrance of foreign material prior to<br />
installation of conductors.<br />
K. Sealing Fittings: Install where required by the NEC, where conduits pass from warm<br />
to cold locations and where otherwise indicated.<br />
L. Sleeves for Conduit: Install sleeves for conduit where shown or as required. Conduit<br />
sleeves not used shall be plugged with recessed type plugs. Sleeve all conduit passing<br />
through walls. Sleeves that are used shall be sealed tight with rated fire and<br />
smokeproofing compounds as specified in Section 13900.<br />
3.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS<br />
A. Supports: Provide supports for horizontal steel conduits and EMT not more than eight<br />
feet apart with one support near each elbow or bend and one support within one foot<br />
of each coupling, including runs above suspended ceilings.<br />
B. Straps: Install one-hole pipe straps on conduits 1-1/2" or smaller. Install individual<br />
pipe hangers for conduits larger than 1-1/2". Spring steel fasteners with hanger rods<br />
may be used in dry locations in lieu of pipe straps.<br />
C. Trapezes: Install multiple (trapeze) pipe hangers, Uni-Strut or approved equal, where<br />
two or more horizontal conduits or EMT run parallel and at the same elevation.<br />
Secure each conduit or EMT to the horizontal hanger member by specifically<br />
designed and approved fasteners for the system used.<br />
D. Hanger Rods: Install 1/4" diameter or larger steel rods for trapezes, spring steel<br />
fasteners, clips and clamps. Wire or perforated strapping shall not be used for the<br />
support of any conduit or EMT.<br />
E. Fastening: Fasten pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete by means of inserts or<br />
expansion bolts, to brickwork by means of expansion bolts, and to hollow masonry by<br />
means of toggle bolts. Wooden plugs and shields shall not be used. Power-driven<br />
fasteners may be used to attach pipe straps and hanger rods to concrete where<br />
approved by the Architect. All conduits not embedded in concrete shall be firmly<br />
secured by means of pipe clamps, hangers, etc., equal to Caddy Fasteners of ERICO<br />
Products, Inc., or approved equal. Wire wrapped around conduits and supporting<br />
members will not be accepted. Conduit fastened to the wall above the ceiling is not<br />
acceptable.<br />
3.3 IDENTIFICATION: Identify per Section 16010, Paragraph 3.09F.<br />
RACEWAYS 16110-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3.4 CLOSING OF OPENINGS: Wherever slots, sleeves or other openings are provided in<br />
floors or walls for the passage of conduits or other forms of raceway, including bus ducts,<br />
such openings, if unused, or the spaces left in such openings, shall be closed in a manner<br />
approved by the Architect and per Section 13900. All closure material along with<br />
installation methods shall retain the fire rating integrity of the surface being penetrated.<br />
All openings in walls or floors remaining after removal of existing conduits, raceways, or<br />
bus ducts shall be closed in a like, approved manner.<br />
END OF SECTION 16110<br />
RACEWAYS 16110-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16120<br />
WIRES AND CABLES<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General.<br />
B. Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in this<br />
section.<br />
C. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
D. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 WIRES AND CABLES (600 VOLTS)<br />
A. Type:<br />
1. Conform to the applicable UL and IPCEA Standards for the use intended. Copper<br />
conductors with 600 volt insulation unless otherwise specified or noted on the<br />
Drawings. Stranded conductors for No. 6 and larger and where elsewhere<br />
specified or noted on the Drawings.<br />
2. All conductors shall be copper. Equivalent Aluminum conductors rated for the<br />
same ampacities and maximum 3% voltage drop may be utilized.<br />
3. The use of Romex cable is acceptable.<br />
B. Insulations: Type THWN insulation unless otherwise specified or noted on the<br />
Drawings. Type THWN minimum or type XHHW filled cross-linked polyethylene 90<br />
degree C. thermosetting insulation for conductors larger than No. 6 and elsewhere as<br />
required by NEC. 90 degrees C. minimum insulation within fixture wireways of<br />
fluorescent fixtures.<br />
C. Size: No. 12 minimum unless otherwise specified or noted on the Drawings. Not less<br />
than NEC requirements for the system to be installed.<br />
D. Color Coding: Phase, neutral and ground conductors color-coded in accordance with<br />
NEC. Connect all conductors of the same color to the same phase conductors.<br />
Phase A Phase B Phase C Neutral<br />
120/240V/1 Phase Black Red ----- White<br />
208Y/120V/3 Phase Black Red Blue White<br />
WIRES AND CABLES 16120-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
277/480V/3 Phase Brown Orange Yellow Gray<br />
Ground shall be Green for all systems.<br />
E. Conductors No. 12 and 10 shall be solid color compounded for the entire length and<br />
each like color shall be connected only to the particular phase throughout the project.<br />
Conductor sizes larger than No. 10 may be color-coded at each termination and in<br />
each box or enclosure with six inches of half-lapped 3/4" pressure sensitive, plastic<br />
tape of respective colors in lieu of solid color compound.<br />
2.2 CONTROL CONDUCTORS: Copper, minimum size No. 14 with 19/35 stranding, colorcoded<br />
filled cross linked polyethylene 90 degree C. 600 volt insulation and neoprene or<br />
equal outer jacket, equal to General Electric SI-58109 or SI-58742. Multi-conductor<br />
control cables shall be provided where more than three control conductors are installed in<br />
the same conduit between common terminations. Provide two spare conductors minimum<br />
in each control cable.<br />
2.3 COMMUNICATION AND ELECTRONIC CABLE: As required or specified in the<br />
section of these Specifications specifying the equipment. Splices shall be crimped or<br />
soldered or shall use an approved connector.<br />
2.4 VERTICAL CABLE SUPPORTS: Split wedge type supports which clamp each individual<br />
conductor and tightens due to weight of the cable shall be used without metallic sheath.<br />
2.5 CONNECTORS AND LUGS<br />
A. For copper conductors No. 6 and smaller: 3M Scotch-Lok or T & B Sta-Kin, or equal<br />
compression or indent type connectors with integral or separate insulating caps.<br />
B. For copper conductors larger than No. 6: Solderless, indent, hex screw, or bolt-type<br />
pressure connectors, properly taped or insulated.<br />
2.6 TAPE: Plastic tape, 8.5 mils minimum thickness, 1,000,000 megohms minimum<br />
insulation resistance, oil resistant vinyl backing, oil resistant acrylic adhesive, incapable of<br />
supporting combustion per ASTM D-1000. Equal to 3-M Super 88 Tape.<br />
2.7 FEEDER CIRCUITS: Single conductor feeder cables shall be of the size and type as<br />
indicated on the Drawings. Sizes shown are for copper conductors unless otherwise noted<br />
on Drawings.<br />
2.8 BRANCH CIRCUITS<br />
A. Branch circuits shall be No. 12 AWG copper minimum and shall be larger AWG size<br />
where indicated on Drawings. Where branch circuits exceed 100 ft. in length, the<br />
AWG size shall be increased to accommodate voltage drop.<br />
B. Branch circuits to all equipment, fixtures and outlets shall include a white neutral and<br />
green wire equipment ground.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
WIRES AND CABLES 16120-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3.1 WIRE AND CABLE TESTS (600 VOLTS): Measure the insulating resistance of service<br />
entrance conductors, feeder circuit conductors and service ground. Measurements shall be<br />
taken between conductors and between conductors and ground. Resistance shall be<br />
1,000,000 ohms or more when tested at 500 volts by megger without branch circuit loads.<br />
Tests and procedures shall meet the approval of the Architect, and shall be in accordance<br />
with the applicable IPCEA standards for the wires and cables to be installed. Furnish all<br />
instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing, and conduct tests in the<br />
presence of the Architect. Submit written reports of the tests and results when requested<br />
by the Architect.<br />
3.2 SPLICES (480 VOLTS AND UNDER): Permitted only at outlets or accessible enclosures.<br />
Conductor lengths shall be continuous from termination to termination without splices<br />
unless approved by the Architect.<br />
3.3 PULL WIRES: In each empty conduit, except underground conduits, install a plastic line<br />
having tensile strength of not less than 200 pounds. In each empty underground conduit,<br />
install a No. 10 AWG bare, hard-drawn copper pull wire or a plastic line having a tensile<br />
strength of not less than 200 pounds.<br />
3.4 RACEWAYS: Install in rigid conduit, EMT, or flexible metallic conduit, unless otherwise<br />
specified or noted on the Drawings.<br />
3.5 CABLE BENDS: Radius or bends not less than ten times the outer diameter of the cable.<br />
3.6 CONDUCTOR PULL: Conductors shall not be pulled into conduits until after all<br />
plastering or concrete work is completed and all conduits in which moisture collected<br />
have been swabbed out.<br />
3.7 FEEDER IDENTIFICATION: Tag feeder circuits in each enclosure with wrap-around<br />
circuit designation labels.<br />
3.8 CONNECTORS AND LUGS: Install with manufacturer's recommended tools and with<br />
the type and quantity of deformations recommended by manufacturer.<br />
3.9 BUNDLING: Conductors No. 10 and smaller shall be neatly and securely bundled and<br />
conductors larger than No. 10 shall be neatly and securely cabled in individual circuits,<br />
utilizing marlin twine, two-ply lacing or nylon straps.<br />
3.10 WIRING FOR LOW-VOLTAGE SPECIAL SYSTEMS<br />
A. General: For the purpose of this Specification, the word "cable" refers to both<br />
protected and unprotected cable installations. Special Systems refers to telephone,<br />
television, overhead paging, nurse call, building automation, security, data, and fire<br />
alarm systems.<br />
B. Products: Approved cabling shall be used per Section 16120, 2.03.<br />
C. Protection Requirements: All special systems cable runs inside walls and floors shall<br />
be in rigid conduit or BX cable per Section 16110. Cables placed in existing walls<br />
may be run in flex if approved by the Architect in advance. Runs exterior to walls and<br />
floors shall be as shown in the table below:<br />
WIRES AND CABLES 16120-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
System Requirement Reference Section<br />
Telephone Approved cable without additional 16740, 16117<br />
protection<br />
Television Approved cable without additional none<br />
protection<br />
Overhead Approved cable without additional 16770<br />
Paging protection<br />
Building Approved cable without additional Division 17<br />
Automation protection<br />
Fire Alarm Approved cable in rigid conduit 16721<br />
Security Approved BX cable or cable in rigid 16727<br />
conduit<br />
D. Routing: All cable runs shall be routed to avoid passing near sources of electrical<br />
noise such as florescent fixtures, power converters, etc. Cable runs shall be routed to<br />
avoid paralleling high voltage or high amperage electrical wiring. Cable runs<br />
paralleling telephone cables shall have a minimum of twelve inch separation. The<br />
Architect will authorize waivers (in writing) for specific cases where the twelve inch<br />
separation cannot be maintained.<br />
E. Horizontal Installation: Horizontal cable runs shall be installed per Section 16110,<br />
3.01 using appropriate stringers, J-hooks, cable trays, and any other devices necessary<br />
so no cables above the ceiling shall lay on the ceiling, electrical conduit, ceiling<br />
suspension system, piping, ductwork or on any other systems installed in the area.<br />
The cable shall not be supported by any of the above mentioned systems. All cable<br />
shall be installed in a neat and orderly manner, above or well clear of existing<br />
systems. Cable shall not be installed below existing systems or attached to existing<br />
systems except on specific written wavier by the Architect.<br />
F. Vertical Installation: All vertical cable runs shall be installed with appropriate strain<br />
reliefs.<br />
a. Cable Identification: Identify all cable per Section 16010, 3.09 F. Wiring color code<br />
shall be approved in advance by the Architect and maintained throughout the scope of<br />
the work.<br />
G. Record Drawings: Per Section 16010, 3.12, the Contractor shall keep accurate records<br />
of the cable installation and at the end of the Contract shall turn over to the Architect<br />
documentation showing the routing and labeling of all cabling. The format of this<br />
documentation shall be approved by the Architect prior to beginning work.<br />
H. Hazardous Materials: The Contractor shall not disturb any spray-on fire-proofing<br />
insulation on roof panels or supporting beams without the approval of the Architect<br />
WIRES AND CABLES 16120-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
and Owner. Some of this material contains asbestos and proper abatement procedures<br />
must be followed. Damage occurring to existing asbestos during the course of the<br />
work shall be repaired at the expense of the Contractor.<br />
I. Wall and Floor Penetrations: All penetrations of smoke and fire walls and floors shall<br />
be the responsibility of the Contractor. Conduits and cables penetrating these walls<br />
and floors shall be sleeved according Section to 16110, 3.01L, and sealed per Section<br />
16110, 3.04, both inside and out, with approved fire rated materials to prevent the<br />
passage of smoke. Fire and smoke penetrations caused by the removal of existing<br />
cable shall be properly sealed. The Contractor shall not penetrate any fire wall or<br />
structural member without specific authorization by the Architect.<br />
J. Existing Finishes: The Contractor shall be responsible to repair any damage to the<br />
finishes (paint, wallcoverings, tile, carpet, ceiling tile, etc.) caused by the Contractor<br />
or his Subs in the areas where he is working.<br />
K. Ceiling Tile: All ceiling tile removed by the Contractor for ceiling access shall be<br />
replaced at the end of each working day. Exceptions to this requirement must be<br />
approved by the Architect and Owner.<br />
L. Equipment Installation: The Contractor shall not install equipment in any equipment<br />
room, closet, or in ceiling spaces without authorization from the Architect and<br />
Owner. All equipment shall be installed in NEMA enclosures. All wiring entering<br />
these enclosures shall be properly secured and protected.<br />
M. Underground Installations: When installing or removing underground conduit<br />
installations, comply with Section 02200: Earthwork.<br />
N. Cable Tests: All cables shall be tested by the Contractor to insure there are no<br />
grounds, opens or shorts. The tests shall be done as appropriate to the type cable<br />
being installed and as agreed between the Owner and Contractor. Any deficiency<br />
pertaining to these requirements shall be corrected by the Contractor prior to final<br />
functional and operational tests of the system with no charge to the Owner.<br />
END OF SECTION 16120<br />
WIRES AND CABLES 16120-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16130<br />
OUTLET BOXES<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 OUTLET BOXES<br />
A. <strong>Construction</strong>: Zinc-coated or cadmium plated sheet steel boxes of a class to satisfy<br />
the conditions at each outlet except where unilet or condulet bodies are required.<br />
Knockout type with knockouts removed are required. Knockout type with knockouts<br />
removed only where necessary to accommodate the conduit entering. Square<br />
cornered, straight sided gang boxes, 4" octagon concrete rings and 4" octagon hung<br />
ceiling boxes with bars may be folded type; one-piece deep-drawn for all other boxes.<br />
B. Size: To accommodate the required number and sizes of conduits, wires and splices<br />
in accordance with NEC requirements, but not smaller than size shown or specified.<br />
Standard concrete type boxes not to exceed six inches deep except where necessary to<br />
permit entrance of conduits into sides of boxes without interference with reinforcing<br />
bars. Special purpose boxes shall be sized for the device or application indicated.<br />
C. Fixture Studs: 3/8" malleable iron fixture stud in outlet boxes for ceiling lighting<br />
fixtures and interior bracket lighting fixtures, other than lamp receptacles and drop<br />
cords.<br />
D. Exposed: Screw-joint type with gasketed weatherproof covers in locations exposed to<br />
the weather.<br />
E. Tile Boxes: Rectangular in shape with square corners and straight sides for<br />
receptacles and switches mounted in furniture cabinets or in glazed tile, concrete<br />
block, marble, brick, stone or wood walls. Install without plaster rings.<br />
F. Wall-Mounted Switch, Receptacle and Signal Boxes: Unless otherwise noted or<br />
specified not less 4" square by 1-1/2" deep for 2 devices and multi-gang boxes for<br />
more than 2 devices. Boxes for switches and receptacles on unfinished walls may be<br />
screw-joint type with covers to fit the devices.<br />
G. Wall-mounted Telephone Outlet Boxes: 4" square by 2-1/8" deep unless otherwise<br />
noted in the Drawings.<br />
OUTLET BOXES 16130-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
H. Light Fixture Boxes: 4" diameter by 1-1/2" deep minimum for ceiling and interior<br />
bracket fixtures with concealed conduits. Plaster covers for bracket fixtures to have<br />
3" diameter openings. Screw-joint boxes with canopy seat for ceiling and interior<br />
bracket fixtures with exposed conduits.<br />
I. Grounding Terminal: Provide a grounding terminal in each box containing a green<br />
equipment ground conductor, or serving motors, lighting fixtures or receptacles.<br />
Grounding terminal shall be green colored washer-in-head machine screw or<br />
grounding bushing.<br />
2.2 PULLBOXES: Minimum NEC requirements unless larger box is noted. As specified for<br />
outlet boxes with blank cover for pullboxes with internal volume not more than 150 cubic<br />
inches. As specified for cabinets or pullboxes with internal volume over 150 cubic inches,<br />
except covers to have same thickness as box with corrosion-resistant screw or bolt<br />
attachment.<br />
2.3 FLOOR BOXES: Heavy duty, cast, adjustable type, suitable for the device or application<br />
intended, unless noted. Provide metal carpet flanges in carpeted areas.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 OUTLET BOXES<br />
A. Installation: Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, outlet boxes shall<br />
be flush mounted and the front edges of the boxes or plaster covers shall be flush with<br />
the finished wall or ceiling line or if installed in walls and ceiling of incombustible<br />
construction, not more than 1/4" back of same. Mount boxes with the long axes of<br />
devices vertical, unless otherwise specified. Boxes in plastered walls and ceilings<br />
shall be provided with plaster covers. Box extensions and/or covers will not be<br />
permitted. Install in a rigid and satisfactory manner with suitable metal bar hanger,<br />
box cleats, adjustable box hangers, etc. Use wood screws on wood, expansion shields<br />
on masonry and machine screws on steel work. Boxes shall be secured to metal studs<br />
with sheet metal screws. Metal stud clips, such as Caddy “MSF”, are not acceptable.<br />
All boxes shall have far side box supports installed similar to Caddy #766.<br />
B. Mounting Heights: The mounting height of a wall-mounted outlet box shall be<br />
construed to mean the height from the finished floor to the horizontal centerline of the<br />
cover plate. On exposed tile, block or brick construction, mount outlet boxes at the<br />
nearest bed joint to the mounting height indicated. The height of all outlets shall be at<br />
the same height when there is a secondary type wall construction along with the<br />
masonry construction. The height in the masonry construction shall be the governing<br />
factor. Verify exact height of all boxes with Architect.<br />
C. Wall mounted switch, receptacle and signal outlets: On columns, pilasters, etc.,<br />
mount so the centers of the columns are clear for future installation of partitions.<br />
Install outlet boxes near doors or windows close to the trim. Install outlet boxes near<br />
the doors or the lock sides as shown on Architectural Drawings unless other locations<br />
are approved by the Architect.<br />
3.2 PULLBOXES: Provide additional pullboxes wherever necessary to meet requirements for<br />
maximum lengths of conduit runs and maximum numbers of bends as specified under<br />
"Conduit and Fittings".<br />
OUTLET BOXES 16130-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3.3 FLOOR BOXES: Install level with top covers adjusted flush with finished floor or floor<br />
tile.<br />
3.4 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS: Recessed or surface light fixtures in lay-in or accessible<br />
ceilings shall be connected with minimum 1/2" flexible metallic conduits, 4 to 6 feet long<br />
with grounding provisions.<br />
3.5 IDENTIFICATION: Identify all exposed junction and pullboxes according to the system<br />
carried by means of painted-on stencils or labels with legible letters and contrasting colors<br />
without abbreviations. In general, use yellow color. Painting shall be in accordance with<br />
DIVISION - FINISHES.<br />
END OF SECTION 16130<br />
OUTLET BOXES 16130-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16133<br />
CABINETS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GENERAL: Sheet steel except those exposed to wet or rain conditions that shall be<br />
raintight unless otherwise noted. Cabinets without through feeder wiring shall be arranged<br />
to provide a wiring gutter not less than 4" wide for branch circuit panelboards served by<br />
feeders up to 4/0. Panelboards served by feeders in excess of 4/0, up to and including 750<br />
MCM, shall be provided with top, bottom and side gutters 8" wide. Panelboard cabinets in<br />
all cases shall meet or exceed the minimum requirements of Article 373-6 of the National<br />
Electrical Code. Cabinets shall be of standard make and shall be equal in all respects to<br />
those bearing the Underwriters Laboratories label. Cabinets, including boxes shall be<br />
made of galvanized steel. All outside surfaces of trim and doors shall be given a factory<br />
finish coat of No. 61 ANSI gray paint, or approved manufacturer's standard. Cabinet for<br />
telephone and communications systems shall have 5/8" exterior grade, one-face B-grade<br />
or equal plywood backboard inside with maximum height and width.<br />
2.2 FEED THROUGH GUTTERS: Where feeders go through panelboard cabinets to serve<br />
panelboards above or beyond, the wiring gutters in panelboard cabinets shall be a<br />
minimum of 8" on sides, top and bottom.<br />
2.3 FRONTS: One piece sheet steel frame and a hinged door with catch and lock for flush<br />
cabinets. Telephone and signal cabinets for surface mounting shall be equipped with a<br />
door hinged directly to cabinet. One piece sheet steel with 3/4" flange with all edges<br />
shaped to cover edge of box. Fronts may be secured to box by means of flathead screws<br />
with captive nuts or clamps.<br />
2.4 DOORS: Doors shall close against a rabbet placed all around the inside edge of the frame<br />
with a close fitting joint between door and frame. The doors shall be fitted with substantial<br />
flush hinges placed not over 24" apart, nor more than 6" from ends of doors, and fastened<br />
permanently to the door and frame with flat-headed rivets or spot welds, or with concealed<br />
flush piano hinges. Fastening screws of fronts shall be set not over 24" apart. Doors over<br />
48" in height shall be equipped with a vault hinge and a three point catch.<br />
2.5 DOOR-IN-DOOR: Both surface and flush cabinets shall be door-in-door. The door over<br />
the interior of the cabinet shall be provided with hinges and combined lock and latch. The<br />
outside door over the cabinet gutters shall have a hinge on one side, and machine screws<br />
into threaded holes in the cabinet on the other three sides. In order to insure the rigidity of<br />
the outside door, surface type cabinets shall have a 1/2" deep lip bent over all around, with<br />
CABINETS 16133-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
the corners welded and grounded; or in the case of flush cabinets, a steel angle frame,<br />
equivalent in strength to the bent over lip, shall be welded to the inside of the door. The<br />
outside door shall be of such size as to allow a minimum of 2-3/4" opening to all four<br />
sides of the wiring gutter. All locks shall be keyed alike.<br />
2.6 LOCKS: Furnish each cabinet with a combination catch and flat key lock. The telephone,<br />
electrical and signal cabinet locks shall be fitted to separate keying for each system.<br />
Furnish two keys for each cabinet.<br />
2.7 GROUND BAR: Each cabinet for a panelboard shall be provided with a copper interior<br />
ground bar suitably braced or bolted to the cabinet wall. The equipment ground bar shall<br />
be equivalent in current carrying pressure connector terminations for the associated<br />
feeders, branch circuits, etc.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 CABINETS: Cables installed in the wiring gutters of cabinets shall be neatly bundled,<br />
routed and supported. Minimum bending radii as recommended by the cable manufacturer<br />
shall not be reduced. Lighting and power cabinets shall be installed with tops 6'-6" above<br />
floor and bottoms not less than 12" above floor. The height above floor of the highest over<br />
current device handle shall not exceed 6'-6".<br />
END OF SECTION 16133<br />
CABINETS 16133-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16140<br />
WIRING DEVICES<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 SNAP SWITCHES: Unless otherwise specified each snap switch (flush tumbler-toggle)<br />
shall be of the AC general use type for mounting in a single-gang spacing, fully rated 20<br />
amperes, 120-277 volts, conforming to minimum requirements of the latest revision of the<br />
Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., UL 20, Fifth Edition, Standard Snap Switches and further<br />
requirements herein specified. Specification grade, heavy duty, single pole, three way or<br />
four way, of the maintained momentary or lock type as indicated on the Drawings. Ivory<br />
color handles unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Silver or silver alloy contacts,<br />
AC 120/277 volt general use snap switches shall be capable of withstanding tests as<br />
outlined in NEMA Publication WDI-1956, and shall be as follows unless otherwise noted:<br />
20A120- Hubbell Bryant P & S<br />
277V AC<br />
1P 1221-I-IV 4901-I-IV 20-AC-1-I-IV<br />
2P 1222-I-IV 4902-I-IV 20-AC-2-I-IV<br />
3 way 1223-I-IV 4903-I-IV 20-AC-2-I-IV<br />
3 way 1224-I-IV 4904-I-IV 20-AC-3-I-IV<br />
2.2 RECEPTACLE<br />
A. General: Configuration and requirements for all connector or outlet receptacles shall<br />
be in accordance with NEMA Publication WDI-1965, Part 3 and Part 10. Single or<br />
duplex as shown or noted on Drawings. Ivory color unless otherwise noted on the<br />
drawings. Double grip contacts for each prong.<br />
B. Grounding Type: All receptacles shall be grounding type with a green colored<br />
hexagonal equipment ground screw of adequate size to accommodate an insulated<br />
grounding jumper (based on Table 250-95 of the NEC with minimum size No. 14<br />
AWG). Grounding terminals of all receptacles shall be internally connected to the<br />
receptacle mounting yoke.<br />
WIRING DEVICES 16140-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Unless otherwise noted, receptacles shall be as follows:<br />
Type Hubbell Bryant P&S<br />
Hospital Grade Duplex – 20 amp 8300-I 8300-I 9200-HGI<br />
Spec. Grade Duplex - 15 amp 5262-I 5262-I 5262-I<br />
Spec. Grade Duplex - 20 amp 5362-I 5362-I 5362-I<br />
GFCI, Hospital Grade Duplex - 15 amp<br />
GF-8200- GFR82FT- 1591-FHGI<br />
I I<br />
GFCI, Hospital Grade Duplex - 20 amp<br />
GF-8300- GFR83FT- 2091-FHGI<br />
I I<br />
GFCI, Spec. Grade Duplex - 15 amp<br />
GF-5262- GFR52- 1591-RI<br />
I FT-I<br />
GFCI, Spec. Grade Duplex - 20 amp<br />
GF-5362- GFR53FT- 2091-FI<br />
I I<br />
Isolated Gnd., Orange, Spec. Grade Duplex - 15 IG-5261 5261-IG IG5266-SS<br />
amp<br />
Isolated Gnd., Orange, Spec. Grade Duplex - 20 IG-5361 5361-IG IG5366-SS<br />
amp<br />
Isolated Gnd., Orange, Hospital Grade Duplex - 15 IG-8210 8210-IG IG9201-HG<br />
amp<br />
Isolated Gnd., Orange, Hospital Grade Duplex - 20 IG-8310 8310-IG IG9301-HG<br />
amp<br />
Safety Receptacle, Duplex SG-62HI SG-62 SG-62<br />
D. Special: Receptacles for special applications shall be as indicated on the Drawings.<br />
2.3 PLUG CAPS: Except for duplex receptacles and cleaning combination receptacles one<br />
matching plug cap shall be provided for each receptacle. No plug caps are required for<br />
duplex receptacles.<br />
2.4 DEVICE PLATES<br />
A. General: Provide device plates for each switch, receptacle, signal and telephone outlet<br />
and special purpose outlet. Do not use sectional gang plates. Provide multi-gang<br />
outlet plates for multi-gang boxes. Plates shall be Stainless Steel unless otherwise<br />
noted.<br />
1. Exposed: Plates for exposed joint fittings shall match the fittings with edges of<br />
plates flush with edges of fittings. Heavy cadmium steel plates with gasket. Plates<br />
for cast type boxes at locations subject to wet or rain conditions shall be of cast,<br />
vapor tight type. Provide hinged lift covers for devices.<br />
2. Communication: Plates for telephone and signal outlets shall each have a 3/8"<br />
bushed opening in the center. Wall plates for push-button and buzzer outlets shall<br />
have openings to suit the push buttons and buzzers.<br />
3. Plates for special purpose outlets shall be of a design suitable for the particular<br />
applications.<br />
2.5 CLOCK OUTLETS: Flush, single receptacle, regressed in Stainless Steel device plate.<br />
WIRING DEVICES 16140-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2.6 REMOTELY CONTROLLED SWITCHES OR RELAYS: Electro-magnetically operated,<br />
mechanically held unless otherwise required. Rugged construction, substantially made,<br />
conforming to NEMA and IEEE test standards for industrial type power relays and the<br />
requirements of UL 508, Standards for Safety Lighting Control Equipment. Ratings as<br />
indicated on the drawings, suitable for the application. Contacts shall be double break,<br />
renewable, solid wiping type, silver to silver or silver Tungsten alloy, self aligning, quick<br />
make, quick break, with a minimum inductive load rating of 20 amps. Relays shall as<br />
manufactured by Allen-Bradley, ASCO, Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Square D, or<br />
Cutler-Hammer, equal to ASCO mounting and enclosure.<br />
2.7 MOMENTARY CONTACT SWITCHES: Tumbler type single pole double throw<br />
momentary contact for 3 wire connection, with OFF position when tumbler handle is in<br />
the center, similar in appearance to the conventional snap switch. Handle or key complete<br />
as indicated on the Drawings. 20 ampere at 120-277 volts for control of 30, 60, or 100<br />
ampere remotely controlled switches or relays rated 101 amperes and above. Provide<br />
cover plates to match the finish of other conventional snap switch plates in the area.<br />
Provide nameplate to identify the circuit or equipment controlled.<br />
2.8 TIME SWITCHES: Automatic, electronic, solid-state, single-throw, single pole, double<br />
pole or triple pole in a supplied or NEMA-1 general-purpose enclosure as indicated on the<br />
drawings. Provide 24-hour operation with at least three ON-OFF operations per 24 hours<br />
period with provisions to eliminate operations on any day or days. 30 amperes heavy-duty<br />
contact at the voltage indicated on the Drawings. Provide battery backup power supply<br />
with automatic restoration of the normal power supply.<br />
2.9 LIGHTING CONTROL CENTER: Photo-time control of a 7 day time switch, with<br />
electronic, solid-state, time switch preventing energization of the circuit for pre-set<br />
periods for each day of the week, with provision for omitting selected days. Each control<br />
circuit shall contain a manual selector to override automatic function. Contractor circuits<br />
shall be capable of 120 amperes in-rush at 120 volt and 55 amperes at 208/277 volt.<br />
Control center shall be capable of energizing branch circuits by photo-cell control when<br />
natural lighting falls below 25 foot candles.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 DEVICE PLATES: Install with alignment tolerance of 1/16" and all edges in continuous<br />
contact with wall surfaces.<br />
END OF SECTION 16140<br />
WIRING DEVICES 16140-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16150<br />
MOTORS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GENERAL: Motors will be furnished with the equipment they are intended to operate and<br />
therefore generally will be furnished under other sections of these specifications. Furnish<br />
nameplates indicating manufacturer, horsepower, phase, cycle, voltage, RPM, type of<br />
motor windings, NEMA design and type of enclosure.<br />
2.2 SIZE: Adequate for the duty to be performed without exceeding their full rated load or<br />
safe operating temperature when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacities<br />
with ambient temperatures and altitude compensation simulating actual job conditions.<br />
2.3 TYPE: Suitable for the application but not less than Class A insulation and continuous<br />
duty classification, based on 40 degrees C. ambient temperature with drip proof frames<br />
and totally enclosed for exterior use. Conform to design, construction and performance<br />
requirements of NEMA and the Rotating Electrical Machinery Standards of ANSI.<br />
2.4 VOLTAGE RATING: NEMA Standard to correspond to circuit voltage serving the motor.<br />
Motors operating on 208 volt systems shall be rated 200 volts or shall be specifically<br />
wound for the voltage. Rated and covered by the plus or minus 10% rated voltage<br />
warranty for 208 volts.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION: In accordance with related work specified in other sections of these<br />
Specifications and standard industry practice.<br />
END OF SECTION 16150<br />
MOTORS 16150-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16155<br />
MOTOR STARTERS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
D. Controls and Instrumentation: Section 16900.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS: Submit complete shop drawings, control diagrams and descriptive<br />
literature. Refer to Section 16900 for additional submittal requirements.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GENERAL: Starters shall be as specified in this section unless modified by other sections<br />
of these Specifications or by details or control diagrams on the Drawings. Provide NEMA<br />
Type I general purpose enclosures, unless otherwise noted or required, with doors<br />
arranged for padlocking. Equipment starters with contactors to break each ungrounded<br />
line to the motor. Starters shall be as manufactured by General Electric, ITE, Square D, or<br />
Cutler-Hammer.<br />
2.2 RATING: Each starter shall have a horsepower rating not less than the rating of the motor<br />
it controls. Starters and all their related component parts shall be designed and properly<br />
coordinated for the rating and characteristics of the motors furnished under the various<br />
sections of the specifications. Motor starters and overcurrent devices shall be ambient<br />
temperature compensated.<br />
2.3 OVERLOADS: Provide ambient temperature compensated thermal overcurrent devices in<br />
each ungrounded phase. Provide a suitable reset device for resetting over current trip on<br />
the starter front. Overcurrent device ratings shall not exceed code maximums and shall be<br />
as recommended by the motor manufacturer for the application.<br />
2.4 CONTROLS<br />
A. Control circuit conductors shall be grounded in accordance with the NEC and shall be<br />
arranged so that an accidental ground will not start the motor.<br />
B. Energy for control circuits and indicating lights shall be 120 volts.<br />
C. Provide manual start-stop pushbuttons mounted in starter case unless automatic<br />
devices are shown elsewhere on Drawings or specified.<br />
D. Automatic control devices such as thermostats, float or pressure switches may control<br />
the starting and stopping of motors directly, provided the devices used are designed<br />
MOTOR STARTERS 16155-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
for the purpose and have an adequate horsepower rating. When the automatic control<br />
device does not have such a rating, a magnetic starter shall be used, with the<br />
automatic control device actuating the pilot control circuit.<br />
E. Starters controlled by automatic devices shall be provided with hand-off-automatic<br />
selector switch mounted on starter case and connected so motor can be manually<br />
operated regardless of the position of the automatic control device. Selector switch<br />
shall not be connected to supersede any safety device or safety interlock.<br />
F. Provide starters with a sufficient number of auxiliary contact (N.O. and/or N.C.) to<br />
afford the control and interlocking required. Provide additional relays if required to<br />
obtain the correct control.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 GENERAL: Provide each motor with a motor starter of proper design to meet the<br />
requirements of the motor and drive.<br />
3.2 INSTALLATION: Install and connect in accordance with related work specified in other<br />
sections of these Specifications and standard industry practice.<br />
END OF SECTION 16155<br />
MOTOR STARTERS 16155-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16160<br />
PANELBOARDS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Cabinets: Section 16133.<br />
D. Motor and Circuit Disconnects: Section 16170.<br />
E. Fuses: Section 16181.<br />
F. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS: Submit complete shop drawings with outline dimensions, descriptive<br />
literature and complete description of the frame size, trip setting, class and interrupting<br />
rating of all overcurrent devices. Identify available space.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GENERAL: Dead front, safety type with voltage ratings as scheduled. Panelboards shall<br />
be of the type required for the short circuit and duty ratings indicated on the drawings.<br />
Panelboards shall be as manufactured by General Electric, ITE, Square D, or Cutler-<br />
Hammer and shall be circuit breaker or fusible type as scheduled.<br />
2.2 CABINETS: Each panelboard shall be enclosed in a single sheet metal cabinet with front<br />
doors, catches, locks, etc., as specified in Section 16133, Cabinets.<br />
2.3 DOOR-IN-DOOR: Both surface and flush panels shall be door-in-door. The door over the<br />
interior of the panel shall be provided with hinge and combined lock and latch. The<br />
outside door over the panel gutters shall have a hinge on one side and machine screws into<br />
threaded holes in the panelboard cabinet on the other three sides. In order to insure the<br />
rigidity of the outside door, surface type panels shall have a 1/2" deep lip bent over all<br />
around with the corners welded and ground; or, in the case of flush panels a steel angle<br />
frame, equivalent in strength to the bent over lip shall be welded to the inside of the door.<br />
The outside door shall be of such size as to allow a minimum of 2-3/4" opening to all four<br />
sides of the wiring gutter or as required by NEC All locks shall be keyed alike.<br />
2.4 BREAKERS: Molded-case or combination molded-case and current limited fuses as<br />
scheduled or required. Provide quick make and quick break toggle mechanism, inverse<br />
time trip characteristics and trip free operation on overload or short circuit. Automatic<br />
tripping shall be indicated by a handle position between the manual OFF and ON position.<br />
Provide a trip element for each pole, a common trip bar for all poles and a single molded<br />
insulating material handle. Handle ties will not be accepted. Adjustable magnetic trip<br />
PANELBOARDS 16160-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
devices shall be set at the factory to the low trip setting. Provide breaker frame sizes as<br />
required for the continuous rating or the interrupting capacity, whichever is larger.<br />
2.5 BOLTED TYPE: Circuit breaker current-carrying connections to the bus shall be of the<br />
bolted type, factory assembled. Stab in type not permitted. Provide bus bars for three<br />
phase panelboards of the sequence phased type connection and arranged for three-phase,<br />
four wire mains, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings.<br />
2.6 FUSIBLE SWITCH UNITS: Quick make, quick break type with external operation handle<br />
suitable for padlocking in OFF position. Provide interlock to prevent opening cover when<br />
switch is in ON position unless interlock release is operated. Provide switch frame sizes as<br />
required for the continuous rating or the interrupting capacity, whichever is larger. Fusible<br />
panelboards shall be UL rated and listed for service entrance where applicable.<br />
2.7 SPACE ONLY: Where "Space Only" is noted on the drawings, provide necessary<br />
connectors, mounting brackets, etc., for the future insertion of an overcurrent device.<br />
2.8 DIRECTORIES: Provide circuit directories on the inside face of the door of each panel.<br />
2.9 LABELS: Labels for identifying the breakers shall be engraved laminated plastic strips<br />
attached by screws or phenolic buttons or small window frame type. Adhesive stick on<br />
labels alone will not be acceptable unless specifically approved.<br />
2.10 SKIRTS: Where noted on the Drawings panelboards shall be skirted with complete metal<br />
enclosures and barriers separating the panel interior.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 DIRECTORIES: Provide typewritten circuit descriptions referencing permanent room<br />
numbering assigned in lieu of the room numbering shown on the Drawings inserted in<br />
plastic holder. Text shall be able to be read entirely without moving the card.<br />
3.2 CIRCUIT NUMBERING: Circuit numbering shown on the Drawings is based on pole<br />
position in the panelboard and not consecutive numbering.<br />
3.3 PHASE ROTATION: Phase A, left bus; phase B, center bus; phase C, right bus (front<br />
viewing).<br />
END OF SECTION 16160<br />
PANELBOARDS 16160-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16170<br />
MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 DISCONNECTING MEANS<br />
A. Safety Switches: Fusible or non-fusible Type HD quick break safety switches of the<br />
sizes and capacities indicated or required. Raintight enclosures at locations exposed<br />
to the weather.<br />
B. Separately Enclosed Motor Snap Switches: Motor snap switches may be used for<br />
motor disconnect means, controller and motor overcurrent protection when<br />
applicable. These devices shall be horsepower rated and may contain motor running<br />
overcurrent protection.<br />
C. Safety Type Disconnecting Switches: Heavy duty, quick make, quick break type, 250<br />
or 600 volt rating as required for the application. Number of poles and ampacity as<br />
noted or required by code. Fusible where noted with fuse clips suitable for Buss<br />
Fusetron Class R Fuses. Short circuit rating of 200,000 RMS Amperes with CV Class<br />
R rejection feature installed in fuseholders. NEMA 1 enclosures for dry locations.<br />
NEMA 3 R enclosures for wet locations or at exposed weather locations unless<br />
otherwise noted.<br />
2.2 MANUFACTURERS<br />
A. General Electric, ITE, Square D, or Cutler-Hammer.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 DISCONNECT MEANS: Install in each location indicated on the Drawings and<br />
elsewhere as required by NEC.<br />
END OF SECTION 16170<br />
MOTOR AND CIRCUIT DISCONNECTS 16170-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16181<br />
FUSES<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Motor and Circuit Disconnect: Section 16170.<br />
D. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS:<br />
2.1 FUSES<br />
A. General: Dual element, time delay type, based on heavy service, Buss Fusetron, or<br />
equal, unless otherwise noted or required for installation.<br />
B. Current Limiting Fuses: Provide where indicated on the Drawings. For individual<br />
motor circuit protection, provide fuse sized approximately 125 percent of full load<br />
current with 100,000 amperes interrupting capacity. For non-motor feeder protection<br />
in conjunction with fused switches, install NEMA Class L fuses sized 125 percent of<br />
load current or as required for coordination with air and molded case circuit breakers,<br />
shall be furnished by the circuit breaker manufacturer.<br />
C. Above 600 amps; Class L, "Hi-Cap" as manufactured by Bussman or approved<br />
equivalent by Chase-Shawmut or Federal Pacific.<br />
D. Below 600 amps, as required by short circuit duty, Class K-1, "Limitron" or class<br />
K-5, "Low Peak" or Class K-5, "Fusetron" as manufactured by Bussman or approved<br />
equivalent by Chase-Shawmut or Federal Pacific.<br />
E. All switches having current limiting fuses installed shall have a Lamicoid nameplate<br />
with white lettering on red background reading:<br />
WARNING, REPLACE ONLY WITH CURRENT<br />
LIMITING FUSES AS ORIGINALLY INSTALLED<br />
2.2 COORDINATION: Coordinate the low voltage fuses required for the project to provide<br />
basic selective protection and properly coordinate with the other associated protective<br />
equipment.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
FUSES 16181-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3.1 COORDINATION: Coordinate the low voltage fuses required for the project to provide<br />
basic selection protection and properly coordinate with the other associated protective<br />
equipment.<br />
3.2 SPARE FUSES: Furnish one complete spare set of each size of fuses. Deliver to the<br />
Owner in the original boxes. It shall consist of 100% fuse replacement for all fuses<br />
required for panelboards and safety switches.<br />
END OF SECTION 16181<br />
FUSES 16181-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16190<br />
RELAYS AND CONTACTORS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Requirements: Section 16010.<br />
C. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
D. Controls and Instrumentation: Section 16900.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GENERAL: Electromagnetically operated, mechanically held unless otherwise required.<br />
Rugged construction substantially made conforming to NEMA and IEEE test standards<br />
for industrial type power relays and the requirements of UL 508, Standards for Safety<br />
Industrial Control Equipment. Relays and contactors shall be as manufactured by General<br />
Electric, ITE, Square D, or Cutler-Hammer.<br />
2.2 RATINGS: As indicated on the Drawings or required, suitable for the application.<br />
2.3 CONTACTS: Double break, renewable, solid wiping type, silver to silver or silver<br />
tungsten alloy, self aligning, quick make, quick break, with a minimum inductive load<br />
rating adequate for the load controlled, but not less than 25 amps.<br />
2.4 ENCLOSURES: NEMA 1 for surface mounting in dry locations. Flush mounted with<br />
hinged door and flush latch where indicated. Sound-absorbing enclosures where located in<br />
or adjacent to occupied areas.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION: Install and connect in accordance with related work specified in other<br />
sections of these Specifications.<br />
END OF SECTION 16190<br />
REALYS AND CONTACTORS 16190-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16450<br />
GROUNDING<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Raceways: Section 16110.<br />
D. Outlet Boxes: Section 16130.<br />
E. Wires and Cables: Section 16120.<br />
F. Wiring Devices: Section 16140.<br />
G. Cabinets: Section 16133.<br />
H. Motor and Circuit Disconnects: Section 16170.<br />
I. Panelboards: Section 16160.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 Materials, equipment and devices related to the grounding system are specified under<br />
other sections of these Specifications.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 GENERAL: Install two separate grounding systems, a service grounding system and an<br />
equipment grounding system. The service equipment, conduit systems, supports, cabinets,<br />
equipment, and neutral conductor shall be grounded in accordance with the minimum code<br />
requirements and as further indicated on the Drawings or as specified. Connect the two<br />
grounding systems together only at the main service equipment and at the secondary<br />
terminals of transformers creating separately derived distribution systems such as dry-type<br />
transformers.<br />
3.2 SERVICE GROUNDING SYSTEM<br />
A. General: The service grounding system is provided for the AC service neutral ground.<br />
Current return conductors, such as neutrals of the service entrance, feeder circuits and<br />
branch circuits, shall not be used for equipment grounding. Care must be exercised to<br />
insure that neutral bars are not bonded to the enclosures of panelboards, etc., which<br />
are not part of the main service equipment. Except for separately derived systems, the<br />
neutral conductors shall be grounded only in the main service equipment.<br />
GROUNDING 16450-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point in the main service<br />
equipment by interconnecting the insulated neutral bus (or bar), the uninsulated<br />
equipment ground bus (or bar), and service grounding electrode conductor.<br />
C. Neutral Disconnecting Means: Install a neutral disconnecting means in the main<br />
service equipment for disconnecting and isolating the neutral bus from the common<br />
ground. The disconnecting means may be disconnecting links in the interconnection<br />
between the insulated neutral and uninsulated equipment ground.<br />
D. Neutral Bars: Provide an insulated neutral bar, separate from the uninsulated<br />
equipment ground bar, in all panelboards, transformers, starters, disconnect switches,<br />
cabinets, etc., which have neutral connections.<br />
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM<br />
A. General: Provide a complete equipment grounding system in accordance with the<br />
minimum code requirements and as further indicated on the Drawings or specified.<br />
The equipment ground (green conductor) consists of metallic connections to ground<br />
of non-current-carrying metal parts of the wiring system or apparatus connected to<br />
the system. The primary purpose of equipment grounding is to provide greater safety<br />
by limiting the electrical potential between non-current-carrying parts of the system<br />
and to provide a low impedance path to ground for possible ground fault currents.<br />
B. Common Ground Point: Establish one common ground point as specified elsewhere<br />
in this section of the specifications for interconnection of the equipment grounding<br />
system and the service grounding electrode conductor.<br />
C. Service Equipment Enclosure: Bond the enclosure of the main service equipment to<br />
the uninsulated equipment ground box (or bar) with a conductor or bar sized for 50%<br />
of the largest service overcurrent device.<br />
D. Ground Bar: Provide an uninsulated equipment ground bar, separate from any<br />
insulated neutral bar, in all panelboards, starters, disconnect switches, cabinets, etc.<br />
for grounding the enclosure and for connecting other equipment ground conductors.<br />
The ground bar shall be an integrally mounted and braced bus bar in panelboards or a<br />
separately mounted bar adequately braced or bolted to the enclosure after thoroughly<br />
cleaning both surfaces to assure good contact. Provide solderless pressure connectors<br />
for all conductor terminations. Number and size of pressure connectors on equipment<br />
grounding bars as required for the termination of equipment grounding conductors. In<br />
addition to the active circuits, provide pressure connectors for all three-phase spares<br />
and spaces.<br />
E. Conduits: Where metallic conduits terminate without mechanical connection to a<br />
metallic housing of electrical equipment by means of lock nut and bushings, provide<br />
ground bushing connected with a bare copper conductor to the ground bar in the<br />
electrical equipment. Metallic conduits containing ground wiring only shall be<br />
bonded to the ground wire at both conduit entrance and exit. Install grounding<br />
conductor in each nonmetallic conduit or duct except those used for telephone, sound,<br />
or low voltage signals and in all flexible conduit that does not have a built-in ground<br />
conductor. Bond the conductor at both ends to the equipment grounding system.<br />
F. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding<br />
conductor for each single or three phase feeder and each branch circuit with a three<br />
phase protective device. Provide a separate green insulated equipment grounding<br />
GROUNDING 16450-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
conductor for single phase branch circuits where indicated on the Drawings. Install<br />
the required grounding conductor in the common conduit or raceway with the related<br />
phase and/or neutral conductors and connect to the box or cabinet grounding<br />
terminal. Where there are parallel feeders installed in more than one raceway each<br />
raceway shall have a green insulated equipment ground conductor installed.<br />
G. Devices: Install a minimum No. 12 green insulated equipment bonding conductor<br />
from a grounding terminal in the respective outlet or junction box to the green ground<br />
terminal of all receptacles and through flexible conduit to all light fixture housings<br />
and other fixed equipment.<br />
H. Motors: Install a separate green insulated equipment grounding conductor from the<br />
equipment ground bar in the motor control center or separate starter through the<br />
conduit and flexible conduit to the ground terminal in the connection box mounted on<br />
the motor. Install the grounding conductor in the common conduit or raceway with<br />
the related motor circuit conductors.<br />
3.4 SEPARATELY DERIVED SYSTEMS: Transformers creating separately derived<br />
distribution systems, such as dry type transformers, shall utilize the equipment ground<br />
bars in the transformer enclosure for both secondary equipment ground and secondary<br />
neutral ground with separate grounding conductor extended to an approved ground<br />
electrode.<br />
3.5 GROUNDING ELECTRODES: Two service ground electrodes shall be utilized. One<br />
shall be the main cold water metallic water piping system and the other shall be a made<br />
electrode consisting of not less than twenty feet of bare copper conductor encased along<br />
the bottom of a concrete foundation footing which is in direct contact with the earth (NEC<br />
250-H). Make the connections to the cold water pipe inside the building at the point of<br />
entrance. The grounding electrode for separately derived systems shall be approved for the<br />
application.<br />
3.6 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS: The grounding conductors for both service ground<br />
electrodes shall be insulated or bare copper, sized in accordance with NEC 250-94,<br />
including the conductor for the made electrode. The conductors shall be continuous<br />
without joint or splice and shall be installed in conduit with the conduit bonded to the<br />
conductor at each end. Install the conductor to permit the shortest and the most direct path<br />
and terminate in the main service equipment on the common ground point. Equipment<br />
grounding conductors shall be green insulated conductors equivalent to the insulation on<br />
the associated phase conductor, but not less than Type TW. The equipment grounding<br />
conductor or straps shall be sized in accordance with NEC. Where one feeder serves a<br />
series of panelboards of transformers the equipment grounding conductor shall be<br />
continuous without splices. Grounding conductors shall not be installed through metal<br />
sheathed holes. All connections shall be available for inspection and maintenance.<br />
3.7 GROUND CONNECTIONS: Clean surfaces thoroughly before applying ground lugs or<br />
clamps. If surface is coated the coating must be removed down to the bare metal. After the<br />
coating has been removed apply a non-corrosive approved compound to cleaned surface<br />
and install lugs or clamps. Where galvanizing is removed from metal it shall be painted or<br />
touched up with "Galvanoz", or equal.<br />
3.8 TESTS<br />
GROUNDING 16450-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
A. Remove all jumpers between the equipment ground busses and the service (neutral)<br />
ground busses in the main service panel and all separately derived systems. See<br />
Section 3.02.C.<br />
B. For each grounding system, using a megger, measure the resistance between the two<br />
ground busses at the panel where the jumper was installed. The resistance shall be<br />
greater than 10 megohms.<br />
C. Re-connect the equipment and service bus jumpers on all systems. See Section<br />
3.02.C.<br />
D. For each grounding system, using a megger, measure the resistance between the two<br />
ground busses at the panel farthest away (electrically) from the panel where the<br />
jumper was installed. The resistance shall be less than 5 ohms.<br />
E. Submit a written report to the Engineer for approval. The service shall not be<br />
energized if the test shows more than 5 ohms, unless approved by the Architect.<br />
END OF SECTION 16450<br />
GROUNDING 16450-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16470<br />
DISTRIBUTION CIRCUITS<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Raceways: Section 16110.<br />
D. Wires and Cables: Section 16120.<br />
E. Boxes: Section 16130.<br />
F. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Submit complete shop drawings with outline dimensions, wiring diagrams, catalog<br />
cut, and descriptive literature.<br />
B. Submit three copies of complete operating and maintenance manuals of the<br />
component devices, assemblies, and complete switchboard.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GENERAL: Provide concrete pad-mounted fusible switchboard as indicated on the<br />
Drawings and further specified herein. Complete unit designed, tested and assembled in<br />
accordance with the applicable standards on ANSI, IEEE, and NEMA. All equipment<br />
shall have all necessary accessories required for a complete installation. All equipment<br />
shall be fully compatible with the system to which it is connected.<br />
2.2 RATING: Switchboards to be rated as shown on the Drawings. Switchboard to be braced<br />
for a minimum fault current rating of 100,000 AIC or greater.<br />
2.3 BUS BARS: Copper of the ampacity indicated on the Drawings. Provide separate neutral<br />
and ground bus bars and enclosure bond as specified in the Section 16450.<br />
2.4 INSTRUMENTS: Provide an ammeter and ammeter selector switch with OFF position<br />
and position for each phase. Provide a voltmeter and voltmeter selector switch with OFF<br />
position for reading phase-to-neutral voltage of each phase and phase-to-phase voltage of<br />
each pair of phases. Provide flush meters mounted in the front of the switchboard, 4" size<br />
with conventional scales. Provide metering instrument transformers as required.<br />
2.5 MANUFACTURERS: Cutler-Hammer, GE, Square D as specified on the Drawings.<br />
DISTRIBUTION CIRCUITS 16470-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
2.6 SPACES: Where spaces are specified or otherwise required, the switchboard shall be fully<br />
configured to receive future overcurrent devices. Spaces shall be sized for 200 amps, 3<br />
poles, unless otherwise noted.<br />
2.7 NAMEPLATES: Provide engraved laminated plastic nameplates for all switches, meter,<br />
spaces, etc. Letters shall be not less than 5/16" high with legend as directed and approved.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION: Install in accordance with manufacturer's approved shop drawings.<br />
3.2 PHASE ROTATION: A-B-C, left to right, when the panel is viewed from the front.<br />
END OF SECTION 16470<br />
DISTRIBUTION CIRCUITS 16470-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16485<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
ELEVATOR WIRING<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Raceways: Section 16110.<br />
D. Wires and Cables: Section 16120.<br />
E. Outlet Boxes: Section 16130.<br />
F. Cabinets: Section 16133.<br />
G. Wiring Devices: Section 16140.<br />
H. Panelboards: Section 16160.<br />
I. Motor and Circuit Disconnects: Section 16170.<br />
J. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
K. Controls and Instrumentation: Section 16900.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS: The materials, equipment and devices related to elevator wiring are<br />
specified under other sections of these specifications. Motors, generators, starters,<br />
controllers, and signal circuits will be furnished and installed by the elevator contractor.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 COORDINATION<br />
A. Coordinate with the elevator manufacturer to determine the extent and arrangement of<br />
the elevator installation.<br />
1. Provide feeder and branch circuit overcurrent protection and disconnect means for<br />
each elevator.<br />
2. Provide power circuits to each elevator controller.<br />
3. Deleted<br />
4. Provide outlets for 120 volt, emergency lighting, telephone and overhead paging<br />
for elevator cars. These outlets shall be located per the equipment installers<br />
direction.<br />
5. Provide duplex, emergency receptacle and incandescent light with wire guard in<br />
each elevator pit, with light switch at pit access.<br />
END OF SECTION 16485<br />
ELEVATOR WIRING 16485-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16501<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
LAMPS<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
C. Lighting Equipment: Section 16500.<br />
D. Ballast and Accessories: Section 16502.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 FLUORESCENT LAMPS: Fluorescent lamps shall be GE 3000 degree K/SP30 or<br />
approved equal, energy saving lamps matched for usage to energy saving ballast. The<br />
ballast/lamp system shall be capable of providing 6000 initial lumens for two lamps with<br />
75 watts system input.<br />
2.2 INCANDESCENT LAMPS: Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted, medium base,<br />
extended service, 130 volt unless otherwise noted. PAR or R lamps shall be provided if<br />
called for on the Drawings.<br />
2.3 MERCURY VAPOR LAMPS: Mercury vapor lamps shall be Deluxe white phosphor<br />
coated, mogul base with correlated color temperature of 3900 degree K or as indicated.<br />
2.4 METALLIC HALIDE LAMPS: Metallic halide lamps shall be phosphor coated, mogul<br />
base and shall be furnished for proper lamp burning position as determined by fixture<br />
installed within. Correlated lamp color temperature shall be as follows:<br />
100 watt 3200 degrees K<br />
175 watt 3200 degrees K<br />
250 watt 3200 degrees K<br />
400 watt 3700 degrees K<br />
1000 watt 3400 degrees K<br />
Color temperature may vary 100 degrees K plus or minus.<br />
2.5 HIGH PRESSURE SODIUM LAMPS: High pressure sodium lamps shall be clear, mogul<br />
base with an apparent color temperature of 2100 degree K, or as indicated. Lamps shall be<br />
furnished for proper lamp burning position as determined by fixture installed within.<br />
2.6 SAFETY: All Mercury Vapor and Metallic Halide Lamps shall be furnished with a means<br />
of immediately extinguishing the lamp when the outer lamp envelope is either penetrated<br />
or broken.<br />
2.7 MANUFACTURERS: General Electric, Sylvania, or Cutler-Hammer are approved.<br />
Where a specific manufacturer's product is mentioned, then it shall be so furnished.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION: The Contractor shall install new lamps in all lighting fixtures.<br />
Installation of the new lamps shall be made seven (7) days before final inspection, unless<br />
otherwise approved by the Architect in writing.<br />
END OF SECTION 16501<br />
LAMPS 16501-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16502<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
C. Lighting Equipment: Section 16500.<br />
D. Lamps: Section 16501.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 GENERAL: Ballast shall be supplied for the voltage that the fixture is connected to. All<br />
ballast shall be high power factor and UL listed.<br />
A. Ballasts: Fluorescent ballasts shall be energy savings type and shall be usable with<br />
energy savings lamps so that the ballast/lamp system shall be capable of providing<br />
6000 average initial lumens for two lamps at 75 watts of system input. Ballast<br />
performance with such lamps shall be certified by ETL or approved equal laboratory<br />
with a United States Government Registered Certification Mark for fluorescent lamp<br />
ballast. Performance certification with such lamps shall be according to component<br />
test method and appear on ballast nameplate; the relative light output shall be 95%<br />
with a tolerance of +5% to -2-1/2% and input watts shall be 78 watts with a tolerance<br />
of 5%. The ballast case temperature shall not exceed 90 degree C. Ballast shall be UL<br />
listed, Class P, Premium. Mercury vapor, metal halide, and high-pressure sodium<br />
ballasts shall be manufactured with the following features:<br />
1. .125 minimum thickness extruded aluminum housing with heat dissipating fins.<br />
2. Die cast aluminum end cap closure.<br />
3. Thermally isolated capacitor enclosed in a diecast compartment with easy access<br />
for serviceability.<br />
4. Constant auto stabilized, high-power factor.<br />
5. Constant Wattage, auto-stabilized, high power factor. Core and coil encapsulated<br />
in a thermally conductive Class F (155 degree C.), insulation material which<br />
isolates sound attenuating vibration.<br />
6. Stand-By feature with instant incandescent light from energizing or re-energizing<br />
of current to 70% of rated output of HID lamp.<br />
2.2 MANUFACTURERS: Advance, General Electric, Jefferson, Universal, Halo, Prescolite,<br />
or approved equal for function specified.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 All ballasts shall be installed within specific fixtures in a manner so as to assure a<br />
completely silent operation with attainment of maximum ballast life as specified by the<br />
manufacturer.<br />
BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES 16502-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
END OF SECTION 16502<br />
BALLASTS AND ACCESSORIES 16502-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16511<br />
FLUORESCENT FIXTURES<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions, Supplementary<br />
General Conditions (if any) and General Requirements apply to the work specified in<br />
this section.<br />
B. General Provisions: Section 16010.<br />
C. Raceways: Section 16110.<br />
D. Grounding: Section 16450.<br />
E. Lighting Equipment: Section 16500.<br />
F. Lamps: Section 16501.<br />
G. Ballasts: Section 16502.<br />
1.2 SUBMITTALS: Submit complete shop drawings indicating construction of fixture<br />
including lens nominal thickness, photometry’s and housing thickness.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES: All fixtures, ballasts and supports shall be quiet in<br />
operation. Louvers, shields, reflectors and all sections of the channel structure shall be<br />
securely held in position. Fixtures shall not be mounted in such a way that ballast hum<br />
will be amplified or transmitted into work areas.<br />
2.2 FINISH: Bonderized or equal treatment on all steel parts prior to applying finish. Metal<br />
parts shall be aluminum, brass, copper, bronze or steel, with baked white enamel finish<br />
unless otherwise noted on the drawings.<br />
2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMPHOLDERS: Designed so lamps will be held firmly in place,<br />
electrically and mechanically permitting easy insertion or removal of lamps. Provide<br />
corrosion resistant, silver plated lamp pin contacts.<br />
2.4 LENS: When an acrylic lens or diffuser is specified it shall be molded of 100% Acrylic<br />
meeting American Society for Testing materials specifications for Methacrylate Molding<br />
and Extrusion Compounds (ASTM D788-63). Plastic diffusing panels, luminous side<br />
panels and other luminous plastic members of fixtures shall be made of not less than<br />
nominal .125" thick prismatic clear acrylic material. Plastic shall be nonflammable or<br />
shall have a flame spread rate of not more than 3.2 inches per minute for a 1/2" width of<br />
the material. The plastic shall show no yellowing apparent to the naked eye either when<br />
subjected to the accelerated weathering test in accordance with ASTM D795-44T (500<br />
hours exposure, using type S-1 lamp) or after prolonged exposure to a fluorescent lamp<br />
source under conditions identical with those existing in the fixture in which it is to be<br />
FLUORESCENT FIXTURES 16511-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
used. The plastic shall be non-electrostatic or the finished parts shall be treated with an<br />
anti-static wax.<br />
2.5 HOUSING: Not less than 20 gauge steel with baked white enamel finish applied over<br />
corrosion resistant primer unless otherwise specifically approved.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 LAY-IN FIXTURES: All lay in fixtures shall be adequately supported on all four corners<br />
to the structure and not to the ceiling alone.<br />
3.2 SURFACE MOUNTED FIXTURES: All surface mounted fixtures shall be furnished with<br />
top plates whenever applicable.<br />
END OF SECTION 16511<br />
FLUORESCENT FIXTURES 16511-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16612<br />
GENERATOR SYSTEM<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE<br />
A. The stand-by engine driven electric generating set shall be rated at 60 KW (75KVA)<br />
for continuous stand-by service at 0.8 PF, 120/208 volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 60 hz. At 5000<br />
feet above sea level. The unit shall be package of new and current equipment<br />
consisting of:<br />
1. A spark-ignited engine driven electric generating set to provide stand-by power.<br />
2. An engine start-stop control system mounted on the generating set.<br />
3. Mounted accessories as specified.<br />
B. This unit shall be built, tested and shipped by the manufacturer of the alternator so<br />
there is one source of supply and responsibility. The performance of this generating set<br />
series shall be certified by an independent testing laboratory as to the set’s full power<br />
rating, stability and voltage and frequency regulation.<br />
C. This stand-by electric generating set, furnished by the manufacturer, shall be warranted<br />
for a period of one year from the date of installation, plus any other warranty provided<br />
by manufacturer.<br />
1.2 ENGINE:<br />
A. The engine shall be Diesel fueled, four-cycle, water cooled, turbo charged aspiration,<br />
with mounted radiator, fan and water pump. It shall have 6 cylinders and minimum<br />
displacement of 239 cubic inches, with a minimum rating of 102bhp at its operating<br />
speed of 1800 rpm. Intake and exhaust valves shall be heat resisting alloy steel, free<br />
rotating. Exhaust valve seat inserts shall be provided. Full pressure lubrication shall be<br />
supplied by a positive displacement lube oil pump. The engine shall have coolant and<br />
oil filters with replaceable elements; lube oil cooler and a fuel transfer pump (if<br />
required). Engine speed shall be governed by a hydraulic governor to maintain<br />
alternator frequency within 5 percent from no-load to full-load alternator output. The<br />
engine shall have a 24 volt battery charging DC alternator with a transistorized voltage<br />
regulator. Remote, 2 wire starting shall be by a 24 volt solenoid shift, electrical starter.<br />
1.3 ENGINE INSTRUMENTS:<br />
A. The generating set shall contain a complete engine start-stop control which starts<br />
engine on closing contact and stops engine on opening contact. A cranking limiter<br />
shall be provided to open the starting circuit in approx. 45 to 90 seconds if the engine<br />
is not started within that time. The engine controls shall also include a 3 position<br />
selector switch with the following positions: RUN-STOP-REMOTE. High engine<br />
temperature, low oil pressure, and over-speed shutdown. With signal light and alarm<br />
terminal shall also be provided.<br />
1.4 BRUSHLESS ALTERNATOR:<br />
A. The alternator shall be a 4 pole, revolving field design with temperature compensated<br />
solid state voltage regulator and brushless rotating rectifier exciter system. No brushes<br />
shall be allowed. The stator shall be directly connected to the engine fly-wheel<br />
GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16612-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
housing, and the rotor shall be driven through a semiflexible driving flange to insure<br />
permanent alignment. The insulation system shall be Class H as defined by NEMA<br />
MGI-1.65. The three phase, broad range alternator shall be 12 lead, reconnectible.<br />
1.5 UNIT PERFORMANCE:<br />
A. Frequency regulation shall not exceed 3 hertz from no load to rated load. Voltage<br />
regulation shall be within plus or minus 2 percent of rated voltage, from no load to full<br />
rated load. The instantaneous voltage dip shall be less than 12 percent of rated voltage<br />
when full, 3 phase, load and rated power factor is applied to the alternator. Recovery to<br />
stable operation is defined as operation with terminal voltage remaining constant within<br />
plus or minus 1 percent of rated voltage. A rheostat shall provide a minimum of plus or<br />
minus 5 percent voltage adjustment from rated value. Temperature rise shall be within<br />
NEMA MG1-22.40 definition.<br />
1.6 ALTERNATOR INSTUMENT PANEL:<br />
A. The alternator instrument panel shall be wired, tested and shock mounted on the<br />
generating set by the manufacturer of the alternator. It shall contain panel lighting,<br />
manual reset circuit breaker, frequency meter, running time meter, voltage adjusting<br />
rheostat, AC voltmeter (dual range, indicates all voltages), AC ammeter (dual range,<br />
indicates current each phase), meter switch, voltmeter-ammeter phase selector with<br />
OFF position.<br />
1.7 GENERATING SET MOUNTING:<br />
A. The electric generating set shall be equipped with vibration isolators and mounted on a<br />
welded steel bas which shall provide suitable mounting to any level surface.<br />
1.8 HOUSING:<br />
A. The complete generating set shall be enclosed in a weather protective sheet metal<br />
housing of 16 gauge steel with three doors on each side and one rear door for easy<br />
access. The doors shall be hinged with fixed open air intake louvers and equipped with<br />
adjustable plated pad type latches and matched keys. The housing shall contain 120<br />
volt interior lighting, battery racks and cables, a critical exhaust silencer group, an oil<br />
and heater drain group and adequate heaters to prevent freeze-up of generator oil and<br />
water lines. The housing shall be suitable for mounting directly to a concrete pad.<br />
1.9 ACCESSORIES:<br />
A. All accessories needed for the proper operation of the generating set shall be furnished.<br />
These shall include a flexible exhaust connection, starting batteries, battery cables,<br />
battery rack, fuel tank and lines, and detailed operation and maintenance manuals with<br />
parts list.<br />
PART 2 – PRODUCTS:<br />
2.1 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS:<br />
A. Katolight, Onan, Cummins, Caterpillar, Kato and Kohler.<br />
PART 3 – EXECUTION:<br />
GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16612-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3.1 The entire emergency distribution system shall be tested by the contractor in the presence<br />
of the switchboard and generator set manufactures representative, the Architect, Engineer<br />
and authorized owner personnel.<br />
END OF SECTION 16612<br />
GENERATOR SYSTEMS 16612-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 16722<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEM<br />
PART 1 GENERAL<br />
1.1 DESCRIPTION<br />
A. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation, and connection<br />
of the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting fire alarm equipment required<br />
to form a complete coordinated system ready for operation. It shall include, but not be<br />
limited to, alarm initiating devices, alarm notification appliances, control panel,<br />
auxiliary control devices, annunciators, and wiring as shown on the drawings and<br />
specified herein.<br />
B. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of NFPA Standard No. 72 for<br />
protected premises signaling systems except as modified and supplemented by this<br />
specification. The system shall be electrically supervised and shall monitor the<br />
integrity of all conductors.<br />
C. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of Americans with Disabilities<br />
Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities.<br />
1.2 SCOPE<br />
A. A new intelligent reporting, microprocessor controlled fire detection system shall be<br />
installed in accordance with the specifications and drawings.<br />
B. Basic Performance:<br />
1. Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall<br />
be encoded onto an NFPA Style 7 (Class A) signaling line circuit.<br />
2. Initiation device circuits shall be wired Class A (NFPA Style D).<br />
3. Indicating appliance circuits shall be wired Style Z (Class A).<br />
4. Digitized electronic signals shall employ check digits or multiple polling.<br />
5. A single ground or open on the system Signaling Line Circuit shall not cause<br />
system malfunction, loss of operating power or the ability to report an alarm.<br />
6. Alarm signals arriving at the main FACP shall not be lost following a power failure<br />
(or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.<br />
C. Basic System Functional Operation: When a fire alarm condition is detected and<br />
reported by one of the system initiating devices or appliances, the following functions<br />
shall immediately occur:<br />
1. The System Alarm LED shall flash.<br />
2. A local piezo electric signal in the control panel shall sound.<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-1
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1.3 SUBMITTALS<br />
3. The 80 character LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the<br />
Fire Alarm condition, including the type of alarm point and it's location within the<br />
protected premises.<br />
4. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated each<br />
new Fire Alarm Control Panel condition, along with time and date of occurrence.<br />
5. All system output programs assigned via control by event equations to be<br />
activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated<br />
System Outputs (alarm indicating appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.<br />
A. General:<br />
1. Two copies of all submittals shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for<br />
review.<br />
2. All references to manufacturer's model numbers and other pertinent information<br />
herein is intended to establish minimum standards of performance.<br />
B. Shop Drawings:<br />
1. Sufficient information, clearing presented, shall be included to determine<br />
compliance with drawings and specifications.<br />
2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements,<br />
equipment layout, device arrangement, complete wiring point-to-point diagrams,<br />
and conduit layouts.<br />
C. <strong>Manual</strong>s:<br />
1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and<br />
maintenance manual listing the manufacturer's name(s) including technical data<br />
sheets.<br />
2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each item of equipment and the<br />
interconnections between the items of equipment.<br />
3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the<br />
information required to properly operate the equipment and system.<br />
D. Certifications: Together with the shop drawing submittal, submit a certification from<br />
the major equipment manufacturer indicating that the proposed supervisor of<br />
installation and the proposed performer of contract maintenance is an authorized<br />
representative of the major equipment manufacturer. Include names and addresses in<br />
the certification.<br />
1.4 GUARANTY: All work performed and all material and equipment furnished under this<br />
contract shall be free from defects and shall remain so for a period of at least one (1) year<br />
from the date of acceptance. The full cost of maintenance, labor and materials required to<br />
correct any defect during this one year period shall be included in the submittal bid.<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-2
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1.5 APPLICABLE SPECIFICATIONS: The specifications and standards listed below form a<br />
part of this specification. The system shall fully comply with these standards.<br />
A. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA:<br />
No. 12 CO2 Extinguishing Systems<br />
No. 12A &B Halon Extinguishing Systems<br />
No. 15 Water Spray Systems<br />
No. 16 Foam/Water Deluge and Spray Systems<br />
No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC)<br />
No. 71 Central Station Signaling Systems<br />
No. 72 Protective Signaling Systems<br />
No. 72E Automatic Fire Detectors<br />
No. 72G Notification Appliances for Protective Signaling Systems<br />
No. 72H Testing Procedures for Signaling Systems<br />
No. 101 Life Safety Code<br />
B. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) - USA:<br />
No. 268<br />
No. 864<br />
No. 268A<br />
No. 521<br />
No. 464<br />
No. 38<br />
No. 346<br />
No. 1076<br />
Systems<br />
No. 1971<br />
Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems<br />
Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems<br />
Smoke Detectors for Duct Applications<br />
Heat Detectors for Fire Protective<br />
Audible Signaling Appliances<br />
<strong>Manual</strong>ly Actuated Signaling Boxes<br />
Waterflow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.<br />
Control Units for Burglar Alarm Proprietary Protective Signaling<br />
Visual Indicating Appliances<br />
C. Local and State Building Codes:<br />
D. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).<br />
1.6 APPROVALS<br />
A. The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally<br />
recognized agencies:<br />
UL<br />
FM<br />
ULC<br />
Underwriters Laboratories Inc.<br />
Factory Mutual<br />
Underwriters Laboratories Canada<br />
B. The system shall be listed by the national agencies as suitable for extinguishing<br />
release applications.<br />
PART 2 PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL, GENERAL<br />
A. All equipment and components shall be new, and the manufacturer's current model.<br />
The materials, appliances, equipment and devices shall be tested and listed by a<br />
nationally recognized approvals agency for use as part of a protected premises<br />
protective signaling (fire alarm) system.<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-3
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
B. All equipment and components shall be installed in strict compliance with<br />
manufacturers' recommendations. Consult the manufacturer's installation manuals for<br />
all wiring diagrams, schematics, physical equipment sizes, etc., before beginning<br />
system installation.<br />
C. All Equipment shall be attached to walls and ceiling/floor assemblies and shall be<br />
held firmly in place (e.g., detectors shall not be supported solely by suspended<br />
ceilings). Fasteners and supports shall be adequate to support the required load.<br />
2.2 CONDUIT AND WIRE<br />
A. Conduit:<br />
1. Conduit shall be in accordance with The National Electrical Code (NEC), local<br />
and state requirements.<br />
2. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway. Conduit fill shall not exceed<br />
40% of interior cross sectional area where three or more cables are contained<br />
within a single conduit.<br />
3. Cable must be separated from any open conductors of Power, or Class I circuits,<br />
and shall not be placed in any conduit, junction box or raceway containing these<br />
conductors, as per NEC Article 760-29.<br />
4. Conduit shall not enter the Fire Alarm Control Panel, or any other remotely<br />
mounted Control Panel equipment or backboxes, except where conduit entry is<br />
specified by the FACP manufacturer.<br />
5. Conduit shall be ½ inch minimum.<br />
B. Wire:<br />
1. All fire alarm system wiring shall be new.<br />
2. Wiring shall be in accordance with local, state, and national codes (e.g., NEC<br />
Article 760) and as recommended by the manufacturer of the fire alarm system.<br />
Number and size of conductors shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system<br />
manufacturer, but not less than 18 AWG (1.02 mm) for Initiating Device Circuits<br />
and Signaling Line Circuits, and 14 AWG (1.63 mm) for Indicating Appliance<br />
Circuits.<br />
3. All wire and cable shall be listed and/or approved by a recognized testing agency<br />
for use with a protective signaling system.<br />
4. Wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded<br />
and installed in conduit unless specifically excepted by the fire alarm equipment<br />
manufacturer. The system shall permit use of IDC and IAC wiring in the same<br />
conduit with the communication loop.<br />
5. All field wiring shall be completely supervised.<br />
C. Terminal Boxes, Junction Boxes and Cabinets: All boxes and cabinets shall be UL<br />
Listed for their use and purpose.<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-4
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
D. Initiating circuits shall be arranged to serve like categories (manual, smoke, water<br />
flow). Mixed category circuitry shall not be permitted except on signaling line<br />
circuits connected to intelligent reporting devices.<br />
E. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be connected to a separate dedicated branch<br />
circuit, maximum 20 amperes. This circuit shall be labeled at the Main Power<br />
Distribution Panel as FIRE ALARM. Fire Alarm Control Panel Primary Power<br />
wiring shall be 12 AWG. The Control Panel Cabinet shall be grounded securely to<br />
either a cold water pipe or grounding rod.<br />
2.3 MAIN FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL<br />
A. The FACP shall be a NOTIFIER Model AFP-200, and shall contain a microprocessor<br />
based Central Processing Unit (CPU). The CPU shall communicate with and control<br />
the following types of equipment used to make up the system: intelligent detectors,<br />
addressable modules, printer, annunciators, and other system controlled devices.<br />
B. System Capacity and General Operation:<br />
1. The control panel shall provide, or be capable of expansion to 198<br />
intelligent/addressable devices plus 103 control circuits.<br />
2. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall include a full featured operator interface<br />
control and annunciation panel that shall include a backlit Liquid Crystal Display,<br />
individual, color coded system status LED’s, and an alphanumeric keypad for the<br />
Field Programming and Control of the Fire Alarm System.<br />
3. All programming or editing of the existing program in the system shall be<br />
achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm<br />
monitoring functions of the Fire Alarm Control Panel.<br />
4. The FACP shall provide the following features:<br />
Drift Compensation to extend detector accuracy over life.<br />
Sensitivity Test, meeting requirements of NFPA 72E.<br />
Maintenance Alert to warn of excessive compensation.<br />
System Status Reports to display or printer.<br />
Alarm Verification, with verification counters.<br />
PAS presignal, meeting NFPA 72 requirements.<br />
Rapid manual station reporting (under 2 seconds).<br />
Non-Alarm points for general (non-fire) control.<br />
Periodic Detector Test, conducted automatically by software.<br />
Pre-alarm for advanced fire warning.<br />
Counting "cross-zone" options.<br />
March time and temporal coding options.<br />
Walk Test, with check for two detectors set to same address.<br />
Security Monitor Points, meeting requirements of UL 1076.<br />
Control-By-Time for non-fire operations, with holidays.<br />
Day/Night automatic adjustment of detector sensitivity.<br />
Device Blink Control for sleeping areas.<br />
C. Central Microprocessor:<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-5
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. The Microprocessor Unit shall communicate with, monitor, and control all<br />
external interfaces with the control panel. It shall include EPROM for system<br />
program storage; non-volatile memory for building-specific program storage; and<br />
a "watch dog" timer circuit to detect and report microprocessor failure.<br />
2. The Microprocessor Unit shall contain and execute all control-by-event programs<br />
for specific action to be taken if an alarm condition is detected by the system.<br />
Such control-by-event programs shall be held in non-volatile programmable<br />
memory, and shall not be lost even if system primary and secondary power failure<br />
occurs.<br />
3. The Microprocessor Unit shall also provide a real-time Clock for time annotation<br />
of system displays, printer, and history file. The Time-Of-Day and date shall not<br />
be lost if system primary and secondary power supplies fail. The real-time Clock<br />
may also be used to control non-fire functions at programmed time-of-day, dayof-week,<br />
and day-of-year.<br />
D. Display:<br />
1. The Display shall provide all the controls and indicators used by the system<br />
operator and may also be used to program all system operational parameters.<br />
2. The Display shall include status information and custom alphanumeric labels for<br />
all Intelligent Detectors, Addressable Modules, and Software zones.<br />
3. The Display shall provide an 80-character back-lit alphanumeric Liquid Crystal<br />
Display (LCD). It shall also provide 5 Light-Emitting-Diodes (LED’s), that will<br />
indicate the status of the following system parameters: AC POWER, SYSTEM<br />
ALARM, SYSTEM TROUBLE, SIGNAL SILENCED, SUPERVISORY, and<br />
PRE-ALARM.<br />
4. The Display shall provide a 21-key touch key-pad with control capability to<br />
command all system functions, entry of any alphabetic or numeric information,<br />
and field programming. Two different password levels shall be provided to<br />
prevent unauthorized system control or programming.<br />
5. The Display shall include the following operator functions: SIGNAL SILENCE,<br />
RESET, DRILL, and ACKNOWLEDGE.<br />
E. SLC Loop Interface:<br />
1. The SLC Interface shall provide power to, and communicate with, all of the<br />
Intelligent/ Addressable Detectors and Addressable Modules over a single pair of<br />
wires. This SLC Loop shall be capable of operation as NFPA Style 4, Style 6, or<br />
Style 7.<br />
2. The Loop Interface Board shall receive analog information from all Intelligent<br />
Detectors that shall be processed to determine whether normal, alarm, or trouble<br />
conditions exist for each detector. The software shall automatically maintain the<br />
detector's desired sensitivity level by adjusting for the effects of environmental<br />
factors, including the accumulation of dust in each detector. The analog<br />
information may also be used for automatic detector testing and for the automatic<br />
determination of detector maintenance requirements.<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-6
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3. The detector software shall meet NFPA 72E requirements and be certified by UL<br />
as a calibrated sensitivity test instrument.<br />
4. The detector software shall allow manual or automatic sensitivity adjustment.<br />
F. Serial Interfaces:<br />
1. An EIA-232 interface between the Fire Alarm Control Panel and UL Listed<br />
Electronic Data Processing (EDP) peripherals shall be provided.<br />
2. The EIA-232 interface shall allow the use of printers, CRT monitors, and PC<br />
compatible computers.<br />
3. The EIA-485 port for the serial connection of the optional Annunciators and<br />
remote LCD displays shall be provided.<br />
4. The EIA-485 interface may be used for network connection to a Proprietary<br />
Receiving Unit.<br />
G. Enclosures:<br />
1. The control panel shall be housed in a UL Listed cabinet suitable for surface or<br />
semi-flush mounting. Cabinet and front shall be corrosion protected, given a rustresistant<br />
prime coat, and manufacturer's standard finish.<br />
2. The door shall provide a key lock and shall include a glass or other transparent<br />
opening for viewing of all indicators.<br />
H. All interfaces and associated equipment are to be protected so that they will not be<br />
affected by voltage surges or line transients consistent with UL standard 864.<br />
I. Optional plug-in modules shall be provided for NFPA 72B and NFPA 72C<br />
transmitters.<br />
J. Power Supply:<br />
1. The Power Supply shall operate on 120 VAC, 60 Hz, and shall provide all<br />
necessary power for the FACP.<br />
2. It shall provide 5.0 amps of usable indicating appliance power, using a switching<br />
24 VDC regulator.<br />
3. It shall provide a battery charger for 24 hours of standby using dual-rate charging<br />
techniques for fast battery recharge.<br />
4. It shall provide a very low frequency sweep earth detect circuit, capable of<br />
detecting earth faults on sensitive addressable modules.<br />
5. It shall be power-limited using Positive Temperature Coefficient (PTC) resistors.<br />
6. It shall provide optional meters to indicate battery voltage and charging current.<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-7
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
K. Field Wiring Terminal Blocks: For ease of service, all wiring terminal blocks for I/O<br />
interfaces shall be the plug-in type and have sufficient capacity for 18 to 12 AWG<br />
wire. Terminal blocks permanently fixed or mounted are not acceptable.<br />
L. Operators Controls:<br />
1. Acknowledge Switch:<br />
a. Activation of the control panel Acknowledge switch in response to new Alarm<br />
and/or Trouble shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change<br />
the Alarm and Trouble LED’s from flashing mode to steady-ON mode. If<br />
multiple Alarm or Trouble conditions exist, depression of this switch shall<br />
advance the 80-character LCD display to the next Alarm or Trouble condition.<br />
b. Depression of the Acknowledge switch shall also silence all remote<br />
annunciator piezo sounders.<br />
2. Signal Silence Switch: Activation of the Signal Silence Switch shall cause all<br />
programmed Alarm Indicating Appliances and relays to return to the normal<br />
condition after an alarm condition. The selection of indicating circuits and relays<br />
that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the<br />
confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence<br />
inhibit and auto-silence timers.<br />
3. System Reset Switch: Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all<br />
electronically-latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as<br />
all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition.<br />
Holding the RESET switch shall perform a Lamp Test function.<br />
4. Drill (Evacuate) Switch: Press and hold of the Drill Switch shall activate all<br />
Indicating Appliance circuits. The Drill function shall latch until press of Signal<br />
Silence or Reset.<br />
2.4 SYSTEM COMPONENTS<br />
A. Electronic Chimes:<br />
1. Electronic chimes shall operate on 24 VDC nominal.<br />
2. Electronic chimes shall have field-selectable choice of single-stroke or vibrating<br />
operation, with sound level adjustable to 83 dBA at 10 feet and chime tone<br />
adjustable from 800 to 1200 Hz.<br />
3. Shall be flush or surface mounted as shown on plans.<br />
4. Shall be placed 80 inches (2,030 mm) above the highest floor level within the<br />
space, or 6 inches (152 mm) below the ceiling, whichever is lower.<br />
B. Strobe Lights:<br />
1. Shall operate on 24 VDC nominal.<br />
2. Shall meet the requirements of the ADA as defined in UL standard 1971 and shall<br />
meet the following criteria:<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-8
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
a. Unless otherwise specified on the drawings, the intensity shall be a minimum<br />
of 117 candela.<br />
b. The flash rate shall be a minimum of one flash per second at 24 VDC.<br />
c. The appliance shall be placed 80 inches (2,030 mm) above the highest floor<br />
level within the space, or 6 inches (152 mm) below the ceiling, whichever is<br />
lower.<br />
d. The strobes shall be for vertical sidewall mounting only with the clear lens<br />
window at the lower part of the lens lettering properly reading vertically.<br />
C. Electronic Chime/Strobe Combination Devices:<br />
1. Shall meet the requirements of individual units listed above.<br />
D. Addressable <strong>Manual</strong> Stations:<br />
1. Addressable <strong>Manual</strong> Stations shall be provided to connect to the Fire Alarm<br />
Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops. Up to 99 addressable manual<br />
stations may be connected to one SLC loop.<br />
2. The <strong>Manual</strong> Station shall, on command from the Control Panel, send data to the<br />
panel representing the state of the manual switch. <strong>Manual</strong> Fire Alarm Stations<br />
shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual<br />
Emergency Operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of<br />
a key.<br />
3. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation that<br />
cannot be reset without the use of a key.<br />
4. <strong>Manual</strong> Stations shall be constructed of painted die-cast metal, with clearly<br />
visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear<br />
on the front of the stations in raised letters. Model RS-IT-KL.<br />
5. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting, or semi-flush mounting as shown<br />
on the plans, and shall be installed not less than 42 inches, or more than 48 inches<br />
above the finished floor.<br />
6. The <strong>Manual</strong> Station shall be addressable.<br />
E. Intelligent Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:<br />
1. Smoke detectors shall be intelligent and addressable devices, and shall connect<br />
with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit<br />
loops. Up to 99 intelligent detectors may connect to one SLC loop.<br />
2. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure<br />
smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the<br />
panel representing the analog level of smoke density.<br />
3. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a twist-lock base.<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-9
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
4. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm<br />
condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be<br />
initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated<br />
remotely on command from the control panel.<br />
5. The detector shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using<br />
decimal switches. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use<br />
binary jumpers on dip-switches to set the detector address are not acceptable. The<br />
detectors shall also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall<br />
use to identify the type of detector.<br />
6. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LED’s. Both LED’s shall flash<br />
under normal conditions, indicating that the detector is operational and in regular<br />
communication with the control panel. Both LED’s may be placed into steady<br />
illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition has been<br />
detected. If required, the flashing mode operation of the detector LED’s shall be<br />
controlled through the system field program. An output connection shall also be<br />
provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.<br />
7. The detector sensitivity shall be set through the Fire Alarm Control Panel, and<br />
shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system.<br />
Sensitivity may be automatically adjusted by the panel on a time-of-day basis.<br />
8. using software in the FACP, the detectors shall automatically compensate for dust<br />
accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their<br />
performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated<br />
sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72E.<br />
9. Install detectors where shown or noted on drawings.<br />
F. Intelligent Ionization Type Smoke Detectors:<br />
1. Smoke Detectors shall be Intelligent and Addressable, and shall connect with two<br />
wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuits. Up to 99<br />
intelligent detectors may connect to one SLC loop.<br />
2. The detectors shall use the dual-chamber ionization principal to measure products<br />
of combustion and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the<br />
panel representing the analog level of products of combustion.<br />
3. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a twist-lock base.<br />
4. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm<br />
condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be<br />
initiated at the detector itself, by activating a magnetic switch, or may be<br />
activated remotely on command from the control panel.<br />
5. The detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using<br />
decimal switches. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use<br />
binary jumpers or dip-switches to set the address are not acceptable. They shall<br />
also store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify<br />
the type of detector.<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-10
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
6. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LED’s. Both LED’s shall flash<br />
under normal conditions. In certain applications, LED’s may be selected to be<br />
polled without flashing through system programming. Both LED’s may be placed<br />
into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition<br />
has been detected. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to<br />
connect an external remote alarm LED.<br />
7. The detector sensitivity shall be set through the Fire Alarm Control Panel, and<br />
shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system.<br />
Sensitivity may be automatically adjusted to the panel on a time-of-day basis.<br />
8. using software in the FACP, the detectors shall automatically compensate for dust<br />
accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their<br />
performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated<br />
sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72E.<br />
9. Install detectors where shown or noted on drawings.<br />
G. Intelligent Heat Detectors:<br />
1. Heat Detectors shall be Intelligent and Addressable devices, and shall connect<br />
with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuits. Up<br />
to 99 intelligent heat detectors may connect to one SLC loop.<br />
2. The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions caused<br />
by a fire and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel<br />
representing the analog level of such thermal measurements.<br />
3. The detectors shall be ceiling-mount and shall include a twist-lock base.<br />
4. The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm<br />
condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be<br />
initiated at the detector itself (by activating a magnetic switch) or initiated<br />
remotely on command from the control panel.<br />
5. The detectors shall provide address-setting means on the detector head using a<br />
decimal switch. Because of the possibility of installation error, systems that use<br />
binary jumpers or dip-switches to set the address are not acceptable.<br />
6. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LED’s. Both LED’s shall flash<br />
under normal conditions. In certain applications, LED’s may be selected to be<br />
polled without flashing through system programming. Both LED’s may be placed<br />
into steady illumination by the control panel, indicating that an alarm condition<br />
has been detected.<br />
7. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external<br />
remote alarm LED.<br />
8. Install detectors where shown or noted on drawings.<br />
H. Intelligent In-duct Smoke Detector Housing:<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-11
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
1. In-Duct Smoke Detector Housing shall accommodate either an intelligent<br />
Ionization sensor or a Intelligent Photoelectric Sensor, either of that provides<br />
continuous analog monitoring and alarm verification from the panel.<br />
2. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the FACP, and<br />
appropriate action taken to change over air handling systems to help prevent the<br />
rapid distribution of isolation of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas<br />
served by the duct system.<br />
I. Monitor Module:<br />
1. Addressable Monitor modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC<br />
zone of conventional Alarm Initiating Devices (any NO dry contact device) to one<br />
of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signaling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops.<br />
2. The Monitor Module shall mount in a 4-inch square, 2-1/8" deep electrical box.<br />
3. The IDC zone may be wired for Style D or Style B operation. The Monitor<br />
Module shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches and shall also<br />
store an internal identifying code that the Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP) shall<br />
use to identify the type of device. Modules that use binary jumpers or dipswitches<br />
are subject to installation errors and are not acceptable. A LED shall be<br />
provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Monitor<br />
Module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.<br />
4. For difficult to reach areas, the Monitor Module shall be available in a miniature<br />
package and shall be no larger than 2-3/4" x 1-¼" x ½". This version need not<br />
include Type D or a LED.<br />
J. Control Module:<br />
1. Addressable Control Modules shall be provided to supervise and control the<br />
operation of one conventional Indicating Appliance Circuit (IAC) of compatible,<br />
24 VDC powered, polarized Audio/Visual Indicating Appliances. For fan<br />
shutdown and other auxiliary control functions, the control module may be set to<br />
operate as a dry contact relay.<br />
2. The Control Module shall mount in a standard 4-inch square, 2-1/8" deep<br />
electrical box, or to a surface mounted backbox, or directly in the Fire Alarm<br />
Control Panel.<br />
3. The IAC may be wired for Style Z or Style Y IAC (Up to 1 Amp of Inductive<br />
A/V Signal, or 2 Amps of Resistive A/V Signal) operation, or as a Dry Contact<br />
(Form C) Relay. the relay coil shall be magnetically latched to reduce wiring<br />
connection requirements, and to insure that 100% of all auxiliary relay or IACs<br />
may be energized at the same time on the same pair of wires.<br />
4. Audio/Visual Power shall be provided by a separate supervised Power Loop from<br />
the main Fire Alarm Control Panel or from a supervised, UL listed Remote Power<br />
Supply.<br />
5. The Control Module shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches<br />
and shall also store an internal identifying code that the Control Panel shall use to<br />
identify the type of device. Modules that use binary jumpers or dip-switches are<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-12
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
subject to installation errors and are not acceptable. A LED shall be provided that<br />
shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Control Module is<br />
operational and is in regular communication with the Control Panel.<br />
6. A magnetic test switch shall be provided to test the module without opening or<br />
shortening it's IAC wiring.<br />
K. Isolator Module:<br />
1. Isolator Modules shall be provided to automatically isolate wire-to-wire short<br />
circuits on an SLC loop. The isolator Module shall limit the number of modules<br />
or detectors that may be rendered inoperative by a short circuit fault on the SLC<br />
Loop. At least one isolator module shall be provided for each floor or protected<br />
zone of the building.<br />
2. If a wire-to-wire short occurs, the Isolator Module shall automatically opencircuit<br />
(disconnect) the SLC loop. When the short circuit condition is corrected,<br />
the Isolator Module shall automatically reconnect the isolated section of the SLC<br />
loop.<br />
3. The Isolator Module shall not require any address-setting, and its operations shall<br />
be totally automatic. It shall not be necessary to replace or reset an Isolator<br />
Module after it's normal operation.<br />
4. The Isolator Module shall mount in a standard 4-inch deep electrical box, in a<br />
surface mounted backbox, or in the Fire Alarm Control Panel. It shall provide a<br />
single LED that shall flash to indicate that the Isolator is operational and shall<br />
illuminate steadily to indicate that a short circuit condition has been detected and<br />
isolated.<br />
L. Water Flow Switches:<br />
1. Flow switches shall be integral, mechanical, non-coded, non-accumulative retard<br />
type.<br />
2. Flow switches shall have an alarm transmission delay time that is conveniently<br />
adjustable from 0 to 60 seconds. Initial settings shall be 30-45 seconds.<br />
3. Flow switches shall be located a minimum of one (1) foot from a fitting that<br />
changes the direction of the flow and a minimum of three (3) feet from a valve.<br />
4. Flow switches shall be provided and connected under this section and installed by<br />
mechanical contractor.<br />
M. Sprinkler and Standpipe Valve Supervisory Switches:<br />
1. Each sprinkler system water supply control valve riser or zone control valve, and<br />
each standpipe system riser control valve shall be equipped with a supervisory<br />
switch. Standpipe hose valves, and test and drain valves shall not be equipped<br />
with supervisory switches.<br />
2. Each Post Indicator Valve (PIV) or main gate valve shall be equipped with a<br />
supervisory switch.<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-13
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
3. Mount switch so as not to interfere with the normal operation of the valve and<br />
adjust to operate within two revolutions toward the closed position of the valve<br />
control, or when the stem has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from<br />
its normal position.<br />
4. The mechanism shall be contained in a weatherproof aluminum housing, that<br />
shall provide a 3/4 inch tapped conduit entrance and incorporate the necessary<br />
facilities for attachment to the valves.<br />
5. Switch housing to be finished in red baked enamel.<br />
6. The entire installed assembly shall be tamper proof and arranged to cause a<br />
switch operation if the housing cover is removed, or if the unit is removed from<br />
its mounting.<br />
7. Valve supervisory switches shall be provided and connected under this section<br />
and installed by mechanical contractor.<br />
N. LCD Alphanumeric Display Annunciator:<br />
2.5 BATTERIES<br />
1. The Alphanumeric Display Annunciator shall be a supervised, local or remotely<br />
located back-lit LCD display containing a minimum of eighty (80) characters for<br />
alarm annunciation in clear English text.<br />
2. The LCD Annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the<br />
system.<br />
3. The Annunciator shall connect to an EIA 485 interface.<br />
4. Up to 4 LCD annunciators may be connected to the interface, each with<br />
Acknowledge, Silence and Reset controls for the FACP.<br />
A. Shall be 12 volt, Gel-Cell type (two required).<br />
B. Battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than<br />
twenty-four hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure.<br />
C. The batteries are to be completely maintenance-free. No liquids are required. Fluid<br />
level checks refilling, spills and leakage shall not be required.<br />
PART 3 EXECUTION<br />
3.1 INSTALLATION<br />
A. Installation shall be in accordance with the NEC, NFPA 72, local and state codes, as<br />
shown on the drawings, and as recommended by the major equipment manufacturer.<br />
B. All conduit, junction boxes, conduit supports and hangers shall be concealed in<br />
finished areas and may be exposed in unfinished areas. Smoke detectors shall not be<br />
installed prior to the system programming and test period. If construction is on-going<br />
during this period, measures shall be taken to protect smoke detectors from<br />
contamination and physical damage.<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-14
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
C. All fire detection and alarm system devices, control panels and remote annunciators<br />
shall be flush mounted when located in finished areas and may be surface mounted<br />
when located in unfinished areas.<br />
3.2 TEST: Provide the service of a competent, factory-trained engineer or technician<br />
authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and<br />
participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system.<br />
1. Before energizing the cables and wires, check for correct connections and test for<br />
short circuits, ground faults, continuity, and insulation.<br />
2. Close each sprinkler system flow valve and verify proper supervisory alarm at the<br />
FACP.<br />
3. Verify activation of all flow switches.<br />
4. Open initiating device circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.<br />
5. Open and short signaling line circuits and verify that the trouble signal actuates.<br />
6. Open and short indicating appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates.<br />
7. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals.<br />
8. Check presence and audibility of tone at all alarm notification devices.<br />
9. Check installation, supervision, and operation of all intelligent smoke detectors using<br />
the Walk Test.<br />
10. Each of the alarm conditions that the system is required to detect should be<br />
introduced on the system. Verify the proper receipt and the proper processing of the<br />
signal at the FACP and the correct activation of the control points.<br />
11. When the system is equipped with optional features, the manufacturer's manual<br />
should be consulted to determine the proper testing procedures. This is intended to<br />
address such items as verifying controls performed by individually addressed or<br />
grounded devices, sensitivity monitoring, verification functionality and similar.<br />
3.3 FINAL INSPECTION: At the final inspection, a factory trained representative of the<br />
manufacturer of the major equipment shall demonstrate that the systems function properly<br />
in every respect.<br />
3.4 INSTRUCTION<br />
A. Provide instruction as required for operating the system. "Hands-on" demonstrations<br />
of the operation of all system components and the entire system including program<br />
changes and functions shall be provided.<br />
B. The Contractor and/or the Systems Manufacturer's representatives shall provide a<br />
typewritten "Sequence of Operation" to the Owner.<br />
END OF SECTION 16722<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-15
G.A.H.P<br />
Plaza Feliz<br />
SMALL FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16722-16
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
SECTION 116800 - PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES<br />
PART 1 - GENERAL<br />
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS<br />
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary<br />
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.<br />
1.2 SUMMARY<br />
A. Section includes freestanding and composite structure playground equipment.<br />
B. Related Sections:<br />
1. Division 32 Section "Playground Protective Surfacing" for protective surfacing under and<br />
around playground equipment.<br />
1.3 DEFINITIONS<br />
A. Fall Height: According to ASTM F 1487, "the vertical distance between a designated play<br />
surface and the protective surfacing beneath it."<br />
B. HDPE: High-density polyethylene.<br />
C. IPEMA: International Play Equipment Manufacturers Association.<br />
D. LLDPE: Linear low-density polyethylene.<br />
E. MDPE: Medium-density polyethylene.<br />
F. Use Zone: According to ASTM F 1487, the "area beneath and immediately adjacent to a play<br />
structure or equipment that is designated for unrestricted circulation around the equipment and<br />
on whose surface it is predicted that a user would land when falling from or exiting the<br />
equipment."<br />
1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.<br />
B. Shop Drawings: For playground equipment and structures. Include plans, elevations, sections,<br />
details, and attachments to other work.<br />
C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of playground equipment and structure indicated.<br />
1. Manufacturer's color charts.<br />
PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 116800 - 1
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2. Include similar Samples of playground equipment and accessories involving color<br />
selection.<br />
D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size<br />
indicated below.<br />
1. Posts and Rails: Not less than 6 inches long.<br />
2. Platforms: Not less than 6 inches square.<br />
3. Molded Plastic: Not less than 3 inches square.<br />
1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Coordination Drawings: Plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and<br />
coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:<br />
1. Extent of surface systems and use zones for equipment.<br />
2. Critical heights for playground surfaces and fall heights for equipment.<br />
B. Product Certificates: For each type of playground equipment, from manufacturer.<br />
C. Material Certificates: For the following items, signed by manufacturers:<br />
1. Shop finishes.<br />
2. Wood-Preservative Treatment: Include certification by treating plant that states type of<br />
preservative solution and pressure process used, net amount of preservative retained, and<br />
compliance with applicable standards.<br />
3. Recycled plastic.<br />
D. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified<br />
testing agency, for each type of playground equipment.<br />
E. Field quality-control reports.<br />
F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.<br />
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS<br />
A. Maintenance Data: For playground equipment and finishes to include in maintenance manuals.<br />
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE<br />
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm whose playground equipment components have been<br />
certified by IPEMA's third-party product certification service.<br />
1. Provide playground equipment and play structure components bearing the IPEMA<br />
Certification Seal.<br />
B. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers approved by manufacturer.<br />
PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 116800 - 2
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
C. Safety Standards: Provide playground equipment complying with or exceeding requirements in<br />
ASTM F 1487.<br />
1.8 WARRANTY<br />
A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or<br />
replace components of playground equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within<br />
specified warranty period.<br />
1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:<br />
a. Structural failures.<br />
b. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal<br />
weathering.<br />
2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.<br />
PART 2 - PRODUCTS<br />
2.1 MATERIALS<br />
A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish<br />
indicated.<br />
1. Extruded Bars, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.<br />
2. Cast Aluminum: ASTM B 179.<br />
3. Flat Sheet: ASTM B 209.<br />
B. Steel: Comply with the following:<br />
1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.<br />
2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M or ASTM A 135/A 135M standard-weight.<br />
3. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 513, cold formed.<br />
4. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.<br />
5. Perforated Metal: Steel sheet not less than 0.075-inch uncoated thickness; manufacturer's<br />
standard perforation pattern.<br />
6. Expanded Metal: Manufacturer's standard carbon-steel sheets complying with<br />
ASTM F 1267, Type II (expanded and flattened); deburred after expansion.<br />
7. Woven Wire Mesh: Manufacturer's standard, with wire complying with ASTM A 510.<br />
C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666; Type 304; finished on exposed<br />
faces with No. 2B finish.<br />
D. Opaque Plastic: Color impregnated, UV stabilized, and mold resistant.<br />
1. Polyethylene: Fabricated from virgin plastic resin; rotationally molded HDPE, LLDPE,<br />
or MDPE with not less than 1/4-inch wall thickness.<br />
PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 116800 - 3
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
E. Transparent Plastic: Abrasion-resistant, UV-stabilized monolithic polycarbonate sheet; clear,<br />
colorless; not less than 3/16 inch thick.<br />
F. Chain and Fittings: ASTM A 467/A 467M, Class CS, 4/0 or 5/0, welded-straight-link coil<br />
chain; hot-dip galvanized. With commercial-quality, hot-dip galvanized steel connectors and<br />
swing or ring hangers.<br />
G. Castings and Hangers: Malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, Grade 32510, hot-dip galvanized.<br />
H. Post Caps: Cast aluminum or color-impregnated, UV-stabilized, mold-resistant polyethylene or<br />
polypropylene; color to match posts.<br />
I. Platform Clamps and Hangers: Cast aluminum or zinc-plated steel, not less than 0.105-inchnominal<br />
thickness.<br />
J. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard; commercial-quality; corrosion-resistant; hot-dip<br />
galvanized steel and iron, stainless steel, or aluminum; of a secure and vandal-resistant design.<br />
K. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard; corrosion-resistant; hot-dip galvanized or plated steel and<br />
iron, or stainless steel; permanently capped, and theft resistant.<br />
2.2 PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT FABRICATION<br />
A. General: Provide sizes, strengths, thicknesses, wall thickness, and weights of components as<br />
indicated but not less than required to comply with structural performance and other<br />
requirements in ASTM F 1487. Factory drill components for field assembly. Unnecessary<br />
holes in components, not required for field assembly, are not permitted. Provide complete play<br />
structure, including supporting members and connections, means of access and egress,<br />
designated play surfaces, barriers, guardrails, handrails, handholds, and other components<br />
indicated or required to comply with referenced standards for equipment indicated.<br />
1. Composite Play Structure: Provide complete play structure, designed to be modular,<br />
linked, and expandable, forming one integral unit for more than one play activity.<br />
B. Metal Frame: Fabricate main-frame upright support posts from metal pipe or tubing with crosssection<br />
profile and dimensions as indicated. Unless otherwise indicated, provide each pipe or<br />
tubing main-frame member with manufacturer's standard drainable bottom plate or support<br />
flange. Fabricate secondary frame members, bracing, and connections from either steel or<br />
aluminum.<br />
C. Composite Frame: Fabricate main-frame upright support posts from metal and plastic with<br />
profile and dimensions as indicated. Fabricate secondary frame members, bracing, and<br />
connections from either steel or aluminum.<br />
D. Play Surfaces: Provide manufacturer's standard elevated drainable decks, platforms, landings,<br />
walkways, ramps, and similar transitional play surfaces, designed to withstand loads; fabricated<br />
from perforated or expanded metal made into floor units with slip-resistant foot surfaces.<br />
Fabricate units in manufacturer's standard modular sizes and shapes to form assembled play<br />
surfaces indicated.<br />
PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 116800 - 4
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
1. Elevated Play Surfaces: Provide protective devices, completely surrounding play surface<br />
except for access openings, if play-surface heights above protective surfacing exceed<br />
requirements in ASTM F 1487.<br />
2. Stepped Play Surfaces: Provide protective infill between stepped platforms.<br />
E. Protective Barriers: Fabricated such that openings within the barrier and between the barrier<br />
and the play surface preclude passage of the torso probe according to ASTM F 1487. Provide<br />
barriers designed to minimize the possibility of climbing, free of hand- and footholds, and<br />
configured to completely surround the protected area except for access openings. Extend<br />
barriers above the protected elevated surface for use by age group indicated. Fabricate from the<br />
following:<br />
1. Welded metal pipe or tubing with vertical bars.<br />
2. Steel sheet with openings for vision and ventilation.<br />
3. Metal-pipe or -tubing frame with wire mesh infill panels.<br />
4. Opaque plastic panels.<br />
F. Guardrails: Provide guardrails configured to completely surround the protected area except for<br />
access openings. Fabricate from welded metal pipe or tubing. Extend guardrails to comply<br />
with requirements for use by age group indicated.<br />
G. Handrails: Welded metal pipe or tubing, OD between 0.095 to 1.55 inches.<br />
1. Provide handrails at heights to comply with requirements for use by age group indicated<br />
according to ASTM F 1487.<br />
H. Roofs and Canopies: Manufacturer's standard, designed to be positioned overhead and to<br />
discourage and minimize climbing by users.<br />
1. Fabricated from metal or opaque plastic.<br />
I. Signs: Manufacturer's standard sign panels, fabricated from opaque plastic with graphics<br />
molded in, attached to upright support posts.<br />
2.3 FREESTANDING PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES<br />
A. Rocking/Springing Equipment Rocking rider.<br />
1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers<br />
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,<br />
the following:<br />
2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Playworld<br />
System #ZZXX0567 “Bumble Bee” and #ZZXX0565 “Lady Bug” or a comparable<br />
product by one of the following:<br />
a. American Swing Products Inc.<br />
b. BCI Burke Company, LLC.<br />
c. Big Toys, Inc.<br />
d. Blue Imp.<br />
e. Columbia Cascade Company.<br />
PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 116800 - 5
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
f. GameTime; a PlayCore company.<br />
g. Henderson Recreation Equipment Ltd.<br />
h. Kidstuff Playsystems, Inc.<br />
i. Kompan, Inc.<br />
j. Krauss Craft, Inc.<br />
k. Landscape Structures Inc.<br />
l. L. A. Steelcraft Products, Inc.<br />
m. Little Tikes Commercial, Inc; Playpower LT Farmington, Inc.<br />
n. Miracle Recreation Equipment Co.; a division of PlayPower, Inc.<br />
o. Play & Park Structures; a PlayCore company.<br />
p. Playland International, LLC; a division of Superior International Industries, Inc.<br />
q. Playworld Systems, Inc.<br />
r. PlayTown; a division of SportsPlay Equipment Inc.<br />
s. Recreation Creations, Inc.<br />
3. Seat(s): Molded HDPE or other plastic.<br />
a. Seat Style: Animal.<br />
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
4. Frame: Galvanized-steel pipe or tubing and one coil spring(s); two or more steel springs<br />
with steel base plate.<br />
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
5. Capacity: Single user(s).<br />
6. Age Appropriateness: Two through five years.<br />
2.4 COMPOSITE PLAYGROUND EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES<br />
A. Composite Structure: Assembled from manufacturer's standard modular-sized units.<br />
1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Landscape<br />
Structures “Playsense” Design 301 and 302. or a comparable product by one of the<br />
following:<br />
a. BCI Burke Company, LLC.<br />
b. Big Toys, Inc.<br />
c. Blue Imp.<br />
d. Columbia Cascade Company.<br />
e. GameTime; a PlayCore company.<br />
f. Henderson Recreation Equipment Ltd.<br />
g. Kidstuff Playsystems, Inc.<br />
h. Kompan, Inc.<br />
i. Krauss Craft, Inc.<br />
j. Landscape Structures Inc.<br />
k. Little Tikes Commercial, Inc; Playpower LT Farmington, Inc.<br />
l. Miracle Recreation Equipment Co.; a division of PlayPower, Inc.<br />
m. Play & Park Structures; a PlayCore company.<br />
n. Playland International, LLC; a division of Superior International Industries, Inc.<br />
o. Playworld Systems, Inc.<br />
PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 116800 - 6
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
p. PlayTown; a division of SportsPlay Equipment Inc.<br />
q. Recreation Creations, Inc.<br />
2. Frame: Galvanized-steel pipe or tubing frame sections connected with bolts clamps.<br />
a. Main Frame Posts: Not less than 4-inch OD.<br />
b. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
3. Platforms: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
4. Roofs: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.<br />
5. Play Structure Access Component(s): Ladder Stairs.<br />
a. Handholds: Handrails.<br />
6. Arrangement: Manufacturer's standard.<br />
7. Age Appropriateness: 5 through 12 years.<br />
2.5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE<br />
A. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-<br />
Place Concrete" to produce normal-weight, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive<br />
strength of 3000 psi, 3-inch slump, and 1-inch- maximum-size aggregate.<br />
B. Concrete Materials and Properties: Dry-packaged concrete mix complying with<br />
ASTM C 387/C 387M and mixed at site with potable water, according to manufacturer's written<br />
instructions, to produce normal-weight concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength<br />
of 3000 psi, 3-inch slump, and 1-inch- maximum-size aggregate.<br />
2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES<br />
A. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: A minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils, medium<br />
gloss. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion<br />
coating, and applying and baking finish.<br />
B. PVC Finish: Manufacturer's standard, UV-stabilized, mold-resistant, slip-resistant, mattetextured,<br />
dipped or sprayed-on, PVC-plastisol finish, with flame retardant added, complying<br />
with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, and minimum dry<br />
film thickness of 80 mils.<br />
PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 116800 - 7
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
2.7 IRON AND STEEL FINISHES<br />
A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanized products made from rolled-, pressed-, and forged-steel shapes,<br />
castings, plates, bars, and strips indicated to be galvanized to comply with<br />
ASTM A 123/A 123M.<br />
1. Hot-dip galvanized steel and iron hardware indicated to be galvanized to comply with<br />
ASTM A 153/A 153M.<br />
2. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Commercial steel sheet, hot-dip galvanized, complying with<br />
ASTM A 653/A 653M for not less than G60 coating designation; mill phosphatized.<br />
B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Immediately after cleaning and pretreating, apply<br />
manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting<br />
topcoat. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for applying and baking to<br />
achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.<br />
C. PVC Finish: Manufacturer's standard, UV-stabilized, mold-resistant, slip-resistant, mattetextured,<br />
dipped or sprayed-on, PVC-plastisol finish, with flame retardant added, complying<br />
with coating manufacturer's written instructions for pretreatment, application, and minimum dry<br />
film thickness of 80 mils.<br />
2.8 STAINLESS-STEEL FINISHES<br />
A. Surface Preparation: Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, or blend into finish.<br />
B. Bright, Cold-Rolled, Unpolished Finish: No. 2B.<br />
PART 3 - EXECUTION<br />
3.1 EXAMINATION<br />
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for site<br />
clearing, earthwork, site surface and subgrade drainage, and other conditions affecting<br />
performance of the Work.<br />
1. Do not begin installation before final grading required for placing protective surfacing is<br />
completed unless otherwise permitted by Architect.<br />
B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.<br />
3.2 PREPARATION<br />
A. Verify locations of playground perimeter and pathways. Verify that playground layout and<br />
equipment locations comply with requirements for each type and component of equipment.<br />
PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 116800 - 8
G.A.H.P. Plaza Feliz<br />
3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL<br />
A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions unless more stringent<br />
requirements are indicated. Anchor playground equipment securely, positioned at locations and<br />
elevations indicated.<br />
1. Maximum Equipment Height: Coordinate installed heights of equipment and<br />
components with finished elevations of protective surfacing. Set equipment so fall<br />
heights and elevation requirements for age group use and accessibility are within required<br />
limits. Verify that playground equipment elevations comply with requirements for each<br />
type and component of equipment.<br />
B. Post and Footing Excavation: Excavate holes for posts and footings as indicated in firm,<br />
undisturbed or compacted subgrade soil.<br />
C. Post Set on Subgrade: Level bearing surfaces with drainage fill to required elevation.<br />
D. Post Set with Concrete Footing: Comply with ACI 301 for measuring, batching, mixing,<br />
transporting, forming, and placing concrete.<br />
1. Set equipment posts in concrete footing. Protect portion of posts above footing from<br />
concrete splatter. Verify that posts are set plumb or at the correct angle, alignment,<br />
height, and spacing.<br />
a. Place concrete around posts and vibrate or tamp for consolidation. Hold posts in<br />
position during placement and finishing operations until concrete is sufficiently<br />
cured.<br />
2. Embedded Items: Use setting drawings and manufacturer's written instructions to ensure<br />
correct installation of anchorages for equipment.<br />
3. Concrete Footings: Smooth top, and shape to shed water.<br />
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL<br />
A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.<br />
B. Perform tests and inspections.<br />
1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to<br />
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and<br />
to assist in testing.<br />
C. Tests and Inspections: For playground and playground equipment and components during<br />
installation and at final completion and to certify compliance with ASTM F 1487.<br />
D. Prepare test and inspection reports.<br />
E. Notify Architect 48 hours in advance of date and time of final inspection.<br />
END OF SECTION 116800<br />
PLAY FIELD EQUIPMENT AND STRUCTURES 116800 - 9